JP2020175243A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress decline of a game interest.SOLUTION: A game machine for performing a lottery of winning or not based on satisfaction of a lottery condition, and for controlling to be in a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the lottery is a winning includes: first light emitting means capable of representing a predetermined light emitting mode by being light-emission controlled in units of predetermined number; a first circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted; second light emitting means capable of representing a predetermined light emitting mode by being light-emission controlled, individually; and a second light emitting means on which the second light emitting means is mounted. A white coating film is formed on the mounting surface on which the first light emitting means of the first circuit board is mounted, and a dark coating film is formed on the mounting surface on which the second light emitting means of the second circuit board is mounted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 314

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that executes a variation effect on a display device is provided with a plurality of light emitting means whose light emission is controlled in relation to the variation effect performed by the variation effect. These plurality of light emitting means are controlled to emit light in units of a plurality of light emitting means or a single light emitting means, so that the fluctuation effect can be excited and various information can be notified.

JP-A-2018-126613

In such a game machine, since the light emission performed by a plurality of light emitting means units shows a planar light emitting mode over a wide range, no problem occurs even if the light emitted by the individual light emitting means interferes, but a single number. Or, since the light emitted by a small number of light emitting means units shows a granular light emitting mode in a narrow range, if each light emission cannot be clearly seen, an effective light emitting effect cannot be performed and the game interest is reduced. There is a risk of causing it.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to suppress a decline in the interest in playing games.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are shown below. The action and the like will be explained as necessary. Further, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are appropriately shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and controls a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery is a win.
A first light emitting means capable of expressing a predetermined decoration by light emission by a plurality of light emitting bodies capable of emitting light in a group unit, and
The first circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted and
A second light emitting means capable of expressing the result of the lottery by light emission by a plurality of light emitting bodies capable of emitting light individually, and
A second circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted is provided.
A white coating film is formed on the surface mounting surface of the first circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted.
A dark coating film made of green or black is formed on the surface mounting surface of the second circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted.
Further, a partition portion for partitioning the surface mounting surface of the second circuit board is provided so as to correspond to the light emitting region of each of the plurality of light emitting bodies constituting the second light emitting means.
A white specific region portion different from the dark color coating film is partially formed on the surface mounting surface of the second circuit board, and at least a part of the specific region portion is partitioned by the partition portion. It is characterized in that it is located within the area.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in gaming.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked at from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front and bottom. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A) to (c) are explanatory views which show the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the rear lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 101 (a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame is distributed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board in which the front component, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made opaque in the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front component, the game panel, the front unit and the like are transparent. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball circulates, and the obstacle nail by cutting the table unit parallel to the surface of a game panel. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a perspective view. The left side view of the start port unit (d) is the left side view of the side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning opening in an open state. It is an enlarged front view which shows the part of the start port unit and the side unit in a game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the first attacker unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st prize winning door in the 1st attacker unit from the left side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in the 1st attacker unit in the cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit. Is a perspective view seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in the 2nd attacker unit and the side right middle unit in cross section. FIG. 115 is an enlarged explanatory view of a right portion in the game area in FIG. 115. It is a perspective view of the back unit in a game board as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which enlarges the upper left corner of the game board with the door frame transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-rear effect unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-rear effect unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of the back-rear effect unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back-back effect unit. It is a front view which shows the back-rear movable decorative body together with the back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 142, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 142. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the movable decorative body after the back and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the movable decorative body after the back and looked at from the back. It is the front view which shows the part of the movable decorative body after the back enlarged. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate by the broken line in the front view of FIG. 147. (A) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body of (a), and (c). ) Is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate at the same portion as the decorative body of (a). FIG. 3 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143 (a). It is an exploded view which shows the sectional view of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges a part of the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body, and shows the relationship between the decoration by a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide emitting plate and the back-rear decorative substrate in the portion of the first LED in a cross section, and (b) is an explanatory view in which the second LED is located on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the light guide radiating plate in the part from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and the 1st LED of a back-rear decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement example of. It is a front view which shows by enlarging a part of the back-rear decorative substrate together with the copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of the back-rear decorative substrate, and (b) is a rear view of the back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form different from that of (a). FIG. 6C is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form further different from that of (a) and (b). (A) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the back-rear movable decoration body of the second embodiment different from the back-rear movable decoration body of FIG. 142 in cross section, and (b) is the back-rear movable decoration body of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of this in the cross section, and (c) is the explanatory view which shows the structure of the back-rear movable decorative body of 4th Embodiment by the cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a rear view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left effect unit and the lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left effect unit and the lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back lower middle lifting mechanism of the back lower middle production unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back lower middle lifting mechanism of the back lower middle production unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the under-back middle decoration unit of the under-back middle effect unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view of the under-back middle decoration unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating and lowering of the back lower middle decorative body unit by the back lower middle elevating mechanism in the back lower middle production unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the configuration related to the rotation of the back lower middle decorative body unit in the back lower middle effect unit from the front, and (b) is the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship with each detection sensor in a table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement of LED of the back lower middle decoration unit in the back lower middle production unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating decoration unit in the back-up effect unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotation decoration body in the back-up effect unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the elevating mechanism of the back-up elevating decoration unit in the back-up effect unit from the front, and (b) is the back-up elevating decoration with the back-up elevating decoration unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating mechanism of a body unit and the rotating mechanism of a back-up and rear rotation decorative body from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decorative substrate from the front in the state which moved the back-up elevating decorative body unit to the appearance position in the back-up effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back left production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative body unit viewed from the front by disassembling the back rear left decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left production unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back left production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative body unit viewed from the front by disassembling the back rear right decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative unit of the back rear right effect unit as viewed from behind by disassembling it. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back right production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear right decorative body unit in the back rear right production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit disassembled and seen from the back. (A) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state. (A) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right production unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right production unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the open state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit from the evacuation position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the rotating ornament body under the back of the middle under the back effect unit is moved from the lower position to the upper position. The back-up-back effect unit's back-up-back-rotating decoration is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-back-left effect unit's back-back-left-rotating ornament is moved from the back-up position to the first appearance position, and the back-back-right effect unit is back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the rear right rotation ornament body moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. The state in which the back-rear left-rotating decorative body of the back-rear left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear-right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is a front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively. The back-back movable decorative body of the back-back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body of the back-up and rear-effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the back-back-left effect unit is back-back and left-rotated. From the evacuation position to the first appearance position, from the back rear right effect unit to the back rear right rotation decoration unit from the evacuation position to the first appearance position, and from the back lower middle effect unit to the back lower middle rotation decoration unit from the descending position. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state of being moved to each position. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting member. It is a front perspective view (a) and the rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided in the main body frame. It is a figure (a)-(c) which prevents the solder bridge of each terminal of a drawer connector (concave type) of a main body frame side, and is a small DIP type connector which is electrically connected to a drawer connector (concave type) of a main body frame side. It is a figure (d)-(f) which prevents the solder bridge of each terminal of. It is a figure (a) which shows the modification of FIG. 209 (c), and is the figure (b) which shows the modification of FIG. 209 (f). It is a figure which shows the modification which forms the terminal of a final stage and a solder relief pattern separated by a predetermined distance. It is the schematic (a) of the over resist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame side, and is the schematic (b) of the cross section of the X-ray line in (a). It is the schematic (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which a surface mount type connector is mounted, and is the schematic (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate. It is a continuation of FIG. 213, is an enlarged view of part A of FIG. 213 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an overresist applied to a housing fixing land of a surface mount type connector, in FIG. It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of the YY line. It is the schematic (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface mount type connector in the modification is mounted, and is the schematic (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate. It is a continuation of FIG. 215, is an enlarged view of a portion B of FIG. 215 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an overresist applied to a housing fixing land of a surface mount type connector, in FIG. It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit. It is a figure which shows the shape of the betta land in the part where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib part formed in the base body is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board, and is the copper foil of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board. It is the schematic (a) of the surface, and is the schematic (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board. It is a figure which shows the shape of the resist with respect to the land when flowing the peripheral control board into a solder bath. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of XX line of FIG. 224 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 224 is a view taken along the arrow A of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 224 is a view taken along the arrow A of FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. Taking out the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board according to the third embodiment to improve the contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side and the conductive elastic member. It is a figure which shows the method, is the schematic view of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board (bare example (a)), and the schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board (bare example (b)). , Schematic diagram of the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), and schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (through having lands). This is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mounting procedure of the peripheral control board and the like which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure (a) which shows the land formed around the through hole on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and the figure (b) which shows a foil removal area. The figure (a) showing the land formed around the through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board and the like according to the fourth embodiment, the figure (b) showing the land and the screwing designation symbol, the foil removing area. It is a figure (c) which shows. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 5th Embodiment. FIG. (A) showing a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and a part of the base body constituting the peripheral control unit so that the state in which the conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen. It is a figure (b) which shows a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit cut out by the CL line in (a). A rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut out so that the state in which the conductive elastic member is pressed against the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and deformed can be seen, which is a continuation of FIG. 238. It is a figure (c) which shows a part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a front portion of a cover body constituting a peripheral control unit having an opening through which the tip of the contact probe according to the fifth embodiment can be inserted and brought into contact with the contact probe. Taking out the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific substrate according to the fifth embodiment and the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific substrate that improves the contact between the conductive elastic member. It is a figure which shows the method, is the schematic view of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (bare example (a)), and the schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (bare example (b)). , A schematic view of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), and a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through having lands). This is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front perspective view of a flexible flat cable. FIG. 3A is a diagram showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device, and is a diagram showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the liquid crystal output board (FIG. b), which is a partially enlarged view of part B shown in (a) and part C shown in (b), showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to each connector through a notch. FIG. 3C. FIG. 5A is a diagram showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is not normally electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device, and the flexible flat cable is electrically normally connected to the connector of the liquid crystal output board. It is a figure (b) which shows the absence state. It is a figure (a) which shows the arrangement of the connector of a relay board, is a figure (b) which shows the state which the connector of a wiring and a harness is normally connected to the connector of a relay board, and is a figure (b) with respect to the connector of a relay board. It is a figure (c) which shows the state which the connector of a wiring and a harness is not connected normally. FIG. 245 is a modification of FIG. 245, which is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of the connector of the relay board and the arrangement line of the component parts, and shows a state in which the wiring and the connector of the harness are normally connected to the connector of the relay board. FIG. 3B is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring or harness connector is not normally connected to the connector of the relay board. It is a partial perspective view (a) of the game board which explains the area to attach the wiring groove, and is the figure (b) which shows the state which the wiring groove which concerns on 1st Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of a game board. FIG. 247 is a continuation of FIG. 247, which is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the wiring groove which concerns on 1st Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of a game board, and the game board is seen from the back. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the wiring groove which concerns on 1st Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of the game board, and the game board is seen from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the wiring groove which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of the game board, and the game board is seen from the back. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the wiring groove which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of the game board, and the game board is seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the light emitting production unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the light emitting production unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the light emitting effect unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the light emitting effect unit and looked at from the back. It is a front view which shows the arrangement relationship of the LED bare chip and a light guide plate. It is a front view which shows the diffusion sheet arranged on the surface of a light guide plate. It is a figure (a) which shows the state which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected with the connector of an LED board, and is the enlarged view of the Z part shown in (a), and the difference of a flexible flat cable to the connector of an LED board. It is a figure (b) which shows the state which the insertion is normal, and is the enlarged view of the Z part shown in (a), and is the figure which shows the abnormal state which the insertion of a flexible flat cable into a connector of an LED board is insufficient. (C). It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided in a door frame. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D part of FIG. 263. It is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. It is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D'part of FIG. 265, the D ″ part of FIG. 266, or the D ″ part of FIG. 270. It is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D ″ part of FIG. 268. It is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. It is a method of arranging a surface display unit that can identify a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of a decorative substrate and LEDs corresponding to each of them. It is a schematic diagram which shows the case of (No. 1) (b), the case of centralized arrangement (No. 2) (c), and the case of distributed arrangement (No. 2) (d), respectively. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the magnetic sensor and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the magnetic sensor and looked at from the back. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 274. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 280. It is the flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing for big hits, (B) is a big hit symbol symbol determination table used for lottery processing for big hit types, and (C) is a small hit symbol. It is a small hit symbol symbol determination table used for lottery processing about a kind. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) It is a time chart which shows the control state at the time of driving a movable decoration body, and (B) is a time chart which shows the control state at the time of driving a movable decoration body in a modification. It is a time chart which shows the control state at the time of driving a movable ornament. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect which makes the movable decorative body appear in front of the effect display device. It is a time chart which shows the control state at the time of a player participation type production. It is a side view which shows typically the light from the light emitting decoration which is in the standby position when the pachinko machine is seen from the side. It is a side view which shows typically the light from the light emitting ornament at the appearance position when the pachinko machine is seen from the side. It is a figure which shows the back-rear decorative substrate provided with a plurality of holes. It is a front view which shows the light emitting region on the back side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the light emitting area on the side surface side which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which shows the light emitting area on the side surface side which looked at the game board from the left rear. It is a figure which shows the opening provided on the back surface side of the effect display device. FIG. 9 is an enlarged schematic view showing a part of a cross section cut along the line CC of FIG. 99 (a). It is a front view of the game board in the modification. (A) is a front perspective view of the dot matrix display, (B) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (A), and (C) and (D) are front views of the substrate in the modified example. is there. It is a time chart which shows the control state of a dot matrix display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display content of a dot matrix display. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the positional relationship between an acoustic decorative substrate, the left and right through holes, and a reflective sheet. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the position where the light emitted from the pachinko machine installed on the game island can be visually recognized. It is a detailed view of the main control unit in a game board. It is a figure for demonstrating the signal path at the time of detection of a handle touch sensor. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command-related processing at the time of launch permission executed in the peripheral control part steady processing. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of a pachinko machine while changing the setting of a set value. It is a time chart which shows the deformation example of the behavior of a pachinko machine while changing the setting of a set value. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ball count processing executed by the timer interrupt processing of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect-related processing executed in the peripheral control part steady processing. This is a concrete example of the setting suggestion effect when the normal execution pattern is selected. This is a specific example of the setting suggestion effect when the restriction execution patterns A and B are selected. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position as viewed from the front right. is there. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be seen from the player side through the door frame 3 It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. It is attached to the rear surface of the plate-shaped game panel 1100 which is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, the board holder 1200 which is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of golden obstacle nails N (brass is used in the present embodiment) that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. , General winning opening 2001, first start opening 2002, gate portion 2003, second start that grants a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with a mouth 2004, a first prize opening 2005, and a second prize opening 2006. The golden obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. , It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

Further, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the back-back effect unit 3100 and the back bottom. Left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, back front right production It is possible to entertain the player by causing a light emitting effect, a movable effect, or the like to be performed by the unit 3800 or the like.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontally extending portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the notch 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends from the front side of the mounting portion 24a to the left with a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly as viewed from the front by disassembling. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent the pinching.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, stands out, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The vertical wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. Then, when the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a, and extending downward from the edge of the front extending portion 51b from the left side to the front side and the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is columnar and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screws (not shown). It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by screws (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Hereinafter, a frame body composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may be referred to as a “front frame”.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game of driving into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, penetrate the front and rear of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h, which is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length of the tubular portion 102a in the axial direction and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. , And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and various substrates of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it is behind a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 112 are vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper side and the lower side of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a, and the ball feeding member 143 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 as a partition between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that projects forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation paddle 146 is centered on the right end. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b, which is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b extending upward. A transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation paddle 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 206) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball pulling member 143 or the weight portion 143d which are rotatably supported by the shaft. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b under the normal state, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b to move the operation transmission unit 242b downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It can be prevented from bouncing off at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35B and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when a fraudulent act such as operating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b by the momentum, and then a V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the shape, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit 200. A full tank receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the ball passage 150a and the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. It has a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives the game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. The ball discharge port 150d is provided so as to discharge the ball forward and communicate with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the actuating protrusion 613a of 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and the like. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of the flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and the flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof projects downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 that is attached to the handle base 181 and a plurality of LEDs that are attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). The handle decorative substrate 184 is provided, and a transparent handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the handle decorative substrate 184 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the one end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, in a state where the three groove portions 181c are aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is rounded forward and is formed transparently. An inner lens 185a three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member is attached to the back surface of the handle cover 185 and inside the handle cover 185. The surface of the inner lens 185a is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the surface of the handle decorative substrate 184 arranged behind the inner lens 185a ( It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the mounting surface). A lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the inner lens 185a (may be formed into a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be applied to the back surface instead of the front surface of the inner lens 185a. It may be formed (it may be formed into a polyhedron). The handle cover 185 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184. The front surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the front surface and the back surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut. It may be formed into a polyhedron (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the handle cover 185 may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting by the player is detected and the handle 182 or the like of the player is subjected to the static electricity. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 determines. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before the single-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and projecting forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. ing. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For the ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The entire dish unit 200 bulges forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center on the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes rearward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 46). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls), the game ball The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and opens the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. A unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball, is provided.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (a shallow rear is open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. Penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. The handle insertion port 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted through the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the plate ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 is retracted rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes a door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish lower left decorative board 283, and a dish lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The rear surface of the dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211 when it is attached to the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (not shown). After inserting cash or a prepaid card for (omitted), a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent out into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, or the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed. The purpose is to return the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine after deducting the amount of the loaned game ball B, and to adjust the volume related to the production to a large or small level.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged to the right of the withdrawal button 222 and has translucency, and a ball lending operation base 223 that is lower right of the upper plate ball lending button 222 on the upper surface of the base portion 221. The volume up button 226 arranged at the lower left of the above, the volume down button 227 arranged below the volume up button 226 on the upper surface of the base portion 221 and the ball arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. It includes a lending button 224, a return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223. ing.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player presses it (the distance dimension that the upper plate ball pulling button 222 moves downward when the player presses it). The pressing operation unit of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a (lead type) can be pushed slightly downward to turn on the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, while the player releases the pressing operation. By doing so, the ball lending button 224 moves to the upper original position, the pressing operation unit of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a returns upward, and the ball lending button tactile switch 224a can be turned off. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player presses it (the distance dimension is such that the upper plate ball removal button 222 moves downward when the player presses it. The pressing operation unit of the return button tactile switch 225a (lead type) can be pushed slightly downward to turn on the return button tactile switch 225a, while the player releases the pressing operation. The return button 225 moves to the upper original position, the pressing operation unit of the return button tactile switch 225a returns upward, and the return button tactile switch 225a can be turned off. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs (lead type), and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume up button 226 is formed in a triangular shape, is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces upward, and is slightly moved downward by the player's pressing operation (pressed by the player). It is smaller than the distance dimension that the upper plate ball pulling button 222 moves downward by operation.) The pressing operation part of the tactile switch 226a (surface mount type) for the volume up button is pushed slightly downward for the volume up button. While the tactile switch 226a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume up button 226 moves to the original position above and the pressing operation unit of the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button returns upward. The tactile switch 226a for the volume up button can be turned off. The volume down button 227 is formed in a triangular shape, is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces downward, and is slightly moved downward by the player's pressing operation (pressed by the player). It is smaller than the distance dimension that the upper plate ball removal button 222 moves downward by operation.) The pressing operation part of the tactile switch 227a (surface mount type) for the volume down button is pushed slightly downward for the volume down button. While the tactile switch 227a can be turned on, the volume down button 227 moves to the upper original position when the player releases the pressing operation, and the pressing operation unit of the volume down button tactile switch 227a returns upward. The tactile switch 227a for the volume down button can be turned off.

The tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. It is electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. On the other hand, the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. , The drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later) without going through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. Peripheral control unit 1500 (controls the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side via the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, and the like provided in the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, which will be described later. It is electrically connected to a peripheral control board 1510) which can be described later. The ball lending board 228 and the volume control board 229 are housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 in a state of being adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220.

In this way, the ball rental button 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220 on which the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted are electrically connected. The volume control board 229 and the electric volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220 on which the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button, and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted. The door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side connected to is a completely different relay board, and in various relay boards on the door frame 3 side, the ball rental button tactile switch 224a and the return button tactile The signal transmission path for the switch 225a and the three 7-segment LEDs and the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are not mixed in the same relay board. .. This is because the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs is the so-called main signal transmission path, so the door on the door frame 3 side. The signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is a so-called main signal transmission path, whereas the configuration is such that the frame main relay board 104 is used. Therefore, the configuration is such that the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side is used.

On the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental board 228, the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the pad, through hole, land, etc. to which the three 7-segment LEDs are soldered are excluded. In the entire area, a green resist layer is formed by a green coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid green resist") formed by applying a green resist solution. On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball rental board 228, a solid green color is applied to the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the area where the connector (lead type) not shown is mounted is soldered. A green resist layer is formed by the resist. Further, on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental board 228, although not shown, the surfaces of the mounted ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and three 7-segment LEDs and the like are mounted. Attributes of the surface side electronic component such as the part number of the surface side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the side electronic component (furthermore, the shape of the surface side electronic component and the size of the surface side electronic component). The front side notation part indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component and the model of the front side electronic component may be included) is solidly painted with a white paint that is easily noticeable with respect to green. It is printed by silk printing on a green resist. On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball rental board 228, although not shown, the component numbers of the back surface side electronic components and the back surface side electronic components are arranged in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as the connector (surface mount type). Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position to be used (Furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component The notation on the back side indicating (may be included) is a white paint that is easily noticeable with respect to green, and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist.

On the other hand, on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229, the pad, through hole, land, etc. to which the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are soldered are excluded. A white resist layer is formed over the entire area by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by applying a white resist solution. On the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the volume control board 229, the area where the connector (not shown) is mounted is white except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc., which are white with a solid white resist. A resist layer is formed. Further, on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229, although not shown, the vicinity of the surface side electronic components such as the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted. In addition, the attributes of the surface-side electronic component such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electron The surface side notation, which indicates the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the component and the model of the electronic component on the surface side, is a solid white color with a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable than white. It is printed by silk printing on the resist of. Although not shown, the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the volume control board 229 is an area indicating the component number of the back surface side electronic component and the position where the back surface side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic component such as a connector. Attribute of the back side electronic component such as (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist.

As described above, the colors of the resist liquids applied to the ball lending substrate 228 and the volume control substrate 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 in a state of being adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220 are different. Explaining this, the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs is, as described above, the so-called main signal transmission path. Therefore, the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. Electrically with the ball lending machine (for example, CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. While they are connected, the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is not the so-called main signal transmission path as described above. The tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220, and are mounted on the door frame 3 side. The drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (front unit 2000 or back unit 3000 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later) without going through the door frame sub-relay board 105 and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. Peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (periphery described later that can control the progress of the effect) via the effect drive board 1720 (described later) that drives the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in It is electrically connected to the control board 1510).

That is, in the present embodiment, the volume is electrically connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 (the peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. The adjustment board 229 and the ball lending board 228 electrically connected to the ball lending machine (for example, CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1 are adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pachinko machine 1. The volume control board 229 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, whereas the ball rental board 228 is coated with a green resist solution different from white. Since the green coating film is formed, the operator who makes the wiring connection is electrically connected to the volume control board 229 using the color of the coating film formed in this way (that is, the color of the resist) as a mark. It is possible to contribute to the prevention of erroneous connection between the wiring and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228. Therefore, it can contribute to the prevention of erroneous connection of wiring.

Further, on the volume control board 229, a tactile switch 226a for a volume up button that allows the player to greatly adjust the volume related to the production and a tactile switch for the volume down button that allows the player to adjust the volume related to the production small. 227a is mounted, and the detection result (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) by the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. It is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 on the side (peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progress of the effect, which will be described later), and the player can request the ball lending board 228 to pay out the game ball B by ball lending. Tactile switch 224a for ball lending button, tactile switch 225a for return button that can request the ball lending machine (for example, CR unit) to return cash or prepaid card, cash put into the ball lending machine Three 7-segment LEDs that can display the remaining amount of the prepaid card are mounted, and the detection result by the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button and the tactile switch 225a for the return button (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) ) Is transmitted to the ball lending machine (for example, CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1. By transmitting the drive signal from the ball rental machine (for example, CR unit) to the ball rental board 228, the ball rental display unit composed of the three 7-segment LEDs mounted on the ball rental board 228 can be used for ball rental. While the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the machine is displayed, the volume is adjusted from the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the production) on the game board 5 side. No drive signal is output to the board 229, and the volume control board 229 is based on the drive signal from the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side. No electronic components that make up the displayed display unit are mounted. In this way, the path of the player's operation position is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. And, because there is a path transmitted to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1, it is electrically connected to the volume control board 229. If the wiring and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 are erroneously connected, an unintended disadvantage may occur to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that a white resist solution is applied to the ball rental substrate 228 to form a white coating film, and a green resist solution different from white is applied to the ball rental substrate 228. By forming a green coating film to be formed, erroneous connection is prevented.

Further, while surface mount type electronic components are used as the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a mounted on the volume control board 229, they are mounted on the ball rental board 228. Since the electronic components of the lead type are used for the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs, the type of electronic component (lead type or surface mount) mounted on the board. Based on one of the types), it is possible to distinguish between the wiring electrically connected to the volume control board 229 and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228. It can contribute to the prevention of erroneous connection.

By the way, although the light reflectance is highest in white and low in dark color, as described above, a white resist liquid is applied to the volume control substrate 229 without a display unit to form a white coating film. On the other hand, the ball rental substrate 228 provided with the ball rental display unit is coated with a dark green resist liquid to form a green coating film. As a result, the efficiency with which the light emitted by the ball rental display unit is reflected on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental substrate 228 is reduced so as not to interfere with the production by the production device excluding the ball rental display unit. Can be done. In the present embodiment, green is adopted as the dark color, but purple or black may be used instead of green.

In the present embodiment, the ball rental board 228 is a ball rental machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. While electrically connected to (for example, a CR unit), the volume control board 229 does not go through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. , Drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the effect described later to drive the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later. Electrically with the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control board 1510 described later that can control the progress of the effect) via the drive board 1720) and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. It is connected. That is, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 exist on the door frame 3 side. Therefore, the same color as the resist liquid applied to the ball rental board 228 is adopted for the front surface (surface) of the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, and the green resist liquid is applied. A green coating is formed, and the same color as the resist liquid applied to the volume control board 229 is used for the front surface (surface) of the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. , It is preferable that a white resist solution is applied to form a white coating film. The white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is more brittle than the green coating film formed by applying the green resist solution, and is a single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base). When a plurality of substrates are arranged from (material) and cut out for manufacturing, they may be cracked or torn.

By the way, when manufacturing a substrate, as described above, since a plurality of substrates are arranged and cut out from one standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material), the color of the silk paint and the resist liquid are used. The same color will be produced, and a plurality of substrates having the same color will be manufactured. Therefore, for example, it may be possible to determine whether or not the substrate is manufactured from the same standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) by examining the white substrate, and the white substrate has a defect. When it is found, when confirming another defect, it is sufficient to first trace (find out) the other white substrates one by one and investigate, which has the advantage of contributing to the early detection of the defect.

The volume adjustment operation for greatly adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume up button 226 or decreasing the volume related to the effect based on the volume down button 227 is performed for a certain period of time (for example, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on). Variable display for a certain period from the time until the peripheral control MPU (hereinafter, for those having the function of the peripheral control MPU, it may be referred to as "peripheral control IC" instead of the peripheral control MPU) is activated. It may be always executable by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) except for one or both of the special symbols before and after the stop, or the customer waiting state. The peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) can be executed only when specific conditions such as the period during which the effect display device 1600 is demonstrating by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) are satisfied. It may be one. In addition, the volume adjustment result based on the volume adjustment operation such as greatly adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume up button 226 or adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume down button 227 to be small is immediately adjusted to the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral). The control IC) may be reflected, or the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) may be delayed from the volume adjustment operation timing depending on the situation (whether or not the fluctuation is being displayed, the progress of the production, etc.). It may be reflected.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine having a plurality of substrates has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0047] and FIG. 5). However, among the plurality of substrates, they are adjacent to each other. In the case of being arranged in, the person performing the wiring connection work may erroneously connect the wiring that is electrically connected to one board and the wiring that is electrically connected to the other board.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231 and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 projects upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward so that the game ball B can pass through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a. A game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a ball-extracting taxiway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It includes an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball pulling button 222 is positioned at the upward moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached to the entire surface of the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate main body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a supplies the lower plate ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front surfaces of each. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer circumference of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h, which penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and the pair of upper side bulging portions 252a which are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removing lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removing hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removing lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical transparent dish upper left decorative body 271 that extends to the left and right, a transparent dish upper left inner lens 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, and a dish upper left inner lens. It is provided with a dish upper left decorative substrate 273 which is attached to the rear side of the lens 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”).

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, giving the shape that the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed transparently. The front surface of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate may be lens-cut. It may be formed into a polyhedron (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The upper left inner lens 272 of the dish is inserted into the upper left decorative body 271 of the dish from the rear. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left decorative substrate 273 of the plate are surface-mounted type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and by emitting light, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate can be luminescently decorated. .. The inner lens 272 on the upper left of the plate is formed transparently. The surface of the upper left inner lens 272 of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the upper left decoration of the dish is arranged behind the inner lens 272 on the upper left of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 273. A lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the dish upper left inner lens 272 (may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the dish upper left inner lens 272, the back surface may be formed. It may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The left end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical transparent dish upper right decorative body 276, a transparent dish upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right inner lens. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the lens 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”).

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulge 252a. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape that the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the dish is formed transparently. The front surface of the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate may be lens-cut. It may be formed into a polyhedron (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The dish upper right inner lens 277 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper right decorative substrate 278 of the plate are surface-mounted type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and by emitting light, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate can be luminescently decorated. .. The inner lens 277 on the upper right of the plate is formed transparently. The surface of the upper right inner lens 277 of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the upper right decoration of the dish is arranged behind the inner lens 277 on the upper right of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 278. The front surface and the back surface of the upper right inner lens 277 of the dish may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface of the inner lens 277 on the upper right of the dish may be replaced with a lens cut. It may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 is projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3. It is possible to form a step in which the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate are raised from the upper side bulging portion 252a. As a result, the player can hook his / her finger on the step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right dish 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right dish 275, respectively. Be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285, in cooperation with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left decorative unit 280 is a semi-cylindrical, transparent lower left decorative body 281 that extends to the left and right, a transparent lower left inner lens 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish, and an inner lower left dish. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283 which is attached to the rear side of the lens 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”).

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view, and is on the left side. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a semicircle that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed transparently. The front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate may be lens-cut. It may be formed into a polyhedron (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower left inner lens 282 of the dish is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish from the rear. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated. .. The lower left inner lens 282 of the dish is formed transparently. The surface of the lower left inner lens 282 of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the lower left decoration of the dish is arranged behind the lower left inner lens 282 of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 283. A lens cut may be applied to the front surface and the back surface of the lower left inner lens 282 of the plate (may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the lower left inner lens 282 of the plate, the back surface may be formed. It may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical transparent lower right decorative body 286 extending to the left and right, and a transparent lower right inner lens 287 attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286. , The lower right decorative substrate 288 of the dish, which is attached to the rear side of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). , Is equipped.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right and rear at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed transparently. The front surface of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate may be lens-cut. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish may be provided with a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). ..

The lower right inner lens 287 of the dish is inserted into the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish from the rear. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are surface-mounted type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is luminescently decorated. Can be done. The lower right inner lens 287 of the dish is formed transparently. The surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the dish is placed behind the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 288. It may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or it may be lens-cut on the front surface and the back surface of the lower right inner lens 287 of the dish (on the polyhedron). It may be formed), and the back surface of the inner lens 287 at the lower right of the dish may be cut in place of the front surface (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate emits light. The entire front surface of the can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a transparent central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and the outer periphery and the rotation operation unit of the central pressing operation unit 303a. It is composed of a transparent annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference of 302.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes an operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. The transparent dish center upper inner lens 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and the dish center upper inner lens 313 mounted on the rear side and can irradiate light forward. A dish center upper decorative substrate 314 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a transparent dish center lower inner lens 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a dish center lower inner lens. It includes a dish center lower decorative substrate 316, which is mounted on the rear side of the 315 and on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in the shape of a semicircle at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a transparent dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semicircle protruding forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is provided with a transparent dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a semicircular shape protruding forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is transparently formed.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The inner lens 313 on the center of the dish is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish, and is forward (outside) on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). ) Are mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light. The front surface of the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface of the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the back surface may be lens-cut. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish may be provided with a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). ..

The inner lens 313 on the center of the dish is transparently formed. The surface of the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and is located below (or behind) the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish to be arranged. The front surface and the back surface of the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish may be formed on the back surface instead of the front surface. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The inner lens 315 below the center of the dish is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from behind into the decorative body 312b below the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and is forward (outside) on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward) are mounted. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light. The front surface of the under-center decorative body 312b may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front and back surfaces of the under-center decorative body 312b may be lens-cut. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the dish center lower decorative body 312b may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). ..

The inner lens 315 below the center of the dish is formed transparently. The surface of the inner lens 315 below the center of the dish is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and is located below (or behind) the inner lens 315 below the center of the dish. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the dish to be arranged. The front surface and the back surface of the inner lens 315 below the center of the dish may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the inner lens 315 below the center of the dish may be formed on the back surface instead of the front surface. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semi-arc shape, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower upper decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right of the plate. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part and has translucency (for example, milky white).

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. It includes a portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from below, and the portion on the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a transparent rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably attached around the axis extending vertically to the ring mounting base 331 in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and the rotation base 332 that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward. It is provided with a regulated ring retaining member 334. The ring mounting base 331, the rotating base 332, the bush 333, and the ring retaining member 334 are each transparently formed.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a transparent annular shape.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates vertically at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotating base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs forming the outer and upper parts of the ring extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 has a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a in which arcs constituting the outer and lower parts in a circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside and in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b that is arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotary base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the spacing between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. it can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling according to the content of the player participation type production, or to give a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

Since the decorative substrate cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 are transparently formed by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the decorative substrate cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 are formed transparently. Through, or through the through hole 331c of the decorative substrate cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331, the transparent ring outer upper cover 335, the transparent ring outer lower cover 336, and the transparent ring inner, which constitute the transparent rotation operation unit 302. The cover 337 can be luminescently decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a transparent press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a transparent cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a transparent cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. It is composed of ,.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urging the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and the elevating cam member 371 that raises and lowers the elevating base 364 by rotating, and the elevating drive gear. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 above the elevating base 364. The transparent center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urge the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373. The transparent center button cover 375, which has substantially the same diameter and is formed in a bottomed tubular shape with the upper end side closed and is attached to the upper end of the center button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and the upper base 363. It includes a central button decorative substrate 376 that is mounted on the upper surface and has a plurality of LEDs that can irradiate light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The transparent outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373, and the outer circumference of the central button body 373 in the outer peripheral board cover 378 are covered. A transparent cylindrical outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side of the portion and is three-dimensionally decorated, and covers the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379. It is attached to the elevating base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 is composed of an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380 to form an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is equipped with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 is vertically penetrated in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to elevate in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which projects downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The central button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaquely. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is equipped and is transparently formed. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

The central button decorative substrate 376 is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors because a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type. ing. The central button decoration substrate 376 can illuminate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors because a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type. ing. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 has an annular substrate portion 378a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364, and a tubular portion 378 that extends upward from the inner circumference of the substrate portion 378a. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. .. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62A, the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. In the state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in a plan view, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. The cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position while assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. The pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 because it is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force equal to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

To return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, elevating detection sensor 382, and relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated to vibrate by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is not only rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342, but can also be rotated by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like the steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302 can be light-emitting and decorated. As a result, the player can be made to think that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 becomes an obstacle and the rotation operation becomes difficult. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402 and the door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). The transparent left side inner lens 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 and the transparent door frame left side decoration attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403. It has a body 404 and.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The left side inner lens 403 is transparently formed. The surface of the left side inner lens 403 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the left side of the door frame is arranged behind the left side inner lens 403. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decorative substrate 402. The front surface and the back surface of the left side inner lens 403 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the left side inner lens 403 may be replaced with a lens cut. It may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The door frame left side decorative body 404 is transparently formed. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be formed. It may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). May be good).

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

The door frame left side unit 400 has a width in the left-right direction and a depth in the front-rear direction formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A transparent side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of transparent side window interior decoration portions 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the parts corresponding to the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and the side window interior decoration member. It is provided with a transparent inner lens 414 inserted into each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b of the 412.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a transparent right side inner lens 415 that is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A through hole 416a that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions and penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a is formed so as to cover the right side base 411 of the door frame and the right side inner lens 415. It is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415, and is attached to the upper and lower sides so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415. It includes a door frame right side inner panel 417 which extends in a flat plate shape in the direction and the front-rear direction and penetrates in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side inner lens 415, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). It includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 and a transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side inner lens 415 so as to cover the front side of the right side inner lens 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The side window interior decorative member 412 is transparently formed. The surface of the plurality of side window decoration portions 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the side window interior decoration member 412 may be formed. The front surface and the back surface of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the side window interior decoration members 412 may be formed in the plurality of side windows. The back surface of the decorative portion 410b may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 413 in the side window (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type and full color capable of emitting multiple colors. It is said to be an LED. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left, and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The inner inner lens 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal inner lens 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four upper, lower, left and right parts. The inner inner lens 414 is transparently formed. The surface of the inner inner lens 414 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and a side window decoration portion arranged behind the inner inner lens 414. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 413. The front surface and the back surface of the inner inner lens 414 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface instead of the front surface of the inner inner lens 414 may be lens-cut. May be applied (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The right side inner lens 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction has a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. It is formed. The right side inner lens 415 is transparently formed. The surface of the right side inner lens 415 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and the right side of the door frame is arranged behind the right side inner lens 415. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decorative substrate 418. The front surface and the back surface of the right side inner lens 415 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the right side inner lens 415 may be replaced with a lens cut. It may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side inner lens 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side inner lens 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, the through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed transparently. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side inner lens 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be formed. It may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be lens-cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). May be good).

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be decorated by light emission. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (the end of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. Therefore, the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled and the opposite side is radiated. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as an adjacent player to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that the attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and FIG. 72 (c) is a top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 has a translucent (for example, milky white) door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame. A translucent (for example, milky white) top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the top base 451 and the upper front surface, and attached to the front end of the top top cover 452. The transparent door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top bottom plate having translucency (for example, having milky white color) connecting the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451. It is equipped with 454. In the present embodiment, the door frame top base 451, the top top cover 452, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are configured to have translucency (for example, having milky white color), but the door frame top. A top top cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the base 451 and the upper part of the front surface, and the lower end of the transparent door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 are doors. Since the frame top bottom plate 454 is connected, the door frame top base 451 may be configured as transparent instead of the one having translucency (for example, having milky white color).

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, it is arranged behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decoration. The transparent top center inner lens 458 attached to the front of the top top cover 452 (located in front of the substrate 455) is located between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 (ie). (Arranged behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and in front of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456) The transparent top left inner lens 459 attached to the front of the top top cover 452 and the door frame top. Top cover 452 placed between the decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 (that is, placed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and in front of the door frame top right decorative board 457). It is equipped with a transparent top right inner lens 460 mounted on the front of the door.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 and the top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below (for example, milky white). The lower cover frame 466, the door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the door frame top base 451 and the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top top plate 468 having translucency (for example, having milky white color) is provided.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It includes a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front projecting portions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is transparently formed. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward becomes smaller in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively. The front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface and the back surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 may be lens-cut. (It may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron). ..

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating up and down on the outside of each pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is a surface mount type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type and can emit multiple colors. It is said to be an LED. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is a surface mount type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type and can emit multiple colors. It is said to be an LED. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a surface mount type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") are surface mount type and can emit multiple colors. It is said to be an LED. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 each extend in the left-right direction and are formed transparently. The surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 are each lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted. Door frame placed behind the top center inner lens 458 Multiple LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board placed behind the top left inner lens 459 A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the 456, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 arranged behind the top right inner lens 460. It is difficult for the player to clearly see it. The front and back surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). Instead of the front surface of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460, the back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer surfaces of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[Illuminations by top side speaker]
Next, the structure of the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 will be briefly described. In the top side speaker 464, the vibrating part such as the diaphragm and the center cap is made of a translucent resin (for example, polypropylene having milky white color), and the magnetic circuit part such as the magnet and the yoke is front and rear. It is formed in a columnar shape having a through hole penetrating through, and the vibrating portion and the magnetic circuit portion are held by the housing portion. A plurality of openings are formed in the housing portion in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, while the rear is open.

A top-side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 in a mounting portion (not shown), and a predetermined distance dimension is provided on the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 to the rear (in this embodiment, about 18 mm) The acoustic decorative board 469 is mounted on the mounting portions formed on the four board mounting bent plates (not shown) that are extended. Further, a transparent plate (not shown) is attached together with the acoustic decorative substrate 469 to a mounting portion formed on the four substrate mounting bent plates (not shown) described above so as to cover the rear surface (back surface) side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. This transparent plate protects the rear surface (back surface) side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 from contact with other members and causing electrical troubles. In this way, the speaker illumination unit is assembled by attaching the top side speaker 464 to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and attaching the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the transparent plate to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463. In other words, the speaker illumination unit is composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decorative substrate 469, and a transparent plate.

When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. It is arranged so as to face the rear surface, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464.

On the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A white resist layer is formed by.). A plurality of LEDs (in this embodiment, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) 469a are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. A connector (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. The plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 are adapted to flow a constant current controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay substrate 467. The LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 is input with light emission data and a clock signal serially output from the peripheral control board 1510, and based on this, the acoustic decoration board 469 is input. By controlling the constant current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are turned on, off, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. A variety of light emission modes are realized.

The peripheral control board 1510 has an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, opening of door frame 3, main body). Opening of frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (problem related to operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.) When not present, the light emission data, which is normally the light emission mode of the effect mode, is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 has an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, door frame, etc. Opening of 3, opening of the main body frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (defect related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc. )) Occurs, the light emission data, which is a notification mode as described above, is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal.

It should be noted that the light emitting mode (normal time) of the effect mode is a variety of light emitting modes in which lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. are combined, and the main control board 1310 sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400. The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set when the symbol is output, the symbol is variablely displayed using a plurality of LEDs based on the control signal, and the symbol is variablely displayed. Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emission state of the effect mode as a predetermined effect light emission (normal time). On the other hand, in the notification mode (a mode different from the normal state), the predetermined color (red in the present embodiment) is lit with the maximum brightness, and the payout control MPU is a door frame. When the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected based on the detection signal from the release switch, a door frame opening command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board receiving this door frame opening command is transmitted. The 1310 adds predetermined information (information for adjusting the format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the door frame opening command for notifying the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. The peripheral control board 1510 that transmits to the control board 1510 and receives such a command controls the peripheral control board 1510 to a predetermined notification mode (a mode different from the normal state).

Although not shown, the component numbers of the surface-side electronic components and the surface-side electronic components are arranged on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs 769a. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as a region indicating a position (furthermore, include the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component. In some cases, the front side notation portion indicating) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, the part numbers of the back surface side electronic components, the area indicating the position where the back surface side electronic components are arranged, etc. are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as connectors. Attributes of the back side electronic component (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included). The notation on the back side shown is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 can be used. As described above, it is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, and its light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether it is turned on (lighted) or turned off. For this reason, a white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 by applying a white resist liquid over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") to form a white resist layer, and further, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is formed on the solid white resist. By printing the identifiable front side notation with yellow paint by silk printing, the yellow front side notation is not noticeable with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is turned off. In addition to being able to do this, when a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and a yellow paint that is very close to white reflectance The high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be maintained by combining with the front surface side notation portion printed by silk printing.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), they can be used as silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. Since the arrangement covers the rear, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are transparent through the through holes of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464. Light is emitted from the light center cap, and light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion, so that the power of the top side speaker 464 is generated. It is possible to decorate. As described above, since the top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes, the front surface of the top side speaker 464 and its surroundings can be passed through the through holes of the top lower cover 465. Not only can it be visually recognized, but also the illumination of the top side speaker 464 can be visually recognized.

Further, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape) and top. The space between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is repeatedly reversed, and the speaker emits the speaker from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469. Further, a plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 which is the back surface side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469.

As described above, the speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top base 451 is larger than the outer circumference of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 so that the acoustic decorative substrate 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 is exposed at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached. Through holes 451ba having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed. When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, they are emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, acoustic decoration). When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469 (of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 which is the back side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469). Through (through) a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the back surface (back surface), a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469)), and to the outer periphery of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the door frame top base 451. It exits to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through a gap formed by the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba.

As described above, the door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame base 101 has a shape larger than or the same as the outer circumference of the through hole 451ba at a position corresponding to the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 and has a through hole 101k that penetrates back and forth. Are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 (in other words). When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (acoustic decoration on the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469). Through (through) a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the back surface (back surface) of the substrate 469, a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469)), and the outer periphery of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the door frame top base. It exits to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through a gap formed in the through hole 451ba formed in 451 and a through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101.

In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 passes through the left and right through holes 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a to be mounted divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4, and has the upper left side area of the front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square in front view and the upper left area. It will be reflected in the upper right region respectively. In the present embodiment, the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, but may be made of black resin. Hereinafter, when the door frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the opening / closing shaft side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is referred to as "the shaft support side of the door frame 3" or "the shaft support side of the main body frame 4". The opposite side of the opening / closing shaft side may be described as "the open side of the door frame 3" or "the open side of the main body frame 4."

[Upper left area of front component]
On the front surface (surface) of the upper left side region of the front component 1000, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status (in the present embodiment, black color is provided except for each transparent region for confirming the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs. When the function display unit 1400 is provided, a reflective sheet 1000a, which is a white printing portion having a high reflectance or a color close to white, is attached except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged.

The area on the front surface (surface) of the upper left side region of the front component 1000 to which the reflective sheet 1000a is attached is an external region of the game region 5a formed on the game board 5, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. In the closed state, except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, the door frame base unit 100 is covered with the door frame base 101, and the reflective sheet 1000a is passed through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. It becomes difficult to see. That is, since the existence of the reflective sheet 1000a, which has nothing to do with the content of the game production, can be hidden, it does not interfere with the game.

Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the reflective sheet 1000a is arranged in the upper left region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side, and the pachinko When the machine 1 is viewed from the front, on the shaft support side of the door frame 3 (the shaft support side of the main body frame 4), the front surface of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side through the through hole 101k on the left side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (surface) is provided on the game board 5 side (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side) separately from the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. Reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a and emitted forward, the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, the outer circumference of the left acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the left through hole formed in the door frame top base 451. Light from the translucent vibrating plate of the left top side speaker 464 through a gap formed by the inner circumference of the hole 451ba and a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion of the left top side speaker 464. Is emitted, so that the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the left side can be efficiently used as a game effect or a notification mode. In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side (separate from the member provided on the door frame 3 side) separately from the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. In order to emit light toward the front, light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decorative substrate 469 passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is emitted in the game area 5a. It does not emit toward the rear of the game board 5, and does not emit toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side through the through hole 101k on the left side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

As described above, the reflective sheet 1000a has the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 (the door frame 3 is in the closed state). The light emitted by the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side can be reflected toward the front of the reflective sheet 1000a while being provided on the front surface of the upper left side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at the position corresponding to. Therefore, the light (light leakage) leaking backward from the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side can be reflected toward the front of the reflective sheet 1000a to be emitted toward the front of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. It can function as a reflective member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the leakage of light from the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side toward the rear of the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light toward the rear of the game board 5.

Although not shown, a QR code (registered trademark) that stores the number (control number) that identifies the model of the game board 5 and the attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5 on the reflective sheet 1000a. And are printed in predetermined positions with black paint, which is a dark color. Identification of the pachinko machine 1 by the QR code (registered trademark) that stores the attribute information of the game board 5 such as the reflective sheet 1000a, the number (control number) for specifying the model of the game board 5, and the manufacturing date of the game board 5. A specific information display unit is configured to display information (that is, a QR code (registered trademark) that stores attribute information of the game board 5 such as a number that identifies the model of the game board 5 and the date of manufacture of the game board 5). ing. When the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4, the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin (when the front component 1000 is made of black resin, the background is black). Since the white reflective sheet 1000a stands out, it is possible to naturally direct the line of sight of a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall to the reflective sheet 1000a due to the attractiveness.

Further, as described above, the region on the front surface (surface) of the upper left side region of the front component 1000 to which the reflective sheet 1000a is attached is an region outside the gaming region 5a formed on the gaming board 5, and is a door frame. In a state where 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 covers the door frame base unit 100 except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, and the reflective sheet 1000a is a door. Since it becomes difficult to see through the door window 101a of the frame 3, the control number and the QR code (registered trademark) printed on the reflective sheet 1000a become difficult to see through the door window 101a of the door frame 3.

Further, in the reflective sheet 1000a, since the reflective sheet 1000a is white, when the background is white, the dark black color is conspicuous, and the control number and the QR code (registered trademark) can be easily visually recognized. Further, the QR code (registered trademark) is a device separate from the pachinko machine 1, and when it is read by a code reading device possessed by a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall, the background is that the reflective sheet 1000a is white. Is white, and the QR code (registered trademark) having a dark black color can be easily read. That is, the white color of the reflective sheet 1000a can improve the readability of the QR code (registered trademark). The surface area of the reflective sheet 1000a is larger than the area on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. Further, instead of the QR code (registered trademark), a one-dimensional barcode may be used, characters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc. may be used, or characters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc. may be appropriately combined.

Although not shown, a plurality of pseudo nails are arranged on the front surface (surface) of the upper left side region of the front component 1000. In the reflective sheet 1000a, a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the region where the golden pseudo-nail is arranged. As described above, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface (surface) of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Since the pseudo nail is also made of gold, it can be used as a reflective member in the same manner as the reflective sheet 1000a when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

[About the light emitted from the LED of the acoustic decoration board]
Next, the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on which a plurality of LEDs 469a are mounted on the front surface (front surface), the left and right through holes 451 ba formed in the door frame top base 451 and the front surface (surface surface) of the upper left side region of the front component 1000. The positional relationship between the reflective sheet 1000a attached to the sheet and the reflective sheet 1000a will be described with reference to FIG. 318. FIG. 318 is a schematic view for explaining the positional relationship between the acoustic decorative substrate 469, the left and right through holes 451ba, and the reflective sheet 1000a.

As shown in FIG. 318 (A), a plurality of LEDs 469a are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. It is arranged to cover the back. Therefore, as described above, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are transparent through the through holes of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464. Light is emitted from the light-transmitting center cap, and light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion, so that the electric power of the top-side speaker 464 is emitted. It is possible to decorate.

Further, the door frame top base 451 has a shape larger than the outer circumference of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, and a through hole 451ba penetrating the front and rear is formed. Therefore, as described above, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape). ), And the reflected light is emitted from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 to the rear (in other words, mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. When the plurality of LEDs 469a are emitted, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469 (transparency (not shown) covering the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 which is the back surface side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. A plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469 (through)), and the outer circumference of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451. It will be emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through the gap caused by. As a result, when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 pass through the through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451. The light can be visually recognized from the rear of the door frame 3.

Although not shown, the door frame top base 451 is attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame top base 451 is attached to the door frame base 101. At positions corresponding to the left and right through holes 451ba formed in, a through hole 101k having a shape larger than or the same shape as the outer circumference of the through hole 451ba and penetrating the front and rear is formed.

As shown in FIG. 318 (B), when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the reflective sheet 1000a is located at a position corresponding to the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side of the front component 1000 of the game board 5. It is located in the upper left area. The surface area of the reflective sheet 1000a is larger than the area on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. Therefore, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, it passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 on the shaft support side of the door frame 3 (the shaft support side of the main body frame 4). Light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 is provided separately from the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side). The light is reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side, and is emitted toward the front. Then, a gap between the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, the outer circumference of the left acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the inner circumference of the left through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and the left top. The light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm of the left top side speaker 464 through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion of the side speaker 464.

The light reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a not only passes through the inside of the left top side speaker 464 (a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion), but also passes through the outside of the left top side speaker 464. By passing through, it is possible to emit light toward the front. Further, the light passing through the inside of the left top side speaker 464 (a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion) is passed through the through hole of the top lower cover 465 to the front of the pachinko machine 1. The light is emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 by passing through the through hole of the top lower cover 465 for the light that has passed through the outside of the left top side speaker 464. can do. As described above, the top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. However, the members around the top lower cover 465 viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 are made of opaque members, but are made of transparent or translucent members (members having translucency). The light passing through the outside of the left top side speaker 464 may be used as light for light-decorating the transparent or translucent member. As a result, for the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the left side, not only the top side speaker 464 is luminescent and decorated, but also the members around the top lower cover 465 are luminescently decorated. can do.

In the above, the door frame top base 451 has a shape larger than the outer circumference of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, and through holes 451ba penetrating the front and rear are formed. However, the through holes 451ba are formed on the front surface of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 ( Any configuration may be used as long as the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface) can be directed backward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. That is, the through hole 451ba does not necessarily have to be located behind the acoustic decorative substrate 469, but is located at a portion not behind the acoustic decorative substrate 469, such as in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction behind the acoustic decorative substrate 469. May be good.

FIG. 318 (C) shows an example in which the through holes 451ba are provided so as to be located in the upward direction and the downward direction behind the acoustic decorative substrate 469 in the door frame top base 451 respectively. Even in such a case, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464, and the reflected light is reflected behind the top side speaker 464. That is, the light is emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, and is emitted rearward of the door frame top base 451 through the through hole 451ba that is displaced from the back of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. As a result, when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 pass through the through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451. The light can be visually recognized from the rear of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side is separate from the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. It is reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side) and is emitted toward the front.

Further, in this example, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 can be directed backward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Although the through hole 451ba to be penetrated is shown, it may be in a shape provided with a plurality of holes (for example, a mesh shape or a punching shape), or at least a part of the rear side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 in the door frame top base 451. (The back of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the portion around it) may be formed of a transparent member. Even in such a case, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464, and the reflected light is reflected behind the top side speaker 464. That is, the sound is emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, and is emitted rearward of the door frame top base 451 through a portion through which light can pass. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side is separate from the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. It is reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side) and is emitted toward the front.

The acoustic decorative substrate 469 may be formed with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. In such a case, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464, and the reflected light is transferred to the rear of the top side speaker 464. It is possible to emit light toward the rear of the door frame top base 451 through a plurality of holes formed in the acoustic decorative substrate 469. That is, the light reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 is formed not only in the gap between the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 but also in the acoustic decoration substrate 469. It is possible to pass through a plurality of holes, and efficiently emit light toward the rear of the door frame top base 451. Similarly, the light reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a can be directed forward through a plurality of holes formed in the acoustic decorative substrate 469, and the inside of the left top side speaker 464 (periphery of the housing portion). Light can be emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 by passing through the through holes of the top lower cover 465 (a plurality of openings formed in the direction).

Further, in this example, the light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side is emitted from the reflective sheet 1000a in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. In the receiving area, the number (control number) that identifies the model of the game board 5 and the QR code (registered trademark) that stores the attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5 are dark black. Each is printed with the paint of. However, the control number and the QR code (registered trademark) are areas on the reflective sheet 1000a that do not receive (difficult to receive) light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. It may be printed on. That is, the control number and the QR code (registered trademark) may be printed so as to be located on the reflective sheet 1000a not behind the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451. As described above, the control number and the QR code (registered trademark) are printed on the reflective sheet 1000a with a dark black paint, and light is not reflected at the printed portion. In this regard, the control number and QR code (registered trademark) are printed on the area of the reflective sheet 1000a that receives light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side. Therefore, when the reflective sheet 1000a reflects the light, the light can be efficiently emitted toward the front.

Next, on a game island where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are provided in parallel, a position where the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized will be described with reference to FIG. 319. FIG. 319 is a schematic diagram for explaining a position where the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1 installed on the game island can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 319, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are provided in parallel on the game island so that the front side of the pachinko machine 1 faces the outside. When performing maintenance work on the game board 5 or the like closed by the door frame 3, the door frame 3 is used as the main body with the shaft support side of the door frame 3 as the axis (the shaft support side of the main body frame 4). It is necessary to open to the frame 4.

On the front side of the door frame 3, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the top side speaker 464 by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the light is emitted in front of the door frame 3. It is emitting toward. Therefore, in a state where the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4, a person located in front of the door frame 3 emits light on the front side of the door frame 3 of the top side speaker 464. Can be recognized.

On the rear surface side of the door frame 3, when the top side speaker 464 is light-emitting and decorated by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, those lights are emitted from the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the door. The light is emitted toward the rear of the door frame 3 through a gap formed in the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the frame top base 451 and a through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4, even if a person is located behind the door frame 3, the light leaking from the through hole 101k on the rear surface side of the door frame 3 is emitted. By visually recognizing, it is possible to recognize the light emitting mode of the top side speaker 464 that emits light on the front side of the door frame 3.

As described in detail above, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 are designed to emit light in a light emitting mode according to the situation of the game. Specifically, there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, opening of door frame 3, main body frame, etc. No 4 opening, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (problem related to operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.) Occasionally, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 are emitted in a normal light emitting mode. On the other hand, there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, opening of door frame 3, main body frame 4). When there is a problem (such as opening of the door, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (problem related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.) As a mode different from the above-mentioned normal state, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 are emitting light in a notification mode. In such a notification mode (a mode different from the normal state), a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment) is lit with the maximum brightness. As a result, when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 regardless of whether a person is located in front of or behind the door frame 3. It is possible to recognize the light emitting mode using the plurality of LEDs 469a, and it is possible to grasp what kind of situation the game is in, such as whether or not an abnormality or malfunction has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

As will be described in detail later, in the game board 5 provided in the pachinko machine 1, as a plurality of light emitting decorative bodies, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, and the back A rear movable decorative body 3110 and the like are provided. The LEDs mounted on these light emitting decorations are emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). Therefore, a person located in front of the pachinko machine 1 can recognize the light emitting state of the light emitting decoration body that is emitting light on the game board 5.

Similarly, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for decorative purposes, the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 also brighten the back side and the back side. The side surface is also configured to be bright for purposes other than decoration. Specifically, the light from the LED mounted on the light emitting decoration body is directed not only to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but also to the back side and the side surface side, and the light is directed to the transparent part of the back box 3010. By configuring the pachinko machine 1 so as to pass through, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 and the light emitting region L2 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 are brightened. ing. Therefore, when the door frame 3 of the other pachinko machine 1 facing the one pachinko machine 1 installed on the game island is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the back side of one pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized. However, a person who opens the door frame 3 of the other pachinko machine 1 with respect to the main body frame 4 visually recognizes the light leaking to the back surface side of the one pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the light emitting mode of the light emitting decorative body that is emitting light on the front side of the pachinko machine 1.

The LEDs mounted on the light emitting decoration body are designed to emit light in a light emitting mode according to the situation of the game, similarly to the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Specifically, there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, opening of door frame 3, main body frame, etc. No 4 opening, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (problem related to operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.) Occasionally, the LED mounted on the light emitting decoration is emitted in a normal light emitting mode. On the other hand, there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, opening of door frame 3, main body frame 4). When there is a problem (such as opening of the door, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (problem related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.) As a mode different from the above-mentioned normal time, the LED mounted on the light emitting decoration body emits light in a notification mode. For example, in the notification mode (a mode different from the normal state), a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment) is lit with the maximum brightness. As a result, when the door frame 3 of the other pachinko machine 1 facing the one pachinko machine 1 installed on the game island is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the door of the other pachinko machine 1 is such. A person who opens the frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 can recognize the light emitting mode by using the LED mounted on the light emitting decoration, and whether or not the pachinko machine 1 has an abnormality or a malfunction, etc. , It is possible to grasp what kind of situation the game is in.

From the above, regarding the game situation such as whether or not the pachinko machine 1 has an abnormality or a malfunction, not only in front of the door frame 3 but also in the state where the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4. It can be grasped from the rear of the door frame 3, and further, it can be grasped not only from the front of the pachinko machine 1 but also from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, when an abnormality or malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the abnormality or malfunction can be quickly dealt with.

When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, it is determined whether the abnormality is a mild abnormality or a severe abnormality, and if it is a minor abnormality, it is not from all directions but a part. In order to be able to grasp that the abnormality has occurred only from the direction of, only a part of the LEDs may be set as a notification mode (a mode different from the normal state). Specifically, among the abnormalities of the pachinko machine 1, minor abnormalities (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, opening of door frame 3, main body) When the frame 4 is opened, the wiring is broken, etc.), only the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 are set as the notification mode (a mode different from the normal state), and the light emitting decoration body is used. The mounted LED is not set to the notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode). That is, when a slight abnormality occurs, it can be grasped from the front or the rear of the door frame 3, but cannot be grasped from the front or the rear of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, when a minor abnormality (for example, detection of fraudulent activity) has occurred among the abnormalities of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and a light emitting decoration body. Both of the LEDs mounted on the above are in the notification mode (a mode different from the normal state). That is, when a serious abnormality occurs, it can be grasped from either the front or the rear of the door frame 3 or the front or the rear of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, when a minor abnormality occurs, it is not a situation that should be dealt with urgently like a serious abnormality (detection of fraudulent activity, etc.), so it is possible to grasp it only from the front or the rear of the door frame 3. To prevent excessive notification to the outside.

[Upper right area of front component]
On the open side of the main body frame 3 and on the front (surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component 1000, a metal for maintaining the mounted state of the game board 5 and the main body frame 4 Each fastener FT (see FIG. 10) is provided. That is, on the open side of the door frame 3, the metal stopper FT is arranged on the front (surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In particular, on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, a metal stopper FT is arranged at a position corresponding to the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the right side. The end portion of the metal stopper FT is inserted into a board stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 4 and engaged with the metal stopper FT.

Further, the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is made of metal, and as described above, by being attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 is reinforced. Rigidity is given to the door frame base unit 100, and the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending vertically and arranged apart from each other on the left and right are connected to each other by connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The upper reinforcing frame 113 extending to the left and right, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the intermediate reinforcing frame. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right end of 114 and the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of hooks mounted vertically separated on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and hooks for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. It includes a hooking member 116 on which the 652 is hooked. That is, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear surface side of the door frame 3 and on the open side of the door frame 3.

As described above, in the present embodiment, on the open side of the main body frame 4, the metal stopper FT is provided on the front (surface) side of the upper right side region and the lower right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In addition to being arranged, on the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear surface side of the door frame 3. Both the metal stopper FT and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are made of metal and have luster. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the right side through the through hole 101k on the right side formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 ( Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the surface) is provided by a metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and a metal right reinforcing frame 112. Can be reflected. Further, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the light emission on the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily visually recognized. In the state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the right side through the through hole 101k on the right side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112, but the door frame base. Light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decorative substrate 469 passing through the right through hole 101k formed in 101 does not emit toward the game area 5a, and is rear of the game board 5. Does not emit even to. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side through the through hole 101k on the left side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

Since the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, the front component 1000 may be made of black resin instead. Even with this configuration, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the acoustic decoration on the right side passes through the through hole 101k on the right side formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the substrate 469 is reinforced by a metal stopper FT arranged on the front surface side of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and a metal right reinforcement. Since the light can be reflected by the frame 112, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decorative substrate 469 passing through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 can be reflected. It does not emit light toward the game area 5a, nor does it emit light toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side through the through hole 101k on the left side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

Further, a white reflective sheet obtained by appropriately modifying the shape of the white reflective sheet 1000a described above is attached to the peripheral region where the metal stopper FT is arranged in the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5. It may be configured as. In this way, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the right side passes through the through hole 101k on the right side formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (surface) is emitted from a metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, a metal right reinforcing frame 112, and a metal right reinforcing frame 112. From a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration substrate 469 through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 because it can be reflected by the white reflective sheet. Light does not emit toward the game area 5a, nor does it emit light toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side through the through hole 101k on the left side formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

By the way, when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4, a clerk such as a clerk in the game hall is provided on the door frame 3, for example, after inserting a regular key into the cylinder lock 130 and rotating the door frame 3. By grasping a decorative member such as the transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410 by hand, the door frame 3 is opened from the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4. Since the decorative member is continuously pulled, the more work is performed to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the more the load may be repeatedly applied to the joint portion between the decorative member and the door frame 3, and the door frame may be damaged. There is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the right side on the open side of the door frame 3 is as described above. In addition, since the light is emitted rearward through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 are mounted on the door frame. It is possible to emit light toward the rear of 3. On the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear surface side of the door frame 3, and on the open side of the main body frame 4, the front surface of the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5. A metal stopper FT is placed on the (surface) side, and both are metal members. Therefore, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 3, Through the gap formed between the open side of the door frame 3 and the open side of the main body frame 4, the light reflected by the metal reflecting portion such as the metal right reinforcing frame 112 and the metal stopper FT leaks out, and the gap Can be made to emit light. As a result, when the clerk of the game hall or the like performs the work of opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, for example, the transparent door frame right of the door frame right side unit 410 provided in the door frame 3 When the decorative member such as the side decorative body 419 is grasped by hand and the decorative member is pulled to the extent that the mode in which the gap emits light can be visually recognized, the decorative member is stopped from being pulled, and then a finger is inserted into the gap to insert the door frame. 3 can be opened. Since the time for grasping and pulling the decorative member by hand can be shortened, the time for which the load is applied to the joint portion between the decorative member (door frame right side unit 410) and the door frame 3 can also be shortened. Therefore, damage to the door frame 3 can be suppressed.

[When the door frame is opened]
By the way, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally becomes an obstacle nail with another game ball when the game ball launched toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 is flowing down while the player is playing a game. It may become clogged. In this state, when the player launches the game balls one after another toward the game area 5a, the game balls are further piled up on the packed game balls, and the game balls are gathered in a grape shape. In order to eliminate the state in which the game balls are gathered in the shape of grapes, the player calls a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall to have the game balls gathered in the shape of grapes removed. A clerk such as a clerk of a game hall called by a player opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, it is attached to each decorative board provided in the game board 5. "Opening" that controls to turn off all the mounted LEDs and controls each movable body provided in the game board 5 so as to maintain the position at the time of opening regardless of whether or not it is operating. Control the game board at the time. With or instead of controlling the game board at the time of such opening, a specific LED among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469). In addition to controlling the lighting of the plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening regardless of whether or not it is operating. "Control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed so that the control is performed.

When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the door frame is controlled at the time of opening, a state in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided in the game board 5 are completely turned off and / or Among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, a specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469) lights up in a notification mode for notifying the opening of the door. It will be in a state of doing. When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, as described above, the translucency is transmitted through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464. Light is emitted from the center cap having the light, and light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion. Further, it is reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape) and repeatedly between the back surface of the top side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. On the contrary, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light because they are emitted from the rear surface (back surface) of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. Then, since a plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469 (through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 which is the back surface side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 (through). ) Because a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469)), a gap between the outer circumference of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 and the door. It exits to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through the through hole 101k formed in the frame base 101.

That is, since the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and toward the rear of the door frame 3, the door frame can emit light. In a state where 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (that is, when the door frame 3 is opened), the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is viewed from the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize the notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface). In other words, it is possible to visually recognize that the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light in the notification mode not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3. A plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469. As a result, in the game hall, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is provided to the staff such as the clerk of the game hall passing through the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to convey the notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the notification mode can be visually recognized from the front side and the rear side of the door frame 3. Further, in the game hall, an abnormality or a problem occurs in the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from both the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3 (pachinko). Abnormality in machine 1 (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, opening of door frame 3, opening of main body frame 4, wiring It is possible to promptly convey the disconnection, etc.) or malfunction (defect related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies) cannot be detected, etc.)), and the game The work efficiency of the hall can be improved.

By the way, if the diaphragm of the speaker is torn with an illegal tool, no sound will flow, but while it is easy to see that the diaphragm of the speaker is torn with an illegal tool, a hole is made in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool. The sound changes but the sound flows just by opening it. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool and remove the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker or disconnect it to prevent sound from flowing from the speaker, magnets and taps will be used. Even if the game machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring the game ball by performing the above, the warning sound does not flow from the speaker in the first place. When a person who commits such an illegal act leaves the game machine, the game machine is in a state of waiting for the player, and a silent demonstration (multiple LEDs provided on the door frame and the game board are set to the light emitting mode for waiting for the player). Along with the light emission, the player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device capable of displaying the effect image.) Is repeated. Then, in such a state of waiting for the player, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall has a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker by an illegal tool, and the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker is disconnected or disconnected. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not sound is flowing from the speaker.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is pierced with a wire, the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, so that the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is arranged. ), When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the top side speaker 464 emit light, the light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464, and the housing portion. Light is emitted from a translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the speaker. Since the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 and the center cap are made of a translucent resin (for example, polypropylene having a milky white color), the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 passes through a hole formed in the diaphragm. The light emitted from the diaphragm shines brighter as a spotlight than the light emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap. As a result, as described above, the top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Therefore, when a silent demonstration is performed, the top lower cover 465 penetrates. Through the holes, the existence of the holes formed in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be discovered as the existence shining with high brightness like a spotlight. Therefore, it can contribute to the determination of whether or not sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464.

Further, when the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is pierced with a wire and a silent demonstration is performed, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 are turned off (it happens to be turned off). The state in which the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 are turned off within the period from the end of the silent demonstration to the start of the silent demonstration again. However, since the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on which the white coating film coated with the white resist liquid is formed is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, the background becomes white due to this white coating film, so that the top side speaker The white color of the white coating film could be visually recognized through the holes made in the diaphragm of 464 and the innumerable through holes formed in the top lower cover 465, and the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 was illegally opened. The holes are easy to see. As a result, it is possible to detect whether or not the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is illegally perforated. Therefore, it can contribute to the determination of whether or not sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464.

In addition, a silent demonstration in which a plurality of LEDs provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit light in a player waiting light emitting mode, and the player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image. Since a plurality of LEDs emit light in a light emitting mode for waiting for a player, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is illegally pierced with a wire, it is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. Since the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks through the holes formed in the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464, it seems that a part of the diaphragm of the topside speaker 464 is emitting light. As a result, it is possible to discover that the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 has a hole.

A speaker net having translucency may be provided on the front surface of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. By providing the speaker net, it is possible to prevent the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 from being illegally intruded by a wire, and it takes time to make a hole in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. , Can contribute to the early detection of such fraudulent activity. Further, since the speaker net has translucency, it is unlikely to interfere with the light emitted through the translucent diaphragm of the top side speaker 464.

Further, the top side speaker 464 is made of a translucent resin such as a vibrating plate and a center cap, for example, polypropylene having a milky white color, but has a gray color as a translucent resin. It may be polypropylene or the like having a color close to black), red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, etc., or may be made of a transparent resin instead of a resin having translucency.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine provided with a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light emitting device performs effects and error notifications that occur during the game. However, when the front frame is opened, it is possible to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the front side of the front frame, while it is difficult to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the rear surface side of the front frame. There was a problem.

Further, conventionally, a game machine having a game board detachably held in a middle frame and having a front frame configured to cover the front side of the game board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-07963). (Paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). By the way, when opening the front frame, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall inserts a key into the cylinder lock, rotates the lock, and then grasps and pulls the decorative member provided on the front frame by hand. As the amount of opening work increases, the front frame may be damaged due to repeated load on the joint portion between the decorative member and the front frame.

Further, conventionally, a game machine provided with a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). When any abnormality or malfunction occurs in the game machine, the light emitting device emits light in a special mode different from the normal time, and can notify the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction. However, in the same manner as in the past, it has been difficult to say that it is sufficient to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect.

Further, conventionally, a game machine provided with a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). When any abnormality or malfunction occurs in the game machine, the light emitting device emits light in a special mode different from the normal time, and can notify the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction. However, as the light toward the rear of the game board increases, the light toward the front of the game machine decreases, so it is difficult to say that it is sufficient to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction.

Further, conventionally, a game machine in which specific information about the game machine is provided on the game board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-080279 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 14)). As a result, it becomes possible to confirm from the outside whether or not the game board is a legitimate game board, and it is possible to suppress an illegal change act or the like for the game machine. However, in the same manner as the conventional mode, since the specific information can be visually recognized from the player side, the decorativeness is lowered, and there is a possibility that the game interest is lowered.

Further, conventionally, a game machine having a speaker in a front frame has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). Along with the production sound generated during the game, the error notification sound and the like are also played from the speaker provided in this game machine. By the way, if the diaphragm of the speaker is torn with an illegal tool, no sound will flow, but it will be easy to visually recognize that the diaphragm of the speaker is torn. Simply making a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool will change the sound, but the sound will flow. Therefore, if you make a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an illegal tool and remove the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker or disconnect it to prevent sound from flowing from the speaker, magnets and taps will be used. Even if the game machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring the game ball by performing the above, the warning sound does not flow from the speaker. When a person who commits such an illegal act leaves the game machine, the game machine is put into a player waiting state, and a silent demonstration (the light emitting device emits light in the player waiting light emitting mode and is displayed on the image display device). The image for waiting for the player is displayed.) Will be repeated. However, in such a state of waiting for the player, a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall has a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker by an illegal tool, and the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker is disconnected or disconnected. It was difficult to determine whether or not sound was flowing from the speaker.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, plate upper right decorative body 276, plate center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer circumference of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side unit 400 door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 410 door frame right side decorative body having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the lower center decoration body 312b 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302, the outer circumference. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since it is tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. The payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIGS. 84A to 84C are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a in which the shape of the front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a mounting portion 501c and a game board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. A cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e, and a board unit which penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c when viewed from the front. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that can be rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends up and down near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the table unit 2000 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later). It is connected to the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the back unit 3000 and the effect drive board 1720) described later, and the opposite end is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3. And is connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

Then, a connection cable for connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side, which will be described later, and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. The 503 guides the side connected to the interface board 635 and the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side to the effect drive board 1720 described later so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. A binding band 504 inserted into a set of through holes 502d having the same position in the left-right direction among a plurality of through holes 502d formed on both upper and lower ends of the guide main body 502a in a state of being in contact with the front surface of the main body 502a. By being tightened together with the guide main body 502a, it can be attached to the guide main body 502a.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line in contact with the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hing member on the body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the above is rotatably attached.

The upper hinge body 510 of the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and regulates the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted with the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is attached to the flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 in front view, and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the launch base 541, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle 182 is in the state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the upper portion 551d of the back plate extending downward from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the lower side of the left side plate 551b from the front to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is open rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and is open upward in a box shape, and a portion of the payout base 551 that extends to the left and right. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, thereby forming the inside of the tank rail 553. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the front view of the ball tank 552 on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 92).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so that the movable piece member 573 can move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, in the rear view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrowed between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the game ball B at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B flows down in the ball pulling passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 projecting into the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, and the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the main body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downwardly discharged from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction in the front view by the closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are respectively. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570 from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade in the payout passage 580a It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. Is discharged from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 into the upper plate 201.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper normal payout passage 600c is connected to the upper ball storage passage 600b on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detection state.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the lowering end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball pulling movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball pulling movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside (game hole) of the pachinko machine 1. It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It includes an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. A through-cylinder 623a that communicates with the through-hole 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball pulling guidance portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply on the rear side of the power supply board 630 (hereinafter, for explanation, the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. The surface on the rear side of the board 630 may be described as "the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630" on which electronic components are mounted.) A transparent power supply board attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the surface. It includes a cover 631 and. The surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 is covered with the transparent power supply board cover 631, so that the power supply board 630 is housed in the transparent power supply board cover 631. The front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply board 630 may be described as a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, simply "solid green resist"). A green resist layer is formed by ()), and a power switch 630a having an operation unit for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the power board 630. On the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630, in addition to the power switch 630a, the attributes of the surface side electronic components such as the component number of the surface side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic component is arranged (further, the surface). The front side notation part indicating the shape of the side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included. It is a white paint that stands out and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The power switch 630a is exposed from the transparent power supply board cover 631. Further, since the power switch 630a is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and payout control housed in the payout control board box 632. It includes a substrate 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 sets the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and the payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 that is attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 around the vertically extending shaft, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 651 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 projects forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 99A. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side in a state where a tank rail or the like is assembled on a ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) as viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It has.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the lateral length of the front wall 552b from the end side of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side). It is formed over the length.

In front view, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be distributed in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, in the plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side, and then moves to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside is distributed. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball shavings) can be less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if ball clogging (ball gall) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 can be visually recognized. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears and belts can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. Can produce the effects of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because it is tilted so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is lowered in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball and is on the bottom surface. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. It is provided with a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 at a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. The upper ends of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o on both lateral sides in the left-right direction, and extend in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the ball and the ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction and the overflow surface portion 501 m. The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide part of the tank rail.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion in the front view of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552 g The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the front wall 552b side end of the right end side, and the rear wall 552c side end. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outwardly and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552 g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the upper surface of the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to step backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending backward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island facility, first of all, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest of the uppermost edges of the outer circumference, is exceeded. It can flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and also flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by tilting the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other (increase in the ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shavings) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h in which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearranged from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and being bitten by the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B are clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the game balls are changed so as to coincide with each other, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulge portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to form a line in the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (to the right in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) on which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which the front components, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. .. FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in a state where the front components, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nails.

In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate, the LED irradiates light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is rectangular, it means that the LED irradiates light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative substrate (side view LED). The detailed description is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning opening 2005, and a second major winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. The purpose is to perform a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted or passed in 2006 or the like.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of golden obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115 and the like) in contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 within the game area 5a. Further, the game board 5 is a game performed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114, 206, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The drive board unit 1700, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to have an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116 and the like), which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the game panel 1100 has the transparent panel plate 1110, the game panel 1100 is arranged from the front of the game panel 1100 (that is, the front of the game board 5) through the game panel 1100 to the rear of the game panel 1100. The presence of various members can be easily visually recognized (hereinafter, may be referred to as "transparent game panel 1100").

The drive board unit 1700 includes various boards electrically connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105 described above (for example, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200 and the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400). , Door frame right side unit 410 side window decoration board 413 and door frame right side decoration board 418, door frame top unit 450 door frame top relay board 467, etc.), main control board 1310 and peripheral control The panel relay board 1710 relaying the connection with the board 1510 and the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are driven in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. It includes a production drive board 1720, and a drive board box 1730 that houses a panel relay board 1710 and a production drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 on the left side in the rear view, and is detachably attached to the rear surface in the effect display device 1600 on the right side in the rear view. For example, the effect drive substrate 1720 has a green coating film (hereinafter, simply "solid green resist") formed by applying a green resist liquid on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface). A green resist layer is formed by (may be described as). A plurality of electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the effect drive board 1720, and the attributes of the electronic components such as the component number of the electronic component and the area indicating the position where the electronic component is arranged are located in the vicinity of these electronic components. (Furthermore, the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component may be included.) The white paint that stands out against the green color. Then, each is printed by silk printing on the solid green resist.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The first special winning opening 2005 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting opening that can accept the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B. It is provided with a first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B in 2004 or a second large winning opening 2006 capable of accepting the game ball B according to the second special lottery result.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an out port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the game area 5a, and is provided in the middle of the game area 5a in the vertical direction and is provided in the game ball B. Is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the game from the game area 5a.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002, and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It is provided on the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first grand prize opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. The first attacker unit 2400, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and the center role. The second attacker unit 2600, which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the object 2500 and has the second large winning opening 2006, and the second attacker unit 2600, which is provided above the second attacker unit 2600, are one. A side right middle unit 2700 having a general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003 are provided. There is.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening 3010a in the rear wall and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the flat back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively, and at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010. The back guide unit 3050 is provided, the back rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and the back guide unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010 are separated from each other to the left and right. The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back back left effect unit 3500, the back front right decoration unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back back left in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500, and the back front right production unit 3700 provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. It is equipped with 3800.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It is provided with an out guide portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear (out port 2010).

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only with an open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 2010 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates the two game balls B with a width sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out ball detection member 3080 of the out port 2010 and the back unit 3000 described later.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since the front component 1000 is transparently formed together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled on the game board 5. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a look larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

Further, since the front component 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N having a gold color in a predetermined gauge arrangement are planted (see FIG. 115 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and rear, and at the upper edge and the lower edge, respectively. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions formed to have a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw (not shown) or the engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right of the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The width is wide so that the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side is narrow so that a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in the present embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and lowers. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface to the front. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. A tubular portion 3081 of the out ball detection member 3080 in the back guidance unit 3050 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into the out recess 1123.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins each protruding forward from the holding step portion and being inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws that are elastically engaged with the engaging step portion of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion. It includes two engaging steps on the lower side and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with each other. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 to the rear after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion to be engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since the game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the fact that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled on the game board 5. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

Further, on the back surface side of the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, the vicinity of the right side of the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 is illegal. A magnetic sensor 1111 that detects magnetism is attached (see FIG. 113 and the like).

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. A transparent main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the back unit 3000 is out. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. The board holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below. Can be done.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first start port sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second start port sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first large winning opening sensor 2402, and a second large winning opening. It is connected to a sensor 2601, an out port sensor 3053, a first sub out port sensor 2403, a second sub out port sensor 3054, a magnetic sensor 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 is not shown in detail. The shin displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate unit 2003. It includes a normal symbol display composed of one LED and a normal hold display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B at the gate unit 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "win" or the like. It is equipped with a round display, which consists of five LEDs to display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, etc. can be displayed by turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LEDs as appropriate.

Here, the configuration of the function display unit 1400 will be briefly described. The function display unit 1400 includes a box body that is opened at the rear and has an opening, a function display board housed in the box body, and a flat plate-shaped cover body that closes the opening. The outer shape of the function display board is smaller than the outer shape of the box body. In the present embodiment, the box body and the cover body are molded from a colored opaque (non-translucent) resin (black resin). The colored opaque resin may be a resin such as gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, or yellow, in addition to black. Further, the box body and the cover body may be molded with a milky white resin or a colorless and transparent resin instead of the colored opaque resin.

The box body is provided with LED insertion holes from the back surface side to the rear side at positions corresponding to a plurality of LEDs (LED bare chips in this embodiment) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board. Has been done. The insertion hole for each LED is formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lighting or blinking light of each LED is not mistaken for the lighting or blinking light of an adjacent LED. Further, at a predetermined position of the box body, a locking hole into which a locking portion formed in a plurality of mounting pieces of the cover body, which will be described later, is inserted is formed.

A white function display sticker is attached to the front surface of the box. When the function display sticker is attached to the front surface of the box body, a transparent portion having a circular shape is formed at a position corresponding to each LED insertion hole. That is, the lighting or blinking of the LED mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board is guided by the LED insertion hole and can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. Further, the periphery of the transparent portion of the function display sticker is black (may be a dark color other than black), and it is easy to determine the lighting state of the LED by comparing with the transparent portion.

A plurality of LEDs (in this embodiment, LED bare chips (also referred to as "LED elements")) are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board, and front side electronic components (surface surface) such as a plurality of LEDs are mounted. In addition to the pad to which the side electronic components are soldered, a white coating film (hereinafter, simply "solid white coating") is formed by applying a white resist solution in the entire area excluding through holes, lands, etc. A white resist layer is formed by "resist". In this embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board, the part number of the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component), the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) is arranged, etc. Attributes of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts) (Furthermore, shape of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts), size of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts), front side electronic parts (front side) The front side notation (front side notation) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component) and the model of the front side electronic component (front surface electronic component) is a predetermined color (for example,). It is a bright color (yellow) that is less noticeable than white, and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid white resist. It should be noted that at least the area around the area corresponding to the LED insertion hole on the mounting surface of the function display board may be formed with a black resist layer or silk-printed with black paint. As a result, even when the LED light leaks to the outside of the LED insertion hole, the diffusion of the light can be suppressed by forming the black coating film having the lowest reflectance.

In addition to the connector housing to which electrical wiring is connected, various ICs, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. may be mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board, and the connector housing, various ICs, various resistors, etc. In addition to the pads on which the rear side electronic parts (back side electronic parts) such as various capacitors are soldered, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding through holes, lands, etc. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") to form a white resist layer. In the present embodiment, on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board, the part number of the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component), the area indicating the position where the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) is arranged, etc. Attributes of the rear side electronic component (back side electronic component) (Furthermore, the shape of the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component), the size of the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component), the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side) The rear side electronic component (back side electronic component) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component) and the model of the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) has a predetermined color (for example, the back surface side electronic component). It is a bright color (yellow) that is less noticeable than white, and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid white resist.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there is no silk printing on the solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate. Further, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board, how are the front side electronic components (front surface side electronic components) in the wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed? Information for identifying each electronic component is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and is also formed on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board. Is information for identifying what kind of electronic component the rear side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. It is also not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the. That is, in the present embodiment, information for identifying what kind of electronic component the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board is is the front surface of the function display board. There is nothing written on the (front side), and information for identifying what kind of electronic component the rear side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board is a function is functioning. Nothing is written on the back surface (back surface) of the display board.

The product control number (for example, FDU-TYPE-A) of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body, and the cover body has a flat plate shape from a predetermined position on the front surface (front surface) toward the front. Multiple mounting pieces are extended. Locking portions are formed so as to project outside the tips of these plurality of mounting pieces. Each locking portion is inserted into each locking hole formed at a predetermined position of the box body in a state where a part of each locking portion is melted when the cover body closes the opening of the box body. By doing so, the cover body and the box body are welded together. In this way, the cover body and the box body of the function display unit 1400 are firmly adhered to each other, and the function display board cannot be taken out unless at least a part of the cover body and the box body is destroyed. ..

By the way, since the function display unit 1400 is important in that the lottery result, the game state, etc. are displayed and controlled by the main control board 1310, the function display board housed in the box body of the function display unit 1400 is illegally modified. Then, the lottery result, the game state, etc. cannot be displayed correctly. In this case, for example, even though the game ball has not actually entered the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, an invalid signal is input to the main control board 1310 as if the ball had entered. Even if a fraudulent act is performed to obtain many lottery opportunities, the function display unit 1400 cannot correctly display the lottery result, the game status, etc., and it is difficult for the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to notice.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, silk printing does not exist on the solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate. That is, on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the functional display board, a front side notation portion (front surface side notation portion) and a rear surface side notation portion (back surface side notation portion) printed by silk printing are completely formed. Absent. Further, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board, how are the front side electronic components (front surface side electronic components) in the wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed? Information for identifying each electronic component is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and is also formed on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board. Is information for identifying what kind of electronic component the rear side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. It is also not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the. This makes it difficult to identify the electronic components mounted on the function display board and grasp the circuit configuration.

In the present embodiment, the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is directly mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board. Adopted the configuration. LED bare chips (also referred to as "LED elements") are enclosed in surface mount type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, bullet type, and other packages, and are extremely small electronic components. is there. Therefore, compared to the case where the LED package is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board, the depth distance dimension in the surface mount type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, bullet type, etc. package The function display unit 1400 can be miniaturized. Since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if the impact caused by the player hitting the door frame 3 or the like is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the function display unit 1400 provided in the game board 5 is struck. It is unlikely that the LED bare chips mounted on the front surface (surface) of the functional display board will be damaged by the impact caused by the impact.

Examples of the method of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrode on the front surface (surface) of the function display board include wire bonding and flip chip bonding, but in this embodiment, flip chip bonding is adopted. did. In this flip-chip bonding, the electrode of the LED bare chip is not electrically connected to the predetermined electrode on the front surface (surface) of the function display substrate by using a wire as in wire bonding, but is called a bump to the electrode of the LED bare chip. A protrusion is formed and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the front surface (surface) of the function display substrate. This connection is reinforced with solder, resin, or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is no area printed by silk printing on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate. As a result, the process of silk printing can be omitted, so that the substrate manufacturing cost can be reduced by reducing the plate cost for silk printing and the number of substrate manufacturing processes.

In the above-described embodiment, how are the front side electronic components (front surface side electronic components) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board? No information is written on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board, and the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board is not provided with any information for identifying the electronic component. ) Is not written on the back surface (back surface) of the function display board to identify what kind of electronic component it is, but the board control number of the function display board is indicated on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board and. / Or may be written on the back surface (back surface). As a method of indicating the substrate control number, it may be printed by silk printing with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and black or green, which is easily conspicuous with respect to white). In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the board control number is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the board control number in the wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and by removing the foil residue. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the model of the connector housing mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board is not indicated on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board, but the model of the connector housing is described as the function display board. It may be written on the front surface (front surface) and / or the rear surface (back surface) of. As a method of indicating the model of this connector housing, even if it is printed by silk printing with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and black or green, which is easily conspicuous with respect to white). Alternatively, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the wiring pattern is copper foil, and the model of the connector housing is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the model of the connector housing. It may be formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body, but instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body, the left side wall of the box body is used. , The upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall may be engraved with the product control number of the function display unit 1400.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is stamped on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body, but instead of the stamp, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is designated. You may print directly on the back surface (back surface) of the cover body with a paint of color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or print on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. The printed material may be attached to the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body. Further, instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is specified for any one of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall of the box body. You may print directly with paint of color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is printed on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. You may paste the printed one.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution. Instead of white, a green resist layer may be formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution, or a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution may form a black color. A resist layer may be formed. The green resist solution is inexpensive because it is a general one that is usually used. By using a black resist solution, it is possible to prevent reflection by the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the function display board so that the light is not mixed with the light emitted by the LEDs arranged in the vicinity. Can contribute to doing so.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board. However, instead of the LED bare chip, an LED package with surface mount type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, bullet type, etc. is placed on the front (surface) of the function display board. It may be implemented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, flip-chip bonding is adopted as a method of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to a predetermined electrode on the front surface (surface) of the function display board, but wire bonding is used instead of flip-chip bonding. May be adopted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board, front side electronic components (surface) which are a plurality of LEDs with a wiring pattern which is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed. The information for identifying what kind of electronic component the side electronic component is is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, but a plurality of A circle symbol is created near the position corresponding to the LED terminal (anode terminal or cathode terminal), and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed to form a function as a foil removal reference terminal symbol on the front surface (surface) of the display board. Each of them is formed so that the foil removal reference terminal symbol is covered with a white resist (which may be green or black instead of white) that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the function display board. May be good. The wiring pattern forming the foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the LED. As the foil removal reference terminal symbol, if the surrounding area is a so-called beta land (board ground), the circle symbol itself may be used as the foil removal. Further, the foil removal reference terminal symbol may be a symbol indicating the polarity of the LED instead of the circle symbol (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal), or in the circuit diagram. The symbol to be used (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) may be simplified). Further, when the mounting directions of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board are substantially the same (that is, the mounting directions of the plurality of LEDs are the same for the mounting worker or the automatic machine). (There is no one to be mounted in the opposite direction) If a rule is provided in advance), the foil removal reference terminal symbol is placed near the position corresponding to the terminal of any one of the multiple LEDs on the front of the function display board. It may be formed on the (front surface), or a foil removal reference terminal symbol may be formed on the front surface (front surface) of the function display board in the vicinity of a predetermined position corresponding to one or more LED terminals. May be good. In this case as well, the foil removal reference terminal symbol may be a symbol indicating the polarity of the LED instead of the circle symbol (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal). A symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) may be simplified).

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover body 1601 molded of a non-conductive transparent resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the back surface side of the protective cover body 1601, a plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a for locking various wirings along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601 are formed, and a long ventilation length in the vertical direction is formed. A plurality of holes are formed in a state where the holes are aligned vertically and horizontally.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall in the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601b projecting upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1601c projecting downward from the lower end surface. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b diagonally from the rear of the 3010, the lower fixing piece 1601c side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1601c is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates through and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, which can accept the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The first special winning opening 2005, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, is different from the first special winning opening 2005. It is possible to accept the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is provided at the position and is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is equipped with the second major winning opening 2006.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. It is located above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged in the lower right corner of the game area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The first prize-winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The second major winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out port 2011 is arranged below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002, and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It is provided on the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first grand prize opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. The first attacker unit 2400 is provided, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a second attacker unit 2600 and a second attacker unit 2600, which are provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and have a second major winning opening 2006. It has a side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub out opening 2012, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700. The gate member 2800 is provided.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. FIG. 118 (a) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 (b) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. ) Is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory view comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the start port unit and the side unit in the game board. The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 2010, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted.

The start port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending outward from the middle in the front-rear direction, and is formed entirely of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape in which the front view is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long to the left and right and a semicircular portion with the lower side of the rectangular portion as a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101, and is formed in a gutter shape with an open upper portion. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110 in a state of being attached to the panel plate 1110. Is forming.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is opened. It is located just below the center of. Therefore, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the above. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the first start port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

Although not shown, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101, which is more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be encouraged to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002. At the same time, by accepting the game ball B at the first starting port 2002, a special lottery result (first special lottery result) is drawn in which an advantageous game state occurs in which the player such as a "big hit" game is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation for the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B rearward is inclined at a gentler angle (an angle close to horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B in the rear direction is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002, and at the same time, the joy (superiority complex) that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002 can be expressed in the general winning opening 2001. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted.

Further, when the start port unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located rearward and is provided on the back lower middle effect unit 3300. Light from LEDs such as the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back and the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is used for light emission decoration.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the starting port unit 2100 may be provided with ribs straddling the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102 at the first starting port 2002. The ribs are formed in a triangular shape (which may be partially rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001. The distance to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 while inclining at substantially the same angle as the portion. (The position of the rib is lower than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 abuts on the rib and is guided backward, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is in the first front wall portion 2203. It can be delayed from the timing at which it comes into contact with the inclined portion and is guided backward, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upwards, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side are open toward the upper left.

The side unit 2200 has a flat base plate and a second second that extends from the base plate in the shape of a gutter and is inclined so that the front end moves backward as it goes downward. One gutter, the first front wall that closes the front end side of each of the two first gutters, and a gutter-shaped extension from the base plate to the left of the two first gutters. It is provided with a second guide gutter and a second front wall portion that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely made of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. In the first guide gutter 2202, the U-shaped open portion is directed upward, and in the second guide gutter 2204, the U-shaped open portion is directed upward. The front end of the first guide gutter 2202 extends vertically on the upper side with a portion at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom as a boundary, and near the base plate 2201 so that the lower side moves backward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally to. Therefore, the first front wall portion 2203, which closes the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202, has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom.

The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the base plate 2201 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Then, the game ball B can be accepted by the portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrudes forward from the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205. It forms a general winning opening 2001. Further, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, a portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrudes rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrates the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. As a result, it protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be guided backward.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the third delivery port 3063 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then lowered. It is discharged onto the board holder 1200.

Unlike the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker attached to the first front wall portion 2203 or the second front wall portion 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. It is less noticeable than the first starting port 2002. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and even if a decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface. , It doesn't look bad.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located behind, and the back lower left decoration of the back lower left effect unit 3200. The light from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for light emission decoration, and the lower back left rotation decoration body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. Further, since the side unit 2200 has a portion inclined to the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the back unit 3000 has a lower left side depending on the portion. The light radiated forward from the lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the production unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. You can improve the appearance.

In this side unit 2200, since the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is increasing. The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the starting port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. As a result, it is possible to make the player surely recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001, and to prevent the player's interest from being attracted to the general winning opening 2001 unnecessarily for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to easily direct the player's interest to other winning openings such as the next game ball B, the first starting opening 2002, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2006. It is possible to entertain the game in the game area 5a and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In other words, since the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002, and at the same time, the joy (superiority complex) that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002 can be expressed in the general winning opening 2001. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted.

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 is inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 is tilted from the side of the first guide gutter 2202. The game ball B can pass in front of the inclined portion of the game ball B. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, so that the game ball B is accepted by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. If the game ball B is not paid out, the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side may feel distrustful, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and move backward. Since the guided game ball B can be visually recognized by the player for a short time, it is possible to recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if it is illusion that the game ball B that has passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

Further, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball is in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When B passes, if most of the game ball B (at least half or more of the game ball B) overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in the front view, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. It is possible to make the player feel as if he / she was accepted and entertain the player. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and it may be considered as an illusion. Therefore, even if the benefits (payment of game ball B and lottery of the first special lottery result) are not given after that, it is possible to avoid feeling distrust toward the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. It is possible to keep the player entertained and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning opening 2001 by the second front wall portion 2205 in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) among the three general winning openings 2001. The shape is similar to that of the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the leftmost general winning opening 2001, it is possible for some players to have the illusion that the game ball B has been received in the starting opening. Then, even if the game ball B is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, which is an illusion that it is the starting opening, the lottery of the special lottery result is not performed, so that the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side feel distrust. There is a fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 (a position that cannot be accepted by "right-handed") away from the first starting port 2002 in the center in the left-right direction to the left, and the second Since there is no decorative sticker attached to the front of the front wall 2205 to indicate the starting port, it is possible to reconfirm that it is not the starting port, and the player feels distrust and enjoys the game. It is possible to avoid lowering it.

Further, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is compared with the case where the front ends thereof are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. In addition to being able to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced because the decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001.

The angle of inclination from the horizontal on the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) is not shown, but the variable winning openings such as the large winning opening and the accessory winning opening can be opened and closed. The winning opening door is larger than the horizontal inclination angle when the game ball B is rotated around the lower side so as to move forward so as to guide the game ball B to the winning opening side. It is an angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by accepting the game ball B to the variable winning opening is larger than that of the general winning opening 2001, many of the game balls B to the variable winning opening are used. Will hope for a prize. Alternatively, even if the variable winning opening (large winning opening) has a specified number of winnings, the player will wish to win more than the specified number. Therefore, by making the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening gentler than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. Therefore, as described above, when the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning opening, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning opening, and to give the general winning opening 2001 the joy (superiority complex) that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning opening. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning door in the open state is loose, it takes a long time for the winning door in the open state to close, so that the number of game balls B is more than the specified number for the player. Can make you feel like doing.

Further, in the two general winning openings 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, the portion extending diagonally downward from the lower end of the portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is more than the distance of the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end. The distance of is formed longer. As a result, since the winning opening is the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out, but the lottery such as the ordinary lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Therefore, the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001 Can be hidden from the player's field of vision at an early stage.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the side unit 2200, among a plurality of general winning openings 2001, the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 is inclined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all general winning openings 2001 are used. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called “left-handed”) in the normal game state can enter the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not tilted. The one provided at the position is shown, but it is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 whose front is not tilted is in an advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probability change", or "big hit"). The game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called "right-handed") may be provided at a position where the ball can enter, or may be provided at both.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having an inclination on the front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening) is opened from the time when it is closed. It has a narrow angle. If the number of game balls B paid out when winning a prize in the large prize opening is larger than that in the general winning opening 2001, the player will win more than the specified number even in the large winning opening where the specified number of winnings is set. I hope. Therefore, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B that has won the big prize opening rolls to the back side is slower than the speed at which the game ball B that has won the general winning opening 2001 with the front tilted rolls to the back side. There is. In other words, when the general winning opening 2001, which is smaller than the number paid out when winning the large winning opening, is won, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B winning the large winning opening rolls to the back side is faster. ing. In other words, it can be said that the more payouts are made, the slower the time it takes to disappear from the player's field of view. As a result, the more payouts are made, the longer the time of joy when winning can be provided.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right. The entire side upper left unit 2300 is transparently formed.

The side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, and the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the first prize-winning door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in the first attacker unit in a cross section.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is arranged in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. It is installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, in front view, the second starting port 2004 is provided on the upper part to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the first winning opening 2005 is on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and more than the second starting port 2004. It is provided at a lower position, and the first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the first large winning opening 2005.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 has a second start port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a first that detects the game ball B received in the first grand prize opening 2005. It includes a large winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 that detects illegal magnetism. Two first prize opening sensors 2402 and two magnetic sensors 2404 are provided.

The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, the front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 to form the flow path of the game ball B, and the rear side of the unit base 2411. The rear cover 2413, the second start port door 2414 that is attached to the unit base 2411 and can close the second start port 2004, and the second start port door 2414 are moved to open and close the second start port 2004. The start port solenoid 2415 for making the start port solenoid 2415, the solenoid cover 2416 covering the start port solenoid 2415, the first big prize opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first big prize opening 2005, and the first The first attacker solenoid 2418 for moving the first prize opening door 2417 to open and close the first prize opening 2005, and the transmission for moving the first prize opening door 2417 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418. A member 2419 and a member 2419 are provided.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the first grand prize opening decoration substrate 2420 for emitting and decorating the first grand prize opening 2005 and the rear surface of the rear cover 2413. Second start port sensor 2401, first prize opening sensor 2402, first sub-out port sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, start port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first prize opening decorative board 2420 and panel relay board It includes a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710.

The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating back and forth near the upper end to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and a first guide hole 2411b penetrating back and forth below the first opening 2411a. A second opening 2411c that is long left and right and penetrates back and forth in the upper part on the left side from the center, and two second guide holes 2411d that are lined up side by side and penetrate front and back below the second opening 2411c. It has a first sub-out port 2011 that penetrates back and forth below the guide hole 2411b.

The left and right widths of the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 are formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inserted through the first opening 2411a. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b projects rearward in a tubular shape and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is inserted through the second opening 2411c. Each of the second guide holes 2411d projects rearward in a tubular shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered.

Further, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two contact portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e use the game ball B, which is rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417, as the contact portion of the front cover 2412 when the first prize opening 2005 is closed. In cooperation with each other, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-back direction.

A second start port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b, with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 is attached with the detection holes protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes match. Further, magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to a portion on the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and a portion on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

The front cover 2412 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and is transparently formed into a member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left and a game ball from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the left in the front view. It is spaced slightly longer than the diameter of B and extends shorter than the first shelf 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2412a and between the first shelf 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004 and the second shelf so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B on the left side of the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The third shelf 2412c, which extends shorter than the portion 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are spaced from the left end to the left by 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the third shelf 2412c. It has a fourth shelf portion 2412d, which extends from a lower position to the left and forms a first large winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B and is separated to the left from the right side of the front cover 2412. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are inclined at the same angle, respectively, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

Further, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. The second standing wall portion 2412f extending to the height, the third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and the third shelf portion 2412c. The fourth standing wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end to the lower side of the front cover 2412, the fifth standing wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. It has a sixth vertical wall portion 2412j extending downward from the fourth shelf portion 2412d and a seventh vertical wall portion 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

The fifth vertical wall portion 2412i extends downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lower to the left. Further downward, it extends to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth vertical wall portion 2412j extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then lower to the right. Above and further down, it extends to the bottom of the front cover 2412. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the left-right direction is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and the first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e, after inclining so that the game ball B is lowered to the left with a space between the first lateral wall portion 2412l and the first lateral wall portion 2412l, and then to the middle of the fourth standing wall portion 2412h on the left side. It has a second side wall portion of 2412 m, which is inclined so as to be higher toward the side. The first lateral wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second lateral wall portion 2412 m is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends from the lower part of each of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the direction of approaching each other. It has a third lateral wall portion 2412n extending and a partition portion 2412o extending upward while connecting the opposite ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lowered to the left, and the interval at which the game ball B can be distributed between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. It is provided with a space. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The right end of the upper shelf 2412p is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Further, although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and is triangular at a portion that is staggered in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions that project rearward in shape. These contact portions refer the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 when the first prize opening 2005 is closed. In cooperation with each other, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-back direction.

The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape that is open forward, and is formed of a transparent member. The rear cover 2413, in cooperation with the unit base 2411, holds the second starting door 2414, the solenoid cover 2416, the first winning door 2417, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. Further, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second starting port sensor 2401, the first winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403 so as to sandwich it.

The second starting port door 2414 has a flat plate-shaped door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and extending in the left-right direction from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b, with respect to the unit base 2411. It has a rotating shaft 2414c that is rotatably attached to the arm portion 2414b, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided at a portion of the lower part of the arm portion 2414b away from the rotating shaft 2414c and is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. ..

The door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to a position substantially the same as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided on the arm portion 2414b closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c.

The second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second start port door 2414 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2414c due to the advancement and retreat of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2414a moves in the front-rear direction. The start port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The start port solenoid 2415 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes is directed forward. When the start port solenoid 2415 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when energized.

The first prize-winning door 2417 is a flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a that is long to the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both ends in the left-right direction of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b, respectively. It has a rotating shaft 2417c that extends coaxially from the lower end to the left and right, and a columnar link pin 2417d that projects to the right from the lower part of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first prize-winning door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The pair of arm portions 2417b extend downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bend forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided on the lower side of the arm portion 2417b closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in the transmission member 2419 described later.

The first prize-winning door 2417 can close the first prize-winning door 2005 by the door portion 2417a. The first prize-winning door 2417 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2417c due to the advancement and retreat of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front-rear direction. The first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes is directed forward. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extension portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and the extension portion 2419b. It also has a slit 2419c that extends vertically. The link pin 2417d of the first prize-winning door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first grand prize opening decorative substrate 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first grand prize opening decorative substrate 2420 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The first grand prize opening decoration substrate 2420 can illuminate the first grand prize opening 2005 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the start port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state, respectively. In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 projects forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second start port door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. Protruding forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the door portion 2414a cannot accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

Further, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 is the second opening of the unit base 2411. It projects forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 is located above the first prize opening 2005, and the door portion 2417a cannot accept the game ball B into the first prize opening 2005. It is in a state of being. That is, the first grand prize opening 2005 is closed by the first grand prize opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

When the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf portion 2412a in this normal state, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second start opening door 2414 After rolling the upper surface and the second shelf portion 2412b, the second shelf portion 2412b is discharged from the left end to the left. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 according to its momentum, and is left due to their inclination. Roll to the direction. When the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b abuts on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and bounces to the right, a gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c May enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first prize opening 2005 with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412. They will come into contact with each other alternately, and will roll to the left while zigzag in the front-back direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a is released from the left end thereof to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 after rolling the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m, and falls near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m. Due to the inclination of the part 2412 m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, the second horizontal wall portion 2412 m passes between the third standing wall portion 2412 g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412 h. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2412 m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and then enters the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back induction unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B circulating on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c are both first. It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the start port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger resists the urging force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d on the arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (door portion 2414a side) is pulled backward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second start port door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retract from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. It becomes. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and becomes the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls on the first lateral wall portion 2412 l. The portion of the first lateral wall portion 2412l between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the game ball B rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from the rear end. The game ball B discharged rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is delivered onto the substrate holder 1200 below the back guide unit 3050. It is discharged.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retracts together with the transmission member 2419 attached to its tip against the urging force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 retracts, the link pin 2417d of the first prize-winning door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pressed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

As a result, the first prize-winning door 2417 rotates about the rotation shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. It will move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first large winning opening door 2417 to the rear of the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first large winning opening 2005 is opened upward and the first large winning opening 2005 is reached. The game ball B is ready to be accepted (see FIG. 124). That is, the first prize opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 when the first grand prize opening 2005 is open, it passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j, and then the fifth standing wall. After passing between the portion 2412i and the partition portion 2412o or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partition portion 2412o, it is detected by one of the two first major winning opening sensors 2402, and then the first (3) It falls on the lateral wall portion 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to be lowered from the upper surface toward the rear, and the game ball B that has fallen on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit base 2411 It is discharged backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B discharged rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. ..

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first prize opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first prize opening 2005, the vicinity of the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first prize opening 2005. Since the door portion 2417a is rotated around the rotation shaft 2417c extending to the left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction to open and close the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 (first prize opening 2005) The depth of the attacker unit 2400) in the front-rear direction can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same in the second starting port 2004 opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. As a result, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

Further, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2412o, and each is detected by the different first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 Since it is released to the rear of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying between the first prize opening 2005 and the first prize sensor 2402, and many game balls are released in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. ..

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 projecting from the outer periphery and contacting the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from invading from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, in the support portion 2503, the end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player exerts the effect as reinforcement. I try to make it inconspicuous.

More specifically, a plurality of support units 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in the support portion 2503 provided at a portion above the warp inlet 2511 described later and where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes to the leftmost position, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the portion is intermediate between the portions extending vertically. Is shaped like a bulge to the left. The tip end side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both the upper and lower sides of the portion bulging to the left of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and at the portion bulging to the left of the peripheral wall portion 2501. It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is formed in a straight line so as to connect the upper and lower side portions (see FIG. 135). In the state where the support portion 2503 of this portion is assembled on the game board 5, the portion extending linearly up and down at the tip side of the support portion 2503 is a back front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It roughly follows a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, since the tip edge of the support portion 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, it becomes difficult for the support portion 2503 to discriminate, and the back front left decoration provided relatively behind. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made to stand out.

Further, among the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 on the lower side of the warp inlet 2511 extends to the right in a quadrangular shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends diagonally. The support portion 2503 of this portion is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 and the like). ). Since the tip side extending to the left and right of the support portion 2503 extends in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, it looks like a part of the shape of the shutter 3732. The support unit 2503 is difficult to discriminate (see FIG. 111).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the left side of the front view and in front of the front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, the warp outlet 2512 which is made capable of releasing the game ball B which has entered the warp entrance 2511 and is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided so as to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is located at a position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. When attached to 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W shape) so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central discharge portion 2513a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side discharge portion 2513b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (center discharge portion 2513a) in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the upper right corner and includes a guide passage group 2520 composed of two passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the abutment of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006 and is driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, and the game ball B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 which are separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501. It is composed of a second guide passage 2522 extending from the center. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other to the left and right. Further, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and are opened diagonally to the lower right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B in contact with the abutting portion 1006 are the first guides. It is formed to enter the passage 2521.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 which protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then discharges it downward. In this lower right guide passage 2530, the entrance opens upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and the exit opens diagonally to the lower left with the width of one game ball B.

The right end of the lower right guide passage 2530 is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, a second attacker unit 2600, a side right middle unit 2700, and a gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the center accessory 2500 at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is an outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the back unit can be passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make 3000 decorations and the like more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 projecting inward is provided in the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection molding mold without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is projected shortly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided with respect to the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the back surface where the support portion 2503 is provided at the rear. It is possible to reduce the hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the center accessory 2500 such as the support unit 2503 is made transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left production unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located as close as possible to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 on the rear side from being blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. Therefore, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the visibility of the decorative bodies and the like provided at the rear, and it is possible to surely exert the decorative effect by them.

Further, since the support unit 2503 and the like are transparent and the support unit 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body and the effect display device 1600 that can be luminescent and decorated, the luminescent decoration can be performed by the light from them, and the appearance is improved. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, behind the support portion 2503 (cross-hatched portion in FIG. 135), the back front left effect unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 in the back unit 3000 are provided. , The light radiated forward from the LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the back front left effect unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted, and diffused to create a gorgeous light emitting decoration. It can be shown to the player. In addition, the support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like, and the light from the rear can be diffused by the step or the like, so that the light can be made to look more gorgeous.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided so as to have a portion in which the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is provided. At a close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same surface as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further increased as compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if you want to make the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support portion 2503 should be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support unit 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear in the front view.

The edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the back front left effect unit 3700 provided at the rear. As a result, since the support portion 2503 is different from the rear decoration, it is possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from conspicuously lowering the decorativeness of the rear decorative body, and at the same time, the support portion 2503 also has decorativeness. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the above embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and those decorations are provided by the lens effect. Although the one that suppresses the appearance of blurring is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the support portion 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 away from the rear back unit 3000. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear may be intentionally made to look blurry.

Further, in the above embodiment, an opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided, and the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. It is also possible that there is no rear portion to be inserted into the opening 1112 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, and in this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 which does not have the opening 1112. .. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 which does not have the opening 1112, the support portion 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center accessory 2500 is not provided with the flange portion 2502. You may do so.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Subsequently, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 (b) shows the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the side right middle unit in the front unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second grand prize opening 2006 that opens and closes to the left (see FIG. 129).

The second attacker unit 2600 has a second major winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time that acts near the second major winning opening 2006. It is equipped with 2602. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second major winning opening door 2611 for closing the second major winning opening 2006 so as to be openable and closable, and the second major winning opening door 2611 to move the second major winning opening 2006. The second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, the transmission member (not shown) that transmits the advance and retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second prize opening door 2611, and the second prize opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 that guides the received game ball B and discharges it rearward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the second large winning opening 2006 opens to the left at a position to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the second large winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning door 2611 is provided.

The second prize-winning door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that extends linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a bulge from the upper end of the right side to the left. It is formed in a so-called wing shape, which is composed of an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second prize-winning door 2611 has a columnar rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircle as the axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position away from the rotating shaft. It has a pin (not shown). The lower rotation shaft of the second prize opening door 2611 is rotatably attached so that the upper end moves to the left.

The second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward, although detailed illustration is omitted. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second prize opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is located so that the right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the second grand prize opening 2006 and the peripheral wall portion of the center accessory 2500. A space through which the game ball B can be distributed is formed between the 2501 and the right side. Further, in the state of the second attacker unit 2600 assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guidance passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second prize-winning door 2611 is upright, and the second prize-winning door 2006 is closed by the second prize-winning door 2611. That is, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted for the second major winning opening 2006.

In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second prize-winning door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second large winning opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second prize-winning door 2611 moves to the left, the second prize-winning door 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second prize-winning door 2611 becomes lower. It becomes a tilted state. That is, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the game ball B that has flowed down comes into contact with the second large winning opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is accepted by the second large winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is guided by the guidance passage 2613 after being detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2601, and is discharged backward. The game ball B discharged rearward from the guidance passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guidance unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. The side right middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward with the width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and the game is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001 in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with the width of two balls B.

Further, the side right middle unit 2700 has a first guide passage 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear and a second guide passage B to guide the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear. It has two guide passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, which extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, then bends to the right and then bends further rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends rearward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701. The exit of the first guide passage 2701 and the exit of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

In the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Further, in the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game ball B can circulate is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at a position slightly to the left of the second major winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upward over substantially the entire space (see FIG. 130 and the like).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guidance passage 2701, and is provided behind the back. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guidance passage 2702, and is provided behind the back unit. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the table unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. Has been done. The gate member 2800 includes a gate portion 2003 in which a lottery for the result of a normal lottery for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 when the game ball B passes, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate portion 2003. It has 2801 and. The detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is the gate portion 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 protruding diagonally from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface toward the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

The gate member 2800 is located substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the game is played on both the left and right sides. A gap through which the sphere B can flow is formed. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. FIG. 130 is an enlarged explanatory view of the right portion in the game area in FIG. 115. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. Further, a windmill W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center accessory 2500 into the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. It is adjusted so as to enter the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability than those. As a result, the game ball B can be driven into the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability by hitting it so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are more than the game ball B circulating through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B that has passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B circulates mainly on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and is driven upward from the left side along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500. N guides the user to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability. You will be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that the side unit 2200 will be accepted by the three general winning openings 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to any of the 3064s, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is rarely accepted by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game ball B that is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted at the first starting port 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may pass between a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200, and the side unit 2200 may flow down. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that the first is likely to occur. Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side discharge portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first start port sensor. After being detected by 3052, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3052, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 and is accepted into the second starting port 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2006. There is no possibility of being killed.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 has a probability of being accepted by the second starting port 2004 with respect to the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is not in the open state, the operation of driving the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (“left-handed”) can be promoted.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed with the strength that the game ball B enters above the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. When driven, the game ball B circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed striking). Then, the game ball B in contact with the abutment portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate portion 2003 directly above.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is located on the left side of the gate member 2800 and at the gate portion by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. In 2003, the right side of the gate member 2800 is guided so that the probability becomes lower, and the side right middle unit 2700 side flows down.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Is released downward from. The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and is delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of the normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of being the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of the sill, and is sometimes accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, it is discharged onto the board holder 1200. At this time, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Flow down to the left of.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is highly likely to be accepted by the second big winning mouth 2006.

The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006 is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2601 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, and then in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back induction unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By detecting the game ball B by the second large winning opening sensor 2601, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B, which was not accepted by the second prize opening 2006 and flowed down to the left of the second prize opening 2006, entered the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exited the lower right guide passage 2530. Is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released downward (diagonally lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly connected to the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and moves the upper surface of the door 2414a of the second starting door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the left. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door 2417a of the first winning opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and their inclinations. After rolling to the left from the door portion 2417a and rolling the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged from the fourth shelf portion 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, by contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N, the ball does not flow down to the first shelf 2412a but to the upper shelf 2412p. It may flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination, is released from the left end of the upper shelf 2412p to the left, and then hits the obstacle nail N planted on the left. After abutting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first prize opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left and the first It is released to the outside of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, the first major prize depending on the timing when the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing when the first prize opening 2005 is opened. It may be accepted in the winning opening 2005.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first shelf portion 2412a bounces to the right due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf portion 2412p. By flowing down, the first shelf portion 2412a may be rolled to the right against the inclination and discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right (downward). The game ball B discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right passes between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down to the vicinity of the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m. Then, due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m, it rolls to the left and is received by the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned to the game area 5a, but is not returned to the game area 5a, and the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, if the "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003, the second start Since the mouth door 2414 is movable and the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that is rolling the first shelf portion 2412a to the left is accepted by the second starting port 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received by the second start port 2004, it is detected by the second start port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Further, when the game ball B is discharged to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are performed. As a result, when the "big hit" was drawn, the first big prize opening door 2417 was moved and the first big winning opening 2005 was opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, so that it was released from the second shelf 2412b to the left. The game ball B will be accepted into the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first prize opening 2005 is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the first large winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B may come into contact with the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and flow down diagonally to the lower right to reach the second shelf 2412b and the third. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf and the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It falls and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2412 m, and is received by the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is accepted by any of the second starting port 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If this is not the case, the game is discharged downward from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a, behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

Therefore, in order to open and close the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is made to accept the game ball B, and a "small hit" is made. It is necessary to have the lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first start port 2002 is always open, the second start port 2004 needs to let the gate portion 2003 pass the game ball B to draw (assign) the "normal hit" as the result of the normal lottery. Therefore, the opportunity for the second starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B is driven into the player so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received at the first starting port 2002. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the "small hit" or "big hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 To open and close, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed" so that the game ball B can be accepted in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006, and the first prize opening It is possible to raise expectations for acceptance of the game ball B in 2005 or the second prize opening 2006.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and it is easy to pass through the gate portion 2003 by the guide passage to be distributed. , Since it is easy to be accepted by the second sub-out port 2012, the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates in the desired guide passage, and the player can be made to play the game ball. You can enjoy the driving operation of B.

In addition, there is a possibility that a "normal hit" in which the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 by performing "right-handed" may be drawn, and the open state may be drawn. Since there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" or a "big hit" will be drawn, it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening 3010a in the rear wall and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the flat back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively, and at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010. The back guide unit 3050 is provided, the back rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and the back guide unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010 are separated from each other to the left and right. The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back back left effect unit 3500, the back front right decoration unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back back left in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500, and the back front right production unit 3700 provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. It is equipped with 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and various effect units are mounted, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are mounted on the rear side. The back box 3010 is transparently formed of synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a in which the front is open and a square penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601b of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting decorative bodies, effect units, and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Subsequently, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and shown with the door frame transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at a distance from each other to the left and right.

The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat plate-shaped base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative sticker 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The back front left decorative body 3030 is formed opaquely, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat plate-shaped base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaquely, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

When the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are assembled on the game board 5, the outer peripheral edge on the outside extends in a flat plate shape so as to be located outside the game area 5a in the front view. (See FIGS. 111 and 135, etc.). Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge on the outside is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. It extends to.

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, in front view, the back front left decorative body 3030 is halved from the bottom of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 provided in the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. It is extended to the position of. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in the front view. Further, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

As a result, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 (shaded portion in FIG. 135), and the back rear left from the player side. The elevating drive motor 3554 can be obscured. Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). Since it extends to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

Further, in the back front left decorative body 3030, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 is extended so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it in the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front view of the front component 1000, the function display unit Instead of 1400, the back front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 (functional component) and the like provided at the rear.

On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the front view, and is transparent to the front. Even through the constituent members 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is made invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved by making the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side. It is possible to exert the same action and effect as the back front left decorative body 3030.

As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the rear is covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can cover the front of the functional parts provided behind, the front constituent members 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. However, the functional parts can be made invisible from the player side. That is, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, give the player a feeling of openness, and give the player a feeling of openness, and the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area does not change, the game area 5a can be made larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts outside the game area 5a in the decorative sticker 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative sticker 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040, which are provided with predetermined decorations, are the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Since it can be visually recognized from the front through the game, the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated, and the game area 5a can be made larger than it actually is, which can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be a board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit Light from the 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (on the player side) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be shown, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

In addition, the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided in the rear are provided from the player side by the portions extending outward from the game area 5a in the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional parts may be provided outside the game area 5a in the front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, when trying to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a possibility that a problem that must be generated may occur, a part of the functional parts is placed outside the game area 5a in a balance such that a large game area 5a can be taken with respect to the size of the game board 5 as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide it.

Further, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 be decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in the front view. As a result, the design inside the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can make the 5a look larger than it actually is, and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back induction unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape in which both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guide unit 3050 is formed to be substantially entirely transparent.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and the like. The out port sensor 3053 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010, the second sub out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub out port 2012, and the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. It is provided with a magnetic sensor 3055, which is provided in a portion behind the above and detects illegal magnetism.

Further, the back guidance unit 3050 was received in the first delivery port 3061 to which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is delivered, and in the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. The second delivery port 3062 to which the game ball B is delivered, the third delivery port 3063 to which the game ball B received to the general winning opening 2001 on the inside of the side unit 2200, and the general on the left side of the side unit 2200 The fourth delivery port 3064, in which the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 is delivered, and the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The 5th delivery port 3065, the 6th delivery port 3066 to which the game ball B received in the 1st big winning opening 2005 of the 1st attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the 2nd big winning opening 2006 of the 2nd attacker unit 2600 are accepted. The seventh delivery port 3067 to which the game ball B is delivered, the eighth delivery port 3068 to which the game ball B received to the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the side right middle unit 2700 It is provided with a ninth delivery port 3069 to which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back guidance unit 3050 has a first discharge path and a second discharge path for guiding the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then discharging it downward. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and then delivered to the second discharge path and the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and then discharges it diagonally to the lower right, and a position where the game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is below the sixth delivery port 3066. It is provided with a fourth discharge path, which is guided downward to the left, guided to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066, and then discharged diagonally to the lower left. The fifth delivery port 3065, the sixth delivery port 3066, the seventh delivery port 3067, and the ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery port 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first start port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. Will be done. The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the second delivery port 3062, and the game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side and delivered to the third delivery port 3063. The ball B joins the second discharge path, is detected by the general winning opening 2001, and then is discharged downward. The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. ..

It is received by the second start port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received by the game ball B and the first big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B received by the second major winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth. It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is on the upstream side of the part communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 merges with the fourth discharge path after being detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, and the second (Iv) It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes an out ball detection member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out-ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2006. To detect the game ball B received in the out opening 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that did not exist (the game ball B for which the privilege was not given, also referred to as "out ball"). belongs to.

The out-ball detection member 3080 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 from the rear, and the tubular portion 3081 and the tubular portion 3081 that extend the game ball B in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction so as to be able to flow. A partition portion 3082 that divides the inside into left and right, a flange portion 3083 that protrudes in a flat plate shape in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylinder portion 3081, and a game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the cylinder portion 3081 and moves downward. It is provided with a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and discharged (see FIG. 114). The out-ball detection member 3080 is provided with an out-port sensor 3053 between the tubular portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

The tubular portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction in which two game balls B are sufficiently lined up (a width in which three game balls B are not lined up), and the lower inner surface is It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear side. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and is partitioned to a size that allows one game ball B to pass on both the left and right sides. The partition portion 3082 is curved so that the front end side projects forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and projects forward.

In the out ball detection member 3080, two out port sensors 3053 are provided side by side. The left out port sensor 3053 detects the game ball B circulating on the left side of the partition portion 3082 in the tubular portion 3081, and the right out port sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition portion 3082 in the tubular portion 3081. It detects the distributed game ball B. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two out-port sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the inner surface on the lower side of the tubular portion 3081. As a result, the distribution direction of the game ball B circulating in the tubular portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the out port sensor 3053, so that the out port sensor 3053 can smoothly detect the game ball B, and the game ball B can be detected smoothly. Can be quickly discharged to prevent stagnation on the front side of the outlet sensor 3053.

The out-ball detection member 3080 has a tubular portion 3081 inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 (see FIG. 114).

In the state of the out ball detection member 3080 assembled on the game board 5, the upper part of the front end of the tubular portion 3081 projects forward from the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

The out ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided backward by the out guide unit 1003 and received in the out port 2010. The game ball B is detected by one of the two out-port sensors 3053 through the tubular portion 3081, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without abutting it on the substrate holder 1200.

According to the out-ball detection member 3080 of the present embodiment, since the partition portion 3082 partitions between the two out-port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 can be seen. It is possible to guide the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the out port sensor 3053 side on the right side while being able to guide the game ball B to the out port sensor 3053 side on the left side. Therefore, in each of the left and right out-port sensors 3053, it is determined whether the player tends to be "left-handed" or "right-handed" based on the number of game balls B detected per hour. Based on the discrimination, it is possible to promote the optimum driving operation for the game situation and enjoy the intended game.

Further, in the out-ball detection member 3080, the protrusion of the partition portion 3082 to the front is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over the partition. Therefore, when a large number of game balls B enter the out-port 2010 per hour, the partition is made. The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side where the distribution amount of the game ball B is relatively small in the part 3082, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 2010 without delay.

Further, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is projected downward from the discharge portion 1201 of the board holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second big winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 flows back by the out-ball detection member 3080 and by the out-port sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent the detection from being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the "out ball" received in the out port 2010.

In the present embodiment, the out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided on the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detecting member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has an out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that the game panel 1100 can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123. At the same time, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the player is driven into the game area 5a and has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005, and a second large winning opening 2006. Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that is not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, for example, a specific prize is won. If the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth is continuously detected but the "out ball" is not detected, it means that a cheating is being performed on a specific winning opening. It is possible to notify that cheating is being carried out.

In addition, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening The number of "winning balls" and the number of "out balls" counted by the detection of the game ball B received in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first large From the number of "safe balls" paid out by accepting the game ball B to the winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006, the "ball ejection rate" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although not shown, a display unit for displaying the "ball output rate" is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

Further, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“global”) driven into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“global”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, since only the "out ball" is detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, the "out ball" and the "winning ball" are detected. By comparing the numbers of "" and "global", the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 can be detected.

[5-9d. Back-to-back production unit]
Next, the back-rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back-back effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-back effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part (front of the rear wall) in the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape with the front view open downward, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 includes a back-rear movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction and a back-rear movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-rear movable decoration 3110 in the vertical direction.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 extending in the left-right direction and having a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of first decorative bodies 3111 provided behind the decorative body 3111 and having a relief-like decoration on the front surface. It includes a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decorative base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, each of which is a surface mount type. The decorative body 3111 (back-back movable decorative body 3110) can be light-emittingly decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-back decorative substrate 3114.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 has a movable protrusion 3116a protruding from the lower end to the left, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding from the upper end to the left in a triangular shape, and a detection piece 3116c provided on the upper end. Have.

The back-rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U-shape with the front view open downward, and extends vertically in a columnar shape on the left side of the unit base 3121 mounted in the back box 3010 and the unit base 3121. The slide shaft 3122, which supports the left slider 3116 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, extends vertically on the left side of the slide shaft 3122 in parallel with the slide shaft 3122, and spirals on the outer circumference. It includes a spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

Further, in the back-rear movable mechanism 3120, a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 on a rotating shaft. The back-rear drive motor 3126, the motor base 3127 in which the back-rear drive motor 3126 is attached to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 are rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. It includes a bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123.

Further, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed into the spiral shaft 3123 and can come into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from below, and the slide guide 3130 on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends up and down and can be raised and lowered so that the lower end side can come into contact with the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that urges the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction by moving up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by rotation of the link member 3133 and can come into contact with the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110. It has.

Further, the back / rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back / rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back / rear movable decorative body 3110, a back / rear / lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a back / rear. The front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Connection between the front right cover 3138 attached and the back rear drive motor 3126, the back rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 attached to the lower front surface of the front left cover 3137 and the effect drive board 1720. The connection between the back-rear left relay board 3139 and the back-rear decorative board 3114 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, which is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138, and the effect drive board 1720. It is provided with a back-right relay board 3140 that is relaying.

The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that abuts on the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the impact. The upper end and the lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

The slide guide 3130 projects to the right from the vicinity of the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and the slide guide 3130 is made non-rotatable with respect to the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by coming into contact with them. In the slide guide 3130, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface. Further, in the slide guide 3130, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the slide guide 3130.

The transmission slider 3131 is attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 is movable in the vertical direction only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding to the right on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding to the right on the upper end side, and a columnar protrusion rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. It is provided with a protruding pin 3131c. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower surface of the slide guide 3130 that can come into contact with the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. Further, in the transmission slider 3131, the protrusion pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

The upper end side of the spring 3132 is attached to the unit base 3121, and the lower end side is attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131 to urge the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 has a front view shape formed into a triangle in which each apex is R-chamfered. The link member 3133 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near one apex around an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a long-hole first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis and a long-hole shape extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the apex above the rotation axis. It has a second slit 3133b and. In the link member 3133, the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is slidably attached in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137 between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 projects rearward in a columnar shape, forms a flat upper end surface with a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and laterally. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is elongated and is inclined so as to move to the left from the right end of the contact surface 3134b to which it can contact and downward. It has a guide surface 3134c to which the locking projection 3116b can come into contact with.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to slidably support the right slider 3117 of the back / rear movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-and-forth effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state of the back-rear effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141 (a)), the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in a retracted position in which the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward, and the slide guide 3130. Is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and is located at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the back-rear movable decoration body is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the 3110 is in contact.

In the normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the spring 3132. The protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133. The urging force of the 3132 is such that the link member 3133 acts in the clockwise direction about the rotation axis and the lock member 3134 is urged in the direction of sliding to the right. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the urging force of the spring 3132.

In this state, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if either the slide guide 3130 or the lock member 3134 moves from the position for some reason (fault), the rest may prevent the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from moving (falling) downward. it can.

Further, in a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the back-rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back-rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

The back-up effect unit 3100 is located behind the back-up effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the evacuation position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view) by the back-rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is lowered. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the lock protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, so that the back-rear movable decoration 3110 cannot move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110.

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 is the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It abuts on the upper end surface (see FIG. 141 (b)). When the slide guide 3130 further moves downward while the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward. The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

When the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 counterclockwise around its rotation axis. It will rotate in the clockwise direction. Then, as the link member 3133 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left via the transmission pin 3134a inserted in the second slit 3133b. The lock member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 141 (c)).

When the lock member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is not detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the dropped back-rear movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, so that the falling is stopped and the state of the appearance position is reached (see FIG. 141 (c)). In the state of this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 does not come into contact with the back-rear movable decoration.

In the back rear movable decorative unit 3100, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) in the state of the appearance position where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has fallen. In this state, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (decorative body 3111) can be light-emitting and decorated. The light emitting decoration can entertain the player.

When returning the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the retracted position in the normal state, the rear-rear drive motor 3126 causes the spiral shaft 3123 to move in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in a plan view). Rotate in the direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 due to the urging force of the spring 3132. Then, when the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates in the clockwise direction and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and stops at the lock position, contrary to the above. Become.

Further, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing against, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141 (d)).

Then, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward by the slide guide 3130 to the vicinity of the retracted position, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b abuts on the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes the locking member 3134 to move to the left. It acts, and the lock member 3134 slides to the right against the urging force of the spring 3132 that tends to move to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

When the locking projection 3116b is located above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressure of the locking projection 3116b on the guide surface 3134c is eliminated. The lock member 3134 slides to the right by the urging force of the spring 3132 and is in the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is located below the locking projection 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and the lock member 3134 moves the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 downward. Can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the back-rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back-rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearance position to the state of the retracted position which is the normal state.

According to the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the state of the retracted position which is invisible from the player side to the state of the appearance position where it can be seen. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the interest of the player.

Further, since the lock member 3134 that locks (regulates) the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is moved to the left to release the lock, it rotates around the axis in the front-rear direction. Compared with the case where the lock is released by moving the lock, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Movable decoration after back]
Subsequently, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the back-rear movable decorative body together with the back-rear decorative substrate. 143 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate with broken lines in the front view of FIG. 147. FIG. 149 (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 149 (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same portion as the decorative body of (a). (C) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate at the same portion as the decorative body of (a).

Further, FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. FIG. 152 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet and the light guide radiation plate and the back and rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the back and rear movable decorative body. FIG. 153 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide emitting plate and the back-rear decorative substrate at the portion of the first LED in a cross section, and FIG. 153 (b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the light guide radiating plate in the part which is doing from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement example of one LED from the front. FIG. 154 is a front view showing a part of the back-rear decorative substrate enlarged together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155 (a) is a front view of the back-rear decorative substrate, and FIG. 155 (b) is a rear view of the back-rear decorative substrate. FIG. 156 (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 156 (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form different from that of (a). It is an enlarged cross-sectional view, and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form further different from (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 made of a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is located in the left-right direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 provided near both the left and right ends and the two first decorative portions 3151 in the front view. It has a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. Each of the first decoration departments 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. Although not shown, the second decorative unit 3152 imitates a predetermined character, and is arranged in rows on the left and right to form the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, pachinko). A predetermined logo is formed according to the world view of the machine 1 (game board 5). In this way, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is decorated with a logo between the two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIGS. 142 to 146, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 is a decoration that extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decoration portion 3150 by the unevenness of the relief shape. A transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 having the above, and a translucent part (area) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and having a decoration (pattern) forming the rest of the decorative portion 3150. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (region), a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide emitting plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide emitting plate 3113 provided behind the light guide emitting plate 3113. The back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs and the second LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") and the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. A flat decorative base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover it, a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. It includes a slider 3117.

It should be noted that the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components such as the plurality of first LEDs and the second LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the surface of the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged. Indicates the attributes of the side electronic component (further, the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the surface electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component may be included). The front surface side notation is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111, a portion having translucency (translucent portion). Since the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 having the region) and the transparent portion (region), the transparent flat plate-shaped light guide emitting plate 3113, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are arranged in this order, the decorative sheet 3112 transmits light. Although there is a property (region), the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by silk printing is the light guide emitting plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and It is visible through the decorative body 3111, and in a state where the first LED and the second LED are turned off, it is a region corresponding to a translucent portion (region) and a predetermined paint color. When the LED can be visually recognized, the existence of the color of the predetermined paint can be confirmed, and it cannot be determined whether the color of the predetermined paint indicates a character or a symbol or a shape. On the other hand, if the area corresponds to the transparent part (area) and the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface indicated by the surface side notation) are determined by the color of the predetermined paint. The attributes of the side electronic components) can be determined.

[5-9d-2. Back and rear movable decorative body decoration body]
The decorative body 3111 has flat general surfaces on the front surface side and the rear surface side. The decorative body 3111 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from the general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and protruding forward, and a second decorative protrusion. It has a third decorative protrusion 3111c, which is shorter than the portion 3111b and projects forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided at a portion serving as an outline of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is formed at the outer periphery of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the portion that imitates the central stamen and pistil, respectively. .. The first decorative protrusion 3111a at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152 in double (two rows). The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided on the outside of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms and petals smaller than the first decorative protrusion 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. Further, the front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the portion corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

The first decorative protrusion 3111a and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 form a part of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 in the decorative portion 3150.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster in a portion (first foil pressing region (see FIG. 156 (a))) of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward from the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It has a metallic decorative portion 3111d (a shaded portion having a dark shade in FIGS. 147 to 149). The entire decorative body 3111 except for the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156 (a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided at a curved front portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided. It is not provided on the side part of. As a result, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is made longer than in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d can give a high-class feeling. At the same time, the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d can further emphasize the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in the second decorative portion 3152 at a portion in front of the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the first LED 3114a and the light guide emitting plate 3113. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the above is made difficult to see from the front.

Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear back decorative substrate 3114 is emitted from the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. It can be reflected rearward to illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is molded by injection molding of a synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is attached to a predetermined position of the hot stamping device in a state where the front side on which the first decorative protrusion 3111a or the like protrudes faces upward. At this time, above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate having elasticity on the lower surface side and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. .. Then, the hot plate is lowered from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 to a position at a predetermined distance (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b) to form the hot plate. The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil stamped) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil pressing region FS1 above (front) of the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156 (a)). ..

In the hot plate of the hot stamping apparatus used for forming the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment, the portion of the transfer sheet in contact with the decorative body 3111, which is the transfer destination of the metal foil, has elasticity. Even if the first decorative protrusion 3111a) is not flat and curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil is in good condition even on a three-dimensionally shaped part such as a curved surface. It can be transferred (foil stamped) with. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when forming the metal decorative protrusion 3111d by the hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, whereby the first decorative protrusion is formed. A metal decorative portion 3111d can be provided at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b to form the decorative body 3111.

Alternatively, with the unfinished intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 attached to the hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is formed using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (first metal foil) of a predetermined color. It is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil pressing area FS2), and first at the tip portions of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Transfer the metal foil. Subsequently, the hot plate is made lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b by using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) having a color different from that of the first metal foil. It is lowered to the position (first foil pressing region FS1), and the second metal foil is transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156 (b)). As a result, the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b form a decorative body 3111 having different colored metal decorative parts 3111d without masking the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111. be able to.

Further, in the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film on the surface of the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film of the portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled off (laser peeling) by laser light. , The decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided on the side surface portion in addition to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a.

The decorative body 3111 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear concave portion 3111e that is recessed from the general surface on the rear surface side toward the front. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. After this, the concave portion 3111e equalizes the plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 so that deformation due to sink marks of the resin during injection molding can be suppressed.

The rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward in a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recess 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a described later in the decorative sheet 3112. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact with each other, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visually recognized through the transparent decorative body 3111.

Further, since the rear recess 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is in front of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d described later in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided at the site. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear recess 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, the light radiated from the front to the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is emitted from the gap. , The front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e are diffusely reflected, and the portion of the rear recess 3111e becomes bright due to the light from the front. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are not emitted, the portions of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, , The first decorative part 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 that form the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f protruding from the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a portion directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. As a result, the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to see the mounting boss 3111f from the front (player side). In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the portion in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to see the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet of movable decorative body after back]
The decorative sheet 3112 has a thin sheet shape and is formed to have an outer shape substantially the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet having a pattern on the back surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 except for the rear portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111 and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A second contour portion 3112b provided at a portion between the first contour portion 3112a and the first decorative protrusion 3111a corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and formed in a double manner of the decorative body 3111. The first light diffusing portion 3112c provided in the portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (the portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c) corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151, and the first (Ii) A second light provided in a portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c) which is provided in the double direction of the decorative body 3111 corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152. It has a diffusion unit 3112d and.

Further, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transparent portion 3112e provided in a portion of the decorative body 3111 behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Have.

As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion having a pattern imitating a cherry blossom smaller than the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portion is It is said to be the part where the interference fringes of light are displayed by the hologram. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaquely. In the present embodiment, the portion of the hologram in the first contour portion 3112a is the same gold color as the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111. Further, the portion of the first contour portion 3112a that imitates a cherry blossom is white or pink (the pink color in this embodiment is the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It is colored according to the view).). In addition, the ink (paint) used for a pattern or the like may have glitter particles that shine.

The first contour portion 3112a is located behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, and is made of metal. Since it has a portion having the same color as the decorative portion 3111d (gold in the present embodiment), it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be emphasized, and it is possible to make it difficult to feel the thinness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110.

Further, the rear surface side of the first contour portion 3112a is formed to be light gray or white. As a result, the color development of the pattern and hologram on the front side is improved. Further, since the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a can reflect the light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the rear and return it to the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation Since the plate 3113 can emit light brighter, the amount of light radiated forward from the translucent portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated and decorated brighter. At the same time, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be radiated and decorated more uniformly.

Further, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, it is flat except for the rear concave portion 3111e on the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. It is provided behind the site. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no diffuse reflection, and the pattern or hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

The second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black linear shape having a predetermined width as shown in the figure. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) provided on the double side of the decorative body 3111. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double-formed golden metal decorative portions 3111d, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b enhances the double metal decorative portion 3111d. The decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 is translucent and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like, in one petal of the cherry blossom flower modeled by the first decorative portion 3151 at the portion of the first light diffusing portion 3112c, from the center to the periphery of the petal. A predetermined color (this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) toward the direction. Multiple dots (pink) are printed. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 for radiating light from the rear is made to emit light to the first light diffusing portion 3112c, it is slightly due to the pear-skin-like pattern of the first light diffusing portion 3112c. The shades will appear, and it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the luminescent decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 is translucent and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided on the entire inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as shown by light shading in FIGS. 147 to 149. Has been done. The second light diffusing portion 3112d has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusing portion 3112d are formed in a halftone dot-like pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a translucent milky white color. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 for radiating light from the rear is made to emit light to the second light diffusing portion 3112d, it is determined by the halftone dot pattern of the second light diffusing portion 3112d. The second decorative portion 3152 composed of the characters of can be light-emitting decorated with uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion of the decorative body 3111 that is inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111. Is provided with a rear recess 3111e recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed in the front surface of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state of being. Due to the gap, the light radiated from the front to the portion of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the first light is generated by the light from the front. The diffuser 3112c and the second light diffuser 3112d become brighter. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are not emitted, the portions of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, , The first decorative part 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 that form the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d, and decorates the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It constitutes the rest of the part 3150 excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of the transparent sheet as a base. There is. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Further, the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d may be used as a lens film or a prism film.

The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is transparently formed. Since the transmission portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light emitting from the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 causes the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light. A part of the light radiated forward can be transmitted to irradiate the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative protrusion 3111d is provided only on the front side and the side surface side remains transparent. Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided from the rear through the transparent portion 3112e. The light radiated to the surface leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e shines a halo on the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d). Further, the light radiated from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a to the outside through the transmitting portion 3112e can illuminate the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a from the front. Therefore, it is possible to make the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a more visible, and it is possible to make it easier to exert the decorative effect of the first contour portion 3112a.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram. The decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered, so that the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. At that time, by displaying an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player a unified effect. It is possible to give a person a visual impact and attract attention, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain a large decoration and suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In the decorative sheet 3112 of the above embodiment, a transparent transparent portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first contour portion 3112a may be provided at a portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d. As a result, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed diagonally from the front, the rear side can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e in the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to prevent the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from being unsightly. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a up to the portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d, the first decorative protrusion in the first contour portion 3112a is passed through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative protrusion 3111d is the first decorative protrusion. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiation plate of movable decorative body after back]
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the light guide emitting plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3113a extending to the left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3113a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c that penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and insert the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 that penetrates the main body portion 3113a in the front-rear direction. A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which the second LED 3114b is inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the peripheral edge of the 3113c, and an auxiliary reflection portion 3113g provided along the rear end side of the leg portion 3113f opposite to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. ..

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the front view right end of the main body portion 3113a.

The main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b projects rearward by about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end projecting rearward from the back rear decorative substrate 3114 in a state of being assembled on the back rear movable decorative body 3110.

The inner peripheral shape of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is formed to be rectangular. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the low-transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151, a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the portion in the first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 where the pink shade is darkened by dots. ing. More specifically, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c provided at the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is located on the center side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms. The center of the long side with a rectangular inner circumference is provided so as to be located on the center line of the petals.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Has been done. For this reason, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (first LED 3114a) are difficult to see from the front.

Further, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152 at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152. Further, when the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 149 (c) and 153 (c). It is formed in a state of being. By connecting the first LED accommodating portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 3113a from forming a portion thinner than the thickness thereof, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 is damaged. It can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the light is emitted. A part is reflected straight to the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c to the first LED accommodating portion. It will be emitted to the inside of 3113c. Then, when the light radiated from one of the four surfaces of the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c It reflects inward and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body 3113a, when the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing 3113c, it radiates to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c. Since a part of the light is reflected at the portion of the inner peripheral surface and the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side, the light that has passed through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The amount of light in the light will be greatly reduced as compared with before passing through.

For this reason, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a. Since the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light trying to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c can be blocked by the first LED 3114a. In the portion where the first LED 3114a is housed, the light does not pass to the opposite side of the first LED housing part 3113c. As a result, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at an optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be generated. It is possible to avoid being guided to another second decorative portion 3152 to be light-emitting decorated, and it is possible to reliably emit light-decorate only the desired second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of second decorative portions 3152. ..

To further describe the operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 153 (c), a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 of "i", "ro", "ha", and "☆". A first LED accommodating portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152, and light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 in each of the first LED accommodating portions 3113c. The first LED 3114a is provided so as to be used. In this embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided between "i" and "ro" and between "ro" and "ha" are close to each other, they are connected to each other. It is one hole. As a result, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for luminescent decoration of the "☆" arranged below the "I" are provided under the "☆". Therefore, when the first LED 3114a for luminescent decoration of "☆" is made to emit light, the "i" provided above the "☆" may be luminescently decorated, but it is provided at the upper left of the "☆". The first LED accommodating portion 3113c accommodating the first LED 3114a for luminescent decoration of a part of the "I" is provided with an extending portion 3113j extending so as to cover the upper part of the "☆". ing. With this extending portion 3113j, it is possible to reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for emitting and decorating the "☆" from being guided to the "I" side. As a result, even if "☆" is luminescently decorated, "i" is not luminescently decorated. In addition, the extension portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light for luminescent decoration of "I" from being guided to the "☆" side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as "i" or "☆" can be reliably luminescent and decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference. The plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d are provided behind the five circular portions imitating the stamens provided around the center in the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom, behind a circular portion imitating a stamen located on the center line of the petals. As a result, in each of the five petals, a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a second LED accommodating portion 3113d are provided one by one on the center line of the petals.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the light is emitted. A part of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3113a so as to diffuse in a fan shape. In the present embodiment, since the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a in each of the five petals in the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom, FIG. 153 (b) shows. As shown, the light radiated from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing 3113d, and the reflection thereof. Light can make the petals brighter and more luminescent.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in a square pyramid, and is arranged in a row so as to be continuous in the vertical and horizontal directions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e exclude a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, a portion around the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly reflect the light radiated in the direction along the plate surface forward within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a and radiate it from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a to the front. The light guide radiating plate 3113 of the present embodiment is formed so that the rear portion is difficult to see when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e.

Further, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be radiated forward from the substantially entire surface, so that the model can be changed or designed. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to the change or the like, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiating plate 3113, and it is possible to easily respond to the design change and the cost. Can be suppressed from increasing.

The leg portion 3113f projects rearward from the rear end side of the portion of the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to be inserted. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f is provided with a surface on the first LED accommodating portion 3113c side on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. As a result, the area of the light receiving unit 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be irradiated into the main body 3113a. Can be done. Further, when the legs 3113f are assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surface abuts on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is provided between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be formed.

The auxiliary reflection portion 3113g is provided in a C chamfer shape along the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting the light radiated from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f forward.

The right slider front portion 3113h is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider rear portion 3115d described later of the decorative body base 3115.

When the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The surface can be made difficult to see, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b projecting rearward from the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the back rear decorative substrate is provided from the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. The creepage distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are holes penetrating the main body portion 3113a, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is accommodated. The heat from the second LED 3114b housed in the LED 3114a and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the thermal influence on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are through holes, the front side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is blocked by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, or the like. Even if it is, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion are compared with the case where the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape). The volume (heat capacity) of the 3113d can be increased. As a result, it is possible to alleviate a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed therein, and it is possible to suppress the thermal influence on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the like. Further, in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c which is close to each other and is connected to each other and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c having the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as described above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a and further alleviate the rapid temperature rise.

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a second LED accommodating portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is as close as possible to the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to make the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 thinner in the front-rear direction.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f is brought into contact with the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. , A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. As a result, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is suppressed to be affected by the heat. Can be reduced. The gap between the main body 3113a and the substrate main body 3114c of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is defined as "half the distance from the front of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "from the front of the substrate main body 3114c to the first It is desirable that the distance is within the range of "a distance to the front surface of the LED 3114a". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a risk that it will not be possible to decorate it.

Further, the light guide radiating plate 3113 guides the light from the first LED 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and is forward by the reflecting portion 3113e on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body 3113a. Since it can be radiated to, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a portion of the main body 3113a where the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is not provided. In other words, even if the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is made smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be radiated forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body 3113a, the distance between the outer circumference of the main body 3113a and the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made longer, and the decorative body 3111 can be made longer. The creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface can be made longer to make it easier to exert the above-mentioned effects.

[5-9d-5. Back-rear movable decorative board back-rear decorative board]
On the surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a of a surface mount type and a side view type, a plurality of second LEDs 3114b of a surface mount type and a top view type, and a surface mount type 3114g of the connector (in FIG. 155 (a), one surface mount type connector 3114g is arranged on the right side of the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114). The packages of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector 3114g is white (natural color). It is also said to be made of resin (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white (natural color)). An electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 155 (b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor is mounted on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a flat plate-shaped substrate main body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d (FIG.) on which a predetermined circuit pattern is formed on the front surface (front surface) and the back surface (rear surface) of the flat plate-shaped substrate main body 3114c (See 154 etc.), respectively.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the surface (front surface) of the substrate main body 3114c, that is, the first LED 3114a (surface mount type), the second LED 3114b (surface mount type), and the connector 3114 g (surface mount type). A white coating film (hereinafter, simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution in the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the type) is soldered. In some cases), a white resist layer is formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, pads, through holes, lands, etc., on which the back surface (rear surface) of the substrate body 3114c on which the electronic component 3114e (surface mount type) is mounted are soldered, are provided. A white resist layer is formed by the solid white resist in the entire area except. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, although not shown, the surface-side electronic components are placed in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, and the mounting orientation of the surface-side electronic component (mounting). The front side notation part indicating the direction) and the model of the front side electronic component is silk-printed on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Is printed by. Although not shown, the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 shows the part numbers of the back-side electronic components and the positions where the back-side electronic components are arranged in the vicinity of the back-side electronic components such as the electronic components 3114e. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. The notation on the back side indicating) is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are described above. In addition, it is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, and its light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether it is turned on (lighted) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, on the surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a pad on which the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are soldered, which is the surface (front surface) of the substrate main body 3114c. A white resist formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding through holes, lands, etc. (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A layer is formed, and the surface side notation that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is printed on this solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint, thereby emitting multicolor emission. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation inconspicuous with respect to the white resist when the possible full-color LED is turned off, further, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light). The surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by a combination of a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance. ) Can be maintained high.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), they can be used as silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and has a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b with the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to a size that is formed substantially constant. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the back and rear decorative substrate 3114 and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to a size that is constantly formed. That is, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed to have a size accommodated inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

At the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like, on the center line of each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111a It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decorative portion 3111d). As a result, each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom can be luminescently decorated by the first LED 3114a of the portion of the first decoration portion 3151.

Further, in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, the first decorative protrusions provided on the double side of the decorative body 3111 are provided. Near the rear of the 3111a, the light is provided so as to irradiate the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. As a result, the first LED 3114a of the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 can illuminate and decorate the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right one by one.

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are central portions that imitate cherry blossoms in the first decorative portion 3151, and are circular portions that imitate stamens located on the center lines of the five petals. It is provided at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151. As a result, the second LED 3114b can illuminate and decorate the five parts of the first decoration part 3151 that imitate the stamens of the central part.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type capable of irradiating light toward the front, when the second LED 3114b is made to emit light, a portion imitating a stamen in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is displayed from other portions. It can also emit light with high brightness, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. Therefore, in the light emitting decoration of the decorative portion 3150, a portion that emits light in a plane shape by the first LED 3114a and a portion that emits light in a point shape by the second LED 3114b can be provided. It is possible to perform a variety of light emission effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

The substrate main body 3114c is a rigid substrate whose thickness is slightly thinner than the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate body 3114c of the present embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (shaded portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is separated from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL = 1 mm in the present embodiment). ing. By this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the space distance from the external conductive member (for example, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) to the copper foil 3114d of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are earned to discharge static electricity or the like. Insulation against short circuits can be improved, and damage to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to electric discharge or the like can be suppressed.

Further, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to a portion inside a predetermined distance regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d. Is as wide as possible. As a result, a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e can be transferred to the copper foil 3114d to dissipate heat from the copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be dissipated. , And the cooling effect on the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced to prevent damage due to heat.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a predetermined size for easily reflecting the light radiated from the first LED 3114a to the substrate main body 3114c side on the light emitting surface side of the side view type first LED 3114a on the front side. It has a light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (a region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153 (a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. Therefore, as compared with the case where the copper foil 3114d is provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, the first LED 3114a is mounted. (I) The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is such that the angle approaches the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c, so that the light emitted toward the substrate body 3114c can be easily reflected forward. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153 (a) and the like, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided so that the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f. Since the contact is made, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (amount of light) radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113 is increased to increase the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111). And the decorative sheet 3112) can be brightly luminescently decorated.

Further, in the light reflection assisting region 3114f, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the rear end (see FIG. 153 (a) and the like). As a result, even if the white coating film (white resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the legs 3113f is worn or rolled up, only the front surface of the substrate body 3114c is exposed and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the insulation property is lowered by the exposure of the copper foil 3114d, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 of the present embodiment is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 to form a flange portion 3115b described later of the decorative body base 3115 and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the outer periphery of the 3113b is double-enclosed, it becomes difficult to see the outer peripheral surface from the outside, and deterioration of the appearance is prevented. Further, in the state where the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. The flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted into the gap between the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b from the rear, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative substrate 3114 on the back side is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to a distance that can correspond to a discharge voltage of 10 mm or more or 10 kV.

Further, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, a member provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 by the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (in the present embodiment, The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with the light from the effect display device 1600 or the like provided at the rear, so that the decorative portion 3150 is light-emitting and decorated in an unintended state. It is possible to prevent this from happening, and it is possible to reliably perform a desired light emitting effect on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Further, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, it is possible to prevent the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from seeing the rear through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the back-rear movable decoration. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b accommodated from the rear with respect to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d of the light guide emitting plate 3113 on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is brought as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It is possible to make the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 thinner in the front-rear direction.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC and the resistor as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 which cannot be seen from the front, it is not necessary to apply a paint of a color such as white to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see. The cost of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative base of movable decorative body after the back]
The decorative body base 3115 is entirely transparent. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates the flat plate-shaped covering plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the flange portion 3115b that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the covering plate portion 3115a, and the covering plate portion 3115a. A plurality of openings 3115c and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the covering plate portion 3115a in the front view are provided.

The outer peripheral shape of the covering plate portion 3115a is substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed substantially constant between the covering plate portion 3115a and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to the size of. That is, the covering plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the covering plate portion 3115a covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, it is possible to prevent other members from coming into contact with the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear and protect the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to prevent damage to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the front end is in front of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Protrudes so that is located. The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and makes it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the outside to improve the appearance. Further, when the flange portion 3115b is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, it is inserted in the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative substrate 3114 on the back side can be meandered around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from flowing to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and damaging the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c have a slit-shaped portion that is long on the left and right and a portion that is larger than the slit-shaped portion. With these plurality of openings 3115c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released to the outside of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the thermal effect on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113.

Further, the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to come into contact with a portion of the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided near the outer peripheral edge. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by abutting the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on the front surface thereof. .. As a result, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily dissipated through the gap between the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main effects of the movable back and back decoration body]
Subsequently, the main effects of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment, the decorative sheet 3112 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body are formed. It is assembled by attaching the mounting boss 3111f of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative body base 3115 with the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 and the base (see FIG. 143 and the like). As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is made relatively thin.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c protruding forward on the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111. Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has a first contour portion 3112a having a hologram on which a pattern or light interference fringes are displayed, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided. The first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can give a three-dimensional effect, and the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c provide a lens effect. And a hologram can give a sense of depth. As a result, even if the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel the thinness, and the decorative effect of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 by the decorative portion 3150 is sufficient. It can be demonstrated and entertained by the player.

Further, as described above, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can give a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and it becomes a more effective part inside the game board 5. By providing the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thin, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for arranging the other decorative body. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good, or a pachinko machine 1 that allows you to enjoy a variety of productions, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players and can be more differentiated. can do.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d makes the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 stand out, and can strongly attract the interest of the player. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the metal decorative portion 3111d and to give a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position invisible to the player to the visible appearance position, the high-class decorative portion 3150 can be seen, which gives the player a premium feeling. Because it is possible to give the player a strong feeling that there may be something good for the player, it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is used. , The outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated, and the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby producing a unified effect. It can be shown to the player, can give the player an impact on the appearance and attract attention, and can entertain a large decoration, and can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative portion 3111d and the first LED 3114a are provided. The two contour portions 3112b can make the first LED 3114a difficult to see from the front, and can suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 and sufficiently exert the decorative effect.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 And the second decoration unit 3152 can be individually luminescent and decorated. As a result, it is possible to sequentially illuminate a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, or to illuminate only a specific first decorative portion 3151 or second decorative portion 3152. By appropriately luminescent decoration of the first decorative section 3151 and the plurality of second decorative sections 3152, it is possible to show the player a variety of light emitting effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest. it can.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a after irradiating light in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113. Since the light is radiated forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the above to radiate and decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the light from the first LED is radiated from the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 to the front. The distance to can be increased. As a result, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113. Therefore, even if the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the decorative body 3111 And the decorative sheet 3112 can be evenly and uniformly luminescently decorated, and the luminescent decoration with a good appearance can entertain the player. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side view type first LED 3114a can uniformly illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be increased. It can be made thinner, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 uses the first LED 3114a as a side view type for planar light emission and the second LED 3114b as a top-view type, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative portion 3150). ), It is possible to add a portion that emits light with high brightness in a dot shape to the portion that is light-emitting decorated in a plane shape by the first LED 3114a. As a result, since the light emission effect of the second LED 3114b can be sharpened, it is possible to easily present the optimum light emission effect according to the gaming state, and the player can be more entertained and the game can be played. It is possible to raise the expectation for the player and suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED accommodating portion 3113c into which the side view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide emitting plate 3113, and receives light on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a so that the light is incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at a position close to the desired portion to be light-emitting and decorated by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be light-emitting and decorated more brightly. The high LED decoration can be entertained by the player.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear into the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it has the accommodating portion 3113d, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is backed to the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 comes into contact with the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Since a gap is formed in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat. The gap between the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is defined as "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "the substrate". It is desirable that the distance is within the range of "the distance from the front surface of the main body 3114c to the front surface of the first LED 3114a". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a risk that it will not be possible to decorate it.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by the leg portion 3113f, and has a plurality of openings in the decorative body base 3115. Since the portion 3115c is provided, the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c by raising and lowering the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, And the heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be dissipated to suppress the temperature rise of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

A temperature sensor is provided on the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and when the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (back-rear decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down. May be made to increase the frequency (probability) of execution. As a result, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be moved up and down to ventilate the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of defects due to heat.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b is surrounded by the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is guided by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 to flow to the back rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to prevent the 3114 from being damaged.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit is provided on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 at a position separated from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance inside the SL. The creepage distance EL and the space distance can also be lengthened by this predetermined distance SL, the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit can be enhanced, and damage to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Not. As a result, the creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be lengthened by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d is larger than that in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It can be made smaller, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if a discharge occurs in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the influence thereof can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down (movable) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearance position moved downward by the drive of the rear-rear drive motor 3126. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the vehicle is moved up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction is likely to be accumulated on the surface of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 constituting the surface of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 are made of synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, their surfaces are formed. It is difficult for the static electricity accumulated in the whole to be discharged at once. On the other hand, since the metal decorative portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decorative body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decorative portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. However, as described above, the metal decorative portion 3111d Since the creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is not damaged by the discharge of static electricity, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down, and the back-rear movable decorative body is movable. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be enjoyed both with a light emitting effect in which 3110 is light-emitting and decorated.

When the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is equal to or larger than a predetermined value (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decorative portion 3111d to the GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the back-back decorative substrate 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of the back-back movable ornament]
Next, with respect to the back-rear movable decoration 3160, the back-rear movable decoration 3170, the back-rear movable decoration 3180, and the like of the embodiment different from the back-rear movable decoration 3110, mainly referring to FIG. 157. This will be described in detail. FIG. 157 (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the configuration of the back-rear movable decorative body of the second embodiment, which is different from the back-rear movable decoration of FIG. 142, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the decorative body in the cross section, and (c) is the explanatory view which shows the structure of the back-rear movable decorative body of 4th Embodiment by the cross section.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided behind the decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and the rear side of the decorative body 3161, as schematically shown in FIG. 157 (a). A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiating plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 and internally radiating light in a direction along the front surface, and a light guide radiating plate. It includes a back-rear decorative substrate 3164 on which a plurality of LEDs 3164a that irradiate the inside of the 3163 with light in a direction along the front surface are mounted on the front surface.

The decorative body 3161 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3161a, a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. It has a decorative portion 3161c. The main body 3161a may be flat or may be decorated in a relief shape with irregularities. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by thin film deposition.

The decorative sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (picture) is printed. In the decorative sheet 3162, a portion having low transparency in decoration is located at a portion in front of the LED 3164a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed to have a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b in the decorative body 3161.

The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED accommodating portion 3163a into which the LED3164a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of rear surfaces provided. It has a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED accommodating portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide emitting plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only at a predetermined portion. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a forward, and is arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a. .. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It may be provided on almost the entire surface of the rear surface.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed to have the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. A plurality of side view type LEDs 3164a, which are inserted from the rear into the LED accommodating portion 3163a of the light guide emitting plate 3163, are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a portion inside the SL from the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. The front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 in the front-rear direction is reduced. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164. As a result, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is covered with the flange portion 3161b, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surfaces from the outside. It looks good.

In this back-rear movable decorative body 3160, since the flange portion 3161b extends rearward from the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164, the metal decorative portion on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 (copper foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 to decorate the back-rear decoration. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same action and effect as the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. The back-rear movable decorative body 3160 may be provided with a decorative body base that covers the back side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164.

Subsequently, the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment has the outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and the inner side (frame) of the outer decorative body 3171 as schematically shown in FIG. 157 (b). A flat plate-shaped interior decoration body 3172 that closes the inside) and a light guide radiation plate 3173 that is provided behind the interior decoration body 3172 and radiates light in a direction along the entire surface forward. The back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 3174a mounted on the front surface to irradiate the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in a direction along the front surface.

The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 has a main body portion 3171a that is frame-shaped and extends forward and backward, a support portion 3171b that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3171a in a flat plate shape, and a main body portion 3171a. It has a metal decorative portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the above. The distance from the front end of the main body 3171a to the front surface of the support 3171b is the same as the thickness of the interior decoration 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration portion 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3171a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by thin film deposition.

Although not shown, the interior decoration body 3172 is formed with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The inner decoration body 3172 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the frame-shaped outer decoration body 3171.

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the interior decoration body 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the exterior decoration body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED accommodating portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED accommodating portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide emitting plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3174a. A plurality of reflecting portions 3173b extend in an arc shape around a predetermined LED accommodating portion 3173a and are provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflective portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED accommodating portion 3173a forward. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b may be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It may be provided on almost the entire surface of the rear surface.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed to have the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a, which are inserted from the rear into the LED accommodating portion 3173a of the light guide emitting plate 3173, are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a portion inside the SL from the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-back decorative substrate 3174 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172. Are substantially in agreement with each other, and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of the interior decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, the light guide radiation plate 3173 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 is placed on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 in the front-rear direction is reduced. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, a gap having a thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

The main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is covered with the main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are covered from the outside. It makes it difficult to see and makes it look good.

Since the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 by the main body portion 3171a extending to the rear of the outer decorative body 3171, the metal decorative portion 3171c on the front surface of the main body portion 3171a The creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 (copper foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3171c flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3174, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 Can be prevented from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same action and effect as the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. A metal decorative portion may also be provided on the front surface of the internal decorative body 3172. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment has the outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and the inner side (frame) of the outer decorative body 3181 as schematically shown in FIG. 157 (c). A translucent interior decoration body 3182 that closes the inside) and a back-rear decorative substrate 3183 that is provided behind the interior decoration body 3182 and has a plurality of LEDs 3183a that can irradiate light forward. And have.

The outer decorative body 3181 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 covers the entire surface of the flat plate frame-shaped main body portion 3181a, the flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer circumference of the main body portion 3181a, and the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. It has a metal decorative portion 3181c that covers it. The metal decorative portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decorative body 3181. The metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by thin film deposition.

The interior decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a flat plate-shaped main body 3182a whose outer circumference is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange 3181b, and rearward from the outer circumference of the main body 3182a. It has a flange portion 3182b extending to the surface. Although not shown, the main body 3182a is formed with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

The outer shape of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed to be smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b in the inner decorative body 3182. That is, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed in such a size that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. A plurality of top view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a portion inside the SL from the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-back decorative substrate 3183 has a white coating film made of a white resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3182 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3180, the front surface near the outer circumference of the inner decorative body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is the outer decorative body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. In other words, the outer circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 hides the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 from the outside.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3180 is provided with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 inside the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 provided with the metal decorative portion 3181c, and the inner decorative body 3182. Since the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body 3182a is separated from the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182, the metal decoration portion 3181c to the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 (copper) The creepage distance EL to the foil) can be set to a sufficient distance to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3181c from flowing to the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 and damaging the back-rear decorative substrate 3183. can do.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the same effect as that of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. A metal decorative portion may also be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the internal decorative body 3182. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. FIG. 158 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 158 (b) shows the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit behind. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 shows the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit from the front.

The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back rear effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and are located on both left and right sides of the lower back middle decorative unit 3320. It is visible through a transparent game panel 1100, a front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the lower left production unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left effect unit 3200 includes a transparent lower back left rotating decoration 3201 having a shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward, and a transparent lower back left decorative body 3201 provided behind the lower back left rotating decoration 3201. A lower left decorative substrate provided behind the 3202 and the lower left decorative body 3202, on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). It is provided behind the 3203 and the lower back left decorative board 3203, and the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is rotatably attached and the lower back left decorative body 3202 is attached, and the back lower left decorative body 3202 is attached. It is equipped with a unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the.

Further, the lower back left effect unit 3200 is attached to the lower back left drive motor 3205, which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and the lower back left drive motor 3205. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207, which are meshed with the drive gear 3206 and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, are meshed with the first transmission gear 3207. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 rotatably attached to the unit base 3204 and the second transmission gear 3208 are meshed with each other and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3209 and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the back lower left decorative body 3202.

The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. .. The lower back left decorative body 3202 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 on the front and back, and rotating the rear petals so that they are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it was made.

The lower back left decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 are formed transparently, and a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed. More specifically, the lower back left decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 are formed in a satin-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction, and the lower back left rotation In one of the petals of the cherry blossoms modeled by the decorative body 3201 and the lower left decorative body 3202, the pachinko machine 1 (the one whose transparency becomes lower) becomes darker toward the periphery from the center of the petals. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the bottom left rotation Through the decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 (even at the peripheral edge of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 arranged behind the lower back left decorative body 3202 can be visually recognized. It has become like.

The lower left decorative substrate 3203 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) on the rear surface thereof to detect the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209. The lower back left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that projects forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative substrate 3203. In the state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back lower left detection sensor 3203a, the back lower left rotation decoration 3201 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back lower left drive motor 3205, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment is backed via the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotation decorative body 3201 can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the lower back left effect unit 3200 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 to cause the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202. It can be luminescent and decorated.

It should be noted that the part numbers of the front side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower left decorative substrate 3203, and the surface side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included). The part is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the transparent lower back left decorative body is formed. Since the 3202 and the lower left decorative substrate 3203 are arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower left decorative substrate 3203 by silk printing is the lower left decorative substrate 3202, Then, it is visible through the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters and symbols are used according to the predetermined paint color. , The shape (that is, the attribute of the surface-side electronic component indicated by the surface-side notation) can be determined.

Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower left decorative substrate 3203 are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white) in each package, and the connector is a connector. The housing is made of white (also called natural color, a color recognized to be the same color as white (natural color)).

Next, the back lower right effect unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right effect unit 3250 has a transparent lower back right rotating decoration body 3251 having a shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward, and a transparent lower back right rotating decoration body 3251 provided behind the back lower right rotating decoration body 3251. A lower right decorative substrate provided behind the 3252 and the lower right decorative body 3252, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). It is provided behind the 3253 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253, and the lower right rotating decorative body 3251 is rotatably attached and the lower right decorative body 3252 is attached. It is provided with a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the.

Further, the lower back right effect unit 3250 is attached to the lower right drive motor 3255, which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and the lower right drive motor 3255. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256 and the drive gear 3256 are meshed with the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 and the first transmission gear 3257 which are rotatably attached to the unit base 3254. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and a second transmission gear 3258 meshing with each other and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251. It includes a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3259 and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the lower right decorative body 3252.

The lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3251a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower right decorative substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. .. The lower back right decorative body 3252 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 on the front and back, and rotating the rear petals so that they are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it was made.

The lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 are formed transparently, and a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed. More specifically, the lower back right decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 are formed in a pear-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction, and the lower back right rotation In one of the petals of the cherry blossoms modeled by the decorative body 3251 and the lower right decorative body 3252, the pachinko machine 1 (the one whose transparency becomes lower) becomes darker toward the periphery from the center of the petals. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the bottom right is rotated. Through the decorative body 3251 and the lower right decorative body 3252 (even at the peripheral edge of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 arranged behind the lower right decorative body 3252 can be visually recognized. It has become like.

The lower right decorative substrate 3253 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors. The lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is provided with a lower back right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The lower back right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that projects forward and is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a of the back bottom right decorative substrate 3253. In the state where the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a, the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back lower right drive motor 3255, the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment is backed via the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotation decoration body 3251 can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the lower back right effect unit 3250 can illuminate the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the lower back right decorative substrate 3253.

It should be noted that the part numbers of the front side electronic parts such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative board 3253, and the surface side electronic parts such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic parts are arranged. (Furthermore, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included). The part is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower right rotating decorative body 3251, the transparent lower right decorative body is formed. Since the 3252 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253 are arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 by silk printing is the lower right decorative body 3252. Then, it is visible through the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters and symbols are used according to the predetermined paint color. , The shape (that is, the attribute of the surface side electronic component indicated by the surface side notation portion) can be discriminated.

Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 are each made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector is the same. The housing is made of white resin (also called a natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural color)).

On the surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower right decorative board 3253, a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), connectors (surface mount type), lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type), and lower back A white coating film (hereinafter, simply "solid white") formed by applying a white resist solution in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) is soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the above. Pads and throughs to which the lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) and the lower back right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) are soldered to the back surface (rear surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower back right decorative board 3253. A white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist in the entire area excluding holes and lands. Further, although not shown on the surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, the surface side is near the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the component number of the electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, and the mounting orientation of the surface-side electronic component. (Mounting direction), the model of the electronic component on the front side may be included.) The notation on the front side is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is applied on a solid white resist. It is printed by silk printing. Although not shown, the back surface (rear surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 may be located near the back side electronic components such as the lower back left detection sensor 3203a and the lower back right detection sensor 3253a. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the part number of the back side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the back side electronic component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the back side electronic component The back side notation, which indicates the mounting direction (mounting direction) and the model of the electronic component on the back side, is a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable than white. It is printed on top by silk printing.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, the entire surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower back right decorative board 3253 excluding a plurality of LEDs, pads to which connectors are soldered, through holes, lands, etc. In the above, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution, and further, this solid is formed. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors on a painted white resist is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that it is white when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation inconspicuous with respect to the resist, in addition, when a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), it is solidly painted with high reflectance. The surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 by a combination of a white resist and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint having a white reflectance very close to that of white. The reflectance of the LED can be maintained high.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), they can be used as silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

[5-9f. Under the back production unit]
Subsequently, the under-back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 164 shows the back lower middle elevating mechanism disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 shows the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle production unit disassembled from the back. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the raising and lowering of the lower back middle decorative body unit by the lower back middle raising and lowering mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. FIG. 168 (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration of the back lower middle decorative body unit in the back lower middle effect unit, which is related to the rotation of the back lower middle rotating decorative body, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the stop position and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 169 is an explanatory view showing the arrangement of the LEDs of the under-back middle decoration unit in the under-back middle effect unit from the front.

The lower back middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle effect unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250. The under-back middle effect unit 3300 has a under-back middle decorative body unit 3320 having a transparent under-back middle decorative body 3310 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and an under-back middle decorative body unit 3320 that raises and lowers the under-back middle decorative body unit 3320. Elevating mechanism 3350 and.

The under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the under-back middle effect unit 3300 is formed in a regular hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. The lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 has six number decorations formed in relief shape from "1" to "6" on the entire surface, and circles at every 60 degree angle in the clockwise direction around the center. It is placed on the circumference. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 described later, a first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322, and a front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323. It has a recess 3311 capable of accommodating.

The lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is transparently formed, and the outer peripheral portion of each of the six number decorations protrudes forward, and a rib portion connecting the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state is provided. It is formed so as to project forward. A metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster is formed on the protruding outer peripheral portion and the rib portion. In other words, a metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster is arranged in the vicinity of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. In the present embodiment, the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion on which the metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster is formed are integrally molded with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, but the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion May be formed separately from the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the molded outer peripheral portion and rib portion and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be assembled. In this case, a metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion, respectively.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3310a can give a high-class feeling, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be made to stand out, so that the presence of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further emphasized. It has become. The metal decoration portion 3310a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The metal decorative portion 3310a is formed only on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion protruding from the front surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the metal decorative portion 3310a is completely formed on the side surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Absent. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3310a of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 is further increased by at least the length of the side surface of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3310a from flowing to the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and damaging the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322. Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

As described above, the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is formed with a rib portion that connects the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state so as to project forward. In the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the rib portion is projected from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front surface, the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the lower back middle. A plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed while being transparently formed up to the trailing edge of the side surface of the rotating decoration body 3310. More specifically, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a rib portion protruding from the front peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. A satin-skin-like pattern is formed by a plurality of ridges extending in a random direction in a short linear manner extending to the rear edge of the side surface of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, and the rib portion is a lower back middle rotation decoration. The shade becomes darker from the peripheral edge side portion (peripheral side root portion) protruding to the front surface of the body 3310 toward the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the side rear edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so as to be (the one with low transparency). Is given by printing.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and an inner lens (diffusing lens). ) The first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the lower back, which are provided behind the 3321 and have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). A substrate fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a attached to an inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 so as to sandwich the middle first decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side and projecting rearward in a columnar shape, and a shaft of the substrate fixing member 3323. The portion 3323a has a shaft hole 3324a into which the portion 3323a is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and includes a rotation base 3324 attached to the rear side of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310.

The surface of the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and is arranged behind the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back. The front surface and the back surface of the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), instead of the front surface of the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321. The back surface may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

Further, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 has a region detection piece 3325 protruding rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extending in a semi-arc on the same axis as the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference coaxial with the region detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 protruding from the rotation base 3324 above, and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

Further, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the rotation base 3324 and has a penetrating circular opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass. A transparent under-back middle decoration 3328 in which a plurality of linear grooves are formed radially from the opening 3328a toward the outer circumference with the center of the circular opening 3328a as the center point, and the rear of the back-down middle decoration 3328. 3329, the second decorative substrate in the lower back, and the second decorative substrate in the lower back, in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). A plurality of area identification sensors 3330 (lead type) mounted on the front surface of the 3329 and capable of detecting the area detection piece 3325, and a position detection piece 3326 mounted on the front surface of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. It is equipped with a detectable position identification sensor 3331 (lead type).

Further, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is attached and the back lower middle decorative body 3328 is attached. The movable base 3332, the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotation shaft protrudes forward, and the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 are attached to the rotation shaft. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3334 that meshes with the rotary gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a rear lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. It is provided with an elevating slider 3336 that is slidably guided in the vertical direction by the slide rail 3360.

The inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321, the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, and the front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 are located between the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back and the rotating base 3324 in the assembled state. , It is in a state of being housed in the recess 3311 of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, and is not in contact with either the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 or the rotation base 3324. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back to emit light, the portion of the number decoration (relief) in the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back can be light-emittingly decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The area detection piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotary gear 3327 and projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotary base 3324. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the area detection piece 3325 has a number of "3", "4", and "5" between the numerical decorations of "2" and "3" in the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. Through the number decoration, between the number decorations of "5" and "6", it is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees about the rotation axis.

Each of the plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. The position detection pieces 3326 are provided at equal intervals at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) in the circumferential direction so that each position detection piece 3326 is located at the center of the numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. .. In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a predetermined angle α degree (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) about the rotation axis, and is adjacent to the position detection piece 3326. There is an interval of 2 × β degrees (θ degree-α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) with the position detection piece 3326 about the rotation axis (see FIG. 168 (a)). ..

A plurality of (here, three) area identification sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at intervals of θ degrees (60 degrees) around the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310. The three region identification sensors 3330 are provided in the order of the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c in the clockwise order. In the present embodiment, the three area identification sensors 3330 are of "3", "4", and "5" in a state where the decoration of "1" of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 is positioned directly above the rotation center. It is provided at a position corresponding to the number decoration (see FIG. 168 (a)).

The position identification sensor 3331 is provided at a position at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 from the first region identification sensor 3330a. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a that protrudes rearward from the lower part of the rear surface in a columnar shape. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting the rotation position.

The lower back middle decoration unit 3320 rotates the drive gear 3334 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, thereby rotating the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3327. Can be done. Further, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, respectively, thereby causing the back lower middle decorative body 3310 to emit light. And the lower back middle decorative body 3328 can be light-emitting decorated.

It should be noted that the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, and the surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included). The part is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and the inner lens (diffusing lens) is behind the transparent rotating decorative body 3310 under the back. ) 3321 and the lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 are arranged in order, so that the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 by silk printing is the inner lens. It is visible through the (diffuse lens) 3321 and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are off, a predetermined paint is used. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, attributes of surface-side electronic components indicated by the surface-side notation) can be identified by the color of.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist solution is applied to the surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the formed white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back surface (rear surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the connector (surface mount type) is soldered is white with a solid white resist. A resist layer is formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, although not shown, the component numbers and surfaces of the surface-side electronic components are located in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where side electronic components are placed (Furthermore, shape of surface-side electronic components, size of surface-side electronic components, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of surface-side electronic components, surface side The front side notation part indicating the model of the electronic component may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. .. On the back surface (rear surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, although not shown, the component numbers of the back surface side electronic components and the positions where the back surface side electronic components are arranged are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. The notation on the back side indicating) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, the area identification sensor 3330, the part number of the surface side electronic component such as the position identification sensor 3331, and the surface side electronic component are arranged. Attributes of the surface-side electronic component such as the area indicating the position to be mounted (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation portion indicating) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and the transparent under-back middle decorative body 3328 is displayed. Since the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back is arranged behind the back, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back is in the lower back. It is visible through the decorative body 3328, and when a plurality of LEDs are turned off and a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, a predetermined paint color) are used according to the predetermined paint color. The attributes of the surface-side electronic components indicated by the surface-side notation section) can be determined.

Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white) in each package. It has become.

On the surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, a pad to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a region identification sensor 3330 (lead type), and a position identification sensor 3331 (lead type) are soldered. A white resist formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding through holes, lands, etc. (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). Layers are formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, a pad for which a region identification sensor 3330 (lead type), a position identification sensor 3331 (lead type), and a plurality of connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist in the entire area except for through holes and lands. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, although not shown, the component numbers and surfaces of the front surface electronic components are located in the vicinity of the surface electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the side electronic components are placed (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, and the surface side. The front side notation part indicating the model of the electronic component may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. .. On the back surface (rear surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, although not shown, the part numbers of the back surface side electronic components and the positions where the back surface side electronic components are arranged are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. The notation on the back side indicating (there is)) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs and the like are soldered are provided on the surfaces (front surfaces) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution in the entire area except for the above area. , The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors on this solid white resist is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation less noticeable with respect to the white resist at times, it is also solid with high reflectance when a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light). By combining the painted white resist and the front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that is very close to the white reflectance, the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second decorative in the lower back The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the substrate 3329 can be maintained high.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), they can be used as silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 extends to the left and right, and both ends are attached to the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250, and the unit base 3351 and the unit base 3351. The flat bottom middle lift drive motor 3352, which is mounted on the front surface of the unit so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the flat bottom middle lift drive motor 3352, which is mounted on the rotation shaft and partly faces the front side of the unit base 3351. The gear-shaped drive gear 3353 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354, which meshes with the drive gear 3353 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, meshes with the first transmission gear 3354. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and an outer circumference of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. It has a drive pin 3356b that projects forward in a columnar shape from the vicinity, and includes an elevating cam gear 3356 that is rotatably attached to the upper center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 3351.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 on the base end side extending in the left-right direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. The second slit 3357a, which extends in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and the first slit 3357a, and the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , And an elevating arm 3357 having a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip thereof, and an underside middle elevating detection sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detection piece 3357c of the elevating arm 3357 are provided, and the unit base 3351 is provided. It is provided with a relay board 3358 under the back, which is attached to the front surface.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the elevating cam gear 3356, and the elevating arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending elevating slit 3359a through which an elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 in the decorative body unit 3320 is inserted, and an elevating and lowering in the lower middle decorative body unit 3320 attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, the gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 move upward (front). It includes a spring 3362 that urges the elevating arm 3357 to rotate in a clockwise direction with respect to the visual view.

The lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit base 3351. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably attached so that the base end side is on the right side of the elevating cam gear 3356 and at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356. The tip side of the elevating arm 3357 extends to the left of the elevating cam gear 3356.

The lower back middle relay board 3358 includes the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, the area identification sensor 3330, the position identification sensor 3331, the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333, and the back lower middle elevating drive motor. The connection between the 3352, the lower back middle lift detection sensor 3358a, and the effect drive board 1720 is relayed.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359 in the left-right direction. The elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360 can support the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back lower middle lifting drive motor 3352, the lower back middle lifting mechanism 3350 passes through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the lifting cam gear 3356. The 3356 can be rotated. Then, the elevating arm 3357 can be rotated by the drive pin 3356b that revolves by the rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356 through the first slit 3357a into which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 via the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

Next, the movements of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the under-back middle decorative body unit 3320 in the under-back middle effect unit 3300 will be described in detail. In a normal state, the under-back middle effect unit 3300 is in a state of a descending position in which the under-back middle decoration unit 3320 is moved most downward. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 in the under-back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is located at the tip end side below the base end side, and the tip detection piece 3357c moves up and down under the back-bottom middle of the back-bottom middle relay board 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167 (a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of revolution and near the end of the elevating arm 3357 in the first slit 3357a on the proximal end side. .. More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if an urging force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, the force line of the urging force is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Since the elevating cam gear 3356 passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 does not move from the lowering position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the proximal end side. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction due to the urging force of the spring 3362, the elevating cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the end end side of the first slit 3357a. , The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked so that the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented from moving upward.

In the normal state of the underside middle effect unit 3300, among the plurality of number decorations in the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310, the number decoration located at the uppermost side is inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located and can be clearly seen from the front (player side) (see FIG. 111 and the like). Further, in a normal state, the numerical decoration located at the lowermost position is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and is located behind the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and in the lower middle. (Ii) By emitting light from the LED of the decorative substrate 3329, in addition to the light emitting decoration of the rotating decoration under the back, the first starting port 2002 formed of the transparent member can also be made to emit light (see FIG. 120 and the like). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are used. As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the elevating arm. It rotates in the clockwise direction around the base end side so that the tip end side of the 3357 moves upward.

By rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted in the second slit 3357b on the tip end side of the elevating arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. The decorative body unit 3320 under the back is moved upward via the elevating pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the proximal end side. At this time, in the elevating arm 3357, since the spring 3362 acts on the urging force in the clockwise direction, the urging force assists the upward movement of the decorative body unit 3320 in the lower back, and the lower back middle. The load applied to the elevating drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When the drive pin 3356b revolves further in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 is stopped, and at the same time, the drive is driven. The revolution of pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 by the elevating arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the state of the ascending position moved most upward.

In the state where the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the first slit 3357a in the drive pin 3356b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction is applied by the weight of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, the line of force of the force hits the first slit 3357a. Since the elevating cam gear 3356 passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the contacting drive pin 3356b, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the ascending position, and the lower back middle decoration unit. The weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 and the like.

In the state where the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3356b comes into contact with the end portion on the base end side of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the decorative body unit 3320 under the back, the elevating cam gear 3356 is clocked by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the end end side of the first slit 3357a. , The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, so that the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented from moving downward.

In the state where the lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, most of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (furthermore, a game ball that rolls in the game area 5a). B is located above the bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center accessory 2500 that prevents B from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and is forward (player). All numerical decorations can be seen well from the side) (see FIG. 201).

When returning the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 from the raised position to the lower position, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction to the above by the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352, the lifting arm 3357 Rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 moves downward from the ascending position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the elevating arm 3357 is detected by the back lower middle elevating detection sensor 3358a of the back lower middle relay board 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the back lower middle elevating drive motor 3352. , The center that prevents the lower middle decorative unit 3320 from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501) in the lowered position (furthermore, the game ball B that rolls in the game area 5a) in the normal state. The bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the position where it overlaps when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

The under-back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the drive gear 3334 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 in the under-back middle decoration unit 3320, thereby rotating the under-back middle rotation decoration unit 3310 via the rotation gear 3327. Can be rotated around an axis in the front-back direction. By rotating the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, the six number decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 at any position such as a lowering position or an ascending position of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320.

In the under-back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, one of a plurality of (here, 6) numerical decorations in the under-back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located directly above the rotation center (stop position). doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), in a state where the numerical decoration of "1" in the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located at the top, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is specified as the first area. The sensors 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are detected by the three region identification sensors 3330, and a plurality of (here, 6) position detection pieces 3326 are detected by the position identification sensor 3331. Is not detected.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area identification sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 will be described. In the state where the number decoration of "1" is set to the stop position, as described above, the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are the region detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. Is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are detected, the numerical decoration of "1" is centered on the stop position. It is located within the range of ± 30 degrees.

When the first region identification sensor 3330a and the second region identification sensor 3330b detect and the third region identification sensor 3330c does not detect, the numerical decoration of "2" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a detects and the second region identification sensor 3330b and the third region identification sensor 3330c do not detect, the numerical decoration of "3" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are not detected, the numerical decoration of "4" is in the range of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located inside.

When the first region identification sensor 3330a and the second region identification sensor 3330b are not detected and the third region identification sensor 3330c is detected, the number decoration of "5" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a is not detected and the second region identification sensor 3330b and the third region identification sensor 3330c are detected, the number decoration of "6" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

In this way, by combining the detection / non-detection of the three area identification sensors 3330 of the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c, any numerical decoration can determine the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not it is located in the including stop area.

Since the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area identification sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and then rotates 30 degrees, the under-back middle rotation drive is driven. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, in the case of performing such control, it is necessary to recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the area of the stop position by the three area identification sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position identification sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position identification sensor 3331. Therefore, the complexity of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is suppressed, and the load is reduced.

More specifically, when the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 wants to stop the desired numerical decoration at the stop position, the lower middle rotating decoration 3310 rotates and the three area identification sensors 3330 stop the desired number. When the combination satisfies the position, the position identification sensor 3331 is displaced in the rotation direction at an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first region identification sensor 3330a, so that the position identification sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

In this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates α / 2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees), which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, and further rotates, the position detection piece 3326 separates from the position identification sensor 3331. Therefore, the position identification sensor 3331 is not detected. The origin is the angle at which the position identification sensor 3331 is not detected. Then, when it is rotated by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), the rotation of the under-back middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped to obtain a desired number. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

In the above description, the rotation stop of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 has been described by an angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 made of a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, the position detection piece 3326 is rotated 13 steps further when the back lower middle rotation decoration 3310 is in a combination in which the three area identification sensors 3330 satisfy the desired stop positions. Apart from the position identification sensor 3331, the position identification sensor 3331 is not detected. When the position identification sensor 3331 rotates 20 steps from the non-detected angle, the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped to stop the desired number decoration. It can be stopped exactly at the position.

Next, the light emitting decoration in the underside middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the under-back middle effect unit 3300 has a back-bottom middle decorative body unit 3320 equipped with a plurality of LEDs for emitting and decorating the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. It includes a decorative substrate 3322 and a second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. The plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 are located behind the six numerical decorations in the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, and each of the numerical decorations can be independently luminescently decorated.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 are located behind the portion outside the plurality of numerical decorations in the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, and are outside the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310. The periphery can be luminescently decorated.

As described above, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 can detect the rotation position of the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 to some extent by the three area identification sensors 3330, and therefore, based on the detection of the area identification sensor 3330. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, the numbers are rotated in a state in which only specific number decorations are luminescent or in a state in which each number decoration is luminescent in different colors. It is possible to show the player a production that strongly attracts the player's attention.

Further, in the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the numerical decoration on the lower side of the lower back middle decorative body 3310 is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the LED of the portion of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back to emit light. As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002. In addition, when the game ball B wins a prize in the first starting port 2002, the LED of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is emitted (or, one emission mode is determined from a plurality of light emitting modes and the light is emitted. ) May be made.

As described above, according to the under-back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions can detect a region having a length over three stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position are provided, and a three-region identification sensor 3330 for detecting the area detection piece 3325 and one position identification for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensor 3331 and the sensor 3331 are provided, when the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 rotates, the three area identification sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. This is repeated, and even until the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is rotated to the next stop position, all the area identification sensors 3330 are not temporarily undetected, and the area detection piece 3325 is detected. By combining the area identification sensor 3330, the current rotation position of the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Since the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the lower back middle rotation is performed by detecting the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area identification sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position identification sensor 3331, and the deviation of the stop position can be prevented. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by reducing the number as much as possible.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game is played by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from giving a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the stop position of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed even if the rotation speed of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, and the back side can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is higher than that in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player, can strongly attract the player's attention, and can rotate the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, since the lower back middle rotating ornament 3310 is supposed to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of numerical decorations are provided on the front surface, the roulette wheel that rotates and stops at an arbitrary stop position after rotating round and round. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the desired number decoration stops rotating at the stop position, and the movable effect by the rotating ornament 3310 under the back is provided. It can be entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area identification sensors 3330 required for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position , The number of the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is the same as that of the stop position, the ability (grasp of the stop position) by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 can be maximized, and more stop positions are provided. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 is possible. It can be made larger, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be made higher.

In the above embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (together) with the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. The area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Subsequently, the back-up effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 170 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back-up effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory view showing the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotation decoration body in the back-up effect unit from the front. FIG. 176 (a) is an explanatory view showing the elevating mechanism of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back-up effect unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating mechanism of the elevating decorative body unit, and the rotating mechanism of a back-up rear rotation decorative body from the front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory view showing the decorative substrate from the front in a state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit is moved to the appearance position in the back-up effect unit.

The back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back-back effect unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back-up effect unit 3400 includes a transparent back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 having a shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back-up front rotation decoration body. A transparent back-up front decoration body 3421 extending to the left and right through which the shaft shaft 3410a of the 3410 penetrates in the center in the left-right direction, and a front surface (hereinafter, "surface (mounting)" provided behind the back-up front decoration body 3421. A surface) ”is sometimes described as a back-up front decorative board 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a back-up front decorative board 3421 provided behind the back-up front decorative board 3422 and on the front surface. Is attached and includes a unit base 3423 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410.

Further, the back-up effect unit 3400 is between the rear cover 3424 which is attached so as to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and the unit base 3423 whose rotation axis is forward on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on the rotating shaft of the back-up front rotary drive motor 3425 and the back-up front rotary drive motor 3425 mounted so as to project into the space of the above, and the drive gear 3426 mesh with each other. A rotary gear 3427 which has a spur gear shape and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward, and a back upper front decorative substrate 3422. It is equipped with a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type) that is attached to the rear surface and can detect the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

Further, the back-up effect unit 3400 includes a back-up lift drive motor 3249 mounted on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotation shaft projects into the space between the front unit base 3423 and the back-up lift drive. The spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3429, the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and the rear cover 3424 penetrate from the portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a. With a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward in a columnar shape and a detection piece 3431c projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the gear portion 3431a, the elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424. , The tip of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, which is attached to the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and is provided with the back-up lift detection sensor 3432 (lead type) capable of detecting the detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431, and the back-top rear rotation decoration body 3440. The back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 and the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 around the axis in the front-rear direction so that the side moves up and down by the rotation of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431. A spring 3433 that urges the elevating decoration unit 3450 to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward, and a spring 3433 that is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 to move upward of the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450. It is provided with a rod-shaped regulating member 3434 that regulates the movement of the gear.

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 is a transparent shaft shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the transparent back-up rear rotation decoration 3440. The back surface is provided behind the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). The upper rear decorative substrate 3452 and the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452 are mounted on the front surface from the rear of the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452, and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3423, and the shaft of the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440. It includes an elevating unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft 3440a.

Further, the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 includes a back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3455 attached to the above, the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 that meshes with the drive gear 3455 and is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and the first transmission gear 3456. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457, which is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and the shaft shaft 3440a of the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440, which is meshed with the second transmission gear 3457. It includes a spur gear-shaped rotary gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

Further, the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotary gear 3458 from the rear. It includes a 3459 and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 penetrates the back-up front decoration body 3421, the back-up front decoration substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear It extends to the space between the cover 3424. In the back-up front decoration body 3421, two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 are stacked in the center in the left-right direction, and the petals on the rear side are between the petals on the front side. It has a decoration shaped like it is rotated so that it is located in.

The back-up front decorative substrate 3422 extends to the left and right over substantially the entire length of the back-up front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 can be light-emitting and decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back surface are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 are transparently formed, and a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed. More specifically, the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 is formed in a satin-like pattern by a plurality of ridges extending in a short linear direction in a random direction, and the back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and the back-up front are formed. The concept of pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is such that in one petal of a cherry blossom flower modeled by the decorative body 3421, the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center to the periphery of the petal. That is, a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) are printed, and the back top front decoration body 3421 is back top front. Pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) so that the area excluding the area corresponding to the rotating decoration body 3410 has a constant shade (so that the shade is lighter and the transparency is higher than the shade at the periphery of the petals). ) (That is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed, but the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 And through the back upper front decoration body 3421 (even at the peripheral edge of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decoration substrate 3422 arranged behind the back upper front decoration body 3421 can be visually recognized. ing.

It should be noted that the component numbers of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged, etc. (Furthermore, the surface side notation part indicating the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is printed by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the transparent back-up front decorative body 3421, Since the back-up front decorative substrates 3422 are arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 by silk printing is passed through the back-up front decorative body 3421. Or, when it is visible through the back-up front decorative body 3421 and the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, and the color of a predetermined paint can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are off. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, attributes of surface-side electronic components indicated by the surface-side notation) can be identified by the color of a predetermined paint.

Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the surface (mounting surface) of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back side are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white) in each package. ing.

A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a back surface rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back surface elevation detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the surface (front surface) of the back surface front decorative substrate 3422. The entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. is white due to a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. The resist layer of is formed. A plurality of connectors (surface mount type), a back surface rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back surface elevation detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the back surface (rear surface) of the back surface front decorative substrate 3422. A white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist in the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, and the like. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, although not shown, the component numbers of the front-side electronic components and the surface-side electrons are located in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back surface, although not shown, an area indicating the part number of the back surface side electronic component and the position where the back surface side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic component such as a connector. Attribute of the back side electronic component such as (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist.

The unit base 3423 has a through hole 3423a through which the back-up rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432, which are attached to the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, are inserted. The rear cover 3424 has an arc shape in which a columnar support shaft 3424a projecting rearward from the rear surface and a drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 are inserted coaxially with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decoration body 3410. It has an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453.

The detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 is detected by the backside rotation detection sensor 3428 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and projects rearward. In the elevating cam gear 3431, the gear portion 3431a is formed in a semicircular shape, and a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward is provided at a portion protruding outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 in the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

The back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, and the elevating unit base 3453, and the elevating unit base 3453. It extends to the rear side. The back-up rear decoration body 3451 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 on the front and back, and rotating the rear petals so that they are located between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it has been made.

The back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 can illuminate the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-up and back-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up and back-upper decoration body 3451 are formed transparently, and a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed. More specifically, the back-up and back-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up and back-rotating decorative body 3451 are formed in a satin-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction, and the back-up and back-rotating decorations are formed in a satin-like pattern. In one of the petals of the cherry blossoms modeled by the decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the pachinko machine 1 (the one whose transparency becomes lower) becomes darker toward the periphery from the center of the petals. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the machine is rotated after the back. Through the decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 (even at the peripheral edge of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 arranged behind the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be visually recognized. It has become like.

It should be noted that the part numbers of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, and the surface-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included). The portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up and rear-decorative substrate 3452 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent back-up and back-rotating decorative body 3440, a transparent back-up and rear-decorative body is used. Since the 3451 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 by silk printing is the back-up rear decorative body 3451. When the color of a predetermined paint can be visually recognized through, or through the back-up rear decoration body 3451 and the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, and when a plurality of LEDs are turned off. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, attributes of surface-side electronic components indicated by the surface-side notation) can be identified by the color of a predetermined paint.

Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 3452 after the back surface are each package made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector is a connector. The housing is made of white resin (also called a natural color, which is recognized as the same color as white (natural color)).

A white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3452 after the back surface, except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate 3452, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Is formed. Further, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, the component numbers of the front-side electronic components and the surface-side electronic components are located in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components of the plurality of LEDs mounted. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the surface side electronic component The front side notation part indicating (may include a model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, the back surface (rear surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 has a part number of the back-side electronic component, an area indicating a position where the back-side electronic component is arranged, and the like in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component of the connector. Attributes of the back side electronic component (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). The notation on the back side indicating is printed with a yellow paint, which is a light color that is less noticeable than white, on a solid white resist by silk printing.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a and the shaft hole 3453a, which penetrate the base end side (right end side in the front view) and the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable. It has an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration imitating a cherry blossom on the front surface.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, on the surface (front surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs and the like are soldered is covered. , A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution, and further, this solid coating is further formed. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors on the white resist is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is white when it is turned off. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation less noticeable to the resist, it is also a solid white with high reflectance when a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light). On the front surface (front surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, depending on the combination of the resist and the front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint having a white reflectance very close to the white color. The reflectance can be maintained high.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), they can be used as silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

Next, the movements of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, and the back-up elevating decoration body unit 3450 in the back-up effect unit 3400 will be described. In the back-up effect unit 3400, under normal conditions, the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 is detected by the back-up rotation detection sensor 3428, and the back side. The upper front rotating ornament 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

Further, in a normal state, the back-up evacuation decoration unit 3450 provided with the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 on the tip side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction, and the whole excluding the tip side is It is located behind the front decorative body 3421 on the back and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 176 (a)). The portion of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 that protrudes to the left from the back-up front decorative body 3421 is located behind the back-front left effect unit 3700 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. It is invisible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below the center of revolution thereof, and is located near the end of the elevating unit base 3450 of the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 in the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. positioned.

More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force that tries to rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is acting, the force of the force is applied. Since the lines of force pass through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back-up evacuation decorative body unit 3450 rotates so that the tip side moves downward from the retracted position. There is no. Therefore, the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back-up elevating drive motor 3492 via the elevating unit base 3453 and the elevating cam gear 3431.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the elevating unit base 3453 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 counterclockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 can be locked to prevent the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back-up elevating drive motor 3429, the elevating cam gear 3431 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves to the left and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a, and at the same time. Due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft hole 3453a so that the tip side thereof moves downward.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction and moves above the straight line connecting the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b moves. It slides in the slit 3453b in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b revolves further in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b, the back-up elevating drive motor 3429 stops the rotation of the motor gear 3430, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b Revolution stops.

As a result, the rotation of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 via the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is stopped, and the tip side of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 including the back-up rear-rotating decorative body 3440 is moved. , It is in the state of the appearance position moved below the front decoration body 3421 on the back side (see FIG. 176 (b)). In the state of this appearance position, the tip side of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is located below the back-up front decorative body 3421, so that the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like can be visually recognized from the front. It will be in a possible state.

In the state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the slit 3453b in the drive pin 3431b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force that tries to further rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is exerted by the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the force line of the force hits the slit 3453b. Since the elevating cam gear 3431 passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the contacting drive pin 3431b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the elevating decorative body unit 3450 on the back side moves counterclockwise so that the tip side further moves downward from the appearance position. The weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back-up elevating drive motor 3492 via the elevating cam gear 3431.

In the state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the elevating unit base 3453 tries to rotate further in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 is clocked by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 can be locked to prevent the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

When the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 provided on the tip side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-up rear rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see FIG. 176 (b)). Therefore, when the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 is visible from the front, if the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the rotating back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 can be visually recognized. ..

When returning the back-up lift decoration unit 3450 from the appearance position to the retracted position, the drive pin 3431b of the back-up lift cam gear 3431 is moved up and down by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above by the back-up lift drive motor 3429. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the evacuation unit base 3453 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the tip side of the back-up evacuation decorative unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432, the back-up evacuation decorative body unit 3450 is moved to the retracted position by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back-up elevating drive motor 3429. It can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assists the rotation of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and raises and lowers the back-up. The load on the drive motor 3249 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 177, the back-up effect unit 3400 of the present embodiment is provided with the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 behind the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be light-emitting and decorated. Further, since the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are appropriately emitted. By doing so, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 can be light-emittingly decorated.

At this time, in a state where the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the LED of the back-up rear decoration substrate 3452 is made to emit light, so that the back-up rear rotation decoration is luminescent. The body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back left production unit]
Subsequently, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 178 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative unit of the back rear left effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 182 disassembles the back rear left decorative unit of the back rear left effect unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 183 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the back rear left effect unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left effect unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-rear left effect unit 3500 has a transparent back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-rear left-handed decoration that rotatably supports the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side. It includes a body unit 3520 and a back rear left drive unit 3550 that is mounted in a back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction.

The back-back left rotation decoration body 3510 of the back-back left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The back-rear left-handed decorative body 3510 has a shaft shaft 3510a projecting from the center of the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape (see FIG. 182).

As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 includes a transparent back-rear left decorative body 3521 through which the shaft shaft 3510a of the transparent back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 penetrates in the center, and a back. A back-rear left decorative board 3522, which is provided behind the rear-left decorative body 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"), and a back-rear left decorative substrate 3522. A front cover 3523 and a front cover 3523 that are mounted from the rear of the left decorative substrate 3522 to the rear side of the back rear left decorative body 3521 and rotatably support the shaft shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510. It is equipped with a movable base 3524 which is mounted on the rear side and whose upper end side is rotatably mounted on the back rear left drive unit 3550.

Further, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, which are attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that the rotating shaft projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotating shaft of the counterclockwise rotary drive motor 3525 and a flat gear 3526 that meshes with the drive gear 3526 and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear left rotary decorative body 3510. It includes a gear-shaped rotary gear 3527.

The back rear left decorative body 3521 of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 stacked back and forth, and the petals on the rear side are the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like it is rotated so that it is located between. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decorative substrate 3522 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-rear left-handed decorative body 3510 and the back-back left decorative body 3521 are formed transparently and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-rear left-handed decorative body 3510 and the back-back left-handed decorative body 3521 are formed in a satin-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction, and the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3510 is formed. In one of the petals of the cherry blossoms modeled by the decorative body 3510 and the back left decorative body 3521, the pachinko machine 1 (the one whose transparency becomes lower) becomes darker toward the periphery from the center of the petals. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but the back side rotates counterclockwise. Through the decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 (even at the peripheral edge of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 arranged behind the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be visually recognized. It has become like.

It should be noted that the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the part numbers of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-left decorative substrate 3522 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the surface side notation part indicating the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 is printed by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510, the transparent back-rear left decorative body 3521, Since the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 by silk printing is the back rear left decorative body 3521 and the back. It is visible through the rear left rotation decorative body 3510, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes are used according to the predetermined paint color. (That is, the attribute of the front side electronic component indicated by the front side notation part) can be discriminated.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decorative substrate 3522 is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist solution is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back left decorative substrate 3522 in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the left decorative substrate 3522, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back left decorative substrate 3522, although not shown, the component numbers of the front surface electronic components and the surface electrons are located in the vicinity of the surface electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522, although not shown, an area indicating the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component such as a connector. Attribute of the back side electronic component such as (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, a white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by the white coating film, and further, a large amount is formed on the solid white resist. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the front side that is yellow with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the notation inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance The high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 can be maintained by combining with the front-side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), they can be used as silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear left decorative body 3521 and a portion extending in a quadrangular shape from the upper left to the upper side of the portion are combined. .. The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed in the shape of a shallow container that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a that penetrates back and forth on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3524b that projects forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. The shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 is inserted with the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left drive unit 3550 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the actuating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 moves the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 back and forth via the rotation gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the back rear left drive unit 3550 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the back rear left decorative unit 3520. , The vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and installed in the back box 3010, the unit cover 3553 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552, and the rotation to the upper part of the front surface of the unit cover 3553. Spur gear-shaped motor gears attached to the rotating shafts of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 whose shafts are mounted so as to project between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553. It is equipped with 3555.

Further, the rear left drive unit 3550 has a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. The elevating cam gear 3557 and the elevating cam gear 3557b having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the gear portion 3557a and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from the vicinity of the front outer circumference of the gear portion 3557a. The drive pin 3557b of the 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a extending to the left and right, and the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 extending to the left and right below the first slit 3558a. Has a second slit 3558b, which is slidably inserted, and includes a link member 3558 which is slidably attached vertically between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that urges the link member 3558 upward, a flat plate-shaped partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. The back rear left relay board 3651 attached to the front surface of the 3553 and the back rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 (lead) attached to the rear surface of the back rear left relay board 3651 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 Type) and.

A white resist liquid is applied to the front surface and the rear surface of the back rear left relay board 3651 in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the back rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 are soldered. Each of the white resist layers is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear left relay board 3651, the component numbers of the front-side electronic components and the surface-side electrons are located near the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, the surface-side electronic component The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-rear left relay board 3651, the part numbers of the back-side electronic components and the back-side electronic components are located near the back-side electronic components such as the connector and the back-rear left elevation detection sensor 3562. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side electronic component The notation on the back side indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. The back rear left relay board 3651 is not a decorative board, and although the LED is not mounted, it is a board provided in the game board 5, so that the front and rear surfaces of the back rear left relay board 3651 are reflectors (refractors). By functioning as a plate), when the light emitted by the LED mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is possible to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and the support shaft 3551a projects forward at the upper portion. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 has substantially the same length as the unit base 3552 and extends vertically, and is formed in the shape of a shallow container open to the rear.

The elevating cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 with the drive pin 3557b passing through the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560. The detection piece 3557c is detected by the back-rear left elevating detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and projects rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically, and a first slit 3558a is provided near the upper end and a second slit 3558b is provided at the lower end. The lower end of the spring 3559 is attached to the link member 3558, and the upper end is attached to the partition plate 3560.

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back rear left relay board 3651 relays the connection between the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back rear left elevating detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Subsequently, the operation of the back left effect unit 3500 will be described. In a normal state, the back-back left effect unit 3500 is a back-back left decorative body provided with a back-back left rotating decoration body 3510 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184 (a). The unit 3520 is in the hanging retracted position. In this normal state, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 and cannot be seen from the front (player side). It has become.

Further, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back front left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700, and the back rear left elevating drive motor. Only a part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131 and the like). The portion of the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 facing the front is covered by a portion outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the player It becomes invisible from the side (see FIG. 135).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the back-rear left elevating detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located directly below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557 and is located near the left end in the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 It is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged in the direction of moving upward by the spring 3559, but the normal line passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3558a in the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear left lift drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lift cam gear 3557, and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 tries to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the elevating cam gear 3557 tends to rotate in the clockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the evacuation cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the left, but the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, so that the drive pin 3557b Can not revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, and the rotation of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear left elevating drive motor 3554, the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, it slides to the right in the first slit 3558a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 protruding below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a while the operating pin 3524b slides to the right in the second slit 3558b, and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 moves. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184 (a) and 184 (b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3559 assists the link member 3558 to move upward, reducing the load applied to the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554.

In this way, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a, so that the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. While moving upward, the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-front-left effect unit 3700, and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the back-rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 rotates when the elevating cam gear 3557 is rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides to the left in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the rotation of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 in the counterclockwise direction is stopped, and the state of the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 184 (c). )). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is rotated about 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

In the state where the rear left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, a force that causes the back rear left decorative unit 3520 to rotate in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a acts, and the force acts on the movable base. The link member 3558 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3524b and the second slit 3558b of the 3524, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 also does not rotate, so that the link member 3558 does not move downward and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 does not act on the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the elevating cam gear 3557, and the like.

In the state where the rear left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the drive pin 3557b is brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. As a result, when the back rear left decorative unit 3520 tries to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a due to its own weight, and the link member 3558 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3524b, the second The elevating cam gear 3557 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Instead, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 can be non-rotatably locked in the state of the second appearance position.

In a state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). It becomes visible from.

In the back-rear left decorative unit 3520, the back-rear left rotation decoration unit 3510 is rotated by the back-rear left rotation drive motor 3525, so that the back-rear left rotation decoration unit 3510 is rotated via the rotation gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated about an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see FIG. 183). Therefore, when the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the back rear left decorative unit 3520 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3555 is reversed by the back rear left evacuation drive motor 3554. The link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the evacuation cam gear 3557 by rotating in the direction of, and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 moves downward as the link member 3558 moves downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left elevating detection sensor 3562, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554. It can be returned to the state of the position.

As shown in FIG. 183, the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 behind the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, the LED of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 is made to emit light in a state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, thereby emitting light decoration. The back-rear left rotating decoration body 3510 and the back-back left decoration body 3521 can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Back right production unit]
Subsequently, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 185 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative unit of the back rear right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 189 shows the back rear right decorative unit of the back rear right effect unit disassembled from the back. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 190 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the back-right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear right decorative body unit in the back rear right effect unit.

The back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-back-right effect unit 3600 has a transparent back-back-right rotating decoration body 3610 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-back-right decoration that rotatably supports the back-back-right rotating decoration body 3610 on the lower end side. It includes a body unit 3620 and a back-rear right drive unit 3650 that is mounted in a back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction.

The back-back right rotation decoration body 3610 of the back-back right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The back-back clockwise rotating ornament 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface in a columnar shape (see FIG. 188).

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a transparent back rear right decorative body 3621 through which the shaft shaft 3610a of the transparent back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 penetrates in the center, and a back rear right decorative body 3621. A rear right decorative substrate 3622, which is provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"), and a back rear right decorative substrate 3622. A front cover 3623 and a front cover 3623 that are mounted from the rear of the right decorative substrate 3622 to the rear side of the back rear right decorative body 3621 and rotatably support the shaft shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610. It is equipped with a movable base 3624, which is mounted on the rear side and whose upper end side is rotatably mounted on the back rear right drive unit 3650.

Further, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and a back rear right rotation drive motor 3625. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotating shaft of the right-handed rotary drive motor 3625 and a flat gear 3626 that meshes with the drive gear 3626 and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610a of the rear right-handed decorative body 3610. It includes a gear-shaped rotary gear 3627.

The back rear right decorative body 3621 of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 stacked back and forth, and the petals on the rear side are the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like it is rotated so that it is located between. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decorative substrate 3622 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

The back-back right-handed decorative body 3610 and the back-back right decorative body 3621 are formed transparently, and a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light are formed. More specifically, the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3610 and the back-back-right decorative body 3621 are formed in a satin-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction, and the back-back-right rotation decoration body 3621 In one of the petals of the cherry blossoms modeled by the decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621, the pachinko machine 1 (the one whose transparency becomes lower) becomes darker toward the periphery from the center of the petals. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in line with the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but they rotate clockwise after the back. Through the decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621 (even at the peripheral edge of the petals), the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 arranged behind the back rear right decorative body 3621 can be visually recognized. It has become like.

The attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the part numbers of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the surface side notation part indicating the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back-back right decorative substrate 3622 is printed by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent back-back right-rotating decorative body 3610, the transparent back-back right decorative body 3621, Since the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 is arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 by silk printing is the back rear right decorative body 3621 and the back. It is visible through the rear right-handed decorative body 3610, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, characters, symbols, and shapes are used according to the predetermined paint color. (That is, the attribute of the front side electronic component indicated by the front side notation part) can be discriminated.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622 is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622 in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the right decorative substrate 3622, the white resist layer is made of solid white resist in the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Is formed. Further, on the surface (front surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622, although not shown, the part numbers of the front-side electronic components and the surface-side electrons are located in the vicinity of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622, although not shown, an area indicating the part number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is arranged in the vicinity of the back-side electronic component such as a connector. Attribute of the back side electronic component such as (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the model of the back side electronic component may be included. ) Is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, a white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622 in the entire area excluding the pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by the white coating film, and further, a large amount is formed on the solid white resist. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the front side that is yellow with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the notation inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance It is possible to maintain a high reflectance on the surface (front surface) of the back-right decorative substrate 3622 by combining with the front-side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), they can be used as silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decorative body 3621 and a portion extending in a quadrangular shape from the upper right to the upper side of the portion are combined. .. The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangular shape. The front cover 3623 is formed in the shape of a shallow container that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a that penetrates back and forth on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b that projects forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. The shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 is inserted with the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the actuating pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 moves the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 back and forth via the rotation gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the back rear right drive unit 3650 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the back rear right decorative unit 3620. , The vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and installed in the back box 3010, the vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652, and the unit cover. The rotating shaft is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the 3653 so as to project between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. It is equipped with a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

Further, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a that meshes with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b that protrudes rearward from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the gear portion 3657a, and the front surface of the gear portion 3657a. An elevating cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer circumference, a first slit 3658a extending to the left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b, which extends below the 3658a to the left and right and into which the actuating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 is slidably inserted, the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. It is provided with a link member 3658, which is slidably attached to and from the link member 3658.

Further, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3569 that urges the link member 3658 upward, a flat plate-shaped partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. The back rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the 3653 and the back rear right relay board 3662 attached to the rear surface of the back rear right relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 (lead). A type) and a lower base 3663, which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and to which the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

A white resist liquid is applied to the front surface and the rear surface of the back rear right relay board 3661 in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662 are soldered. Each of the white resist layers is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). Further, although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back-right relay board 3661, the component numbers of the front-side electronic components and the surface-side electrons are located in the vicinity of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear right relay board 3661, although not shown, the part numbers of the back rear side electronic components and the back surface are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors and the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side The notation on the back side indicating the model of the electronic component may be included) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white. .. The back rear right relay board 3661 is not a decorative board, and although the LED is not mounted, it is a board provided in the game board 5, so that the front and rear surfaces of the back rear right relay board 3661 are reflectors (refractors). By functioning as a plate), when the light emitted by the LED mounted on various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5. It is possible to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and the support shaft 3651a projects forward at the upper portion. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3652 extends upward from the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663) with substantially the same length, and is formed in the shape of a shallow container open to the rear.

The elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 with the drive pin 3657b passing through the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by the back-rear right elevating detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and projects rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically, and a first slit 3658a is provided near the upper end and a second slit 3658b is provided at the lower end. The lower end of the spring 3659 is attached to the link member 3658, and the upper end is attached to the partition plate 3660.

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back rear right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back rear right decorative board 3622, the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-right effect unit 3600 will be described. In a normal state, the back-back right effect unit 3600 is a back-back right decorative body provided with a back-back right rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191 (a). The unit 3620 is in the hanging retracted position. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is located behind the back front right effect unit 3800, and is invisible from the front (player side). It has become.

Further, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the whole is forward (player side). It is invisible from.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the back-rear right elevating detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located directly below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657, and is located near the right end in the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. Further, in the normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3624b located to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 It is located near the right end in the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged in the direction of moving upward by the spring 3569, but the normal line passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3658a in the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is formed. Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a due to the urging force of the spring 3569, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3569 does not act on the back rear right evacuation drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the evacuation cam gear 3657, and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 tries to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3569, the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. .. At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the evacuation cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right, but the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, so that the drive pin 3657b Can not revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, and the rotation of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654, the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a, and the elevating cam gear 3657 The drive pin 3657b of the above revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, it slides to the left in the first slit 3658a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. It becomes.

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the actuating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 protruding below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a while the operating pin 3624b slides to the left in the second slit 3658b, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 retracts. It will rotate in the clockwise direction from the position (see FIGS. 191 (a) and 191 (b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3659 assists the link member 3658 to move upward, reducing the load applied to the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654.

In this way, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. It will move upward, and the back-back clockwise decorative body 3610 will move to the left of the back-front-right effect unit 3800, and will be visible from the front (player side).

In the back-rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotation position of the back-rear right decoration unit 3620 when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted state). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the rear right decorative unit 3620 is rotated about 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides to the right in the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back-right elevating drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the rotation of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 in the clockwise direction is stopped, and the state of the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 191 (c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the rear right decorative unit 3620 is rotated about 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

In the state where the rear right decorative unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, a force that causes the back rear right decorative unit 3620 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction around the support shaft 3651a acts, and the force moves. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3624b and the second slit 3658b of the base 3624, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 does not rotate either, so that the link member 3658 does not move downward and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevating cam gear 3657, and the like.

In the state where the back rear right decorative unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 is further rotated in the clockwise direction so that the drive pin 3657b comes into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the back rear right decorative unit 3620 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651a due to its own weight, the link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3624b. Due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b, the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Instead, the link member 3658 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 can be non-rotatably locked in the state of the second appearance position.

In the state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). It becomes visible from.

In the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is moved via the rotary gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see FIG. 190). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the back rear right decorative unit 3620 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3655 is reversed by the back rear right evacuation drive motor 3654. By rotating in the direction of, the link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the evacuation cam gear 3657, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 moves downward as the link member 3658 moves downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662, the back rear right decorative unit 3620 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. It can be returned to the state of the position.

As shown in FIG. 190, the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 behind the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, the LED of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 is made to emit light in a state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side. The back-back right rotating decoration body 3610 and the back-back right decoration body 3621 can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Subsequently, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192 (a) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 192 (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative unit in the back front left effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 194 disassembles one back front left decorative unit in the back front left effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 195 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 195 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 has three back front left decorations, in order from the top, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A, the second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the right. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back front left decorative unit 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 has a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating the front and rear and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. The shape of the shutter support member 3712 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each of them is rotatably supported around an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. It includes a shutter unit 3730.

Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and is provided behind the transparent flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front left decorative body 3713. The back front left decorative board 3714 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "front surface (mounting surface)") and the back front left decorative board 3714 are covered from the rear. It is equipped with a rear cover 3715 which is attached to the front cover 3711 and is attached to the front surface of the back rear left effect unit 3500.

Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front left drive solenoid. The transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger in the left drive solenoid 3717 and the support plate 3716 are rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, and the transmission member 3718 is moved forward and backward by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. It includes a rotating link member 3719 and an opening / closing slider 3720 that slides in the vertical direction to open and close the shutter unit 3730 by rotating the link member 3719.

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 is formed in an outer shape such that the "convex" character is tilted to the right and the corners are rounded (a shape in which a "pine" is stylized). On the front surface of the front cover 3711, a portion where a metal decorative portion 3711a having a metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having a metallic decorative portion 3711a having a metallic luster is arranged in the vicinity of the front cover 3711. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3711a having a metallic luster is integrally molded with the front cover 3711, but is molded separately from the front cover 3711, and the molded portion and the front cover are molded separately. It may be configured to assemble with 3711.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3711a can give a high-class feeling, and the front cover 3711 can be made to stand out, so that the presence of the front cover 3711 can be further emphasized. The metal decoration portion 3711a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The front cover 3711 has a metal decorative portion 3711a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decorative portion 3711a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3711. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3711, so that the metal decorative portion 3711a It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 and damaging the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3733 of each shutter member 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening / closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending to the left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a columnar shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3732, and a left side after projecting from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. It has a crankshaft 3734 that extends in a columnar direction.

The shutter 3732 is formed in a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733.

The shutter member 3731 can rotate around the axis in the left-right direction about the shaft portion 3733 by rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3733 by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the open / close slider 3720.

Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 has characters, items, logos, etc. that are in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The pattern is given. The back front left decorative body 3713 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing the light from the LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. The surface of the back front left decorative body 3713, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and behind the back front left decorative body 3713. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the arranged back front left decorative board 3714. The front surface and the back surface of the back front left decorative body 3713 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the back front left decorative body 3713 may be replaced with a lens cut. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

When the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front left decorative body 3713 is transparently formed, the surface (mounting) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 arranged behind the back front left decorative body 3713 through the back front left decorative body 3713. The surface) can be visually recognized.

The attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the part numbers of the plurality of surface-side electronic components such as LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the surface side notation part indicating the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is printed by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is arranged behind the transparent back front left decorative body 3713. Therefore, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 by silk printing is passed through the back front left decorative body 3713. If the color of a predetermined paint can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface side notation portion) are displayed according to the color of the predetermined paint. The attributes of the surface-side electronic components shown) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the front left decorative substrate 3714 is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist solution is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, a white resist is applied with a solid white resist in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. Layers are formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, although not shown, the component numbers of the surface side electronic components and the surface side electrons are located in the vicinity of the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, although not shown, the component numbers of the back surface side electronic components and the positions where the back surface side electronic components are arranged are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. The notation on the back side indicating (there is)) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, a white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by the white coating film, and further, a large amount is formed on the solid white resist. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the front side that is yellow with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the notation inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance The high reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be maintained by combining with the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), they can be used as silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent to the right. In the support plate 3716, a portion bent to the right on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. Further, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a protruding from the vicinity of the lower end to the right in a columnar shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in a direction in which the plunger moves downward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can rotate about the axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3716a. The link member 3719 is provided with a first connecting portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted, and is connected to the opening / closing slider 3720. A connecting portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The opening / closing slider 3720 extends vertically at substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. It has a 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front left effect unit 3700 will be described. In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), in the normal state, the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 is in a state where the plate surface faces forward, and there are a plurality of them. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front left decorative body 3713 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (plurality of shutters 3732). Has been done.

In the normal state, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the urging force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the open / close slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

In this normal state, when the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b on the opposite side of the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening / closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b to move downward.

When the opening / closing slider 3720 moves downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is positioned so that the crankshaft 3734 is located below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates about the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 faces up and down, so that the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the back front provided behind the shutter unit 3730. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195 (b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction to the above, The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left effect unit 3700 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3730 is changed to the back front left decoration body 3713. It is possible to switch to the decoration (picture) of, and the player can enjoy the change of decoration.

Further, since the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3714 are emitted. Then, the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are made to emit light, so that the light emitting decorated back front left The decorative body 3713 can be shown to the player.

Further, in the back front left effect unit 3700, there are three back front left decorative unit units 3710A, a second back front left decorative unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative unit 3710C. Since the shutter unit 3730 can be opened and closed independently and the 3710 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be given to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decoration units 3710. I can show you.

[5-9k. Back front right production unit]
Subsequently, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196 (a) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 196 (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative unit in the back front right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 198 disassembles one back front right decorative unit in the back front right effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 199 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 199 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the open state.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back front right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010 so that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decoration body 3040. .. The back front right production unit 3800 has three back front right decorations, in order from the top, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A, the second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the left. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 has a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating the front and rear and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. The shape of the shutter support member 3812 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3812 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each is rotatably supported around an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. It is equipped with a shutter unit 3830.

Further, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and is provided behind the transparent flat plate-shaped back front right decorative body 3813 and the back front right decorative body 3813. The back front right decorative board 3814 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, may be referred to as "front surface (mounting surface)") and the back front right decorative board 3814 are covered from the rear. It is equipped with a rear cover 3815 which is attached to the front cover 3811 and is attached to the front surface of the back rear right effect unit 3600.

Further, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right drive solenoid 3817. The transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger in the right drive solenoid 3817 and the support plate 3816 are rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, and the transmission member 3818 is moved forward and backward by the back front right drive solenoid 3817. It includes a rotating link member 3819 and an open / close slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction to open and close the shutter unit 3830 by rotating the link member 3819.

The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative unit 3810 is formed in an outer shape such that the "convex" character is tilted to the left and the corners are rounded (a shape in which a "pine" is stylized). On the front surface of the front cover 3811, a portion where a metal decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having a metallic decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster is arranged in the vicinity of the front cover 3811. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metallic decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster is integrally molded with the front cover 3811, but it is molded separately from the front cover 3811, and the molded portion and the front cover are molded separately. It may be configured to assemble with 3811.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3811a can give a high-class feeling, and the front cover 3811 can be made to stand out, so that the presence of the front cover 3811 can be further emphasized. The metal decoration portion 3811a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The front cover 3811 has a metal decorative portion 3811a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decorative portion 3811a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3811. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 to the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3811, so that the metal decorative portion 3811a It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front right decorative substrate 3814 and damaging the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Therefore, it is possible to improve the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3833 of each shutter member 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening / closing slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending to the left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a columnar shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3832, and a right side after projecting from the tip of the right shaft part 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. It has a crankshaft 3834 that extends in a columnar direction.

The shutter 3832 is formed in a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833.

The shutter member 3831 can rotate about the axis in the left-right direction around the shaft portion 3833 by rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3833 by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the open / close slider 3820.

Although not shown, the back front right decorative body 3813 has characters, items, logos, etc. that are in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The pattern is given. The back front right decorative body 3813 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing the light from the LED of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The surface of the back front right decorative body 3813, which is an inner lens, is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffusely refracted, and behind the back front right decorative body 3813. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the arranged back front right decorative board 3814. The front surface and the back surface of the back front right decorative body 3813 may be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface may be replaced with the front right decorative body 3813. May be lens-cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the front right decorative substrate 3814 are surface mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 becomes visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front right decorative body 3813 is transparently formed, the surface (mounting) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 arranged behind the back front right decorative body 3813 through the back front right decorative body 3813. The surface) can be visually recognized.

The attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the part numbers of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged. (Furthermore, the surface side notation part indicating the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included.) The front right decorative substrate 3814 is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 by silk printing in a predetermined paint color, and the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is arranged behind the transparent back front right decorative body 3813. Therefore, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 by silk printing is passed through the back front right decorative body 3813. If the color of a predetermined paint can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the surface side notation portion) are displayed according to the color of the predetermined paint. The attributes of the surface-side electronic components shown) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the front right decorative substrate 3814 is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist solution is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”). Back Front Right On the back surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate 3814, a white resist is applied with a solid white resist in the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. Layers are formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814, although not shown, the component numbers of the surface side electronic components and the surface side electrons are located in the vicinity of the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as an area indicating the position where the component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the surface-side electronic component. The front side notation part indicating (may include the model) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, although not shown, the component numbers of the back surface side electronic components and the positions where the back surface side electronic components are arranged are located in the vicinity of the back surface side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (furthermore, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included. The notation on the back side indicating) is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

Here, the reason why a white resist liquid is used as the color and yellow is used as the silk printing paint will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation part (back side notation part) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist. The notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, whereas in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and the surface surface. When the side notation part (back side notation part) is yellow, the yellow front side notation part (yellow back side notation part with respect to the white resist) is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist.

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors as described above. The light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, a white resist liquid is applied to the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 in the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by the white coating film, and further, a large amount is formed on the solid white resist. The front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit color is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that the front side that is yellow with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the notation inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is lit (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and white reflectance The high reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be maintained by combining with the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), they can be used as silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent to the left. In the support plate 3816, a portion bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. There is. Further, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a protruding from the vicinity of the lower end to the left in a columnar shape. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate about the axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3816a. The link member 3819 is provided with a first connecting portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3816a is inserted, and is connected to the opening / closing slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening / closing slider 3820 extends vertically at substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3830 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3831, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. It has a 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the back front right effect unit 3800, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 is in a state in which the plate surface faces forward, and a plurality of the shutter units The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front right decorative body 3813 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (plurality of shutters 3832). Has been done.

In the normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the urging force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the open / close slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the opposite side of the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening / closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b to move downward.

By moving the opening / closing slider 3820 downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is positioned so that the crankshaft 3834 is located below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates about the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces up and down, so that the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the back front provided behind the shutter unit 3830. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199 (b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction to the above, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3830 is changed to the back front right decoration body 3813. It is possible to switch to the decoration (picture) of, and the player can enjoy the change of decoration.

Further, since the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are made to emit light. Then, the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are made to emit light, so that the back front right decorated with light emission is emitted. The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

Further, in the back front right effect unit 3800, there are three back front right decorative unit units 3810A, a second back front right decorative unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative unit 3810C. Since the shutter unit 3830 can be opened and closed independently and the 3810 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be given to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front right decoration units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 200 to 205 and the like. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle effect unit is moved from a lower position to an ascending position. In FIG. 202, the back-up rear rotation decoration of the back-up rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-back left rotation decoration of the back-up-left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back-back right. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the right-handed rotating decorative body behind the production unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. FIG. 203 shows the back-rear left-rotating decorative body of the back-rear-left effect unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear-right effect unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively.

In FIG. 205, the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-up rear rotation decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit is moved from the evacuation position to the appearance position, and the back-rear left effect unit is back-rear. Move the left-handed decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the back-back right-rotating decorative body from the back-back right effect unit to the first appearance position, and move the back-lower middle-rotating decorative body from the back-lower middle effect unit to the first appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which it moved from the descending position to the ascending position, respectively.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that divides the rear end side of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, under normal conditions. , As shown in FIG. 111, through them, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and the back lower left effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are rotated to the back lower left. Decorative body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration unit 3250 of back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 of back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and back top of back top production unit 3400 The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, etc. can be clearly seen, and the center accessory 2500. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the frame of.

Further, in detail, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 is from the abutment portion 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is located along the side right middle unit up to the vicinity of 2700. Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the back-up effect unit 3400 and cannot be seen from the player side.

Further, the lower back left rotating decoration 3201 is located below the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 at the center of the side unit 2200 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the left side, and the lower back right rotating decoration 3251. Is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

Further, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, and is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 so that the upper portion protrudes into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the rotating decoration body 3310 from diagonally above, the number decoration above the center of rotation is displayed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

Further, the back-up front decorative body 3421 of the back-up effect unit 3400 extends left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a in the front view, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction is the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory. It can be visually recognized through 2500, and the rest can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back-up front decoration body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be visually recognized. The back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 having the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is in a state of a retracted position behind the back-up front decoration body 3421 in a normal state. It is invisible from the side.

Further, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 having the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is in a retracted position behind the back front left effect unit 3700 in a normal state. , It is invisible from the player side. Further, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 having the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 of the back rear right effect unit 3600 is in a retracted position behind the back front right effect unit 3800 in a normal state. , It is invisible from the player side.

Further, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are vertically arranged along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in the front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back front left decoration units 3710, the upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front left decorative body unit 3710B on the middle side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view. Most of the lower third back front left decorative unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the right part is within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, in the normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decoration units 3710, and the back front left decoration unit 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Further, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in the front view and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. The upper first back front right decoration unit 3810A of the three back front right decoration units 3810 is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view. The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front right decorative body unit 3810B on the middle side and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C on the lower side are the transparent game panel 1100 and the center on the right side from the part to the left of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, in the normal state, the shutter unit 3830 is closed in each of the three back front right decoration units 3810, and the back front right decoration unit 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 produces a back-to-back effect of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back back left production unit 3500, back back right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 , And the back front right effect unit 3800 performs a predetermined effect (movable effect or light emission effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the back-rear drive motor 3126, the lock member 3134 The lock is released by, and the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. As a result, the player can see the effect (movable effect) in which the large back-rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

In this back-rear effect unit 3100, although not shown, after the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the back-rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the back-rear movable decoration. When the 3110 is returned to the retracted position, the forward / reverse rotation of the rear-rear drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed, so that the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. It may be reciprocated up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. The movable decorative body 3110 can be noticed, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3110 after the back can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 rotates the elevating arm 3357 to rotate the lower back middle decorative unit 3320. Is moved from the descending position to the ascending position, and the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 rotates the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is good from the player side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates around, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

Since the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided with six number decorations, by rotating the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, it gives the player the impression that the roulette wheel is rotating. Can be given. Therefore, when the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is rotated, the effect display device 1600 is displayed with an effect image such as "Sugoroku", and the number of the number decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 that has stopped rotating. Depending on the situation, the "piece" may advance. As a result, the player is harassed by whether or not the rotating underside middle rotating ornament 3310 stops rotating at the desired number decoration position so that the "piece" advances to the desired "square". It can be thrilling and entertaining to the player. In addition, as the "piece" advances, the player can feel that the expected value is increasing, and the expectation for the game can be increased.

Examples of the production using the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower right effect unit 3250, the back upper effect unit 3400, the back rear left effect unit 3500, and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 are shown in FIG. 202. As shown, in the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower left drive motor 3205 rotates the back lower left rotation decoration body 3201, and in the back lower right effect unit 3250, the back lower right drive motor 3255 rotates the back lower right rotation decoration body. Rotate 3251. Further, in the back-up effect unit 3400, the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 rotates the back-up front rotation decoration unit 3410, and the back-up lift drive motor 3429 lowers the back-up lift decoration unit 3450 from the retracted position. At the same time as rotating to the appearance position, the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 rotates the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440. Further, in the back-rear left effect unit 3500, the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 moves the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 from the retracted position to the first appearance position on the upper right, and the back-rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rears the back. Rotate the counterclockwise ornament 3510. Further, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position on the upper left by the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620. Rotate the clockwise ornament 3610.

As a result, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 can be moved to the front of the effect display device 1600 and become visible, and the back bottom left rotation decoration body can be visually recognized. Because the body 3201, the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251, the back upper front rotation decoration body 3410, the back upper back rotation decoration body 3440, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 rotate respectively. By rotating the six ornaments round and round, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the player think that something good will happen.

At this time, the back-up elevating drive motor 3249, the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654 are repeatedly rotated forward and backward as appropriate, and the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 and the back-rear left decoration The body unit 3520 and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 may be swung, respectively. As a result, the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back-left-rotating decorative body 3510, and the back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3610 rotate while swaying, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can entertain the player.

Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, the seven ornaments rotate around, which makes the player strongly think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) may occur in which the player has an advantage. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

As an effect using the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 203, the back rear left effect unit 3500 is backed by the back rear left evacuation drive motor 3554. The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the back rear left rotation decoration 3510. Further, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the upper left second appearance position by the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620. Rotate the decorative body 3610. As a result, the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two ornaments rotate around at a position of approximately height, so there is something good that surprises the player. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3510 and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3610 at the second appearance position are the concepts of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1). It is also possible to display an effect image that is the position of the eyes of a predetermined character's face in line with the (world view of the game board 5). As a result, it is possible to show the player the effect that the character's eyes are spinning, and it is possible to entertain the player.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 204, in the back front left effect unit 3700, the shutter unit 3730 is operated by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800. As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right The decoration of the decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, as an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, since each has three back front left decorative body units 3710 and three back front right decorative body units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, and the combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed may be opened and closed individually. As a result, various effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Back back production unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back back left production unit 3500, back back right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all the decorative bodies and the like may be moved. As a result, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) will occur because all the decorative bodies are movable, and it is possible to raise expectations for the advantageous gaming state. it can. In this case, in the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

In the above description, the movement of each decorative body has been described, but when each decorative body is moved, the LED of the decorative substrate provided at the rear is appropriately emitted to emit light, so that the player can produce the light emitting effect of the decorative body. It can be shown and can attract the attention of the player even more.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player by appropriately combining a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5-11. Main effects of the game board]
Next, the main functions and effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration will be described. The game board 5 of the present embodiment is provided with a penetrating opening 1112 in the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a on the front side, and then the game area 5a is distributed to the distribution area where the game ball B can be distributed. The frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is divided into an impossible non-circulation area and is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112, has its front end projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is likely to be the distribution region, and the inside is the non-distribution region. Then, a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is extended from a position where the front surface and the front-rear direction of the game panel 1100 on the peripheral wall portion 2501 are the same to the non-distribution region side (inside). At the same time, since the flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution region side (outside), the peripheral wall portion 2501 Since nothing extends to the distribution area side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, the substantial distribution area can be set to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial distribution area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is increased, the actual distribution area does not become smaller as in the conventional pachinko machine. .. Therefore, the non-distribution area in which the game ball B is distributed is suppressed to be substantially reduced in the game area 5a, and the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is increased to increase the non-distribution area. It is possible to make it easier to see the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind the area, the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit, and the game and non-distribution area in the distribution area by the game ball B. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be enjoyed in any of the productions in.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation region side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion 2502 is provided in the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. Since the portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution region side (outside) and the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a comes into contact with (contacts) the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 or the like. It is possible to prevent deformation and damage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500).

Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by attaching to the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, the game panel 1100, etc., the peripheral wall portion 2501 is brought into contact with the game ball B. Can be prevented from elastically deforming and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from coming into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501 and making a strange movement different from the conventional one, which causes discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent the decline of interest.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-distribution area side can be made difficult to see, and the support portion 2503 (center) can be made difficult to see. Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind the accessory 2500) and the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit provided on the back unit 3000 can be seen, it is a non-distribution area. The range in which the effect image, the movable body, the decorative body, etc., which are provided behind the slingshot can be seen can be increased, and the effect of the pachinko machine can be more easily exerted. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out by having a large visible range of the effect image, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. of the effect display device 1600, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player. it can.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support unit 2503 is made transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed or the pachinko machine 1 is provided by the transparent part. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, or transmit light from a light emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), transparent parts such as the support portion 2503 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 are illuminated. It can be made to look gorgeous, improve its appearance, and enhance its appeal to the player. At this time, the transparent support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, it is provided in a movable body (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back rear left effect unit 3500) provided behind the support unit 2503. The light emission by the light emitting means (LED) obtains the above-mentioned effect, and the transparent support portion 2503 makes it possible for the player to recognize the existence of the movable body.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is extended to the game panel. The lens effect of the support unit 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the lens is extended to the same thickness as the 1100, and the support unit 2503 has the rear back front left decorative body 3030 and the effect device (effect display device 1600). Etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 is further reduced, and the part (design) behind the support part 2503 in the back front left decorative body 3030, the production image of the production device, the movable body, the decoration body, etc. ) Can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image, and the like can be made more visible.

Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is formed at a portion having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the tip end side of the support portion 2503. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown depending on the tip edge of the frame, it is difficult to see a single design as compared with the case where the shape is formed along the peripheral wall portion 2501, and it seems that attention is paid to details. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a deep design.

Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and is different at the relevant portion of the support portion 2503. Therefore, the effect of reinforcing the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, since the support portion 2503 extends from the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to make the illusion as if, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the support unit 2503.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from the middle (midway) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front-rear direction, it is behind the peripheral wall portion 2501. Compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 with respect to the tip end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, so that the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is sufficient. It can be maintained, and it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even if the game medium comes into contact with the game medium.

Further, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is formed so as to have a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or obscured by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is attached to the game panel 1100 when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. It seems that it protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and a good-looking pachinko machine in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-distribution area and the movable body, decorative body, etc. of the effect unit can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of fully exerting the effect of the effect of the above.

Further, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed from an angle, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it looks protruding to the side, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and to make it easier to recognize the distribution area and the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution region side (outside) is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and the flange portion 2502 is provided at the portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Does not provide a support unit 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside), so that the support unit 2503 interferes with the visibility of the effect device (effect display device 1600 or the effect unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, the area where the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen can be enlarged, and the effect of the effect can be more easily exerted by the effect device. It is possible to entertain the production by and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, since the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained at the same level as the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally resin-molded and gold. Deformation of the molded product can be prevented when it is removed from the mold.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is extended into a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded with the synthetic resin, only the portion of the support portion 2503 is different from the other portions. It is possible to prevent the difference in the amount of shrinkage from becoming large, and it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from being deformed during molding.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a frame-shaped front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear side. The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 as functional parts of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part of the motor 3654 is outside the game area 5a in the front view, and is placed between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Back front left decorative body 3030 and back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to at least cover the portion in the game area 5a of the elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 make it possible to cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Through the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100, and the game area 5a, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be obscured from the player side, and the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can be seen instead of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have an enhanced appeal to the player.

Further, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a partitioned by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 is difficult to understand, so that the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not partitioned. It is possible to give a feeling of openness by looking like this, and even if the game area 5a is the same size as the conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger. Therefore, since the gaming area 5a looks larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, raise the expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1, and play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover at least a portion in the game area 5a in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, so that the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to being able to exert the same effects as described above, it is possible to make the functional parts difficult to see even when viewed from the center side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided with continuous decorations over the entire surface, and the back front extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a in front view. Since the decorations of the left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the boundary of the outer circumference of the game area 5a by the continuous decoration, and give a feeling of openness to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made to appear larger than the actual size, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look better by the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. It is possible to make it stand out and enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side through the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left decorative body 3040. It is possible to prevent the back rear right effect unit 3600 and the like from being seen, and the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 and the like can be seen from the player side through the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by preventing it from becoming worse.

Further, in front view, at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 as functional parts is arranged outside the game area 5a (in the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554). Since (the whole) is completely (whole) arranged outside the game area 5a), the front component 1000 and the outer circumference of the game area 5a are used to arrange the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them, and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By balancing, it is possible to prevent the space of the game area 5a from becoming small. In other words, since a part of the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a in the front view, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer circumference of the game area 5a should be reduced. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of relatively increasing the space of the game area 5a and further exerting the above-mentioned effects and effects. Further, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory that moves in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be increased. In that case, The range of effects performed within the game area 5a is expanded. All the drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the accessory that can move in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Further, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs and the effect display device 1600 provided in the pachinko machine 1, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the pachinko machine 1 as if the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 were emitting light. Can improve the appearance of. Further, although the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided with the opaque decorative sticker 3032 and the decorative sticker 3042, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are each based 3031. And since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative sticker 3032 and the decorative sticker 3042) is made of a transparent member, the light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is emitted from the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back. It is possible to give the impression that the front right decorative body 3040 reaches the front right decorative body 3040 and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 emit light. It can be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where the light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional part, it can be understood that it is a functional part by covering it to some extent without covering the whole. It becomes spicy and can look like part of a decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left decorative body 3030 is not sized to cover the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, the same effects as described above can be obtained, and thus the back front left decorative body The game area 5a can be made to look larger while reducing the cost of 3030. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, but some of them are pachinko machines. It is desirable that the portion is closer to the center of 1 (the portion closer to the boundary line that divides the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). Further, it extends from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a even for a predetermined place where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (a place in the lower left in FIG. 131, that is, a place in the lower left corner in the game board 5). By providing the decorative body, the game area 5a can be made to look larger.

Further, the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 that divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a is closed from the rear by the transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The same effect can be obtained, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game in the game area 5a is smooth. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the front view, the back front left decorative body in the door window 101a The back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 behind the 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the extent that the inner part of the door window 101a of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decorative body 3030 raises and lowers the back rear left. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming longer than necessary. The cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since the (seal is attached), the front surface of the first starting port 2002 faces forward (player side), and the first starting port 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to direct the player's consciousness toward the first starting port 2002 than to the general winning opening 2001, the number of game balls B accepted by the first starting port 2002 decreases (or the first starting). It is possible to avoid that the player's consciousness is concentrated on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002. It is possible to raise the expectation for the player and suppress the decline in interest, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player surely recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 that the player should aim at, and the player aimed at the first starting port 2002. You can entertain the game.

Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first start port 2002, the player can be disturbed, and when the game ball B is received by the first start port 2002, Depending on whether or not a winning (for example, "big hit") in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by the lottery of the first special lottery result is drawn, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the expectation for the game is raised. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. After that, when the winner is drawn by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state occurs in which the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern, which greatly enjoys the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. At this time, if the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out as a privilege although the lottery of the first special lottery result is not performed. , The player is not discouraged, and the game can be continuously enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting port 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the form (appearance) of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 will be significantly different, a sticker is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a sticker is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, it does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unattractive, and the player can enjoy the game with the pachinko machine 1 and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 are formed of a transparent member, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002, and to fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1 are provided. Since the light from the means (LED on the decorative substrate) can be reflected, refracted, or diffused, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 can be made to look gorgeous and look good. Therefore, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the accepted game ball B is used as the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided backward later than the game ball B received in 2001, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is used as the general winning opening 2001. Since it is possible to guide the game ball B to the rear at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received at the first starting port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (superiority complex) due to the acceptance of the game ball B at the first starting port 2002 is a general prize. The player can be allowed to taste the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately rearward (). Since it can be guided to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, it is useless for the game ball B being received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to suppress the feeling of the player for a long time, to direct the player's attention to the next game ball B, to advance the game smoothly, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 after the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100. In order to make it possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in the front view. Depending on the player, the game ball B can be made to have the illusion that it has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and it may be considered as an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given after that, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. It is possible to continue to enjoy the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced. Decoration such as a seal can be omitted on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, since the cost required for the general winning opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player by turning the amount into a production device or the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the rotating back bottom middle rotation having a plurality of (here, 6 places) stop positions at an even position. The decorative body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 having a length extending to half of the stop positions and a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position (here, six), and an area detection piece 3325. Multiple (here, three) area identification sensors 3330 consisting of half of the stop positions that detect the above, and one position identification sensor 3331 that detects the position detection piece 3326, and multiple (here four) sensors. Since it is provided, when the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 rotates, the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 repeatedly increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. Therefore, by combining the area identification sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325, the current rotation position of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

More specifically, in the case of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, three side-by-side stop positions in which the area detection piece 3325 is half. The number of the minimum area identification sensors 3330 required for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half of the number of stop positions. Then, the three area identification sensors 3330 are set as the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is in the first stop position. At the time of (position of the decorative number of "3"), it is assumed that only the first area identification sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decorative number “2”) from this state, the first area identification sensor 3330a and the second area identification sensor 3330b detect the area detection piece 3325. To do. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative number “1”), the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative number of "6"), the first area identification sensor 3330a is not detected, and the second area identification sensor 3330b and the third area identification are specified. The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative number of "5"), the second area identification sensor 3330b is not detected, and only the third area identification sensor 3330c is the area detection piece. Detects 3325. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decorative number of "4"), the third area identification sensor 3330c is also undetected, and all the area identification sensors 3330 are the area detection piece 3325. Is not detected. After that, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative number of "3"), and only the first area identification sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. In the initial state, the detection / non-detection of the region identification sensor 3330 as described above is repeated as the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is rotated.

In this way, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions is provided, the area detection piece 3325 is detected by a plurality of area identification sensors 3330, and the rotation is decorated in the lower back. The rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area identification sensors 3330 are not undetected even until the rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. The current position of the medium-rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 After roughly detecting the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position identification sensor 3331. , The deviation of the stop position can be minimized, and the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions can be accurately grasped.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game can be played by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent giving a person a sense of discomfort (discomfort), to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back, and to suppress the decline in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (rotating decorative body 3310 under the back) that does not cause discomfort to the player.

Further, since the stop position of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed even if the rotation speed of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, and the back side can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is higher than that in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player, can strongly attract the player's attention, and can rotate the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the player side in front, and it is arbitrary after rotating round and round. Since it is possible to show the player an effect like a roulette that stops rotating at the stop position of, the player is thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the rotating ornament 3310 under the back bottom stops rotating at the desired stop position. It is possible to entertain the movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is an even number, the stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of sensors (area identification sensor 3330) necessary for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position. The number of the number is the same as the number of the stop position of the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back, and the ability (grasp of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (area identification sensor 3330 and position identification sensor 3331) is maximized. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions.

In the above embodiment, the back unit 3000 has 6 stop positions as the back bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 in the back bottom middle effect unit 3300, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have 4 to 10 stop positions.

Further, in the above embodiment, a movable body having a plurality of stop positions (rotating decorative body 3310 under the back) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body has a plurality of stop positions. These may be "circling", "linearly moving", "arc-shaped moving", "curved moving", and the like.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. The effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above is provided. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is housed in the main control unit 1300 mounted on the rear surface of the board holder 1200, and for explanation, the pachinko machine 1 faces the rear surface of the board holder 1200 when viewed from the front. The surface of the main control board 1310 opposite to the front side (that is, the surface on the rear side) may be described as "the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310" on which electronic components are mounted. Although detailed illustration of the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is omitted, a green coating film (hereinafter, hereinafter, a green coating film) formed by applying a green resist solution to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface). A green resist layer is formed by simply "solid green resist"), and a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. are built-in. Drives the main control MPU, which is a microprocessor, the main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), the main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and various solenoids. It is provided with a main control solenoid drive circuit for performing the operation, and a RAM clear switch having a pressing operation unit for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watch dock timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud. On the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the RAM clear switch, the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (furthermore, The surface side notation part indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included) is in green. On the other hand, it is a white paint that stands out easily, and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The RAM clear switch is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310. Since the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a second. It was accepted by the second starting port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the starting port 2004, the general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the first large winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, and the game ball B received in the out opening 2010 are detected. Out port sensor 3053, first sub out port sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first sub out port 2011, second sub out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub out port 2012, And the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. that detect illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid are It outputs a drive signal to 2612, etc., and displays the status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display, first special symbol display, and first special hold number display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to a device, a second special symbol display, a second special hold number display, a round display, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first large winning opening sensor 2402, the second large winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not included. While a contact-type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general winning port sensor 3051, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have a contact-type ON / OFF operation type mechanical. A switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and the game ball B The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B frequently enters. , The detection of the game ball B by the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 and the second grand prize opening sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the first prize opening sensor 2402 and the second prize opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3051 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life is used for the out port sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. The various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B is housed in the payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the surface of the payout control board 633 facing the rear surface of the power supply board cover 631 (that is, the surface on the rear side) is the surface of the payout control board 633 on which electronic components are mounted. Mounting surface) ”may be described. The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B is a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) (hereinafter, simply "solid coating"). A green resist layer is formed by (may be described as “green resist”), and the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 542, and the ball feed solenoid 145. A launch control unit 633b that controls ball feeding, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch that has a pressing operation unit for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display. At the time of maintenance, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guidance unit 570, and the game ball B in the payout device 580 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201), and the ball pulling operation is started. It is equipped with a ball pulling switch for. On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, in addition to the error release switch, the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (furthermore, The surface side notation part indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included) is in green. On the other hand, it is a white paint that stands out easily, and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The error release switch is exposed from the transparent payout control board box 632 that houses the payout control board 633. Since the error release switch is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that contains a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball is cut off. The detection signals from the sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. When the payout control MPU detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, it sends a door frame opening command to that effect to the main control board 1310 or opens the main body frame. When the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected based on the detection signal from the switch, a main body frame opening command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310. Upon receiving such a command, the main control board 1310 has a format in which predetermined information (command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) in the door frame opening command for notifying the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. Predetermined information (command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) is added to the main body frame opening command that adds information for arranging) and sends it to the peripheral control board 1510, or informs that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Information for adjusting the format of transmission) is added and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Upon receiving such a command, the peripheral control board 1510 controls, for example, the light emitting mode of the door frame 3 to the notification mode. Based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch, either one of the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 or When both are detected, a frame opening command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310 as a unified command. In this case, the main control board 1310 adds predetermined information (information for adjusting the format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the frame opening command and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510. Upon receiving this frame opening command, the peripheral control board 1510 controls, for example, the light emitting mode of the door frame 3 to the notification mode.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (meaning that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that it is "in stock" (specifically, that the number of game balls B that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 is provided with a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
When the peripheral control board 1510 is described as a green coating film (hereinafter, simply referred to as "solid green resist") formed by applying a green resist solution on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface). A green resist layer is formed by (there is), and as shown in FIG. 206, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on the command from the main control board 1310 and the control data from the peripheral control unit 1511 Based on this, the effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600 is provided. On the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the component number of the electronic component, the area indicating the position where the electronic component is arranged, etc. are located in the vicinity of the plurality of electronic components constituting the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512. The notation part indicating the attributes of the electronic component (in addition, the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component may be included) is displayed with respect to green. It is a conspicuous white paint, which is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , The drive motor of the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and the operation button elevating drive motor 367, etc., and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side drive light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port In addition to transmitting from to the door frame 3 side, or transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Further, the detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and has a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, and a top side provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic acoustic effect (acoustic effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are transmitted by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display commands. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, a larger number of sprite characters can be used for expression. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. Driven by sub-scanning performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as the main scan. It is output to each pixel of. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, it is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to one line of pixels from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be, and a maximum of 100 game balls can be continuously driven per minute. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that the first is likely to occur. Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction)" A lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "win" is performed.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guide of the center accessory 2500 is guided. A plurality of passages are discharged above the gate portion 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After contacting the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

In the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 are opened at intervals to the left. It is composed of a second guide passage 2522 and the like. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed striking), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and has a strength that does not abut on the abutting portion 1006 (right-handed striking). When the game ball B is hit with a strength that is weaker to some extent), it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the first attacker unit The closed second starting port 2004 in the 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0). 0.01-600 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time. In addition, the normal fluctuation time from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result is set to a relatively long time (600 seconds in this example) in the normal time (non-time reduction state), and the time reduction time (600 seconds in this example). (Time saving state) is changed in a short time. As a result, the normal lottery result is frequently derived during the time saving time (time saving state), so that the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened. In this way, since the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened in the time saving time (time saving state), the game aiming at the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 (so-called "right-handed") is performed. Will do.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the number of pending results is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of being the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of the sill, and is sometimes accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the second big winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the first big winning opening 2005. ..

Further, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second major winning opening 2006, and the second of the side right middle unit 2700. It is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted by the starting port 2004 or the first big winning opening 2005.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, so that the second sub-out to the player It is possible to urge a driving operation so that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of accepting the game ball B of the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. , It is possible to prompt the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522. That is, rather than "right-handed" in which the game ball B abuts on the abutting portion 1006, it is possible to promote a driving operation that requires a delicate adjustment for the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the driving operation of the game ball B. You can enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 that mainly uses.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing to the left of the center, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is highly likely to be accepted by the second big winning mouth 2006. When the game ball B is received in the second big winning opening 2006 when the second big winning opening 2006 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces, or 10 pieces, or a predetermined number) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second prize opening 2006 has the first shelf 2412a, the second starting door 2414, and the second shelf 2412b, and the upper left. After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and further, the third shelf 2412c, the first prize opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d roll to the left and enter the game area 5a. It is released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second start door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is "normal hit", and the second start door When the 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction)" A lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "win" is performed.

In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the first prize opening door 2417, a special lottery result (No. 1) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the one special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are the special lottery results (for example, "big hit") that generate an advantageous gaming state, the first big winning opening 2005 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the lapse of the special fluctuation time. Then, the game ball B can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first prize opening 2005 when the first prize opening 2005 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 provide a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 10) from the payout device 580. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first prize-winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by having the first prize-winning opening 2005 accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be made to pay out. Can be entertained.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, a lottery is drawn when the game ball B is accepted at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction)", " There are "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes after that is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed or the first big prize has passed after the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B to the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is 1) that makes the game balls B unacceptable. A predetermined number of times (referred to as a round) is repeated. For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is finished, the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "second big hit", ST (special) is set as an advantageous game state after the first big winning opening 2005 enables the game ball B to be accepted in a predetermined pattern.・ Time) is generated. This ST is to maintain a probabilistic change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the effect image to suggest the special lottery result. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are combined with the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back effect unit 3100 and the back of the back unit 3000 are provided. Bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, and back front It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 is displayed to that effect.

[8. Independence auxiliary member]
Subsequently, the self-supporting member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting member. The independence assisting member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the plate 8 of the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the island equipment. When installing (installing) on the pachinko machine 1, it assists the pachinko machine 1 to become independent and prevents it from tipping over. The self-supporting member 7 is formed in a block shape. Further, the self-supporting assisting member 7 is formed by using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated cardboard, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounted portion to be mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In the present embodiment, the dish unit 200 is provided with a groove extending in the front-rear direction as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a ridge to be inserted into the groove of the dish unit 200 as a mounting portion. ing. As a result, the self-supporting member 7 is slid back and forth with respect to the dish unit 200, and the mounted portion of the self-supporting member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (attached). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility with the independence assisting member 7 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the independence assisting member 7 can be easily removed by sliding it forward. .. Further, when removing the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island facility, it can be easily attached by sliding it in the direction opposite to that when the independence assisting member 7 is removed.

The mounting (mounting) of the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and the mounting portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above, but is "by inserting a protrusion into the hole" and "claw It may be "by locking", "by magnetism by magnet", "by surface fastener", "by suction plate", "by peelable adhesive material", or the like. Further, the position where the mounting portion is provided in the dish unit 200 is not limited to the lower surface of the dish unit 200 as described above, but may be "inside", "at least one side surface on the left or right", "front surface", or the like. ..

After installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and stored on the game hall side, and when the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island facility, the dish is again used. It is used by being attached to the unit 200. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the dish unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the door frame 3 has the dish unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that greatly project forward, it is forward. Although it is easy to fall down, by mounting the independence assisting member 7 on the lower mounting portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to assist the independence of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent it from falling forward. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, so that the plate unit 200 and the plate 8 of the island equipment are separated from each other. Since the self-supporting member 7 located at the above can prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping forward, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping over when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility. It is a pachinko machine 1 that does not need to be kept and is easy to install.

Further, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping over, so that damage to the pachinko machine 1 due to the fall can be avoided, and the game hall or the manufacturer can avoid the damage. It is a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the burden on the side.

Further, since the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting member 7, the self-supporting member 7 is mounted on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 to assist the pachinko machine 1 to become self-supporting. Since it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine from tipping forward, it is possible to make the effect device, the decorative member, etc. provided on the door frame 3 larger or to project the pachinko machine forward. It is possible to easily configure a pachinko machine having a significantly different appearance from the machine, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the dish unit 200 and the like are greatly projected forward in the door frame 3, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In the above embodiment, the self-supporting member 7 can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. The plate unit 200 of the frame 3 may be attached / detached by sliding it in the left-right direction.

Further, the self-supporting member 7 is detachably attached to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and then the functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202) is detachably provided on the door frame 3. , Door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.) may also be used. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as an independence assisting member 7, and the pachinko machine is attached. Allow 1 to stand on its own in a stable state. On the other hand, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, a part of the pachinko machine 1 is attached by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 to the door frame 3 as a functional member. It can function as a constituent functional member. Specifically, for example, in the case of a door frame left side unit 400 that bulges forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as a functional member that also serves as an independence assisting member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 By attaching the frame left side unit 400 to the lower side of the dish unit 200, it can function as an independence auxiliary member 7, and by removing it from the lower side of the dish unit 200 and attaching it to the left side of the door window 101a, it functions as a functional member. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting member 7 is made removable, it is not necessary to separately store the removed self-supporting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the removed self-supporting member 7 so that it is not lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachably provided on the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) and then detachably provided on the main body frame 4 (for example, "board cover covering the board", "wiring". "Wiring holding member that holds the game media", "Protective cover that protects the rear of the effect display device, movable decoration, etc.", "Storage tank that stores the game media", "Induction member that distributes the game media", etc.) You may also use it. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) to stabilize the pachinko machine 1. To be able to become independent in the state of being. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the function of forming a part of the pachinko machine 1 by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4. It can function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting member 7 is made removable, it is not necessary to separately store the removed self-supporting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the removed self-supporting member 7 so that it is not lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. When the independence assisting member 7 is also used as the functional member provided in the main body frame 4, the player touches the removable functional member in the state where the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be obtained without causing discomfort to the player.

Further, when the self-supporting member 7 is also used as the functional member provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with the case where the self-supporting member 7 is not used as the functional member. The number of parts required for the door can be reduced, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, the self-supporting member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. As a result, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island equipment and make it self-supporting, the self-supporting member 7 is housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, and the presence of the self-supporting member 7 makes the pachinko machine 1 look good. It is possible to prevent the independence assisting member 7 from becoming an obstacle to the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the independence assisting member 7 housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can become independent. Therefore, the installation work and the removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, as compared with the case where the self-supporting member 7 is removed and stored separately, it is not necessary to store the self-supporting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the self-supporting member 7 so as not to lose it. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having a mounted portion to be mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is assumed that the mounting portion is not provided. Is also good.

Further, although the self-supporting member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, the self-supporting member 7 is not limited to this, and the self-supporting member 7 is built in the dish unit 200 (door frame 3). When installing on the island facility, the self-supporting member 7 may be projected downward so as to come into contact with the plate 8. As a result, it is not necessary to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately after installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility, and it is possible to reduce the labor required for management on the game hall side.

[9. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment are used as the decorative member of the present invention, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in the present embodiment are used. The light guide radiation plate 3113 in the present embodiment is on the radiation plate of the present invention, and the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in the present embodiment is on the peripheral wall portion of the present invention. The back-rear decorative substrate 3114 corresponds to the decorative substrate of the present invention, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b in the present embodiment correspond to the LED of the present invention, and the first LED 3114a in the present embodiment corresponds to the specific LED of the present invention, respectively. ing.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100, on the front side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b are mounted. Since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide emitting plate 3113 constituting the decorative member are arranged and the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front side of the decorative body 3111, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the metal decoration are provided. Since the portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are located between the portion 3111d, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d is the metal decoration. It is possible to prevent a linear discharge from the portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, even if the static electricity of the metal decorative portion 3111d tries to discharge to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the static electricity cannot pass through the inside of the decorative body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, etc., so that the decorative body 3111 It must flow along the front surface of the light guide, passing through the outer periphery, bypassing the rear end of the flange portion 3113b protruding rearward from the light guide emitting plate 3113, and flowing to the inside of the flange portion 3113b (back side of the decorative substrate 3114). Instead, the decorative body 3111, the light guide emitting plate 3113, and the like can sufficiently provide a creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

At this time, since the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed to be smaller than a predetermined value with respect to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 or the like so as to be surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide emitting plate 3113, the flange portion 3113b The static electricity diverted inward needs to flow along the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the amount that the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is small, and the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is further lengthened. It is possible to suppress the discharge to the decorative substrate 3114 after the back. Therefore, since the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the first LED 3114a mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by electric discharge (spark). It is possible to prevent the second LED 3114b and the like from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d is reliably emitted and decorated by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to entertain the player with the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided so as to be reserved from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to the inside of the SL by a predetermined distance, static electricity is generated from the outer peripheral side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Even if an attempt is made to discharge to the foil 3114d, the creepage distance EL can be further lengthened by a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the substrate body 3114c to the copper foil 3114d, and the backing is discharged to the decorative substrate 3114 (copper foil 3114d). It is possible to suppress the storage. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by electric discharge (spark) can be prevented. (2) It is possible to prevent the LED 3114b from being damaged, and it is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

Further, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided on the light guide radiation plate 3113, the flange portion 3113b protrudes outward from the decorative body 3111 when the decorative body 3111 is viewed from the front. It is possible to improve the appearance of the decorative body 3111 without doing so.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, both sides of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 are decorated with the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it is covered with the body base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b as electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d forming a circuit on both side surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c is formed. , The front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 (light guide radiation plate 3113). The rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the covering plate portion 3115a of the decorative body base 3115 while being covered with the main body portion 3113a) of the 3113, and further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 is extended to the rear side, and the flange portion 3115b surrounding the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended to the front side from the covering plate portion 3115a of the decorative body base 3115, the decorative body 3111 The route of the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the surface opposite to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is on the outside of the flange portion 3113b. Proceed to the rear side, fold back inside the flange portion 3113b at the tip (rear end) of the flange portion 3113b, proceed to the front side between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and proceed to the front side at the tip (front end) of the flange portion 3115b. It becomes a meandering route that folds back inside the 3115b, and the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long, and is discharged to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It can be suppressed that it is done. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a plurality of numbers mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by electric discharge (spark). It is possible to prevent the one LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d can be attached to the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. (2) The LED 3114b can surely make the light emitting decoration, and the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (backward movable decorative body 3110) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

Further, since a coating film (not shown) is provided on the surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which the copper foil 3114d is provided, static electricity is also discharged to the copper foil 3114d by the coating film. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can inhibit this and surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the protrusion 3115e of the decorative body base 3115 are brought into contact with the portion of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. In other words, the copper foil 3114d is not provided at the portion of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115 come into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the copper foil 3114d along the portion of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115 come into contact with each other. It is possible to achieve the same effect as described above.

Further, since the copper foil 3114d is not provided at the portion of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115 come into contact with each other, vibration in the pachinko machine 1 and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 Even if friction occurs between the light guide radiation plate 3113 or the decorative body base 3115 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to vibration due to movement, the copper foil 3114d does not wear or peel off due to the friction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as disconnection of the circuit connecting the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, second LED 3114b, electronic component 3114e, etc., or short circuit due to the peeled copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the electronic component 3114e and the like can be reliably functioned to achieve the same effect as described above.

Further, as described above, by covering both sides of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 with the light guide emitting plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115, the discharge of static electricity from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is prevented. Therefore, the discharge resistance performance of the coating film can be lowered, the coating film can be made as thin as possible, and the cost required for the coating film can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back rear decorative substrate 3114 in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100 are made to emit light, the back from the first LED 3114a is emitted. The light emitted in the direction along the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c in which the first LED 3114a of the light guide emitting plate 3113 is housed. It is incident on the main body 3113a from the present portion, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided on the rear surface of the main body 3113a, and is radiated from the front surface of the main body 3113a. The translucent decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the front side of the above light-emitting decoration. At this time, since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide emitting plate 3113 are formed into a flat plate shape, it is possible to reduce the thickness in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced. Further, since the leg portion 3113f is projected rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113 so as to be continuous with the portion of the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c to which the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated. Since the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a in the light guide emitting plate 3113 can be widened, more light from the first LED 3114a can be incident on the main body portion 3113a and is radiated forward. The amount of light emitted can be increased to make the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 brighter and luminescent. Then, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113, the light in the direction along the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e, so that the first LED 3114a is forward. The distance from the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to the front part of the light guide emitting plate 3113 where the light is radiated forward becomes longer than in the case where the light is directed toward the first LED 3114a. Light can be widely diffused and radiated forward. Therefore, the entire decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be luminescent and decorated evenly and brightly, the appearance of the luminescent decoration in the decorative body 3111 and the like is not impaired, and the effect of the decorative body 3111 and the like is fully exhibited. be able to. In this way, since the size (thickness) of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arranging the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. It is possible to place the back-rear movable decoration 3110 in a part that is not placed in the pachinko machine, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is placed in an unexpected part, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. It is possible to make it easier for the player to select the pachinko machine to play, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player.

Further, since the plurality of first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are housed in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c penetrating the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the first LED 3114a is used. The heat can be diffused into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the temperature rise of the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Further, since the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 forms a gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the gap is formed through the gap. The heat from one LED 3114a can be discharged, and the accumulation of heat from the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce that the light emission of the first LED 3114a becomes unstable or damaged due to the heat accumulated between the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the first LED 3114a can be used. The first LED 3114a can reliably illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110), and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can emit light as intended. It is possible to entertain the player with the decoration (light emission effect) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the leg portion 3113f of the light guide emitting plate 3113 has an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g capable of reflecting the light from the first LED 3114a forward on the opposite side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the auxiliary reflection is provided. The light incident from the inner surface side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f is radiated from the opposite surface to the outside of the leg portion 3113f (main body portion 3113a) by the portion 3113g, and the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted. Since it is possible to reduce the amount of light passing through the leg portion 3113f, more light from the first LED 3114a can be incident on the main body portion 3113a, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, copper foil 3114d constituting a circuit for emitting light of a plurality of first LEDs 3114a (and second LED 3114b) is provided on substantially the entire front surface and rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the copper foil 3114d is provided. Is excellent in thermal conductivity, so that the heat from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused through the copper foil 3114d and can be dissipated from the copper foil 3114d, so that the heat from the first LED 3114a is less likely to be accumulated. Therefore, the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely exhibited.

Further, on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, a light reflection auxiliary region 3114f that is recessed rearward on the light emitting surface side of the first LED 3114a is provided by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and then the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is provided. Since the leg portion 3113f forming a part of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c in the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is possible to increase the amount of protrusion of the leg portion 3113f to the rear without widening the gap between the main body portion 3113a of the plate 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and more light from the first LED 3114a is emitted from the main body portion. It can be incident into the 3113a, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be brightly radiated and decorated.

Further, since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f recessed from the front surface to the rear of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided, the angle at which the first LED 3114a irradiates the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is set on the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Since the angle can be set to approach perpendicular to the front surface, the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f can easily reflect the light from the first LED 3114a forward, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be made brighter. It can be decorated with light emission to achieve the same effect as described above.

Further, since a part of the light from the first LED 3114a is reflected forward by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f recessed rearward in the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the first LED 3114a on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 Compared with the case where the reflection projection is projected forward on the light emitting surface side of the above, the shadow of the projection due to the light from the first LED 3114a is cast on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the shadow portion is darkened. Instead, the entire back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be light-emitting decorated with uniform brightness.

Further, since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, when forming a circuit for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light, Since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f can be formed together, the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f can be easily formed as compared with the case where the substrate main body 3114c is physically recessed by cutting, pressing, or the like. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

Further, the leg portion 3113f of the light guide emitting plate 3113 is brought into contact with the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and the leg portion 3113f is the copper of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Since it does not come into contact with the foil 3114d, even if friction occurs between the leg portion 3113f and the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f due to the vibration in the pachinko machine 1, the copper foil 3114d (and the coating film) is worn by the friction. It does not peel off or peel off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as the circuit for emitting the first LED 3114a or the like being disconnected or the circuit being short-circuited due to the peeled copper foil 3114d, so that the first LED 3114a or the like is reliably emitted. It is possible to show the player a desired light emission effect.

Further, since white coating films are provided on the front and rear surfaces of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the white color of the coating film reflects the light radiated to the front side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 forward. The front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be brightened to make the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) brighter and luminescent.

Further, the white coating film allows the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the circuit pattern, etc. provided on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to be forward through the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it can be made difficult to see from the back, it is possible to improve the appearance of the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exerting the decorative effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the flat plate shape provided between the decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Because the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d through which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted. Compared with the case where the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, which are formed in a bottomed concave shape, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are formed. The volume (heat volume) of the space into which the light is inserted can be increased, and the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be diffused. At this time, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other, the volume (heat volume) of the space into which the first LED 3114a is inserted can be further increased. The heat from the LED 3114a can be easily diffused. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to be accumulated, so that the accumulated heat makes the light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b unstable, or the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b become unstable. Damage can be reduced, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be reliably emitted as intended, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be used to make the decorative body 3111 (movable back and rear decorative body). The 3110) can be reliably luminescent and decorated, and the luminescent decoration (light emitting effect) by the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be entertained by the player and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, the light guide emitting plate 3113 is continuous with the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in which the first LED 3114a that irradiates the light in the direction along the front surface is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a. The leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the main body portion 3113a is brought into contact with the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 Since a gap is formed between the light and the light, heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be discharged through the gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and reduce unstable or damaged light emission, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are intended. The first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can surely illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can illuminate the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect). Can be entertained by the player and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decorative body 3111 are provided on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to generate wind. Since the front side and the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated to release the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, it is difficult for the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the instability of light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and the damage of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b due to the accumulated heat, which is the same as the above. It can exert an action effect.

Further, since the electronic component 3114e for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e affects the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. It is possible to reduce the amount of the electric component 3114e, and it is possible to prevent the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from having a problem due to the heat from the electronic component 3114e, and to obtain the same effect as described above.

Further, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other, a thin portion is formed between the first LED accommodating portions 3113c in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is possible to prevent the light guide radiation plate 3113 from being damaged.

Further, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the board body 3114c, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the board body 3114c correspond to each other in the light guide emitting plate 3113. By inserting it into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c or the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 (main body portion 3113a) and the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c can be brought as close as possible. The dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be reduced.

Further, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, even if a dark color such as black is used as the electronic component 3114e, it can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is possible to prevent the decorative body 3111 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) from being deteriorated in appearance, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 and fully exert the decorative effect. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal) surrounding the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c in the decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100. The first LED 3114a is mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 with the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in between on the rear side of the decorative portion 3111d), and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be visually recognized from the front to the rear. Since it is formed so as to be difficult to see, the metal decorative portion 3111d can make the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c difficult to see from the front, and the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating from the front (player side). By seeing the portion 3113c, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3111 (the back-rear movable decorative body 3110) from being impaired in the decorativeness and the appearance from being deteriorated, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 is surely exhibited. It is possible to entertain the player with the decoration of the decorative body 3111 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a shape along the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111, even if the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be seen through the decorative body 3111. Since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is aligned with the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c looks like a part of the decoration by the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the player can see. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3111 from being impaired in its decorativeness and its appearance to be deteriorated, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 is ensured. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can exert the same effects as described above.

Further, since the outer circumference of the third decorative protrusion 3111c is surrounded by the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decoration portion 3111d), the metal decoration portion 3111d acts as a frame to make the third decorative protrusion 3111c stand out. be able to. Then, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a are mounted so as to irradiate a portion of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c so that the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a is irradiated with light. Since the light is radiated into the main body 3113a in the direction along the front surface, and the light in the direction along the front surface radiated inside by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the main body 3113a is radiated forward. The light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused to a wide range as much as possible in the portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the main body 3113a and then radiated forward, and the third of the decorative body 3111. A wide range of the decorative protrusion 3111c can be radiated and decorated with uniform brightness, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c surrounded by the metal decoration 3111d in the decoration 3111 is made more conspicuous to make the decoration 3111 more conspicuous. The decorative effect can be more exerted, and the player can enjoy the decoration of the decorative body 3111 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. At this time, since the light is emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113, the point-shaped light source of the first LED 3114a can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111. It can be reduced. For this reason, since the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, the player can enjoy the luminescent decoration of the decorative body 3111, which is a hobby for the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease of.

Further, when the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 is light-emittingly decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward is provided in the portion irradiated with the light from the LED 3114a, the area of the portion (light receiving portion 3113i) irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a by the leg portion 3113f is widened. This allows more light from the first LED 3114a to be incident on the main body 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113. Therefore, since the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113 can radiate more light from the first LED 3114a forward, the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 is made to emit and decorate brighter. It is possible to show the player a luminescent decoration with a higher directing effect and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c that penetrate in the front-rear direction in a shape along the metal decoration portion 3111d behind the metal decoration portion 3111d. , The brightness of the light emitting decoration can be made different with the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (metal decorative portions 3111d) as boundaries. More specifically, when the light traveling in the direction along the front surface reaches the portion (inner peripheral surface) of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c penetrating the front and rear inside the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113, A part of the inner peripheral surface reflects to the inside of the main body 3113a, and the rest is radiated to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c. Then, when the light radiated inside the first LED accommodating portion 3113c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, a part thereof is inside the first LED accommodating portion 3113c due to the inner peripheral surface. The rest will be incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. As a result, when the light in the main body 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing 3113c, the amount of light is greatly reduced and the light is guided to the opposite side, and the opposite side of the first LED housing 3113c becomes dark. .. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a is provided on both sides of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, when only the first LED 3114a on one side emits light, one side becomes brighter than the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. When only the first LED 3114a on the other side emits light, the other side becomes brighter and one side becomes darker than the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and when both first LEDs 3114a emit light, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c Both sides of the LED become brighter. Since the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decorative portion 3111d, as described above, the first LED 3114a is appropriately made to emit light so that the metal decorative portion 3111d is used as a boundary. It is possible to brighten only one side, brighten only the other side, and brighten both sides, and it is possible to show the player a variety of light emission effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and reducing the interest. Can be suppressed.

Since the metal decorative protrusions 3111d (first decorative protrusions 3111a) surround each of the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c, the first decorative protrusions 3111a are located between the third decorative protrusions 3111c. The light from the first LED 3114a for emitting and decorating the other third decorative protrusion 3111c is reached by the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, which is located behind the portion. Since it can be made difficult, only a predetermined third decorative protrusion 3111c (first light diffusing portion 3112c or second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112) can be light-emitting decorated in a good state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player suggest a predetermined message by luminescent decoration of the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c in a predetermined order or by luminescent decoration of the special third decorative protrusion 3111c. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of light emission effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is made to emit light, the light passes directly to the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) through the second LED accommodating portion 3113d penetrating the light guide emitting plate 3113. The portion of the decorative body 3111 to be irradiated with the light from the second LED 3114b can be radiated and decorated in a dot shape brighter than the portion radiated and decorated by the first LED 3114a. Therefore, since it is possible to show the player the portion that is light-emitting and decorated in a plane shape by the first LED 3114a and the portion that is light-emitting and decorated in a dot shape by the second LED 3114b, the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be sharpened. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the luminous decoration, to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, since the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be made difficult to see from the front by the metal decorative portion 3111d, the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Even if the size (thickness) of the decorative body 3111 is reduced, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) is not impaired, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exhibited. Therefore, since the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, the back-rear movable decorative body in the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The degree of freedom in arranging the 3110 can be increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transparent decorative body 3111 in the back-back movable decorative body 3110 of the back-back effect unit 3100, the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding most forward and the first decoration Three decorative protrusions with curved front surfaces, a second decorative protrusion 3111b protruding smaller than the protrusion 3111a and a third decorative protrusion 3111c protruding smaller than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a by foil stamping, the portion where the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided remains transparent. That is, since it is a single decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d and a transparent portion (transparent decorative portion), the structure is such that the metal decorative portion and the transparent decorative portion are assembled as in the conventional case. Since it is not necessary and there is no assembly structure, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction, and as a result, the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the decorative body 3111 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, it is possible to arrange the decorative body 3111 in a portion that cannot be arranged in the conventional pachinko machine. By arranging the decorative body 3111 in an unexpected part, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, make it easier for the player to select as a pachinko machine to play, and appeal to the player. It is possible to provide a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the three decorative protrusions of the decorative body 3111, and the metal decorative portion follows the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since the 3111d is curved, the light inside the pachinko machine 1 and the light inside the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reflected in various directions, and the metal decoration portion 3111d is shining. In addition to being able to shine, the three-dimensional effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) can be emphasized, and the three-dimensional metal decorative portion 3111d gives a sense of luxury (premium feeling) to the player. Can attract the attention of.

When the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on both the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the decoration of the decorative body 3111 has a portion having a metallic luster different in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the feeling of depth can be further increased with respect to the decoration, and the three-dimensional decoration can easily attract the attention of the player.

Further, the transparent decorative body 3111 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c having different amounts of protrusions forward, and is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration of the decorative body 3111 by the three decorative protrusions having different protrusion amounts. As a result, it is possible to show the player a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth. Therefore, even if the thickness (dimension in the front-rear direction) of the decoration body 3111 is reduced, the decoration effect does not decrease, and the decoration body 3111 It is possible to reduce the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction, increase the degree of freedom in arranging the decorative body 3111, and fully exert the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111, which strongly attracts the attention of the player. It can be a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power.

Further, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes most forward in the decorative protrusion 3111 of the decorative body 3111, and the portion of the metal decorative portion 3111d protrudes most forward, so that the metal decoration The portion 3111d can be made more conspicuous, and the apparent difference between the metal decorative portion 3111d and the portion other than the metal decorative portion 3111d can be made to appear large, thereby giving a more three-dimensional effect to the decoration of the decorative body 3111. Can be done. Therefore, even if the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction is reduced, the three-dimensional decoration can be shown. It is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 that can be played.

Further, as described above, since the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction can be reduced (thickness is reduced) to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement, the effect member is provided on the front side or the rear side of the decorative body 3111. Since it can be provided, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player by providing a large number of effect members, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the metal decorative protrusion 3111d is provided on the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c, which are not provided with the metal decoration portion 3111d, project forward. Due to the lens effect, a sense of depth is given to the decorative pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 show the player a more three-dimensional decoration. be able to. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 is in the form of a sheet, even if the decorative sheet 3112 is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, it is possible to suppress an increase in the thickness (dimension) in the front-rear direction. For this reason, it is possible to provide an effect member (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) composed of a decorative body 3111 and a decorative sheet 3112 having a thin thickness in the front-rear direction, and a pachinko machine having the same effect as described above. It can be 1.

Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 having the auxiliary decorative portions (first contour portion 3112a and second contour portion 3112b) is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b are used for the first. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the rear side of the decorative body 3111 through the transparent side surface of the decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, even when the decorative body 3111 is viewed diagonally from the front, the rear side of the decorative body 3111 can be obscured by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, so that the appearance of the decoration of the decorative body 3111 deteriorates. This can be avoided, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exerted.

Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b provide the first decorative protrusion portion. The player can be illusioned as if the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the 3111a. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 outside the metal decoration portion 3111d in the front view, the metal decoration portion is provided by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. The 3111d can be made to look wider. For this reason, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 make it possible to show the player a decoration with a higher decorative effect, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can strongly attract the attention of the player. Can be provided.

Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d in the decorative body 3111 is formed by foil stamping, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is immersed in a plating tank or vaporized metal is vapor-deposited. , The increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, since the hot stamping device for foil stamping the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided with a flat plate-shaped hot plate having elasticity, the hot plate hits the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111. When in contact, the surface of the hot plate is elastically deformed to form a shape that resembles the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the metal foil of the transfer sheet is placed on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It can be transferred (foil-pressed) in a good condition so as to be in close contact with the metal. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by foil stamping using a hot stamping device, the transfer sheet having the metal foil first comes into contact with the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, so that the transfer sheet is pulled. The metal foil is less likely to occur, and the metal foil can be transferred neatly without wrinkles, so that the metal decorative portion 3111d has a good appearance.

Further, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side is a flat surface having elasticity, even if the shape of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is different, the transfer sheet does not need to replace the hot plate. Metal leaf can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible to easily respond to a model change, a design change, or the like, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side is made elastic, the hot plate is moved to the decorative body 3111 side according to the distance, that is, the hot plate is moved to the first decorative protrusion. The amount (depth) of the first decorative protrusion 3111a to be immersed in the hot plate can be made different depending on the strength of pressing against the 3111a, and the hot plate in the first decorative protrusion 3111a (decorative body 3111) can be made different. The range of the contact area can be widened or narrowed. That is, the range of foil pressing against the decorative body 3111 (decorative protrusion protruding forward) can be freely changed. As a result, when it is desired to change the range in which the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided due to a model change or a design change, the range of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily changed by changing the relative movement amount of the hot plate. it can.

Further, as described above, the elastic surface of the hot plate allows the range of foil pressing against the decorative body 3111 (first decorative protrusion 3111a, etc.) to be freely changed. Therefore, for example, the second When the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the decorative protrusion 3111b, the color of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be different between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. More specifically, in the conventional technique, when trying to form a metal decorative portion having a different color on one member (decorative body), for example, after forming a metal layer of the first color as a whole, a masking process is performed. By forming a metal layer of the second color on the whole and removing the masking, the color can be made different between the masked part and the unmasked part. Alternatively, after forming a metal layer of the first color as a whole, a metal layer of the second color is formed on the metal layer of the second color, and a part of the metal layer of the second color is peeled off by laser peeling or the like. The color can be different between the peeled part and the non-peeled part. However, any of the above techniques has a problem that it takes time and effort to manufacture the decorative body and the cost increases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the range of foil stamping on the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 can be freely changed by the elastic surface of the hot plate. Using the transfer sheet having the metal foil of the first color, the hot plate is moved so as to immerse in the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the metal foil of the first color is applied to the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the first. Transfer to the decorative protrusion 3111a, and then, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of the second color, only the first decorative protrusion 3111a is immersed without contacting the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The hot plate is moved so as to transfer the metal foil of the second color to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d having a different color can be easily formed between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and the decorativeness is more excellent. The decorative body 3111 can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by foil stamping, the metal decorative portion 3111d is left unpeeled at a portion other than the metal decorative portion 3111d as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is left by laser peeling. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 3111. More specifically, when laser peeling is used, if the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to be peeled has irregularities such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the focal length of the laser varies depending on the position of the decorative body 3111. Since they are different, the metal layer may not be sufficiently peeled off at a portion that is more than a predetermined distance (or approaches) with respect to the focal length, and there is a possibility that peeling residue may occur and the appearance may be deteriorated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only in the necessary portion by foil stamping, and it is not necessary to peel off the metal foil to form a transparent portion after foil stamping, and the appearance is good. The decorative body 3111 can be formed.

Further, as described above, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom of arrangement can be increased, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be placed in a standby position (evacuation) that cannot be seen from the player side. Since the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is movable between the position) and the appearance position visible from the player side, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided by moving the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 to the appearance position. The appearance (visible) of the highly decorative back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) makes the player think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100, the flat-plate-shaped decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface and the flat-plate-shaped light guide radiation plate After providing the 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended rearward from the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended. Since the flange portion 3115b extends forward from the covering decorative body base 3115 to the flange portion 3113b and the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 The route of the creepage distance EL travels rearward on the outside of the flange portion 3113b, folds back inside the flange portion 3113b at the rear end of the flange portion 3113b, and travels forward between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b. At the front end of the portion 3115b, the route becomes a meandering route that folds back inside the flange portion 3115b, and the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long (10 mm or more, or at least 10 kV discharge voltage). The distance that can be prevented). At this time, a decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface, and a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b for emitting and decorating the decorative body 3111 are mounted. Since the decorative body base 3115 that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 that easily generates static electricity by moving in the vertical direction, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 Static electricity is easily accumulated, and when static electricity is accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d, the accumulated static electricity is discharged at once due to its high conductivity, and the discharge voltage becomes high, so that the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b However, as described above, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long, so that the metal decorative portion 3111d can be damaged. It is possible to surely prevent the static electricity accumulated in the back and rear decorative substrate 3114 from being discharged to the back and rear decorative substrate 3114, and prevent damage to the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back and rear decorative substrate 3114. This makes it possible to reliably illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having the metal decorative portion 3111d, and allow the player to illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (backward movable decorative body 3110). It is possible to entertain (light emission production) and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the decorative body 3111 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110, a metal decorative protrusion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward so as to form a predetermined decoration, and the first decorative protrusion 3111d is provided. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the portion 3111a, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the front-rear direction. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made longer and can surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the decorative body base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. At the same time, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in another member (for example, the effect display device 1600) provided behind the decorative body base 3115 from being discharged to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to more reliably prevent damage to the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to the discharge of static electricity.

Further, since the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit pattern on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is prevented from coming into contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113 (the leg portion 3113f) by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, the metal decorative portion The creepage distance EL from 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be lengthened as much as possible, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the copper foil 3114d of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided so as not to come into contact with the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, vibration from inside and outside of the pachinko machine 1 acts. Even so, no friction is generated between the leg portion 3113f and the copper foil 3114d, and the copper foil 3114d is not worn by the friction and the circuit is not broken. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b do not emit light, and it is possible to illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 to surely exert a desired effect.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a metal decorative portion 3111d, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that transmit light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the brilliance of the metal of the metal decorative portion 3111d can give a high-class feeling, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can give a second decorative protrusion. Provided is a pachinko machine 1 in which the decorative body 3111 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be made to stand out by light-emitting decoration of the portion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. Can be done.

Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protruding portion 3111a projecting forward in a predetermined decorative shape, the metal decorative portion 3111d is given a three-dimensional effect, and the metal is provided. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can make the decorative portion 3111d more conspicuous, enhance the sense of quality of the metal decorative portion 3111d, and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 double surround the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is the flange portion. It can be hidden by the 3113b and the flange portion 3115b so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the light guide radiation plate 3113 for diffusing light, the light from the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is diffused to the rear. Since it is possible to irradiate the metal decorative portion 3111d, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111, the entire decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) is light-emitting and decorated with uniform brightness. It is possible to improve the appearance of the light emitting decoration, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the light emitting effect of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

Further, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended rearward from the light guide emitting plate 3113 that diffuses the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and radiates it forward, it is guided. A part of the light incident on the inside of the light emitting plate 3113 is radiated from the flange portion 3113b to the outside, and the flange portion 3113b can also be light-emitting decorated. The light emitting decoration of the flange portion 3113b allows the outer periphery of the back-back decorative substrate 3114 It can be made more difficult to see from the player side, and the flange portion 3113b is also radiantly decorated to improve the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, which is entertaining and entertaining to the player. The decrease can be suppressed.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3160, the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 can also exert the same effects as described above.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100, a transparent light guide radiation is emitted behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. The plate 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided, and are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on each of the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c formed on the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The side view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be accommodated. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are made to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c to the plate surface within the thickness of the light guide emitting plate 3113. It is irradiated in the direction along the light guide emitting plate 3113, reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113, and radiated from the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 to the front. Become. Then, the light radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113 is radiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 constituting the decorative member, so that the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The decorative members having light (decorative body 3111 and decorative sheet 3112) are luminescently decorated.

At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiating plate 3113 to form a decorative body. Since the 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are light-emitting and decorated, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a is directed to the front to irradiate the light. The distance until it is radiated forward can be lengthened, and the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is made to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of light emission in a dot shape. Therefore, the decorative body 3111 and the decoration The sheet 3112 can be evenly luminescent and decorated to make it look beautiful, entertaining the player and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the flat plate-shaped decorative member (decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimensions in the front-rear direction are thin. It is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and other production members (back-up front rotation decoration body 3410, back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, etc.) are arranged. It is possible to easily secure a space for the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player by providing various effect members.

Further, the decorative member (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has a relief portion such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since it is composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a, the decorative portion 3150 can be given a three-dimensional effect by the relief portion, and the relief portion is used. Due to the lens effect, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear. Therefore, the relief portion of the decorative body 3111 and the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can show the player a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth (decorative portion 3150), so that the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 ( Even if the size in the front-rear direction is thinned, the decorative effect is not reduced, the player can be attracted and entertained, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner. The above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a behind the decorative body 3111 having relief portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the 3112 is provided, it is possible to make the decorative body 3111 appear to be colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decorative body 3111, and the cost for the decorative body 3111 is reduced. Can be made to. Further, by changing the design of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decorative portion 3150) of the decorative body 3111 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be easily changed. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to handle.

Further, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern as the decorative portion 3150 is displayed due to light interference fringes, and the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 Light from, light from other LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, light from the effect display device 1600, etc., light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. are holograms of the first contour portion 3112a. By hitting this part, a predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of light, so that the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved by the hologram, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. Therefore, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to a part of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and even if the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is thinned, the player can not feel the thinness.

Further, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is composed of the hologram, the hologram is formed in the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111b. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having a relief part such as 3111c, the lens effect of the relief part can give a sense of depth to the pattern such as the hologram, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. The possible decoration part 3150 can be shown to the player. Further, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, in the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, it is a transparent decorative body. The outer peripheral edge of 3111 can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, and since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (decorative portion 3150), a feeling of openness is given to the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. You can make the decoration look bigger. Therefore, the decoration of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be sufficiently exhibited, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be fully exhibited. The decoration of 3110 can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player.

Further, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flattened, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact (contact) with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, so that light is emitted between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Is not diffusely reflected, and the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body 3111, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be sufficiently exhibited. Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, it is possible to reduce the dimensions of the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in the front-rear direction as much as possible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 and embodying the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and the outer peripheral edge of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) can be decorated by the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, by making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. It can be shown, it can give the player an impact on the appearance and attract attention, and it can also entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c in which the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated from behind, the first LED of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is accommodated. By accommodating the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, it is possible to bring the rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 and the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 as close as possible, and the front and rear of the back rear movable decorative body 3110. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide emitting plate 3113, and the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c into the plate thickness. Therefore, as compared with the case where the light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113, the portion of the light guide emitting plate 3113 (for example, the central portion) where the light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach. However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the portion and irradiating the light from the inner surface thereof, the portion can be made to emit bright light, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111 and decorative sheet) can be made to emit light brightly. 3112) can be evenly luminescent and decorated.

Further, since the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is of the side view type, the first LED is accommodated only by accommodating the first LED 3114a in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide emitting plate 3113 and causing it to emit light. Light can be radiated from the inner surface of the portion 3113c (light receiving portion 3113i) in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide emitting plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely realized. be able to.

Further, since a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 and light can be emitted to substantially the entire decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111 and the decoration Even if the decoration (decorative portion 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflective portion 3113e, and it is possible to easily respond to the change in the decoration of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3160 and the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 can also exert the same effects as described above.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine (parrot machine) formed by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 The decoration is composed of the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not something to do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be used as one decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

In addition, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have entrances (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large) that can accept the game medium in the game area where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player. It is equipped with a winning opening, a winning opening for a character, a V winning opening, etc.), and when a game medium is received at the entrance, a privilege (payout of the game medium, opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening, etc.) is given to the player. Since the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, etc.) is given, the player can enjoy the operation of driving the game medium so that the game medium can be received at the desired entrance. ing. As this type of gaming machine, a decorative member whose surface is metal-plated and whose cutouts penetrating the front and rear are closed by a transparent lens portion, and a decorative member provided on the rear side of the decorative member and forward through the lens portion. A decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light is mounted is proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-223485). According to the technique of this document, the appearance of the decorative member can be improved by the brilliance of the metal plating on the decorative member, and the decorative member (lens portion) is luminescently decorated by the light emission of the LED, which is of interest to the player. Can be attracted and entertained. By the way, in a decorative member having a metal decorative portion by metal plating on the surface as in the technique of this document, when static electricity is accumulated on the surface of the decorative member, the portion of the metal decorative portion has high conductivity. Therefore, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface is discharged at once, and the discharge (spark) voltage (discharge voltage) becomes high. In the technique of this document, since the decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the decorative member to which the metal plating is applied, the metal plating and the decorative substrate are as close as possible to each other. There is a risk that sparks will occur due to the discharge of static electricity accumulated in the metal plating between the metal plating) and the decorative substrate. Therefore, when sparks (electric discharges) occur between the metal plating and the decorative substrate, the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are damaged, and it becomes impossible to perform light emission decoration (light emission effect) of the decorative member. As a result, the player could not be entertained, and there was a risk that the player's interest would be reduced.

[Electrical connection method between the main body frame and the game board 5]
Next, a method of electrically connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided on the main body frame. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically electrically connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board, and a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main body frame side relay board arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is provided.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 (not shown) is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to play the game board 5. Each terminal of the panel side drawer connector (convex type) and each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 are electrically connected.

For example, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 will be described. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is formed of a non-conductive resin, and the front side is opened in a rectangular shape. In addition, it has a box-shaped body DCNa that is long in the left-right direction, and a plate-shaped base body DCNb that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear surface side of the box-shaped body DCNa to form an alphabetic T shape as a whole. There is.

Around the opening DCNa of the box-shaped main body DCNa, a drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5 is provided over a predetermined distance from the front surface of the opening DCNaa toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa. Inclined portions DCNaaa for guiding toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa are formed. Opening of box-shaped main body DCNa The central part (1 place) of the inner upper surface of DCNaa and the left and right parts (1 place on the left part and 1 place on the right part) of the inner upper surface are connected to the drawer connector on the game board side of the game board 5. It prevents the (convex type) from being turned over in the vertical direction, which is different from the normal orientation, and is inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is The position of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 when inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in the normal orientation. A groove DCNaab that prevents misalignment and enhances the fitting between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 is formed from the vicinity of the front surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa. Each is formed toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa.

On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa, pin-type terminal PNs arranged in two rows in the left-right direction in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (six pin-type terminal PNs are arranged in one row in the left-right direction). ) Penetrates the box-shaped main body DCNa and the base body DCNb.

Mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba are formed on the left side and the right side of the base body DCNb, respectively. When mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) in the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba, first the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN Rivets (not shown) are inserted from the front of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), and the end portion is crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209).

Further, on the back surface of the base body DCNb, when mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), the main body frame side drawer is mounted on the main body frame side relay board. A columnar protruding portion DCNbb is formed so as to be mounted in the normal orientation of the connector (concave type) DCN.

The main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) is a DIP (Dual) that is electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. An Inline Package) type small connector is mounted and electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness) (not shown). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) is guided. By electrically connecting each terminal of the type) and each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, the game board is connected via a small DIP type connector and wiring (harness) (not shown). A control signal line for transmitting various control signals is formed by the main control board 1310 provided in 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4.

The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided in the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4, and also supplies various power sources from the power supply board 630. It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) supplied to various boards provided in the game board 5, and is shown separately from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'is provided on the main body frame side relay board KB'separate from the main body frame side relay board KB (not shown). The main body frame side relay board KB'is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'in addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'. A small type connector is mounted and electrically connected to each decorative substrate and various sensors provided in the door frame 3 via wiring (harness) (not shown). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side is electrically connected to the DCN on the game board side other than the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5. The drawer connector (convex type) is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'of the main body frame 4, and is connected to each terminal of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (not shown). By electrically connecting each terminal PN of the (concave type) DCN', the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and the door are provided via a DIP type small connector and a wiring (harness) (not shown). A control signal line for transmitting various control signals and detection signals by each decorative substrate, various sensors, various speakers, etc. provided in the frame 3 is formed. The structure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'not shown is the same as that of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'not shown. The method of fixing to the main body frame side relay board KB'not shown is the same as the method of fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets). There is.

Further, a method of fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to the game board side relay board (not shown), the main body frame 4. Main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) Other game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided by DCN'other game board side relay board (other game board side relay boards) , Main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4 This is different from the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the DCN is mounted.) The fixing method to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is the same as the fixing method to the main body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets).

When fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (see Fig. 209), the rivet is used because the drawer connector is used to make the game board 5 the main body. Although the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically electrically connected to each other simply by attaching the game board 5 to the frame 4, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the drawer on the game board side of the game board 5 is used. Since a large force may be applied from the connector (convex type) to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, this large force may apply a large force to the pin type of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is to prevent the soldered surface of each terminal PN from peeling off on the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board KB (see FIG. 209) on the main body frame side. The case where the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) using bolts and nuts, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) are shown. When the game board 5 is fixed to the relay board on the game board side, there is a drawback that the nut may be loosened by attaching or removing the game board 5 to the main body frame 4.

In the present embodiment, a pin type is used as each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, but when a bellows type using a terminal and a contact is used, there are the following problems. For example, when each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is used as a terminal and each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is used as a contact, the pachinko machine 1 is used. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 with the power turned on, the contacts between the terminal and the contacts (specifically, a large current (inrush current) flows through the contacts for various power supply lines) are welded. It becomes. If the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 4 in this welded state to be attached, the contact of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side may be bent and broken, or the game board 5 may be attached to the main body frame 4. When removing from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the contact may be peeled off and damaged, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN cannot be used.

In addition, if the terminal and contact are welded together, various control boards may malfunction or the electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to the damage of the connector. Therefore, a dedicated circuit to prevent welding is provided. The problem that it needs to be provided.

In the present embodiment, by using a pin type as each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, the above-mentioned problem does not occur at all. That is, even if the worker accidentally attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, each terminal and the main body of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5. The drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side of the frame 4 is not welded to each terminal PN, and it is not necessary to provide a dedicated circuit to prevent welding.

[Solder short circuit prevention]
Next, solder short circuit prevention will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a view (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is a DIP type electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). It is a figure (d)-(f) which prevents solder bridge of each terminal of a small connector of. In addition, in FIG. 209, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter, may be referred to as “Beta Grand”) are omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings. Further, in FIG. 209, the arrow shown by the solid line indicates the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate is poured into the solder tank, and the arrow shown by the alternate long and short dash line indicates the direction in which the substrate is poured into the solder tank.

As described above, the main body frame side relay board KB arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4 includes the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). (Concave type) A small DIP type connector that is electrically connected to the DCN is mounted. The terminals of this DIP type small connector are pin type terminals arranged in two rows. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is a mounting through hole DCNba, DCNba formed in the base body DCNb of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the same straight line in the left-right direction on the main body frame side relay board KB. And the columnar protrusion DCNbb is arranged (predetermined position for the drawer connector), whereas the DIP type small connector is in the vertical direction on the main body frame side relay board KB, that is, the DIP type. Each terminal arranged in two rows of the small connector is arranged so as to be rotated 90 degrees from each terminal PN arranged in two rows of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN (predetermined position for small connector). ..

When the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, each of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN The terminal PN is inserted into each through hole KTH1 having a land (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "land KTH1"), and the columnar protruding portion DCNbb of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side is a positioning hole. The main body is inserted through KBb and the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side and the mounting holes KBa and KBa formed at the positions corresponding to the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba are communicated with each other. Frame side drawer connector (concave type) Rivets (not shown) are inserted into the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba from the front of the DCN, and the ends are crimped and fixed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. .. Then, when the DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for the small connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, each terminal of the DIP type small connector has a land through hole KTH2. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "Land KTH2".).

When the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, it becomes two stages in the vertical direction and the first stage from the bottom. The six terminal PNs in one row and the six terminal PNs in the second row, which are the second row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. On the other hand, when a DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for the small connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, the number of stages is 6 in the vertical direction and the first stage from the bottom. Two terminal PNs in one row, two terminal PNs in the second row that are the second row from the bottom, two terminal PNs in the third row that are the third row from the bottom, and the fourth row from the bottom. The two terminal PNs in the fourth row, the two terminal PNs in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and the two terminal PNs in the sixth row, which are the sixth row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. It becomes.

On the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector, and the DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for the small connector. When placed, each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side and each terminal of the DIP type small connector protrude from the back surface (solder surface) KBy. In such a state, by flowing the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB to the solder tank, each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each land KTH1 are relayed on the main body frame side. It can be soldered to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the board KB, and each terminal of the DIP type small connector and each land KTH2 can be soldered to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. Can be done.

The direction in which the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder tank is from the bottom of the 6 terminals PN in the second row, which is the second stage from the bottom of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The direction is toward the 6 terminals PN in the 1st row, which is the 1st stage, and the 2 terminals in the 6th row, which is the 6th stage from the bottom of the DIP type small connector, is the 1st stage from the bottom. The direction is toward the two terminals in the first row. That is, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the six terminal PNs in the first row, which are the first stage from the bottom, are the terminals in the final stage, and in the DIP type small connector, they are the first stage from the bottom. The two terminals in the first row are the terminals in the final stage.

When the back surface (solder surface) of the board is flown to the solder tank, the solder tank is in a state where the pin type ones are aligned, such as the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each terminal of the DIP type small connector. There is a possibility that a solder bridge will be generated along the flow direction, and in particular, a solder bridge will be generated at the terminal of the final stage and the terminal of the stage in front of the terminal. Therefore, a solder relief pattern is formed at the terminal of the final stage.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as described above, since the six terminal PNs in the first row, which are the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final stage, the six terminal PNs in the first row Each land KTH1 and a solder relief pattern KNP1 having a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction and has a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 are connected (that is, each of the six terminal PNs in the first row). The land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1 are electrically connected to each other) and are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side.

In the DIP type small connector, as described above, since the two terminals in the first row, which are the first stage from the bottom, are the terminals in the final stage, each land KTH2 of the two terminals PN in the first row and the top and bottom A solder relief pattern KNP2 having a rectangular shape that is long in the direction and has a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH2 is connected (that is, each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern of the two terminals in the first row). It is formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side (so that the KNP 2 is electrically connected to each other).

In this way, by forming a solder relief pattern on the final stage terminals, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges at the final stage terminals and contribute to the prevention of solder short circuits, but solder bridges other than the final stage terminals May occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a method capable of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundary of each stage by silk printing on the resist (measure 1 by silk printing), on the resist. A method of printing horizontal lines at the boundaries of each stage by silk printing and printing vertical lines at the boundaries of lands and solder relief patterns of adjacent terminals in the left-right direction (countermeasure 2 by silk printing), silk on the resist. A method of enclosing the land and solder relief pattern of each terminal with a predetermined figure and filling the area by printing (countermeasure 3 by silk printing) can be mentioned.

[Countermeasure 1 by silk printing]
First, as a method capable of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the resist at the boundaries of each stage by silk printing (countermeasure 1 by silk printing) will be described.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 209 (a), the six terminal PNs in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, and the second row, which is the second row from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing on the boundary between the six terminals PN. That is, since the horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing, the horizontal line KSH1 is a vertical wall like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. Will be in a row. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and over the vertical wall such as the mountain range called the horizon KSH1. A mountain range-like vertical line KSH1 at the boundary between the six terminal PNs and land KTH1 in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and the six terminal PNs and land KTH1 in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. When the solder tries to stay on the resist due to the wall, a force for separating the solder acts, so that the solder bridge can be suppressed at each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent to each other in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIG. 209 (d), each terminal of the DIP type small connector has two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and the four rows from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the 4th row, which is the eye, and the 4th row, which is the 4th row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals of the above and the two terminals of the third row which is the third row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the boundary between the two terminals in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, and the two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, on the back side of the relay board KB on the main body frame side. (Handler side) Print on KBy, horizontal line KSH2 by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. Is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side. That is, the horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing. Therefore, when viewed from the resist surface, the horizontal line KSH2 is a vertical wall like a mountain range. Will be in a row. As a result, for example, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder needs to flow over the resist and over the vertical wall such as the mountain range called the horizon KSH2. , The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, like a mountain range. When the solder tries to stay on the resist due to the wall, a force for separating the solder acts, so that the solder bridge can be suppressed at each terminal adjacent to each other in the vertical direction. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fourth row, which is the fourth row from the bottom, and the fourth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fourth row and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, and the second in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between one terminal and land KTH2 and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the second row from the bottom, and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the second row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals in the first row and the land KTH2, which is the first row from the bottom, is also the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and the land KTH2 from the bottom. Similar to the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals in the fifth row and the land KTH2, which is the fifth stage, the solder is separated by the vertical wall called the horizontal line KSH2, which is like a mountain range and tries to stay on the resist. The solder bridge can be suppressed at the terminals adjacent to each other in the vertical direction and the land KTH2 by the action of the force.

[Countermeasure 2 by silk printing]
Next, as a method capable of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, horizontal lines are printed on the resist at the boundaries of each stage by silk printing, and vertical lines are printed on the land of each terminal adjacent to each other in the left-right direction and a solder relief pattern. The method of printing on each of the boundaries (countermeasure 2 by silk printing) will be described. This measure 2 by silk printing is different from the above-mentioned measure 1 by silk printing, and further, vertical lines are printed on the land of each terminal adjacent to each other in the left-right direction and the boundary of the solder escape pattern adjacent to each other in the left-right direction by silk printing. Therefore, the description of the measure 1 by silk printing will be omitted.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, in addition to the horizontal line KSH1 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (a), further, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), the first step from the bottom. Of the six terminal PNs and land KTH1 in the first row and the six terminal PNs and land KTH1 in the second row from the bottom, the terminal PNs and land KTH1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. A vertical line KSV1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the solder relief patterns KNP1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. That is, the vertical line KSV1 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing, so that the vertical line KSV1 looks like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. Vertical walls are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder can flow over the resist and flow along the vertical wall called the vertical line KSV1 like a mountain range. Solder flowing on a vertical wall such as a mountain range called vertical line KSV1 flows to the left of the vertical wall or to the right side of the vertical wall with the vertical wall such as a mountain range called vertical line KSV1 as a boundary to try to stay at the resist. By exerting a force for separating the solder, the solder bridge can be suppressed at the terminals PN and land KTH1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction and the solder escape pattern KNP1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

In each terminal of the DIP type small connector, in addition to the horizontal line KSH2 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (d), as shown in FIG. 209 (e), the first step from the bottom is formed. From the two terminals in one row and land KTH2 to the two terminals in the sixth row and land KTH2, which are the sixth row from the bottom, each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction and solder adjacent to each other in the left-right direction A vertical line KSV2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing on the boundary between the relief pattern KNP2. That is, since the vertical line KSV2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing, the vertical line KSV2 looks like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. The vertical walls are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder can flow over the resist and along the vertical wall called the vertical line KSV2, which is like a mountain range. Solder flowing on a vertical wall such as the vertical line KSV2 flows to the left of the vertical wall or to the right of the vertical wall with the vertical wall such as the vertical line KSV2 as a boundary, and tries to stay at the resist. As a result, the force for separating the solder acts to suppress the solder bridges at the terminals and land KTH2 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction and the solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

[Countermeasure 3 by silk printing]
Next, as a method capable of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of enclosing the lands and solder escape patterns of each terminal with a predetermined figure by silk printing on the resist and filling the area (measure 3 by silk printing) explain.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 209 (c), the land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and each solder relief pattern KNP1. , Is surrounded by a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction by silk printing on the back surface (solder side) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, and in the area KSA1 surrounded by this rectangular shape, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 Print so that the area excluding is filled. That is, each land KTH1 and each land KTH1 in the region KSA1 in which each land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1 are surrounded by a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. Since the area excluding the solder relief pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled, each land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1 can be seen from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA1. The escape pattern KNP1 is a recessed region, and the silk-printed region KSA1 is a small plateau region when viewed from the surface of the resist. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed into the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and over the small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1. The amount of solder flowing over the printed area KSA1 can be suppressed, and the solder is applied to each land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1 which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1. When it flows, the force to separate the solder works by trying to stay without being able to get over the small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1 from each land KTH1 which is a recessed area and each solder escape pattern KNP1. As a result, the solder bridge can be suppressed at the terminals PN and land KTH1 adjacent to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder relief pattern KNP1 adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction.

In each terminal of the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 209 (f), the land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted and each solder relief pattern KNP2 are inserted into the main body frame side relay board KB. The back surface (solder surface) KBy is surrounded by a long rectangular shape in the vertical direction by silk printing, and the area of the area KSA2 surrounded by this rectangular shape excluding each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2 is filled. Print. That is, each land KTH2 and each land KTH2 in the region KSA2 in which each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2 are surrounded by a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. Since the area excluding the solder relief pattern KNP2 is printed so as to be filled, each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2 can be seen from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA2, and each land KTH2 and each solder The escape pattern KNP2 is a recessed area, and the silk-printed area KSA2 is a small plateau area when viewed from the surface of the resist. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is flowed to the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and over the small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA2, and solder is formed on each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2, which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2. When it flows, the solder tries to stay on a small plateau called KSA2, which is a silk-printed area from each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which is a recessed area, and the force to separate the solder acts to move up, down, left and right. Solder bridges can be suppressed at the terminals and land KTH2 adjacent to each other in the direction and the solder relief pattern KNP2 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

Compared to the connector to which the above-mentioned measures 1 to 3 by silk printing are applied, the silk-printed part is extremely conspicuous as compared with the connector to which measures 1 to 3 by silk printing are not applied, so that the solder bridge is formed on the substrate. When performing the work of visually confirming whether or not the occurrence has occurred, the operator can quickly turn his / her line of sight because it serves as a mark as to where on the substrate the operator should look.

[Modification example]
In this embodiment, when the substrate is flown into the solder tank, the above-mentioned measures 1 to 3 by silk printing are applied to prevent the occurrence of the solder bridge and prevent the solder short circuit. However, the above-mentioned silk printing is used. Measures 1 to 3 can also be used as a mark indicating which connector the operator directly solders to the board is.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the substrate is flown into the solder tank, the above-mentioned measure 3 by silk printing is applied, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209 (c). At each terminal of the enclosed area KSA1 and the DIP type small connector, the area KSA2 surrounded by the rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209 (f) prevented the occurrence of a solder bridge to prevent a solder short circuit. Instead of the rectangular shape, a region surrounded by another shape may prevent the occurrence of a solder bridge to prevent a solder short circuit. FIG. 210 is a diagram (a) showing a modified example of FIG. 209 (c), and is a diagram (b) showing a modified example of FIG. 209 (f). Of the reference numerals in FIGS. 210, the same components as those in FIG. 209 are designated by the same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 210, the arrow shown by the solid line indicates the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate is poured into the solder tank, and the arrow shown by the alternate long and short dash line indicates the direction in which the substrate is poured into the solder tank.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 210 (a), the land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and each solder relief pattern KNP1. The back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is surrounded by silk printing in a shape that is about 3 times larger than each shape of, and each land KTH1 and each solder in the area KSA1'enclosed in this shape. The area excluding the escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled. Further, from the viewpoint of the resist, the silk-printed area KSA1'is a small plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side flows into the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and over the small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1'. The amount of solder flowing over the silk-printed area KSA1'can be suppressed, and each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1' When the solder flows through, the solder is separated by trying to stay without being able to get over the small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1'from each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 which are recessed areas. By exerting a force, the solder bridge can be suppressed at each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder relief pattern KNP1 adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction.

Further, in each terminal of the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), from the respective shapes of the land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted and each solder relief pattern KNP2. The back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side is surrounded by silk printing in a shape that is about 3 times larger, and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are excluded from the area KSA2'enclosed in this shape. Print so as to fill the area. Further, from the viewpoint of the resist, the silk-printed area KSA2'is a small plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side flows into the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and over the small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2'. The amount of solder flowing over the silk-printed area KSA2'can be suppressed, and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2', When the solder flows into the area, the solder tries to stay on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2'from each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which are recessed areas, and the force to separate the solder works. As a result, the solder bridge can be suppressed at the terminals and land KTH2 adjacent to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder relief pattern KNP2 adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the terminals of the final stage and the solder relief pattern are connected and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, but they are separated by a predetermined distance. May be formed. FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a modified example in which the terminal of the final stage and the solder relief pattern are formed so as to be separated by a predetermined distance.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted is longer in the vertical direction. A solder relief pattern KNP1'(one side may have a rectangular shape having the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1) having a rectangular shape having a width equal to the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and a predetermined distance (may be one having a rectangular shape). For example, the land KTH1 is separated by one-third to one-half of the outer diameter) so as to be formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB and the copper foil surface of KBy. May be good. This solder escape pattern KNP1'is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta land and is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the land KTH2 through which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the land KTH2 having a long width in the left-right direction have an outer diameter of the land KTH2. A solder relief pattern KNP2'having a rectangular shape (one side may have a rectangular shape having the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) and a predetermined distance (for example, one third of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). It may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB at a distance of 1 to 1/2 length). This solder escape pattern KNP2'is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta land and is in an insulated state.

Further, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted and the land KTH1 in the vertical direction A rectangular shape with a long width and a size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and a semicircular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1. It may have a semicircular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, one-third to one-half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). ) May be separated from each other and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side. This solder escape pattern KNP1 ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta land and is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the land KTH2 through which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the land KTH2 having a long width in the left-right direction have an outer diameter of the land KTH2. Solder escape pattern KNP2'' which is rectangular and has a semicircular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH2 (one side has a rectangular shape with the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and is a semicircle on the opposite side of the land KTH2. (It may have a shape) and the back surface of the main body frame side relay board KB separated by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one-third to one-half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). (Solder surface) It may be formed on each of the copper foil surfaces of KBy. This solder escape pattern KNP2 ″ is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and beta lands.

Further, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), the land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted and the vertical direction Solder escape pattern KNP1'''' that is long and wide and has a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1 (one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). It may have a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, one-third to one-half the length of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). It may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by a distance from each other. This solder escape pattern KNP1 ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta land and is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), the land KTH2 through which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the land KTH2 having a long width in the left-right direction have an outer diameter of the land KTH2. Solder escape pattern KNP2'''' which is rectangular and has a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH2 (one side has a rectangular shape with the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and has a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH2. (For example, a length of one-third to one-half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) is separated from the back surface of the main body frame side relay board KB (for example). Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy, respectively. This solder escape pattern KNP2 ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta land and is in an insulated state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the solder escape pattern KNP1 (KNP2) having a rectangular shape is connected to the land KTH1 (KTH2) through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted, but it is connected to the terminal of the final stage. The shape of the solder relief pattern on the opposite side may be a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211 (b)) or a triangular shape (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211 (c)).

Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath (that is, the direction of the arrow of the one-point chain line in FIGS. 209 (a) to 209) is predetermined. If the substrate can be flowed in the direction opposite to this direction in addition to the direction (that is, if the substrate can be flowed into the solder tank from both directions), the above-mentioned measures 1 to 3 by silk printing are applied. The solder bridge may be prevented from occurring to prevent a solder short circuit. In this case, a solder relief pattern having a rectangular shape is connected to the land through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted depending on the flow direction. The shape of the solder relief pattern on the opposite side that is not connected to the terminal in the final stage is a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211 (b)) or a triangular shape (the triangular shape in FIG. 211 (c)). See.). Further, the terminal of the final stage and the solder relief pattern may be formed so as to be separated by a predetermined distance. The solder relief pattern described above may be formed at both ends of the connector with respect to the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath. Further, when it is not known from which direction the substrate is flown when designing the substrate, the above-mentioned solder relief pattern is formed in both directions so that the substrate can be flown from either direction.

Incidentally, conventionally, various types of main control boards that control game progress and game profits, sub-control boards that control effects that are executed as the game progresses, image control boards that control the display of image display devices, and the like. A gaming machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, like the game machines described in this document, although various substrates are flowed into a solder tank and the terminals of the parts are soldered, there is a problem that a solder bridge is formed at the adjacent terminals and a short circuit occurs due to the solder. was there.

[Prevention of peeling due to overresist]
Next, prevention of peeling by overresist will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. Here, first, the overresist applied to each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side will be described, and the overresist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic view (a) of an overresist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, and is a schematic view (b) of a cross section of XX rays in (a). FIG. 213 is a schematic view (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface mount type connector is mounted, and is a schematic view (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. 214 is a continuation of FIG. 213, which is an enlarged view of part A of FIG. 213 (b) and is a schematic view (c) of an overresist applied to a housing fixing land of a surface mount type connector. It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of the YY line in c). In addition, in FIGS. 212 to 214, various wiring patterns and substrate grounds (GND) (hereinafter, may be referred to as “betagland”) may be omitted for the sake of legibility of the drawings.

[Overresist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side]
Explaining the overresist applied to each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, as shown in FIGS. 212 (a) and 212 (b), a through hole KTH1 having a land (hereinafter, simply "land") In the case of "KTH1", a through hole is formed in the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB, and the surface (mounting surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB and the copper foil surface of KBx. Lands having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil on the back surface (solder surface) KBy copper foil surface of the main body frame side relay board KB. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are It has an outer diameter of KTHD1 and is the same size.

Although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the relay board KB on the main body frame side to form the resist layer KBxr on the surface (mounting surface) side, the surface (mounting surface) side A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the resist layer KBxr corresponding to the land KTH1. Further, although the resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side to form the resist layer KByr on the back surface (solder surface) side, the back surface (solder surface) In the region of the side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1, a back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed.

In the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the resist opening KBxra on the front surface (mounting surface) side and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the resist opening KByra on the back surface (solder surface) side are the same size. The substrate ground (GND) (that is, betta land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the substrate ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. (GND) (that is, betta land) is electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, the region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr has an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the resist opening KBxra on the surface (mounting surface) side is formed, the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Is given. As a result, on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 can be covered with the resist, so that high peel strength can be applied to the land KTH1 from multiple directions. On the other hand, it can be uniform.

Further, in the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, the region of the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1 has an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the resist opening KByra on the back surface (solder surface) side is formed, over-resisting is performed so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Has been done. As a result, on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 can be covered with the resist, so that high peel strength can be applied to the land KTH1 from multiple directions. On the other hand, it can be uniform.

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB are formed by bonding the copper foil surfaces, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface is compared with the bonding between the base material KBo and the copper foil surface. The bond between the and solder is stronger.

By the way, when the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB, rivets are used as described above. This is because by using the drawer connector, the game board 5 can be automatically connected to the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, but the game board 5 is the main body. When mounted on the frame 4, a large force may be applied from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is to prevent the pin-type terminal PNs of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN from peeling off the soldered surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB due to a large force.

However, by using the drawer connector, an external force is applied to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, so the surface (mounting surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB, the copper foil surface of KBx, and the main body The land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the frame-side relay board KB is peeled off from the base material KBo, and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface are peeled off from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1. May be done.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are further overresisted with respect to the land KTH1 to copper. By increasing the peeling strength so that the copper foil formed on the foil surface does not peel off from the base material KBo, the drawer connector can be used to make the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN by attaching or detaching the game board 5. Even if an external force is applied, the land KTH1 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx copper foil surface of the main body frame side relay board KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBx copper foil surface of the main body frame side relay board KB is the base material. It is possible to reliably prevent peeling from the KBo and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1.

The outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 that has been over-resisted has a region in which each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side is inserted into the land KTH1 and is soldered. It is larger than the outer diameter of the land that has not been overresisted. This is because the joint area when the terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is soldered to the over-resisted land KTH1 is the terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is because the area is larger than the joint area when soldered to a land that has not been overresisted. As a result, the bonding strength to the over-resisted land KTH1 can be made equal to or greater than the bonding strength to the land not over-resisted.

Also, depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, if over-resist is not applied, a land with a normal size outer diameter and if over-resist is applied, It is necessary to prepare a land with an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage, and if the designer mistakenly places the land that does not overresist with respect to the land that does not overresist, the terminal There is a problem that soldering failure may occur due to insufficient bonding between the land and the land.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for a substrate (for example, a relay board KB on the main body frame side) in which at least one land to be overresisted exists regardless of the presence or absence of overresist, for all the lands. , The same land as the land to be overresisted is arranged as a land not to be overresisted. As a result, the connection between the terminal and the land becomes sufficient, and the occurrence of solder defects can be reliably prevented.

It should be noted that even for a game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. The above-mentioned overresist is applied to the above-mentioned. In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, another main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'not shown is a main body frame side relay board KB'not shown separately from the main body frame side relay board KB'. The above-mentioned overresist is also applied to the land on the main body frame side relay board KB'not shown (not shown). Further, another game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'of the main body frame 4 (the other game board drawer connector (convex type) is the main body frame. Side drawer connector (concave type) Another game board side relay board (this is not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the DCN is mounted. The other game board side relay board is a game board side relay (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. (It is different from the substrate), the above-mentioned overregistration is applied to the land.

In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are Although the outer diameter is KTHD1, it has the same size, but compared to the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, the main body frame side relay board KB The outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy may be increased or decreased. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the resist opening KBxra on the front surface (mounting surface) side and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the resist opening KByra on the back surface (solder surface) side are the same size, but the front surface (mounting). The opening diameter KByrD1 of the resist opening KByra on the back surface (solder surface) side may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the resist opening KBxra on the back surface (surface) side.

[Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, for a substrate (for example, a relay board KB on the main body frame side) in which at least one land to be overresisted is present regardless of the presence or absence of overresist, all the lands are covered. The same land as the land to be overresisted is arranged as a land not to be overresisted, but when overresisting is not applied, a land having an outer diameter of a normal size (that is, overresisting is applied). A land having a normal size outer diameter smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1) may be arranged. That is, lands to which overresist is applied and lands having an outer diameter of a normal size may be mixed when overresist is not applied. In this case, depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, if over-resist is not applied, the land having a normal size outer diameter and the land with normal size are over-resisted. It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage.

[Overregistration applied to the housing fixing land of surface mount type connector]
The overresist applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the surface mount type connector KCN mounted on the substrate KC will be described in FIGS. 213 (a) and 213 (b) and FIGS. 214 (c) and 214 (d). As described above, a pad KSP having a vertically elongated rectangular shape to which each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered, and various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP. Surface mount type connector A long rectangular shape in the vertical direction in which both sides of the KCN housing (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides) are soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board KC and fixed. The housing fixing pad KSPF having a shape has each pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, and each housing fixing by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Each pad KSPF is formed. The housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is made of non-conductive resin. Metal housing fixing portions are provided on both sides (left side and right side) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN.

Each pad KSP and the surrounding KCxa of various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP are the substrate ground (GND) (that is, betagrand) by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. ) Is insulated without being electrically connected. On the other hand, the four corners of each housing fixing pad KSPF around each housing fixing pad KSPF are fixed to each housing by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. A thermal pattern KCxb is applied in which the pad KSPF is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta land) via a cross-shaped pattern. By this thermal pattern KCxb, both sides (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side) of the surface mount type connector KCN housing are placed on the surface (mounting surface) KCx housing fixing pads of the substrate KC. It is possible to prevent the heat that melts the solder when soldering to the KSPF from being taken away from the outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF. Both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN housing (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) are placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board KC and each housing fixing pad KSPF of KCx. By soldering to, it is possible to strengthen the fixing of the surface mount type connector KCN to the board KC as compared with the case where each terminal of the surface mount type connector KCN is simply soldered to the board KC. , Surface mount type connector Both sides of the housing of the KCN housing (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) are electrically connected to the board ground (GND) of the board KC, and surface mountable. It is also possible to enhance the shielding effect for the signal connected to each terminal of the type connector KCN.

Although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC to form the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr Among them, in the area corresponding to each pad KSP, a resist opening on the surface (mounting surface side) side for the pad having the same shape as each pad KSP is formed, and the area corresponding to each housing fixing pad KSPF is formed. KCxra is formed on the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening for the housing fixing pad, which has an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each housing fixing pad KSPF. Further, a resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr.

The substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta land) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. ) Are electrically connected by through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the region of the resist layer KCxr on the surface (mounting surface) side corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF has an opening rectangle smaller than the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the resist opening KCxra on the surface (mounting surface) side of the housing fixing pad having a shape is formed, the housing fixing pad from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. An overresist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the KSPF is covered with a resist. As a result, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the entire outer peripheral portion of each housing fixing pad KSPF can be covered with the resist, so that high peel strength can be obtained in multiple directions with respect to each housing fixing pad KSPF. Can be uniform with respect to the load from.

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KCo of the substrate KC are formed by adhering the copper foil surfaces, each pad KSP and each housing formed on the copper foil surface is compared with the adhesion between the base material KCo and the copper foil surface. The bond between the body fixing pad KSPF and the solder is stronger.

By the way, as the substrate KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted, in the present embodiment, for example, a substrate such as a main control substrate 1310 and a payout control substrate 633 can be mentioned. The various wiring and harnesses connected to the various connectors provided on the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used when performing work to remove dust and cigarette tar accumulated on the pachinko machine 1, performing various inspections, etc. , After being removed by a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall, it will be reconnected after work. However, most of the staff in the game hall who perform such work are unfamiliar with the handling of the board, and when removing various wirings and harnesses from the connector or connecting various wirings and harnesses to the connector. , May be done by force (that is, with excessive force).

Then, among the plurality of connectors provided on the board KC such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, there are DIP type connectors and surface mount type connectors. Therefore, for example, the above-mentioned surface mount type connector KCN When a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall performs the above-mentioned work, the force associated with inserting and removing the harness from the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN. Since this is applied, both sides of the surface mount type connector KCN housing (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) are placed on the surface (mounting surface) KCx copper foil of the substrate KC by this large force. Each housing fixing pad KSPF formed on the surface KCxp is peeled off from the base material KCo, and along with this, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is released from the base material KCo. It may be peeled off, or various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp may be peeled off from the base material KCo together with each pad KSP.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp by overresisting the housing fixing pad KSPF is prevented from peeling from the base material KCo. By increasing the peel strength, even if the force associated with inserting and removing the harness from the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. The housing fixing pad KSPF is not peeled off from the base material KCo, and along with this, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is peeled off from the base material KCo. It is possible to reliably prevent various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp from peeling off from the base material KCo together with each pad KSP.

[Modification example]
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned overregistration is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the substrate KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN to which an external force is applied is mounted, but the main control substrate 1310 is paid out. In addition to boards such as the control board 633, when surface mount type connectors into which various wiring and harnesses are inserted and removed are mounted, peripheral control board 1510, power supply board 630, interface board 635, various decorative boards, and various relays are used. The above-mentioned overregistration may be applied to the housing fixing pads of the substrate such as the substrate and various drive substrates, or the substrate is provided in a movable body operated by driving an electric drive source and is movable. When a load is applied to the movable body board by wiring or harness that is electrically connected to the movable body board as the body operates, the housing of the movable body board on which the surface mount type connector is mounted. The above-mentioned overregistration may be applied to the fixed pad, and various switches having a pressing operation portion and of the surface mount type mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. The above-mentioned overregistration may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the board for fixing the switch, or when some external force is applied to the board, a resistor, a capacitor, a diode, a transistor, an IC, etc. The above-mentioned overregistration may be applied to the pad of the substrate to which various terminals of the lead type and surface mount type electronic components of the above are soldered.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF is formed in the region of the resist layer KCxr on the surface (mounting surface) side corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the resist opening KCxra on the surface (mounting surface) side of the housing fixing pad having a smaller opening rectangular shape is formed, from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. An overresist was applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the housing fixing pad KSPF was covered with a resist, but the housing fixing pad KSPF was not overresisted and a through hole having a land around the housing fixing pad KSPF. May be formed so that each land is overresisted. FIG. 215 is a schematic view (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface mount type connector is mounted in the modified example, and is a schematic view (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. is there. FIG. 216 is a continuation of FIG. 215, which is an enlarged view of a portion B of FIG. 215 (b) and is a schematic view (c) of an overresist applied to a housing fixing land of a surface mount type connector. It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line in c). In addition, in FIG. 215 and FIG. 216, various wiring patterns and substrate grounds (GND) (hereinafter, may be referred to as “betagland”) are omitted for the sake of legibility of the drawings.

A modified example in which a plurality of through holes having lands are formed around the housing fixing pad KSPF without over-resisting the housing fixing pad KSPF and over-resisting is applied to each land will be described. As shown in (b) and FIGS. 216 (c) and 216 (d), each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN has an elongated rectangular shape in the vertical direction to be soldered. The surface of the substrate KC (the metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides) of the pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, and the surface mount type connector KCN housing. A housing fixing pad KSPF having a rectangular shape long in the vertical direction, which is soldered and fixed to a mounting surface), and a plurality of through-holes KCTH having lands (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "land KCTH"). The wiring pattern for connecting the betagland, which connects the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the betagland, is the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC, the copper foil surface of the KCx. Various wiring patterns connected to the KSP, each housing fixing pad KSPF, each land KCTH, and each beta land connection wiring pattern are formed. Further, each land KCTH is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same size. The wiring pattern for connecting the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the betagland connection also has a function as a thermal pattern of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

With respect to the housing fixing pad KSPF on the right side, three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF. With respect to the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side, three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

Although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC to form the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in the region corresponding to the land KCTH. Further, although the resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr, the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr In the region corresponding to the land KCTH, a resist opening KCyra on the back surface (solder surface) side having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. In this modification, the opening diameter of the resist opening KCxra on the front surface (mounting surface) side and the opening diameter of the resist opening KCyra on the back surface (solder surface) side are the same size. The substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta land) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. ) Are electrically connected by through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the surface (mounting surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH in the region of the resist layer KCxr on the surface (mounting surface) side corresponding to the land KCTH. Since the side resist opening KBxra is formed, over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer diameter of the outer diameter of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. Further, in the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, the back surface (solder surface) side having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH in the region of the resist layer KCyr on the back surface (solder surface) side corresponding to the land KCTH. Since the resist opening KCyra is formed, over-resisting is performed so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer diameter of the outer diameter of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. As a result, the peel strength can be increased so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp by overresisting each land KCTH does not peel off from the base material KCo.

As described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, so as to be adjacent to the right side of the right housing fixing pad KSPF. As described above, the left housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the left housing fixing pad KSPF. It is arranged so as to be adjacent to the left side of. As a result, even if the housing fixing pad KSPF is not overresisted, each land KCTH is overresisted. Therefore, the housing fixing pad KSPF and each land KCTH have the above-mentioned betaland connection wiring pattern. By being connected, even if the force associated with inserting and removing the harness from the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. When the housing fixing pad KSPF is to be peeled from the base material KCo, the peeling strength of each land KCTH formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is increased accordingly. As a result, the housing fixing pad KSPF can be made difficult to peel off from the base material KCo.

In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same size. However, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC is compared with the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. May be increased or decreased. Further, in this modification, the opening diameter of the resist opening KBxra on the front surface (mounting surface) side and the opening diameter of the resist opening KByra on the back surface (solder surface) side are the same size, but the surface (mounting surface) The opening diameter of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be increased or decreased as compared with the opening diameter of the side resist opening KBxra.

Further, in this modification, as described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and the right housing fixing pad KSPF. The housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction as described above. The left housing fixing pad KSPF is arranged adjacent to the left side, but instead of or together with this, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two lands at equal intervals along the vertical direction. Two rows of KCTH may be arranged so as to be adjacent to each other above or / or below the housing fixing pad KSPF on the right side, or the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side may be arranged along the vertical direction. Two rows of two lands KCTH arranged at equal intervals may be arranged adjacent to each other above and / or below the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side.

Incidentally, conventionally, various types of main control boards that control game progress and game profits, sub-control boards that control effects that are executed as the game progresses, image control boards that control the display of image display devices, and the like. A game machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). By the way, various game machines such as those described in this document. Since the connector provided on the board is loaded by inserting and removing the wiring, for example, when a person who is unfamiliar with handling the board removes the wiring from the connector or connects the wiring to the connector, an excessive force is applied. There is a problem that the copper foil of the substrate is peeled off due to the load on the connector.

[Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219. FIG. 217 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 218 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 219 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In FIG. 218, the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of the various connectors are inserted into the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although it protrudes from the above, it is omitted because the drawing is easy to read.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect based on the command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 and electricity. A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 are provided. Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. As a result, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 can be stored in the various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There are a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image to the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a region of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a square shape in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in the remaining one-third of the area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and the upper right corner of the cover body 1501 On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Is connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. There is.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded into an opaque black color. When viewed from the front thereof, the upper side and the left side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are projected rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1) on the lower side and the right side to form a box shape having an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air cooling fan FAN at a position slightly on the upper right side of the center thereof when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the bottom surface. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a cylindrical shape to be inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 is specified at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooled fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501ab1 to 1501ab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to project toward the opening side and the opposite side of the cover body 1501. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally taking out various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and mounted, the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air-cooled fan FAN pops out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a higher position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooled fan FAN is attached to and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a includes connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a volume control switch attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. The position corresponding to 1510d is a closed, almost horizontally long rectangular area (to be exact, a convex area with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connector CN2 to the connector CN7 at the bottom) as a connector recess. The 1501ac faces the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed by protruding. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are located at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d, respectively. It is formed. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac occupies a region on the lower right side when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction are formed so as to project forward at predetermined intervals at positions that do not interfere with the holes 1501ac8.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume control holes 1501ac8 are exposed.

The cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. A position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed horizontally long rectangular regions (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The cover body 1501 is formed so as to project toward the opening side, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 have connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. Each will be exposed.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side side thereof when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring drawer opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is located at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a predetermined height of a cylindrical shape inserted through the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). The protruding portion 1501afa having the dimensions) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting holes 1501afb1 are located at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed, respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear, respectively. , The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the flexible flat cable (FFC (Flexible Flat)) that closes the wiring outlet opening 1501ae and is connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Abbreviation for Cable. In a flexible flat cable, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data are arranged in parallel to the effect display device 1600, and these plurality of flat conductors are coated with an insulator. )) The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the wire from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project upward and downward at predetermined intervals in the center. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projecting outward and a hinge hooking portion 1501cd arranged below the guide portion 1501cc and projecting outward are formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda protruding forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, in the center of the cover body 1501 of the cover side wall 1501e on the right side, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rf1 to which has a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed, respectively. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing in. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , Are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a metal pan head screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to each other. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan head screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inward from the end face on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are diagonally formed so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. The periphery of the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are formed, and these lands are formed. Each of the 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and the 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 has a wiring pattern formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a through hole formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. The 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) And the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. The bearing surface of the metal pan screw is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 via a metal pan head screw. It is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan screw, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the cover flat plate. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1,1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1,1501an2 are formed diagonally so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to have a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output board 1530. 1530rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed, respectively. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530. Is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1, 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to cover the cover flat plate The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the 1501a. In this state, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1, 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal. The bearing surface of the pan screw made of the product is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. It is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected. The cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan screw to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to be the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be done.

As described above, in a state where various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a). A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, there is a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimensions. Is formed.

In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to control the peripherals. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there are gaps between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume adjusting switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. , Air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven formed in the cover body 1501) are taken in. The gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the gaps formed in the volume control holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is taken in through the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the gaps formed in the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501).

The sum of the areas (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The gaps formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The volume control holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the gaps formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9, 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. And the area in the gap formed in) is smaller than the sum of. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. It is possible to keep the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of them small.

When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The flow velocity of the air flowing into the fan can be kept small, but when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation sucks air through the wings and surrounds it. Air may be sent out toward the control IC 1510a. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in an opaque black color, and is the upper side of a horizontally long rectangular base flat plate 1502a when viewed from the front surface. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are projected forward (on the back side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the openings formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the openings formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Is fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base flat plate 1502a is located at a predetermined interval along the lower side so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board). Each terminal of the connector CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at the position where it does not interfere with each protruding terminal because it protrudes from 1510y. Vertically elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected.

When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the base side wall 1502c on the left side. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502 cc and 1502 cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab, and the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad have U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf described above. The hinged portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, in a state where the hinge receiving portions 1502 cc and 1502 cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf are in contact with the hinge hook portions 1501 cc and 1501 cd L-shaped hook portions 1501 cca and 1501 cda formed on the cover body 1501. By wrapping around, the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf are hooked on the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501. It is designed to be able to engage.

Further, in the center of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea is formed so as to project outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, respectively.

[Various connectors]
The peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control unit 1512 (functions of various ROMs) described above are on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. It also has the functions of (excluding)), and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attitude, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I / O interfaces. Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of the game production (demo production performed while waiting for the player), and various schedule data that regulate the progress of the production. The control ROM 1510b (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above, the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above, etc.) and the peripheral data provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. A slide type SDRAM 1510c composed of an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Partition Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can transfer and store various control information (peripheral data) stored in the ROM 1520a, and a slide type that can adjust the volume. A volume control switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is turned off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. I have. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbit, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. Examples of various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transfer) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In the present embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, and various boards provided on the door frame side. SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to the connector (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

In the present embodiment, SPI communication or I2C communication is used to provide an electric drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, and a door frame. Drive data can be transmitted to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids that communicate via the connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, or the game board 5 side. Light emission data to the LED control IC for a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN7) provided in the door frame 3 and a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side. Is transmitted, signals from various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (communication via the connector CN6) are received as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (via the connector CN3) are received. It receives signals from (communication) as detection data. In the present embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

As various parallel I / Os, there are GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. No signals from various sensors that confirm the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), and control signals for the controlled object (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are input from the GPIO (connector CN6). It outputs (via) or outputs a signal from GPIO to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. Is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to the instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , It is possible to transfer to SRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize high-speed data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the boards and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the boards are further provided. I have. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal systems include a plurality of types such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI (Mobile Indicator Interface) system, an eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) system, and a clockless system. In, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that employs, for example, an eDP system instead of the MIPI system, has one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system. You can also create 1510.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, LEDML1 is further provided near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 is provided near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 is provided near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 is provided near the special connector SCN2. , Is equipped. Various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied. The LEDML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 37V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 37V is supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces (covers) of the various boards are as described above. A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

On the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The special connectors SCN4 provided include the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 to provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 in that they include a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move in the vertical direction at all when they are fitted.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530. (Mounting surface) The special connector SCN4 provided in 1530x is a socket, respectively.

The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed into the socket and the plug. Fits. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction (pachinko) when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. The structure is provided with a floating mechanism capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the back surface and the front surface of the machine 1. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 is the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the back surface of the 1501a.

The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed into the socket and the plug. Fit. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is viewed from the front of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) in the front-rear direction (pachinko machine 1). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range (direction between the back surface and the front surface). The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the special connector SCN4.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral data ROM 1520a (the function of the image ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above, etc.) Includes.) As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, and a pattern image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the door frame 3, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc., on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND type flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is cheaper than the NOR type flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to reduction of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of electrically connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripherals are not adopted. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise invading the board-to-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 uses the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x as the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. (Mounting surface) After inserting and pushing into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in 1510x, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 is absorbed. As a result, it is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during the operation, it is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket, and to provide a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be reliably formed.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect display device 1600 proceeds with the game effect (for example, for the player). An image telling that a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image telling that the jackpot gaming state will not occur, and a state in which the jackpot gaming state does not occur but the jackpot gaming state occurs compared to the normal state. It is an important board for drawing images (such as images that convey that you are approaching) and demonstrations (demonstrations that are performed while waiting for the player). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other via a wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1530x, and is mounted on the surface (mounting) of the peripheral control board 1510. (Surface) The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 must be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the 1510x and pushed in. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, it is possible to prevent damage to the multiple connection terminals formed between the plug and the socket, and to ensure the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared with the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be reduced. Therefore, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body is operated on the game board 5). It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electric drive source and the drive mechanism capable of arranging, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position).

[How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the front surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ( The surface (mounting surface) 1520x and the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are directed toward the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are provided on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 to be formed, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. .. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in.

Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are made of a metal (not shown). The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan head screw made of metal and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting bosses formed on the back surface side are inserted into the protruding portions 1501an1 and 1501an2 to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has the mounting bosses for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are constrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed by covering the peripheral control substrate 1510. Dimensions of through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a. This is because it can be absorbed with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are provided. The guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca, and the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed in the cover body 1501 are inserted into the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

Subsequently, the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are in contact with the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cd of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. In a state where the base body 1502 wraps around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is covered with the cover body 1501 as it is, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw into which an anchor rivet is inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base side sealing portion 1502ea and the base side sealing portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact), and the base body 1502 is inscribed. The front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the above is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are in a conductive state. In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent against fraudulent acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawing and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by inserting and attaching the connector. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front and is on the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). The engaging portion 1502ca side) formed in the game panel 1100 is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is formed in the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

In the above-described assembly method, in the procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is first placed at the predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface.) The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. After fixing to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back surface), the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the (mounting surface) 1520x is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the above is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is pushed into the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 is a cover). It is also possible to fix the body 1501 to the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side.). Even in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when pushing the board is absorbed, so that the plug and the socket can be connected. It is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and to surely form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, and to form the liquid crystal output board 1530 and its peripherals. It is possible to surely form a transmission line between the control board 1510 and the board.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. The peripheral data corresponding to the above is stored as a substrate that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and becomes a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided with the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plurality of types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system). Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 suitable for the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-mentioned inter-board connector.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) to remove the noise. (Hereinafter, it may be described as "noise countermeasure effect by the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various substrates to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which can contribute to cost reduction of the various substrates.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 219, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, angles in multiple directions. The surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from the above. Thereby, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in the lighting state while the DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of being controlled, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility between the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to be confirmed. Area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the state of the IC pin. Are arranged in a distributed manner so that the data can be visually recognized, that is, a large area in which the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pin can be substantially confirmed from angles in multiple directions. As a result, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be modified into a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having the above. Further, since the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 37V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 37V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the supplied state, it is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3, the surface (mounting surface) of the special connector SCN1 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. ) It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided in 1520x.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa allow the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to be confirmed. A region larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (a shape composed of a special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530). They are arranged in a distributed manner so as to be. As a result, the inter-board connector can be modified by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lit state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it illuminates the inter-board connector brightly by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having a function as a spotlight, the inter-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of sex.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the product numbers printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The SRAM 1510c1, so that the model and the state of the IC pin of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 and the state of the IC pin can be confirmed from multiple angles. The regions are dispersed and arranged so as to have a region larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thereby, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but by further having a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510c brightly, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) It is possible to contribute to the improvement of visibility between the state of the IC pin and the state of the IC pin.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN). The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

In this embodiment, the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface mount type, wide with an angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. Because it is adopted, it is also suitable for use as lighting. When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces (covers) of the various boards are as described above. A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, it is possible to brightly illuminate the space formed in this way.

Further, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted from the region on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which face each of the light emitting surfaces of LEDsML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the generated light and direct it toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 again. As these reflecting portions (not shown), in addition to a bright color colored paint such as white, a glossy colored paint may be used, or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

Further, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. Therefore, a ball path composed of these. In, the game balls rub against each other to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Further, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become a noise source and be affected by noise. As described above, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data. A configuration is adopted in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). As a result, noise that invades through the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Noise can be removed by flowing the data to a substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)) such as a liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

[Partial foil removal of Betta Land]
By the way, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 has a ground (GND) other than a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying a power supply, and a region where various land patterns are formed. , So-called beta land (board ground) (also called "solid earth"), and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. , The area other than the area where various land patterns are formed is defined as a ground (GND), which is formed as a so-called beta land (board ground) (also referred to as "solid earth"). The beta land (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the beta land (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are peripheral control boards. Holes (copper) penetrating a plurality of through holes (both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the peripheral control board 1510) formed on both sides (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the 1510. By being electrically connected by the holes to be plated)), they are the same ground (GND).

Further, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side when viewed from the front. Positions (that is, each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the peripheral control board is inserted. Since it protrudes from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the 1510, it is located at a position where it does not interfere with each of the protruding terminals) due to the force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7. Vertically elongated wire breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the control board 1510 from warping and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being broken.

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact), and the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502. The front surface of ~ 1502aa3 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side by metal pan screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the substrate ground (grounds of various substrates (GND)) to remove the noise. You can do it.

By the way, the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Betagland was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the abutted portion, and the betagland was covered with a resist. However, in the noise resistance test, the peripheral control at the abutted portion was performed. A betagrand was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate 1510 and covered with a resist, and a peripheral control substrate 1510 at the contacted portion was covered with a resist without forming a betaland on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. As a result of testing with the above, it was found that the one covered with a resist without forming a beta land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion had higher noise resistance. ..

When electromagnetic wave noise invades through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and invades the solid brand. When electromagnetic wave noise invades through such an unexpected route, an electronic component susceptible to electromagnetic noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component are formed on the base body 1502 to prevent disconnection. If the front surface of the portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is adjacent to the portion in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, a malfunction or damage may occur.

Further, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with which of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. Since it is unpredictable whether or not it will invade, it is difficult to dispose an electronic component susceptible to electromagnetic noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component away from a specific disconnection prevention rib portion.

It should be noted that the electromagnetic wave noise passes through the resist and is solid because a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. In order to invade the brand, when the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the beta clant are in contact with each other via a resist, a high voltage due to electromagnetic wave noise invading the base body 1502 is applied to the contacting portion. Therefore, it is considered that an unnecessary loop wiring in which electromagnetic wave noise invades from the disconnection prevention rib portion to the betaglan is formed.

Here, the solid surface of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. The shape of the gland will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the shape of the betta land at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, and is the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. It is a schematic view (a) of the copper foil surface of the above, and is a schematic view (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction, and the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate. As shown in FIG. 220A, the corresponding positions and their surroundings have a copper foil surface in a rectangular foil removing region 1510ya long in the vertical direction having a distance dimension dgw in the left-right direction and a distance dimension dgh in the vertical direction. It is formed at 1510 yp, respectively. That is, on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, a region in which a part of the betagran is removed (removed) is formed.

In these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side thereof and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance between the left side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is set to the length of deg0, and the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the left-right direction is 1.0. The length is about twice to 3.0 times, and in the present embodiment, the distance dimension gg0 between the left side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times as long as the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

Further, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side thereof and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance dimension (dg1) between the right side of the foil removing region 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the lateral distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is about twice to 3.0 times, and in the present embodiment, the distance dimension DG1 between the right side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

Further, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side thereof and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance dimension (dg2) between the upper side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the left-right direction. The length is about twice to 3.0 times, and in the present embodiment, the distance dimension pg2 between the upper side of these foil removal regions 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The distance dimension (width dimension) in the left-right direction is 1.5 times as long as drw.

That is, since the foil removal region 1510ya is formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp on which the betagland is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil removal region 1510ya is not electrically connected to the betaland. It is an insulated area.

When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510 yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510 yp of the peripheral control substrate, the resist solution is also applied to the foil removal region 1510 ya as shown in FIG. 220 (b), and the resist layer 1510 yr Is formed. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil removal region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate. Betagland is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil removal region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. No foil removal region of the same shape is formed.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by metal pan screws, they are electrically connected to these grounds (GND) and become the same ground (GND). It is configured to be GND). Therefore, in the present embodiment, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is peripherally controlled from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 via the foil removing region 1510ya. A "route that does not allow noise to escape" is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate, and the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is described above. Noise can be removed by forming a "route through which noise escapes" that flows to the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates) via a metal pan screw.

[Reuse of peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and is a board that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Because it is, it can be reused (reused).

As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 (so-called "". Lands ”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and soldering copper foils (so-called“ lands ”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (soldering surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, respectively. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and is formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to insert the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Therefore, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan head screw.

In this way, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan screw. By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeated screwing and removal with metal pan screws. Mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are rubbed against the mounting surface (boss surface) and peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, or the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 is a metal pan. It rubs against the seating surface (seat surface of the head) of the screw pan and peels off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, or the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 and the peripheral control board 1510 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. If the copper foil of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side is exposed, the peripheral control board 1510 can be reused because it oxidizes and electrically deteriorates the connectivity. There is a problem that it becomes difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the surfaces thereof. Each copper foil is soldered so that it is not exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. While covering it so that it can be connected, the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan screw are electrically connected. Covered so that it can be connected. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is possible to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from peeling off from the base material, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the seating surfaces (heads) of the pans of the metal pan screws. It is possible to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, and the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil portions of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are not exposed and oxidation can be prevented, and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being oxidized. It is possible to improve the electrical connectivity in a state where the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other, and solder. Electrical connection between the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan screw in contact with each other. The sex can be made good.

As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the noise that has penetrated into the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is passed through the metal pan screw to the board ground (grounds of various boards (GND)). By surely forming the above-mentioned "route through which noise escapes" flowing to), the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be stably maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are as described above. , The copper foil on the surface is soldered so as not to be exposed. As described above, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 because the bearing surfaces of the metal pan screws come into contact with each other. If the thickness is not uniform (that is, there is a raised part of the solder), the land 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw There is a problem that the contact area is reduced and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. Further, as described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, must be uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) 1510x It is said that the area where the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other is reduced and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. There's a problem. If the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Distortion of the control board 1510 will occur, which may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the copper foil which is the front surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the bearing surface of the metal pan screw comes into contact. A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the metal mask, and the solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula) to apply it from the holes formed in the metal mask. By putting the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow furnace and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 is made uniform as the plate thickness of the metal mask. Can be done. Further, copper which is the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side of the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil is formed into a metal mask by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). By applying from the holes, putting the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into a reflow furnace and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is increased. The plate thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the surfaces. The copper foil was soldered so that it would not be exposed, but the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan screw. The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side and comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) The copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side may be coated with a resist solution to cover the land. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is also applied when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with the resist solution. To. Even with this configuration, the metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the gland (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via a metal pan head screw. Can be in a state. Further, copper which is the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side of the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By applying the foil with a resist solution and covering it, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same thickness, so that the through hole 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into ~ 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , Distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). It was applied from the holes formed in the metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 was put into a reflow furnace to dry the solder paste with heat, but the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 was dried. ) May be poured into a soldering tank and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. In order to prevent the area from being reduced and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should not be partially soldered. It needs to be uniform. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is flown into the solder bath.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed on the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, by partially coating the copper foil with a resist solution to form a predetermined shape. The surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. Specifically, as a "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is predetermined for the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are formed concentrically (a single circle having a predetermined width may be formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the resist has a predetermined width. A shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined length are arranged in a ring shape as the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical line in which the resist has a predetermined width. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of lines in the horizontal direction (a shape in which a plurality of lines are formed separated by a predetermined distance dimension only in the vertical direction in which the resist has a predetermined width may be formed, or the resist has a predetermined width. A plurality of lines having only the lateral direction separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), the lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and rise to the right. A shape in which a plurality of diagonal lines are formed (a shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of downward-sloping lines are formed in a diagonal line), a small circular shape (not shown) The assembled shape and the like can be mentioned.

As described above, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr which is formed into a predetermined shape. Since the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 The amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The effect of being able to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is sufficient). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It can be made uniform so that the solder does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this way has the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. It covers 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

It should be noted that the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts a predetermined figure formed by such a resist with the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be applied to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this way electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan head screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering with the solder.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan head screw is used, but the metal pan head screw has a flat washer, a spring washer, and a tooth. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as “Kiku washer”).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the cover 1501 made of a conductive resin, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with each other, and the land 1510rb1 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. When ~ 1510rb4 and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 were electrically connected, and the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected, but they were conductive. A metal cover 1501'may be used instead of the resin cover 1501. In this case, the base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of a conductive resin, or may be made of a metal instead of the conductive resin, or the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring outlet opening 1501ae may be made of a conductive resin or a metal.

An amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier board and the heat of the amplifier board itself are efficiently dissipated to the outside air by the metal board box. Further, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently dissipated to the outside air in the metal partial case.

Since the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case, it is made of a metal board box or a metal. Noise may enter the partial case of. Therefore, like the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected), a plurality of pieces formed on the amplifier board. The land and the metal cover of the metal substrate box or the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the metal partial case are in contact with each other. , A plurality of lands formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the amplifier board and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other, so that the metal is passed through the metal pan screw. The metal cover or metal partial case of the metal board box is electrically connected to the multiple lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover or metal of the metal board box is made of metal. The partial case and the ground (GND) of the amplifier board can be electrically connected. In addition, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transferred from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case via the metal pan head screw to efficiently dissipate heat to the outside air. You can also do it.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. Therefore, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected, but it can also be used for a two-story board (so-called "Kamenoko board"). it can. For example, multiple lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, multiple lands on the child board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) on the child board, and multiple lands on the parent board are electrically connected. By screwing the land and the multiple lands of the child board at both ends of the metal support (spacer), electricity is supplied through the multiple lands of the parent board, the multiple lands of the child board, and the metal support (spacer). It can be in a connected state. As a result, the ground (GND) of the parent substrate and the ground (GND) of the child substrate can be made the same ground (GND) via the metal support column (spacer).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin, but the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board 633 that house the main control board 1310 are housed. When the payout control board box 632 is configured to be made of conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 must be transparent according to the rules, and those made of conductive resin are used. Although it is not possible, the board box for accommodating the power supply board and the various relay board boxes for accommodating various relay boards are configured to be made of conductive resin, and the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box. It may be fixed by the same method. By doing so, it is possible to exert the same effect as the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of the conductive resin described above on the board box accommodating the power supply board and various relay board boxes accommodating various relay boards. it can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. A ball tank includes a board-to-board connector with a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a board-to-board connector with a special connector SCN2 provided on a peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on a liquid crystal output board 1530. By arranging it closer to the center of 552, it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553. As described above, the tank rail 553 is provided with the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside via a plurality of notches 553aa formed on the lower side thereof (the lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front). By arranging the above-mentioned inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to cause electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The inter-board connector with the special connector SCN4 provided is a peripheral control unit on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In the state where the 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 217, the area on the upper side of the inter-board connector can be reduced by arranging the connectors in the vertical direction, so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be generated. The area of adhesion can be minimized. In addition, when the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area on the upper side of the inter-board connector becomes large, so that the area where dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres becomes extremely large. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. 217, and the area of the upper surface of each connector is large. Is arranged so that the area where dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres becomes extremely large. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is. The protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a prevents the plugs from being projected from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted. Even if dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. There is. In this way, the orientation in which the above-mentioned inter-board connector is arranged and the orientation in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, it may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or socket). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral data The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) as a plug, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a plug) that serves as a socket. Special connector) can be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal methods to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) as a plug, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector (or a plug) that serves as a socket. A special connector) can be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to be provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in any one or in combination of the 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. .. Even with this configuration, foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. It is possible to prevent intrusion. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and invades the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the foreign matter falls on various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability that trouble will occur is high.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505 by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is passed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and invades the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, so that the peripheral control board box 1505 falls onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that electrical trouble will occur due to foreign matter.

[Other noise countermeasures by peripheral control unit]
In addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 constituting the peripheral control board box 1505 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above. At the same time, when various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) by metal pan screws, these are Since it is configured to be electrically connected to the grounds (GNDs) of various substrates to form the same ground (GND), noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted to the various substrates. The noise can be removed by flowing it to the ground (GND) of the above (hereinafter, described as "configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment"). Another configuration of the present invention in which noise countermeasures are taken by the peripheral control board box that noise that has entered the peripheral control board box 1505 can be removed (hereinafter, "depending on the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments". The configuration of noise countermeasures ”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 241. It should be noted that, in FIGS. 222 to 241, the same reference numerals as those of the various members attached in the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 217 to 219 are added and represented. The description will be omitted except for a part in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments.

In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is all conductive with carbon contained in polycarbonate as described above. In contrast to the configuration made of resin, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments, the wiring cover body 1503 is transparent in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. In addition to being made of a non-conductive resin, in the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fourth embodiments, a metal shield plate is housed in the peripheral control board box, while the first In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the metal shield plate is not housed in the peripheral control board box.

FIGS. 222 to 226 are configurations for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is covered with a metal shield plate and made of this metal. A part of the shield plate abuts on the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via a conductive elastic member, and FIG. 222 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. 223 is a rear view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, FIG. 224 is a front view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 225 is X of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X, and FIG. 226 is a view taken along the line A of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment.

FIGS. 227 to 230 are configurations of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, and further strengthen the noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. The region where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of 1510 or the like is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further in contact with each other via the conductive elastic member. FIG. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, FIG. 228 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 229 is an arrow A of FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 230 is a visual view, and FIG. 230 shows a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board that improves contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board and the conductive elastic member. It is a figure which shows the taking-out method, and is the schematic view (bare example (a)) of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board, and the schematic view (bare example (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board. )), Schematic diagram of the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (example of arranging a plurality of through holes having lands (c)), schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (land) This is an example (d) in which a plurality of through holes are arranged.

FIGS. 231 to 235 are configurations for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is covered with a first metal shield plate and is formed. The back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is covered with a second metal shield plate, and the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is sandwiched between the first metal shield plate and the second metal shield plate. A part of the first metal shield plate and a part of the second metal shield plate are electrically connected to a ground (GND) such as a peripheral control board 1510, and FIG. 231 shows a first. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 232 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 233 is a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mounting procedure, and FIG. 234 is the figure (a) which shows the land formed around the through hole on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board and the like which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and shows the solder removal area. FIG. 235 is a diagram (a) showing a land formed around a through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, a land and a screwing designation symbol. It is a figure (b) which shows, and the figure (c) which shows a soldering area. In addition, in FIG. 227, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate which can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is omitted from the ease of viewing in the drawing, and in FIG. 228, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is used. The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate that can be contacted is shown by a chain double-dashed line for ease of viewing in the drawings.

236 to 241 are configurations for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, and the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are made of a metal shield plate. Of the various substrates that are not covered at all and are housed in the peripheral control substrate box, the area where a part of the ground (GND) of a specific substrate is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are via a conductive elastic member. 236 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 237 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 238 is a rear view. The figure (a) which shows a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit which concerns on 5th Embodiment, and the figure of a part of the base body which comprises the peripheral control unit so that the state in which a conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen. FIG. 239 is a diagram (b) showing a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit cut out by the CL line in (a). FIG. 239 is a continuation of FIG. 238, and the conductive elastic member is made of metal of the effect display device 1600. FIG. 240 is a diagram (c) showing a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut out so that the state of being pressed against the back cover and deformed can be seen. FIG. FIG. 241 is an enlarged view of a front portion of a cover body constituting a peripheral control unit having an opening through which the substrate can be inserted and brought into contact with the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of a specific substrate. It is a figure which shows the method of taking out the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) side of a specific substrate which makes good contact with an elastic member, and is the schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate ( Exposed example (a)), schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (exposed example (b)), schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through hole having a land). It is an example (c) in which a plurality of through holes are arranged, and a schematic view (an example (d) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged) of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate.

[Comparison between the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made entirely of polycarbonate with carbon as described above. Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) while being made of the contained conductive resin. When fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GNDs) of these various substrates to form the same grounds (GNDs).

On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the box shape is opened at the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction. Peripheral control capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on commands from the transparent non-conductive resin molded cover body 1501 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. The substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, And the conductive elasticity attached (adhered) to a predetermined position of the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal shield plate 1540 that can reduce (suppress) the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It includes a member 1545 and a base body 1502 molded of a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to a predetermined position together with a metal shield plate 1540 to form a metal shield. The plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 to form a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed substrate box) by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. ing.

[Cover body of peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
When the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501ag1, the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange as follows. Then, among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the through holes 1540c1a and the metal shield are formed. It is arranged so as to match the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the plate 1540 and the mounting boss hole 1501ag1, 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and is formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 correspond to each other. In addition to being in contact with each other, the land 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal shield plate is electrically connected. The 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 to connect to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510.

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the lands 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 are respectively hit. In addition to being in contact with each other, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the seating surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the peripheral data. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to connect to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the same as the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange so as to match the boss hole 1501 am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the liquid crystal is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the land 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501am2 are in contact with each other. In addition to this, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board are connected. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1520. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the same as the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. The metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to form the metal shield plate 1540. In a state where the cover body 1501 is sandwiched and fixed by various substrates, the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa have the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimensions. A gap (2.3 mm) having the above is formed.

As described above, a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are obtained by adding the areas (total areas) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. The area at 1501az and the gaps formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501), in the peripheral control board 1510. The volume control switch 1510d provided, the gap formed in the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. The area of the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 and the gaps formed in the connector holes) is smaller than the sum of the two. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. , Air is supplied from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and a metal shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to a small value.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
The base flat plate 1502a is located on the right side when viewed from the front thereof, at a position corresponding to the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed by bending the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab long in the vertical direction is formed, which is one size larger than the back surface shape of the 1540d.

On the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the region corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is one in comparison with the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having a large shape are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounds (grounds) of the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented from entering from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. It is isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A "route that does not allow noise to escape" is formed.

[Metal shield plate of peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
The metal shield plate 1540 that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that penetrates into the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front. L-shaped shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the second embodiment) at the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side. Mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 are formed, respectively.

Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (the second embodiment) on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. Then, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 that are bent rearward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (21 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the second embodiment) is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a is formed with notches around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring drawer recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is formed. In a state where the cover body 1501 is sandwiched and fixed by various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer peripheral circumference of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and The wiring extraction recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a.

The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel surfaces. In the second embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. This is one of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed in the above. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Two of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed so as to be projected.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, the distance dimension of a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this first In the second embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 225) having (12 mm in the second embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 225) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment).

In the first space 1505a, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e, power supply creation circuit (not shown), resistance (not shown), not shown). Capacitors, LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN3, etc.), and liquid crystal output board 1530. While various electronic components (not shown, capacitors (not shown, special connector SCN4, etc.)) are accommodated, the second space 1505b does not accommodate various electronic components at all. By accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take measures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) and in the second space 1505b. This is because the heat generated from the various electronic parts and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not accommodating the various electronic parts and the like that generate heat. .. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat radiating plate in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

In the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape are formed at positions corresponding to the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similarly to the ventilation holes 1501az. There is. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotate, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. As a result, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[Conductive elastic member of peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and the conductive coating portion 1545a It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

The cross-sectional shape (round sliced shape) of the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c. Has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) having a width of about 2 mm and a height of about 0.035 mm.

[How to assemble the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
The method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is provided on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged so as to be aligned with the hole 1501ah2, and the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. To do.

Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in.

Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged as they are or finely adjusted because they are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If it is necessary to do so, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to cover the shield plate 1540. It is in a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the body 1501 and various substrates.

In this way, of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting bosses formed on the back surface side are inserted into the protruding portions 1501an1 and 1501an2 to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has the mounting bosses for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are constrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed by covering the peripheral control substrate 1510. Dimensions of through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a. It can be absorbed with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are provided. The guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca, and the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed in the cover body 1501 are inserted into the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

Subsequently, the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are in contact with the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cd of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. The base body 1502 wraps around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state of covering the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Insert the metal one-way screw and screw it toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base side sealing portion 1502ea and the base side sealing portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact). Further, in the sealed state in this way, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protruding length) extending to the back surface of the above is 2.7 mm.

In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent against fraudulent acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawing and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by inserting and attaching the connector. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) the adhesive tape 1545c of 1545.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to a mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 and on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box accommodating the effect display device 1600. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box inserted into the mounting groove forming the mounting portion formed in the above, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole that constitutes the mounting portion formed on the back side of the.

The effect display device 1600 is composed of a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that closes the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. It is housed in a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin box (protective cover body 1601 described above). Further, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by a peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the display device 1600, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as a peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. The same ground (GND) is obtained. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connection piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. As shown in FIG. 226, the 1540d hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 through the through hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box via the conductive elastic member 1545. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the second embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm) due to dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and securely connected, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided. Since it can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to form the same ground (ROM), an environment resistant to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be created in the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, Peripheral data ROM board 1520 and various boards such as liquid crystal output board 1530) and peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various boards such as liquid crystal output board 1530) can do. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment are formed of a transparent non-conductive resin, and are formed in the internal space of the cover body 1501. , Peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield board 1540, so that the shield board 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various boards. When fixed, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. Is connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading the effect display device 1600 are transmitted to the substrate via the metal shield plate 1540. It is possible to form a "route through which noise escapes" by guiding the ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removing it. As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. And the arrangement of. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 224, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are peripheral control boards. The part number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in 1510, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC and the part number). , Pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multiple directions. The regions are distributed and arranged so as to have an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b so that the control ROM 1510b can be formed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. .. Further, since the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in the lighting state while the DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state in which it is being printed, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and is further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively (for example). , Connector pin number, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board. The contents silk-printed on the 1520 and the data are distributed and arranged so as to be a large area where the contents can be substantially confirmed from multiple directions. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the contents silk-printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence with the above, the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is modified, and the inter-board connector modified by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 35V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 35V is originally Although it has a function to check (monitor) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the above functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pin is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ..

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The contents silk-printed on each of the 1530s (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) are arranged in a distributed manner so that they can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510, and the silk-printed contents on the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lit state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the special connector SCN4. Improved visibility of silk-printed contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improved visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can be contributed to.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa include the part number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And, the state of the IC pin and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are dispersed so as to be a region larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the contents can be confirmed from multiple directions. Have been placed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be done. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but by further having a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510c brightly, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the IC pin, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the vane of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vane of the air-cooled fan FAN). The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

As the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mounted type having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and a type having a weak directivity are adopted, so that they can be used as lighting. Is also suitable. Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. .. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 224) having the distance dimension (12 mm in the second embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 224) having a second predetermined height distance dimension (1.6 mm in the second embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a gloss, and is a region of the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. And its surroundings, it also has a function as a reflecting unit capable of reflecting the light emitted by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and directing the light emitted to the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be configured to be further coated with a glossy colored paint.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and are discharged to the side of the game board 5. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up behind the island facilities in the game hall. As described above, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded and configured as a non-conductive resin as described above, and the inside of the cover body 1501 is formed. In the space, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is attached to the cover body 1501 and the various boards. By sandwiching and fixing, a configuration was adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 was electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, in the second embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line of the above, the same ground (GND) is adopted.

As a result, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided to and removed from the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540.

In the second embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the space between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed in the space, and two spaces are formed by arranging a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. These two spaces form a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. The distance dimension of the second predetermined height between the first space 1505a having (12 mm in the present second embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. It was composed of a second space 1505b having (1.6 mm in the second embodiment). In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed to be larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large effect unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, and is in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same predetermined height distance dimension, or the second predetermined height distance dimension may be configured. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, measures against electromagnetic noise can be taken by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) in the first space 1505a, and the second space 1505b. By not accommodating various electronic components that generate heat inside, the heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540. Can be done.

Further, in the second embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540 is printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 by forming a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az. Visually check the part number and model (or control number), the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the silk-printed content (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) on the peripheral control board 1510. The part number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, of the IC). The orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the part number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. The state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pin of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. However, it can also be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. .. Further, the shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area (a shape composed of the special connector SCN3), or to provide a peripheral control board 1510 and a liquid crystal output board. From the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. It can also be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is blown through the wing portion by the rotation of the peripheral control unit 1500. By ejecting air to the outside, air is accommodated from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to a small value. However, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes air to be sucked in through the wings and sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. May be good. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Even in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. Apply through the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool, put the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into a reflow furnace, and dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a soldering tank and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. In order to prevent the area from being reduced and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should not be partially soldered. It needs to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed on the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, by partially coating the copper foil with a resist solution to form a predetermined shape. The surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. Specifically, as a "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a single circle having a predetermined width may be formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the resist is formed. A shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a ring shape around the centers of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical resist having a predetermined width. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (a shape may be formed in which a plurality of lines are formed at a predetermined distance dimension only in the vertical direction in which the resist has a predetermined width, or the resist is formed. A plurality of lines having a predetermined width separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed only in the lateral direction.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed diagonally (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed diagonally), although not shown. Examples thereof include an aggregated shape of small circular shapes.

As described above, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr which is formed into a predetermined shape. Since the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 The amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The effect of being able to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is sufficient). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It can be made uniform so that the solder does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this way has the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. It covers 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

It should be noted that the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts a predetermined figure formed by such a resist with the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be applied to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this way electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan head screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering with the solder.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan head screw is used, but it is made of metal. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as “Kiku washer”) through the pan head screw.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded as separate bodies. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made entirely of polycarbonate with carbon as described above. Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) while being made of the contained conductive resin. When fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GNDs) of these various substrates to form the same grounds (GNDs).

On the other hand, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is further strengthened, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are further strengthened. A configuration is adopted in which a region where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the above is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further in contact with each other via a conductive elastic member.

[Metal shield plate of peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
Specifically, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the shape of the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and is similar to FIG. 227 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 228, each side of the shield flat plate 1540a is moved backward as a countermeasure against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. The side wall 1540ae is formed by bending (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530). Ventilation holes 1540az are not formed in these side walls 1540ae at all. Further, these side walls 1540ae have their end faces defined from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 in a state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled. Since they have a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and are separated from each other, they do not come into contact with each other and do not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates. The metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above. A detailed description will be omitted.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the shape of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and is similar to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output. Conductivity for a substrate that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 at a position corresponding to the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the substrate 1530 is exposed. A plurality of insertion ports 1502az having a square into which the elastic member 1507 is inserted (a shape in which both the vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension have about 8 mm) are formed in the base flat plate 1502a. Although these insertion ports 1502az are formed so as to project to the front side and the rear side of the base flat plate 1502a, the front end faces of the insertion ports 1502az are peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. It has a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1.5 mm) from the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates and is formed so as not to come into contact with each other, and the rear end surface of each insertion port 1502az is a metal shield plate. It is formed so as to be arranged on the same plane as the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of 1540.

There are seven regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, and seven insertion ports 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at the corresponding positions, and the peripheral data ROM. There is one region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1520 is exposed, and one insertion port 1502az is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at a position corresponding to this, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 There are two regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed, and two insertion ports 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these regions. That is, on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, a total of 11 region ROPs in which a part of the ground (GND) is exposed are provided. The base flat plate 1502a is provided with a total of 11 insertion ports 1502az at positions corresponding to each region ROM. Further, serial numbers 1 to 11 are formed on the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a in the vicinity of each insertion port 1502az. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the worker of the manufacturer inserts the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate. Since the base body 1502 is molded of a transparent non-conductive resin as described above, the serial numbers 1 to 11 can be visually recognized from the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Since the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

[Conductive elastic member for substrate of peripheral control substrate box according to the third embodiment]
In the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in addition to the conductive elastic member 1545 capable of electrically connecting the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, further peripherals The area ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. It has a conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate that can be electrically connected. The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity), and includes a conductive coating portion 1507a and a foam 1507b having a rectangular shape as a core material coated by the conductive coating portion 1507a. , Consists of. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1507a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven cloth, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1507b include polyurethane foam having heat resistance.

The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction (when the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate in FIG. 228 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 11 mm, the depth is about 8 mm, and the height is about 8 mm). have. When the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is inserted into the insertion port 1502az of the base body 1502 described above, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is guided by the inner wall of the insertion port 1502az and has cushioning property (elasticity). By pushing the inner wall of the insertion port 1502az, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is hard to come off from the insertion port 1502az.

[Exposed area of a part of the ground of various boards of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
Here, a region ROP in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed will be described. The region ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has the same structure, and here, the peripheral control substrate 1510 The region ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) will be described. As shown in FIGS. 230 (a) and 230 (b), the region ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control board 1510 so that a part of the substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta solder) formed on the copper foil surface 1510 yp of 1510y is exposed in a shape larger than the front shape of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate. A resist solution is applied onto the copper foil surface 1510 yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510 y to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510 yr.

It is also possible to adopt a method of using a through hole without exposing the beta land as the area ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 230 (c) and 230 (d), the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the beta land on the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively, and this copper is formed so that a land is formed around each through hole on the copper foil surface 1510 yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510 y of the peripheral control board 1510. A resist solution can be applied on the foil surface 1510 yp to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510 yr.

[Method of assembling the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
Since the method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is basically the same as the method of assembling the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the procedure for inserting the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate described above will be described. Before mounting the peripheral control unit 1500 on the mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box accommodating the effect display device 1600, the worker of the manufacturer The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is inserted into the insertion port 1502az of the base body 1502 described above in order from the serial number 1 to the serial number 11 and pushed into the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The work is performed so that a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is in contact with the exposed region ROP.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that closes the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. By being connected to, it becomes the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connection piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. As shown in FIG. 229, the 1540d hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 through the conductive elastic member 1545 through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm) due to dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and securely connected, and the peripheral control board housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated. It can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to form the same ground (GND).

Further, the conductivity for each substrate in contact with the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed. The other side of the elastic elastic member 1507 passes through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the corresponding transparent synthetic resin box, and hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 229. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), so that the dimensional tolerance is dimensional. The dimensional deviation due to the assembly error can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate. As a result, the state in which the external force is applied in the longitudinal direction of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is maintained, and as the repulsive force, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate has the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. , And the contact surface with the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and the contact surface with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. The ground (solder surface) of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is maintained in a state of being added to each of the above and maintaining a good electrical connection. The GND) and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and securely connected, and the ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is electrically connected. They can be connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading the effect display device 1600 are further removed in addition to the metal shield plate 1540. Through the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate, a "route through which noise escapes" can be formed by guiding and removing the substrate ground (ground of various substrates (GND)). As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

Also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. Lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed, but they come into contact with the seating surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan screw. The mounting surface (boss) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by being soldered to the copper foil which is the front surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side of the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the surface), may be coated with a resist solution to cover the surface. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is also applied when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with the resist solution. To. Even with this configuration, the metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via a metal pan head screw. Can be in a state. Further, copper which is the surface of the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side of the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By applying the foil with a resist solution and covering it, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer of the portion corresponding to the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same thickness, so that the through hole 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into ~ 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , Distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is blown through the wing portion by the rotation of the peripheral control unit 1500. By ejecting air to the outside, air is accommodated from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to a small value. However, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes air to be sucked in through the wings and sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. May be good. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. Apply through the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool, put the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into a reflow furnace, and dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a soldering tank and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. In order to prevent the area from being reduced and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should not be partially soldered. It needs to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed on the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, by partially coating the copper foil with a resist solution to form a predetermined shape. The surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. Specifically, as a "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a single circle having a predetermined width may be formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the resist is formed. A shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a ring shape around the centers of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical resist having a predetermined width. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (a shape may be formed in which a plurality of lines are formed at a predetermined distance dimension only in the vertical direction in which the resist has a predetermined width, or the resist is formed. A plurality of lines having a predetermined width separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed only in the lateral direction.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed diagonally (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed diagonally), although not shown. Examples thereof include an aggregated shape of small circular shapes.

As described above, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr which is formed into a predetermined shape. Since the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 The amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The effect of being able to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is sufficient). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It can be made uniform so that the solder does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this way has the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. It covers 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

It should be noted that the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts a predetermined figure formed by such a resist with the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be applied to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this way electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan head screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering with the solder.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan head screw is used, but it is made of metal. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as “Kiku washer”) through the pan head screw.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded as separate bodies. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made entirely of polycarbonate with carbon as described above. Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) while being made of the contained conductive resin. When fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GNDs) of these various substrates to form the same grounds (GNDs).

On the other hand, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the box shape is opened at the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction. Peripheral control capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on commands from the transparent non-conductive resin molded cover body 1501 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. The substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, And a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield arranged on the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that invades various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A plate 1540, a conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined position on a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board. A metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 arranged on the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading various substrates such as 1530. It includes a base body 1502 molded of a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and metal substrate back surface. Peripheral control board box by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by being sandwiched between the (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position of the cover body 1501 and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502. A 1505 (sealed substrate box) is configured.

[Cover body of peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
First, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. Are different in that they are formed as mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah4 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. The difference is that the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 to be formed are formed as mounting boss holes 1501am3 and 1501am4 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. Further, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to the real-time clock IC (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 even when the power is turned off is provided from a holder (not shown). A cylindrical pop-out prevention portion 1501aw is formed so as to protrude from the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 toward the front side of the backup power supply 1510e so as to pop out and not interrupt the power supply to the real-time clock IC (not shown). It is different from the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment in that. The end face of the pop-out prevention portion 1501aw is arranged so as to be separated from the backup power supply 1510e by a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1 mm).

Further, when various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to the back surface side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripherals are attached. Insert a metal pan screw (not shown) directly into the through holes (excluding those into which the mounting boss protrusion is inserted) of various substrates such as the data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and insert the metal pan screw (not shown) directly into the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board were fixed on the back surface side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, although they were fixed by screwing into the mounting boss holes formed in. When attaching various substrates such as 1530, a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly attached to a specific through hole among a plurality of through holes in various substrates such as peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530. After performing the first fixing method of inserting and fixing by screwing into the mounting boss hole formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, various types such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data ROM board 1520 are provided with through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate. , And other through-holes other than specific through-holes in various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, are arranged so as to match the corresponding through-holes, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed with the base body 1502 to form the base flat plate 1502a. Insert a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through hole of the mounting boss formed on the front surface side, and each through hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by screwing them into the mounting boss holes formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the other through holes. 2 Perform the fixing method.

In the first fixing method, when the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later will be described. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and is formed through the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. The holes 1540c2a are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed through the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The holes 1540c1a, the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged and peripherally arranged. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. The 1540b1a is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 to 1501ah4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Is arranged so as to align with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501an1 to 1501an4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Then, peripheral control is performed by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 as specific through holes among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The substrate 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other.

Then, among the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 as specific through holes and formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah2. As a result, of the lands 1520 rb1, 1520 rb2, 1520 rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the lands 1520 rb1, 1520 rb4 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. It becomes. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is made of metal by being electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. The board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to connect to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the output board 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Become.

Then, among the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 as specific through holes, and the mounting is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am4. As a result, of the lands 1530 rb1, 1530 rb3, 1530 rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530 rb1, 1530 rb4 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to shield the metal. The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to each other, and the same ground (GND) is used. Therefore, the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to connect the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. ..

After this first fixing method, in the second fixing method, a metal material described later is used so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate are provided with various types such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530. Among the other through holes other than the specific through holes in the substrate, the corresponding through holes include the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A metal pan-solder not shown in the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6, which will be described later, are formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a by closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502. 1555b1a to 1555b4a through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and Among the other through holes other than the specific through holes in various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as the corresponding through holes, the through holes 1510r1, 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r2, 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, And, through the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, they are fixed by screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

By performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the peripheral control board 1510 is made of metal with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal. The shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate is sandwiched between the front surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2. In this state, the lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , Are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are mounted in an L shape. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the back surface (solder surface) of the metal substrate is connected to. The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the side shield plate 1555 are made of metal by being electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. In the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, it is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 to supply power. It will be connected to the ground (GND) line of the substrate 630.

Further, by performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield. The surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the plate 1555 is in contact with the surface. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same ground. Since it is (GND), the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected. Will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. Become.

Further, by performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate. The surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of 1555 is in contact with the surface. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to each other, and are the same ground (GND). Therefore, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data are connected. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. ..

Further, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined position on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal. It is in a state of being pressed against and in contact with the front surface side of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate. As a result, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A gap (2.3 mm) having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

As described above, a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are obtained by adding the areas (total areas) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. The area at 1501az and the gaps formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501), in the peripheral control board 1510. The volume control switch 1510d provided, the gap formed in the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. The area of the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 and the gaps formed in the connector holes) is smaller than the sum of the two. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. , A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a metal substrate surface (mounting) housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to a small value when the air is taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the side shield plate 1540. You can do it.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
On the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, through holes 1502ag1 are located at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1,1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 having ~ 1502ag6 are formed, respectively. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 to fix the base 1502 to the cover body 1501.

On the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the region corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is one in comparison with the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having a large shape are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounds (grounds) of the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented from entering from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. It is isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A "route that does not allow noise to escape" is formed.

[Shield plate on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment]
It is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that invades various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has predetermined distance dimensions at the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. In the fourth embodiment, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 that are bent rearward by (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) are formed, respectively.

Further, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a predetermined distance on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 that are bent rearward by the dimensions (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the present fourth embodiment) are formed, and a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness:: An L-shaped circuit that is closer to the center (1.2 mm) and is bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (9.9 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this fourth embodiment) above the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1. A connection piece 1540d is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a is formed with notches around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring drawer recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. In this state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a and the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab are formed in the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a. It will be inserted without contact.

The metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is bent so that the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel to each other. In the fourth embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively.

In a state where various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Is a space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is in a state of being formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A distance of a second predetermined height between the first space having (12 mm in the present fourth embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space having a dimension (1.6 mm in the present fourth embodiment).

In the first space, various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e, power supply creation circuit (not shown), resistance (not shown), capacitor (not shown)). , LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN3, etc.), and liquid crystal output board 1530. While various electronic parts and the like (resistors (not shown, capacitors, special connectors SCN4, etc.) not shown) are housed, various electronic parts and the like are not housed in the second space at all. By accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take measures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) and in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating various electronic components that generate heat, heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is to convey it efficiently. That is, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat radiating plate in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

The shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has the same shape at a position corresponding to the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Ventilation holes 1540az are formed. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similarly to the ventilation holes 1501az. There is. When the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotate, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wings. As a result, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

Further, noise entering from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 on the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. As a countermeasure against (electromagnetic noise), each side of the shield flat plate 1540a is bent backward (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Side walls 1540ae are formed respectively. Ventilation holes 1540az are not formed in these side walls 1540ae at all. Further, these side walls 1540ae have their end faces predetermined from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 in a state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled. Since they have a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and are separated from each other, they do not come into contact with each other and do not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates.

Further, the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a circular shape through which a protrusion prevention portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape formed so as to project from the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 is passed. An opening of 1540 aw is formed.

[Shield plate on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment]
It is arranged on the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that invades various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is the upper left side, lower left side, upper right side, and lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1555a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 that are bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (2.3 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1555a in the fourth embodiment) are formed on the side. These L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 are formed by bending so that their surfaces are arranged in the same plane.

The shield flat plate 1555a is formed with cutout portions 1555aa1 to 1555aaa3 so as not to interfere with the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502, respectively. Further, the shield flat plate 1555a includes mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, and mounting bosses 1502af4 that come into contact with the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. A notch portion 1555aa5 is formed so as not to interfere with the mounting boss 1502af5 which is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, on the surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, electricity other than the ground (GND) in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to correspond to the shape of the shield flat plate 1555a. A transparent insulating sheet (not shown) is attached (adhered) to prevent short circuits due to the connection. Further, the shield flat plate 1555a is not formed with the side wall 1540ae and the ventilation hole 1540az formed on the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540.

The lower region of the cutout portion 1555aa5 on the front surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. It is a region where the conductive elastic member 1545 (which is adhered) is pressed and contacted.

In a state where a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is attached to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. By arranging the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 near the back surface side (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, Various substrates absorb heat generated from various electronic components, and the absorbed heat is taken from the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 from various substrates, so that various substrates can be efficiently cooled. That is, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has a function as a heat radiating plate in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the back surface side of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is in contact with the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502.

[Conductive elastic member of peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity). It is composed of a conductive coating portion 1545a, a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating portion 1545a. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1545a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven cloth, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

The cross-sectional shape (round sliced shape) of the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width of about 2 mm. , Has a rectangular shape with a height of about 0.035 mm.

[How to assemble the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
The method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in.

Subsequently, in order to mount the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The through hole 1540c1a formed in the above is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is arranged. The through hole 1540c2a formed in the above is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is arranged. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the above is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is arranged. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the above is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and are formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3, 1520r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1,1501ah4, 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1, formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The 1530r2, 1530r3, and 1530r4 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501am1,1501am3,1501am2,1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 233, a metal pan not shown directly from the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the first fixing method. It is fixed by inserting a screw and screwing it into various mounting boss holes formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By this first fixing method, a screw fixing instruction mark and a serial number in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark are printed on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates as silk printing with respect to the through hole to be fixed. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the worker of the manufacturer inserts and screws the metal pan head screws (not shown) to fix them. The color in which the screw fixing instruction mark and the serial number are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark is the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) in which the various electronic components mounted on the) are arranged and the component number thereof are the same color as the color printed as silk printing (here, white).

Specifically, in the through hole 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH1 that surrounds the land 1520rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a solid white line is silk-printed. The white serial number 1 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH1 and is printed as silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH2 that surrounds the land 1520rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 2 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH2 and printed as silk printing.

Further, in the through hole 1530r1 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH3 surrounding the land 1530rb1 on the back surface (solder side) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 3 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH3 and printed as silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 surrounding the land 1530rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 4 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 and printed as silk printing.

Further, in the through hole 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH5 that surrounds the land 1510rb2 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 5 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH5 and printed as silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH6 surrounding the land 1510rb3 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 6 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH6 and printed as silk printing.

The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed by the worker of the manufacturer inserting the metal pan head screws (not shown) in order to fix the serial numbers 1 to 4 in order. There may be a slight deviation from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to constrain the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed. When the control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Since the data can be absorbed by the dimensional allowance provided for each, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted in the position of the peripheral control board 1510 to cover the cover flat plate 1501a. It can be fitted to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side.

The serial number 1 and the serial number 2 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by the manufacturer's worker inserting and screwing in a metal pan head screw (not shown) in order to fix the serial number 1. The lands 1520 rb1 and 1520 rb4 to be formed and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As a result, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

The serial number 3 and the serial number 4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) in order and screwing and fixing the serial number 3 by the worker of the manufacturer. Lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 and the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to shield the metal. The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

The serial number 5 and the serial number 6 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) in order and screwing it in to fix it. Lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other.

When the worker of the manufacturer inserts the metal pan head screw (not shown) in order to fix the serial number 1 to 6, the worker of the manufacturer sequentially inserts the serial number 1 to the serial number 6. If you do not insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) and screw it in to fix it, but randomly insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) and screw it in to fix it, any of serial numbers 1 to 6 There may be a mistake of inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the one indicated by the serial number and screwing it in to forget to fix it. When such an error occurs, the peripheral control board box 1505 (peripheral control unit 1500) is shipped with the metal pan head screws (not shown) incompletely fixed.

Further, the through holes 1520r1, 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the through holes 1530r1, 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the through holes 1510r2 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, which are instructed by the worker of the manufacturer as serial numbers 1 to 6. One or more of through holes other than 1510r3, that is, through holes 1520r2, 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, through holes 1530r2, 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and through holes 1510r1, 1510r4 of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Even if a metal pan screw (not shown) is mistakenly inserted into the through hole of the cover body 1501 and fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and then the base body 1502 is put on the cover body 1501. Of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss corresponding to the metal pan screw inserted incorrectly is made of metal. Since it always interferes with the head of the pan screw, a gap is formed between the base body 1502 and the cover body 1501 so that the cover body 1501 cannot be completely closed by the base body 1502.

In this way, of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, L of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1555b1a and 1555b2a formed in the character-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 are arranged so as to match the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is L-shaped mounting. The through hole 1555b3a formed in the piece 1555b3 is arranged so as to match the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. The through hole 1555b4a is arranged so as to match the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this way, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is arranged so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, since holes such as ventilation holes are not formed at all in the shield flat plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 2 described above are formed. The serial number 6 is also covered with the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate, which makes it difficult to see. In other words, the peripheral control board box 1505 molded as an assembled transparent non-conductive resin is viewed from various angles to various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Even if it is crowded, the back side (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is that various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by the above-mentioned first fixing method. It is obscured by the shield plate 1555, and the security of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be improved.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member 1545 is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Attach (adhere) the adhesive tape 1545c.

Subsequently, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and are formed on the cover body 1501. Insert the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cd of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. ..

Subsequently, the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad have U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf, and the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cd are in contact with each other. The mounting boss formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a by the second fixing method in a state where the base body 1502 wraps around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is covered with the cover body 1501 as it is. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of 1502af1 to 1502af6 and screwed in to fix it.

Specifically, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag1 of the mounting boss 1502af1 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a to insert an L-shaped shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. The through hole 1555b1a formed in the shape mounting piece 1555b1, the through hole 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, an L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is inserted by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through hole 1502ag2 of the mounting boss 1502af2 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Covers through the through hole 1555b2a formed in 1555b2, the through hole 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the flat plate 1501a. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 has an L-shape of the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the surfaces of the mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2. In this state, the lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , Are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are mounted in an L shape. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. That is, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. By being connected, the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal substrate is formed. The back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, an L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is inserted by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through hole 1502ag3 of the mounting boss 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. It is fixed by screwing through the through hole 1555b3a formed in 1555b3 and the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 into the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 come into contact with each other. It will be in the state of That is, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As a result, the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

Further, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag4 of the mounting boss 1502af4 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and passes through the through hole 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501ah4 to be formed. Further, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag5 of the mounting boss 1502af5 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the through hole 1530r2 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501am3.

Further, an L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is inserted by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through hole 1502ag6 of the mounting boss 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. It is fixed by screwing the through hole 1555b4a formed in 1555b4 and the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into the mounting boss hole 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are in contact with each other. It becomes a state. That is, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

By this second fixing method, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a and screwed in to fix the metal substrate surface. The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is pressed against and in contact with the front surface side of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. As a result, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the fourth embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm) due to dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) that sandwich various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The periphery is sandwiched between the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 so that the side shield plate 1555 is electrically and securely connected. Since it can be electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form the same ground (GND), noise (electromagnetic waves). Peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, various boards such as liquid crystal output board 1530) and peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520) , And various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530) can be constructed. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

Subsequently, a metal one-way screw in which a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 toward the base side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. Screw in. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base side sealing portion 1502ea and the base side sealing portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact).

In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent against fraudulent acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawing and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by inserting and attaching the connector. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to a mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 and on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box accommodating the effect display device 1600. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box inserted into the mounting groove forming the mounting portion formed in the above, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole that constitutes the mounting portion formed on the back side of the.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment are formed of a transparent non-conductive resin, and are formed in the internal space of the cover body 1501. , Peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are made of metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. When the board is sandwiched and attached, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. It is configured. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. Is connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is collected from the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface). It can be removed by guiding it to a substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates) via a side shield plate 1555. As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of shield flat plates 1540a formed on the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. The arrangement of the ventilation holes 1540az having a circular shape will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the surfaces of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The part number and model (or control number) printed on the screen, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) That is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles. The regions are distributed and arranged so as to have an area larger than the shape of the ROM 1510b. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. .. Further, since the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in the lighting state while the DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state in which it is being printed, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and is further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively (for example). , Connector pin number, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board. The contents silk-printed on the 1520 and the data are distributed and arranged so as to be a large area where the contents can be substantially confirmed from multiple directions. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the contents silk-printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence with the above, the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is modified, and the inter-board connector modified by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 35V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 35V is originally Although it has a function to check (monitor) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the above functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pin is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ..

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The contents silk-printed on each of the 1530s (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) are arranged in a distributed manner so that they can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510, and the silk-printed contents on the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lit state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the special connector SCN4. Improved visibility of silk-printed contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improved visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can be contributed to.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa include the part number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And, the state of the IC pin and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are dispersed so as to be a region larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the contents can be confirmed from multiple directions. Have been placed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be done. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but by further having a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510c brightly, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the IC pin, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the vane of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vane of the air-cooled fan FAN). The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

As the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mounted type having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and a type having a weak directivity are adopted, so that they can be used as lighting. Is also suitable. Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are made of a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In the state of being sandwiched and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed, and two shield plates 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate are arranged in this space. The space is formed. As described above, these two spaces are between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. A first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in this fourth embodiment), a surface of a shield plate 1540a of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and a cover plate. It is composed of a second space having a distance dimension (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) of a second predetermined height between the back surface of the 1501a and the back surface. As described above, the first space accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. There is. The inside of the first space formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

Further, since the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is made of metal, it has a gloss and is a metal substrate facing the light emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively. As a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the light emitted by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and directing the light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 to the peripheral control board 1510 again with respect to the region of the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and its surroundings. It also has the function of. These reflective portions may be configured to be further coated with a glossy colored paint.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and are discharged to the side of the game board 5. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units to be charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up behind the island facilities in the game hall. As described above, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a non-conductive resin as described above, and the inside of the cover body 1501 is formed. In the space, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are on the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side. By being attached while being sandwiched by the shield plate 1555, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be grounded (GND) of various substrates. We adopted a configuration that electrically connects with. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line of the above, the same ground (GND) is adopted.

As a result, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the body 1502 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data via the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It can be removed by guiding it to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In other words, the cover body 1501 and the base of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is passed through the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, and the substrate ground (ground of various substrates). (GND)) and can be removed.

In the fourth embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plates 1540, and the metal substrate. In a state of being sandwiched by the back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the cover flat plate 1501a A space having a predetermined height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this fourth embodiment) is formed between the back surface and the back surface, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed in this space. Two spaces are formed by arranging the two spaces, and these two spaces are formed on the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. A first space having a distance dimension (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) of a first predetermined height between the shield flat plate 1540a and the back surface, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. It was composed of a second space having a distance dimension (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) of a second predetermined height between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed to be larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large effect unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, and is in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same predetermined height distance dimension, or the second predetermined height distance dimension may be configured. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) in the first space, and also in the second space. By not accommodating various electronic components that generate heat, the heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is efficiently transferred to the second space via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. I can tell you well.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the peripheral control substrate 1510 is provided with control. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) ), And the part number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510. The contents (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ), The state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). However, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. It can also be configured as follows. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, SRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. It can also be configured as follows. Further, the shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540 on the side of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) corresponding to a larger area (shape composed of the special connector SCN3), or the periphery. The shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate corresponding to the larger region.

[Around the through holes of various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment]
Here, the periphery of the through holes formed in various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 234 (a), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. Lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4 are formed which are in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 and are electrically connected. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through hole 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a metal substrate surface (mounting surface). A land 1520rf4 is formed which is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the side shield plate 1540 and is electrically connected. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 around the through hole 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. A land 1530rf1 is formed which is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 and is electrically connected.

These lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, 1530rf1 are electrically connected in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Therefore, a "route through which noise escapes" is formed in which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has penetrated into the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 flows to the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates). The surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a mounting boss hole 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , 1501am1 mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) come into contact with each other. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah2,1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2, and Land 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, 1530rf1 Even if they invade, the invading noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates).

Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Foil removal regions NR5 and NR6 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 is the foil removal region NR5. , NR6, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a cover flat plate 1501a. Foil removal regions NR7, NR8, NR9 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1,1501ah4 formed on the back surface side are formed, and the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1,1501ah4 are mounted. The surface (boss surface) comes into contact with the foil removal regions NR7, NR8, and NR9, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r2, 1530r3, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Foil removal regions NR10, NR11, and NR12 having a circular shape larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed in the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 are formed, and the mounting surface of the mounting boss holes 1501am3,1501am2,1501am4 ( The boss surface) comes into contact with the foil removal regions NR10, NR11, and NR12, respectively.

These foil removal regions NR5 to NR12 prevent noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from entering from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2,1501ag3,1501ah3,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2,1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is isolated from the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 so that the peripheral control board 1510 can be used. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is peripherally controlled from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2,1501ag3,1501ah3,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2,1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a via the foil removal region NR5 to NR12. A "noise-free route" is formed that cannot penetrate into the beta land of various substrates such as the substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 has the back surface of the metal substrate. Lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4 are formed in contact with the surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2 of the (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and electrically connected. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r2 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a back surface (solder surface) of a metal substrate. A land 1520 rb2 is formed which is in contact with the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the side shield plate 1555 and is electrically connected. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. A land 1530rb3 is formed that abuts on the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 and is electrically connected.

These lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3 are electrically connected in contact with the front surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. Therefore, a "route through which noise escapes" is formed in which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is the mounting boss 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1502af6 come into contact with each other. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is formed from the mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3, 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate. Even if it invades 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4, and the land 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3, the invading noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates).

Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan head screw (not shown) is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 that are directly inserted and screwed in are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 that surround the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 with solid white lines are printed as silk printing. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan (not shown) is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 into which screws are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 surrounding the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 with solid white lines are printed as silk printing. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), metal pan head screws (not shown) are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 that are directly inserted and screwed in are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 that surround the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 with solid white lines are printed as silk printing.

Even if a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, it is out of the area of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6. Although the area near the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 side overlaps with the head of the metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral part of the area of the solid white thick line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 is not shown. Since the head of the screw is formed larger than the outer line of the head of the screw, the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) is conspicuous by the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6. It is possible to contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of inserting a pan head screw and screwing it in and forgetting to fix it. Further, even if a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed in, the area of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 Of these, the area near the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 side overlaps with the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown), but the outer peripheral part of the area of the solid white thick line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is made of metal (not shown). Since the head of the pan head is formed larger than the outer line, the head of the metal pan screw (not shown) is conspicuous by the solid white lines of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2, and is made of metal (not shown). It is possible to contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of inserting and screwing in the pan head screw and forgetting to fix it. Further, even if a metal pan head screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, it is included in the area of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4. Although the area near the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 side overlaps with the head of the metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral part of the area of the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is not shown. Since the head of the screw is formed larger than the outline of the head of the screw, the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) is conspicuous by the solid white line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4. It is possible to contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of inserting a pan head screw and screwing it in and forgetting to fix it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (c), the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is formed on the surface side (mounting surface) 1520x around the through hole 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. A foil removing region NR13 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af4 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af4 abuts on the foil removing region NR13, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (c), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r2 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. A foil removing region NR14 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af5 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af5 abuts on the foil removing region NR14, respectively.

These foil removal regions NR13 and NR14 are used with the grounds (GND) of various substrates so that noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented from entering from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Is isolated from. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a to the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the foil removal regions NR13 and NR14. A "route that does not allow noise to escape" is formed that cannot be invaded.

As described above, the through holes 1520r1, 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the through holes 1520r1, 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 surrounded by the solid white line are printed as silk printing, respectively, and the penetration formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 and the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are through holes which are fixed to the cover body 1501 by directly inserting and screwing a metal pan head screw (not shown). On the other hand, through holes 1510r1, 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 in which the screw fixing instruction mark is not printed at all as silk printing, through holes 1520r2, 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output. The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 formed in the substrate 1530 are formed by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502. When screwing in to fix the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1501 and the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. It is a through hole formed on the back surface side of 1501a and sandwiched between the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2 and fixed together.

That is, a metal pan screw is directly inserted into a plurality of through holes provided in various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and screwed into the cover body 1501. When the through hole and the through hole that is sandwiched and fastened together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are mixed, the worker of the manufacturer silk-screens the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 printed as printing, screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 printed as silk printing on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 printed as silk printing on the peripheral control board 1510. By visually observing, the through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the through holes 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which are through holes for directly inserting and screwing the metal pan screw to be fixed to the cover body 1501. 1520r4, through holes 1530r1, 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and through holes 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, which are through holes sandwiched and fastened together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Since the 1510r4, the through holes 1520r2, 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes 1530r2, 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be discriminated, a metal pan screw is directly inserted and screwed into the cover body 1501. Screwing work (screw and fix) to through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 of peripheral control board 1510, through holes 1520r1, 1520r4 of peripheral data ROM board 1520, and through holes 1530r1, 1530r4 of liquid crystal output board 1530, which are through holes to be fixed. Work) can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of work efficiency.

In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. In addition to being connected, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is shielded on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal board. One or both of the plate 1540 and the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate are in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and are not electrically connected. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are electrically floated. Since the electrically floating metal may function as an antenna for picking up noise and become a noise source, the electrically floating metal may be used as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, or the like. It is necessary not to make it for various substrates. Therefore, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 are shown. In addition to the case where the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected by a wiring that is not provided, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the above-mentioned metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 may be electrically connected by a wiring (not shown). As described above, the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 also functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to impart rigidity, and the body frame metal (not shown). It is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame ground substrate 559 via a ground wire. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment ground wire (not shown).

In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When arranged so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as, as described above, the shield flat plate 1555a of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has holes such as ventilation holes. Since it was not formed at all, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 were also covered with the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate, which made it difficult to see. A plurality of holes may be formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate. In this way, whether or not the manufacturer's worker has fixed the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards through the plurality of holes by the first fixing method described above (that is,). Whether or not a metal pan head screw is inserted and fixed in the portion where the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 are located) can be visually confirmed.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is shown in FIG. The screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6, which surround the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 in which the metal pan screws (not shown) shown in 235 (b) are directly inserted and screwed in, are surrounded by solid white lines, respectively, are printed as silk screen printing. Further, on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. 235 (b) is formed. The screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2, which surround the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 that are directly inserted and screwed in by solid white lines, are printed as silk screen printing, and the through holes 1530r1, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. On the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the land, a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. 235 (b) is directly inserted and screwed into the land 1530 rb1 and 1530 rb4, respectively. The screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 surrounded by the solid line are printed as silk screen printing, but instead of the solid white line, a thick white chain line (one-point chain line, two-point chain line) may be used.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the colors in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are printed as silk printing are the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral data Areas and part numbers that indicate positions (including orientation designation) for arranging various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards such as the ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are silk-printed. Although it is the same color (white) as the color to be printed, the area and its part number indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates are placed. May be different from the color printed as silk printing. For example, when the area indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) in which various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates are arranged and the component number is printed as silk printing is white. May be yellow or black as the color in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are printed as silk printing so as to be a color different from the white color.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal substrate surface (mounting surface). The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the side shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other, and the land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the metal substrate surface. The land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal substrate are in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The back surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2, but instead of this, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 The back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 is not brought into contact with the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is configured so as to abut on the surface of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 without abutting on the land 1520rf4, and the L-shape of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The back surface of the mounting piece 1540b2 is not brought into contact with the land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but is brought into contact with the front surface of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It may be configured as. This is a state in which the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned conductive elastic member 1545. Because it can be done.

In this configuration, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It is configured so as not to come into contact with various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, in the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate, the penetrations formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the back surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate, respectively. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a, respectively. Further, the base body 1502 corresponds to through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Through holes are formed at the respective positions. Further, on the back surface side of the cover body 1501, through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, which are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Screw holes are formed at positions corresponding to 1540b2a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the surface of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are in contact with each other. Cover body in a state (that is, a state in which the electrical connectivity between the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be improved). A screw hole formed on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through hole formed in the base body 1502 so as to be sandwiched and fixed between the 1501 and the base body 1502. Each can be screwed toward and fixed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is blown through the wing portion by the rotation of the peripheral control unit 1500. By ejecting air to the outside, air is accommodated from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Air that flows into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate. However, when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, air is sucked in through the wings and heads toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. You may try to send out air. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 234 (Fig. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in a), a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Spread the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula) to apply it from the holes formed in the metal mask, and put the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into the reflow furnace to heat it. Although the solder paste is dried by the above method, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the land 1510rf1, 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In order to prevent the contact area from being reduced and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should not be partially soldered. Need to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed on the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, by partially coating the copper foil with a resist solution to form a predetermined shape. The surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4. Specifically, as a "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a single circle having a predetermined width may be formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the resist is formed. A shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a ring shape around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical resist having a predetermined width. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (a shape may be formed in which a plurality of lines are formed at a predetermined distance dimension only in the vertical direction in which the resist has a predetermined width, or the resist is formed. A plurality of lines having a predetermined width separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed only in the lateral direction.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed diagonally (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed diagonally), although not shown. Examples thereof include an aggregated shape of small circular shapes.

As described above, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr which is formed into a predetermined shape. Since it is soldered to a region of the copper foil having a predetermined shape, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 The amount of solder soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, can be suppressed (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. Anything that can exert the effect of suppressing the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It can be made uniform so that the solder does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this way is the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the land 1510rf1 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. , 1510rf4 is electrically covered so as to be connectable.

The predetermined figure formed by such a resist may also be formed on the copper foil which is the front surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering with the solder.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan head screw is used, but it is made of metal. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as “Kiku washer”) through the pan head screw.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded as separate bodies. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made entirely of polycarbonate with carbon as described above. Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) while being made of the contained conductive resin. When fixed by screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GNDs) of these various substrates to form the same grounds (GNDs).

On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the box shape is opened in the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction. Peripheral control capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on commands from the transparent non-conductive resin molded cover body 1501 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. The substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the transparent non-conductive material that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. It includes a base body 1502 molded of a sex resin. Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. As a result, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the fact that the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of transparent non-conductive resin, T The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is such that the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate is fitted on the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a so that a part of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a character shape protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502. The ground (GND) test pad of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the ground (GND) test pad of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the liquid crystal output board 1530. Noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment in that the cover body 1501 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the above and an opening for contacting the probe with the test pad is formed in the cover body 1501. It is different from the configuration of.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment is largely similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and has a back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. A rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction, in which a conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is fitted at a position corresponding to the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed. The rib portion 1502aw is formed so as to project forward from the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a with a predetermined distance dimension (distance dimension that does not come into contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). An insertion port 1502az having a square (one side is 8 mm) is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at the center of the rectangular rib portion 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions. The conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and has a T-shape as a core material coated by the conductive coating portion 1508a and the conductive coating portion 1508a. It is composed of a foam 1508b having a foam. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1508a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven cloth, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1508b include polyurethane foam having heat resistance. The T-shaped firing body 15808b has a base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction (when the T-shaped firing body 15808b in FIG. 237 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 3.5 mm and the depth is about about 3.5 mm. A projecting portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape (8 mm, height of about 16 mm) that is long in the front-rear direction from the center to the rear (when the firing body 15808b having a T-shape in FIG. 237 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 11. It has 5 mm, a depth of about 8 mm, and a height of about 8 mm). After assembling the peripheral control unit 1500, the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate (the method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is the same as the method of assembling the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. ), The base portion having the shape of a rectangular body long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T shape is inserted into the insertion port 1502az formed in the base body 1502 and pushed in the vertical direction to be fitted. As a result, as shown in FIG. 238 (a), the protruding portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape protrudes rearward from the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. It will be in the state of.

When the base portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is inserted into the insertion port 1502az formed in the base body 1502 and pushed in, FIG. 238 (b) ), The front surface of the base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction is pressed against the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed and comes into contact with each other. In addition to being in a state, the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the vertical direction is not connected to the upper and lower back sides of the base portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the vertical direction (that is, the protruding portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction is not connected). The back surface of the base portion having the above) is locked to the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a.

In this way, the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate has a T-shape, and the rib portion 1502aw and the rib portion 1502aw are formed in the center of the base flat plate 1502a in the vertical and horizontal directions in the base flat plate 1502a, which is extremely simple. When the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate is inserted into the insertion port 1502az and pushed in to fit the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate, as described above, the base portion of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate which has a long rectangular shape in the vertical direction. The upper back surface side and the lower back surface side (that is, the back surface of the base portion having a vertically long rectangular body shape to which the protrusion having a long rectangular body shape in the front-rear direction is not connected) are locked to the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a, respectively. Since it is in this state, the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate can be made difficult to come off from the insertion port 1502az, and it is easy to handle by hand.

On the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the region corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is one in comparison with the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having a large shape are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounds (grounds) of the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented from entering from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. It is isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A "route that does not allow noise to escape" is formed.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that closes the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, a rectangular body long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. A state in which the protruding portion having the shape of is crushed by being in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 (in the fifth embodiment, the protruding portion having the shape of a rectangular body long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate). The part is crushed by about 4.5 mm in the front-rear direction and spreads in the vertical direction), and the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate having a T-shape is deformed into an H-shape, so that the repulsive force is for the substrate. The conductive elastic member 1508 has a contact surface with the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, and a contact surface with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. The ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, while maintaining a state in which the electrical connection is good, are added to each of the above. Is electrically connected securely, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM. It can be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520) to form the same ground (GND). As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is passed through the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the peripheral control board. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Since it can be electrically connected to the line and have the same ground (GND), an environment resistant to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be created in the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and peripheral data ROM board 1520). It can be constructed on the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various boards such as the liquid crystal output board 1530). Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment are formed of a transparent non-conductive resin, and are formed in the internal space of the cover body 1501. , Peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are attached at predetermined positions, and then the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board having a T-shape is a rectangular body that is long in the vertical direction. When the shaped base portion is inserted into the insertion port 1502az formed in the base body 1502 and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is passed through the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the peripheral control board 1510 and the periphery. It is configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of the data ROM board 1520). Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. Is connected. For this reason, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 is guided to the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates) via the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and removed. A "route to exit" can be formed. As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

On the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 () (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 () is the peripheral control board 1510 or the peripheral data ROM board 1520. A test pad (not shown), which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the above, is provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 240, the cover body 1501 has a contact probe tip (hereinafter, simply referred to as “contact probe”) with respect to a test pad (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It may be described. It may be a “test lead” that checks the continuity of a so-called “tester”) to form an opening 1501 at that can be brought into contact with the test lead. By bringing this contact probe into contact with the test pad, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. The inspection company can easily perform the inspection work of whether or not the connection is made.

[Exposed area of a part of the ground of various boards of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
Here, a region ROP in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed will be described. As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), the region ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A part of the substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta solder) formed on the copper foil surface 1530 yp of 1530y has a rectangular shape long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate, which is larger than the front shape of the base portion. The resist liquid is placed on the copper foil surface 1530 yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530 y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be arranged inside the rectangular rib portion 1502 aw formed on the surface of the base flat plate 1502a and exposed. Is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530 yr.

It is also possible to adopt a method of using a through hole without exposing the beta land as the area ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 241 (c) and 241 (d), the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the beta land on the front surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively, and this copper is formed so that a land is formed around each through hole on the copper foil surface 1530 yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530 y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A resist solution can be applied on the foil surface 1530 yp to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530 yr.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is blown through the wing portion by the rotation of the peripheral control unit 1500. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by ejecting air to the outside, a plurality of air is taken into the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. It is possible to keep the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the formed ventilation holes 1501az small, but when the wings of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the wings are rotated by this rotation. Air may be sucked in and sent out to the peripheral control IC 1510a via the air. In other words, the air-cooled fan FAN may not have the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may simply have the main purpose of air-cooling the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Even in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. Apply through the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool, put the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into a reflow furnace, and dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a soldering tank and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a come into contact with each other. In order to prevent the area from being reduced and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should not be partially soldered. It needs to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed on the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, by partially coating the copper foil with a resist solution to form a predetermined shape. The surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. Specifically, as a "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a single circle having a predetermined width may be formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the resist is formed. A shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a ring shape around the centers of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical resist having a predetermined width. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (a shape may be formed in which a plurality of lines are formed at a predetermined distance dimension only in the vertical direction in which the resist has a predetermined width, or the resist is formed. A plurality of lines having a predetermined width separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be formed only in the lateral direction.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed diagonally (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed diagonally), although not shown. Examples thereof include an aggregated shape of small circular shapes.

As described above, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr which is formed into a predetermined shape. Since the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 The amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The effect of being able to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is sufficient). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. It can be made uniform so that the solder does not rise in part. The solder soldered in this way has the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the land 1510rf1 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. It covers 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

It should be noted that the land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts a predetermined figure formed by such a resist with the seat surface (seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be applied to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder soldered in this way electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan of the metal pan head screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering with the solder.

Further, also in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan head screw is used, but it is made of metal. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by passing a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as “Kiku washer”) through the pan head screw.

Further, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded as separate bodies. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in this transparent synthetic resin box.

By the way, conventionally, a main control board that controls game progress and game profit, a sub control board that controls production that is executed as the game progresses, a board such as an image control board that controls display of an image display device, etc. Has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051], and FIG. 2)). By the way, like the game machines described in this document, since the game machines are arranged in a plurality of rows facing back to the hall, the board on which the electronic components are mounted is affected by the noise generated from the game machines facing back. There was a risk that the board would malfunction due to noise in the receiving environment.

In addition, conventionally, a game machine equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as a design, various background images, characters, characters, and an effect control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (Fig. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the game machine are charged with static electricity due to the game balls rubbing against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the island.

In addition, conventionally, a game machine provided with a board on which electronic components such as a ROM for storing image data such as a design, various background images, characters, and characters, and a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images are mounted. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (Fig. 2)). By the way, since some of the various boards provided in the game machine are housed in the board box, it is necessary to perform the work for housed the board in the board box, and improvement of work efficiency has been required.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable]
Next, a flexible flat cable connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 244. FIG. 242 is a front perspective view of the flexible flat cable, and FIG. 243 is a diagram (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to a connector on the back side of the effect display device. It is a figure (b) which shows the state of being electrically connected with the connector of an output board, and is a partially enlarged view of the part B shown in (a) and part C shown in (b), and the flexible flat cable is FIG. 244 shows a state of being electrically connected to each connector through a notch, and FIG. 244 shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is not normally electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device. FIG. 3A is a diagram showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is not normally electrically connected to the connector of the liquid crystal output board. In addition, in FIG. 243 (c), the direction of the connector CN10 shown in FIG. 243 (b) is shown as a state of being rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

[Shape of flexible flat cable]
In the flexible flat cable LFC electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 are arranged in parallel. In addition, these plurality of flat conductors are coated with an insulator, which is one-third to five of the thickness (diameter) of the ordinary round electric wiring as compared with the ordinary round electric wiring. As shown in FIG. 242, electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors are specified on the back surface side of the main body LFCa on the upper end side of the strip-shaped main body LFCa having a thickness of about one-third and having a predetermined width in the vertical direction. In order to reinforce the electrode LFCba which has a length and is arranged barely, has a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa, and has a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of exposed flat conductors. On the lower end side of the main body LFCa, electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors have a predetermined length and are exposed on the back side of the main body LFCa, while the reinforcing plate LFCca is formed. A reinforcing plate LFCcc is formed on the surface side of the LFCa to reinforce the electrode LFCbb having a rectangular shape having a predetermined thickness and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of exposed flat conductors.

The electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa are the connectors 1600ca of the control board 1600c provided on the metal back cover 1600b covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 243). While electrically connected to (a)), the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided in the above.

The flexible flat cable LFC has a bent portion LFCd that rises to the right and is linear by being bent 90 degrees to the left at a portion having a predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction from the upper end of the main body LFCa. Along with the distance dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa to the center point of the straight line rising to the right), the predetermined distance dimension in the left-right direction from the bent portion LFCd (center point of the straight line rising to the right) (in the present embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction). LFCe is formed so that it can be smoothly bent toward the front and smoothly bent to the right at a distance dimension of 1.5 times that of the above, and is formed to be parallel in the front-back direction (depth direction). ing.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the production display device]
As shown in FIG. 243 (a), the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC cover the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. It is electrically connected to the connector 1600ca of. The control board 1600c is an LED (a) that constitutes various electronic components that restore drawing data transmitted from the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and display an image on the liquid crystal panel 1600a and a backlight of the liquid crystal panel 1600a. Alternatively, various electronic components that adjust the brightness of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp) are mounted.

Since the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca, the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors and the plurality of flat conductors Poor contact may occur between the electrodes of the connector LFCba and the corresponding connector 1600ca, and the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are the connector 1600ca. By being inserted diagonally with respect to, one electrode LFCba of the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors becomes an electrode of a connector 1600ca corresponding to this one electrode LFCba, and another electrode adjacent to this electrode. When they come into contact with each other, a short circuit may occur, and various electronic components mounted on the control board 1600c and the control board 1600c may be damaged.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally attached to the connector 1600ca on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. In the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) so as to serve as a mark for insertion. The long solid guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is engraved on the right outer side). The guidelines G1L and G1R are stamped by pressing the metal back cover 1600b with a press machine.

Further, in the present embodiment, electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally attached to the connector 1600ca on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. After being inserted, the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be disconnected from the connector 1600ca, or a plurality of electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In order to prevent a short circuit between the electrode LFCba of a flat conductor and the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to each electrode LFCba, which are slanted and come into contact with other adjacent electrodes, the flexible flat cable LFC is provided with a metal back. As an area for attaching the fixed seal SFC having a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction to be fixed to the back surface side of the lid 1600b, the brackets (")" are located slightly outward from the positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal SFC. Each of these four brackets (")-shaped guidelines G2, G2, G2, and G2 is stamped with a metal back cover 1600b in a press processing process. By fixing the flexible flat cable LFC to the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b by the fixing seal SFC, the posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LCD output board]
As shown in FIG. 243 (b), the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are the connectors CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is electrically connected. In addition to the connector CN10, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is also mounted with the connectors CN8 and CN9 described above, and the special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the special connector SCN2 of the peripheral control board 1510 described above and electrically connected to display the effect display device from the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. The drawing data of the image to be drawn on the device is input to the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the special connector SCN2 from the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the flexible flat cable is input from the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is input to the control board 1600c via the LFC and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600.

The electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10, so that the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors and the plurality of flat conductors Poor contact may occur between the electrodes of the connector LFCbb and the corresponding connector CN10, and the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are the connectors CN10. By being inserted diagonally with respect to, one electrode LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb becomes an electrode of a connector CN10 corresponding to this one electrode LFCbb, and another electrode adjacent to this electrode. When they come into contact with each other, a short circuit may occur, and various electronic components mounted on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 electrically connected to the liquid crystal output board 1530 may be damaged.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the upper end side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) so as to serve as a mark. The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC, lower outside ) Is printed with a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction by silk printing.

In this embodiment, no through hole is formed in the region where the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is arranged. This is because the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubs against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, the flat of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC. This is to prevent the mold conductor from being short-circuited due to the through hole.

[Relationship between flexible flat cable reinforcing plate and connector]
When the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, it is flat. The electrode LFCba of the mold conductor faces the electrode of the connector 1600ca and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Become. As a result, the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC normally cover the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 to the depth of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC must be inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. That is, when the pushing amount is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is exposed from the connector 1600ca.

Further, when inserting the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the flat conductors The electrode LFCbb of the above is facing the electrode of the connector CN10 and is on the back surface side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCcc for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is on the front surface side of the flexible flat cable LFC. As a result, the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted all the way into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, that is, the pushing amount. When the amount is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10.

[Flexible flat cable is not connected properly]
The electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. As shown in FIG. 244 (a), the left end side of the main body LFCa cannot be visually recognized by covering the guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction, and the right end side of the main body LFCa cannot be visually recognized. The guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is inclined, and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is inclined with respect to the lower end side of the connector 1600ba, so that the electrode LFCba is inclined. A part of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the above is exposed from the connector 1600ba. In this way, according to the guidelines G1L, G1R and the reinforcing plate LFCca, the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC form the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c to be covered is normally inserted. As a result, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator puts the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC on the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the display device 1600. When the electrode LFCba is inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the above, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

Further, the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and are oblique. In the state of being inserted into, as shown in FIG. 244 (b), the upper end side of the main body LFCa cannot be visually recognized by covering the guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction, and the lower end side of the main body LFCa is in the left-right direction. The left end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb (in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc) is the left end of the connector CN10 while being inclined with respect to the guideline G3L extending linearly. The side (in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the connector CN10) is inclined, and a part of the reinforcing plate LFCcc for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10. In this way, the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the guidelines G3U and G3L and the reinforcing plate LFCcc. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the connector CN10 provided is normally inserted all the way to the back. As a result, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator attaches the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When the electrode LFCbb is inserted into the connector CN10 provided in the above, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

[Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions are in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing, but the inside of the rectangular shape area with the guideline G3U as the upper side and the guideline G3L as the lower side is solidly printed by silk printing. You may be. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Further, by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC with the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 covered with the resist is not exposed by preventing the resist from being peeled off due to the peeling of the silk print in the rectangular area where the 1530x is solidly coated. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flat conductor of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC from being short-circuited.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lateral direction is in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the upper side and the outer side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC, lower outside ), A long solid guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing, but the liquid crystal corresponding to the rectangular region with the guideline G3U as the upper side and the guideline G3L as the lower side and the inside of the region. A foil removal region may be formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the output substrate 1530. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-pulled rectangular region can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the foil-pulled rectangular region can function as the guideline G3L. Further, by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC with the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Even if the resist of 1530x is peeled off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, so that the flat conductor of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC is short-circuited. Can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lateral direction is in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC, lower outside ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing, but the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 was printed. Guidelines G3U and G3L may be formed by pulling out, or when applying the resist solution to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the guideline is not applied to a part of the region with the resist solution. G3U and G3L may be formed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. After that, the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are detached from the connector CN10, or the plurality of flats formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In order to prevent a short circuit between the electrode LFCbb of the mold conductor and the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to each electrode LFCbb and being in contact with other adjacent electrodes, the flexible flat cable LFC is attached to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A fixing seal having a long rectangular shape in the vertical direction may be attached to be fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x. In this case, as an area for attaching the fixed seal to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, at a position slightly outward from the position corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal, for example, brackets (")" The guideline of the shape (which may be a figure such as a line or a symbol) may be formed by being printed by silk printing, or a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 may be formed. By removing the copper foil, a guideline in the shape of brackets (“) (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed, or a resist may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When applying the liquid, a guideline in the shape of brackets (“) (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed by not applying a part of the area with the resist liquid. The flexible flat cable LFC is a fixed seal. By fixing to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected by using the flexible flat cable LFC. However, in the case where a substrate is provided on a movable body that is operated by driving an electric drive electric power, a flexible flat cable is used as an electrical wiring that electrically connects the substrate to the drive substrate. May be good. Since a load is applied to the movable body by the electric wiring accompanying the operation of the movable body, this load may be too large to be ignored. Therefore, by using a flexible flat cable instead of the wiring and harness as the electrical wiring, the load on the movable body due to the flexible flat cable due to the operation of the movable body is suppressed, and the overload of the electric drive source is suppressed. Can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lateral direction is in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC, lower outside ) Is printed with a long solid line guideline G3L that extends linearly in the left-right direction by silk printing, so that the operator can put the flexible flat cable LFC on the lower end side of the main body LFCa in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine. When the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors to be formed are inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, visually check whether the electrodes LFCbb are normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10. However, for example, on a substrate near the standby position (original position) of the movable body as an indicator of the standby position (original position) of the movable body operated by the drive of the electric drive electric power. Figures such as lines and symbols indicating the standby position (original position) of the movable body may be printed by silk printing. In this way, when a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall manually moves the movable body to the standby position (original position) without turning on the power of the pachinko machine when inspecting the pachinko machine, a mark is used. Can be. In addition, even when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, it can be used to determine whether or not the movable body is displaced from the standby position (original position), so it is used to check for defects in the movable body. You can also do it.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the left outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outside near the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and is located at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity (that is, the upper and outer sides of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction in the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to (that is, the lower side in the vicinity of the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the corresponding position) is attached to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Although it was formed, instead of the solid line, it may be a one-point chain line, a two-point chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the left outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outside near the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction was formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, but corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction near the right side of the position (that is, the right inside near the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) and the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction near the left side of the position corresponding to the side (that is, near the left inner side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) is the effect display device 1600. It may be formed on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the above. In this case, instead of the solid line, it may be a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lateral direction is in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC, lower outside ), A long solid guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, but the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the flexible flat). A long solid guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the cable LFC and the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (inside) That is, a long solid guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 on the upper and inner sides of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In this case, instead of the solid line, it may be a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the left outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outside near the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction was formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, but corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. The long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction at the position and the long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction at the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are the effect display device 1600. It may be formed on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the above. That is, the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1L are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap each other, and the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1R are aligned in the front-rear direction. It becomes an overlapping positional relationship. In this case, instead of the solid line, it may be a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lateral direction is in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the vicinity of the upper side and the outer side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guideline G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC, lower outside ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, but extends linearly in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G3U and a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. That is, the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3U are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap each other, and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3L are aligned in the front-rear direction. It becomes an overlapping positional relationship. In this case, instead of the solid line, it may be a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connectors 1600ca of the control substrate 1600c in which the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC cover the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. In the state where it is normally inserted to the back of the connector, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the front-rear direction. As a result, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) at which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca. Further, in a state where the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the front-rear direction so that the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc is overlapped. The distance between the electrode LFCbb and the lower end side was the same as the length (insertion length) at which the electrode LFCbb was normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca. If the distance between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is longer than the length (insertion length) at which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca, in other words, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In a state where the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the control board 1600c are normally inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control substrate 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, the reinforcing plate LFCca When the lower end side and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca do not match in the front-rear direction and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is arranged in a positional relationship so as to be separated in parallel from the lower end side of the connector 1600ca, the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCca Whether or not the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca by separating the side and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca is determined by checking the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca. It becomes difficult to distinguish by using it. Similarly, the distance between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc was the same as the length (insertion length) at which the electrode LFCbb was normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, but the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc. When the distance between the and the lower end side is longer than the length (insertion length) at which the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted all the way to the back of the connector CN10, in other words, it is formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In a state where the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors are normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc, the lower end side of the connector CN10, and the lower end side of the connector CN10. Does not match the front-rear direction, and when the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc is arranged in a positional relationship so as to be separated in parallel from the lower end side of the connector CN10, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc and the lower end side of the connector CN10 It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10 by using the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc and the lower end side of the connector CN10. ..

Therefore, in such a case, in a state where the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca, it is on an extension line of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca as a guideline indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca. , A solid line extending linearly to the left near the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the left outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Instead of the solid line, it may be a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line, or it may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca.) The guideline G1L'(this guideline G1L'is described above. It may intersect with the guideline G1L, or it may have an L shape integrally formed with the guideline G1L described above), and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, flexible). A solid line extending linearly to the right (instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or a reinforcing plate LFCca) that extends linearly to the right along the right end of the flat cable LFC body LFCa. The guideline G1R'(this guideline G1R' may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side) may intersect with the above-mentioned guideline G1R, or may be L-shaped integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G1R. It is preferable that is stamped on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600.

Further, as a guideline for indicating the position of the lower end side of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc when the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, the flexible flat cable is on the extension line of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc. A solid line extending linearly upward in the vicinity of the upper end of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the LFC (that is, the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) (instead of the solid line) , It may be a one-point chain line or a two-point chain line, or it may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc.) Guideline G3U'(this guideline G3U' intersects with the above-mentioned guideline G3U. It may be an L-shape integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G3U, or a rectangular shape having a vertical distance dimension of the guideline G3U'and a horizontal distance dimension of the above-mentioned guideline G3U. The inside may be solid-painted by silk printing)) and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A solid line (instead of the solid line, a one-point chain line or a two-point chain line) extending linearly downward to the lower outside near the position corresponding to the lower end side of the reinforcing plate may be used, or indicates the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcc. The guideline G3L'(this guideline G3L' may be an arrow line) may intersect with the above-mentioned guideline G3L, or may be an L-shape integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G3L. A rectangular shape having the vertical distance dimension of the guideline G3L'and the horizontal distance dimension of the guideline G3L described above (the inside thereof may be solid-painted by silk printing) may be formed. It is preferable that the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is printed by silk printing.

In addition, instead of silk printing, the guidelines G3U'and G3L'are set by removing the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as in the above-described modification. It may be formed, or when the resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the guidelines G3U'and G3L' are formed by not applying the resist liquid to a part of the region. You may. Further, as in the modification described above, the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is removed, and the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the guideline G3L'and the guideline G3L described above are obtained. Guideline G3U, G3L, and guideline G3U', G3L'are formed by forming a rectangular shape having a distance dimension in the left-right direction (the copper foil inside the rectangular shape may also be removed). You may.

[Connector connection method]
Next, the connector is connected to the relay board that relays various wirings to the peripheral control board 1510, the relay board that relays various wirings to the main control board 1310, and the relay board that relays various wirings to the payout control board 633. The wiring and the connector of the harness will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of the connectors on the relay board, and is a diagram (b) showing a state in which the connectors of the wiring and the harness are normally connected to the connectors of the relay board. It is a figure (c) which shows the state which the connector of a wiring and a harness is not connected normally with respect to.

By the way, if the wiring or harness connector is not properly inserted into the relay board connector, poor contact may occur between the connectors of the connector, and the wiring or harness connector is slanted with respect to the relay board connector. When the connector is inserted into the connector, adjacent electrodes of the connector come into contact with each other to cause a short circuit, which may damage the relay board and various electronic components mounted on various control boards electrically connected to the relay board.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD is arranged with the connector SCK on the socket side into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the wiring and the harness KDCBL is inserted. There is. The connector SCK on the socket side is of the right angle type (also referred to as "side type"), and has a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed with respect to the lower side surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction. Is formed in. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with a predetermined distance dimension wd1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The connector PLG on the plug side has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction is integrally formed. As described above, the lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD and is the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board KD. Although it is arranged in the KDx, in the present embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension dw1 is the vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side.

When the plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the back of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the entire upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug part PLGa is the connector on the socket side. The opening SCKb of the SCK is in contact with the lower side surface SCKaa on which the SCKb is formed, and is in a state of surface contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (that is, the main body of the connector PLG on the plug side). The lower side surface PLGbb) of the PLGb and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are arranged in a positional relationship that coincides with each other in the front-rear direction and overlaps.

As described above, the connector SCK on the socket side is arranged with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD and having a vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side. Therefore, when the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the main body is integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the PLGb (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are in the front-rear direction. It will be arranged in an overlapping positional relationship that matches. As a result, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, when the operator normally inserts the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the operator puts it on the operator's finger. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side of the relay board KD. The plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is opened to the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side by the tactile sensation that the KDeg (that is, the end of the board of the relay board KD) is arranged on the same plane by touching. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the SCKb is normally inserted all the way to the back, and a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall can also perform the inspection work of the pachinko machine on the same plane as described above. By the tactile sensation of being arranged, it can be easily determined whether or not the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

In the state where the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is not normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side and is inserted diagonally, as shown in FIG. 245 (c), the plug side. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG of the connector PLG (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, , The board edge of the relay board KD) has a protrusion amount dSP. As a result, the workers on the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine and the staff of the game hall who inspect the pachinko machine have the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side set to the lower end of the relay board KD by the amount of protrusion dSP. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (that is, by protruding from the side KDeg) on the finger of the operator or the clerk of the game hall. , The lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are touched by the tactile sensation of having a step. It can be easily determined that the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is not normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side.

[Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, the connector SCK on the socket side has a distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side as a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side in a state where the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are front and rear. It was supposed to be arranged in a positional relationship that matches the direction and overlaps, but the component placement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side is printed by silk printing with a solid line larger than the outer shape of the connector SCK on the socket side. At the same time, the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side in a state where the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. Arranged so that the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower side of the component arrangement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side match. May be done. FIG. 246 is a modification of FIG. 245, which is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of the connector of the relay board and the arrangement line of the part product, and the wiring and the connector of the harness are normally connected to the connector of the relay board. It is a figure (b) which shows the state, and is the figure (c) which shows the state which the connector of a wiring or a harness is not normally connected to the connector of a relay board.

For example, on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), the connector SCK on the socket side into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the wiring and the harness KDCBL is inserted is arranged. The connector SCK on the socket side is formed in a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed with respect to the lower side surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a first distance dimension dw2 (for example, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. 245 (a) from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD having a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the KD, which is about twice the distance dimension arranged, and has at least 5 mm. It is located in.

The reason why the lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is arranged so as to be separated from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD by the first distance dimension dw2 is simply explained by the mounter. When mounting components or flowing the board into the solder tank, it is necessary to form a so-called "discard plate (range where electronic components cannot be mounted)", and the length is 3 mm to 5 mm inward from each end of the board. It is not possible to mount electronic components over the entire range (the range from each end of the board to its surroundings). When mounting electronic components without forming this waste plate (that is, when mounting electronic components in the range from each end of the board to its surroundings), a grip jig for fixing the board and prevention of warpage of the board It is necessary to use a jig, but even in this case, the area of the substrate sandwiched by the gripping jig or the substrate warpage prevention jig is about 5 mm inward from the edge of the substrate, and electronic components cannot be arranged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. 245 (a) has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD as the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. It is about twice the distance dimension and has at least 5 mm. As a result, when the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is arranged above the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, so that it is arranged on the inner side of the relay board KD. Will be done.

Around the connector SCK on the socket side, there is a rectangular component placement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side, at least the lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed, and the socket. The lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the side has a second distance dimension dw3 and is printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD by silk printing. The connector PLG on the plug side has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction is integrally formed. As described above, a rectangular component placement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side and at least an opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side are formed around the connector SCK on the socket side. The lower side surface SCKaa and the lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side have a second distance dimension dw3 and are printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD by silk printing. In the present embodiment, as the second distance dimension dw3, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. 245 (a) is arranged with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The distance dimension is the same (that is, the distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side).

When the plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is normally inserted to the back of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side, the entire upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug part PLGa is the connector on the socket side. The opening of the SCK is in contact with the lower side surface SCKaa of the SCKb and is in surface contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (that is, the main body of the connector PLG on the plug side). The lower side surface PLGbb) of the PLGb) and the lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are arranged so as to match. As a result, the workers on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer and the staff of the game hall who inspect the pachinko machine can use the plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side to the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the insert is normally inserted all the way. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

In the state where the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is not normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side and is inserted diagonally, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), the plug side. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the component placement line of the connector SCK on the socket side. The arrangement is such that the amount of protrusion dSP is provided from the lower side of the DSLK. As a result, the workers on the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine and the staff of the game hall who inspect the pachinko machine have the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side of the component placement line DSLK by the amount of protrusion dSP. By projecting from the lower side DSLKeg, it can be easily visually determined that the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is not normally inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side.

Incidentally, conventionally, various types of main control boards that control game progress and game profits, sub-control boards that control effects that are executed as the game progresses, image control boards that control the display of image display devices, and the like. A game machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). By the way, various game machines such as those described in this document. Some of the connectors provided on the board are plugged in and out, and some are plugged in and out of a connector whose one end is electrically connected to the wiring. For example, a worker of a game machine manufacturer should go to the connector. It was necessary to electrically confirm the connector in the connection work, and the confirmation work took time.

[Wiring groove]
In the present embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the left back surface of the game board 5 is paid out at a predetermined distance dimension as described above. The left portion 551e of the back plate in the payout base 551 of the base unit 550 is arranged. A ball guidance unit 570 attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e is arranged on the upper side of the left back surface of the game board 5, and is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e on the left back surface center side of the game board 5. The payout device 580 is arranged, and the upper full tank path unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e is arranged on the lower side of the left back surface of the game board 5.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the left back plate 551e are provided by the back plate left portion 551e arranged so as to be separated from the rear left back surface of the game board 5 by a predetermined distance. A space is formed. In this space, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 113, a plurality of protective cover bodies 1601 molded from a non-conductive transparent resin covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. The L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a to be formed is arranged along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601, and various wirings are locked by the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a.

The game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 capable of retaining the game ball B are attached. ..

That is, since the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 The formed space (hereinafter, referred to as “wiring routing space”) is in an environment that is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

Further, as various electric wires routed in the wiring routing space, for example, there are wiring for transmitting a control signal and wiring for supplying various power sources, and a plurality of various electric wires are mixed in the wiring routing space. The wiring that transmits the control signal is vulnerable to noise and has troubles due to electromagnetic noise (for example, regular data changes to other data and is garbled, or the signal is output even though it is not originally output. It is easy to be affected by electromagnetic noise because it becomes a signal, etc.), whereas the wiring that supplies various power supplies is resistant to noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise.

Then, among the various wirings routed in the wiring routing space, it is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise that can avoid troubles caused by electromagnetic noise for the wiring that transmits the control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. On the other hand, it is not necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise for wiring that supplies various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise.

Therefore, a configuration in which wiring grooves for routing various wirings are provided on the left back surface of the game board 5 (hereinafter, referred to as “wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 252. To do. FIG. 247 is a partial perspective view (a) of a game board for explaining a region to which a wiring groove is attached, and a view (b) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board. 248 is a continuation of FIG. 247, and is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board, and FIG. 249 is based on the first embodiment. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing various wiring states when the game board is viewed from behind with the wiring groove mounted on the back surface side of the game board. FIG. 250 shows the wiring groove according to the first embodiment of the game board. FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from the front while being mounted on the back side of the game board. FIG. 251 shows the wiring grooves according to the second embodiment mounted on the back side of the game board. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the game board is seen from the back in this state, and FIG. 252 shows the state which the wiring groove which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached to the back surface side of a game board. It is a perspective view which shows the state of various wirings when the game board is seen from the front. In addition, in FIG. 247 (b) and FIG. 248 (c), only the flexible flat cable is shown as the wiring routed to the wiring groove for the first and second electromagnetic noise countermeasures for the sake of readability of the drawings, and other various wirings are omitted. .. Further, in FIGS. 249 to 252, the game board is omitted for the sake of legibility of the drawings.

[Area to install wiring groove]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the left side of the back board is arranged so as to be separated from the rear left side of the back side of the game board 5 by a predetermined distance. A space is formed between the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e by the portion 551e. In this space, various wirings locked to the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on the protective cover body 1601 covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 are the protective cover body. It is arranged along the vertical direction of 1601. In the wiring groove according to the first to second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), a mounting boss hole is provided in the protective cover body 1601 instead of the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed in the protective cover body 1601. Two 1601d are formed on the upper side and two on the lower side.

[Wiring groove according to the first embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 247 (b), 249, and 250, the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is a conductive metal wiring groove 1605, and is a thin metal flat plate (plate thickness 2) long in the vertical direction. The left and right sides of (0.0 mm to 2.6 mm) are bent by press working to form a groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, and the left and right walls of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section are formed. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by being bent by press working on the upper side and the lower side, respectively. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed on the upper and lower sides of the left side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section by press working, so that the notch portion 1605c corresponds to the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b. Are formed, and L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section by press working to form the L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b. Notches 1605c are formed in the corresponding portions, respectively. A notch hole 1605bb is formed at the tip of the mounting surface 1605ba of the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b by press working.

The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (board ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. ). This is such that the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 does not electrically float with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5. That is, since the electrically floating metal may function as an antenna for picking up noise and become a noise source, the electrically floating metal is not made on various substrates provided in the game board 5. ..

The notch holes 1605bb formed in the mounting surface 1605ba of the four L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b in the metal wiring groove 1605 are arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601. After inserting the mounting boss holes 1601d into the notch holes 1605bb (the height dimension of the mounting boss hole 1601d (distance dimension in the depth direction) is the same as or smaller than the plate thickness dimension of the notch hole 1605bb). In a state where a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the notch hole 1605bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 A groove outer space is formed between the bottom outer surface 1605d and the bottom outer surface 1605d. Further, in a state where the game board 5 to which the metal wiring groove 1605 is fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 is the payout base unit 550 described above. By being sealed by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, a groove inner space is formed in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605.

In other words, the space between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 is provided by the metal wiring groove 1605 to the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605. A space outside the groove and a space inside the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 can be formed between the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. It has become. That is, the space outside the groove formed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space that does not face the source side of electromagnetic wave noise. On the other hand, in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605, the space inside the groove is a space facing the source side of electromagnetic wave noise. The height dimension of the space outside the groove (distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 is larger than the height dimension of the space inside the groove (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2.

Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but since the metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted from the groove inner space to the groove. The metal wiring groove 1605 can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion into the outer space.

As a result, troubles due to electromagnetic noise can be avoided by routing the wiring that transmits the control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, and the influence of electromagnetic noise can be prevented. Wiring that supplies various power sources that are difficult to receive can be routed to the groove inner space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 which is arranged in the center of the game area 5a and can display a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1606 from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above (FFC (abbreviation of Flexible Flat Cable. The flexible flat cable) transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown). Multiple flat conductors for this purpose are arranged in parallel, and these multiple flat conductors are coated with an insulator.)) The mountain folds and valley folds are repeated multiple times and bent to be three-dimensional. It is an important wiring for transmitting drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown), and is displayed on a sub-effect display device (not shown) when affected by electromagnetic noise. It is routed to the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in order to prevent troubles such as disturbance or an image such as a sandstorm. Further, various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above, a twist pair cable for transmitting control signals by the positive side wiring and the negative side wiring, and a peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500. The various wirings to which the detection signals from various sensors input to 1510 are transmitted are those in which the circumference of the conductor (single wire material or stranded wire material) is covered with an insulating material, and when affected by electromagnetic noise, the periphery is covered. The regular data output by the control board 1510 changes to other data and is garbled and received (input) at the output destination, or it is output as a signal that is being output even though it is a signal that was not originally output. Pulled into the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in order to prevent troubles such as receiving (inputting) earlier or accurately receiving (inputting) detection signals from various sensors to the peripheral control board 1510. It is turned. The twisted pair cable and various wirings routed in the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 are routed upward or downward along the groove outer space.

On the other hand, the wiring for supplying various power sources (including ground (GND)) such as + 24V, + 12V, and + 5V created by the power supply board 630 described above is a conductor (single wire material or stranded wire material). Since the circumference of the wire is covered with an insulating material and the voltage of various power sources (including the ground (GND)) is stabilized, the electromagnetic noise is compared with the control signal. Even if it is affected by the above, the fluctuation of the voltage due to this influence is extremely weak and is not easily affected by the electromagnetic noise, so that it can be routed to the groove inner space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are electrically connected from the above-mentioned main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) via the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 by various power supply lines. To the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity so that various wirings supplied to the game board 5 and supplying various power sources from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are not arranged close to the flexible flat cable 1606. The metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 through a notch 1605c formed on the right side wall and the lower side of the left side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605. It is drawn around in the grooved space, and is drawn upward along the grooved space, and is drawn from the upper end of the metal wiring groove 1605 to various substrates provided in the game board 5.

In this way, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 allows the space through which the wiring is passed (the space around which the wiring is routed), the space outside the groove through which the wiring that transmits the control signal susceptible to electromagnetic noise, and the electromagnetic noise Since it can be configured as a two-story building divided into a grooved space around which wirings that supply various power sources that are not easily affected are routed, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the game board 5 described above can be configured. It is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in the space (wiring routing space) formed on the left and right back surfaces.

Here, the flexible flat cable 1606 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signals) are arranged in parallel to a sub-effect display device (not shown), and the plurality of flat conductors are coated with an insulator. Compared to ordinary round electrical wiring, it has a thickness of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of ordinary round electrical wiring, and the liquid crystal of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is formed three-dimensionally by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times from the output board 1530 toward a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5, and has a predetermined width. On the upper end side, which is the left side of the strip-shaped main body 1606a long in the direction, electrodes 1606ba of a plurality of flat conductors have a predetermined length and are exposed on the back surface side of the main body 1606a, and are predetermined on the front surface side of the main body 1606a. While a reinforcing plate 1606ca is formed to reinforce the electrode 1606ba having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrodes 1606ba of a plurality of flat conductors having a thickness and being exposed, the lower end of the main body 1606a is formed. On the side, electrodes 1606bb of a plurality of flat conductors having a predetermined length are arranged in a bare manner on the back surface side of the main body 1606a, and a plurality of flat molds having a predetermined thickness and being exposed on the front surface side of the main body 1606a. A reinforcing plate 1606 bb for reinforcing the electrode 1606 bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrode 1606 bb of the conductor is formed.

The electrodes 1606ba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body 1606a are electrically connected to the connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. The electrodes 1606bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 1606a cover the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the lid.

A capacitor called a decap, such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown), is located between the power supply line and the substrate ground (GND) in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Is implemented, and by lowering the power supply impedance, the noise resistance to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. Further, a power supply line and a substrate ground (GND) in a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) covering the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Capacitors called decaps (not shown) such as decoupling capacitors and power supply bypass capacitors (not shown) are mounted between them, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is generated. The sex is improving.

The flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. It is drawn to the outer groove space formed by the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 passing between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the area other than the display area, and is guided downward along the outer groove space. It is routed into the board holder 1200 which is directly attached to the game board 5 and is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover covering the upper back side of the liquid crystal panel in the sub-effect display device (not shown). Will be done.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to the connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display of the game board 5. It is routed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the device 1600 except for the display area and the groove outer space formed by the conductive metal wiring groove 1605. Further, as described above, in the effect display device 1600, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover. As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shield member capable of preventing electromagnetic noise entering toward the flexible flat cable 1606 in the passing area.

[Modification example]
The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground of various substrates (board ground (GND)) provided in the game board 5. (GND), but instead of or in addition to this, the bottom of the groove portion 1605a of the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is pressed by an L-shaped connecting piece toward the protective cover body 1601. By providing the protective cover body 1601 with a connection piece opening, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece can be passed through the connection piece opening provided in the protective cover body 1601 in the protective cover body 1601. It may be in a state of being electrically connected in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, or a connection provided in the protective cover body 1601 by attaching a conductive elastic member to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece. Through the one-sided opening, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the surface of the conductive elastic member (the surface opposite to the surface attached to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece) in the protective cover body 1601 come into contact with each other. The connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece may be electrically connected (in other words, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece is made of metal of the effect display device 1600 in the protection cover body 1601 through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601. It may be in a state of being electrically contacted with the back cover via a conductive elastic member). The conductive elastic member is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity), and is attached to a conductive coating portion, a foam having a rectangular shape as a core material coated by the conductive coating portion, and a conductive coating portion. It is composed of a conductive adhesive tape to be used. Examples of the covering portion include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam include a heat-resistant polyurethane foam. As the conductive adhesive tape, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion is attached (adhered) to the connecting surface of the L-shaped connecting piece.

Further, the outside of the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is the wiring for transmitting the control signal output from the main control board 1310 described above to the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner when the game board 5 is viewed from the front. It may be routed to the space and routed upward along the space outside the groove. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the wiring to the function display unit 1400.

Further, the metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground (board ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. Although it is (GND), it functions as an antenna for picking up noise even when the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5, and is a noise source. If there is no risk of this, or if the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is negligibly small, the metal wiring groove 1605 is not electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown). , It may be in an electrically floating state.

Further, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate long in the vertical direction, but the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 having the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605. It may be configured as'. In this case, the entire front and back surfaces of the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605'are subjected to conductive plating (for example, noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating), and the conductive plated portion. Is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (board ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. Even with this configuration, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605'with conductive plating has the same effect as the above-mentioned conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, electromagnetic noise. It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion from the space inside the groove toward the space outside the groove.) Even if the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605'with conductive plating is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5, it functions as an antenna for picking up noise. If there is no risk of becoming a noise source, or if the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is negligibly small, electrically connect the conductive plating to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown). Instead, it may be in an electrically floating state.

Further, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate long in the vertical direction, but the conductive resin wiring groove 1605'having the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605'. It may be configured as'. Even with this configuration, the conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ″ has the same effect as the above-mentioned conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, electromagnetic noise is transmitted from the groove inner space to the groove outer space). It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion toward the vehicle.)

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors May be arranged so that the flat conductor that transmits the control signal and the flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. In this way, it is possible to improve the noise immunity against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for a plurality of flat conductors that transmit control signals.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but the control signal which is particularly vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise (that is, easily affected by the electromagnetic noise) is transmitted. The flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as "flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise") is adjacent to the flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise, so that it is adjacent to the substrate ground (GND) and electricity. The flat conductors that are connected to each other are arranged so that the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise are sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the flat conductor which is weak to the influence of electromagnetic noise.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but as these a plurality of flat conductors, in addition to the flat conductor for transmitting the control signal, In the case of being configured to include a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. In this case, as this power supply, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermista that suppresses the current, or the resistance is small below the rated current and cuts off. An overcurrent protection circuit that shuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. In this polyswitch, the resistance value rapidly increases from a specific temperature in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature. The main body generates heat, and this heat lowers the conductivity to cut off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Priority is given to what is supplied. It is preferable to do so. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a thickness of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Because it is thin, it is possible to prevent a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1606 by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, and to ensure safety and damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Wiring groove according to the second embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 248 (c), 251 and 252, the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 and has a U-shaped cross section long in the vertical direction. The groove portion 1608a is formed, and the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section are integrally molded with mounting pieces 1608b protruding outward on the upper side and the lower side. The mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is formed to be flush with the bottom outer surface 1608c of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and a mounting hole 1608bb is formed at the tip of the mounting piece 1608b. Has been done. Further, a notch for wiring insertion 1608d is formed in a substantially central portion of the left side wall of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the opening side. The resin wiring groove 1608 may be molded from a transparent non-conductive resin, or may be molded from a colored non-conductive resin such as black. The thickness of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 2.0 mm to 2.6 mm, and the height of the mounting piece 1608b of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 4.0 mm to 5.0 mm. is there.

The mounting holes 1608bb formed on the mounting surface 1608ba of the four mounting pieces 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 are arranged in the mounting holes 1608bb so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601. After inserting the mounting boss holes 1601d, the height dimension of the mounting boss hole 1601d (distance dimension in the depth direction) is smaller than the height dimension of the mounting piece 1608b (distance dimension in the depth direction). ), In a state where a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the mounting hole 1608bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608. The bottom outer surface 1608c is in contact with the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is in contact with each other. Further, in a state where the game board 5 to which the resin wiring groove 1608 is fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 is the payout base unit 550 described above. By being sealed by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, an in-groove space is formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608.

The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 to the opening side surface of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove portion 1608a, and the L-shape in the metal wiring groove 1605. The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1605ba of the mounting piece 1605b to the opening side surface of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove portion 1608a is the same dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction). It has the same height. Further, the height (distance dimension in the depth direction) H3 of the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 is the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 and the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. , Is added.

Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, and the resin wiring groove 1608 has non-conductive property. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the resin wiring groove 1608. The resin wiring groove 1608 cannot function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion into the groove inner space formed by the above.

For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 which is arranged in the center of the game area 5a and can display a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1609 (FFC (abbreviation for Flexible Flat Cable. Flexible flat cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown). Multiple flat conductors for this purpose are arranged in parallel, and these multiple flat conductors are coated with an insulator.)) The mountain folds and valley folds are repeated multiple times and bent to be three-dimensional. It has the same shape as the flexible flat cable 1606 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above, and it is important to transmit drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown). If the wiring is affected by electromagnetic noise, the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown) may be distorted or the image may look like a sandstorm.

Therefore, of the flat both sides of the flexible flat cable 1609, a shielded wire 1610 woven into a mesh is provided on the entire surface of the flexible flat cable 1609, and a special structure is adopted in which the shielded wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin. The shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground of the board to which the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected (board ground (GND)), and the ground of the board to which the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected (board). It is electrically connected to the ground (GND)).

When the flexible flat cable 1609 is bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times to be formed three-dimensionally, the wiring insertion notch formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. It is drawn to the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 through the portion 1608d, and extends from the lower end side to the groove inner space by a predetermined distance dimension from the portion bent toward the lower end side of the groove inner space. As for the portion extending to the portion, the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided is formed so as to face the opening side of the groove portion 1608a. That is, of the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided on the flexible flat cable 1609. The space formed between them (that is, the small space in which the flexible flat cable 1609 is arranged) is a space that does not face the source side of the electromagnetic noise, whereas the shield wire 1610 is attached to the flexible flat cable 1609. The space formed from the surface provided with the groove to the opening side of the groove portion 1608a is a space facing the source side of the electromagnetic noise.

Since the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but the flexible flat cable 1609 has a direction in which electromagnetic wave noise invades the surface where the shielded wire 1610 is provided. It is formed so as to face the.

Further, the wiring for supplying various power sources (including ground (GND)) such as + 24V, + 12V, and + 5V created by the power supply board 630 described above is provided around the conductor (single wire material or stranded wire material). Since it is covered with an insulating material and the voltage of various power sources (which may include ground (GND)) is stabilized, it is more affected by electromagnetic noise than the control signal. Even if it is received, the fluctuation of the voltage due to this influence is extremely weak and is not easily affected by the electromagnetic noise, so that it can be routed to the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

Since the flexible flat cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources coexist in the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 not provided with the shield wire 1610 is provided. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 is directed toward the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the groove portion having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. Turn to the opening side of 1608a. Then, various power sources from the power supply board 630 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610.

Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are electrically connected from the above-mentioned main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) via the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 by various power supply lines. Various wirings supplied to the game board 5 and supplying various power sources from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610. The space inside the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 from below the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608 while being routed toward the resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity. It is routed upward along the space in the groove, and is routed from the upper end of the resin wiring groove 1608 to various substrates provided in the game board 5.

In this way, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 shields the space through which the wiring passes (the space around which the wiring is routed) to the flexible flat cable 1609, which is the wiring that transmits control signals that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the wire 1610 and not provided with the shield wire 1610 is directed to the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the shield wire 1610 is provided. A space formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 described above by directing the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 toward the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. It is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in the (wiring routing space).

Further, by arranging various power supplies from the power supply board 630 along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610, the flexible flat is a wiring that transmits a control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise can coexist and be arranged in the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

The non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment, is different from the conductive metal wiring groove 1605, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment described above. Various wiring for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, a twist pair cable for transmitting the control signal by the positive side wiring and the negative side wiring, and input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The various wirings to which the detection signals from the various sensors are transmitted cannot be routed by using the resin wiring groove 1608 itself.

Here, the flexible flat cable 1609 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signals) are arranged in parallel to a sub-effect display device (not shown), and these plurality of flat conductors are coated with an insulator. Compared to ordinary round electrical wiring, it has a thickness of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of ordinary round electrical wiring, and is flexible as described above. Of the flat both sides of the flat cable 1609, a shield wire 1610 woven into a mesh is provided on the entire surface of the flat cable 1609, and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin so as to have a special structure. The flexible flat cable 1609 is three-dimensionally bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 toward a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba are exposed on the back side of the main body 1609a on the upper end side, which is the left side of the strip-shaped main body 1609a having a predetermined width and long in the left-right direction, having a predetermined length. A reinforcing plate 1609ca is formed on the surface side of the main body 1609a to reinforce the electrode 1609ba having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrodes 1609ba of a plurality of flat conductors exposed. On the other hand, on the lower end side of the main body 1609a, electrodes 1609bb of a plurality of flat conductors have a predetermined length on the back surface side of the main body 1609a and are exposed and arranged on the front surface side of the main body 1609a. A reinforcing plate 1609 bc is formed to reinforce the electrode 1609 bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrodes 1609 bb of a plurality of flat conductors having a thickness and being exposed.

The electrodes 1609ba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above, and are not shown. While the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the connector, the electrodes of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a. The 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. The shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground of the control board (board ground (GND)) via the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown).

A capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for a power supply (not shown) is located between the power supply line and the substrate ground (GND) on the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. Is implemented, and by lowering the power supply impedance, the noise resistance to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. Further, a power supply line and a substrate ground (GND) in a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) covering the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. Capacitors called decaps (not shown) such as decoupling capacitors and power supply bypass capacitors (not shown) are mounted between them, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is generated. The sex is improving.

The flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. Through a notch for wiring insertion 1608d formed in a groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering except for the display area. The back surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub-effect display device (not shown) that is drawn into the groove inner space, guided downward along the groove inner space, and is drawn into the substrate holder 1200 that is directly attached to the back surface of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper side.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to the connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the effect display of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the game board 5. A notch for wiring insertion formed in a groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the device 1600 except for the display area. It can be routed to the groove inner space formed in the resin wiring groove 1608 via the 1608d. Further, as described above, in the effect display device 1600, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover. As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic noise entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the passing area.

[Modification example]
The flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610 woven into a net on one surface is formed by bending a strip-shaped main body 1606a having a predetermined width in the left-right direction by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times. However, it is also possible to provide a shielded wire 1610 in which a strip-shaped main body 1606a is woven into a mesh on one surface of a short flexible flat cable 1609'which has been folded once in a mountain fold or a valley fold. For example, when two boards are arranged in an environment affected by electromagnetic noise, a short flexible flat cable 1609'provided with a shielded wire 1610 in which the two boards are woven into one facet in a mesh pattern is used. By electrically connecting, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. In the shielded wire 1610, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 1609'is electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of one of the two boards, and the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 1609' is electrically connected. It is electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of the other board of the two boards.

Further, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 passes between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to function as a shield member capable of preventing electromagnetic noise entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the region. Further, in this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610 is formed so as to face the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, by combining mountain folds and valley folds of the flexible flat cable 1609 before and after this area, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 not provided with the shielded wire 1610 in this area is combined with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. It may be formed so as to face each other, and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610 may be formed so as to face the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. By doing so, in the area passing between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600, the shield wire 1610 is formed. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 that is not provided can be prevented from electromagnetic noise that invades toward the flexible flat cable 1609 by a shield called a metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and a shield wire 1610 is provided. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 can be shielded with a shield wire 1610 to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the flexible flat cable 1609.

Further, although the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 are configured separately, the protective cover body 1601 If it is made of a non-conductive resin, the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 may be integrally molded.

Further, the electrodes 1609ba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609 are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. A plurality of shielded wires 1610 are electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a connector (not shown), and are formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609. The flat conductor electrode 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. At the same time, the shield wire 1610 was electrically connected to the ground of the control board (board ground (GND)) via the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown). Therefore, for example, among the electrodes 1609ba of a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel, the flat conductors arranged on both ends may be electrically connected to the shielded wire 1610. Even with this configuration, the shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The control board can be connected to the control board via the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It can be electrically connected to a ground (board ground (GND)).

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal were arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. May be arranged so that the flat conductor that transmits the control signal and the flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. In this way, it is possible to improve the noise immunity against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for a plurality of flat conductors that transmit control signals.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but the control signal which is particularly vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise (that is, easily affected by the electromagnetic noise) is transmitted. The flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as "flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise") is adjacent to the flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise, so that it is adjacent to the substrate ground (GND) and electricity. The flat conductors that are connected to each other are arranged so that the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise are sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the flat conductor which is weak to the influence of electromagnetic noise.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but as these plurality of flat conductors, in addition to the flat conductor for transmitting the control signal, In the case of being configured to include a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. In this case, as this power supply, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermista that suppresses the current, or the resistance is small below the rated current and cuts off. An overcurrent protection circuit that shuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. In this polyswitch, the resistance value rapidly increases from a specific temperature in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature. The main body generates heat, and this heat lowers the conductivity to cut off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and recovers.) It is preferable to do so. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a thickness of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Because it is thin, it is possible to prevent short-circuiting of the flexible flat cable 1609 by an overcurrent protection circuit or overcurrent protection circuit when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, and to ensure safety and damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Other decorative devices]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the back-up effect unit 3400 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5. Here, a case where a light emitting effect unit 5000 is provided in place of the back-up effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 259. FIG. 253 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit viewed from the front, FIG. 254 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit viewed from the back, and FIG. 255 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 256 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind, FIG. 257 is a front view showing the arrangement relationship between the LED bare chip and the light guide plate, and FIG. 258 is arranged on the surface of the light guide plate. FIG. 259 is a front view showing the spread sheet, and FIG. 259 is a view (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the LED substrate, and is an enlarged view of the Z portion shown in (a). It is a diagram (b) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is normally inserted into the connector of the LED board, and is an enlarged view of the Z portion shown in (a), which is an enlarged view of the LED board of the flexible flat cable. It is a figure (c) which shows the abnormal state which the insertion into a connector is insufficient. In FIGS. 253 to 256 and 259, only the lower end side of the flexible flat cable is shown and other parts are omitted for the sake of readability of the drawings.

[Light emission production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 253 to 258, the light emitting effect unit 5000 includes a light emitting effect main body 5010 having a circular shape, a main body mounting portion 5020 having a T shape for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010, and the like. Light emission effect along the back surface side of the main body mounting portion 5020 Light emission effect The control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 is emitted in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above while being guided into the main body 5010. Flexible flat cable 5030 (an abbreviation for FFC (Flexible Flat Cable)) to be transmitted to the main body 5010. A flexible flat cable is formed by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times and is formed three-dimensionally. The conductor is coated with an insulator.)) And. Here, first, the light emitting effect main body 5010 will be described, and the method of assembling the main body mounting portion 5020, the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting effect unit 5000 will be described in order.

[Light emission effect body]
The light emitting effect main body 5010 is processed from a decorative body 5040 molded from a circular transparent resin and a thin circular transparent resin plate housed inside the decorative body 5040 and having a notch in a part on the upper side. The diffusion sheet 5050 to be molded and the guide molded with a circular resin having a circular shape and being housed inside the decorative body 5040 in a state of being arranged on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 and having a notch in a part on the upper side. The light plate 5060, the LED substrate 5070 having a circular shape that is housed inside the decorative body 5040 in a state of being arranged on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060 and having a notch in a part on the upper side, and the rear opening of the decorative body 5040. It is provided with a lid 5080 molded from a transparent resin having a circular shape having a notch on the upper side while closing the lid.

[Decorative body]
At the surface 5040x center of the decorative body 5040 molded from the circular transparent resin, a convex portion 5040a that matches the outer shape of the character protrudes forward, and the character is printed on the entire surface of the convex portion 5040a. There is. Of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040, the outer peripheral portion of the convex portion 5040a excluding the entire surface on which the character of the convex portion 5040a is printed and the entire surface 5040x area of the decorative body 5040 excluding the convex portion 5040a are the world view of the character. A background pattern (not shown) is printed with a design that shows. Although the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is printed with a character or a background pattern, the light emitting mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is emitted from the front of the light emitting effect unit 5000 (that is, the pachinko machine 1) in response to the light emission by the LED substrate 5070. It can be easily visually recognized (by the player sitting in front of the slingshot), and the change in the light emitting mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 can be transmitted to the player.

On the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040, a member accommodating recess 5040b is formed which has a circular shape having a notch in a part of the upper surface and accommodates the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070, leaving the upper side thereof. ing. A reverse arrangement preventing piece for preventing the front and back surfaces of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 from being inverted and accommodated on the upper left side of the member accommodating recess 5040b when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind. The 5040c is formed so as to project from the inner surface of the bottom of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. Further, when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind, the positions of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are restricted on the upper left, right, and lower sides of the member accommodating recess 5040b, and a lid that closes the member accommodating recess 5040b. The mounting boss holes 5040d for fixing the 5080 to the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 project from the inner surface of the bottom of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. (A total of three mounting boss holes 5040d). Further, on the upper left and right sides of the decorative body 5040 on the back surface 5040y side when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind, mounting boss holes 5040e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided in a second distance dimension from the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 toward the rear. It has a length of 2 and is formed so as to protrude (a total of 2 mounting boss holes 5040e).

[LED board]
In the LED substrate 5070 having a circular shape having a notch in the upper part, the notch 5070a is formed at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decoration 5040, and the decoration 5040 is formed. Through holes 5070b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recesses 5040b.

A plurality of LED bare chips are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. This LED bare chip (also referred to as an "LED element") is enclosed in a surface mount type, chip-on-board type, bullet type, or other package, and is an extremely small electronic component. In this embodiment, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is enclosed is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. We adopted a configuration that is directly mounted on the LED.

Examples of the method of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrode of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 include wire bonding, flip chip bonding, and the like. In this embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, the electrode of the LED bare chip and the predetermined electrode of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 are not electrically connected by using a wire as in wire bonding, but are bumped to the electrode of the LED bare chip. A protrusion called a protrusion is formed and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. This connection is reinforced with solder, resin, or the like.

On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, five LED rows in which LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a predetermined number of rows separated by a predetermined distance dimension are provided in the vertical direction, and the first row from the bottom 5070c1. Six LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction on the fifth row 5070c5 from the bottom, and LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction on the second row 5070c2 from the bottom and the fourth row 5070c4 from the bottom. In the third row 5070c3 from the bottom, eight LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction.

The LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is arranged on the center line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. The fourth stage, which passes through the midpoint between the center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070, is on the intermediate line parallel to the center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070, and is one step above the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. The LED row of 5070c4 is arranged. Then, on an intermediate line parallel to the center line and the straight line parallel to the center line and passing through the lowest point of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070, and passing through the midpoint of the center line and the straight line described above. The LED row of the second stage 5070c2, which is one lower than the LED row of the third stage 5070c3, is arranged in. One of the LED rows of the fourth stage 5070c4 on the vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. The second LED bare chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bare chip 5075 in the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 is arranged, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 and the fourth stage of the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 are arranged. The seven LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of 5070c4 are arranged so as not to line up in a row in the vertical direction, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 and the LED row 7 of the second stage 5070c2. The two LED bare chips 5075 are arranged so as not to be lined up in a row in the vertical direction. The seven LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 and the seven LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction.

On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5, which is on the upper side of the LED board 5070 and is one above the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 below the two through holes 5070b. Is arranged, and the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 which is one lower than the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 is arranged above one through hole 5070b on the lowest point side of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070. Has been done. A straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 and one from the left side of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. The vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the second LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 coincides, and the first LED from the left side of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 is on this straight line. The bare chip 5075 is arranged, and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 is arranged, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 and the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c3 are arranged. The six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the above are arranged so as not to line up in a row in the vertical direction, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 and the six LED rows of the first stage 5070c1. The LED bare chips 5075 are arranged so as not to line up in a row in the vertical direction. On the straight line described above, the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged. Furthermore, since the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is also arranged, the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 Of these, the 6 LED bare chips 5075 of the 2nd to 7th and the 6 LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the 1st stage 5070c1 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, a connector 5070d for transmitting a control signal for controlling a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is mounted. The connector 5070d is electrically connected by inserting the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030. The upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into a connector (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720 and electrically connected. The control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 is transmitted to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting mode of the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is controlled. Will be done.

The front surface (mounting surface) 5070x and the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 are coated with a green resist liquid except for various lands and through holes. The surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is further printed by silk printing on the entire surface except for various lands and through holes. That is, the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white, while the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is green, and the colors of the front surface and the back surface are different even though they are the same substrate. It's different. The reason why the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is white is that the light emitted by the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is refracted by other members. Surface (mounting surface) of LED substrate 5070 The surface (mounting surface) of LED substrate 5070 functions as a reflective sheet that can efficiently rereflect the returned light forward when returning toward 5070x. This is to give the 5070x.

[Modification example]
The LED board 5070 drives a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 by inputting a control signal from the effect drive board 1720 via the flexible flat cable 5030. Was there. That is, in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect drive board 1720 is controlled from electronic components for LED control (for example, ICs such as an LED driver and a gradation control driver) mounted on the peripheral control unit 1500. The signal was output to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030. The LED control electronic component mounted on the effect drive board 1720 may be mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. Since the connector 5070d is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, any electronic component for LED control having a height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) comparable to the height of the connector 5070d. Even if the electronic component for LED control is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, it can be used as it is without changing the dimensions of the decorative body 5040 and the lid 5080. This can contribute to the miniaturization of the effect drive substrate 1720. Further, with this configuration, the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is output to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 to drive the LED bare chip 5075. You can also.

Further, although flip-chip bonding is adopted as a method of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding may be adopted instead of flip-chip bonding. Good.

[Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 5060 molded from a transparent resin having a circular shape having a notch on the upper part has a notch 5060a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, through holes 5060b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recesses 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, a notch is provided in a part on the upper side so as to cover the LED bare chip 5075 at a position corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. It has a cylindrical shape (hereinafter referred to as "semi-cylindrical shape"), and the axis of this semi-cylindrical shape is tilted slightly downward with respect to the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, so that the curved surface of the semi-cylindrical shape is tilted diagonally. The incident recesses 5060c are formed respectively. The bottom of the incident recess 5060c does not penetrate the surface 5070x of the light guide plate 5060 and remains inside the light guide plate 5060. When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED bare chip 5075 is arranged on the axis of the semi-cylinder. At the same time, the LED bare chip 5075 is enclosed in the incident recess 5060c.

The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 has a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape formed from the opening side of the incident recess 5060c in a section from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes to the position of concentric circles separated by a predetermined distance dimension. A notch is formed in a part of the upper side of the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape, and the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape and the opening side of the incident recess 5060c are similar.

When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 exceeds the section formed by the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder is passed, a prism pattern having a substantially triangular cross section is formed concentrically. A prism portion 5060e is formed in which the distance between the prism patterns having a substantially triangular cross section increases as the distance from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes increases. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the prism portion 5060e is the distance dimension of a straight line connecting the center points of adjacent LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (hereinafter, "block reference distance in the left-right direction"). It may be described as "dimensions"). On the other hand, the vertical distance dimension of the prism portion 5060e is one downward from the step of the LED bare chip 5075 enclosed in the incident recess 5060c from the notch formed in the upper part of the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape. It is the distance dimension to the prism pattern of the final stage passing through the center point of the nearest LED bare chip arranged in the stage (hereinafter, may be described as "block reference distance dimension in the vertical direction").

On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, an incident recess 5060c, a flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape, and a prism portion 5060e are located at positions corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. Each single prism block 5060f composed of 5060f is formed as a prism surface. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the single prism block 5060f is the block reference distance dimension in the left-right direction, and the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the single prism block 5060f is the block reference distance dimension in the vertical direction. Of the multiple LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x, the one closest to the left and right outer peripheral portions of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (LED row of the first stage 5070c1 to the LED of the fifth stage 5070c5). The left side of the LED bare chip 5075, the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the row, the LED bare chip 5075, the sixth LED bare chip 5075 from the left side, and the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 and the fourth stage 5070c4 among the LED rows of the first stage 5070c1 and 5 cross sections. 7th LED Bare Chip 5075, 8th LED Bare Chip 5075 from the left side of the 3rd stage LED row), the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the single prism block 5060f does not become the block reference distance dimension in the left-right direction. The final stage prism pattern is formed so as to extend to the outer peripheral end of the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060.

On the other hand, on the front surface 5060x side of the light guide plate 5060, a plurality of single prism blocks 5060f are formed on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, whereas a flat surface is formed without any processing. ing.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is enclosed is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the surface of the LED substrate 5070. (Mounting surface) A configuration that is directly mounted on the 5070x was adopted. As a result, as the plate thickness of the light guide plate, surface mount type, chip-on-board type, bullet type, etc. are compared with the plate thickness of the light guide plate when the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. It can be made smaller by the depth distance dimension in the package of the above, and the size of the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 is secured larger and contributes to the three-dimensional modeling of the light emitting effect main body 5010. be able to. Since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if the impact caused by the player hitting the door frame 3 or the like is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the light emitting effect unit 5000 provided in the game board 5 is struck. It is unlikely that the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 will be damaged by the impact caused by the impact.

[Modification example]
In this embodiment, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is enclosed is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the LED substrate 5070. ) Although the configuration is directly mounted on the 5070x, if the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 does not interfere with the three-dimensional modeling of the light emitting effect main body 5010, the side type is used instead of the LED bare chip. The LED package having the surface mount type of the above may be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. In this case, the dimensional distance of the single prism block 5060f composed of the incident recess 5060c, the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape, and the prism portion 5060e becomes large, and the thickness of the light guide plate also becomes large. The light emitting surface of the LED package having the side type surface mount type does not face the diffusion sheet 5050, but faces downward of the incident recess 5060c, and the light emitted from this light emitting surface passes from the prism portion 5060e via the prism portion 5060e. Proceed to the front diffusion sheet 5050.

[Diffusion sheet]
The diffusion sheet 5050 formed by processing from a thin-walled circular transparent resin plate having a notch on the upper side is notched at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. Along with forming the portion 5050a, through holes 5050b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recesses 5040b of the decorative body 5040. The back surface of the diffusion sheet 5050 is coated with a white paint and processed into a satin finish having fine irregularities, and light from a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. Is incident through the light guide plate, the incident light can be diffused.

The back surface 5050y of the diffusion sheet 5050 is housed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the surface surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 molded from a transparent resin. The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. As described above, on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, an incident recess is provided so as to cover the LED bare chip 5075 at a position corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. 5060c are formed respectively.

As described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, five LED rows in which LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a predetermined number of rows at a predetermined distance dimension are provided in five stages in the vertical direction. The LED bare chip 5075 of the LED row of the stage is enclosed in the incident recess 5060c formed on the back surface 5060y side of the corresponding light guide plate 5060. When the light emitting surface of the LED bare chip 5075 emits light, the space of the incident recess 5060c is brightly illuminated, so that the LED of each stage of the LED row enclosed in each incident recess 5060c is compared with the region where the incident recess 5060c is not formed. The light from the bare chip 5075 passes through the light guide plate 5060 molded of a transparent resin, exits from the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060, and the brightness of the light emitted from the space of each incident recess 5060c is increased. Then, the region where the space of each incident recess 5060c exists is arranged like a point light source, and it is difficult to uniformly illuminate the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060.

Therefore, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 coated with a white paint and having a long band shape in the left-right direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of each stage. At the same time, a diffusion region 5050d is formed in which the white paint is sprayed in dots on the regions other than these five regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 to diffuse the light. The portion coated with this white paint becomes an opaque region in which the rear or front cannot be visually recognized via the diffusion sheet 5050. No paint is applied to the surface 5050x side of the diffusion sheet 5050.

Specifically, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, a white band region 5050c1 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 of the LED substrate 5070, and the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 of the LED substrate 5070. A white band region 5050c2 is formed at a position corresponding to, and a white band region 5050c3 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 of the LED substrate 5070, which corresponds to the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 of the LED substrate 5070. A white band region 5050c4 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED substrate 5070, and a white band region 5050c5 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row.

The vertical distance dimensions of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 have the same distance dimensions. For example, the vertical distance dimensions of the white band region 5050c1 are located at positions corresponding to the LED rows of the first stage 5070c1. Each of them has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape constituting the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 described above. Further, among the horizontal distance dimensions of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the horizontal distance dimensions of the white band regions 5050c1 and 5050c5 have the same distance dimensions, for example, the horizontal direction of the white band region 5050c1. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape constituting the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 described above, which is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. doing. Further, among the horizontal distance dimensions of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the horizontal distance dimensions of the white band regions 5050c2 and 5050c4 have the same distance dimensions, for example, the horizontal direction of the white band region 5050c2. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape constituting the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 described above, which is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. doing. Further, among the horizontal distance dimensions of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the horizontal distance dimensions of the white band region 5050c3 are formed at positions corresponding to the LED rows of the third stage 5070c3, respectively, as described above. It has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape constituting the single prism block 5060f.

In this way, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long band shape in the left-right direction coated with the white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of each stage. By doing so, the light emitted from each incident recess 5060c can be refracted in the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed to the light guide plate 5060, so that the region where the space exists in each incident recess 5060c is like a point light source. It is possible to soften the state of light emission.

Further, since the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white as described above, it is refracted in the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and passed through the light guide plate 5060 to pass through the surface of the LED substrate 5070. (Mounting surface) The light returned toward 5070x can be efficiently refracted forward again.

Further, the light emitted from the prism portion 5060e constituting the single prism block 5060f is diffused by the diffusion region 5050d. That is, the light emitted from each incident recess 5060c is refracted in the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 to soften the state in which the region where the space of each incident recess 5060c exists is emitted like a point light source toward the light guide plate 5060. At the same time, the light returned toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the white LED substrate 5070 and efficiently emitted forward again, and the emitted light is a prism. Since the light can be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d through the portion 5060e, it can contribute to a mode in which the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 is uniformly illuminated. As a result, it is possible to contribute to uniformly illuminate the surface (surface 5060x) of the light guide plate 5060 facing the diffusion sheet 5050, so that it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort due to the light emission effect of the decorative body 5040. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the light emission effect.

[Lid]
The lid 5080 molded from a transparent resin having a circular shape having a notch on the upper part has a notch 5080a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, through holes 5080b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recesses 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

Further, the lid 5080 is formed in a state where a plurality of ventilation elongated holes 5080c long in the left-right direction are aligned vertically and horizontally, and the flexible flat cable 5030 is located at a position corresponding to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. A wiring opening 5080d for passing through is formed.

Further, on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y side of the lid body 5080 when the lid body 5080 is viewed from behind, mounting boss holes 5080e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided at a third distance from the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 toward the rear. It has a length of 2 and is formed so as to protrude (a total of 2 mounting boss holes 5080e). The outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are the two mounting bosses formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 described above. It has the same outer diameter as the hole 5040e.

[Main body mounting part]
The body mounting portion 5020 having a T-shape for mounting the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010 has a T-shaped groove portion in which side walls are formed rearward except for the upper left and right ends of the T-shaped flat plate. Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b having a symmetrical shape that reinforce the base body 5020a and the base body 5020a along the side walls excluding the upper side and the lower side of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. It includes a 5020b and a metal plate 5020c that reinforces the base body 5020a along the upper side wall of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, positions corresponding to two mounting boss holes 5040e formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 and the light emitting effect main body 5010 Through holes 5020d are formed at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. Further, when the base body 5020a is viewed from the rear, a plurality of metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and a plurality of metal plates 5020c are fixed to the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. The mounting boss holes 5020e of the above are formed so as to project rearward from the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a with a length of a fourth distance dimension (a total of 11 mounting bosses). Hole 5020e). The outer diameters of the mounting boss holes 5020e are the outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 (upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010). It is about two times smaller than the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed in.

The two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b attached to the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a have two formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. Through holes 5020ba are formed at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 5040e and at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. At the same time, through holes 5020bb are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Further, the metal plate 5020c attached to the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a penetrates at a position corresponding to a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove. Holes 5020ca are formed respectively.

Further, when the base body 5020a is viewed from the rear, a flexible flat cable 5030 is attached to the bottom portion of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a and the lower side wall of the base body 5020a connected to the bottom portion. A wiring opening 5020f for passing through is formed. Although not shown, a plurality of through holes for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010 are formed at the bottom of the T-shaped groove portion formed in the base body 5020a.

Further, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and the grounds of various substrates provided in the game board 5 are provided. It is the same ground (GND) as (board ground (GND)).

[Flexible flat cable]
In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged in parallel, and these A plurality of flat conductors are coated with an insulator, and compared to a normal round electric wiring, the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring is about one-third to one-fifth. Although not shown, the main body mounting portion 5020 is formed by being bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times from the effect drive substrate 1720 to the light emission effect main body 5010. Along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the above, pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c, and fold the mountain into the light emitting effect main body 5010. It is formed three-dimensionally by being bent by repeating valley folds a plurality of times, and is formed on the back surface side of the main body 5030a, although not shown on the upper end side of the strip-shaped main body 5030a having a predetermined width and long in the left-right direction. The electrodes of the mold conductor are arranged in a bare manner with a predetermined length, and the electrodes having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 5030a and having a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length of the electrodes of the plurality of bare flat conductors. On the lower end side of the main body 5030a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb have a predetermined length and are exposed on the back side of the main body 5030a, while a reinforcing plate for reinforcing the main body 5030a is formed. A reinforcing plate 5030 bb is formed on the surface side of the main body 5030a to reinforce the electrode 5030 bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrodes 5030 bb of a plurality of flat conductors having a predetermined thickness and being exposed. ..

The electrodes of a plurality of flat conductors (not shown) formed on the upper end side of the main body 5030a are electrically connected to the connectors (not shown) provided on the effect drive substrate 1720, whereas they are formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a. The electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors to be formed are electrically connected to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 of the light emitting effect main body 5010.

A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for a power supply (not shown) is connected between the power supply line and the substrate ground (GND) in the effect drive board 1720 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected. Is implemented, and by lowering the power supply impedance, the noise resistance to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. Further, between the power supply line and the substrate ground (GND) in the LED substrate 5070 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected, a decoupling capacitor (not shown), a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown), etc. A capacitor called a decap is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, the noise resistance to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 is three-dimensionally bent and routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, so that the flexible flat cable 5030 is placed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. There is also a part where the cable 5030 is routed. As described above, the game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. .. Therefore, when the game ball B flows down the game area 5a of the game board 5, the back surface of the game panel 1100 and its vicinity are in an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. ing. The flexible flat cable 5030 that transmits the control signal to the light emitting effect main body 5010 is vulnerable to noise and has troubles due to electromagnetic noise (for example, regular data is changed to other data and garbled, or is a signal that is not originally output. In spite of this, the output signal can be mentioned.) Therefore, it is easily affected by electromagnetic noise, but as described above, it is near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. There is also a part that is drawn around.

Therefore, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source side of electromagnetic noise in the width direction (hereinafter, referred to as "end end sides" may be described. The electrodes of the flat conductor of.) Are used as the ground (GND) line as the power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged together. As a result, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors, the electrodes other than the electrodes of the flat conductors on both the most extreme ends are removed from the game ball B by the ground (GND) line which is the electrodes of the flat conductors on both the farthest ends. By arranging a ground (GND) line between the source of electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge and other electrodes (electrodes containing control signals) other than the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides of the end, It is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to other electrodes (electrodes including a line for transmitting a control signal) other than the electrodes of the flat conductors on both the most extreme ends. ..

Further, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides of the end end are set as the ground (GND) line as the power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged together, and the end end. A power supply line (for example, a + 5V line) is arranged on an electrode adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides. Since the power supply line (for example, + 5V line) is resistant to noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise, it may be arranged on the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030 that are close to the electrodes on both ends. preferable. Of the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides of the end, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the onemost end side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other end side. Power supply lines are arranged on one side or both of the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the onemost end side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other end side.

Further, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, in addition to setting both the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 as ground (GND) lines, the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides of the end end. However, in the portion drawn around the back surface of the game panel 1100, two metal L-shaped plates are formed along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. It is routed so as to pass between the 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. That is, in the flexible flat cable 503, the portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise, is shielded by two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. , It is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors coated with an insulator. The color of this insulator is white, and the entire flexible flat cable 5030 is white. The reason for adopting the white color is that the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, and is therefore mounted on various decorative boards provided in the back unit 3000. By functioning as a reflector that reflects the light emitted by the LED by itself, it suppresses the light that leaks to the rear of the back unit 3000 as much as possible, and contributes to the reduction of the effect of the light emission effect by the light emitted by the LED. is there.

[Modification example]
In order to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the power line is used for both the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends. Although the ground (GND) line is used as the power supply line so as to be arranged, the power supply line (for example, + 5V line) may be used as the power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged instead of the ground (GND) line. This is because the power supply line (for example, + 5V line) is resistant to noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise. In this case, among the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the onemost end side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other end side. A ground (GND) line is arranged on one of the electrodes, or both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the onemost end side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other end side. ing.

Further, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the electrodes of the flat conductors on both end ends are routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, and the main body mounting portion of the light emitting effect main body 5010 is provided. It is routed along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the 5020 so as to pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. However, at least one of the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. It may be done. In this way, in the flexible flat cable 503, the portion of the flexible flat cable 503 that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise, is routed along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b, so that the metal L-shaped plate is routed. It is shielded by 5020b and can contribute to the improvement of noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals were arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. May be arranged so that the flat conductor that transmits the control signal and the flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. In this way, it is possible to improve the noise immunity against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for a plurality of flat conductors that transmit control signals.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but the control signal which is particularly vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise (that is, easily affected by the electromagnetic noise) is transmitted. The flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as "flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise") is adjacent to the flat conductor vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise, so that it is adjacent to the substrate ground (GND) and electricity. The flat conductors that are connected to each other are arranged so that the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise are sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the flat conductor which is weak to the influence of electromagnetic noise.

Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but as these a plurality of flat conductors, in addition to the flat conductor for transmitting the control signal, In the case of being configured to include a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. In this case, as this power supply, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermista that suppresses the current, or the resistance is small below the rated current and cuts off. An overcurrent protection circuit that shuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit that has a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. In this polyswitch, the resistance value rapidly increases from a specific temperature in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature. The main body generates heat, and this heat lowers the conductivity to cut off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Priority is given to what is supplied. It is preferable to do so. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a thickness of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Because it is thin, it is possible to prevent a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 5030 by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, and to ensure safety and damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[How to assemble the light emitting production unit]
Next, a method of assembling the light emitting effect unit 5000 will be briefly described. First, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are arranged in order according to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5040d, and finally, the member. A lid 5080 that closes the accommodating recess 5040b is arranged. In this state, the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 are arranged on the same plane to be flush with each other, and the end surface of the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c and the end surface of the mounting boss hole 5040d are lids. The above-mentioned first distance dimension is preset so as not to protrude from the back surface 5080y of the body 5080 and to fit between the front surface 5080x and the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through hole 5080b formed on the back surface 5080y side of the lid body 5080 toward the mounting boss hole 5040d to fix it. As a result, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are arranged and accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from the front.

Subsequently, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plates 5020c are formed with a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through holes 5020bb formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b toward the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed, and is made of metal (not shown). The pan head screw is screwed from the through hole 5020ca formed in the metal plate 5020c toward the mounting boss hole 5020e to fix it. The end faces of the mounting boss holes 5020e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plates 5020c, and the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plates 5020c. The above-mentioned fourth distance dimension is preset so as to fit between and.

Subsequently, the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 through the wiring opening 5080d formed in the lid 5080. Then, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed through the wiring opening 5020f formed in the main body mounting portion 5020. The method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED substrate 5070 will be described later.

Subsequently, the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 is arranged according to the mounting boss hole 5040e formed on the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5080e formed on the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through holes 5020ba formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b toward the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e to fix them. The above description is made so that the end faces of the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and fit between the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. The second distance dimension and the third distance dimension are preset.

Subsequently, the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. The assembly of the light emitting effect unit 5000 is completed by routing it so that it passes through.

By the way, conventionally, a main control board that controls game progress and game profit, a sub control board that controls production that is executed as the game progresses, a board such as an image control board that controls display of an image display device, etc. Is arranged on the back side, and a game machine in which various wiring members are routed around has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the game machine are attracted to the game machine because the game balls are charged with static electricity by rubbing against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball for various wirings.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LED board]

Here, a method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED substrate 5070 will be described with reference to FIG. 259. The electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 and inserted all the way. It is electrically connected.

The electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not normally inserted all the way into the connector 5070d, so that the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors and the plurality of flat conductors are formed. In some cases, poor contact may occur between the electrode 5030bb and the electrode of the corresponding connector 5070d.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are attached to the connector 5070d. Near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) so as to serve as a mark for normal insertion and insertion. The long solid guideline G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction (upper and outer) and the lower vicinity of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). To reinforce the long solid guideline G4L extending linearly in the left-right direction (near the lower outside near the corresponding position) and the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid guideline G4V extending in a straight line that matches the vertical straight line of the left end side 5030 cba of the reinforcing plate 5030 cc is printed by silk printing.

No through hole is formed in the region where the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is arranged. This is because the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, so that even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed, the flat type of the exposed flexible flat cable 5030. This is to prevent the conductor from being short-circuited due to the through hole.

[Relationship between flexible flat cable reinforcing plate and connector]
When inserting and inserting the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat type The electrode 5030bb of the conductor faces the electrode of the connector 5070d and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable 5030, whereas the reinforcing plate 5030ca for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable 5030. .. As a result, the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are normally inserted to the back of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 259 (b), the left end side 5030 cba of the reinforcing plate 5030 bb and the guideline G4V are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the vertical direction. It should be noted that the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not inserted all the way into the connector 5070d provided on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, that is, the insertion amount ( When the push-in amount) is insufficient, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the left end side 5030 cba of the reinforcing plate 5030 bb for reinforcing the electrode 5030 bb by the insertion shortage SRT is separated from the guideline G4V. As described above, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator attaches the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When the electrode 5030bb is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode 5030bb is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 5070d. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

The electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not normally inserted all the way into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. In the state of being inserted diagonally, the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a extends linearly in the left-right direction and cannot be visually recognized by covering the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a extends linearly in the left-right direction. It is in a state of having an inclination with respect to the guideline G4L. In this way, the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 by the guidelines G4U and G4L and the reinforcing plate 5030cc. It is possible to easily visually determine whether or not the connector 5070d is normally inserted all the way to the back. As a result, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator attaches the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When inserted into the mounted connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode 5030bb is normally inserted all the way into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

[Modification example]
In addition, it extends linearly in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the upper side and the outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) The long solid line guideline G4L extending linearly was printed by silk printing, but the inside of the rectangular shape area with the guideline G4U as the upper side and the guideline G4L as the lower side may be solidly printed by silk printing. .. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G4L. Further, since the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 remains. Preventing the resist from peeling off due to the peeling of the silk print in the solidly painted rectangular area, the back surface (solder surface) of the LED substrate 5070 covered with the resist is exposed without exposing the copper foil surface of 5070y. It is possible to prevent the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited.

Further, it extends linearly in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the upper and outer sides in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid guideline G4U and the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) The long solid guideline G4L extending linearly was printed by silk printing, but the back surface of the LED substrate 5070 corresponding to the rectangular region with the guideline G4U as the upper side and the guideline G4L as the lower side and within that region. (Solder surface) A foil removal region may be formed on a copper foil surface of 5070y. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-pulled rectangular region can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the foil-pulled rectangular region can function as the guideline G4L. Further, when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed and the resist of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed. Even if it is peeled off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed, so that it is possible to prevent the flat conductor of the exposed flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited. it can.

Further, it extends linearly in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the upper and outer sides in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid guideline G4U and the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side and outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) The guideline G4L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, was printed by silk printing. However, by removing the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the guideline G4U , G4L may be formed, or when the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the guidelines G4U and G4L are formed by not applying the resist solution to a part of the region. You may.

Further, after the electrodes 5030bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are normally inserted into the connector 5070d on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, the flexible flat cable A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the 5030 are disconnected from the connector 5070d, or a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. The flexible flat cable 5030 is attached to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700 so that the respective electrodes 5030bb and the corresponding electrodes of the connector 5070d are obliquely displaced and come into contact with other adjacent electrodes to prevent a short circuit. A fixing sticker having a long rectangular shape in the vertical direction for fixing may be attached. In this case, as an area for attaching the fixing sticker to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, at a position slightly outward from the position corresponding to the four corners of the fixing sticker, for example, in the shape of brackets (")". The guidelines (which may be figures such as lines and symbols) may be formed by being printed by silk printing, or the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. By removing the above, a guideline in the shape of brackets (") (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed, or the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. In this case, a guideline in the shape of brackets (“) (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed by not applying a part of the region with the resist solution. The flexible flat cable 5030 is an LED substrate with a fixed seal. By fixing to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the 50700, the posture of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be fixed.

Further, it extends linearly in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the upper side and the outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side and the outer side near the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) The guideline G4L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and the vertical direction of the left end side 5030 cba of the reinforcing plate 5030 bb for reinforcing the electrodes 5030 bb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030 a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A straight line guideline G4V that matches the straight line was formed on the LED substrate 5070, but instead of the solid line, a one-point chain line or a two-point chain line may be used, and the guidelines G4U and G4L are inserted. It may be an arrow line indicating the direction, or for the guideline G4V, it may be an arrow indicating the position of the left end side 5030 cba of the reinforcing plate 5030 cc.

[Each decorative board for the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 75 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 260 to 264. FIG. 260 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame, FIG. 261 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 262 is a block diagram showing an LED. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decorative substrate provided with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 263 is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. 264 is from the LED non-mounting surface in part D of FIG. It is an enlarged view as seen. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decorative board provided with the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current The method of arranging the drive circuit will be described.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 has a plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, and a side so as to surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. The side window decoration portion 410b of the window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 are arranged, and the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate. Below the central upper decorative body 312a, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the lower central decorative body 312b of the plate are arranged.

The dish upper left decorative board 271 has a dish upper left decorative board 273 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the dish upper left decorative body 271 and mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). Behind the dish upper right decorative board 276, a dish upper right decorative board 278 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276 is arranged, and a plurality of dish upper right decorative boards 278 are mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). The dish center upper decorative substrate 312a is provided with a dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center upper decorative substrate 312 is arranged. It is light-emitting and decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 314.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 404 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative substrate 404 behind the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 composed of the above is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on each of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (in this embodiment, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a). 5 pieces on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b) and 10 pieces on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). A plurality of side window interior decorative members 410b are provided in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decorative members 412, and behind the side window interior decorative members 410b, side surfaces formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decorative members 412. A window decoration board 413 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (12 in this embodiment) mounted on the side window decoration board 413 emit light and decorate. The door frame right side decorative substrate 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative substrate 419 behind the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A door frame right side decorative substrate 418 composed of 4 pieces, and 10 pieces on the lower right side decorative substrate 418b) are luminescently decorated.

In the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 is arranged behind the door frame. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. A door frame top right decorative board 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip is arranged, and a plurality of door frame top right decorative boards 455 are mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, 7 on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, 6 on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457) are luminescently decorated.

In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate, which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, is arranged behind the decorative substrate 281. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (6 in this embodiment). In the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, a lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate, which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending to the left and right along the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, is arranged behind the decorative substrate 286 of the lower right of the plate. It is luminescent and decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment) mounted on the. In the dish center lower decorative body 312b, a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 formed in a semicircular strip shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b is arranged behind the dish center lower decorative body 312b. It is light-emitting and decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 316.

As described above, the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 provided in the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 formed in a form in which the annulus is divided into front and rear parts. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 includes a front decorative substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape on the rear side. , Consists of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decorative substrate 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decorative substrate 352b (9 in this embodiment). In this embodiment, it is luminescently decorated with 9 pieces).

As described above, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in an elongated strip shape. As a result, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distance dimensions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 107, and a large-sized movable body can be provided. A body, a large display device, and the like can also be provided.

[Electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board]
Plate upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decorative board 278, dish center upper decorative board 314, left side upper decorative board 402a, left side lower decorative board 402b, side, which are arranged in various decorative bodies and decorative parts provided in the door frame 3. Interior decoration board 413, right side upper decorative board 418a, right side lower decorative board 418b, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, dish lower left decorative board The door frame side decorative substrate such as 283, the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate, the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, the front decorative substrate 352a, and the rear decorative substrate 352b, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 260.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 217, and is light emission data which is the first serial system on the door frame side. The SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 and the light emitting data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial systems on the door frame side, are independently input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 95, and DC + 12V is input, and the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 is input. ) It is electrically connected to the line and is grounded to the ground (GND).

[Door frame side 1st serial system]
The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are relayed to the dish unit 200 of the dish unit 200 shown in FIG. It is input to the substrate 214 and is also input to the handle decorative substrate 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG. 38.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are the dish lower left decorative board 283, the dish lower right decorative board 288, And, they are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower left decorative board 283 of the plate, are input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, respectively. That is, the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish serves as a bridging board for transmitting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. The decorative substrate 283 and the decorative substrate 273 on the upper left of the plate are electrically connected to each other. The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the decorative board 283 on the lower left of the plate, which is the bridging board. No input connector is provided, and the first serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are not shown for outputting to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish is shown on the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish, which is electrically connected to the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish (that is, after the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish and is the final stage). There is only an input connector (not shown) to which the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from each output connector, are input. ..

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower right decorative board 288 of the dish, are input to the upper right decorative board 278 of the dish, respectively. That is, the decorative substrate 288 on the lower right of the plate serves as a bridging substrate for transmitting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the upper right decorative substrate 278 of the plate are electrically connected in a beaded state. The first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the decorative board 288 on the lower right of the plate, which is the bridging board. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side are shown to be output to the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the lower right decorative board 278 of the dish, which is electrically connected to the lower right decorative board 288 of the dish (that is, the latter and final stage of the lower right decorative board 288), has the lower right decorative board. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side output from the output connectors (not shown) of 288 are input is provided. ing.

The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the production operation unit 300, are the decorative board 314 on the center of the plate and the plate. It is input to the front decorative substrate 352a of the lower center decorative substrate 316 and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decorative substrate 352a are input to the rear decorative substrate 352b, respectively. That is, the front decorative substrate 352a serves as a bridging substrate that transmits the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side to the rear decorative substrate 352b. And the rear decorative substrate 352b are electrically connected in a beaded state. The front decorative substrate 352a, which serves as the bridging substrate, contains the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the operation unit relay substrate 392 of the effect operation unit 300, respectively. An input connector (not shown) to be input is provided, and the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side are output to the rear decoration board 352b, respectively. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, the rear decorative substrate 352b, which is electrically connected to the front decorative substrate 352a (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the front decorative substrate 352a), has an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative substrate 352a. Only an input connector (not shown) for inputting the first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from each of the above, is provided.

Here, for example, the lower left decorative board 283 on which the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the dish unit relay board 214 are input will be briefly described. Then, the decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the plate includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a includes a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current setting capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls the constant current to flow through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x by the heat distribution circuit 283c, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

Further, for example, the first serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish, DC + 12V, and the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish to which the ground (LED) is input will be briefly described. The plate upper left decorative substrate 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the dish, and is a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of passing a constant current through the suLED1 to suLED6. , The maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current of the current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6 is mainly composed of. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls to pass a constant current through the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x by the heat distribution circuit 273c, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

[Door frame side second serial system]
The second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are input to the door frame sub-relay board 105, are decorated on the lower left side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. In addition to being input to the substrate 402b, the decorative substrate 413 in the side window, the decorative substrate 418b on the lower right side of the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 73. Is entered in each.

The direct current + 12V and ground (GND) input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decorative board. It is input to 457.

The door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative board 457 serves as a bridging board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top center decorative board 455. Therefore, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a beaded state. The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is a bridging board, includes a second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) on the door frame side from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. An input connector (not shown) for inputting (GND) is provided, and the second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are connected to the center of the door frame top. An output connector (not shown) for outputting to the decorative substrate 455 is provided. Further, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is shown on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, which is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, after the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). There is also an input connector (not shown) that inputs the second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side, which are output from the output connectors, respectively. , The second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are provided with output connectors (not shown) for outputting to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. ..

The second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the door frame top central decorative board 455, are input to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 serves as a bridging substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456. Therefore, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are electrically connected in a beaded state. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, which is electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455), has a door. Door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from output connectors (not shown) on the center decorative board 455 of the frame top. Only the connector for the door is provided.

Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (LED) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 are input. Briefly explaining the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the lower left decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full-color LEDs. ..

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the dish upper left decorative board 273, and a constant current is passed through hdLED1 to hdLED8. It is mainly composed of a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bag that can be used, and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax applies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of passing a constant current through the hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the left. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 402by that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the decorative substrate 402a on the side. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is a substrate (decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay substrate 105. Control is performed to pass a constant current through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type, and therefore generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type, and therefore generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax by the heat distribution circuit 402bc, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed. Further, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be distributed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side. ing.

In this way, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed only by the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate (decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent board in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board (decorative board 402b on the lower left side) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted. The heat distribution circuit 402ac of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side can disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current through the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a subsequent substrate, straddling the substrate on which it is mounted (left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Has been done. Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the upper left side decorative substrate 402a is always involved. The operator who performs this work has his / her finger on the connector of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the connector of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, or the heat of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a. In order to touch the distributed circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side and the decorative substrate 402a on the upper left side from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a have a function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, and static electricity. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to the above.

As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is set to huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs, in addition to inputting direct current + 12V and ground (GND) from the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Each line through which current flows is input. As described above, the decorative substrate 402a on the left side includes a heat distribution circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and also having a function of being able to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[Light emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for designating a light emission mode, and are ID information and a floor. It is composed of key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is specified from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

[Outline of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 261. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit. Therefore, here, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish will be described. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets the sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and the maximum current of the current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 283y that can be used.

[Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, the output channel LR is relative to the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. , LG and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs in one constant current drive circuit. Can be done.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is described from the linear power supply 283xa, the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of creating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V in this embodiment) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x by inputting DC + 12V from the + 12V power supply line. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit. It is supplied to 283xi respectively, and the reset unit 283xb, data line buffer 283xc, clock line buffer 283xd, address setting unit 283xe, oscillator 283xf, logic processing unit 283xg, PWM unit 283xh, and constant current drive unit 283xi Is ready to work.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 95, and independently creates + DC 5V as an internal power supply Vreg to create a constant current drive circuit. It is used in 283x. This is because when the + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is used, this + 5V power supply line is used by routing the electrical wiring, so that the length of the + 5V power supply line that supplies DC + 5V is long. It becomes longer and noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and the DC + 5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the LED may flicker due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the + 12V power supply line has extremely high noise resistance as compared with the + 5V power supply line. In the linear power supply 283xa of the current drive circuit 283x, a configuration was adopted in which DC + 5V was independently created as the internal power supply Vreg.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using it only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to the other substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, which can contribute to the prevention of flicker of the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs due to external noise. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. In addition, the input electrical wiring and the external transmission electrical wiring for the + 5V power supply line are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa and outputs it into the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi are started to operate.

For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not input the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 206, but independently creates a reset signal as an internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. There is. For example, when a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, referred to as "reset signal transmission line") is used, this reset signal transmission line is used by routing electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line that transmits the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset and the LED may be turned off due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by eliminating the need for the reset signal transmission line in the constant current drive circuit 283x, the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates a reset signal as an internal reset signal RST. did.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external board, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to the other board, and only in the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using this, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It can contribute to the prevention of unexpected extinguishing and flicker of the LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. Further, the input electrical wiring and the external transmission electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line for transmitting serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) (hereinafter, referred to as "data line"). This circuit is capable of shaping the waveform of the signal from which serial data is input and transmitting the serial data and outputting it to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line that transmits a clock signal from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) (hereinafter, referred to as “clock line”). This is a circuit in which a clock signal is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the clock signal is shaped and output to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively.

As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. Therefore, both the lengths of the data line and the clock line become long, and noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x. Is not transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent board, and the waveform is shaped by the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise even when both the lengths of the data line and the clock line are long. As a result, it is possible to realize signal transmission that is resistant to noise. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise.

[Address setting section]
Based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, the address setting unit 283xe sets 64 different addresses as IDs (IDs capable of identifying an individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistors (not shown). You can do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID capable of identifying the individual of the constant current drive circuit 283x is preset by the address setting unit 283x by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not the one that receives the data by the software and sets it appropriately.

[Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg is used in the serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) based on the address which is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. Occasionally, the gradation information in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to capture the gradation information from this serial data and use the captured gradation information. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emitting data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents.

[PWM unit]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel from turning off to turning on (maximum brightness) in a total of 128 steps from 0 (zero) to 127 gradations. Therefore, the gradation of one output channel is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown). That is, the PWM unit 283xh individually includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to PWM gradation control units 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation degree is set, the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 control the constant current drive unit 283xi so as to flow a current having the set gradation degree.

[Constant current drive unit]
The constant current drive unit 283xi has one constant (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation degree is set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 provided in the PWM unit 283xh described above. A constant current is passed through the LED elements constituting the full-color LED by a current driver. That is, the constant current drive unit 283xi individually includes the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24 (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24.

The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 include one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to be passed to the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LR1 to LR8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 have one end of a resistor Rg that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits green light (G) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LG1 to LG8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 have one end of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits blue light (B) that constitutes a full-color LED in the eight output channels of the output channels LB1 to LB8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to ground (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element that constitute the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and DC + 12V is input.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. It is electrically connected to 1 to the constant current driver 8) so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side, respectively. It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements that make up the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. 9 to the constant current driver 16) are electrically connected, and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding thermal dispersion resistors. 17 to constant current driver 24) is electrically connected, and the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED element that constitutes the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24, respectively. ing.

The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 are the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LED by sucking the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the individually set full-color LEDs. Can emit light.

In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can be dimmed and lit by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with a constant current set individually. As a result, it is possible to turn off the light, turn on the light with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the above-mentioned resistors Rr that set the maximum current to be passed to the LED element that emits red light (R) that constitutes the full-color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Consists of full-color LEDs in eight output channels up to LG8 A resistor Rg that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits green light (G) and full-color LEDs in eight output channels LB1 to LB8 are configured. It is composed of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to be passed through the LED element that emits blue light (B).

As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 provided in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). There is.

[Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the decorative substrate including the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 and 262. Here, a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative substrate including two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. The above-mentioned LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. Therefore, for convenience of explanation, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are shown by the same reference numerals in FIGS. 261 and 262.

[Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 261, the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, and heat. It includes a distributed circuit 283c.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is the light emitting data SDAT1 which is the first serial system on the door frame side serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , The clock signal SCLK1 is input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 to input DC + 12V, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. It is connected and grounded to ground (GND).

As described above, the dish unit 200 has the first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) on the door frame side from the door frame sub-relay board 105. It is input via the dish unit relay board 214. DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and constitutes the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT1, the light emitting data SDAT1 is used. The gradation information is taken in, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so as to be the taken-in gradation information, and the dimming lighting is performed.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the thermal dispersion circuit 283c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 283x).

The first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) on the door frame side from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is decorated on the upper left of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above). Along with being input to the substrate 273, the DC + 12V and the ground (GND) are input to the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 via the plate lower left decorative substrate 283. As a result, the noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) is not transmitted to the subsequent substrate, the upper left decorative substrate 273 of the dish. In the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above), the waveform can be shaped.

DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and constitutes the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6, the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the thermal dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to the constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (constant current described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is based on the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT1, the light emitting data SDAT1 is used. The gradation information is captured, and the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so as to be the captured gradation information, and the dimming lighting is performed.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the thermal dispersion circuit 273c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

As a decorative substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, in addition to the decorative substrate 283 on the lower left of the plate and the decorative substrate 273 on the upper left of the plate, the decorative substrate 288 on the lower right of the plate, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the decorative substrate 456 on the top left of the door frame. , And the door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[Decorative board equipped with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 262, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, and hdLED1 which is 10 full-color LEDs. It is provided with ~ hdLED10 and a heat distribution circuit 402bc.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a light emitting data SDAT2 which is a second serial system on the door frame side serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , The clock signal SCLK2 is input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 to input DC + 12V, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. It is connected and grounded to ground (GND).

As described above, the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 are input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. There is. DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element and the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element constituting the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs. , And the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, respectively.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs in one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. Therefore, among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emitting mode of the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the remaining two For the hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the light emitting mode is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate straddling the substrate on which it is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emitting mode of the huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 are respectively opposed to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8. The hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full-color LEDs, are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are the output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to and constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channels LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. ~ LB8 (constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24 described above) are electrically connected.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are respectively opposed to the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10. The hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are the output channels LG1 and LG2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current driver 9 and the constant current driver 10 described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to and constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are connected to the output channels LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above) are electrically connected.

Further, with respect to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is the subsequent substrate of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the red color (huLED1 to huLED5) constituting the full-color LEDs (huLED1 to huLED5) The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current drivers 3 to constant current drivers 7 described above) and constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively. Output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (constant current driver described above) via the thermal dispersion resistors huRg1b to huRg5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the thermal dispersion resistors huRg1a to huRg5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the 11-constant current driver 15) and constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are the thermal dispersion resistance huRb1b to the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, respectively. Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the huRb5b and the thermal dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Has been done. The output channels LR8, LG8, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), and when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emitting data SDAT2, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is referred to from the light emitting data SDAT2. Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, 8 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled and dimmed so as to capture the gradation information and obtain the captured gradation information. ..

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emitting data) input via a data line buffer 402baxc and a clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. Based on SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emitting data LED2 includes its own ID, gradation information is taken from the light emitting data LED2 so that the taken-in gradation information is used. Of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled to be dimmed and lit, and the left side which is a subsequent board of the lower left side decorative board 402b. The huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a, are individually controlled to be dimmed and lit.

As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through 8 hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the thermal dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8, which constitute the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bax).

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type, so that the constant current flowing through two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is sucked and left. Heat is generated by sucking a constant current flowing through huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a subsequent substrate of the side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is generated for two hdLED9s and hdLED10s out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Five thermal dispersion resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10 constituting the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc, and five mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. For huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, the thermal dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which form the thermal dispersion circuit 402bc in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is dispersed by taking charge of the heat dispersion resistors huRr1b to huRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b constituting the heat distribution circuit 402ac. You can do it.

Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a are LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (to be exact, constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the electric current, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

As a decorative substrate provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, in addition to the decorative substrate 402b below the left side, the decorative substrate 314 above the center of the plate, the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, the decorative substrate 413 in the side window, and the right side. There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

Further, as a decorative substrate that does not have an LED constant current drive circuit at all, in addition to the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, there is a decorative substrate 418a on the right side.

[Laying method of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 263 and 264. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, the constant current drive circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit will be described as an electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip. As a type of IC package for a constant current drive circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) ), Which is the so-called VQFN. Of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuit, one end side is the input side, and the remaining three end sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. In addition, in FIG. 264, various electronic parts are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for the sake of readability of the drawing.

As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one that includes one LED constant current drive circuit and one that includes two LED constant current drive circuits. And there is. Since the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuits in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically and having two LED constant current drive circuits. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arc shape will be described.

[Decorative board on the lower left side]
As shown in FIG. 263 (a), the lower left side decorative substrate 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, and hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs. While the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are , It is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the left side upper decorative board 402a and the electrical wiring is mounted on the upper end side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the LED of the left side lower decorative board 402b is not mounted. A connector LEDCN for connecting the door frame sub-relay board 105 and the electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, and connectors, through holes, test pads, etc. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution in the entire area excluding lands and the like. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Can be increased.

On the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are shown. The area and is not printed at all as silk printing. Further, the substrate control number of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as a blank character by a white resist.

This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b from being lowered on the LED mounting surface 402bx due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs.

Further, since the door frame left side decorative body 404 provided on the door frame 3 and shown in FIG. 75 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403 as described above. , The left side inner lens 403 is attached to the rear of the door frame left side decorative body 404. As described above, the left side inner lens 403 is formed to be transparent, lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so as to be able to refract light diffusely, and the left side inner lens 403 is formed. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 arranged behind the lens. When the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and temporarily, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404 Even if the LED mounting surface 402bx can be visually recognized by the player, hdLED1 to be a full-color LED on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Since the part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, they correspond to the full-color LED which has nothing to do with the game for the player. The area indicating the part number and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is prevented from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, a number specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED) and an auxiliary line indicating a mounting position of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs (that is, a full-color LED). A region indicating a position where a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 is arranged) can be made difficult for the player to see.

On the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are completely silk-printed. Not printed. This prevents the player from seeing the area indicating the connector LDLCN, the corresponding part number, and the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, which has nothing to do with the game for the player.

Further, as described above, a white resist layer is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b by a solid white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (solid coating), are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Not done. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the substrate control number of the lower left decorative substrate 402b is a foil-free character (that is, a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). It is formed as a punched letter formed by making letters with a pattern and pulling out the copper foil around it), and the foil punched letters are made by a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It is covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-free characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic components. The board control number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is a foil-free character (that is, a wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b instead of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. In the layer (copper plane) on which is formed, characters may be formed with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form characters), or the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side may be formed. On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a letter is made with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding area It may be formed as a blank character formed by pulling out the copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are formed as solid earth as described later. For this reason, the board control number of the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side is a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the foil removal character (that is, the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed), and the copper foil around it is removed. It is formed as a blank character in which characters are punched out on one or both of the solid earth of the LED mounting surface 402bx and the solid earth of the LED non-mounting surface 402by, without forming as a blank character. You may be.

On the other hand, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit 402bay constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and electronic components are printed in the vicinity of these areas. The part numbers corresponding to are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKa (see FIG. 264 (a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. IC1 (FIG. 264 (FIG. 264)), which is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and has a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa. (A) is printed as silk screen printing on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line). Then, the region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 264 (a)). The maximum current is set to the right in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, as well as being printed on the white resist that is solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the circuit 402bay and the part numbers R1, R2, R3 (see FIG. 264 (a)) corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg are yellow (or black) as silk printing, and the LED of the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side. It is printed on a white resist that is solidly coated on the non-mounting surface 402by.

Further, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it corresponds to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas to be silk-printed are yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 264 (a), only the chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 are shown), respectively. In addition to being printed, the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 and above or below (in FIG. 264 (a), hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full-color LEDs are shown. Only the corresponding part numbers, LED4 and LED5, are shown), which are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

An area indicating a position where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is arranged on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402b of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) not shown as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing near this area. ing.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

Further, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is individually inspected for lighting the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (for example,). It is performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED). Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are displayed in the vicinity of the multiple check pins on the lower left side. It is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the substrate 402b. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

In the embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and the connector that does not have white color are LEDs that emit light from the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface generated by the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in the above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) not shown as silk printing. At the same time, the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts and connectors are printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing, in the vicinity of this area.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are formed as so-called solid grounds in which areas other than land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors are grounded to ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

As described above, the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, so that the lower left decorative substrate 402b is viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. The width dimension from the left end side 402beg1 to the right end side 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Therefore, if the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged. Since the distance dimension between the end side of the pattern and the left end side 402beg1 or the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b becomes extremely short, let's draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side. Even so, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side because there is a limit of the minimum distance dimension in the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the right lower end side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is input when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. By arranging the terminal on the left side closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the decorative substrate 402b on the left side so as to be the terminal on the side, the terminal on the input side is the second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. 262. ), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by are input, and the lower left side, upper left end side, and upper right end side are mainly the terminal to output side of output side 1, respectively. The terminals 1 to 3 on the output side are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the second serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT2) shown in FIG. 262. , Clock signal SCLK2) and the like are output. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal on which the resistor Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal on which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four ends of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It can be arranged as a state, and the remaining two end sides can be arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is restricted by the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the four ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Even, all wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the group 1 composed of the hdLED1 to hdLED4 which are four full-color LEDs and the four full-color LEDs among the hdLED1 to hdLED8 which are eight full-color LEDs are formed. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed. The LED can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed between the group 1 and the group 2 from becoming longer or shorter in the group 1 or the group 2 in a biased manner. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 263 (a)). The constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged closer to the lower side than the portion to be arranged), and the central portion in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 263 (a)). It can be arranged above the hdLED8, which is a full-color LED configured in Group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax, which is closer to the upper side than the portion where the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED of the above is arranged. .. As a result, it is possible to secure an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx. The area for routing the wiring pattern to the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided in the hdLED9, hdLED10, which are two full-color LEDs, and the five left-side upper decorative boards 402a shown in FIG. It can be secured at 402b.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) with a rectangular planar shape, and are in the so-called EIA format at 0805 (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one end in the longitudinal direction on the left end side of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. A capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is arranged like this. In other words, the edges of the constant current drive circuits 402bag and 402bbx arranged so that the edges of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402bg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistor. Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side of a capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b so as to be non-parallel to each other.

Further, as described above, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is such that the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 with respect to the left end edge and the right end edge of the decorative substrate. Although they are arranged in an inclined state and are almost the same, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are doors. Unlike the other decorative boards of the frame 3, the decorative board has the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453. Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is set to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side of. That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is non-parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. And the ones that become are mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 includes, in addition to the 11 full-color LEDs provided therein, another central decorative substrate on which five full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted, which is not shown. Two LED constant current drive circuits (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit,) (Second maximum current setting circuit))), illustrated by one LED constant current drive circuit (here, a second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)). Two thermal dispersion circuits provided for itself (the first constant current drive circuit is the first thermal dispersion circuit (thermal dispersion resistance), the second constant current drive circuit is the second thermal dispersion circuit (thermal dispersion resistance)) The door frame top left decorative board 456 controls light emission directly via the above, and in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided therein, the other left decorative board on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted is not shown. One LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided for the door frame top right decorative substrate by directly controlling light emission via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided for itself, which is not shown. The 457 is a single LED constant-current drive circuit (constant-current drive circuit) that includes, in addition to the six full-color LEDs that it has, another right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. , Maximum current setting circuit) directly controls light emission via one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance) provided for itself (not shown). The other central decorative substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative substrate is the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decorative substrate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending to the left and right along the right side of the door frame top decorative body 453. It is necessary to provide a heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistor) on each of the other central decorative substrate, the other left decorative substrate, and the other right decorative substrate. As described above, the heat distribution circuit (here, the second heat distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) provided in the central decorative board 455 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other central decoration board are the door frame top. In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided in the central decorative substrate 455 itself, it prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has a function that can be used. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other left decorative board are LED constant current drive circuits provided in the door frame top left decoration board 456 itself (accurately). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit), it also has the function of being able to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity. Further, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other right decorative board are the LED constant current drive circuit provided in the door frame top right decoration board 457 itself (accurately). In addition to the function of being able to disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit), it also has the function of being able to prevent damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

Further, the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and 10 full-color LEDs. The hdLED1 to hdLED10 are closer to the right end side 402b2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and are along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. The constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged at predetermined intervals, whereas the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. A configuration was adopted in which the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side was arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are sink (suction) type, and generate heat by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. For this reason, even in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx and the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs, are separated from each other. The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less likely to be affected by the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs.

Further, the constant current drive circuit is arranged by arranging the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The edges of the land patterns of 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative substrate (that is, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decoration of the door frame top decorative body 453). Compared with the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the decorative board in which the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right ends of the decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the can be made shorter. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the left-right direction.

[Decorative board on the center of the plate]
As shown in FIG. 263 (b), the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, hLED1 to hLED10, which are 10 full-color LEDs. The 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, which is the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300, whereas the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, which is the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300. When the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate shown in FIG. 263 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate). On the right side of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish along the upper end side 314eg1, a connector HCN for connecting the operation unit relay substrate 392 and the electrical wiring is mounted.

On the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, and connectors, through holes, test pads, etc. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution in the entire area excluding lands and the like. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is solid-painted with a white resist, and the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 emit light to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the reflectance of the LED.

On the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are shown. The area and is not printed at all as silk printing. Further, the substrate control number of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is not formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate as a blank character by a white resist.

This is because the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. It is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 on the LED mounting surface 314x.

Further, as described above, in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75 provided on the door frame 3, the dish center upper inner lens 313 is attached to the dish center upper decorative body 312a from the rear. , The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is attached below (or behind) the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish. As described above, the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate is formed transparent because the unit front cover 312 is formed transparently. As described above, the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish is formed to be transparent, has a lens cut (formed on a polyhedron), and is formed so as to be able to diffusely refract light. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish arranged below (or behind) the lens 313. When the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and temporarily, on the center of the plate of the unit front cover 312, on the center of the plate provided for the decorative body 312a. Even if the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314, the full-color LED is placed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Since the part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed as silk printing at all, the full color has nothing to do with the game for the player. It prevents the player from seeing the part number corresponding to the LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. Therefore, a number specifying the hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full-color LED) and an auxiliary line indicating a mounting position of the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs (that is, a full-color LED). A region indicating a position where a certain hLED1 to hLED10 is arranged) can be made difficult for the player to see.

On the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged are completely silk-printed. Not printed. This prevents the player from seeing the area indicating the connector HCN, the corresponding part number, and the position where the connector HCN is arranged, which has nothing to do with the game for the player.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The packages of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector HCN is white (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the substrate control number of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a foil-free character (that is, a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). It is formed as a punched letter formed by making letters with a pattern and pulling out the copper foil around it), and the foil punched letters are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It is covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-free characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic components. The board control number of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a foil-free character (that is, a wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate instead of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. In the layer (copper plane) on which is formed, characters may be formed with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form characters), or the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may be formed. Letters are removed from the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are created with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the surroundings thereof. It may be formed as a blank character formed by pulling out the copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are formed as solid earth as described later. For this reason, the board control number of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a letter with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the foil removal character (that is, the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed), and the copper foil around it is removed. It is formed as a blank character in which characters are punched out on one or both of the solid earth of the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid earth of the LED non-mounting surface 314y, without being formed as a blank character. You may be.

On the other hand, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit 314ay constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown, and in the vicinity of these areas. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing.

Further, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, it corresponds to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The areas to be printed are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, which are not shown as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Is printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing.

An area indicating a position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is arranged on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) not shown as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing near this area. ing.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspections for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, are individually performed (for example). It is performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED). Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are displayed on the center of the dish in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the substrate 314. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. It should be noted that some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are formed as so-called solid earth in which the area excluding the land pattern and the wiring pattern of electronic parts and connectors is grounded to the ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

In this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color are based on the light emission of the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface generated by the light emission of the full-color LED is LED mounted. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed by a yellow chain line (or a black chain line) not shown as silk printing. At the same time, the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts and connectors are printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing, in the vicinity of this area.

As described above, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arc shape. Therefore, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate shown in FIG. 263 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left. When viewed (that is, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate on the LED mounting surface 314x. The width dimension up to is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, if the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged. Since the distance dimension between the end edge of the pattern and the upper end side 314eg1 or the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is extremely short, let's draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end edge. Even so, since there are restrictions on the minimum distance dimension for the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged at the end. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. Adopted the configuration.

In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the lower left side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is input when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. By arranging the terminal on the upper end side 314eg1 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate so as to be the terminal on the side, the terminal on the input side is the first serial system on the door frame side (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC + 12V, ground (GND), and resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end side, upper right end side, and right lower end side are mainly output side 1 terminal to output side, respectively. The terminals 1 on the output side to the terminals 3 on the output side are the above-mentioned output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the door frame side first serial system (light emitting data SDAT1, clock signal). SCLK1) etc. are output. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistors Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It can be arranged as a state, and the remaining two end sides can be arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is restricted by the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent spacing of the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the four ends of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Even, all wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region in which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, the group 1 composed of four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and the four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of the hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed. The LED can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed between the group 1 and the group 2 from becoming longer or shorter in the group 1 or the group 2 in a biased manner. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in the work.

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, when the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish shown in FIG. 263 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is on the center of the dish). A state in which the constant current drive circuit 314ax is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a) is a semi-arc-shaped central portion (full-color LED of FIG. 263 (b)) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The constant current drive circuit 314bx can be arranged on the right side as compared with the portion where the hLED6 is arranged, and the semi-arc-shaped central portion (FIG. 263 (b)) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. ), Which is closer to the left side than the part where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is arranged, and is arranged to the left of the hLED8 which is a full-color LED configured in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to secure an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, and from the constant current drive circuit 314bx. A region for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs hLED9 and hLED10 can be secured on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) with a rectangular planar shape, and are in the so-called EIA format at 0805 (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). S: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, and one end of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb in the longitudinal direction is the upper end side of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The capacitor is arranged so as to be parallel to the lower end side 314egg1 and the lower end side 314egg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the upper end side 314egg1 and the lower end side 314egg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It is arranged like this. In other words, the end sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, and the resistor. Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side of a capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish so as to be non-parallel.

Further, the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, and 10 full-color LEDs. HLED1 to hLED10 are arranged in a semi-arc shape on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, which is closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged along the plate with a predetermined interval, whereas the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. A configuration was adopted in which the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate was arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are sink (suction) type as described above, like the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side, and by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. It generates heat. Therefore, even in the central upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx and the 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are separated from each other. The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be made less likely to be affected by the 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

Further, the constant current drive circuit is arranged by arranging the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The edge of the land pattern of 314ax and 314bx is arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate (that is, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decoration of the door frame top decorative body 453). Compared with the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the decorative board in which the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right ends of the decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the effect operation unit 300, so that a large effect operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3 and the effect operation unit 300 can be provided. It is possible to perform a light emission effect by 300.

[Genus pad on the bottom of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit]
As described above, the types of IC packages of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the decorative substrate 314 above the center of the dish are flat surfaces. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG. 264.

A metal pad FP is exposed in the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter, referred to as “EPad”) is formed. By soldering this IC package to a substrate, it is possible to improve heat dissipation and bondability.

In the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, in addition to each lead pad, a square-shaped land pattern EP for EPad is provided. The land pattern EP for EPad is electrically connected to the solid earth of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Nine thermal via TVs are arranged in a forming grid in the region of the land pattern EP for EPad. By these thermal via TVs, the land pattern EP for EPad and the solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad cannot be drawn out in the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (suction) type, and generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b via the land pattern EP for EPad. By diffusing, heat can be dissipated in the entire lower left side decorative substrate 402b.

To briefly explain the relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal via TVs, the junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP is a constant current. The number and diameter of the thermal via TVs are selected so as to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. As a result, the joint region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the land pattern EP for EPad are soldered is not too large to prevent the generation of voids, and this joint region is not too small and stable. It is possible to obtain the desired bonding strength. The land pattern EP for EPad can be formed by dividing it into a grid pattern, but even in this case, in order to prevent the generation of voids and obtain stable bonding strength, as described above, the constant current drive circuit The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP needs to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

Further, in contrast to the case where the end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx When the end edge of the land pattern is arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the land pattern EP for EPad is also left in the same manner. When arranging the end edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so that they are arranged in parallel with the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the side lower decorative substrate 402b and are inclined by 45 degrees. The land pattern EP for EPad is also arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees. When the EPad land pattern EP end edge is arranged parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP end edge and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b The fact that the distance dimension between the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 is shorter and the distance dimension to the substrate end edge is shorter means that there is less room for heat dissipation on the substrate. .. On the other hand, when the EPad land pattern EP end side is arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance dimension between the right end side 402beg2 and the EPad land pattern EP is the part where the distance between the apex and the substrate end side is short, but the two sides in contact with the apex are not parallel to the substrate end side. Since there is a large room for heat dissipation on the substrate, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than when the EP end edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge edge of the substrate are parallel to each other.

As described above, each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In this embodiment, as an example, as described above, a left side lower decorative substrate 402b having two LED constant current drive circuits and formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically and a semicircle. Each of the arc-shaped elongated strip-shaped decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is described, and the LED by the light emission of the full-color LED is described by the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from decreasing, and the player can see the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed. We explained in detail that measures such as a decrease in reflectance have been taken to prevent the LED from being damaged.

Here, with respect to other configurations of the present invention in which measures such as a decrease in reflectance are taken (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second to fifth embodiments”), FIGS. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 265 is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, FIG. 266 is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 267 is a D'part of FIG. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D ″ part of FIG. 266 or the D ″ part of FIG. 270, and FIG. 268 is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 269. Is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D'''part of FIG. 268, and FIG. 270 is a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 265 to 270, the same function as that of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 (hereinafter, referred to as "configuration of measures for reducing reflectance and the like according to the first embodiment") is performed. The same reference numerals are given. Further, in FIG. 267, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printings are omitted for the sake of readability of the drawings. Further, in FIG. 269, various electronic components are omitted for the sake of readability of the drawings.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the central button decorative substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 in the effect operation unit 300, and the handle decorative substrate 184 in the handle unit 180 include the reflection according to the first embodiment described above. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED from being lowered by the configuration of measures such as the rate reduction (the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged). , The part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has nothing to do with the game for the player, and measures such as a decrease in reflectance that the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player. However, a configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second to fifth embodiments, which will be described later, may be adopted.

[Comparison between the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the hdLED1 to the full-color LED are on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Regions indicating the positions for arranging electronic components such as 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and in the vicinity of these regions. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402b of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic components such as 314ay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), which are not shown, and these areas. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing, in the vicinity. Further, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, which are not shown as silk screen printing, and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. The part numbers corresponding to are printed in yellow (or black), which are not shown as silk screen printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 265 (a), a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. On the top, a part number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED and an area indicating a position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively. Specifically, the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is silk-printed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b with yellow solid lines LSLK1 to LSLK10. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, are printed in yellow on the lower left side as silk printing. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the decorative substrate 402b is printed on a solid white resist.

On the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed as silk printing with a solid yellow line (not shown). The part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area.

Further, as described above, a white resist layer is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b by a solid white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (solid coating), are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspections for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, are individually performed (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are located near the multiple check pins on the lower left side decorative board. It is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of 402b. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

Here, a white resist liquid is used as the color of the resist liquid solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The reason why yellow is adopted as the silk-printed paint of the part number corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10, which is the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. When silk-printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b with red paint, silk-printed with red paint on the white resist, with full-color LED The area indicating the position where a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 is arranged, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 is conspicuous, while the combination of white and yellow (measures such as reduction of reflectance according to the second embodiment). When the background is white, yellow is not noticeable, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are on the left side with yellow paint. When silk printing is performed on the white resist coated solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower decorative substrate 402b, hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs silk-printed with a yellow paint on the white resist, are arranged. The area indicating the position, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are inconspicuous. The area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are the front-side electronic components mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It is a front side notation part (sometimes simply referred to as "notation part") that makes it possible to specify the part number of the front side electronic component and the position where the surface side electronic component is arranged. The attributes of the surface side electronic component such as the area shown (furthermore, the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included. There is.).

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 is brilliantly light-emitting by the illumination by the light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are full-color LEDs capable of multicolor light emission. Yes, the light emitting mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has electrodes (so-called pads), through holes, and tests for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, and connectors. A white resist layer formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding pads, lands, etc. (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). Is formed, and further, a region indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, which makes it possible to identify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors on the solid white resist, and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to It is a full-color LED in which the part number corresponding to hdLED10 is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint, so that when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white resist is silk-printed with a yellow paint. In addition to being able to make the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, inconspicuous in the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (light emission). Time), a region indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed by silk printing with a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a yellow paint having a high reflectance. By combining the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 with the corresponding component numbers, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can be maintained high.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. In addition, since the ink companies that supply silk printing paints also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), they can be used as silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even if yellow is specified, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but yellow has a wide range of colors.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the maximum current are placed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various distributed resistors of the setting circuit 402bay are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and these areas are also printed. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267 (a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. IC1 (FIG. 267 (FIG. 267)), which is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and has a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa. (A) is printed as silk screen printing on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line). Then, the region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 267 (a)). The maximum current is set to the right in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, as well as being printed on the white resist that is solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the circuit 402bay and the part numbers R1, R2, R3 (see FIG. 267 (a)) corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg are yellow (or black) as silk printing, and the LED on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It is printed on a white resist that is solidly coated on the non-mounting surface 402by.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

In addition, even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are made of a white resist by a solid white resist. Layers are formed. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 265 (b), on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. , The part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively. Specifically, the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is silk-printed with yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The LED1 to LED10, which are the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 on the right side in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, are printed in yellow as silk printing on the decorative substrate on the center of the plate. Each is printed on a solid white resist coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of 314.

On the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed by a solid yellow line (not shown) as silk printing. The part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The packages of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector HCN is white (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is individually inspected for lighting the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are located near the multiple check pins on the decorative substrate on the center of the dish. It is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of 314. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. It should be noted that some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

Here, a white resist liquid is used as the color of the resist liquid solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, and a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The reason why yellow is adopted as the silk-printed paint of the part number corresponding to the full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10, which is the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, will be described. First, the reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and red, red becomes conspicuous when the background is white, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, the part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. When silk-printing on a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish with red paint, silk-printed with red paint on the white resist, with a full-color LED While the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are conspicuous, the combination of white and yellow (measures such as reduction of reflectance according to the second embodiment). In the configuration of When silk printing is performed on a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs that are silk-printed with a yellow paint on the white resist, are arranged. The area indicating the position, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are inconspicuous. The area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are the surface-side electronic components mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Is a front side notation part (sometimes simply referred to as "notation part"), and the front side notation part indicates the part number of the front side electronic component and the position where the front side electronic component is arranged. The attributes of the surface side electronic component such as the area shown (furthermore, the shape of the surface side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included. There is.).

Further, since the pachinko machine 1 is brilliantly light-emitting by the illumination by the light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are full-color LEDs capable of multicolor light emission. Yes, the light emission mode changes variously depending on whether it is turned on (light emitting) or turned off. Therefore, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has electrodes (so-called pads), through holes, and tests for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, and connectors. A white resist layer formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding pads, lands, etc. (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). Is formed, and further, a region indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, which makes it possible to identify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors on the solid white resist, and the full-color LEDs hLED1 to The part number corresponding to hLED10 is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint, so that the full-color LED is silk-printed with a yellow paint on a white resist when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off. In addition to being able to make the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 inconspicuous in the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor light emission is lit (light emission). Time), a region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, which are printed by silk printing with a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a yellow paint having a white reflectance very close to the white, are arranged. By combining the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 with the corresponding component numbers, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish can be maintained high.

When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the silk printing may be light yellow or dark yellow due to variations due to the printing machine, or it may appear orange, and silk. Since the ink companies that supply printing paints also have a range of yellow (yellow toward the bright side, yellow due to the dark side), yellow is designated as the silk printing paint for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. Even so, it does not become exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it exactly the same yellow), but it becomes a color with a wide range of yellow.

On the other hand, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the resistor Rr of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown, and the electronic components and electronic components are located near these areas. The corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing.

In the second embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax integrated on one semiconductor chip ( 314bx) has a black resin package. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

In addition, even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are made of a white resist by a solid white resist. Layers are formed. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate reflects the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

As described above, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are printed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the above and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. In the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 correspond to each other on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The part number (yellow letters and yellow numbers) and the area (yellow solid line) indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing, and the decorative substrate on the center of the plate is printed. The part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the 314. The difference is that the area (solid yellow line) indicating the position to be printed is printed as silk printing.

The white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It has become like. Further, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light, and the reflectance to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. In the case of printing, the silk printing printed in black reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75. The upper plate decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. , It is transparently formed, and when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), so that the various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 can be used. The player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is set as silk printing. , Unlike black, by printing on a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface in bright yellow, it helps to indicate the mounting position of the full-color LED on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface. It can be difficult to find a line (that is, an area indicating a position where a full-color LED is arranged) or a number that identifies a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED).

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, which is a bright color unlike black. By printing on a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, it is difficult for the player to see the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

In the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, which is different from black and is bright. When printing on a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface in yellow, the symbol indicating the polarity of the full-color LED (the symbol used in the circuit diagram (the symbol that can distinguish the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) Alternatively, a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) may be simplified) to clearly indicate the mounting orientation of the full-color LED.

Further, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color emit light from the full-color LED. It was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed as silk printing with a solid yellow line (not shown), and in the vicinity of this area, The part number corresponding to the electronic part or connector is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged has a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, and is printed on the LED mounting surface with a solid yellow line as silk printing. It was composed by printing on a solid white resist, but the area indicating the position to place the full-color LED is smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a square shape smaller than the full-color LED body, just one. It may be configured to have a thick line) and to be printed on a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface with a solid yellow line as silk printing. In this way, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED printed by silk printing is arranged is covered by the full-color LED main body, so that the yellow color surrounding the full-color LED main body is covered. The solid line disappears, which can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison between the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the hdLED1 to the full-color LED are on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Regions indicating the positions for arranging electronic components such as 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and in the vicinity of these regions. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402b of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic components such as 314ay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), which are not shown, and these areas. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing, in the vicinity. Further, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, which are not shown as silk screen printing, and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. The part numbers corresponding to are printed in yellow (or black), which are not shown as silk screen printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. ~ The part number corresponding to hdLED10 is a foil removal character (that is, a removal character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it (that is, In FIG. 266 (c), only the foil-free character LED7 is shown as the part number corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED7.)), And the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is formed. Foil removal area excluding each terminal (not shown) and wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the area formed by removing the copper foil excluding each terminal and wiring pattern (FIG.) In 266 (c), only the foil removal area LSLK7 is represented as an area corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED.))), And the white color is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The foil-removing area and the foil-removing character are covered with the resist of. Specifically, regions indicating positions for arranging hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and these foil removals are performed. LEDs 1 to LED 10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b as blank characters in the vicinity of the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is covered with a solid white resist to cover the foil removal region and the foil removal characters. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-free characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic components.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (that is, a wiring pattern) is formed except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) showing the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged. (Copper plane), which is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern), and a foil whose part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

Further, as described above, a white resist layer is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b by a solid white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (solid coating), are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspections for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, are individually performed (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the character is formed by the wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and the character is formed by removing the copper foil around the character). The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the maximum current are placed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various distributed resistors of the setting circuit 402bay are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and these areas are also printed. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267 (a)) on the lower left side decorative substrate. IC1 (FIG. 267 (FIG. 267)), which is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and has a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa. (A) is printed as silk screen printing on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line). Then, the region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is silk-printed with a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (see FIG. 267 (a)). The maximum current is set to the right in the vicinity of these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, as well as being printed on the white resist that is solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the circuit 402bay and the part numbers R1, R2, R3 (see FIG. 267 (a)) corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg are yellow (or black) as silk printing, and the LED on the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It is printed on a white resist that is solidly coated on the non-mounting surface 402by.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

Even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are made of a white resist by a solid white resist. Layers are formed. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil removal character (that is, a removal character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it) In addition, the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is not shown for each terminal and the foil removal area excluding the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, each terminal in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). And the area formed by removing the copper foil except for the wiring pattern), and the foil removal area and its foil are formed by a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Each of the omitted characters is covered. Specifically, regions indicating positions for arranging hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as foil removing regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, and these foils are removed. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate as blank characters in the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters are covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-free characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic components.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (that is, a wiring pattern) is formed except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) showing the position where the connector HCN is arranged. (Copper plane), which is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern), and a foil whose component number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the copper foil around it).

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The packages of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector HCN is white (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is individually inspected for lighting the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the character is formed by the wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and the character is formed by removing the copper foil around the character). The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. It should be noted that some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the resistor Rr of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are placed are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) that are not shown, and the electronic components and electronic components are located near these areas. The corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing.

In the third embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax integrated on one semiconductor chip ( 314bx) has a black resin package. As described above, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

Even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are made of a white resist with a solid white resist. Layers are formed. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate reflects the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

As described above, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the above and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. In the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 in a foil-free character (that is, that is). In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are made from the wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form the characters), and the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are used. In the foil removal area (that is, the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) excluding each terminal and the wiring pattern (not shown) in which the area indicating the placement position is not shown, the copper foil is removed except for each terminal and the wiring pattern. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist that is solidly coated, and the foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters are covered with each other. On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are foil-free characters (that is, the wiring pattern in which the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed is copper foil). The area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is excluded from each terminal (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown), while being formed as a character (extracted character formed by removing the copper foil around the character). It is formed as a foil removal region (that is, an region formed by removing the copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and the wiring pattern), and is formed as a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. LED mounting surface 314x is solidly painted The difference is that the white resist covers the foil removal area and the foil removal characters, respectively.

The white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It has become like. Further, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light, and the reflectance to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. In the case of printing, the silk printing printed in black reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75. The upper plate decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. , It is transparently formed, and when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), so that the various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 can be used. The player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player is formed as a foil-free character, and the player has no relation to the game. By forming an area indicating the position where the unrelated full-color LED is arranged as a foil-removing area and covering the foil-removing character and the foil-removing area with a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface, the full-color The LED wiring pattern, the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed), the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED), and Is formed of copper foil to have the same color, and is covered with a white resist formed on the LED mounting surface to indicate a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged). It can be difficult to find (the area indicating) or the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED).

Further, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player is formed as a foil-free character, and the player has nothing to do with the game. A full-color LED is formed by forming an area indicating a position where an unrelated full-color LED is arranged as a foil-removing area, and covering the foil-removing character and the foil-removing area with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the LED.

In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, it is difficult for the player to see the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil removal area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, since the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted, the substrate is reduced by reducing the plate cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing steps of the substrate. The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil removing region indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil removing region). , The symbol indicating the polarity of the full-color LED (the symbol used in the circuit diagram (the symbol that can distinguish the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) may be used, or the symbol used in the circuit diagram (the symbol that can distinguish the anode terminal and the cathode terminal). It may be configured to clearly indicate the mounting orientation of the full-color LED by adding (which may be simplified).

Further, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color emit light from the full-color LED. It was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is not shown for each terminal and the foil removal area (that is, the layer on which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane)) excluding the wiring pattern (not shown). ), The area is formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern), and the part number corresponding to the electronic component or connector is not shown in the vicinity of this area. That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with the wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and the characters are formed by removing the copper foil around the characters).

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil removing region indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil removing region). Although it was configured to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, in the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil removal area). , The shape may be smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a square shape smaller than the full-color LED main body). In this case, the punched characters and the foil punching area are not connected and are formed in mutually independent areas. In this way, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the foil-removing area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is covered by the full-color LED body, so that there is a foil-removing area surrounding the full-color LED body. It disappears and can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison between the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the hdLED1 to the full-color LED are on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Regions indicating the positions for arranging electronic components such as 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and in the vicinity of these regions. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402b of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic components such as 314ay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), which are not shown, and these areas. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing, in the vicinity. Further, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, which are not shown as silk screen printing, and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. The part numbers corresponding to are printed in yellow (or black), which are not shown as silk screen printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 268 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED. ~ The white resist-free character using a white resist coated twice with the part number corresponding to hdLED10 (FIG. 268 (c) shows only the white resist-free character as the part number corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. ), And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged is a white resist removing region using a white resist coated twice (in FIG. 268 (c), hdLED7 which is a full-color LED As a region corresponding to the above, only the white resist-free region LSLK7 is shown). Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-coated white resists, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of a white resist. It is covered (that is, the white resist liquid is applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the two coats of white resist). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a region indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged as the second time among the white resists coated twice (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers). A region (notch portion) to be instructed is included. As a region corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED shown in FIG. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the indicated notch mark.) Is masked as white resist punching regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and is in the vicinity of these white resist punching regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 to the left. Alternatively, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist while the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LEDs1 to LED10 are masked as white resist-free characters. It is covered. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white of the second layer. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is designated as the white resist removing area LSLK1 to LSLK10. In addition to being formed, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LEDs1 to LED10 are formed as white resist-free characters.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are the same. Since it is adopted, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the white resist of the second layer is passed through the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Looking at the substrate (the area excluding the copper foil portion and the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the white resist of the second layer is white in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap. In contrast to the dark resist, the white resist of the first layer is the second layer in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap due to masking. The white resist of the first layer looks pale because it is not covered with the white resist of the eyes and is exposed. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-free characters in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removing region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector LDLCN is formed in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the permeability of the white resist in the first layer and the permeability of the white resist in the second layer are the same, so that the first layer is used. The white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer In the region where the white resist of the eyes and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer looks dark, whereas the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer are masked. In the region where the white resist of the first layer does not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered by the white resist of the second layer and is exposed, so that the white resist of the first layer looks pale. It will be. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removing region in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It has become.

Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer and the second The refractive index of light with the white resist of the layer will change. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region of the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (solid coating), are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspections for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, are individually performed (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 269, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, A region indicating a position where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged is formed as a white resist removing region using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. In addition, the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are formed in the vicinity of these areas as white resist-less characters using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. .. Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-coated white resists, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. It is covered with a resist (that is, the white resist liquid is applied to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the two-coat white resists). Then, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a region (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers) indicating a position where, for example, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged as the second time among the white resists coated twice. In the white resist-free region LSLK as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in FIG. 269, the constant current drive circuit 402bax has pins 1 and 36. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark indicating the arrangement.) Is masked as the white resist punching region LSLKa, and a constant current is applied upward in the vicinity of these white resist punching regions LSLKa. In a state where IC1 (see FIG. 269 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax, is masked as white resist-free characters, the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is white. Covered with resist. As a result, a two-layer white resist is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, but the first layer. The entire area is covered with the white resist, and the entire area is covered except for the area masked by the white resist on the second layer, so that the masked area is recessed as a recess and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. As a region to be removed, a white resist removing region LSLKa is formed, and IC1 which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removing character.

The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is a white resist (not shown) in which a region indicating a position where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged is not shown. White resist punching letters R1, R2, which are formed as a punching region and whose component numbers corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as R3, and the part number corresponding to various electronic parts such as resistors such as dispersion resistors and capacitors (not shown) is formed as a white resist-less character (not shown). Further, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is formed as a white resist removing region (not shown) showing a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is formed in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a white resist-free character (not shown).

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are the same. Because the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, the LED non-mounting surface of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is passed through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the 402by substrate (the area excluding the copper foil portion and the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the second layer is in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap. The white resist of the first layer looks dark, whereas the white resist of the first layer is the first in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap due to masking. The white resist of the first layer looks pale because it is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-free characters formed on the white resist of the first layer can be identified. In addition to being able to identify the white resist-free region.

Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer and the second The refractive index of the light of the second layer of white resist will change. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LEDLCN is made of resin having a black, brown, or blue color. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so the LED non-mounting surface It is implemented in.

Even in the configuration of measures against the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are made of a white resist by a solid white resist. Layers are formed. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist removing character using a white resist coated twice, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged uses the white resist coated twice. It is formed as a white resist removing region. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is the first of the white resists coated twice, and the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is made of a white resist. It is covered (that is, the white resist liquid is applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish as the first of the two coats of white resist). Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is a region (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers) indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged as the second time among the white resists coated twice. A region (notch portion) to be instructed is included. For example, as an region corresponding to the hLED7 which is a full-color LED, the white resist removal region HSLK7 has a notch mark instructing the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED7 which is a full-color LED. A notch is formed at a corresponding position) is masked as white resist removing regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full-color LED in the vicinity of these white resist removing regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 to the right. The entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is covered with the white resist in a state where the LED1 to LED10, which are the part numbers corresponding to the hLED10, are masked as the white resist-free characters. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white of the second layer. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is designated as the white resist-free area HSLK1 to HSLK10. In addition to being formed, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and LEDs1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the hLED10, are formed as white resist-free characters.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are the same. Since it is used, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the white resist of the second layer is passed through the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. Looking at the base, the white resist of the second layer looks dark in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, whereas the white resist of the second layer looks dark, but the masked second layer. In the region where the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered by the white resist of the second layer and is exposed, so that the first layer is exposed. The white resist on the eyes will appear pale. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the characters without the white resist in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removing region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN is formed in the vicinity of this region. The numbers are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the permeability of the white resist in the first layer and the permeability of the white resist in the second layer are the same, so that the first layer is used. Light and shade are generated between the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer, and when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer In the region where the white resist of the eyes and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer looks dark, whereas the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer are masked. In the region where the white resist of the first layer does not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered by the white resist of the second layer and is exposed, so that the white resist of the first layer looks pale. It will be. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removing region in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It has become.

Further, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer and the second. The refractive index of light with the white resist of the layer will change. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region of the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The packages of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector HCN is white (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all.

Further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is individually inspected for lighting the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. Multiple check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and the part numbers corresponding to each of the multiple check pins are not shown in the vicinity of the multiple check pins. It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. It should be noted that some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersion resistors (not shown) The area indicating the position where the electronic components such as the above are arranged is formed as a white resist removing area using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, and these areas. The component number corresponding to the electronic component is formed in the vicinity as a white resist-free character using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are the same. Because the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is passed through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the base of 314y, in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer looks dark, but it is masked. In the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed. The white resist of the first layer looks pale. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-free characters formed on the white resist of the first layer can be identified. In addition to being able to identify the white resist-free region.

Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region in the white resist of the first layer and the white resist-removed region and the second layer. The refractive index of the light of the second layer of white resist will change. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-removed characters and the white resist-removed region of the white resist of the first layer are identified. You can do it.

Further, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is the same. The package is made of black resin. As described above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED is lowered.

In addition, even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are made of a white resist by a solid white resist. Layers are formed. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate reflects the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

As described above, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are placed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing, and are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. In the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is white with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 painted twice. In addition to being formed as a white resist removing character using a resist, a region indicating a position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is formed as a white resist removing region using a white resist coated twice. On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are formed as white resist-less characters using a white resist coated twice, and the full-color LED. The difference is that the region indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is formed as a white resist removing region using a white resist coated twice.

The white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It has become like. Further, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light, and the reflectance to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. In the case of printing, the silk printing printed in black reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75. The upper plate decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. , It is transparently formed, and when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), so that the various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 can be used. The player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-less character using a white resist coated twice with a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has nothing to do with the game for the player. The mounting position of the full-color LED is formed by forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, as the white resist removing area using the white resist coated twice. It is difficult to find the white resist-free area (that is, the area where the full-color LED is placed) or the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED). Can be done.

In addition, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-less character using a white resist coated twice with a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player. By forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, is arranged as the white resist-free area using the white resist coated twice, the full-color LED emits light. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing.

In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, a white resist removal area using a double-coated white resist indicating a number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and a mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area (area showing), and it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the steps of silk printing on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface can be omitted, respectively, so that the silk printing plate allowance and the substrate can be manufactured. By reducing the number of processes, it is possible to contribute to reducing the substrate manufacturing cost.

In the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removing region using a double-coated white resist indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged is indicated. When forming the region), a symbol indicating the polarity of the full-color LED (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) may be used, or a symbol used in the circuit diagram (anode terminal and cathode terminal). It may be configured to clearly indicate the mounting orientation of the full-color LED by adding a simplified symbol)).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color emit light from the full-color LED. It was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, a region indicating a position where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and a connector mounted on the LED mounting surface are arranged is formed as each terminal (not shown) and a white resist removing region (not shown), and is near this region. In addition, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface and component numbers corresponding to the connectors are formed as white resist-free characters (not shown).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the entire surface is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the first layer is covered. By covering the entire area except the area masked by the second layer of white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED or connector is placed is formed as the white resist removal area. Although the part number corresponding to the full-color LED or the connector is formed as a white resist-removed character, another method may be used to form the white resist-removed region and the white resist-removed character. .. For example, an area indicating a position where a full-color LED or a connector is placed after a white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of a decorative substrate only once or multiple times, and before the white resist dries. A method of forming as a white resist removing area by pressing the plate of the above, and forming as a white resist removing character by pressing the plate indicating the part number corresponding to the full color LED or the connector, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate and After the white resist is solidly applied to the non-LED mounting surface only once or multiple times, and after the white resist is dried, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED or the connector is placed is defined as the white resist removal area by laser irradiation. In addition to forming, a method of forming a part number corresponding to a full-color LED or a connector as a character without a white resist can be mentioned.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removing region using a double-coated white resist indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged is indicated. When the area) was formed, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED was arranged was configured to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, but the area indicating the position where the full-color LED was arranged was formed of the full-color LED. It may be configured to have a shape smaller than the outer shape (for example, a square shape smaller than the full-color LED main body, or simply one thick line). In this way, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is covered by the full-color LED main body, and the periphery of the full-color LED main body is also white in the second layer. Since the resist and the white resist of the first layer overlap each other and the white resist of the second layer becomes dark, it can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison between the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment and the configuration of measures such as reflectance reduction according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the hdLED1 to the full-color LED are on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Regions indicating the positions for arranging electronic components such as 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and in the vicinity of these regions. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402b of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed as silk printing in the vicinity of these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. The part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Areas indicating positions for arranging electronic components such as 314ay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are printed as silk printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), which are not shown, and these areas. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black), which is not shown as silk printing, in the vicinity. Further, as described above, the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, which are not shown as silk screen printing, and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. The part numbers corresponding to are printed in yellow (or black), which are not shown as silk screen printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 270 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED. ~ HdLED10 each of the 1st to 6th terminals, the foil removal reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the 1st terminal (that is, the reference is based on the wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). A circle symbol is created as the terminal symbol, and the foil removal reference terminal symbol formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol (Fig. 270 (c) shows the terminals 1 to 6 of hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. Of these, only the foil removal reference terminal symbol PRO is shown near the position corresponding to the first terminal.)), And the areas showing the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not shown and are not shown. In the foil removal region excluding the wiring pattern (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the region formed by removing the copper foil excluding each terminal and the wiring pattern (FIG. 270 (c)) Only the foil removal area LSLK7 is represented as an area corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED.))), And the foil removal area is formed by a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. And its foil removal reference terminal symbol are covered respectively. Specifically, regions indicating positions for arranging hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and these foil removals are performed. It is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b as a foil removal reference terminal symbol in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal of hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED in the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, and is formed on the lower left side. The foil removal area and the foil removal reference terminal symbol are covered with a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern forming the foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. It should be noted that the foil removal reference terminal symbol is not formed in the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged (that is, in the foil removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10), but is formed in the so-called beta land (board ground). When arranged in such a manner, the circle symbol itself is formed as a foil remover.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (that is, a wiring pattern) (that is, a wiring pattern) is formed except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) showing the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged. In the layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, it is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil), and within this region, the first terminal of each terminal of the connector LDLCN. Foil removal reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to (that is, a circle symbol is created as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed), and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. The foil removal reference terminal symbol) is formed.

Further, as described above, a white resist layer is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b by a solid white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the connector LDUCN, which has a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (solid coating), are mounted. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all. Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b does not have a region printed by silk printing at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, lighting inspections for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, are individually performed (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to a wiring pattern. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, regarding the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in the configuration of measures for the reflectance reduction and the like according to the fifth embodiment, the reflectance reduction and the like according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 267. It is the same as the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in the configuration of the countermeasures described in the above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are made of a white resist by a solid white resist. Layers are formed. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b enhances the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. You can do it.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 270 (b), on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are used. Foil removal reference terminal symbol (that is, a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) as the reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the 1st terminal of the 1st to 6th terminals, respectively. A foil removal reference terminal symbol (a foil removal reference terminal symbol formed by forming a circle symbol and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol) is formed, and each terminal (not shown) indicates a position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged. And is formed as a foil removal region excluding a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a region formed by removing the copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and the wiring pattern). The foil removal area and the foil removal reference terminal symbol are each covered with a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are formed as the foil removing regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, and these foils are removed. A foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 in the area HSLK1 to HSLK10 as a foil removal reference terminal symbol in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and is formed on the center of the plate. The foil removal area and the foil removal reference terminal symbol are covered with a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314. The wiring pattern forming the foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. The foil removal reference terminal symbol is not formed in the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged (that is, in the foil removal areas HSLK1 to HSLK10), but is formed in the so-called beta land (board ground). When arranged in such a manner, the circle symbol itself is formed as a foil remover.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (that is, a wiring pattern) is formed except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) showing the position where the connector HCN is arranged. In the layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, it is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil), and within this region, the first terminal of each terminal of the connector HCN. Foil removal reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to (that is, a circle symbol is created as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed), and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. The foil removal reference terminal symbol) is formed.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is covered with a white resist. The packages of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector HCN is white (also called a natural color), which is white (natural). It is made of resin (color) that is recognized to be the same color as (color). That is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized to be the same color) as a white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface are mounted. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) having no white color and the connectors having no white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color have reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so they are placed on the LED mounting surface. Not implemented at all. Further, there is no region printed by silk printing on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate.

Further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is individually inspected for lighting the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate (for example, 1). It can be performed for each LED element for the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to a wiring pattern. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed. It should be noted that some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, regarding the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish in the configuration of measures for reducing reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the configuration of measures for reducing reflectance according to the third embodiment described above. The configuration is the same as that of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Even in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish are made of a white resist by a solid white resist. Layers are formed. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate reflects the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). It is possible to increase the rate.

As described above, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are placed on the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the above and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. In the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are not formed at all on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and , The foil removal reference terminal symbol (that is, the wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) is circled as the reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the 1st terminal of hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs. A foil removal reference terminal symbol) is formed by forming a symbol and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol), and each terminal and the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are not shown. It is formed as a foil removal region excluding a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a region formed by removing the copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and the wiring pattern). The foil removal area and the foil removal reference terminal symbol are covered with a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and further, the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is covered. The part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are not formed at all, and the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are located near the positions corresponding to the 1st terminals of the 1st to 6th terminals, respectively. Foil removal Reference terminal symbol (that is, a circle symbol is created as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed), and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed. Foil removal reference terminal symbol) is formed, and Each terminal and wiring pattern in the foil removal area (that is, the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) excluding each terminal (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown) in which the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is not shown. The foil removal area and its foil removal reference terminal are formed by a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish. It differs in that each symbol is covered.

The white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It has become like. Further, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate causes the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to emit light, and the reflectance to the front (that is, the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300). Can be increased. Therefore, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. In the case of printing, the silk printing printed in black reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, which causes a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75. The upper plate decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. , It is transparently formed, and when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), so that the various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 can be used. The player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player is not formed at all, and the part number has nothing to do with the game for the player. A foil-removing area (as described above, in this foil-removing area, a region indicating a position for arranging a full-color LED that does not have a foil is formed as a foil-removing area and is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface. By covering the foil removal reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the 1st terminal of the full-color LED, the wiring pattern of the full-color LED and the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the full-color LED) are covered. The area indicating the position where the LED is placed) and the foil removal reference terminal symbol formed near the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal of the full-color LED are formed of copper foil to make them the same color, and the LED is mounted. By being covered with a white resist formed on the surface, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed) can be found, or it corresponds to the first terminal of the full-color LED. It can be difficult to find the foil removal reference terminal symbol formed near the position.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED which has nothing to do with the game for the player is not formed at all, and has nothing to do with the game for the player. By forming an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed as a foil-removing area and covering the foil-removing area with a white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface, the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is increased. It is possible to prevent the decrease.

In the configuration of the countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the same action and effect as the configuration of the measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, it is difficult for the player to see the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil removal area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

Further, in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, since the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted, the substrate can be reduced by reducing the plate cost of silk printing and the number of substrate manufacturing steps. The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the foil removal reference terminal symbol (that is, the foil removal reference terminal symbol (that is,) is located near the position corresponding to the 1st terminal among the terminals (1st to 6th terminals) of the full color LED. , A circle symbol is created as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the foil removal reference terminal symbol formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol). By forming the LED, it is possible to instruct the mounting direction of the full-color LED on the LED mounting surface. In addition, the foil removal reference terminal symbol (that is, the wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed is a circle symbol as the reference terminal symbol) near the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the connector. It is also possible to indicate the mounting direction of the connector on the LED mounting surface by forming a foil removing reference terminal symbol) formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol.

Here, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are each of full-color LEDs. Foil removal reference terminal symbol (that is, the reference terminal with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) near the position corresponding to the 1st terminal among the terminals (1st to 6th terminals) A circle symbol is created as a symbol, and a foil removal reference terminal symbol formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol) is formed.

When a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surface of the decorative board such as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish, the LED mounting surface of the decorative board Is required to be arranged in the vicinity of the full-color LED such as LED1, LED2, ..., LED50, etc. as a part number corresponding to the plurality of full-color LEDs.

However, the more full-color LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the more the part numbers corresponding to the plurality of full-color LEDs such as LEDs1, LED2, ..., LED50, and the respective terminals of the plurality of full-color LEDs. It is necessary to secure an area for arranging the reference terminal symbol and the reference terminal symbol in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the terminal 1 of (terminals 1 to 6), and it is difficult to secure this area. Therefore, a notation method in which a part number corresponding to a plurality of full-color LEDs and a reference terminal symbol in the vicinity of a position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals (terminals 1 to 6) of the plurality of full-color LEDs are used in combination. When LED1, LED2, ..., LED50, etc. are described as foil removal reference terminal symbols in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the 1st terminal of each terminal (1st to 6th terminals) of the full-color LED. , LED1, LED2, ..., LED50, etc. must be separated so that the foil removal reference terminal symbol and the wiring pattern do not come into contact with each other and are electrically connected, and LED1, LED2, ..., LED50, etc. It is necessary to route the wiring pattern so as to avoid the foil removal reference terminal symbol (bending the wiring pattern, providing a through hole, etc.), and the wiring pattern is restricted.

Therefore, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 above the center of the dish are each terminal of a full-color LED. Foil removal reference terminal symbol (that is, the reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) near the position corresponding to the 1st terminal among (terminals 1 to 6) By forming a circle symbol as a foil removal reference terminal symbol formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol), the area where the foil removal reference terminal symbol is placed is kept small, and the foil removal standard Since the need to route the wiring pattern so as to avoid the terminal symbols is suppressed, it is possible to perform artwork (design) without being restricted by the routing of the wiring pattern. As a result, it is not necessary to provide unnecessary through holes on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, thereby suppressing a decrease in the area to which the white resist liquid is applied. This can contribute to increasing the reflectance of the full-color LED to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300).

In the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, in the foil removing region indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil removing region). , The symbol indicating the polarity of the full-color LED (the symbol used in the circuit diagram (the symbol that can distinguish the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) may be used, or the symbol used in the circuit diagram (the symbol that can distinguish the anode terminal and the cathode terminal). It may be configured to clearly indicate the mounting orientation of the full-color LED by adding (which may be simplified).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, which reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, and connectors that do not have white color emit light from the full-color LED. It was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in the region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is not shown for each terminal and the wiring pattern (not shown) is excluded from the foil removal area (that is, the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, it is formed as a region) formed by removing the copper foil, and in this region, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the electronic component or connector. (That is, in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, make a circle symbol as the reference terminal symbol with the wiring pattern that is copper foil, and remove the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. The foil removal reference terminal symbol) to be formed is formed.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, in the foil removing region indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil removing region). Although it was configured to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, in the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil removal area). , The shape may be smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a square shape smaller than the full-color LED main body). In this case, the foil removal reference terminal symbol (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, a circle symbol is created as the reference terminal symbol with the wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed. The formed foil removal reference terminal symbol) and the foil removal area are not connected and are formed in mutually independent areas. In this way, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the foil-removing area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is covered by the full-color LED body, so that there is a foil-removing area surrounding the full-color LED body. It disappears and can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, a foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed on the LED mounting surface in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the full-color LED. However, the mounting directions of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface are almost the same (that is, the mounting directions of the plurality of full-color LEDs are the same for the mounting worker or the automatic machine (the ones mounted in the opposite direction). If the rule is provided in advance), the foil removal reference terminal symbol is placed on the LED mounting surface near the position corresponding to the 1st terminal of each terminal of any one of the multiple full-color LEDs. (For example, the foil is formed in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the 1st terminal of the hdLED7 terminals 1 to 6 which are the full-color LEDs shown in FIGS. 270 (a) and 270 (c). The punching reference terminal symbol PRO), the foil punching reference terminal symbol may be formed on the LED mounting surface in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of one or more full-color LEDs determined in advance (for example). The foil removal reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the 1st terminal among the 1st to 6th terminals of the hdLED1, hdLED2, hdLED9, and hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs shown in FIG. 270 (a).

Further, in the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface has a foil removal reference terminal symbol and each of the connectors in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the full-color LED. A foil removal reference terminal symbol was formed in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals. That is, the same foil removal reference terminal symbol was formed. This foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed by making a circle symbol as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. It was. Therefore, as a reference terminal symbol for removing foil near the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the full-color LED, a circle symbol is used as a reference terminal symbol for the wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. A layer in which a wiring pattern is formed as a foil removal reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the connector, while the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed. In (copper plane), a square symbol may be created as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the copper foil around the outside of the square symbol may be removed to form the copper foil. In this case, the part number of the full-color LED or the part number of the connector may be included in the foil removal reference terminal symbol.

For example, each foil removal reference formed in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b shown in FIG. 270 (a). For the terminal symbol, from the lower side to the upper side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the decorative substrate 402b on the lower left side, for 10 full-color LEDs, the part numbers of the full-color LEDs are serial numbers 1 to 10. It should be placed inside each circle symbol. In other words, the numbers are circled. In this case, the outer circumference of the circle symbol, the area extending from the inner portion by a predetermined distance along the outer circumference of the circle symbol to the outer circumference of the number having a predetermined size, and the portion necessary for forming the number ( For example, in the case of the number 8, it is formed by removing the copper foil in the upper and lower holes having two round shapes). Further, for the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the number 1 is arranged inside the square symbol inside the square symbol. That is, the number is surrounded by a square. In this case, the outer circumference of the square symbol, the area extending from the inner portion by a predetermined distance along the outer circumference of the square symbol to the outer circumference of the number having a predetermined size, and the portion necessary for forming the number ( For example, in the case of the number 8, it is formed by pulling out the copper foil in the upper and lower holes having two round shapes). In addition, alphabets A to Z (uppercase letters) and alphabets a to z (lowercase letters) may be used instead of numbers. Since a maximum of 26 part numbers can be indicated in one letter in the alphabet, it is possible to contribute to keeping the area of the foil removal reference terminal symbol small. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b adopting this aspect is individually inspected for lighting the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b (). For example, the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED, are subjected to each LED element). A plurality of check pins (not shown) that can be formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to a wiring pattern, and a foil removal reference corresponding to each of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. The terminal symbol is formed. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, a foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed on the LED mounting surface in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the full-color LED. As a reference terminal symbol for foil removal, a circle symbol was created as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that was copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern was formed, and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol was removed. .. Instead of this circle symbol, for example, numbers 1 to 1 are used for 10 full-color LEDs from the lower side to the upper side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b shown in FIG. 270 (a). It may be a serial number of 10. In this case, the copper foil in the outer periphery of the number (serial number) and the part necessary for forming the number (for example, in the case of the number 8, the part of the hole having two round shapes at the top and bottom) is pulled out. It is formed. In this way, the serial number can indicate the location of the first terminal of each terminal of the full-color LED, and can indicate the part number that identifies one of the ten full-color LEDs. In addition, alphabets A to Z (uppercase letters) and alphabets a to z (lowercase letters) may be used instead of numbers. Since a maximum of 26 part numbers can be indicated in one letter in the alphabet, it is possible to contribute to keeping the area of the foil removal reference terminal symbol small. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b adopting this aspect is individually inspected for lighting the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b (). For example, the LED element that emits red (R), the LED element that emits green (G), and the LED element that emits blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED, are subjected to each LED element). A plurality of check pins (not shown) that can be formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to a wiring pattern, and a foil removal reference corresponding to each of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. The terminal symbol is formed. The check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when the operator performing the inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and become conductive, so that various inspections can be performed.

Further, in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, regarding the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the measures for reducing the reflectance according to the third embodiment described above are taken. The configuration is the same as the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has a reduced reflectance according to the third embodiment described above. It is the same as the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish in the configuration of the measures such as In 314y, the area indicating the position where the electronic component is arranged is printed by a solid yellow line (or a solid black line) as silk printing, and the part number corresponding to the electronic component is silk-printed in the vicinity of these areas. It is printed in yellow (or black). On the other hand, for example, the huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402a of the left side upper decorative board 402a, have the LED non-mounting surface of the left side lower decorative board 402b as described above. The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb mounted on the 402by controls the constant current to flow, and the LED constant current drive circuit is not mounted at all.

For this reason, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment is decorated on the lower left side in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. Similar to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, the positions of the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are close to the positions corresponding to the 1st terminals of the 1st to 6th terminals, respectively. The foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed on the surface, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are arranged is formed as a foil removal area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) on the left side. The LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a is covered with a solid white resist to cover the foil removal region and the foil removal reference terminal symbol. Further, on the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side in the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, a foil removal reference is provided near the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the connector (not shown). Each terminal symbol is formed.

That is, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit is not mounted on the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side in the configuration for measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. Even if the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are mounted on the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side in the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance related to the form, the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are terminal 1 to 6, respectively. A foil removal reference terminal symbol may be formed near the position corresponding to the first terminal of the number terminals, or a foil removal reference terminal symbol may be formed near the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the connector (not shown). However, the routing of the wiring pattern for the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 and the connector (not shown) is unlikely to be complicated, and the foil removal reference terminal symbol is unlikely to interfere with the routing of the wiring pattern.

Further, a white resist layer is formed on the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side in the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment by a solid white resist. Each of the five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector (not shown) has a white housing (also referred to as a natural color). , A color recognized to be the same color as white (natural color)). That is, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment has the same color (same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally coats) the entire surface. HuLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs that are electronic components having a package of (color recognized as being present), and the same color (color recognized as being the same color) as the white resist that covers (solidally paints) the entire surface A connector (not shown) having a housing is mounted.

Since the plurality of heat dispersion resistors constituting the heat dispersion circuit 402ac do not have white color, they are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side in the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. Has been done. Unlike the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, the plurality of thermal dispersion resistors constituting the thermal dispersion circuit 402ac have no polarity. Therefore, the decorative substrate on the left side in the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. On the LED non-mounting surface of 402a, no foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed near each position of the plurality of thermal dispersion resistors, and the part numbers corresponding to the plurality of thermal dispersion resistors are yellow (or silk-printed) as silk printing. , Black) and are not printed at all.

That is, there is no area printed by silk printing on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side in the configuration of the measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. As a result, the process of silk printing can be omitted, so that the substrate manufacturing cost can be reduced by reducing the plate cost for silk printing and the number of substrate manufacturing processes.

Further, also in the configuration of measures for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side by a solid white resist. It is formed. As a result, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side enhances the reflectance of the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by emitting light. Can be done.

It should be noted that the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side in the configuration for measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment corresponds to the first terminal among the terminals of huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs. A foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed in the vicinity of the position where the LED is to be removed, and a foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the connector (not shown). That is, the same foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed. This foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. There is. Therefore, as a foil removal reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, the wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed is used as a reference. A circle symbol is created as a terminal symbol and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed to form it, whereas a wiring pattern is used as a foil removal reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the connector. In the layer (copper plane) on which the copper foil is formed, a square symbol may be created as a reference terminal symbol in a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the copper foil around the outside of the square symbol may be removed. In this case, the part number of the full-color LED or the part number of the connector may be included in the foil removal reference terminal symbol.

For example, for each foil removal reference terminal symbol formed near the position corresponding to the first terminal of huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side. From the lower side to the upper side of the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, the part numbers of the full-color LEDs are arranged inside the circle symbols for the five full-color LEDs. To be done. In other words, the numbers are circled. In this case, the outer circumference of the circle symbol, the area extending from the inner portion by a predetermined distance along the outer circumference of the circle symbol to the outer circumference of the number having a predetermined size, and the portion necessary for forming the number ( For example, in the case of the number 4, it is formed by removing the copper foil in (a portion of one triangular hole). Further, for a connector (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side, the number 1 is arranged inside the square symbol inside the square symbol. That is, the number is surrounded by a square. In this case, the outer circumference of the square symbol, the area extending from the inner portion by a predetermined distance along the outer circumference of the square symbol to the outer circumference of the number having a predetermined size, and the portion necessary for forming the number ( For example, in the case of the number 4, it is formed by pulling out the copper foil in (a portion of one triangular hole). In addition, alphabets A to Z (uppercase letters) and alphabets a to z (lowercase letters) may be used instead of numbers. Since a maximum of 26 part numbers can be indicated in one letter in the alphabet, it is possible to contribute to keeping the area of the foil removal reference terminal symbol small.

Further, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side in the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment corresponds to the first terminal among the terminals of huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs. A foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed in the vicinity of the position where the LED is to be removed, and a foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the connector (not shown). That is, the same foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed. This foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. There is. Therefore, instead of this circle symbol, for example, a serial number of numbers 1 to 5 may be used for five full-color LEDs from the lower side to the upper side of the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a on the left side. In this case, it is formed by pulling out the copper foil around the outside of the number (serial number) and the part necessary for forming the number (for example, in the case of the number 4, one triangular hole part). To. In this way, the serial number can indicate the location of the first terminal of each terminal of the full-color LED, and can indicate the part number that identifies one of the five full-color LEDs. In addition, alphabets A to Z (uppercase letters) and alphabets a to z (lowercase letters) may be used instead of numbers. Since a maximum of 26 part numbers can be indicated in one letter in the alphabet, it is possible to contribute to keeping the area of the foil removal reference terminal symbol small.

In the above-described embodiment, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. 264, the end edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402box is used. , The left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into group 1 and group 2. , The configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, but it can also be applied to an elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 include decorative boards provided on various production units of the game board 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 passes a constant current through eight full-color LEDs to control light emission, but the light emission is not limited to the full-color LEDs and is white. , Red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green or the like may be a single color LED. Monochromatic LEDs can also be used. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control the light emission of up to 24 single-color LEDs.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the direct current + 12V supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3, but the LED constant current drive circuit The current allowable range of the linear power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply provided in the constant current drive circuit (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 261). It may be used as a voltage for lighting the LED inside. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, up to one single color LED (for example, one color LED (for example,) within the current allowable range of the linear power supply for one output channel). When an LED (LED other than the red LED) is electrically connected, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the monochromatic LED, and the monochromatic LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the thermal dispersion resistance of the thermal dispersion circuit described above. Further, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, up to two single-color LEDs (for example, for example, within the current allowable range of the linear power supply) for one output channel. When the red LED) is electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply is configured to be input to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the thermal dispersion resistance of the thermal dispersion circuit described above. The decorative substrate configured in this way can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to the decorative substrate provided in the game board 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, DC + 12V supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channel of the constant current drive circuit. Of LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full-color LED for one output channel is electrically connected via the thermal dispersion resistance of the thermal dispersion circuit described above. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is 2 to 3. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, it is supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 instead of the DC + 12V supplied (output) from the power supply board 630. DC + 35V may be used as the voltage for lighting the LED. The decorative substrate configured in this way can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to the decorative substrate provided in the game board 5.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the door. When the frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative board is large, so that the constant current drive circuit The edge of the land pattern is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. The end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit for any one of the frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, or any two decorative substrates. The sides may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side of the decorative substrate. Then, in addition to the full-color LED provided on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, for example, another right decorative substrate on which two full-color LEDs are mounted is directly controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 may directly mount another left decorative substrate on which, for example, one full-color LED is mounted, in addition to the full-color LED provided therein, by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. The light emission may be controlled.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided on the door frame 3. The LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in each decorative body are solidly coated with a white resist, but instead, they may be printed by white silk printing. In this case, after printing the entire LED mounting surface and LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates by white silk printing, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is designated as silk printing. It will be printed in yellow (or black) respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided. On the LED non-mounting surface, the area corresponding to the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates was printed as silk printing with a yellow chain line (or a black chain line), but the mounting position of the full-color LED A symbol indicating the polarity of the full-color LED (used in the circuit diagram) on the auxiliary line indicating (that is, when printing the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed as silk printing with the yellow chain line (or the black chain line)). A full-color LED may be added (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) or a simplified symbol (a symbol that can distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) used in the circuit diagram. It may be configured to specify the mounting orientation of.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205 (for example, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back provided in the back lower left effect unit 3200). Lower left decorative board 3203, back lower right decorative board 3253 provided in back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle first decorative board 3322 and back lower middle second decorative board 3329 provided in back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, back upper Back-up front decorative board 3422 provided in the production unit 3400, back-up rear decorative board 3452 of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, back-back left decorative board 3522 provided in the back-back left decorative body unit 3520, back-back right decorative body unit 3620 The back front right decorative substrate 3622 provided in the back front left decorative substrate unit 3710, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710, and the back front right decorative substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decorative body unit 3810) are the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (front surface). A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution (on the back surface), and a white resist layer is formed. A position where a full-color LED, a corresponding part number, and a full-color LED are arranged so that a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) can be identified on a white resist coated on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate. The notation part such as the area indicating is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, and the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the above-mentioned second embodiment (full-color LED, corresponding part number, and full-color LED are arranged). The area indicating the position can prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED having nothing to do with the game for the player, and the full-color The configuration was the same as that of (the point that measures such as a decrease in reflectance were taken so that the area indicating the position where the LED was arranged could be prevented from being visually recognized by the player), but the configurations were the same as those in FIGS. 107 to 205. When electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and capacitors are mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 107, each decorative board provided on the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205. On the white resist that is solidly painted on the back surface (back surface), the areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are placed are printed as silk printing by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and in the vicinity of these areas. Corresponds to electronic parts The part numbers may be printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing, or a modified example of the configuration of measures for reducing reflectance according to the second embodiment described above may be adopted. .. Further, for each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205, the above-described configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment (including a modified example) and the third implementation. The configuration of measures for reducing reflectance according to the embodiment (including modified examples), the configuration of measures for reducing reflectance according to the fourth embodiment (including modified examples), and the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. Any one of the configurations of measures against deterioration (including modified examples) may be adopted.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including various substrates supplied from a power source from a power supply substrate and capable of controlling illumination has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in the game machine, a line for transmitting power to various boards and a line for transmitting control signals are routed, and the length of the line becomes long, so that various boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

Further, conventionally, a game machine including a front frame configured to cover a window that opens the game board back and forth with a fluoroscopic protective plate has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (paragraph [0014]). , And Fig. 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame becomes thin, and the decorative substrate accommodated in the left and right sides also becomes a strip-shaped one. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, so that the decorative substrate provided on the game board also becomes a strip-shaped one. However, when the light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emitting control means to the light emitting means.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a movable accessory device that is arranged on standby below the front of the display screen of the effect display device and that operates during the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058064). Gazette (paragraph [0040], FIGS. 4, 8, and 9). A decorative substrate on which a light emitting means facing the back surface of the light emitting portion (lens) on the design surface is mounted is mounted in the movable accessory device. However, there is a risk that the player may see a number for specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, or the like through the light emitting unit.

Further, conventionally, a game machine to which a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted is attached (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with a variation of the effect using the light emission effect by such a light emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the reflectance is lowered by a number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, or the like, and the decoration is made. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

Further, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a decorative substrate on which electronic components such as a light emitting body (light emitting means) facing the back surface of a light emitting unit (lens) are mounted is provided on the frame side or the game board side (for example). , JP-A-2015-058064 (paragraph [0011], paragraph [0040], FIG. 1, FIG. 2, FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9). However, there is a risk that the auxiliary symbol that identifies the electronic component mounted on the decorative substrate, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, is visually recognized by the player through the light emitting unit.

[Silk printing with bright paint on the white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative substrate provided on the game board and door frame]
Next, in the case where the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate is printed by silk printing with a light-colored paint and each decorative substrate is provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, FIGS. 107 to 107 to Each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 205 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “each decorative board provided in the game board 5”) and measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above. Each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 adopting the above configuration will be described.

[Silk printing with bright paint on the white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative substrate provided on the game board]
First, as each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205, for example, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 shown in FIG. 145, and the back lower left effect shown in FIG. 159. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 provided in the unit 3200, the lower right decorative substrate 3253 provided in the lower back right effect unit 3250 shown in FIG. 159, and the lower lower middle decorative substrate 3320 provided in FIG. The decorative substrate 3322 and the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 provided in the back upper effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 171, and the back upper elevating decorative body unit provided in the back upper effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 173. The back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 of 3450, the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided in the back-rear left decorative unit 3520 shown in FIG. 181, and the back-rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided in the back-rear right decorative unit 3620 shown in FIG. , The back front left decorative substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decorative unit 3710 shown in FIG. 193, the back front right decorative substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decorative unit 3810 shown in FIG. 197, and the like, as described above. , A white resist formed by applying a white resist solution on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A full-color layer is formed, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) can be identified on a white resist coated on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. Notations such as the part number corresponding to the LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed with yellow paint by silk printing. That is, each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 has the same configuration as the configuration for measures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment described above, and the reflectance reduction and the like according to the second embodiment described above. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED from being lowered by the effect of the configuration of the countermeasures, that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. At the same time, it has an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED which has nothing to do with the game for the player. (Measures such as reduced reflectance have been taken).

Here, a member arranged in front of the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 will be briefly described. The front surface (front surface) of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is shown in FIG. As shown in 145, a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide emitting plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 having a translucent portion (region) and a transparent portion (region), and a transparent plate-shaped decorative sheet 3112 toward the front. The flat decorative bodies 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered with transparent members on the game board side such as the light guide emitting plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111. As shown in FIG. 159, the front surface (front surface) of the back bottom left decorative substrate 3203 provided in the back bottom left effect unit 3200 is a transparent back bottom left decorative body 3202 and a transparent back bottom left rotation. The decorative bodies 3201 are arranged in this order, and are covered with transparent members on the game board side such as the lower back left decorative body 3202 and the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201. As shown in FIG. 159, the front surface (front surface) of the back bottom right decorative substrate 3253 provided in the back bottom right effect unit 3250 is a transparent back bottom right decorative body 3252 and a transparent back bottom right rotation. The decorative bodies 3251 are arranged in this order, and are covered with transparent members on the game board side such as the lower back right decorative body 3252 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251.

Further, as shown in FIG. 165, the front surface (surface) of the lower back middle decorative substrate 3322 provided in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 has a transparent inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 and a frontward direction. The transparent under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 is arranged in this order, and is covered with a game board-side transparent member such as an inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 and an under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310. As shown in FIG. 165, a transparent lower back middle decorative body 3328 is arranged on the front surface (surface) of the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329 provided in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, and the lower back middle decorative body 3328 is arranged. It is covered with a transparent member on the game board side. As shown in FIG. 171, the front surface (surface) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 provided in the back-up effect unit 3400 is a transparent back-up front decoration body 3421 or a transparent back-top front decoration body toward the front. 3421 and the transparent back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as the back-up front decoration body 3421 and the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410. As shown in FIG. 173, the front surface (front surface) of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 provided in the back-up effect unit 3400 is a transparent back-up rear decorative body 3451. Then, they are arranged in the order of the transparent back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440, and are covered with the game board-side transparent members such as the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3451 and the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440.

Further, as shown in FIG. 181, the front surface (front surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is a transparent back rear left decorative body 3521 and a transparent back. It is arranged in the order of the rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and is covered with a game board side transparent member such as the back rear left decorative body 3521 and the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510. As shown in FIG. 188, the front surface (front surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided in the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is a transparent back rear right decorative body 3621 and a transparent back rear right. They are arranged in the order of the rotating decorative body 3610, and are covered with transparent members on the game board side such as the back rear right decorative body 3621 and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610. As shown in FIG. 193, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decorative unit 3710 is a transparent flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3713 and a frame-shaped shutter. The support member 3712, the shutter unit 3730, and the frame-shaped front cover 3711 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a transparent member on the game board side such as the back front left decorative body 3713. As shown in FIG. 197, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decorative body unit 3810 is a transparent flat plate-shaped back front right decorative body 3813 and a frame-shaped shutter. The support member 3812, the shutter unit 3830, and the frame-shaped front cover 3811 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a transparent member on the game board side such as the back front right decorative body 3813.

As described above, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is covered with the game board side transparent member. As described above, a white resist solution is applied to form a white coating film on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating film, which is covered with the game board side transparent member.

Since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 mounted on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5. An LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) changes its light emitting mode in various ways depending on whether it is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can visually recognize the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 through the transparent member on the game board side, and the player can enjoy the game. There is a risk that the interest will be reduced, and it is inefficient that the effect member provided with the decorative substrate on which the LED that turns off is mounted cannot contribute to the progress of the effect.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, each decoration provided on the game board 5 is provided in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor light emission) mounted on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 are turned off. The white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the substrate makes the transparent member on the game board side look as if it were a white member. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the gaming board 5 effectively reflects external light. The world of pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) by emitting outside light of various colors from the transparent member on the game board side to the outside. The view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, since the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is covered with the transparent member on the game board side, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 ( The white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is off makes it as if the transparent member on the game board side is a white member. You can see it. As a result, even when each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, even when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 can effectively reflect and emit external light, external light of various colors can be emitted from the transparent member on the game board side. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily destroyed by emitting to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, as described above, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating film, which is covered with a transparent member on the game board side. Among the transparent members on the game board side, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, Back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back top back rotation decoration 3440, back top rear decoration 3451, back back left rotation decoration 3510, back back left decoration 3521, back back right rotation decoration As described above, the body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 are transparently formed and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. In one petal of a cherry blossom, the petals are formed. In line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center to the periphery of the machine. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed. In other words, among the transparent members on the game board side, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the lower back right decorative body 3252, and the lower back middle rotating decoration. Body 3310, back-up front rotating decoration 3410, back-up front decoration 3421, back-up rear rotation decoration 3440, back-up rear decoration 3451, back-back left-rotating decoration 3510, back-back left decoration 3521, back-back The right-handed decorative body 3610 and the back-back right decorative body 3621 are formed transparently, and a shade region having a pink color is formed. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 becomes a white background. , Pink shade area emerges from this white background, decorative sheet 3112, lower back left rotating decoration 3201, lower back left decorative body 3202, lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, lower back right decorative body 3252, lower back Medium rotating decoration 3310, back upper front rotating decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back upper back rotating decoration 3440, back upper rear decoration 3451, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back left decoration 3521 , The back-back right rotating decoration body 3610, and the back-back right decoration body 3621 can provide the player with a three-dimensional modeling beauty.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the metal decorative portion (golden material) such as the metal decorative portion 3111d, the metal decorative portion 3310a, the metal decorative portion 3711a, and the metal decorative portion 3811a is formed by hot stamping a golden metal foil. While it is formed by foil stamping, a solid white resist is applied to the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate arranged behind each decorative body on which such a metal decorative portion (golden material) is formed. On the top, the front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint. Since gold is a color like gold and shines yellow like gold, the yellow color of the front surface side notation portion is similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3111d. In the game machine, in addition to the obstacle nail N using brass as the golden material and the metal decorative part formed by the foil stamping by the hot stamping described above, for example, a yellow material (for example, transparent) on silver plating. Examples thereof include a member on which a yellow resin having light properties, a yellow printed matter) is placed, a golden printed matter, and the like.

[Example of arranging a golden material (metal decorative part) in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent area or the like arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and surrounding the transparent area with a golden material (metal decorative part). ]
Further, as each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, for example, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 provided in the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, and the back lower middle middle number. (Ii) As described above, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3329, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decorative unit 3710, and the back front right decorative substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decorative unit 3810 is white. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying the resist solution of the above, and this solid coating is applied. The front side notation part that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint on the white resist, and a metal decorative part having a metallic luster is arranged in the vicinity. As described above, the front surface side notation portion makes it possible to identify the surface side electronic components mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, and the component numbers of the front surface side electronic components. , Attributes of the surface-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is placed (Furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, It may include the model of the electronic component on the front side.).

For example, when the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is described, the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 faces forward as shown in FIG. 145. The transparent flat plate-shaped light guide emitting plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 having a translucent portion (region) and the transparent portion (region), and the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order. The light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111 are covered with transparent members on the game board side. The entire decorative body 3111 except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster is formed to be colorless and transparent. The metal decorative portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment), and is printed by silk printing on a white resist coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Since the front side notation that makes it possible to identify a possible full-color LED has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front notation is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration part 3111d. There is.

A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3111d of the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 provided in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. On the other hand, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 corresponding to the transparent region of the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 excluding the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is transparent except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster in the decorative body 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the region, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d is obtained. The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111 attracts attention, and the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is applied to the metal decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster among the decorative bodies 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area to be removed, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background, so that the color of the metal decorative portion 3111d ( Due to the attractiveness of (gold), the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, even when the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111 attracts attention. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors printed by silk printing on the white resist coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is used. Although the front side notation portion having a yellow color that makes it identifiable can be visually recognized through the transparent region of the decorative body 3111 excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) serves as a white background, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the decorative body 3111 from the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to the attractiveness of the color (gold). Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3111d to be formed (formed), even if the surface side notation portion is printed by silk printing in a yellow color similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d, this yellow color. It has become possible to obscure the existence of silk printing.

Further, through holes, lands and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Since the copper foil is exposed in the through holes, lands, etc., the presence is conspicuous from the white coating film, but the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the (surface) to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Since it is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of through-holes and lands, the position, size, and number of through-holes and lands are constrained when performing artwork for routing the wiring pattern of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is not necessary to do so, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the back-hole decorative substrate 3114, and it is also possible to contribute to shortening the time required for the artwork work.

[Example of placing a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent lens placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate]
Explaining the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative board 3329 provided in the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, the front surface of the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 provided in the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 ( As shown in FIG. 165, the surface) is arranged in the order of the transparent inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 and the transparent under-back middle rotating ornament 3310 toward the front, and the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321. And, it is covered with a transparent member on the game board side such as a rotating decorative body 3310 under the back. As shown in FIG. 165, a transparent lower back middle decorative body 3328 is arranged on the front surface (surface) of the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329 provided in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, and the lower back middle decorative body 3328 is arranged. It is covered with a transparent member on the game board side. The entire lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is formed transparent except for the metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster. The metal decorative portion 3310a has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment), and is a solid white coating on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. Since the front side notation portion that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors printed on the resist by silk printing has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front side notation portion is the metal decoration portion 3310a. It is a color similar to the color it has (gold).

A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, which corresponds to the metal decorative portion 3310a of the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back, which corresponds to the transparent area of the rotating decoration 3310 under the back except for 3310a.

In the state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back has a metallic luster among the rotating decorative bodies 3310 in the lower back. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent region excluding the metal decorative portion 3310a, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back serves as a white background. Due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a, the line of sight is directed from the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back. It will be naturally induced. As a result, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) in the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back. Can be made difficult to see. Further, in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back is visually recognized through the transparent under-back middle decorative body 3328. However, since the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 on which the metallic luster metal decorative portion 3310a is provided (formed) is arranged in front of the under-back middle decorative body 3328, the under-back middle decorative body 3310 is arranged. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 serves as a white background, the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back is attracted by the color (gold) of the metallic decorative portion 3310a. ) To the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the line of sight is naturally guided. As a result, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back. Can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is coated with the metallic luster of the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent region excluding the metal decorative portion 3310a that it has, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back serves as a white background. Then, due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a, from the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) in the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back. The line of sight will be naturally guided. As a result, even when the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) in the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back By attracting the eyes, it is possible to make it difficult to see the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back. Further, in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back is visually recognized through the transparent under-back middle decorative body 3328. However, since the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 on which the metallic luster metal decorative portion 3310a is provided (formed) is arranged in front of the under-back middle decorative body 3328, the under-back middle decorative body 3310 is arranged. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 serves as a white background, the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back is attracted by the color (gold) of the metallic decorative portion 3310a. ) To the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the line of sight is naturally guided. As a result, even when the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) in the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back By attracting the eyes, it is possible to make it difficult to see the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

In addition, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is turned off, multicolor emission is possible by silk printing on a white resist coated on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back. Although the front side notation portion having a yellow color that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED can be visually recognized through the transparent region of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 except for the metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster. The white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back is a white background, and the first decoration under the back is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3322 to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the front surface side notation portion is the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. ), Even if it is printed by silk printing in yellow, it is possible to obscure the existence of this yellow silk printing. In addition, when the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission is turned off, multicolor emission is possible by silk printing on a white resist coated solidly on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. The front side notation part having yellow color that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED can be visually recognized through the transparent underback middle decoration body 3328, but the metal decoration part having a metallic luster in front of the back underside middle decoration body 3328. Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 on which the 3310a is provided (formed) is arranged, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the second lower middle decorative substrate 3329 under the back serves as a white background. Then, due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a, the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 from the front surface (surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329. Since the line of sight is naturally guided, even if the surface side notation is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative part 3310a, it may be difficult to understand the existence of this yellow silk printing. You can do it.

Further, through holes, lands and the like are formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back. Since the copper foil is exposed in the through holes, lands, etc., they are conspicuous from the white coating film, but due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a, the first decorative substrate in the lower back. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the 3322 to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided (formed). ) By attracting the eyes to the metal decoration part 3310a, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of through holes, lands, etc., so when performing the artwork work to route the wiring pattern of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back. , It is not restricted by the position, size, and number of through holes and lands, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the first decorative board 3322 under the back, and also to reduce the time required for artwork work. It can also contribute to shortening. Further, through holes, lands and the like are formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. Since the copper foil is exposed in the through holes, lands, etc., they stand out from the white coating film, but due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a, the second decorative substrate in the lower back. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the 3329 to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided (formed). ) By attracting the eyes to the metal decoration part 3310a, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of through holes, lands, etc., so when performing the artwork work to route the wiring pattern of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back. It is not restricted by the position, size, and number of through holes and lands, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the second decorative board 3329 under the back, and also to reduce the time required for artwork work. It can also contribute to shortening.

[Example of placing a golden material (metal decorative part) in front of a transparent decorative body placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and surrounding the transparent decorative body with a golden material (metal decorative part)]
Explaining the back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is front as shown in FIG. 193. A transparent flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3713, a frame-shaped shutter support member 3712, a shutter unit 3730, and a frame-shaped front cover 3711 are arranged in this order, and a game board such as a back front left decorative body 3713. It is covered with a transparent member on the side. A metal decorative portion 3711a having a metallic luster is formed on the front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3711. The metal decorative portion 3711a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Since the surface side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit light has yellow, the color (yellow) that the surface notation has is similar to the color (gold) that the metal decoration part 3711a has. ing.

A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 corresponding to the metal decoration portion 3711a of the back front left decoration unit 3710, while the metal decoration portion 3711a is provided. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 corresponding to the area in the frame of the frame-shaped front cover 3711 removed.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back front left decoration body 3713 is transparently formed, so that the back front left decoration is arranged behind the back front left decoration body 3713. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3714 can be visually recognized through the back front left decorative body 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730, but the back front left. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 serves as a white background, the front (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. As a result, the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, so that the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is made difficult to see. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back front left decoration body 3713 is transparently formed, so that the back front left decoration is arranged behind the back front left decoration body 3713. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3714 can be visually recognized through the back front left decorative body 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730, but the back front left. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 serves as a white background, the front (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. As a result, even when the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711 attracts the eyes. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). World view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, in the open state in which the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730 and the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is solidly painted. The front left decorative body 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the shutter unit have a front left decorative part with yellow that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors printed on a white resist by silk printing. Although it can be visually recognized through the frame of the 3730, the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a is caused by the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 as a white background. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, the front surface side notation portion is the metal decorative portion 3711a. Even if it is printed by silk printing in yellow, which is similar to the color (gold) of, it is possible to obscure the existence of this yellow silk printing.

Further, through holes, lands and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Since the copper foil is exposed in the through holes, lands, etc., they stand out from the white coating film, but due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of through holes, lands, etc. Therefore, when performing the artwork work for routing the wiring pattern of the back front left decorative board 3714, the position, size, and number of through holes and lands are used. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the back front left decorative substrate 3714, and also to contribute to shortening the time required for the artwork work.

[Example of placing a golden material (metal decorative part) in front of a transparent decorative body placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and surrounding the transparent decorative body with a golden material (metal decorative part)]
Explaining the back front right decorative substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decorative body unit 3810, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decorative unit 3810 is a front surface as shown in FIG. A transparent flat plate-shaped back front right decorative body 3813, a frame-shaped shutter support member 3812, a shutter unit 3830, and a frame-shaped front cover 3811 are arranged in this order, and a game board such as a back front right decorative body 3813. It is covered with a transparent member on the side. A metal decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster is formed on the front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3811. The metal decorative portion 3811a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Since the surface side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit light has yellow, the color (yellow) that the surface notation has is similar to the color (gold) that the metal decoration portion 3811a has. ing.

A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3811a of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, while the metal decorative portion 3811a is provided. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 corresponding to the area inside the frame of the frame-shaped front cover 3811 removed.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back front right decoration body 3813 is transparently formed, so that the back front right decoration body 3813 is arranged behind the back front right decoration body 3813. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the back front right decorative body 3813, the frame of the shutter support member 3812, and the frame of the shutter unit 3830, but the back front right. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 serves as a white background, the metal decorative portion 3811a has an attractiveness due to the color (gold), and from the front surface (front surface) of the front right decorative substrate 3814. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. As a result, the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, so that the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is made difficult to see. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the back front right decoration body 3813 is transparently formed, so that the back front right decoration body 3813 is arranged behind the back front right decoration body 3813. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the back front right decorative body 3813, the frame of the shutter support member 3812, and the frame of the shutter unit 3830, but the back front right. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 serves as a white background, the metal decorative portion 3811a has an attractiveness due to the color (gold), and from the front surface (front surface) of the front right decorative substrate 3814. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. As a result, even when the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811 attracts the eyes. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). World view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, in the open state in which the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830 and the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is solidly painted. The front right decorative body 3813, the frame of the shutter support member 3812, and the shutter unit have a front right decorative part with yellow that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors printed on a white resist by silk printing. Although it can be visually recognized through the frame of the 3830, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 serves as a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a is obtained. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811 by the attractiveness due to the above, the front surface side notation portion is the metal decorative portion 3811a. Even if it is printed by silk printing in yellow, which is similar to the color (gold) of, it is possible to obscure the existence of this yellow silk printing.

Further, through holes, lands and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Since the copper foil is exposed in the through holes, lands, etc., they stand out from the white coating film, but due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a, the back front right decorative substrate 3814 Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of through holes, lands, etc., so when performing the artwork work for routing the wiring pattern of the back front right decorative board 3814, the position, size, and number of through holes and lands It is not necessary to be constrained by the above, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the back front right decorative substrate 3814, and it is also possible to contribute to shortening the time required for artwork work.

[Example of arranging a transparent decorative body placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate between a golden material (metal decorative part) and a golden material (metal decorative part)]
Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 shown in FIG. 163 is in a standby position (original position) below the game area 5a. The back front left effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 171 is arranged on the upper side thereof, and the back front left decorative unit 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 shown in FIG. 193 is arranged on the left side thereof. The back front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 shown in FIG. 197 is arranged, the back lower left effect unit 3200 shown in FIG. 159 is arranged on the lower left side thereof, and the back lower left effect unit 3200 shown in FIG. 159 is arranged on the lower right side thereof. The lower right effect unit 3250 shown is arranged.

The back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 arranged under the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the back front left decorative body unit 3710 arranged on the left side of the game area 5a of the game board 5. The front cover 3711 of the front cover 3711 and the front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 arranged on the right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are provided (formed) with metal decorative portions 3310a, 3711a, 3811a, and are predetermined. All have gold as a color.

On the other hand, the back-up front decorative body 3421 and the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 of the back-up effect unit 3400 arranged above the game area 5a of the game board 5 are transparently formed and the back-up front decoration. The front side notation part that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors printed by silk printing on the white resist that is solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3422 has yellow, and the front side notation The color (yellow) of the part is arranged on the metal decorative part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 arranged on the left side of the back upper effect unit 3400 and on the right side of the back upper effect unit 3400. The color is similar to the gold color of the metal decorative portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810. In other words, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 having a yellow front side notation similar to gold is the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 and the front cover of the back front right decorative unit 3810. Because it is arranged between the metal decoration part 3811a of 3811 (the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3781 of the back front right decoration unit 3810). When the color (yellow) of the front side notation is visible through the back-up front decorative body 3421, or the back-up front decorative body 3421 and the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 (because they are arranged in the vicinity of). Even so, the presence of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 can be made difficult to understand, and the existence of the front side notation portion can be made difficult to understand due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored metal decorative portions 3711a and 3811a.

Further, the lower back left decorative body 3202 and the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 of the lower back left effect unit 3200 arranged on the lower left side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are transparently formed and the lower back left decorative substrate. The front side notation part that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors printed by silk printing on a white resist that is solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of 3203 has yellow, and the front side notation part has yellow. The color (yellow) of the back lower left effect unit 3200 is arranged in the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the lower right of the back lower left effect unit 3200. The color is similar to the gold color of the metal decorative portion 3310a of the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 of the under-back middle decorative body unit 3320. In other words, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 having a yellow front side notation similar to gold is the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 and the lower back of the lower middle decorative unit 3320. Because it is arranged between the metal decoration part 3310a of the middle rotation decoration body 3310 (the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320). (Because it is arranged in the vicinity of the metal decorative part 3310a of the body 3310), the color (yellow) of the front side notation part can be visually recognized through the back lower left decorative body 3202 and the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201. Even if there is, the presence of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 can be made difficult to understand, and the existence of the front side notation portion can be made difficult to understand due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored metal decorative portions 3711a and 3310a.

Further, the lower back right decorative body 3252 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 of the lower back right effect unit 3250 arranged on the lower right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are transparently formed and are decorated on the lower right back side. The front side notation part that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors printed by silk printing on a white resist that is solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3253 has yellow, and the front side notation The color (yellow) of the part is on the metal decorative part 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 arranged on the upper right of the back lower right effect unit 3250 and on the lower left of the back lower left effect unit 3200. The color is similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3310a of the back bottom middle decoration body 3310 of the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 to be arranged. In other words, the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 having a yellow front side notation similar to gold is the metal decorative portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative unit 3810 and the lower back of the lower middle decorative unit 3320. Because it is arranged between the metal decoration part 3310a of the middle rotation decoration body 3310 (the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 and the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320). (Because it is arranged in the vicinity of the metal decorative part 3310a of the body 3310), the color (yellow) of the front side notation part can be visually recognized through the back lower right decorative body 3252 and the back lower right rotating decorative body 3251. Even if there is, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 and the presence of the front side notation portion due to the attractiveness of the metal decorative portions 3811a and 3310a having a golden color.

[Example of placing an obstacle nail near a transparent ornament placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate]
As described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and an outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface, is provided. As described above, the front component 1000 is transparently formed together with the game panel 1100. As a result, the existence of various members arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front of the front component 1000 (that is, the front of the game board 5) through the game panel 1100 (hereinafter,). It may be described as "transparent game panel 1100").

Further, in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, as described above, the center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, the starting port unit 2100 is formed by a transparent member, and the side unit 2200 is transparent. The upper left side unit 2300 is transparently formed, and the unit base 2411, front cover 2412, and rear cover 2413 of the first attacker unit 2400 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 111, the presence of the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower right effect unit 3250, and the back lower middle effect unit 3300 arranged behind the game panel 1100 is transparent to the game panel. It can be visually recognized through various transparent members of the 1100 and the front unit 2000.

For example, in the back lower left effect unit 3200, behind the transparent game panel 1100, a transparent decorative body called a back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 and a back lower left decorative body 3202 are arranged, and the transparent decorative body is arranged. The lower left decorative substrate 3203 is arranged behind the back. On the front surface (front surface) of the lower left decorative substrate 3203, a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted. As described above, behind the transparent game panel 1100, the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201, the back lower left decorative body 3202, and the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 are arranged in this order. The front surface (surface) of the lower left decorative substrate 3203 is formed by applying a white resist solution to a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A white resist layer is formed. On the white resist solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of the lower left decorative substrate 3203, the surface of the part number of the front side electronic component such as a plurality of full-color LEDs and the area indicating the position where the surface side electronic component is arranged. Indicates the attributes of the side electronic component (in addition, the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the surface electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component may be included). The front side notation is printed in yellow (a color similar to the gold color of a plurality of obstacle nails N (brass is used in this embodiment)) by silk printing.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N (brass is used in this embodiment) that are in contact with the game ball and have a gold color in a predetermined gauge arrangement are formed on the transparent game panel 1100. Since it is planted, it is possible to utilize the attractiveness of a plurality of golden obstacle nails N. That is, since a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, they are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 due to the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N. Even if the front surface (front surface) of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 can be visually recognized through the transparent decorative bodies of the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back lower left decorative body 3202, the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 It contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the yellow (similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N) surface side notation printed by silk printing on the solid white resist.

Similar to the back bottom left effect unit 3200, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 also contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the front surface side notation. That is, since a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, they are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 due to the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N. The front surface (front surface) of the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250 is visually recognized through the transparent decorative bodies 3251 and the lower right decorative body 3252 of the lower right effect unit 3250. Even if possible, yellow (a color similar to the gold color of a plurality of obstacle nails N) printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the back bottom right decorative substrate 3253 of the back bottom right effect unit 3250 ) Contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the notation on the front side.

Further, similarly to the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 also contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the front surface side notation. That is, since a plurality of golden obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, they are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 due to the attractiveness of the plurality of golden obstacle nails N. The front surface (front surface) of the back bottom middle first decorative substrate 3322 of the back bottom middle production unit 3300 is passed through a transparent decoration body called the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 and the inner lens (diffuse lens) 3321. Even if it is visible, or through the transparent ornaments 3310 and 3328 of the under-back middle effect unit 3300 arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100. Even when the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle second decorative board 3329 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 can be visually recognized, the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and the lower back of the lower back right effect unit 3250. To make it difficult to understand the existence of the yellow (similar to the gold color of multiple obstacle nails N) surface side notation printed by silk printing on the white resist coated solidly on the middle second decorative substrate 3329. It is contributing.

Further, for example, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, which are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left effect unit 3200, are turned off, the surface of the back lower left decorative board 3203 The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed in is a transparent decoration called the back lower left decorative body 3202 of the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201. Although it is visible through the body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 becomes a white background, so that the front of the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 The line of sight is naturally guided from the surface of the lower left decorative substrate 3203 to the golden obstacle nail N by the attractiveness of the golden obstacle nail N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in. It becomes. As a result, even when the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is attracted to the golden obstacle nail N. Since the white coating film formed on the surface can be made difficult to see, the world view of the game machine is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Similar to the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower right effect unit 3250 also has a point that the deterioration of the decorativeness can be suppressed. That is, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are turned off, which are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250, they are formed on the surface of the back lower right decorative board 3253. The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film is a transparent decorative body called the back lower right decorative body 3252 of the back lower right effect unit 3250 and the back lower right rotating decorative body 3251. Then, although it becomes visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 serves as a white background, so that the white coating film is arranged in front of the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. Due to the attractiveness of the golden obstacle nail N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the line of sight is naturally guided from the surface of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 to the golden obstacle nail N. .. As a result, even when the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is attracted by the golden obstacle nail N. Since the white coating film formed on the surface can be made difficult to see, the world view of the game machine is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, similarly to the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 can also suppress the deterioration of the decorativeness. That is, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, which are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back of the lower back middle effect unit 3300, are turned off, the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 is referred to as an inner lens (diffuse lens) 3321 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and a back bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310. Although it is visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back serves as a white background, so that the first in the lower back The gold-colored obstacle nail N from the surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back is attracted by the golden obstacle nail N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the decorative substrate 3322. The line of sight will be naturally guided. Further, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are turned off, which are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back of the lower back middle effect unit 3300, the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 is transparent as the back bottom middle decoration body 3328 and the back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310. Although it is visible through the decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back serves as a white background, so that the second decorative in the lower back From the surface of the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back to the golden obstacle nail N by the attractiveness of the golden obstacle nail N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the substrate 3329. The line of sight will be naturally guided. As a result, even when the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back are used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the golden obstacle nail N. As a result, the white coating film formed on the surfaces of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back can be made difficult to see, so that the world view of the gaming machine is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

A plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N were planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, but instead of this, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape was attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and this cell was attached. There is a part of the sheet designed in gold (the same color as the gold of multiple obstacle nails N or a color close to this gold), and due to the attractiveness of the part designed in gold, for example, it is designed in this gold. Through the transparent decorative body called the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back lower left decorative body 3202 in the back lower left effect unit 3200 arranged behind the formed portion, the back lower left decorative substrate in the back lower left effect unit 3200. Even if the front surface (front surface) of the 3203 can be visually recognized, the yellow color (cell sheet) printed by silk printing on the white resist solidly coated on the back bottom left decorative substrate 3203 in the back bottom left effect unit 3200. It contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the surface side notation (a color similar to the gold color of the part designed in). Back bottom left When a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back bottom left decorative board 3203 of the unit 3200 are turned off, they are formed on the surface of the back bottom left decorative board 3203. The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film is a transparent decorative body called the back lower left decorative body 3202 of the back lower left effect unit 3200, and the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201, and transparent. Although it is visible through the game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 serves as a white background, so that it is arranged in front of the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203. The line of sight is naturally guided from the surface of the lower left decorative substrate 3203 to the golden-designed part of the cell sheet by the attractiveness of the golden-designed part of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100. It becomes. As a result, even when the lower back left decorative board 3203 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the lower left decorative board on the back is attracted to the golden-designed part of the cell sheet. Since the white coating film formed on the surface of the 3203 can be made difficult to see, the world view of the game machine is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, similarly to the lower back left effect unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the cell sheet is gold (the same color as the gold of the plurality of obstacle nails N, or this). There is a part designed in (color close to gold), and due to the attractiveness of this golden part, the lower right production unit 3250 placed behind this golden part is also less decorative. The point that can be suppressed is established. That is, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, which are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250, are turned off, they are formed on the surface of the back lower right decorative board 3253. The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film is a transparent decorative body called the back lower right decorative body 3252 of the back lower right effect unit 3250 and the back lower right rotating decorative body 3251. Then, although it becomes visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 serves as a white background, so that it is arranged in front of the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. The attractiveness of the golden-designed part of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 naturally guides the line of sight from the surface of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 to the golden-designed part of the cell sheet. The Rukoto. As a result, even when the lower back right decorative board 3253 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the gold-designed part of the cell sheet attracts the eye, so that the lower right decorative board 3253 is used. Since the white coating film formed on the surface of the 3253 can be made difficult to see, the world view of the game machine is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, similarly to the lower back left effect unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the cell sheet is gold (the same color as the gold of the plurality of obstacle nails N, or this). There is a part designed in (a color close to gold), and due to the attractiveness of this gold-designed part, the decoration of the underside middle production unit 3300 placed behind this golden-designed part is also reduced. The point that can be suppressed is established. That is, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, which are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back of the lower back middle effect unit 3300, are turned off, the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 is referred to as an inner lens (diffuse lens) 3321 of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and a back bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310. Although it is visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back serves as a white background, so that the first in the lower back Obstacle nails with gold from the surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back due to the attractiveness of the golden designed part of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the decorative substrate 3322. The line of sight will be naturally guided to N. Further, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are turned off, which are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back of the lower back middle effect unit 3300, the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back The front side notation part formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of the back bottom left effect unit 3200 is transparent as the back bottom middle decoration body 3328 and the back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310. Although it is visible through the decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back serves as a white background, so that the second decorative in the lower back Obstacle nail N having a golden color from the surface of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back due to the attractiveness of the part designed in gold in the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in front of the surface of the substrate 3329. The line of sight will be naturally guided. As a result, even when the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back are used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the part of the cell sheet designed in gold is visible. By attracting the white coating film formed on the surfaces of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back, it is possible to make it difficult to see the white coating film, so that the world view of the gaming machine is not easily destroyed. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

[Silk printing with bright paint on the white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame]
On the other hand, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 adopting the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above (hereinafter, may be referred to as "various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3"). For example, the handle decorative substrate 184 provided in the handle unit 180 shown in FIG. 38, the upper left decorative substrate 273 of the dish provided in the dish upper left decorative unit 270 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and the upper right of the dish shown in FIGS. 49 and 50. Plate upper right decorative substrate 278 provided in the decorative unit 275, plate lower left decorative substrate 283 included in the plate lower left decorative unit 280 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, plate right provided in the plate lower right decorative unit 285 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50. Lower decorative substrate 288, center of dish provided in effect operation unit cover unit 310 of effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54 Upper decorative substrate 314, center of dish provided in effect operation unit cover unit 310 of effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54 The lower decorative board 316, the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided in the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, and the central button decorative board 376 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 60, shown in FIG. The outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, the door frame left side decorative board 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 shown in FIG. 67, and the door frame right side unit shown in FIG. 70. Door frame right side decorative board 413 provided in 410, door frame right side decorative board 418 provided in door frame right side unit 410 shown in FIG. 70, door frame top center decoration provided in door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 74 There are a substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456 provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 74, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457 provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 74, and the like, as described above. , A white resist formed by applying a white resist solution on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A full-color layer is formed, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) can be identified on a white resist that is solidly coated on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. Since the notation part such as the part number corresponding to the LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, the reflectance is reduced according to the second embodiment described above. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED from being lowered by the effect of the configuration of the measures such as, that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. At the same time, it has an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED which has nothing to do with the game for the player and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. (Measures such as reduced reflectance have been taken).

Here, a member arranged in front of the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 will be briefly described. The front surface (surface) of the handle decorative substrate 184 provided in the handle unit 180 is , As shown in FIG. 38, the transparent inner lens 185a and the transparent handle cover 185 are arranged in this order toward the front, and are covered with the inner lens 185a and the door frame side transparent member such as the handle cover 185. ing. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (surface) of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 provided in the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a transparent dish upper left inner lens 272 and a transparent dish upper left decorative body toward the front. They are arranged in the order of 271, and are covered with a transparent member on the door frame side such as the inner lens 272 on the upper left of the plate and the decorative body 271 on the upper left of the plate. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (surface) of the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 provided in the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is a transparent plate upper right inner lens 277 and a transparent plate upper right decorative body toward the front. They are arranged in the order of 276, and are covered with a transparent member on the door frame side such as the inner lens 277 on the upper right of the plate and the decorative body 276 on the upper right of the plate. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (surface) of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish provided in the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish is a transparent lower left inner lens 282 of the dish and a transparent lower left decorative body of the dish. They are arranged in the order of 281 and are covered with a transparent member on the door frame side such as an inner lens 282 on the lower left side of the plate and a decorative body 281 on the lower left side of the plate. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 288 provided in the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish is a transparent dish lower right inner lens 287 and a transparent dish. The lower right decorative body 286 is arranged in this order, and is covered with a door frame side transparent member such as the lower right inner lens 287 of the plate and the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate provided in the cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit 300 is a transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 and a transparent plate center. The upper decorative body 312a is arranged in this order, and is covered with a transparent member on the door frame side such as the inner lens 313 on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (surface) of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 provided in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 is a transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 and a transparent plate center lower decoration. The body 312b is arranged in this order, and is covered with a transparent member on the door frame side such as the inner lens 315 under the center of the dish and the decorative body 312b under the center of the dish. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (surface) of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided in the effect operation unit 300 is in the order of the transparent decorative substrate cover 353, the transparent ring mounting base 331, and the transparent rotation operation unit 302. The decorative substrate cover 353, the ring mounting base 331, and the rotation operation unit 302 are covered with transparent members on the door frame side. As shown in FIG. 60, a transparent central button cover 375 is arranged on the upper surface (surface) of the central button decorative substrate 376 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and a door frame such as the center button cover 375 is arranged. It is covered with a side transparent member. As shown in FIG. 60, the upper surface (surface) of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 is a transparent outer peripheral substrate cover 378, a transparent outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and transparent. The outer peripheral button covers 380 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a door frame side transparent member such as an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the front surface (surface) of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 has a transparent left side inner lens 403 and a transparent door frame toward the front. The left side decorative body 404 is arranged in this order, and is covered with a door frame side transparent member such as the left side inner lens 403 and the door frame left side decorative body 404. As shown in FIG. 70, the front surface (surface) of the side window interior decoration substrate 413 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 has a transparent internal inner lens 414 and a transparent side window interior decoration. The portions 410b are arranged in this order, and are covered with a door frame side transparent member such as an internal inner lens 414 and a side window interior decoration portion 410b. As shown in FIG. 70, the front surface (surface) of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 has a transparent right side inner lens 415 and a transparent door frame right side. They are arranged in the order of decorative body 419, and are covered with a door frame side transparent member such as a right side inner lens 415 and a door frame right side decorative body 419.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (surface) of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 provided in the door frame top unit 450 has a transparent top center inner lens 458 and a transparent door frame top toward the front. They are arranged in the order of the decorative body 453, and are covered with a door frame side transparent member such as the top center inner lens 458 and the door frame top decorative body 453. As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (surface) of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 provided in the door frame top unit 450 has a transparent top left inner lens 459 and a transparent door frame top decorative body. They are arranged in the order of 453, and are covered with a door frame side transparent member such as a top left inner lens 459 and a door frame top decorative body 453. As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (surface) of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 provided in the door frame top unit 450 has a transparent top right inner lens 460 and a transparent door frame top decorative body toward the front. They are arranged in the order of 453, and are covered with a door frame side transparent member such as a top right inner lens 460 and a door frame top decorative body 453.

As described above, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is covered with the door frame side transparent member. As described above, a white resist liquid is applied to the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 to form a white coating film, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating film, which is covered with the door frame side transparent member.

Since the pachinko machine 1 brilliantly emits light by illumination by light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 mounted on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. An LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) changes its light emitting mode in various ways depending on whether it is turned on (lights) or turned off. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can visually recognize the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 through the transparent member on the door frame side, and the player can enjoy the game. There is a risk that the interest will be reduced, and it is inefficient that the effect member provided with the decorative substrate on which the LED that turns off is mounted cannot contribute to the progress of the effect.

Therefore, in each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the decorative substrate is mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. The door frame side is transparent due to the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off. The member looks as if it were a white member. As a result, it is formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 even when the light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor light emission) is not progressing. Since the white coating film can effectively reflect and emit external light, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is to emit external light of various colors from the transparent member on the door frame side to the outside. That is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, in each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is a door. Since it is covered with the frame-side transparent member, a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 are turned off. In the state, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 makes the transparent member on the door frame side appear as if it is a white member. As a result, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, and the light emission effect by the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) is not progressing. Even so, various colors can be obtained because the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 can effectively reflect and emit external light. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hard to collapse by emitting the outside light from the transparent member on the door frame side to the outside. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, as described above, the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 adopting the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment is coated with a white resist liquid. A white coating film is formed and covered with a transparent member on the door frame side. Among the transparent members on the door frame side, handle cover 185, dish upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish lower left decorative body 281, dish lower right decorative body 286, dish center upper decorative body 312a, dish center lower decorative body 312b , Rotation operation unit 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door frame left side decoration 404, side window interior decoration 410b, door frame right side decoration 419, and door frame top decoration 453 are described above. As you can see, it is formed transparently. On the other hand, among the game board side transparent members covering the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, the decorative sheet 3112, the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201, and the back Bottom left decoration body 3202, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, back bottom right decoration body 3252, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310, back top front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front rotation decoration body 3421, back top back rotation decoration body 3440, back-up rear decorative body 3451, back-back left-rotating decorative body 3510, back-back left decorative body 3521, back-back right-rotating decorative body 3610, and back-back right decorative body 3621 of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The difference is that a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)).

Briefly explaining this, the pachinko machine 1 can provide a player with a different world view by exchanging the game boards. In order to reduce the manufacturing cost of various substrates provided for door frames and game boards, the resist liquid to be applied to various substrates is usually unified in green, which is inexpensive. However, when providing a gorgeous effect to the player by cooperating with the light emitting effect by the game board and the light emitting effect by the door frame, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame is provided in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off. ), The green color of the resist liquid applied to) may not match the world view of the game board, and the world view of the game board may be disrupted, causing the player to enjoy the game.

Therefore, in each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the decorative substrate is mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. The door frame side is transparent due to the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off. The member looks as if it were a white member. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, various white coating films formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 can be formed. By using a white background that is easily dyed in various colors, it is possible to easily dye the world view of the game board and prevent the world view of the game board from collapsing. In other words, even if the game board is replaced with respect to the door frame 3 installed in the game hall, it is mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 as described above. When a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the transparent member on the door frame side formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is a white member. By making it look as if it were there, it is possible to prevent it from matching the world view of the replaced game board.

Further, as described above, a white resist liquid is applied to the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 which adopts the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid white resist”) formed by the coating film, and is covered with a transparent member on the door frame side. Among the transparent members on the door frame side, for example, the transparent rotation operation unit 302 that the player can rotate and the transparent pressing operation unit 303 that the player can press are transparently formed, and the effect operation unit. Surfaces (mounting) of the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided on the 300, the central button decorative board 376 provided on the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided on the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. The surface) is arranged at a position easily visible to the player through the corresponding transparent member on the door frame side. The reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance. Therefore, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of the present embodiment), yellow is inconspicuous when the background is white, and when the front surface side notation is yellow, the yellow surface side is compared with the white resist. The notation is inconspicuous. As described above, the front surface side notation portion makes it possible to identify the front surface side electronic components mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, and the front surface side. Attributes of surface-side electronic components such as the component number of the electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is placed (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, and the mounting orientation of the surface-side electronic component. (Mounting direction), the model of the electronic component on the front side may be included.).

On the other hand, as described above, the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310 are coated with a green resist solution to form a green coating film (hereinafter, simply "solid green"). A green resist layer is formed by (may be described as "resist"), and attributes of the surface-side electronic component such as a part number of the surface-side electronic component and a region indicating a position where the surface-side electronic component is arranged (in addition, The surface side notation part indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the surface side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the surface side electronic component, and the model of the surface side electronic component may be included) is white. It is a paint and is printed by silk printing on a solid green resist. The power supply board 630 is housed in a transparent power supply board cover 631, and a power switch 630a for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is provided and exposed from the transparent power supply board cover 631. The main control board 1310 is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320, and is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320 by being provided with a RAM clear switch that completely erases the information stored in the RAM. Since the power switch 630a is arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see, and the RAM clear switch is provided on the rear side of the game board 5. It is located in a position that is difficult for people to see.

The reflectance increases as it approaches white, whereas it decreases as it approaches black. Therefore, when the background is a color closer to black than white, white is conspicuous, and in the combination of green and white, white is conspicuous when the background is green, and the surface side notation is white. In some cases, the green surface side notation is conspicuous with respect to the green resist. That is, the white front side notation (white back side notation with respect to the green resist) is conspicuous with respect to the green resist solidly coated on the front surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310. ..

In other words, since the power switch 630a and the RAM clear switch are arranged at positions that are difficult for the player to see, the white color of the paint printed by silk printing is a combination that is easy to see with respect to the green color of the resist liquid. However, the player does not have to see the electronic component number or the like, which has nothing to do with the game, through the transparent power supply board cover 631 or the transparent main control board box 1320. On the other hand, the transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and the transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player are arranged at positions that are easily visible to the player, and the resist liquid. Since the yellow color of the paint printed by silk printing is not easy to see with respect to the white color of the above, the rotation operation part where the surface side notation such as the electronic part number, which has nothing to do with the game for the player, is transparent. It can be made difficult for the player to see through the 302 or the transparent pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided in the effect operation unit 300, the central button decorative board 376 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. Even when a decorative substrate such as the above is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, the transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and the transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. Is placed in a position that is easy for the player to see, and the yellow color of the paint printed by silk printing is not easy to see for the white color of the resist liquid, so it has nothing to do with the game for the player. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the front surface side notation portion such as the electronic component number that does not have the above through the transparent rotation operation unit 302 and the transparent pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

[White coating film formed on the surface of each decorative substrate provided on the game board and door frame]
By the way, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally becomes an obstacle nail with another game ball when the game ball launched toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 is flowing down while the player is playing a game. It may become clogged. In this state, when the player launches the game balls one after another toward the game area 5a, the game balls are further piled up on the packed game balls, and the game balls are gathered in a grape shape. In order to eliminate the state in which the game balls are gathered in the shape of grapes, the player calls a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall to have the game balls gathered in the shape of grapes removed. A clerk such as a clerk of a game hall called by a player opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, it is attached to each decorative board provided in the game board 5. "Opening" that controls to turn off all the mounted LEDs and controls each movable body provided in the game board 5 so as to maintain the position at the time of opening regardless of whether or not it is operating. Control the game board at the time. With or instead of controlling the game board at the time of such opening, a specific LED among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469). In addition to controlling the lighting of the plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening regardless of whether or not it is operating. "Control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed so that the control is performed.

Further, if the game ball is clogged in the nose for supplying the game ball of the island facility in the game hall, the game ball from the island facility in the game hall is not supplied to the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball is not paid out to the player. When the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the like shown in FIG. 77 are clogged with balls and the game balls are not paid out to the player, the player moves to the game hall. A clerk such as a clerk will be called to clear the ball jam. A clerk such as a clerk of a game hall called by a player opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, the decorative board provided on the game board 5 is used. As described above, the control is performed to turn off all of the plurality of mounted LEDs, and the movable body provided in the game board 5 is controlled to be maintained at the open position regardless of whether or not it is operating. "Control the game board when it is open". With or instead of controlling the game board at the time of such opening, a specific LED among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 (for example, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469). In addition to controlling the lighting of the plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening regardless of whether or not it is operating. The above-mentioned "control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed so as to perform the control.

When opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 or when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (that is, when opening the front frame), control and / or opening of the game board at the time of opening. When controlling the door frame at the time, a specific LED among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and / or a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 ( For example, all the lights are turned off except for the plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. Therefore, in the state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can provide each decoration on the game board 5. The front surface (front surface) of the board can be visually recognized through the transparent member on the game board side, and / or a specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) is mounted. The front surface (surface) of each of the other decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 except for the decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 can be visually recognized through the transparent member on the door frame side, and the player can enjoy the game. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 or when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 (that is, when the front frame is opened). However, in the state where the effect is progressing according to the schedule data, the player cannot visually recognize the state in which the effect is progressing, but the player is provided with the effect member provided with the decorative board on which the LED that turns off is mounted. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) cannot be conveyed to the door, and the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) cannot be experienced. There is also a risk of creating a period for the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 and each decoration provided in the door frame 3 adopting the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. A plurality of LEDs (full color capable of multicolor emission) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate (hereinafter, may be referred to as "front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3"). The transparent member on the game board side and the transparent member on the door frame side are white members due to the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 in the state where the LED) is off. It looks like it is. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emits external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, that is, by emitting external light of various colors from the transparent member on the game board side and the transparent member on the door frame side to the outside). It is possible to convey the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) to the player and experience the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

Although the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on, the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, but the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are provided as described above. Formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board are turned off. The white coating film is applied so that the transparent member on the game board side and the transparent member on the door frame side appear to be white members. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emits external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, that is, by emitting external light of various colors from the transparent member on the game board side and the transparent member on the door frame side to the outside). It is possible to convey the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) to the player and experience the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

[Modification example]
In the above-described embodiment, the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 adopting the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, "door frame 3". Of the transparent members on the door frame side that cover the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the above, the handle cover 185 and the upper left decorative body 271 of the dish , Dish upper right decorative body 276, Dish lower left decorative body 281, Dish lower right decorative body 286, Dish center upper decorative body 312a, Dish center lower decorative body 312b, Rotation operation unit 302, Central button cover 375, Outer button cover 380, Door While the frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative portion 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 are transparently formed, each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is provided. Among the transparent members on the game board side that cover the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the above, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, and the back. Lower right decorative body 3252, lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back upper rear decorative body 3451, back upper left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear left decorative body 3521, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and back rear right decorative body 3621 are the concept of pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It was different in that a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) were applied by printing, but among the transparent members on the door frame side, the handle cover 185, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, Dish upper right decorative body 276, Dish lower left decorative body 281, Dish lower right decorative body 286, Dish center upper decorative body 312a, Dish center lower decorative body 312b, Rotation operation unit 302, Center button cover 375, Outer button cover 380, Door frame The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is added to the left side decoration body 404, the side window decoration part 410b, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453. ), A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) may be printed.

That is, among the door frame side transparent members covering the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, the handle cover 185, the dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper right decoration Body 276, lower left decorative body 281 of the dish, lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, upper center decorative body 312a, lower center decorative body 312b of the dish, rotation operation unit 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, left side decoration of the door frame A game that covers the body 404, the side window decoration portion 410b, the door frame right side decoration body 419, the door frame top decoration body 453, and the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decoration substrate provided in the game board 5. Among the transparent members on the board side, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the back Upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back upper rear decorative body 3451, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear left decorative body 3521, back rear right rotating decorative body The same predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) with the 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621. ) May be printed. In this way, by unifying the connection between the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) concept (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) can be further improved. Can be expressed. In other words, the color (associative color) related to the transparent member on the door frame side and the transparent member on the game board side so as to follow the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). ) (For example, colors with gradation, sea, sky, space colors, flora and fauna colors, vehicles, robot colors, sports colors, flame colors, rain, snow colors, Christmas, New Year, summer vacation, winter vacation, spring vacation , Colors related to beaches, hot springs, ski resorts, etc.) or the same color is given to make the connection between the door frame 3 and the game board 5 as one, and the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, , The world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) can be more expressed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 adopting the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, “door frame 3”. The door frame side transparent member (for example, handle cover 185, dish upper left decorative body 271) covering the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the above). , Dish upper right decorative body 276, Dish lower left decorative body 281, Dish lower right decorative body 286, Dish center upper decorative body 312a, Dish center lower decorative body 312b, Rotation operation unit 302, Central button cover 375, Outer button cover 380, Door The frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative portion 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are transparently formed, but with respect to the contour portion of the door frame side transparent member. A metal decorative part (gold) with a metallic luster and a metal decorative part (gold) with a metallic luster with a flat design or a three-dimensional design are provided (formed) on the surface of the transparent member on the door frame side. You may do it. In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed on the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be visually recognized through the door frame 3, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 serves as a white background, so that the color of the metal decorative portion ( The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the transparent member on the door frame side by the attractiveness of the door frame (gold). It becomes. As a result, the white color formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is attracted to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the transparent member on the door frame side. The coating film can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 adopting the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, “door frame 3”. The door frame side transparent member (for example, handle cover 185, dish upper left decorative body 271) covering the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the above). , Dish upper right decorative body 276, Dish lower left decorative body 281, Dish lower right decorative body 286, Dish center upper decorative body 312a, Dish center lower decorative body 312b, Rotation operation unit 302, Central button cover 375, Outer button cover 380, Door The frame left side decorative body 404, the side window interior decorative portion 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are transparently formed, but with respect to the contour portion of the door frame side transparent member. A metal decorative part (gold) with a metallic luster and a metal decorative part (gold) with a metallic luster with a flat design or a three-dimensional design are provided (formed) on the surface of the transparent member on the door frame side. You may do it. In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed on the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be visually recognized through the door frame 3, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 serves as a white background, so that the color of the metal decorative portion ( The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the transparent member on the door frame side by the attractiveness of the door frame (gold). It becomes. As a result, even when each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the transparent member on the door frame side attracts the eyes. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Further, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, it is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. The front (front) or top surface of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 can be visually recognized through the door frame side transparent member, which has a yellow surface side notation that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission. Since the white coating film formed on the (surface) serves as a white background, the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion. Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative part provided (formed) on the transparent member on the door frame side, the surface side notation part is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative part. Even so, the existence of this yellow silk screen printing can be obscured.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d (arranged (arranged) in front of the decorative body 3111) in the decorative body 3111 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 shown in FIGS. 149 (a) and 149 (b). The portion of the hologram in the first contour portion 3112a in the sheet 3112 is included), the metal decorative portion 3310a in the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 shown in FIG. 163, and the front cover of the back front left decoration unit 3710 shown in FIG. The metal decorative parts 3711a in 3711, the metal decorative parts 3811a in the front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative unit 3810 shown in FIG. 197, and the like are all metal decorative parts in each decorative body provided in the game board 5. However, the metal decorative portion of each decorative body provided in the game board 5 may be configured to have an opaque golden color as a predetermined color, or may be all translucent as a predetermined color ( It may be configured to have a golden color (having a translucent property), or may be composed of a mixture of a predetermined color having an opaque golden color and a translucent (having translucent) golden color. You may be. The modification shown below is also the same, and the metal decorative portion is configured to have all gold as a predetermined color, but the metal decorative portion in each decorative body provided in the game board 5 or the door frame 3 is predetermined. It may be configured to have all opaque gold as a color, or may be configured to have all translucent (translucent) gold as a predetermined color, or it may be opaque as a predetermined color. It may be composed of a mixture of those having a golden color and those having a translucent (translucent) gold color.

[A deformation in which a golden material (metal decorative part) is arranged in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent area or the like arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and the transparent area is surrounded by the golden material (metal decorative part). Example 1]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, as each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, for example, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, the front surface (surface) of the light guide emitting plate 3113 in the form of a transparent flat plate, a sheet having a translucent portion (region) and a transparent portion (region) toward the front. The decorative sheet 3112 and the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a transparent member on the game board side such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and a decorative body 3111. The entire decorative body 3111 except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster is formed to be colorless and transparent. The metal decorative portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment). As described above, the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 may be described as a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A white resist layer is formed by (there is), and the surface side notation that makes it possible to identify a multicolor light emitting full-color LED printed by silk printing on this solid white resist is yellow. Have. Therefore, the color (yellow) of the front surface side notation portion is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, by further forming the metal decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster on the outer peripheral portion of the decorative body 3111, the entire body excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster is formed colorless and transparent. It may be configured to surround the area.

In this case, FIG. 147 is taken so as to form a metal decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster with respect to the outer peripheral portion of the decorative body 3111 so as to surround a region in which the entire surface excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed colorless and transparent. The size and arrangement of the metal decorative portion 3111d (the shaded portion with dark shades shown in FIG. 149) and other members related to these metal decorative portions 3111d may be appropriately changed.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a metallic luster among the decorative bodies 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background for metallic decoration. Due to the attractiveness of the portion 3111d due to the color (gold), the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111 attracts attention, and the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a metallic luster among the decorative bodies 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d having the back, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 becomes a white background. The attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d naturally guides the line of sight from the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Become. As a result, even when the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111 attracts attention. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, it is printed by silk printing on the white resist coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The yellow surface-side notation portion that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission can be visually recognized through a transparent region of the decorative body 3111 excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster. However, since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the surface) to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, the surface side notation portion is yellow, which is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d, by silk printing. Even if it is printed, the existence of this yellow silk screen printing can be obscured.

[A deformation in which a golden material (metal decorative part) is arranged in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent area or the like arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and the transparent area is surrounded by the golden material (metal decorative part). Example 2]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, as each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5, for example, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, the front surface (surface) of the light guide emitting plate 3113 in the form of a transparent flat plate, a sheet having a translucent portion (region) and a transparent portion (region) toward the front. The decorative sheet 3112 and the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a transparent member on the game board side such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and a decorative body 3111. The entire decorative body 3111 except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster is formed to be colorless and transparent. The metal decorative portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment). As described above, the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 may be described as a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A white resist layer is formed by (there is), and the surface side notation that makes it possible to identify a multicolor light emitting full-color LED printed by silk printing on this solid white resist is yellow. Have. Therefore, the color (yellow) of the front surface side notation portion is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, in addition to the front surface side notation portion, for example, the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is solidly painted white so as to surround the metal decorative portion 3111d by a thick solid line or a figure having another shape. It may be configured to be printed in yellow by silk printing on the resist.

In this case, a thick solid line or a figure having another shape is printed in yellow by silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 so as to surround the metal decorative portion 3111d. As described above, the size and arrangement of the metal decorative portion 3111d (the shaded portion with dark shades shown in FIGS. 147 to 149) and other members related to these metal decorative portions 3111d may be appropriately changed.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a metallic luster among the decorative bodies 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background for metallic decoration. Due to the attractiveness of the portion 3111d due to the color (gold), the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111 attracts attention, and the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a metallic luster among the decorative bodies 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d having the back, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 becomes a white background. The attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d naturally guides the line of sight from the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Become. As a result, even when the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111 attracts attention. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The view) is hard to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, printing is performed by silk printing on a white resist solidly coated on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. In addition to the front side notation part having yellow that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, a figure having a thick solid line or another shape is excluded from the decorative body 3111 except for the metallic decorative part 3111d having a metallic luster. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent region, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 serves as a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metallic decorative portion 3111d is obtained. ) Naturally guides the line of sight from the front surface (front surface) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Therefore, in addition to the front surface side notation portion, it is thick. Even if a figure having a solid line or another shape is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metallic decorative portion 3111d, the existence of this yellow silk printing can be obscured.

[Modification example of arranging a golden material (metal decoration part) at the joint of the transparent member on the transparent frame side arranged in front of the yellow silk-printed substrate]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 adopting the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, “door frame 3”. The door frame side transparent member (for example, dish upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decoration) that covers the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the above). Body 276, lower left decorative body 281 of the dish, lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, upper center decorative body 312a of the dish, lower center decorative body 312b of the dish, left side decorative body of the door frame 404, right side decorative body of the door frame 419, and top of the door frame. Although the decorative body 453) is transparently formed, the joint between the left side of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the upper side of the door frame left side decorative body 404 (the left side of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the left side of the door frame). A metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the part (the part designed so as to be connected to the upper side of the decorative body 404), and under the door frame left side decorative body 404. Metallic luster at the joint between the side and the left side of the plate upper left decorative body 271 (the part designed so that the lower side of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the left side of the plate upper left decorative body 271 are connected) A metal decorative part (gold) with a door is provided (formed), and a joint between the right side of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the left side of the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate (the right side of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper center of the plate). A metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the part designed so that the left side of the decorative body 312a is connected to the right side of the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate. Metal with metallic luster at the joint with the left side of the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate (the part designed so that the right side of the upper right decorative body 312a of the plate and the left side of the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate are connected) A decorative part (gold) is provided (formed), and a joint between the right side of the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate and the lower side of the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame (the right side of the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate and the right side decoration of the door frame) A metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the part designed so as to be connected to the lower side of the body 419, and the upper side of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is provided. And the joint between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the right side (the part designed so that the upper side of the door frame right side decoration body 419 and the right side of the door frame top decoration body 453 are connected) have a metallic luster. A metal decorative portion (golden) having a door may be provided (formed). Further, the joint between the right side of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the left side of the lower left decorative body 312b of the plate (designed so that the right side of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the left side of the lower left decorative body 312b of the plate are connected. A metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the portion to be formed), and a joint (lower center of the plate) between the right side of the lower right decorative body 312b of the plate and the left side of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is provided. A metallic decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the right side of the decorative body 312b and the left side of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate (the part designed so as to be connected). May be good. In this way, a metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster is provided as a joint of the transparent members on the door frame side (a portion designed so that adjacent transparent members on the door frame side appear to be connected to each other). By (forming), this joint can be blindfolded.

[Modification example of placing a golden material (glossy sheet member) in front of a transparent game panel board placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the center accessory 2500 is a flat plate-shaped flange that protrudes from the outer periphery of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as the center frame) and abuts on the front surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Although it had a portion 2502, a glossy sheet member having glitter (in gold or a color mixed with gold) shining in particles was provided on the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and a glossy sheet member was provided behind the glossy sheet member. Therefore, a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors may be mounted may be arranged on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Regarding the positional relationship between the decorative substrate and the glossy sheet member, even if the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front and the glossy sheet member is arranged so as to cover all or part of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate. Alternatively, the decorative substrate may be arranged close to each other in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction without covering the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate at all. For example, the decorative substrate may be arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions with a distance dimension of about 5 mm to 10 mm. They may be arranged apart. On the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. A region indicating a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a solid white resist. The notation on the surface side of the above is printed with yellow paint by silk printing. Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball and have a gold color in a predetermined gauge arrangement are planted. In this way, in front of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate, a glossy sheet member having glitter (in gold or a color mixed with gold) shining in particles, and a plurality of obstacle nails N having gold are arranged. Because it is made, it is difficult to understand the existence of the decorative substrate due to the glossy sheet member having glitter that glitters in the form of particles (in gold or a color mixed with gold) and the attractiveness of multiple obstacle nails N having gold. Even if the color (yellow) of the front side notation is visible through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, it can be silk-printed on a white resist solidly coated on the decorative substrate. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of the printed yellow surface side notation portion (a color similar to the gold color of the glossy sheet member or the obstacle nail N).

[Modification example of placing a golden material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent game panel board placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted is arranged on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 and the decorative substrate are arranged. An inner lens formed three-dimensionally with a transparent member may be arranged between the two. The surface of the inner lens is such that a lens cut is applied to a specific area or the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) to allow diffuse refraction of light, and the area where the lens cut is applied. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. Further, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Regarding the positional relationship between the decorative substrate and the inner lens, the inner lens may be arranged so as to cover all or a part of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate when the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front. On the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. A region indicating a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a solid white resist. The notation on the surface side of the above is printed with yellow paint by silk printing. Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball and have a gold color in a predetermined gauge arrangement are planted. Although a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are arranged in front of the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate, yellow (obstacle nail N) printed by silk printing on a white resist coated solidly on the decorative substrate. It has no decorative relationship with the surface side notation (a color similar to the gold color of). The presence of the decorative substrate can be obscured by the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the notation on the front side is due to the region where the inner lens is cut. It can be confusing.

[Modification 1 in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a transparent member placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided so that the logo decoration body (logo decoration movable body) having the logo operates. The logo decoration body is configured by arranging a transparent inner lens behind the transparent front decoration body, arranging a decorative substrate behind the inner lens, and arranging a base member or the like behind the decoration substrate. is there. In the front decorative body, the logo area (for example, the area of the character portion "ABC") is formed transparently, and the area other than the logo area is formed as a metallic decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster. There is. That is, the logo area is surrounded by a metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster. The surface of the inner lens is such that a lens cut is applied to a specific area or the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) to allow diffuse refraction of light, and the area where the lens cut is applied. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. On the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. A region indicating a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a solid white resist. The notation on the surface side of the above is printed with yellow paint by silk printing. The presence of the decorative substrate can be obscured by the attractiveness of the metal decorative part with metallic luster due to the gold color, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the notation on the front side is cut into the inner lens. It can be difficult to understand depending on the area.

[Modification 2 in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a transparent member placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided so that the figure decoration body (shape decoration movable body) having a predetermined figure operates. The graphic decorative body is configured by arranging a transparent inner lens behind the transparent front decorative body, arranging a decorative substrate behind the inner lens, and arranging a base member or the like behind the decorative substrate. is there. The front decorative body forms a metallic decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster with respect to the outer peripheral portion thereof, and the metallic decorative portion having a metallic luster with respect to the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion). Form (gold). Then, in this one area (for example, the central part), in addition to the figure area (for example, the eyelid part of the eyeball of the human body, the mouth part of the human body, the ear part of the human body, letters, numbers, figures, and symbols Etc.), which is an appropriate combination of these letters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc.) is formed as a metallic decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster. Further, the front decorative body has a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion) from the inside of the metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion thereof. The area extending to the outside of the metallic decorative part (gold) held is transparently formed. Further, the front decorative body has a metallic luster in one region (for example, the central portion) from the inside of the metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of the one region (for example, the central portion). A region extending to the outside of the outer peripheral portion of the region where the graphic region is formed as a metallic decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster is transparently formed. The surface of the inner lens is such that a lens cut is applied to a specific area or the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) to allow diffuse refraction of light, and the area where the lens cut is applied. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. On the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. A region indicating a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a solid white resist. The notation on the surface side of the above is printed with yellow paint by silk printing.

That is, the front decorative body has a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion) from the inside of the metallic luster (golden) having a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion thereof. A metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion) while a region extending to the outside of the held metal decorative portion (gold) is transparently formed. Since the region extending from the inside to the outside of the outer peripheral portion of the region where the graphic region is formed as the metallic decorative portion (gold) having metallic luster (for example, the central portion) is transparently formed. The transparent area is surrounded by a metallic decorative part (gold) with metallic luster. In this way, the presence of the decorative substrate can be obscured by the attractiveness of the metallic luster due to the gold color, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the notation on the front side is used as the inner lens. It can be obscured by the cut area.

[Modification example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent member placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and surrounding the gold material (metal decoration part)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided so that the figure decoration body (shape decoration movable body) having a predetermined figure operates. The graphic decorative body is configured by arranging a transparent inner lens behind the transparent front decorative body, arranging a decorative substrate behind the inner lens, and arranging a base member or the like behind the decorative substrate. is there. The front decorative body has a graphic area (for example, the eyelid part of the eyeball of the human body, the mouth part of the human body, the ear part of the human body, and a hexagon or an octagon) in one area (for example, the central part). It is formed as a metallic decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster, and a region surrounding a part of the region is transparently formed. That is, the metallic decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster is surrounded by a transparent area. When the front decorative body is formed as a graphic area in one area (for example, the central part) and as the eyelid of the eyelids of the human body, the metallic decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is below the upper eyelid. It becomes an eyelid, and the upper eyelid opens from the lower eyelid, and this open part and other areas except the upper eyelid and the lower eyelid are transparently formed. That is, the upper eyelid and the lower eyelid, which are metal decorative parts (golden) having a metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent area. In addition, when the front decorative body is formed as a graphic area in one area (for example, the central part) and as the mouth of the human body, the metal decorative part (golden) having a metallic luster becomes the upper lip and the lower lip, and the upper lip. Opens from the lower lip, and this open area and other areas except the upper and lower lips are transparently formed. That is, the upper lip and the lower lip, which are metal decorative parts (gold) with metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent area. Further, when the front decorative body is formed as a human ear, a hexagon, or an octagon as a graphic area in one area (for example, a central part), a metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is the ear. (The inner region of the ear may be formed transparently, may be formed with translucency by a predetermined color (red, blue, black), or may be formed opaquely). The outer peripheral portion of the hexagon (the inner region of the hexagon may be formed transparently, may be formed with translucency by a predetermined color (red, blue, black), or may be formed opaquely. ), The outer peripheral part of the octagon (the inner region of the octagon may be formed transparently, or may be formed with a predetermined color (red, blue, black) with translucency, or may be formed opaquely. The area other than the human ear, hexagon, and octagon is transparently formed. That is, the human ear, hexagon, and octagon, which are metal decorative parts (gold) with metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent area. The surface of the inner lens is such that a lens cut is applied to a specific area or the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) to allow diffuse refraction of light, and the area where the lens cut is applied. As a result, it is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. On the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. A region indicating a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a solid white resist. The notation on the surface side of the above is printed with yellow paint by silk printing. In other words, since the metallic decorative part (gold) with metallic luster is surrounded by a transparent area, the metal decorative part (gold) with metallic luster is solidly painted on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate. It is surrounded by the white color of the white resist. In this way, the presence of the decorative substrate can be obscured by the attractiveness of the metallic luster due to the gold color, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the notation on the front side is used as the inner lens. It can be obscured by the cut area.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 shown in FIG. 163 is arranged in the standby position (original position) on the lower side thereof. As shown in FIG. 201, in the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, the decorative substrate is placed in the area where the lower middle middle decorative body 3310 is arranged in the standby position (original position). When the existence disappears, it becomes impossible to produce light emission in this area. Therefore, in a state where the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is arranged in the standby position (original position) and the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is arranged in the standby position (original position), the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 The front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate may be arranged behind the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back so as to face the front of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) so as not to interfere with each other. On the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A region indicating a part number corresponding to a full-color LED and a position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is formed and makes it possible to identify a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a solid white resist. The notation on the surface side of the above is printed with yellow paint by silk printing. When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is present in the standby position (original position), the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate is covered by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, so that when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, I do not know the existence of the decorative board at all.

However, as the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, the decorative substrate arranged behind the lower middle middle decorative body 3310 gradually appears and can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is controlled so that a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light during the period from the start of moving the decorative body unit 3320 under the back to the ascending position to the return to the standby position (original position). Will be done. As a result, multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light, so it is possible to understand the existence of the yellow front side notation printed by silk printing on the white resist that is solidly painted on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate. It can be difficult. Further, the yellow front side notation printed by silk printing on the white resist coated on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is the metal of the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 of the under-back middle decorative body unit 3320. The color is similar to the gold color of the decorative portion 3310a, and even if the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Since it can be placed in the vicinity of the metal decorative portion 3310a, the decorative substrate unit 3320 is started to move to the ascending position due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored metal decorative portion 3310a, and the decorative substrate can be visually recognized. Even if it is in such a state, the yellow (color similar to the gold color of the metal decorative portion 3310a) printed on the white resist coated on the decorative substrate by silk printing is displayed on the front side. It can make its existence difficult to understand. Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, since a plurality of obstacle nails N having a contact with the game ball and having a gold color are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, the attractiveness of the plurality of obstacle nails N having a gold color is attracted. Even when the decorative substrate unit 3320 is started to move to the ascending position and the decorative substrate is visible, the decorative substrate is printed by silk printing on the solid white resist. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of the yellow surface side notation (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N).

[Avoiding concentration of placement of the front side display printed by silk printing]
Next, avoiding the concentration of arrangement of the front side display portion printed by silk printing will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 shows a method of arranging a surface display unit capable of identifying a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate and the corresponding LEDs, respectively, in the case of centralized arrangement (No. 1) (a). It is the schematic which shows the case of the distributed arrangement (the 1) (b) "respectively. In addition, in FIGS. 271A to 271D, pads, through holes, lands and the like are omitted. Further, the decorative substrates KC shown in FIGS. 271 (a) to 271 (d) are attached to the decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3 adopting a configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above. It is shown as an example of each decorative substrate to be provided.

The front surface (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC is whitened by a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. Corresponds to a full-color LED that allows multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) to be identified on a white resist that is solidly coated on the front (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC while the resist layer is formed. When the attributes of the electronic component such as the part number to be used and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed (furthermore, the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component are included. The front side notation indicating () is printed with yellow paint by silk printing.

First, consider the case where four full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front (front) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. Four full-color LEDs are arranged on the front (front) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. Areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating positions and part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are printed with yellow paint by silk printing, for example, as shown in FIG. 271 (a). In the case of the centralized arrangement in which the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are centrally arranged in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged, and FIG. 271 (b). ), The part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are distributed and arranged outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged. Let's consider the case of placement and the case.

It should be noted that the positions where the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC in the case of the centralized arrangement and the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the case of the distributed arrangement are arranged. ) It is assumed that the positions where the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged in KCx are the same.

In both the centralized and distributed arrangements, the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs, and other electronic components (resistors, capacitors, In addition to the IC, a connector may be included.) And is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the area printed by silk printing with yellow paint. ) The ratio to KCx (hereinafter referred to as "yellow occupancy rate") is the same.

In addition, among the white resists solidly coated on the front (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC, the areas excluding the areas printed by silk printing with the yellow paint are printed by silk printing with the yellow paint. The ratio of the decorative substrate KC to the front surface (surface) KCx (hereinafter referred to as "white occupancy rate") in (excluding the area marked with) is larger than the yellow occupancy rate. As described above, the white occupancy rate of white occupying the surface of the decorative substrate KC by the white coating film formed by applying the white resist liquid is yellow due to the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 and the like on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KC. ) Since it is larger than the yellow occupancy rate that occupies KCx, even when the decorative substrate KC (white coating film) is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, it is printed by silk printing. Compared to the yellow color of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4, the white color of the white coating, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, enters the player's eyes more and makes it difficult to notice the existence of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Can contribute to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

In the case of centralized arrangement, the four full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 are centrally arranged in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged. Specifically, in the case of centralized arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is arranged below the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED1 is arranged, and below the area KCp2 indicating the position where the full-color LED2 is arranged. Part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is arranged and above the area KCp3 indicating the position where the full-color LED3 is arranged. The part number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED 4 is arranged in.

In this way, when the four full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 are locally concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of white of the white coating film, even if it has a high reflectance, a reflectance lowering region where the reflectance is lowered is formed. Further, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are locally concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to 1 The presence of KCn4 stands out.

That is, in the case of centralized arrangement, in the local area of the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs1 to LED4 are arranged, the white color of the white coating film which is a kind of decoration visible to the player In comparison, the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 is often seen by the player, and the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 is easily noticed. Therefore, the decorativeness may be deteriorated.

On the other hand, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are distributed without being concentrated outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged. And are arranged. Specifically, in the case of distributed arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is arranged in the upper left of the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED1 is arranged, and the upper right of the area KCp2 indicating the position where the full-color LED2 is arranged. The area where the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is arranged and the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is arranged, and the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED3 is arranged at the lower left of KCp3, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED4 is arranged. The part number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED 4 is arranged at the lower right of KCp4.

In this way, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are locally concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, and the full-color LEDs 1 are not arranged at all. ~ Part numbers corresponding to the four full-color LEDs outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the LEDs 4 are arranged When KCn1 to KCn4 are distributed and arranged, the part numbers corresponding to the four full-color LEDs Since the above-mentioned reflectance reduction region formed by intensively arranging KCn1 to KCn4 is not formed at all, the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, but the yellow part numbers KCn1 to 1 High reflectance due to KCn4 can be maintained. Further, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are distributed and arranged outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Is inconspicuous.

In other words, in the local area of the area surrounding all of the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs1 to LED4 are arranged, the yellow occupancy rate of the centralized arrangement is higher than that of the distributed arrangement. (By the ratio of the front surface (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC in the regions of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with yellow paint to the local region) becomes higher, whereas in the case of distributed arrangement Compared to the case of centralized placement, the adopted one has a yellow occupancy rate (local region of KCx on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the regions of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively. (By the ratio to) becomes lower. In this way, in the local area of the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the case of the distributed arrangement is adopted as compared with the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. The white color of the white coating film, which is a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a person, is often seen by the player, and the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 can be made difficult to notice. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

Even if the distributed arrangement is adopted, the four full-color LEDs correspond to the four full-color LEDs in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, due to the arrangement in other electronic components. In some cases, one or two of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 must be arranged, but even in this case, the yellow occupancy rate (in the case of the centralized arrangement) is higher than that in the case of the distributed arrangement. The front (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC in the regions of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with the yellow paint is increased by the ratio to the local region).

In the case of distributed arrangement, the following rules may be provided as the arrangement method of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED. For example, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), for example, one of the four full-color LEDs (which may be another electronic component) is selected as a reference, and the width of the selected one full-color LED is selected. Use dimensions and height dimensions. When the full-color LED3 having the width dimension Nw and the height dimension Nh and the corresponding part number KCn3 are selected as a reference, the positions where the full-color LEDs1 to LED4 are arranged are the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs1 to LED4 are arranged. First, the full-color LED 3 is arranged so as to be outside the surrounding area, and then the full-color LED 1 is arranged above the full-color LED 3 at a distance of a first distance Ph obtained by multiplying the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 3 by a predetermined number. The LEDs 4 are arranged on the right side of the full-color LED 3 at a distance of a second distance Pw obtained by multiplying the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 3 by a predetermined number, and the full-color LED 2 is placed at the first distance obtained by multiplying the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 3 by a predetermined number. Ph and the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 3 are multiplied by a predetermined number and arranged by a second distance Pw at the upper right of the full-color LED 3. The positions where the LEDs 1, LEDs 2 and LEDs 4 are arranged may be the same value of a predetermined number of times described above, or the values may be changed individually, and the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED 4 are arranged may be set. It may be selected so as to be outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged.

Next, consider the case where two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front (front) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. Two full-color LEDs adjacent to each other are placed on the front (front) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. Areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions to be arranged and part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to two adjacent full-color LEDs are printed with yellow paint by silk printing, for example, FIG. 271 (c). As shown in, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are arranged on the upper side of the vicinity of the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, that is, the areas KCp1 to KCp2 and the parts. In the case of the centralized arrangement in which the numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are arranged in a concentrated manner in the vicinity, and as shown in FIG. 271 (d), the positions away from the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. In addition, let us consider the case of distributed arrangement in which the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are distributed and arranged.

It should be noted that the positions where the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC in the case of the centralized arrangement and the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the case of the distributed arrangement are arranged. ) It is assumed that the positions where the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged in KCx are the same.

In both the centralized and distributed arrangements, the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs, and other electronic components (resistors, capacitors, In addition to the IC, a connector may be included.) And is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, so the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the area printed by silk printing with yellow paint. ) The ratio to KCx (hereinafter referred to as "yellow occupancy rate") is the same.

In addition, among the white resists solidly coated on the front (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC, the areas excluding the areas printed by silk printing with the yellow paint are printed by silk printing with the yellow paint. The ratio of the decorative substrate KC to the front surface (surface) KCx (hereinafter referred to as "white occupancy rate") in (excluding the area marked with) is larger than the yellow occupancy rate. As described above, the white occupancy rate of white occupying the surface of the decorative substrate KC by the white coating film formed by applying the white resist liquid is yellow due to the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 and the like on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KC. ) Since it is larger than the yellow occupancy rate that occupies KCx, even when the decorative substrate KC (white coating film) is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, it is printed by silk printing. Compared to the yellow color of part numbers KCn1 to KCn2, the white color of the white coating, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, enters the player's eyes more and makes it difficult to notice the existence of part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Can contribute to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

In the case of centralized arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are arranged on the upper side of the vicinity of the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, that is, the part numbers KCn1 to 1 KCn2 are centrally arranged. Specifically, in the case of centralized arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is arranged above the vicinity of the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED1 is arranged, and the position where the full-color LED2 adjacent to the full-color LED1 is arranged is arranged. The part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged above the vicinity of the indicated region KCp2.

In this way, when the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are arranged on the upper side in the vicinity of the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, the parts corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are arranged. Since the numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are locally concentrated, the reflectance of the yellow is lower than the reflectance of the white of the white coating film, but the reflectance is low even if the reflectance is high. A region of reduced reflectance will be formed.

That is, in the case of centralized arrangement, a white coating film which is a kind of decoration visible to the player in a local area above the vicinity of the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs1 to LED2 are arranged. Compared to the white color, the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 is more visible to the player, and the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 is easily noticed. Therefore, the decorativeness may be deteriorated.

On the other hand, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are dispersed at a position away from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. It is arranged. Specifically, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is arranged in the lower left of the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED1 is arranged, and the position where the full-color LED2 adjacent to the full-color LED1 is arranged is arranged. The part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is arranged in the lower right of the indicated area KCp2.

In this way, when the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are distributed and arranged at positions away from the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, the two full-color LEDs and the two full-color LEDs are arranged. Although the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are locally concentrated and not arranged at all, and the above-mentioned reflectance reduction region is not formed at all, the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film. High reflectance due to the yellow part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 can be maintained. Further, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are distributed and arranged at positions away from the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to 1 The presence of KCn2 is inconspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in decorativeness.

In the case of distributed arrangement, the following rules may be provided as the arrangement method of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED. For example, as shown in FIG. 271 (d), for example, one of the two full-color LEDs (which may be another electronic component) is selected as a reference, and the width of the selected one full-color LED is selected. Use dimensions and height dimensions. When the full-color LED1 having the width dimension Nw and the height dimension Nh and the corresponding part number KCn1 are selected as a reference, the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED2 are arranged are the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED2 are arranged. The two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are arranged so as to be outside the surrounding area, that is, at a position away from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. First, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is arranged, and then the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is multiplied by the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED1 by a predetermined number in the left-right direction. The two-distance Pw'corresponds to the full-color LED 1 by at least a relationship larger or equal to the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 1 so that the minimum length of the character string of the full-color LED 1 is separated.) It is placed on the right side of the full-color LED 1 away from the part number KCn1. The part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged in another place along the vertical direction of the full-color LED 2 arranged to the right of the full-color LED 1 (for example, an area indicating a position where the full-color LED 2 adjacent to the full-color LED 1 is arranged. In the case of (arranging the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 on the upper right side of KCp2), the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED1 is multiplied by a predetermined number for the vertical direction, and the second distance Ph'(second distance Ph'is at least , A relationship that is greater than or equal to the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED1 is established so that the minimum height of the character string of the full-color LED1 is separated from the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1. And place it. The value of the predetermined number of times for the left-right direction described above and the value of the predetermined number of times for the vertical direction described above may be the same value, or the values may be changed individually, and the two adjacent full-color LEDs 1 may be used. It may be selected so that the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are distributed and arranged at a position away from the position where the LEDs 2 are arranged.

In the case of distributed arrangement, as a method of arranging the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED, for example, when two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. Of the two full-color LEDs, when the other full-color LED is arranged in any of the upper right, lower right, upper left, and lower left of one full-color LED with respect to one full-color LED, two full-color LEDs are arranged according to the above-mentioned rule. One of the full-color LEDs (which may be another electronic component) is selected as a reference, and the width dimension and height dimension of the selected one full-color LED are used. Since the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 can be arranged apart from each other only by the above-mentioned second distance Pw'and / or the second distance Ph', the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged can be arranged. The two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 can be dispersedly arranged at positions away from the indicated regions KCp1 to KCp2.

Incidentally, conventionally, a game machine including a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). A decorative member covering the decorative substrate was arranged in front of the light emitting means provided in this game machine. By the way, if the decorative member is made of a transparent material, the color of the resist liquid applied to the surface of the decorative substrate can be visually recognized as it is when the light emitting means is turned off, and the world view of the gaming machine is destroyed. There was a risk that the game interest would decline.

Further, conventionally, a game machine including a substrate on which an operation unit is provided has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-205304 (paragraphs [0106] to [0112], and FIG. 9)). This substrate was housed in a housing member. By the way, when the accommodating member is made of a transparent material or a translucent material, the electronic part number formed on the surface of the substrate on which the operation unit is provided can be visually recognized through the accommodating member. However, since the electronic part number has nothing to do with the game for the player, the electronic part number may be visually recognized through the accommodating member, which may disrupt the world view of the game machine and reduce the interest in the game. there were.

Further, conventionally, a game machine including a substrate on which a part number or the like is indicated by silk printing has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-141683 (paragraph [0047], paragraph [0048], and FIG. 3)). .. Some substrates are coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color to enhance the decorativeness with high reflectance. However, when the substrate is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, the silk printing can also be visually recognized by the player, and there is a risk that the decorativeness may be deteriorated.

Further, conventionally, a game machine including a substrate on which a part number or the like is indicated by silk printing has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-141683 (paragraph [0047], paragraph [0048], and FIG. 3)). .. Some substrates are coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color to enhance the decorativeness with high reflectance. However, when silk printing is provided on the coating film coated with the resist solution of a predetermined color, the reflectance of the substrate may decrease.

[Structure of magnetic sensor]
Next, a magnetic sensor 1111 attached to the back surface side of the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the start port unit 2100, and a magnetic sensor 2404 provided in the first attacker unit 2400. (Ii) The magnetic sensor 2602 provided in the attacker unit 2600 and the magnetic sensor 3055 provided in the back induction unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described. Here, since the magnetic sensors 1111, 404, 2602, and 3055 have the same structure, the magnetic sensor 1111 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 272 and 273. FIG. 272 is an exploded perspective view of the magnetic sensor disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 273 is an exploded perspective view of the magnetic sensor disassembled and viewed from the rear.

The magnetic sensor 1111 includes a box body 1111a having a rectangular opening 1111aa that is open at the rear and long in the vertical direction, a magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in the box body 1111a, and a flat plate-shaped cover that closes the opening 1111aa. It has a body 1111c and. The outer shape of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is smaller than the outer shape of the box body 1111a, and when the magnetic sensor board 1111b is housed in the box body 1111a, the distance dimension between the outer circumference of the magnetic sensor board 1111b and the inner circumference of the opening 1111aa ( The clearance) is about 0.5 mm to 0.7 mm. The magnetic sensor 1111 is attached so that the front side of the box body 1111a comes into surface contact (contact) with other members, and as described above, the front side of the box body 1111a is the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. It is attached to the back surface side of the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 in a state of surface contact (contact).

The box body 1111a is molded of a colorless and transparent resin, and on the upper side wall of the box body 1111a, a part of the socket insertion port of the connector housing MCN mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b described later is provided. A rectangular connector housing insertion hole 1111ab is formed so as to be exposed. Further, on the left side wall and the right side wall of the box body 1111a, a rectangular locking hole 1111ac long in the vertical direction is formed in which the locking portion 1111caa formed in the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca of the cover body 1111c described later is inserted. Has been done. Further, at the four bottom corners of the box body 1111a, the box body 1111a is also reinforced, and the front side electronic components (front surface side electronic components) mounted on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b and the bottom portion of the box body 1111a A triangular columnar spacer 1111ad is formed to prevent contact with and.

In the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, when the cover body 1111c closes the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a with the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in the box body 1111a, a pair of cover bodies 1111c described later. In order to prevent interference between the mounting piece 1111ca and the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, a pair of notched portions 1111ba are formed respectively.

On the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, in addition to the magnetic detection element MSD capable of detecting magnetism, the magnetic detection determination result can be output to the outside based on the detection signal from the magnetic detection element MSD. In addition to pads on which controller CTRs, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. are mounted, front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) such as magnetic detection element MSD, controller CTR, various resistors, and various capacitors are soldered. In addition, the entire area excluding through holes, lands, etc. is white due to a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. The resist layer is formed. In the present embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, a region indicating a part number of the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) and a position where the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) is arranged. Attributes of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts) such as (Furthermore, shape of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts), size of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts), front side electronic parts (surface) The front side notation part (front side notation part) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the side electronic component) and the model of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) is a predetermined color (for example). , Yellow, which is a light color that is less noticeable than white), and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid white resist.

In addition to the connector housing MCN to which the electrical wiring is connected, various ICs, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. are mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, and the connector housing MCN, various ICs, various resistors, etc. In addition to the pads on which the rear side electronic components (back surface side electronic components) such as various capacitors are soldered, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding through holes, lands, etc. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "solid white resist") to form a white resist layer. In the present embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is an area indicating the part number of the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) and the position where the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) is arranged. Attributes of rear-side electronic components (back-side electronic components), etc. (Furthermore, the shape of the rear-side electronic components (back-side electronic components), the size of the rear-side electronic components (back-side electronic components), the rear-side electronic components (back surface) The rear side electronic component (back side electronic component) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the side electronic component) and the model of the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) is a predetermined color (for example). , Yellow, which is a light color that is less noticeable than white), and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid white resist.

The socket insertion openings of the connector housing MCN are formed so as to be parallel to the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b and four so as to be parallel to the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. Various terminals are arranged in a row. That is, the connector socket connected to the tip of the electrical wiring (harness) inserted into the socket insertion port of the connector housing MCN is parallel to the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. As a result, when the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is housed in the box 1111a and the opening 1111a of the box 1111a is closed by the cover 1111c, the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is connected to the connector socket inserted into the socket insertion port of the connector housing MCN. The electrical wiring (harness) can be prevented from covering the rear surface (back surface) and the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b.

In the controller CTR, a wiring pattern is formed on the magnetic sensor board 1111b so as to be electrically connected to the connector housing MCN, and the connector housing MCN is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via electrical wiring (harness). The controller CTR of the magnetic sensor board 1111b and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other. The four various terminals of the connector housing MCN are composed of a power supply line (for example, DC + 5V), a ground (GND) line, a signal line 1, and a signal line 2. The controller CTR can output the magnetic detection result (presence or absence of magnet approach) to the main control board 1310 as a detection signal via the signal line 1 and / or the signal line 2.

Further, the controller CTR is configured so that the magnetic detection distance of the magnetic detection element MSD is preset by various resistors mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. For example, there are a plurality of magnetic detection distance setting terminals of the controller CTR, and among the plurality of magnetic detection distance setting terminals of the controller CTR, the magnetic detection distance setting terminal of the corresponding controller CTR is set so that the magnetic detection distance is predetermined. The power supply line, which is electrically connected to the power supply line, is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected resistor (which is electrically connected to the so-called "pull-up resistor"). The magnetic detection distance setting terminal of the corresponding controller CTR may be electrically connected to a ground (GND) supply line that is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line. The controller CTR may be configured so that the magnetic detection distance of the magnetic detection element MSD can be set based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 via the signal line 1 and / or the signal line 2. Good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, silk printing is not present on the solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. Further, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, which of the front side electronic components (front surface side electronic components) is a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. Information for identifying such electronic components is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. ) Contains information for identifying what kind of electronic component the rear side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. It is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. That is, in the present embodiment, the information for identifying what kind of electronic component the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is is the magnetic sensor board 1111b. Nothing is written on the front surface (front surface) of the above, and it is for specifying what kind of electronic component the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is. No information is written on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b.

The cover body 1111c is molded from a colorless and transparent resin, and the product control number 1111cc (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c, and the front surface of the cover body 1111c. A pair of flat plate-shaped mounting pieces 1111ca extend forward from the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the (surface). On the outside of the tip of the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca, a locking portion 1111ca having a long rectangular shape in the vertical direction is formed so as to project. The locking portion 1111caa is in front of the cover body 1111ca so as to be smoothly inserted into the locking holes 1111ac formed in the left side wall and the right side wall of the box body 1111a when the cover body 1111c closes the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a. The two corners are chamfered. The locking portion 1111caa is locked by being inserted into the locking holes 1111ac formed on the left side wall and the right side wall of the box body 1111a when the cover body 1111c is closed with the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a.

A pair of locking holes 1111ac formed on the left side wall and the right side wall of the box body 1111a and a locking portion 1111caa formed on the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca of the cover body 1111c have a rectangular shape long in the vertical direction. Therefore, in a state where the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a is closed by the cover body 1111c, a pair of locking holes 1111ac formed on the left side wall and the right side wall of the box body 1111a and a pair of the cover body 1111c. By locking the locking portion 1111ca formed on the mounting piece 1111ca, the cover body 1111c is a pair of the box body 1111a on which the locking portion 1111ca formed on the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca is locked. It is possible to prevent rotation around the locking hole 1111ac of the above.

Here, a method of assembling the magnetic sensor 1111 will be briefly described. First, the surface of the magnetic sensor board 1111b on which the connector housing MCN is not mounted, that is, the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is inserted into the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a, and the connector housing insertion hole formed in the box body 1111a. With the connector housing MCN of the magnetic sensor board 1111b inserted into 1111ab and a part of the connector housing MCN exposed from the box 1111a, at the four corners of the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b and the bottom four corners of the box 1111a. The magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is fed to the bottom of the box 1111a until the spacer 1111ad to be formed comes into surface contact (contact).

In a state where the four corners of the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b and the spacers 1111ad formed at the bottom four corners of the box body 1111a are in surface contact (contact), the front surface side of the box body 1111a and the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b The positional relationship is parallel to the front surface (surface).

Subsequently, when covering the cover body 1111a with the opening 1111a of the box body 1111a, the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca of the cover body 1111c are inserted into the pair of notched portions 1111ba of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b to insert the cover body 1111c into the box body. When pushed toward the opening 1111aa of the 1111a, the locking portion 1111caa formed in the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca of the cover body 1111c is inserted into the pair of locking holes 1111ac formed in the left side wall and the right side wall of the box body 1111a. And locked. As a result, the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a is closed by the cover body 1111c. In this state, the front surface (front surface) of the cover body 1111c is in surface contact (contact) with the surface of the connector housing MCN mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, and the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is in contact with the surface of the cover body 1111c. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the spacer 1111ad and the front surface (surface) of the cover body 1111c. As a result, the game area 5a of the game board 5 is accommodated in the box body 1111a of the magnetic sensor 1111 due to vibration caused by the flow of the game ball, vibration caused by the operation of various electric drive sources (solenoid, motor, etc.), and the like. It is possible to prevent (stabilize) the glaring of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b.

Further, in a state where the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a is closed by the cover 1111c, the upper side wall of the box 1111a, the left side wall of the box 1111a, and the box 1111a constituting the opening 1111a of the box 1111a. The lower side wall, the rear end surface of the right side wall of the box body 1111a, and the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c are arranged on the same plane so as to be flush with each other.

By the way, since the magnetic sensor 1111 is important for detecting illegal magnetism, if it is modified illegally, the approach of the magnet cannot be transmitted to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the game ball is started by the magnet. Even if a magnet goto is performed that leads the ball to the first starting port 2002 of the 2100 and enters the ball to obtain many lottery opportunities with a small number of balls, the main control board 1310 cannot detect the fraudulent act by this magnet goto. .. As described above, in the magnetic sensor 1111, since the box body 1111a and the cover body 1111c are molded from the transparent resin, the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is housed in the box body 1111a and the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a is the cover body 1111a. When it is attached to the back side of the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the start port unit 2100 in a state of being blocked by the sensor, a clerk of a game hall or the like, a game The person can visually recognize the state of the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

However, a person who intends to commit fraudulent acts, from the state of the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, in particular, the part number of the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) printed by silk printing, the front side electronic component. Attributes of front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts) such as an area indicating the position where (front side electronic parts) are arranged (Furthermore, the shape of the front side electronic parts (front side electronic parts), front side electronic parts (front side) Front side notation indicating the size of the front side electronic component (electronic component), the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component), and the model of the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component). From (the notation on the front side), there is a possibility that it will be an information source for identifying the mounted electronic components, grasping the circuit configuration, and modifying the circuit.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, silk printing is not present on the solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. That is, on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, a front side notation portion (front surface side notation portion) and a rear surface side notation portion (back surface side notation portion) printed by silk printing are completely formed. Not. Further, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, which of the front side electronic components (front surface side electronic components) is a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. Information for identifying such electronic components is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. ) Contains information for identifying what kind of electronic component the rear side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. It is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. This makes it difficult to identify the electronic components mounted on the magnetic sensor board 1111b and grasp the circuit configuration.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the magnetic sensor 1111, since the box body 1111a and the cover body 1111c are molded by the transparent resin, the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is housed in the box body 1111a and the box body 1111a. When the opening 1111aa is closed by the cover body 1111c and attached to the back surface side of the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the start port unit 2100, the game hole The staff such as the store clerk can visually recognize the state of the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall visually confirms the state of the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 to confirm whether or not the magnetic sensor board 1111b is fraudulent. Can be done. When the clerk of the game hall or the like opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2, the various members constituting the game board 5 are molded (formed) by a transparent resin, so that the magnetic sensor substrate is formed. The state of the rear surface (back surface) of 1111b can be visually recognized. As a result, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall visually confirms the state of the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 to confirm whether or not the magnetic sensor board 1111b is fraudulent. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1111 is attached to the back side of the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 with the front side of the box body 1111a in the vicinity of the start port unit 2100. ing. Further, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 and the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 adopting the configuration of measures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment as described above. Hereinafter, a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) mounted on the "front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3" may be turned off. In the state, the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 makes the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member appear as if they are white members. Therefore, the magnetic sensor 1111 is also transparent in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the start port unit 2100 due to the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111. The box body 1111a molded from the colorless and transparent resin of the magnetic sensor 1111 attached to the back surface side of the flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 looks as if it is a white member. That is, the magnetic sensor 1111 is also mixed (assimilated) with the transparent member on the game board side and the transparent member on the door frame side, so that it does not interfere with the player's vision and is less likely to interfere with the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the magnetic sensor 1111 has the box body 1111a and the cover body 1111c molded from the transparent resin, the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is housed in the box body 1111a and the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a is the cover body. In the state of being blocked by 1111c, the electrical wiring (harness) connected to the connector socket inserted into the socket insertion port of the connector housing MCN does not cover the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. Can be done. As a result, the magnetic sensor 1111 is attached to the back surface side of the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the start port unit 2100, and the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b and When checking the condition of the rear surface (back surface), the electrical wiring (harness) does not interfere (obtrusively).

In the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b have front side electronic components (front surface side electronic components) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. No information for identifying what kind of electronic component is written on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, and the rear surface side electronic component mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b (back surface). Although no information for identifying what kind of electronic component the back side electronic component is is written on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, the board control number of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is used as the magnetic sensor board. It may be written on the front surface (front surface) and / or the rear surface (back surface) of 1111b. As a method of indicating the substrate control number, it may be printed by silk printing with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a bright color that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and black or green, which is easily conspicuous with respect to white). In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the board control number is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the board control number in the wiring pattern which is a copper foil, and by removing the foil residue. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the model of the connector housing MCN mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is not indicated on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, but the model of the connector housing MCN. May be written on the front surface (front surface) and / or the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. As a method of indicating the model of this connector housing MCN, it is printed by silk printing with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white, and black or green, which is easily conspicuous with respect to white). Alternatively, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the model of the connector housing MCN is a foil removal formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the model of the connector housing MCN in the wiring pattern which is a copper foil. It may be formed by leaving foil.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the product control number 1111cc (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c, but instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c. The product control number 1111cc (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 may be engraved on any of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall of the box body 1111a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the product control number 1111cc (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c, but instead of the engraving, the product of the magnetic sensor 1111 The control number 1111cc (ABC-001) may be printed directly on the back surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c with a paint of a predetermined color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or a colorless and transparent sheet. , A colored transparent sheet or a sheet printed on an opaque sheet may be attached to the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c. Further, instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c, the product control number 1111cc of the magnetic sensor 1111 is applied to any of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall of the box body 1111a. ABC-001) may be printed directly with a paint of a predetermined color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or a magnetic sensor on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. A product on which the product control number 1111 cc (ABC-001) of 1111 is printed may be pasted.

Further, in the present embodiment described above, the controller CTR is configured such that the magnetic detection distance of the magnetic detection element MSD is preset by various resistors mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. However, the magnetic detection distance of the magnetic detection element MSD can be set based on the control signal (signal transmitted via the signal line 1 and / or the signal line 2) from the main control board 1310. It may be configured as. In this way, if the approach of the magnet is detected at an earlier stage, the magnetic detection distance can be changed significantly, and the magnet can be changed to the extent that the course of the game ball can be changed when the approach of the magnet is grasped. When determining whether or not the magnets are close to each other, the magnetic detection distance can be reduced and the setting can be changed. As a result, the main control board 1310 can grasp the approaching state of the magnets by changing the setting of the magnetic detection distance, and first gives a slight warning notification according to the approaching magnets (for example, the door frame 3). The full-color LED of the door frame 3 blinks slowly (for example, every second) and gradually strengthens the warning notification (for example, the full-color LED of the door frame 3 blinks red quickly (for example, every 0.5 seconds). ) Along with blinking, a warning sound (for example, "bee, bee, bee" sound) is repeatedly played), and at the final stage, an illegal notification that the magnet is a magnet (for example, the full-color LED of the door frame 3 is turned red). Along with the lighting, a warning announcement (for example, the voice "Abusive activity is being performed" is repeatedly played).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1111 is attached to the back surface side of the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the start port unit 2100. The mounting position of the magnetic sensor 1111 is the front or the rear in the area where the movable body operates, or the box body 1111a of the magnetic sensor 1111 even when the mounting position is the front or the rear in the vicinity of the area where the movable body operates. There is no silk printing on the solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in (that is, the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b). On the rear surface (back surface), the front side notation portion (front surface side notation portion) and the rear surface side notation portion (back surface side notation portion) printed by silk printing are not formed at all), and the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. On the front surface (front surface), in order to identify what kind of electronic component the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) is by the wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. The information is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b has a layer (back surface) on which a wiring pattern is formed. In the copper plane), the information for identifying what kind of electronic component the rear side electronic component (back side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern that is the copper foil is to pull out the copper foil around the outside of the information. Since it is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed, even if the state of the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is reflected on the housing of the movable body, the reflected content is reflected on the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. It can be difficult to identify the mounted electronic components and grasp the circuit configuration.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b has a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component). Information for identifying what kind of electronic component each is is not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b On the rear surface (back surface), in order to identify what kind of electronic component the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) is by the wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. The information was not formed by the foil-removing foil residue formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. That is, in the present embodiment, the information for identifying what kind of electronic component the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is is the magnetic sensor board 1111b. In order to identify what kind of electronic component is the rear side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, as well as not being marked on the front surface (front surface) of the above. No information was written on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. Therefore, a circle symbol is formed near the position corresponding to the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component), and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed to form a foil removal reference terminal symbol, which is the front surface of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b ( The foil removal reference terminal symbols may be covered with white resists formed on the front surface of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b and coated on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, or the electronic components on the rear surface side (back surface side). A circle symbol is created near the position corresponding to the electronic component), and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed to form a foil removal reference terminal symbol, which is formed on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. The foil removal reference terminal symbol may be covered with a white resist that is solidly coated on the rear surface (back surface) of the substrate 1111b. The wiring patterns forming these foil removal reference terminal symbols are electrically insulated from the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) and the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component), respectively. As the foil removal reference terminal symbol, if the surrounding area is a so-called beta land (board ground), the circle symbol itself may be used as the foil removal. Further, as the foil removal reference terminal symbol, instead of the circle symbol, a symbol indicating the polarity of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) or the rear surface side electronic component (back surface side electronic component) may be used (used in the circuit diagram). It may be a symbol or a simplified version of the symbol used in the circuit diagram). Further, among the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, the specific front-side electronic components (specific surface-side electronic components) are mounted in substantially the same direction. In some cases (that is, for the mounting worker or the automatic machine, a rule is provided in advance that the mounting orientation of a specific front side electronic component (specific surface side electronic component) is the same (there is no one that mounts in the opposite direction). (If) is near the position corresponding to the terminal of any one specific front side electronic component (specific surface side electronic component) among a plurality of specific front side electronic components (specific surface side electronic component). The foil removal reference terminal symbol may be formed on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, or may be predetermined with terminals of one or more specific front side electronic components (specific surface side electronic components). The foil removal reference terminal symbol may be formed on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b in the vicinity of the corresponding position. In this case as well, the foil removal reference terminal symbol may be a symbol indicating the polarity of the LED instead of the circle symbol (a symbol used in the circuit diagram or a symbol used in the circuit diagram (anode terminal and cathode terminal). It may be a simplified version of the symbol) that can be identified as. Further, among the rear surface side electronic components (back surface side electronic components) mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, the specific rear surface side electronic components (specific rear surface side electronic components) are mounted in substantially the same direction. In some cases (that is, for the mounting worker or the automatic machine, a rule is provided in advance that the mounting orientation of a specific rear-side electronic component (specific rear-side electronic component) is the same (there is no one that mounts in the opposite direction). (If) is near the position corresponding to the terminal of any one of the plurality of specific rear surface side electronic components (specific rear surface side electronic components) of the specific rear surface side electronic component (specific rear surface side electronic component). The foil removal reference terminal symbol may be formed on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, or may be predetermined with the terminals of one or more specific rear surface side electronic components (specific rear surface side electronic components). The foil removal reference terminal symbol may be formed on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b in the vicinity of the corresponding position. In this case as well, the foil removal reference terminal symbol may be a symbol indicating the polarity of the LED instead of the circle symbol (a symbol used in the circuit diagram or a symbol used in the circuit diagram (anode terminal and cathode terminal). It may be a simplified version of the symbol) that can be identified as.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the light emitting effect unit 5000 of FIG. 255 is provided as a decorative member. The light emitting effect unit 5000 includes an LED substrate 5070 of FIG. 255 as a substrate, a light guide plate 5060 of FIG. 255 as a light guide member, a diffusion sheet 5050 of FIG. 255 as a transparent member, and a decorative body 5040 of FIG. 255 as a decorative body. .. The LED substrate 5070 is equipped with the LED bare chip 5075 of FIG. 255 as a light emitting means. The light guide plate 5060 is arranged in front of the LED substrate 5070, and can emit the light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075 forward. The diffusion sheet 5050 is arranged in front of the light guide plate 5060. The decorative body 5040 is arranged in front of the diffusion sheet 5050. The diffusion sheet 5050 has five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long band shape in the left-right direction coated with a white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 of FIG. Is formed.

In this way, the light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075, which is a light emitting means, is emitted to the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member, via the light guide plate 5060, which is a light guide member, but to the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member. Is formed at a position corresponding to the LED bare chip 5075, which is a light emitting means, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, which is an opaque region, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long band shape in the left-right direction coated with a white paint. Therefore, the position where the LED bare chip 5075, which is a light emitting means, is mounted is applied with a white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, which is an opaque region that does not shine brightly in the decorative body 5040, which is a decorative body like a point light source. It is softened by five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long band shape in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to contribute to uniformly illuminate the surface 5060x, which is the surface of the light guide plate 5060, which is a light guide member facing the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member. Therefore, the light emission effect of the decorative body 5040, which is a decorative body, is used. It is difficult to give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the light emission effect.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game can be performed, and the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. 249 as the conductive member and FIG. 249 as the first wiring member. The wiring is routed to the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 of the above, and the wiring is routed to the groove inner space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. 249 as a second wiring member. .. The metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, and the wiring routed to the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise, and the metal wiring groove 1605 The wiring routed to the groove inner space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is more resistant to the influence of electromagnetic noise than the wiring routed to the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

A metal wiring groove 1605 is formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. 249, which is one surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 facing the source side of electromagnetic noise. The wiring is arranged in the space inside the groove, and has a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. On the bottom outer surface 1605d of the groove portion 1605a, a wiring routed to the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is arranged.

As described above, the metal wiring groove 1605, which is a second wiring member, is more resistant to the influence of electromagnetic noise than the wiring routed to the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member. The wiring routed to the space inside the groove is formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605, which is one surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 facing the source side of electromagnetic noise. The metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member, is arranged and is more vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise than the wiring routed in the groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the second wiring member. The wiring routed to the formed groove outer space is the bottom of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 which is the other surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 that does not face the source side of the electromagnetic noise. By arranging on the outer surface 1605d, the wiring routed to the groove outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 which is the first wiring member and the second wiring member in the space affected by the electromagnetic noise, Wiring routed in the groove inner space formed by a certain metal wiring groove 1605 can be arranged in a mixed manner. Therefore, the noise resistance due to electromagnetic noise can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game can be played, and the flexible flat cable 5030 shown in FIG. 254 is provided as a flat wiring member. In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors are arranged in parallel as a plurality of conductors including a ground wire which is a power supply line and a control wire, and are covered with an insulating material. The flat conductors on both sides of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source side of electromagnetic noise as the endmost conductors in the width direction are arranged as ground wires which are power lines. In other words, among a plurality of flat conductors including the ground wire which is a power supply line and the control line, the ground wire which is a power supply line is arranged between the source of electromagnetic noise and the control line.

As described above, in the flexible flat cable 5030 which is a flat wiring member, a plurality of flat conductors which are a plurality of conductors including a ground wire which is a power supply line and a control line are arranged in parallel, and a power supply is provided. Of the plurality of flat conductors including the ground wire, which is a wire, and the control wire, the ground wire, which is a power supply wire, is arranged between the source of electromagnetic noise and the control wire. It is possible to improve the noise resistance due to electromagnetic noise with respect to a flat conductor which is a conductor other than the flat conductors on both sides of the end as the conductor on the end end side. Therefore, the noise resistance due to electromagnetic noise can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game can be performed, and the sound of the door frame 3 of FIG. 10 as the front frame and the door frame top unit 450 of FIG. 73 as the light emitting device It has a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 469. The door frame 3 is provided so as to be openable and closable, and a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 of the door frame top unit 450 are located on the upper front surface as predetermined positions of the door frame 3. It is provided. The door frame top unit 450 is capable of emitting light toward the front of the door frame 3 and is capable of emitting light toward the rear of the door frame 3.

Specifically, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 are made of resin in which the vibrating part such as the diaphragm and the center cap has translucency. It is formed of (for example, polypropylene having milky white color, etc.) and is formed in a columnar shape having through holes through which magnetic circuit parts such as a magnet and a yoke penetrate in the front-rear direction, and the vibrating part and the magnetic circuit part are enclosed in a casing. It is held by the body. A plurality of openings are formed in the housing portion in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, while the rear is open. On the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, an acoustic sound is provided on a mounting portion formed on four substrate mounting bending plates (not shown) extending from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 toward the rear by a predetermined distance dimension (about 18 mm in this embodiment). The decorative substrate 469 is attached. When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. It is arranged so as to face the rear surface, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464.

When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, the light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464. Is emitted, and light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion so that the topside speaker 464 can be illuminated. It has become. Further, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape) and top. The space between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is repeatedly reversed, and the speaker emits the speaker from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469.

As described above, the speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top base 451 is larger than the outer circumference of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 so that the acoustic decorative substrate 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 is exposed at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached. Through holes 451ba having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, they are emitted from the rear surface (back surface) of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, and then emitted from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. It exits to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through a gap between the outer circumference of the door frame and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451.

As described above, the door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame base 101 has a shape larger than or the same shape as the outer circumference of the through hole 451b at a position corresponding to the left and right through holes 451b formed in the door frame top base 451 and has a through hole 101k penetrating back and forth. Are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, they are emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, and acoustic decoration The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 passes through the gap between the outer circumference of the substrate 469 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451 and the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. It emits to the rear of.

In this way, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 of the door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3, and the door frame 3 can emit light. Since it is possible to emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is open, the direction of facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction of facing the rear side of the door frame 3 are as follows. It is possible to visually recognize the notification mode by the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. As a result, in the game hall, the acoustic decoration board of the door frame top unit 450 is provided to the staff such as the clerk of the game hall passing through the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to convey the notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the 469. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, it is possible to visually recognize the notification modes of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 from the front surface side and the rear surface side of the door frame 3.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game can be performed, and the door frame 3 of FIG. 10 is used as the front frame, the speaker bracket 463 of FIG. 73 is used as the front frame light emitting means, and the top. It has a speaker lighting unit composed of a side speaker 464, an acoustic decorative substrate 469, and a transparent plate. The door frame 3 is provided so as to be openable and closable, and the speaker illumination unit is provided on the door frame 3 and can emit light in a manner different from the normal state when an abnormality or malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1. When the door frame 3 is in the open state, the door frame 3 is provided so that light emission in a manner different from the normal state can be visually recognized not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3. ing.

Specifically, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 are made of resin in which the vibrating part such as the diaphragm and the center cap has translucency. It is formed of (for example, polypropylene having milky white color, etc.) and is formed in a columnar shape having through holes through which magnetic circuit parts such as a magnet and a yoke penetrate in the front-rear direction, and the vibrating part and the magnetic circuit part are enclosed in a casing. It is held by the body. A plurality of openings are formed in the housing portion in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape is covered with a center cap arranged in the front, while the rear is open. On the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, an acoustic sound is provided on a mounting portion formed on four substrate mounting bending plates (not shown) extending from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 toward the rear by a predetermined distance dimension (about 18 mm in this embodiment). The decorative substrate 469 is attached. In this way, the speaker illumination unit is assembled by attaching the top side speaker 464 to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and attaching the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the transparent plate to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463. In other words, the speaker illumination unit is composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decorative substrate 469, and a transparent plate. When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. It is arranged so as to face the rear surface, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464.

When a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, the light is emitted from the translucent center cap through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the cylindrical shape of the top side speaker 464. Is emitted, and light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing portion so that the topside speaker 464 can be illuminated. It has become. Further, when a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 emit light, they are reflected by the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape) and top. The space between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is repeatedly reversed, and the speaker emits the speaker from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469.

The peripheral control board 1510 has an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball clogging of ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, opening of door frame 3, main body). Opening of frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (defect related to operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.)) (hereinafter, When an "abnormality or malfunction has occurred") occurs, the light emission data, which is a notification mode as described above, is mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. It is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown). In the light emitting mode (normal time) of the effect mode, there are various light emitting modes in which lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. are combined, whereas in the notification mode (mode different from the normal time), it is determined in advance. The light emitting mode is such that the color (red in the present embodiment) lights up at the maximum brightness.

In the conventional game machine, when the door frame 3 which is the front frame is opened, it is possible to visually recognize the light emission that notifies the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction from the direction (front) facing the front side of the door frame 3. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the light emission that notifies the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect from the direction (rear) facing the rear surface side of the door frame 3. In this respect, in the present embodiment, when the door frame 3 is open, the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect is externalized from both the direction of facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction of facing the rear side of the door frame 3. The light emission to be notified can be visually recognized (that is, the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction can be notified to the outside in a new manner of both the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3). ). As a result, in the game hall, an abnormality or a malfunction occurs in the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from both the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It can be communicated quickly and the work efficiency of the game hall can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a lottery is performed based on the result of the starting condition, a variation display of the symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery, and a predetermined result of the variation display of the symbol is performed. It is a gaming machine that gives a specific game profit to a player by deriving the hit variation result of the above, and is provided with a gaming board provided with a symbol display device for displaying the variation of the symbol and the gaming board. A frame body, a front frame provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the frame body, a detection means for detecting the open / closed state of the front frame, and a detection means provided on the front frame to detect the open state of the front frame. Based on the above, the front frame light emitting means capable of emitting light in a special mode different from the normal time is provided.

Specifically, for example, as a starting condition, the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 in FIG. 111, and in the main control board 1310 of FIG. 206, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player ( For example, a lottery of special lottery results that generate "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit") is performed. The main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 111 based on the result of the lottery, and uses a plurality of LEDs based on the control signal to display the variation of the symbol. An advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability" is advantageous to the player by deriving a predetermined hit fluctuation result as a special lottery result which is a result of the fluctuation display of the symbol. It is possible to add "per fluctuation (probability variation)" and "per time reduction (time reduction)"). A game board 5 provided with a function display unit 1400 for displaying variable patterns of a symbol, a main body frame 4 of FIG. 10 as a frame body on which the game board 5 of FIG. 111 is provided, and a main body frame 4 that can be opened and closed. The door frame 3 of FIG. 10 is provided as a front frame, a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 as a detecting means for detecting the open / closed state of the door frame 3, and the door frame 3 are provided. Based on the detection of the open state of the door frame 3, the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, and the acoustic decorative substrate 469 of FIG. 73 are used as front frame light emitting means capable of emitting light in a notification mode as a special mode different from the normal time. , And a speaker lighting unit composed of a transparent plate. In the light emitting mode (normal time) of the effect mode, there are various light emitting modes in which lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. are combined, whereas in the notification mode (mode different from the normal time), it is determined in advance. The light emitting mode is such that the color (red in the present embodiment) lights up at the maximum brightness.

Further, the front frame light emitting means comprises a light emitting substrate on which a light emitting portion is mounted on a substrate surface facing the front side of the game machine, and the light emitting portion mounted on the light emitting substrate emits light in the special mode. At least a part around the light emitting substrate so that the light emitting unit emits light in the special mode can be visually recognized not only from the front of the front frame but also from the rear of the front frame. The light emitting portion is arranged to leak light.

Specifically, for example, the speaker lighting unit composed of the speaker bracket 463, which is the front frame light emitting means, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decorative substrate 469, and the transparent plate is a substrate facing the front side of the pachinko machine 1. A plurality of acoustic decoration boards 469 are formed as a light emitting board on which a plurality of LEDs 469a are mounted as light emitting portions on the surface, and a plurality of acoustic decoration boards 469 are used when the plurality of mounted LEDs 469a emit light in a notification mode as a special mode. From at least a part around the acoustic decorative substrate 469 so that the LED 469a of the above can be visually recognized not only from the front of the door frame 3 as the front frame but also from the rear of the door frame 3 as the front frame. The arrangement is such that a plurality of LEDs 469a leak light.

Further, when the open state of the front frame is not detected, the front frame light emitting means emits light for a predetermined effect based on a fluctuation pattern set when the symbol is variablely displayed. A light reflecting portion (white printing portion, metal member) capable of reflecting the light leakage of the light emitting portion forward is provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the front door light emitting means when the front frame is in the closed state. ..

Specifically, for example, in the speaker lighting unit composed of the speaker bracket 463, which is the front frame light emitting means, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decorative substrate 469, and the transparent plate, the door frame 3 is opened as the front frame. When it is not detected (when the payout control MPU detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, it sends a door frame opening command to that effect to the main control board 1310. Then, when the main control board 1310 does not receive this door frame opening command), the main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400, and the design is changed by using a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal. The main control board 1310 transmits a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set when displaying and displaying the symbol in a variable manner to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 emits light for a predetermined effect (normally) based on this command. Based on the clock signal, the light emission data, which is the light emission mode of the production mode, is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 to turn on, off, blink, and light in gradation. It is mounted on the acoustic decorative substrate 469 as a light emitting portion at a position corresponding to the rear of the speaker lighting unit when the door frame 3 is in the closed state as the front frame. As a light reflecting part capable of reflecting the light leakage of the plurality of LEDs 469a forward, the reflecting sheet 1000a (white printed part having a high radiation rate or a color close to white) and the metal stopper FT (metal gloss) are used. Metal member) and the like are provided.

Further, the covering portion forming the back surface side of the light emitting substrate is a transparent member, and the light leakage of the light emitting portion is made visible from the rear of the front frame through (through) the transparent member.

Specifically, the speaker lighting unit is composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decorative substrate 469, and a transparent plate, and is transparent as a covering portion forming the back side of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 which is a light emitting substrate. The plate is a transparent member, and the light leakage of the plurality of LEDs 469a of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 is made visible from the rear of the door frame 3 through (through) the transparent plate which is the transparent member.

Further, a plurality of light emitting substrates constituting the front frame light emitting means are provided, and at least one of the plurality of light emitting substrates is provided on the open end side of the front frame.

Specifically, the speaker bracket 463 as the front frame light emitting means, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decorative substrate 469, and the acoustic decorative substrate 469 as the light emitting substrate constituting the speaker lighting unit composed of the transparent plate are the pachinko machine 1. Are provided on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, and are arranged on the acoustic decorative substrate 469 and the upper right side of the door frame 3 arranged on the upper left side of the door frame 3. At least one of the acoustic decorative substrates 469 is provided with an acoustic decorative substrate 469 arranged on the upper right side of the door frame 3 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front on the open end side of the door frame 3. As a result, even when the door frame 3 is opened slightly, the light emission on the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily visually recognized.

In addition, a plurality of the light emitting substrates constituting the front frame light emitting means are provided, and the light reflecting portion is provided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting substrates.

Specifically, the acoustic decoration substrate 469 as the light emitting substrate constituting the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration substrate 469 as the front frame light emitting means, and the speaker lighting unit composed of the transparent plate is the pachinko machine 1. Is provided on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, and as a light reflecting portion, the reflective sheet 1000a of FIG. 10 (white with high projection or white printing having a color close to white) is provided. In the section), the reflective sheet 1000a is arranged in the upper left region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and the light reflecting section is shown in FIG. The metal stopper FT arranged in the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 has the metal stopper FT at a position corresponding to the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the right side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. It is arranged in the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of 5.

Further, the light reflecting unit is a white printing unit provided on the game board and provided outside the game area of the game board.

Specifically, the reflective sheet 1000a (a white printing unit having a high firing rate or a color close to white) of FIG. 10 as a light reflecting unit is provided on the game board 5 and is outside the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a white printing part provided in.

The white printed portion has a larger area than the light emitting substrate. Specifically, the surface area of the reflective sheet 1000a is larger than the area on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front.

The light reflecting portion is a metal member provided on the frame body. Specifically, the metal stopper FT arranged in the upper right side region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 of FIG. 10 as a light reflecting portion is made of metal (metal member) and has gloss. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control units of FIGS. 113 and 114 can be used as a plurality of substrates on which components are mounted and a circuit is formed. The main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of 1300, the magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in the box body 1111a molded from the colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113, and the like. I have. A transparent main control board box 1320 as a first member arranged at a position difficult to see by a player among a plurality of boards, and as a board attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320. On the main control board 1310, a green coating film is formed as a coating film with a green resist liquid as the first insulating paint, and as a display unit for identifying electronic components (RAM clear switch, etc.) which are components. It is formed of a paint (for example, a white paint) printed by silk printing as a second insulating paint on a white paint having a part number of the paint. On the other hand, among the plurality of substrates, the box body 1111a molded from the colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 as the second member arranged at a position visible to the player, and the magnetic sensor 1111 has. For the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b as a substrate attached (accommodated) to the box body 1111a molded from a colorless and transparent resin, a white coating (that is, white) is used as a coating with a white resist liquid as the first insulating coating. Since only the coating film is formed, the electronic component (for example, FIG. 272) which is a component is compared with the main control board 1310 which is a substrate attached to the first member arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to see. It is possible to make it difficult to estimate the content of a circuit formed by mounting an electronic component such as a magnetic detection element MSD or a controller CTR).

In this way, a green coating film is formed by the green resist liquid as the first insulating paint, and the component number, which is a display unit for identifying electronic components (RAM clear switch, etc.), is on the green coating film. Regarding the main control board 1310 formed of a paint (for example, white paint) printed by silk printing as the second insulating paint, the contents of the circuit formed by mounting the electronic components may be estimated. Therefore, it is attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 which is a position where it is difficult for the player to see. On the other hand, with respect to the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, which makes it difficult to estimate the contents of the circuit formed by mounting the electronic components, the start port unit 2100 is a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Molded with a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 which is attached and arranged in a state of surface contact (contact) with the back surface side of the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of It is attached (accommodated) to the box body 1111a to be used. Therefore, fraud countermeasures can be taken.

Further, the box body 1111a molded from the colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 which is the second member is attached (accommodated) to the box body 1111a molded from the colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111. In the magnetic sensor board 1111b, which is a board, a display unit for specifying the mounting direction of the component is formed. Specifically, for example, a circle symbol is created near the position corresponding to the front side electronic component (front surface side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is formed. The foil removal reference terminal symbols are formed on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b as the foil removal reference terminal symbols formed by punching out, and the foil removal reference terminal symbols are formed by solid white resist coated on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. It can be configured to be covered.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as a plurality of boards, for example, the main control attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114. The substrate 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 110, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 107, and the box body 1111a molded by the colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. A magnetic sensor board 1111b or the like is mounted, and is attached (accommodated) to, for example, a transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114 as a plurality of main boards related to the progress of the game. It includes a main control board 1310, a function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 107, and a magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in a box body 1111a molded of a colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113. The main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114 is provided with a display unit capable of identifying mounted components (first). Main side board). On the other hand, the functional display board of the functional display unit 1400 of FIG. 107 and the magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in the box body 1111a molded of the colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113 have mounted parts. Since no identifiable display unit is provided (second main board), the main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114. Compared with (the first main board), it is difficult to estimate the contents of the electronic circuit from the outside.

As described above, the transparent mains of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114, which are the first main-side boards having a display unit capable of identifying the mounted components on the plurality of main-side boards related to the progress of the game. It does not have a main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the control board box 1320 and a display unit capable of identifying mounted components, and the contents of the electronic circuit are estimated from the outside as compared with the first main board. The function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 107, which is the second main board which is difficult to make, and the magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in the box body 1111a molded of the colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. , There is. As a result, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 107, which is the second main board described above as a board capable of preventing the contents of the electronic circuit from being estimated from the outside among the plurality of main boards. By adopting the configuration of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in the box body 1111a molded from the colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113, fraud countermeasures can be taken.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as a plurality of substrates, for example, a functional display substrate of the functional display unit 1400 of FIG. 107 and a box molded of a colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113. The magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in the body 1111a, the main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114, and the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 110. The peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 of FIG. 110, and the like are mounted, and the transparent main control board box of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114, which is the main board for the progress of the game. The main control board 1310 attached to (accommodated) 1320, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 107, and the magnetic sensor housed in the box body 1111a molded from the colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113. It includes a substrate 1111b and the like, and a peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 110, which is a sub-side substrate for an effect performed during a game. A plurality of main-side boards and sub-side boards are provided, respectively. For example, on the main board, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 107, the magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in the box body 1111a molded from the colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. A main control board 1310 or the like attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 114 is provided, and the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 110 is provided on the sub-side board. , The effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 of FIG. 110 and the like are provided. The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 110 and the effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 of FIG. 110, which are sub-side boards, are only boards provided with a display unit capable of identifying mounted components. It is configured. On the other hand, the functional display board of the functional display unit 1400 of FIG. 107, which is the main board, and the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in the box body 1111a molded from the colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113, FIG. Of the main control boards 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 107 and the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113 The magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in the box body 1111a molded from the colorless and transparent resin in FIG. 110 does not have a display unit capable of identifying the mounted component, and is the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 110 which is a sub-side substrate. It is configured as a specific main-side board that makes it difficult to estimate the contents of the electronic circuit from the outside as compared with the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 of FIG. 110, and the like. That is, the main board is configured to have a specific main board that makes it difficult to estimate the contents of the electronic circuit from the outside as compared with the sub board without having a display unit that can identify the mounted component. ing.

As described above, the magnetic sensor housed in the functional display board of the functional display unit 1400 of FIG. 107 and the box body 1111a molded of the colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113, which is the main board for the progress of the game. Of the main control boards 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 107, FIG. 113. The magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in the box body 1111a molded from the colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of the above is a sub-side regarding the effect performed during the game without having a display unit capable of identifying the mounted parts. It is configured as a specific main side board that makes it difficult to estimate the contents of the electronic circuit from the outside as compared with the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 110 and the effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 of FIG. Has been done. As a result, as a specific main-side board that can prevent the contents of the electronic circuit from being estimated from the outside among the main-side boards, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 107 and the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113 are used. Countermeasures against fraud can be taken by adopting the configuration of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in the box body 1111a molded from the colorless and transparent resin in the above.

[Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 279. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 274, and FIG. 276 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. 277 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing, and FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, and setting value confirmation. The display process will be described.

[Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and an initial value for hit determination to be used to determine the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a reach determination random number for determining whether to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the symbol display, and the first special symbol display and the second special of the function display unit 1400 when the jackpot game state is generated. A symbol random number to be used to determine the jackpot symbol and small hit symbol (determination of the hit type) derived and displayed on the symbol display, and a random number to determine the initial value for the jackpot symbol to be used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. Etc. are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open / close the movable piece capable of accepting the game ball of the second starting port 2004, and a random number for determining the normal symbol hit, and the normal symbol hit determination. The initial value determination random number for determining the normal symbol hit to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal symbol for determining the variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variablely displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers for variable display patterns are available.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the special random number is updated directly by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this hard random number circuit with built-in main control first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and at high speed in advance based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. After extracting other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another and extracting all the values within the predetermined numerical range, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again and the main control is performed. Based on the clock signal input to the MPU, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit. It is designed to do.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later, various types of RAM are stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the information as a numerical value and calculating the total is one with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when not done, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit judgment is derived from the non-volatile RAM built in by the main control MPU. An initial value derivation process is executed in which the ID code is extracted and the same fixed value is always derived from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the extracted ID code, and the derived fixed value is obtained. It is a mechanism to be set. That is, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code is constantly overwritten and updated in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored, and the initial value derivation process when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing it and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece can be opened and closed to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004. It is not possible to generate a gaming state.

[Processing when the main control side is turned on]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 274 and 275, the main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is being operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, while the RAM When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated. Since the time is extremely short within the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is actually pressed. The person who does this turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch.

In the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated, it sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and is stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is a flag indicating whether to delete various information including information indicating the value of the information output judgment counter), and is set to a value 1 when various information is deleted and a value 0 when various information is not deleted. .. The values of the RAM clear notification flags RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B are stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. Then, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the setting key switch is operated by the first ON operation. The setting key is turned on by 1311a, and the setting key is turned on by the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. While it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. And / or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the signal of setting key ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination in step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU sets the value 1 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, when it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU sets the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (described later, a setting value dedicated area in a specific area) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. Is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of the first ON operation), and the setting of the set value is changed. The value is set to 1 when it is permitted, and the value is set to 0 when it is not permitted to change the setting of the set value. The values of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B are stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until it starts (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state in which various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. When the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 boots in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the payout control board 633 is the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). ) Is in a state where it can receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. In the determination in step S24, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

In the determination in step S24, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is not input, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value 1 when the setting change of the set value is permitted, and a value 0 when the setting change of the set value is not permitted.

In the determination in step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0. (Step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when various information is erased and a value 0 when various information is not erased. In the determination in step S26, the main control MPU calculates the checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not erased (step S28). This checksum regards various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the total.

Following step S28, the main control MPU has a calculated checksum value (sum value) with a checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as backup flag BK-FLG value, etc. in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

In the determination in step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU has a backup flag BK-FLG that is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, it is considered that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error display is performed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

The power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is set from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After the first ON operation is performed by rotating the pachinko machine 60 degrees in the clockwise direction, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, so that the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. In the determination in step S18 described above, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and sets by the signal of the setting key ON. By determining that the setting key 1311a is ON, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and in step S20A described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 1. In the determination in step S25 described above, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change in step S37 described later is performed. Following the process, in the process of step S38 described later, the RAM error can be cleared and the game can proceed by clearing all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (the RAM error is cleared). Hereinafter, it will be described as "first RAM error canceling method").

As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch. The main control side power-on processing is started. The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination of S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38 described later, a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. By clearing the game, the RAM error can be cleared and the game can proceed (hereinafter, referred to as "second RAM error clearing method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU determines. When the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been completed normally, the error display in step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When telling that the contents stored in the are abnormal (or unreliable), there are two cancellation methods, a first RAM error cancellation method and a second RAM error cancellation method. Can be done by. As a result, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be canceled by performing the second RAM error canceling method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU has a built-in main control as a power recovery time. The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). This setting reads the power recovery information from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU, and sets the power recovery information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU itself is reset, and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK- is normally terminated when the main control side power is turned off, which will be described later. If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, as will be described later, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are cleared.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, the main control MPU performs the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted. (Step S37). The detailed description of this setting change process will be described later, but each time the pressing operation unit of the setting switching button of the setting changing board 1311 is pressed based on the detection signal from the setting switching button of the setting changing board 1311. , The set value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is operated from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, so that the signal of the decision key ON from the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The changed setting value is determined based on the above, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, the main control built-in RAM Clear all areas except for a specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU is performed by writing a value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area). In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control built-in RAM is always used. Except for a specific area among all the areas of the above (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding the specific area of the total area of the main control built-in RAM)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" is an area dedicated to the set value in which the set value is stored, and an out port 2010, a first sub-out port 2011, and a second sub-out port provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. It is composed of an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by 2012 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set value whose setting is changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area is the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011 and the first sub out port 2011 counted in the ball number counting process described later. The counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the two sub-out ports 2012 is stored.

The main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In the main control MPU, the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch indicates RAM clear, and when erasing various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply When the disconnection process is not completed normally, a counter that retrieves a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU and updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. Initial value derivation processing that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of is performed, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number. Set to a random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0. Further, the main control MPU advances the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU to set the initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally (hereinafter, "" The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register) to start the main control built-in WDT and start the time counting until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU (by the time when the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value) ( Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the WDT with built-in main control is activated and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence or absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in the testing institution of the game machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state is input to the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU in order to be updated by the hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring, the start of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU without duplication, and are predetermined. After extracting all the values in the numerical range, the one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the numerical range predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. The other values in the are extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on. Creates a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output judgment counter notification command as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed among various information, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU sets interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. To. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S54, when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random numbers for determining normal symbol hits, random numbers for determining initial values for determining normal symbol hits, random numbers for ordinary symbol variation display patterns, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the rewriting of various information including the game information and other information described above.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU outputs drive signals to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, a start port solenoid 2415, a first attacker solenoid 2418, a second attacker solenoid 2612, a base monitor, and the like. Stop (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT because it cannot be made to do so. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

As described above, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when it is affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power cutoff process. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power off processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. .. In other words, because the main control side power off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous time The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the main control side power off processing when the power is cut off, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the system is restarted after being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are excluded. It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Further, in the determination in step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the set value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1). At that time, that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (to be exact, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the set value is changed and determined. When the setting is changed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, per probability fluctuation (probability change)). In the case of (such as), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business start, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall presses the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation unit. In addition, when the setting value is decided to be changed, if the setting change processing is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change processing is performed is obtained. It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as the game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is currently set in addition to changing the set value. Since it is an important key that allows confirmation of the set value, possession is permitted only to a limited number of people including the manager of the game hall, and is limited to 2 to 3 people. In this embodiment, the set value is set. Even if the change is not decided, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall needs to erase (clear) the game backup information in the RAM. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the clear switch, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, a point will be described in which the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, receives the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island of the game hall It is possible to complete the main control side power cutoff process within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the waiting time until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) (boot timer: in the present embodiment). (2.5 seconds is set) is started, and if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs just before the standby time is reached, hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the charged charge is applied as DC + 5V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be completed. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without causing a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, the RAM clear switch is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no manifestation of intention by a staff member such as a game hall clerk to clear RAM. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is deleted (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, it is not possible to proceed with the game. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) due to the progress of this game The main control board performs the processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and the main control side power failure process composed of an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are performed. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum of step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. Never initializes. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU to contents the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power off processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, so far. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period during a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the processing when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22. It is determined in step S24 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the determination returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24. By repeating the above, the game cannot be progressed.

By making it impossible for the game to proceed by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt is enabled in step S52. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) are determined by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process which is set and described later. We have adopted a mechanism that can prevent various information) including information indicating the value of the counter for use) from being updated. When the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure in this way, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination)) Various information including information indicating the value of the counter for) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and game information) by surely completing the main control side power outage processing. By dividing it into two parts, one is covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output judgment counter) is not changed at all. , The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are surely prevented from being changed. Can be done.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter notification command are created and the main control is built in as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2415 and information indicating the drive state of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. .. Here, first, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on includes information instructing the drive state of the start port solenoid 2415 and information instructing the drive state of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. The problem in the case where the power is not set, that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2418. Then, when the first prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member or when the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven and the second winning opening 2006 is opened by the opening / closing member, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the main control board 1310 momentarily shuts down or loses power based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. By restoring the game state immediately before the occurrence of the above, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven, the first prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven. The second grand prize opening 2006 will shift from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member to the state of being opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, the jackpot game state. It is not possible to display at all which round of the throat. That is, for example, a game ball enters the first large winning opening 2005, is detected by the first large winning opening sensor 2402, and one count of the large winning openings telling the number of the game balls entered in the first large winning opening 2005. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits a display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the first prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of balls of the game ball can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the 4th round (4th round) of the big hit game state, the driving of the 1st attacker solenoid 2418 is stopped and the 1st big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed. Mainly the big winning opening 1 closing display command instructing to shift from the open state to the closed state (that is, the closing start of the first big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400). When transmission is transmitted from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven and the first big winning opening. A command to display the 5th opening of the large winning opening, which indicates that the 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing member (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the 1st big winning opening 2005) is issued. Transmission is performed from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen for notifying the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the player indicates that the movable piece is open) to the second start port 2004. When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2415 to open the movable piece to open the second start port. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the 2004 is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the start port solenoid 2415 is started to be driven and the movable piece is closed by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. (Ii) The start port 2004 will be closed.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and is generating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to be transmitted in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player seated in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is possible, and in such a case, the gaming state is returned to the gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen instructing the game to put the game ball into the second starting port 2004). There was also the problem of not knowing what kind of game a person would play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the main control return destination command at power-on are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the drive of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the first prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member. Since it is possible to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the state shifts to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen (that is, how many rounds) that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state. Although the screen showing) cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member by starting the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 in the big hit game state. A screen telling the player that he / she is in a state (for example, "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening." The screen) is displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600, and the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to enter the game ball into the first prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-described example, in a state in which the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then A screen telling that the drive of the start port solenoid 2415 is started to open the movable piece and the second start port 2004 is opened as the return destination of the main control board 1310. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect display device 1600 on a screen that conveys a message to the player, "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port." It is possible to instruct a player who is displayed in the display area and sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are always cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output judgment counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then the number of main prize balls at power-on. The information output judgment counter notification command is sent. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is used when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is executed. Information instructing that when clearing, and the above-mentioned low when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating which of the probabilistic time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored, and the model code of the pachinko machine are shown. It consists of information and. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of)).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line can move to the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works The 1310s are sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while being mixed. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the above to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the workers on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turn on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is for the copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type) and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection step of the manufacturing line By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 274 and 275.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 276 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is the main control side, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. .. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU is, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, a detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3051, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3052, and a detection from the second start port sensor 2401. Signal, detection signal from first prize opening sensor 2402, detection signal from second prize opening sensor 2601, detection signal from out port sensor 3053, first sub out port sensor 2403, and second sub out port sensor 3054, Detection signal from magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from main body frame open switch 4b, setting key switch 1311a Reads the signal from, the signal from the setting switching button, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that the payout control board 633 normally receives the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. , The input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3052 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 are read, the start port winning command corresponding to the other is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3052, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start port sensor 2401. When there is a detection signal of, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

In this embodiment, when all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those that have been subjected to empty terminal processing), this switch input processing is started. First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state of being input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including the one to which the empty terminal processing is performed) is set for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, one for comparing twice and the other for comparing twice to four times. Because it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning port sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3052, the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401, the first Detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2402, detection signal from the second big winning opening sensor 2601, out opening sensor 3053, first sub out opening sensor 2403, and detection signal from the second sub out opening sensor 3054, magnetic sensor 1111 Detection signal from 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame open switch, detection signal from main body frame open switch 4b, signal from setting key switch 1311a, It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys that the payout control board 633 has normally received the signal from the setting switching button and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. ..

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal defect monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, among the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU, the state of the empty terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logical state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal defect monitoring process, information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 is performed to determine whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Do based on. When it is determined that the logical state of the input terminal that has been subjected to empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is classified into a notification display that informs that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The malfunction command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the symbol random number described above is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 275, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to the winning determination (winning determination), each counter counts up only each time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter, which is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 275. The winning random number is updated in the winning random number update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs a ball count processing (step S107). In this ball count processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the detection signal from the out port sensor 3053 is input based on this input information to the game area 5a which is partitioned on the game board 5. When the out port sensor 3053 detects a game ball collected by the out port 2010, the value 1 is added to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010. The game ball collected by the first sub-out port 2011 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 by performing the (increment) calculation and inputting the detection signal from the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is first. When the sub-out port sensor 2403 detects it, a value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011. (Ii) When the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 by inputting the detection signal from the sub-out port sensor 3054. Performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the value of the collection ball counter that counts the number of balls of the game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012. That is, in the ball number counting process, the out port sensor 3053 detects the game ball collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port sensor 2403 detects the game ball collected by the first sub out port 2011, and the second (Ii) When the sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012, a calculation of adding a value 3 to the value of the collection ball counter is performed. The main control MPU mainly controls the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of balls of the game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012. It is stored in the out-ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, and the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, in the main control MPU, when the value of the collection ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10. Each time, a ball collection command for notifying that effect is created and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. In the main control MPU, when the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment) and further adds (increments) the value by 1 to the value of the collection ball counter, the collection ball The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value 0, and the operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs the prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633 are used. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first major winning opening 2005, a prize ball command that pays out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is 10 balls. In order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. Self-check to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within the specified time. Create a command and send it to the payout control board 633.

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. In order to convey that fact, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other categories, is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls is based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, the general winning opening 2001, the gate unit 2003, and the first Based on a game ball that has entered various winning openings (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning openings provided in the game board 5") such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the first major winning port 2005. The number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is counted, and in the prize ball control process in step S108, the memory is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. There is. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of, and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. When the number exceeds (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform that fact, and as transmission information. It is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, etc.). And frame state 2 command)), it is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation goto") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), Create a radio wave irradiation goto notification command classified into a notification display that informs that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, and store it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 404, 2602, 3055 are input, the fraud detection process using a magnet ( Hereinafter, it is determined that “magnet goto” is performed), and the value of the magnet goto counter is added (incremented) by a value of 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is initially set when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the timer interrupt process on the main control side. ), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the ability of the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to find the magnet goto at an early stage. It has become.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the game is not in the big hit game state, the detection is performed from the first big prize opening sensor 2402 or the second big winning opening sensor 2601. When a signal is input (when a game ball enters the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006), an abnormal winning of the large winning opening is classified as an abnormal state and is classified as a notification display. A winning abnormality display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and / or the magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value 1 as the detection of the cheating, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet. When the goto is not detected, the value 0 is set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the fraud detection has not been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, a value of 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of abnormal winning of the large winning opening is detected, a value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraudulent activity.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to permit the launch of the game ball B is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Occasionally, it is set in the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, fraud. When it is determined that the detection is, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. The main control MPU reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame open switch detects that the door frame is open, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b is input and the main body frame open switch 4b detects that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Is set in the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. The logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), is performed. It is composed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permitted logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted until the start.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is mainly used. It is acquired from the hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and the acquired random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) and the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match (big hit). It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is judged (determines the hit type) which of the hit type judgment values is matched.

When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3052, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2401. If this is the case, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the variation display pattern. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so as to light the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as big hit related commands (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 open Nth display command, big winning opening 1 closed display command, big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 closed display command A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 to open / close the opening / closing member. When the signal output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the first prize opening 2005 is opened from the closed state (round) twice, the function display unit 1400 rounds. The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp is set so as to turn on the 2-round indicator lamp of the display, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is 15 times, the function display unit 1400 Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp so that the 15-round indicator lamp of the round indicator is lit, store it in the output information storage area as output information, and light the presence or absence of time reduction in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit judgment random number is extracted and the main control is built in as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

The normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with the 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

As for the normal winning opening winning information, the one stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this ordinary winning opening winning information is set, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is placed in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory, and the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is stored. The ordinary winning opening winning information of the section is in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information memory, and the ordinary winning opening winning information of the third section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is in the second section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory. After being shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the ordinary winning opening winning information is stored in the first to second sections of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage, the ordinary winning opening winning information in the first section of the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is the ordinary winning. The normal winning mouth winning information in the second section of the ordinary winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the ordinary winning opening information storage in the 0th section of the ordinary winning opening information storage, and the ordinary winning opening winning information memory is shifted to the first section. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are free areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored ordinary winning opening winning information is used as a hold ball and the normal winning opening unit 1400 is used. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned ordinary winning opening winning information so as to turn on the hold indicator, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is extracted from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the open operation state, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above is stored as transmission information. While storing in the area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information. Is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect are created and transmitted. The output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2415 is set so as to be stored in the transmission information storage area as information and to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. When the value of the symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect, store them in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and turn on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. In this example, the winning probability of the ordinary lottery (probability of winning the ordinary lottery) is halved.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs a set value confirmation display process (step S117). The detailed description of the set value confirmation display process will be described later, but for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the input information. The detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b and the setting key are inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the rotation of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation by rotating 60 degrees clockwise from the position), and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the outside. A predetermined setting value display permission condition is determined by determining that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the frame 2 and determining that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and / or the setting key is determined by the setting key ON signal. Since it is determined that the switch 1311a is not turned on, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied. In the set value confirmation display process, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310 g. Is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process ends as it is and the process returns to this routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on the output information. This main control MPU, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. A movable piece for outputting a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2418 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the first big winning opening 2005 and for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 when it is in a big hit game state. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2415 that opens and closes, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal can be output to the payout control board 633, and launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic). The launch permission signal set to is output to the payout control board 633, and the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012 is displayed. A display signal is output to the base monitor, and a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310 g is output.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect, and jackpot-related, which are created by the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands to be executed (for example, when a game ball entered in the first large winning opening 2005 is detected, the large winning opening 1 corresponding to the large winning opening counting command is based on the detection signal from the first large winning opening sensor 2402. Count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, status display Various commands to be classified, various commands to be classified for testing, and various commands to be classified to others (for example, a prize ball based on a game ball in which the main control board 1310 has entered various winning openings provided in the game board 5). Every time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as the main prize ball number information. Main prize ball number information output command, etc.) and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012 is 10 balls. The ball collection command that tells that fact every time it reaches, the setting change command that tells that the setting value has been changed, and the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). ) An error display command that conveys the fact, an ON operation command of the setting key that informs that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area described later in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed, etc.) are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and a sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. The main peripheral serial transmission port built into the main control MPU at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main peripheral serial data. Can be done. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure after the power is turned on, transmission is performed when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275. In the reservation setting of the command to be executed, in order to notify that the power has been restored, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output judgment counter Since a notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command are stored as main circumference serial data in that order. Sends to the peripheral control board 1510, then sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, various information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, and the various information is supported. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed among various information, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output judgment counter notification command will be sent.

When a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10, the periphery The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the control board 1510 counts the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 for each received ball collection command, and is not shown. Updated with the ball collection information stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (that is, the counted value (that is, the total number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012)). Information associated with the date and time) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, as a result, the last counted values (that is, the out port 2010 and the first sub out port 2011) are used. The ball collection information in which the total number of game balls collected at the second sub-out port 2012) and the updated date and time is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall is opened, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 sells the ball collection information stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held as the ball collection history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). As the counted value stored and stored as the ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day may be used, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is used as the backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup processing is executed as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command at power-on that indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output process in step S118 in this routine, is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. It can be output. That is, the main control board 1310 has the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 274 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 275. Power-on status command, which is classified as power-on, to notify that the power has been turned on (restored) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the work area setting of. The main control return destination command at power-on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 in this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value that configures the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on. The data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 274 shows. In step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 275, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made, the power-on state command classified as power-on , When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on and the counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands, a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball number information output when the power is turned on, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the main control board inspection device is used as the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value that configure the power-on state command as main peripheral serial data. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then the main prize ball number information is output when the power is turned on. The judgment counter notification command is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for identifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 277 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this set value, it may be read out or taken out, but when the set value is taken out, the taken out set value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates the checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates the total of various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 274. This is the same process as the calculation of.

Following step S202, the calculated checksum value (sum value) of the main control MPU is stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) in the main control side power on processing shown in FIG. 275. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 274. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG has a built-in main control in the main control side power cutoff process, which describes various information, checksum value (sum value), game backup information such as backup flag BK-FLG value, etc., which will be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the memory is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Will be done.

In the determination in step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU has a backup flag BK-FLG that is not a value 1. When (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). .. Here, the "normal range" is a value at which the set value can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the setting It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination in step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power off processing is not normally completed when the power is cut off. Therefore, there is something wrong with the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM (or it cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU has the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the values, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when it is determined that the main control MPU is not in the normal range, the set value 1 which is an initial value is set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is in the normal range. Although it is determined whether or not it is a value, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. When, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. Occasionally, the process of step S210 may be proceeded, and the set value 1 which is the initial value may be set with respect to the set value acquired in step S200.

In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines when the backup flag BK-FLG is a value 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power off processing has been normally completed, or in the determination in step S208, the main control When the MPU determines that the range is normal, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). ..

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the setting switching button is being operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is input, while the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not input. Judge that it is not.

In the determination in step S216, when it is determined that the setting switching button is being operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. The value 1 is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 to the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step S222). ). In this determination, the main control MPU is set counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). The setting key switch is operated by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the rotation position) and turning it OFF, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise) by performing the second ON operation. 1311a is turned on and the decision key is turned on based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the decision key has been operated. When the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the decision key is not operated.

In the determination in step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 again and determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is being operated, the processes of steps S218 and S220 are performed again, the determination of step S222 is performed, and the enter key is not operated. When it is determined, the determination is returned to step S216 again, and when the setting switching button is operated until the enter key is operated, the set value is added and updated by one value each time the operation is performed, and the setting display 1310 g If the setting switching button is not operated, the setting switching button is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time the decision key is determined in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the internal RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S222, when it is determined that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area is set. Since it is updated with respect to the set value set in, the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing in step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated setting value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of.

Following step S224, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU has an initial position (that is, a setting key) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by turning the switch 1311a 60 degrees clockwise to return it to the setting key cylinder rotation position). It is performed based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, but the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination in step S226, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned off, it returns to the determination in step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned off.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S226, when it is determined that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting indicator 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value 0 (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is the first ON). It is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of operation), and when the setting change of the set value is permitted. The value is set to 1 and the value is set to 0 when the setting change of the set value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 in the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, the setting change of the setting value is not permitted after that.

Following step S232, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that of the determination in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the setting It is preset to a value up to a value of 6. In the determination in step S233, the main control MPU reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, so that the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal. It is determined whether or not the value is one of the set value 1 to the set value 6 which is the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when it is determined that the main control MPU is in the normal range, the serial communication initial setting is performed (step S234), and then a setting change command is created to set transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 as the main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S238), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is FIG. 276. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in 1. Here, in the initial setting of serial communication in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is mainly performed prior to the initial setting of serial communication in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on is set in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the set value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the setting value storage completion. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the set value history information (information corresponding to the set value and the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). To do.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S233, when it is determined that the main control MPU is not in the normal range, an error display process is performed (step S240), and the infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, it is considered that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error display is performed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

[Set value confirmation display processing]
Next, the set value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 276.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 278 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and the value 1 is set when the set value is confirmed and displayed. When the value is not confirmed and displayed, the value is set to 0.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU opens the main body frame 4 and turns on the setting key. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the signal and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder moves clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the first ON operation after being rotated 60 degrees, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Is determined to be open, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be ON by the signal of the setting key ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b determines that the main body frame 4 is not open to the outer frame 2, and / or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that there is no such condition, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination in step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU terminates this routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the set value is to be confirmed and displayed, the value 1 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as that of the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. 178. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting The values up to the value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are preset. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU reconfirms whether the set value is an abnormal value, the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). It is determined whether or not the set value (set value stored in) is one of the set values 1 to 6 which is in the normal range, and when it is determined that it is in the normal range, the set value is used as it is. To do.

In the determination of step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU is in the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310 g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360). ), End this routine. The ON operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 276. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information (setting value is confirmed) of the setting key stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). Information that associates the fact with the date and time) is updated.

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ball collection history information, the set value history information, the error display history information, and the ON operation history information of the setting key described above are received. The predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of the specific history information such as the above can be permitted is satisfied. In the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510, a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied performs a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. By performing the above, the control is performed to switch from the previously displayed image to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information and display the specific history information in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, the main control MPU has an OFF operation of the setting key when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the set value is confirmed and displayed. Whether or not it is determined (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the enter key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by the OFF operation, and the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is used. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination in step S362, the main control MPU terminates this routine as it is when it determines that the setting key has not been turned off, but does not confirm and display the set value when it determines that the setting key has been turned off. The value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. The acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then an OFF operation command for the setting key is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , The OFF operation command of the setting key is set (step S368), and this routine is terminated. The OFF operation command of this setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 276. The OFF operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process of this routine has been completed (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been confirmed). It is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the OFF operation command of the setting key, the above-mentioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 controls to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch back to the original image by switching to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when it is determined that the main control MPU is not in the normal range, the interrupt disallow setting is set (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 276, which was repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs an error display process (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop that continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started, so by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT will continue to be cleared. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, the main control by the main control built-in WDT. The MPU does not have to be forcibly reset. Further, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, the game cannot proceed at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. The detailed explanation of this error display processing will be described later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is cut off. If it is determined, it is considered that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error display is performed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310 g.

[Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274, and is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274 (FIG. 277). It is a process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 278, and is a process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 278.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 279 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal conveys that the launch of the game ball B is permitted to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch is performed. If the logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is stopped (not permitted). ..

The error display process of this routine is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274. When started as (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 277), the main control MPU interrupts step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 275. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 276 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. Since the launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, a reset function is provided at the time of power recovery. The main control output circuit has been reset, and its logic is the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the reverse of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 277), the main control MPU recovers power in step S400 and then displays an error in this routine. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the processing is started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), and the predetermined output port thereof. It is output from the output terminal of the above to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 278, the main control MPU is set in step S357 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 278. In the judgment, it is judged that the content of the main control built-in RAM is abnormal. Although the main control MPU has already set the interrupt permission in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275, it has already been shown in FIG. 278 before the error display processing, which is this routine, is started. Since the interrupt non-permission setting is performed in step S370 of the set value confirmation display process, when the error display process of this routine is completed, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Therefore, the main control side shown in FIG. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 278, the main control MPU has an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S400. In order to prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabet E as an error display on the setting display 1310g is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error to the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), then creates an error display command to set transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and this routine is terminated.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 277 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 277 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 276. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274, and is performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274 (FIG. 277). The process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 278) and the process performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 278 are started and ended, respectively, and the infinite loop is entered as described above. , This infinite loop keeps the state where the error display process is completed, and the game cannot proceed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication is initially installed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is used as the main peripheral serial data as the peripheral control board. It is being transmitted to 1510.

The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information corresponding to the error display command and the date and time of reception) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. ) Is updated.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the display area of the effect display device 1600 says "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In the blue background image. In addition to controlling the display of the message image of white characters, the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." Is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. It is forcibly set so as to be the maximum volume regardless of the volume, and control is performed to flow from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of notifying a RAM error by an error display command has the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command for transmitting another error and then receives an error display command, the RAM Gives the highest priority to error notification.

[Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 283. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit of FIG. 280, and FIG. 282 shows the payout control unit following FIG. 281. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 283 is the flowchart which shows an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[Processing when the power of the payout control unit is turned on]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. 280 to 282, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed. .. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. .. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is being operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and it is determined that it does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI. While it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it is determined that when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RAM is cleared. Determine that the switch is operating.

In the determination in step S512, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the payout control MPU sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, a prize ball information storage area). The logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area is set. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU is set to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM for payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack in order.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not erased (step S524). In this checksum, the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value and the total is calculated.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (power down) described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power off processing is normally completed, and is set to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power cutoff process has been normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is used as the time of power recovery. The work area of (step S530) is set. In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and the power is restored. The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, that the payout information is to be erased, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power off processing has not been normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watch dock timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 when it is determined that there is no input of the power failure warning signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU inputs a power failure warning signal. Determine if it has been done.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays 10 game balls). A prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 each time it is output.

Specifically, a counter for determining the number of prize balls information for determining whether or not to output the number of prize balls information is provided, and the payout motor 584 actually determines the counter for determining the number of prize balls. The number of game balls paid out to is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. Is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, the prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and stored and updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeding the number is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter), and the display signal is output to the error LED display.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, The BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and input as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball squeeze determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball squeeze state is generated by the payout blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 Judgment when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to inconsistency with the number of balls detected in Inconsistency counter set as a condition Time management of reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the ball gadget judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the ball gummy judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball shaving judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input is determined. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the signal is set.

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 580 and the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication processing, the payout control MPU momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit. Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery The value is restored to the value stored as the payout backup information, such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC, immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the stoppage or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power stop or stop even if the power is restored. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) and the CR unit do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball Gami movement determination setting process, As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, the PRDY signal output is the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that tells that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is not possible when not communicating with the CR unit. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is read out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. Outputs to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, and the payout device 580 can be output to the CR unit. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. When 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to convey that the payout operation for paying out the loaned ball is possible. The signal logic state is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logical state of the PRDY signal as LOW in order to convey that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the specified output port of. The logical state of the EXE signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored with the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. The number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above by the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is used in the current full tank and ball out check process. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and ball out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is full in the stored game ball is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the lower plate 202 is not full in the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area.

The timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is also used to determine whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned on, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is turned off in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts the time counting of the ball-out determination time described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball is broken. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number. The ball-out information that conveys that fact is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball removal and ball shavings are set, retry motions are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. ..

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area described above. To do. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information, it corresponds. Display data (in the present embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are created based on the various information. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 is obtained when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. A command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, and the watch dock timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and this power failure warning If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 The value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S546, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, the port output process is performed in step S548, the port input process is performed in step S550, and step S552. Performs timer update processing in step S554, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, and step S562. The main operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. Do. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for processing the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt prohibition setting when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU sets the watch dock timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, so that the watch dock timer is not set to clear. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 280 to 282.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 283 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets a value of 1 in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) registers (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 288. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 286 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 288 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[Processing when the peripheral control unit is turned on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 284. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. 284 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC takes an extremely short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, a command related to control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG receives a V-blank signal from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to convey that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is executed. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to see if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. Whether or not it is repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevating detection sensor 382 (hereinafter, referred to as "various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300"). Various information acquired from the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation. Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction and pressing of the rotation operation unit 302 are monitored. Whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is reflected in the game effect is appropriately determined. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness is reflected in real time, and the production proceeds with the adjusted volume and the brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. Are set respectively. While the production is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. When one brightness specified value ranging from the brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. The tone information can be updated.

Here, the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness designation value, one brightness designation value can be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value which is the minimum brightness (light off) to the 31st brightness designation value which is the maximum brightness. It is a value that can be set, and the normal palette value and the special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. The player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the 31st brightness, which is the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. It is possible to set one specified brightness value up to the specified value.

For example, a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) specifies a 0th (zero) brightness in which the current brightness is tentatively the minimum brightness (turns off) when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When it is set to the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the value, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) is set from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum brightness. Along the tone curve or spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to increase, while the rotation operation unit 302 is countered. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of rotating clockwise, a predetermined formula (for example, linear) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed so as to be lowered along the tone curve (or a spline curve-like tone curve). When a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In the present embodiment, a case where the player (or a clerk of a game hall or the like) can set the brightness while the production is in progress is prepared in advance, and at this time, the player (or a clerk of the game hall) can set the brightness. Etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness By displaying a bar-shaped indicator showing the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image how much the desired brightness of the player (or a clerk of a game hall, etc.) is. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

The normal palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information by the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of 17 steps is selected in 5% increments from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve) in which one brightness designation and the corresponding palette value are predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the specified value of the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value. , Or a spline curve tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation in the range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the above-mentioned brightness designation value. It is a value of 20% with respect to (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value ~ which is the above-mentioned brightness specified value. It is a value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In the present embodiment, as the normal pallet value, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance with respect to various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated as direct light. Of the various decorative substrates provided on the game board side that are set as the gradation information described above and are irradiated as direct light, a palette is provided for a specific decorative substrate (LED that the player feels dazzling), which is not shown. A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one step, and is one of the 32 steps in the range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the brightness designation value described above. The luminance designation and the corresponding palette value are set as the above-mentioned gradation information according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light by the light guide plate becomes darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set by using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set with respect to the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light with the first luminance specified value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specified value, which is the minimum luminance (off). As the lowest possible brightness, the normal palette value is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the maximum palette value (100%) is set, and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Of these, one luminance designated value and a corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curved tone curve).

As described above, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. When the brightness of the LED is set, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is controlled by the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While it is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) adjusts the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the specified brightness value by the operation of 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, the direct light is used. The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (light off)), and is linked to this. Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value which is the minimum brightness (extinguishing)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness at which the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light by indirect light can be visually recognized is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After seeing, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker brightness can exert the effect more), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) with respect to the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the operable production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value. Even if one brightness designation value is set up to the brightness designation value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one brightness designation value is set for a specific decorative substrate. Since one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for each of the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the light emission modes (bright or dark) set to each other is set. The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without breaking the relationship.

Further, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of the indirect light by the light guide plate as compared with the direct light, the LED used as the indirect light has a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent of the normal palette value). The brightness can be set by. As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the LED used as indirect light. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, one screen generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC by reading the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC by the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame by the sound data output processing described later From various speakers such as speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as "various speakers"), it is possible to give priority to the production by the production sound such as music and sound effect according to the various production.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. .. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of screen data from the first screen data is instructed to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Update the pointer to.

Further, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate which light emission data is to be output from the first light emission data among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC from the first sound command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process is forcibly updated.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the effect. Update random numbers (for example, random numbers used for hold look-ahead related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this reception command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyze the various commands issued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads out the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM based on the various analyzed commands. (Extract) Set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-mentioned brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And, respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the schedule data for generating the light emission mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs the lamp palette setting process. By executing this, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value described above. When one brightness specified value up to the 31st brightness specified value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to be the set brightness specified value. You can do it.

Further, in the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening winning command for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, or a normal symbol. A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. We analyzed whether it is a command, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of pending starts, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted in the first major winning opening 2005. Recognize which game state you are in.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the reception command analysis processing. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, and general. Various commands classified as related to synchronization production, various commands classified as related to normal electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as related to test, and so on. There are various other commands that are classified. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, the effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

In the peripheral control ROM, various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the like are stored in advance. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, schedule data for electric drive sources that generate drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission mode data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects, and a track number are specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid arranged in chronological order, and the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid is defined.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is stored in the peripheral control ROM. It is read from (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC is a screen that reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. Minutes (1 frame) of drawing data are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in the time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data instructed by the pointer is displayed. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , Set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit performs steady processing). Is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in this sound data creation process. Sound data is output from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is variable by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value of 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. Music and sound effects are played from the door. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It has become like.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included.

Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment switch is rotated. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) 0.5 seconds have passed since the variation pattern command was received and 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and 0.5 seconds have passed since the stop display command was received by the peripheral control unit. Except for (up to)), the adjustment can be performed by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). A certain period of time (in this example, the periphery) when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display). 0.5 seconds after the variable pattern command is received by the control unit until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. By operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 except for (until seconds elapse), the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate. It is converted into 7 levels of volume 0 to 6, and further, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound is calculated. Actually, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value which is the volume to flow, and the amplified production sound is serialized. It is designed to be output as audio data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side. , The volume flowing from the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. The volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value to adjust is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotation operation, and the volume of this combined production sound is actually the top center on the door frame 3 side. Amplifies to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data to be used as a notification sound. On the other hand, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the above, is combined, and the volume of the combined notification sound is actually combined with the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body for bass of the main body frame 4. It is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the frame speaker 622, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 occurs or the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control to play the notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent act against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is set to mute. The sound data of the built-in track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track with the built-in notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are combined. , The volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the volume flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4. The master volume value is amplified, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, only the maximum volume notification sound flows. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4, but the production sound is described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation.

In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute is subordinated to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. It is set again as a volume value (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub of the adjusted effect sound. The volume value is set), and the sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for the bass of the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 occurs or pachinko When a notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of an illegal act against the machine 1, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. Although it flows from the main body frame speaker 622 for low-pitched sound of 4, the muted production sound is proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has passed a predetermined period and the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side. When the 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 stop flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but the notification sound starts to flow for a predetermined period. It starts to flow again from the point where it progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation until the time has passed.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC peripherally controls the volume from mute to the maximum volume by a program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates a volume control switch to set the volume low, the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 is used. When a problem occurs or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the staff such as the clerk of the game hall from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for routine processing and back up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. A value 0 is set in the flag VB-FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1008 to step S1006. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1008, and a value 1 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process is performed. Then, each process of step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value 0 as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the process is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be received from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when the data is input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 285 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 284 is being executed. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this is performed as it is. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -The value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit stationary processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 284, and the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is executed. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 284. By setting the value 1 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in, the peripheral control unit stationary processing is being executed, which is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control in FIG. 284. Peripheral control unit, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the V blank signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit stationary processing Is designed to determine whether or not the execution has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 284. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 284. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing failure this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 284 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 286 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU of the peripheral control IC adds a value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 284. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series while driving an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid according to the drive data to be performed, and the pointer is updated each time the motor or solenoid drive process is executed. To do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various production units provided in the game board 5). ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 are input. (Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC is the original position (standby position) of various movable bodies provided in the various production units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The movable position is grasped by setting or acquiring the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the effect operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input. (Rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation presence / absence of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the production sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 by operating the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided and back up. In the present embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different areas and are set in different areas and are SDRAM. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM and the steady processing backup area provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 284, various processes related to the production of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, the progress state of the production can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC takes this as an opportunity to send 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC. ) Is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte and the total. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 287 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs 1 byte (8 bits) of information when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, among the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the data can be received, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status that is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main cycle serial data When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a mode in which the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, the status is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the CPU is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has not been sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, in the second byte of the main peripheral serial data following the status of the first byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer in a certain mode, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step). S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), End this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC has a sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. When it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated as it is.

[Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310, will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. 288, and whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC ends this routine as it is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. In the determination of step S1304, when 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has not been input. When it is determined, this routine is terminated as it is, and when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started, the power saving process is performed. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing the power, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the command being transmitted can be received by the peripheral control IC for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied to the backup area for steady processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Is determined. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the clear signal cannot be output to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure warning signal has been input in the determination of step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 to perform the WDT clear processing of the peripheral control IC. The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 284 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314 to reset the CPU of the peripheral control IC immediately before the power failure state. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3052, as shown in FIG. 289. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is the first of the RAM. (I) Execute the first start port passing process such as storing in the special symbol hold storage area (step S232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "15R jackpot", 15R A process of opening / closing the first big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the big hit game state. In addition, when the mode suggests "5R jackpot", the process of opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the 5R jackpot gaming state, and the mode suggests "2R jackpot". In addition, a process of opening and closing the first prize opening 2005 is executed according to the 2R jackpot game state.

Further, in the big hit control process (step S235A), after the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time is shortened, and the 2R big hit game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time saving state is a mode suggesting "2R big hit". It is set when ending the 5R jackpot game state based on the mode suggesting "5R jackpot" when ending the state, and when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state. .. Then, when the time saving flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 300 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown is shown. It is reset by the process.

Further, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuation displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and is controlled to the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case, when the jackpot game state is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Then, the time reduction counter is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but the next big hit is made before the counter value becomes "0". Occasionally, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 300, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

If the jackpot execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0". (Step S237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S238), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process process is executed (step S239). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S231 that the first start port sensor 3052 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. 290. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is "4", which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to the following steps S243 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S241. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the first hold storage. A command (first hold number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 to 0)) instructing the first hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the number 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4). It has become like.

FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241 above, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the mode type of the game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (the first reserved memory number). (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to the above are set (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that it is stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the advance determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is executed as the game effect to be executed, and the variation display according to the start winning is started. You will be able to grasp the IC.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first hold storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control IC stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. The judgment information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display occurs can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, when the hold display is newly output or when the hold display is shifted according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, assuming that the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004 in the process of step S233, as shown in FIG. 292. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on the counter value. ) Is "1" or not (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S253 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the second hold storage. A command (second hold number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 0)) for instructing the second hold storage number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) while updating to correspond to the number. 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0 to 1). It has become like.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002 is set to "4", while the game ball is set to the second starting port 2004. The upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on the entry of the ball is set to "1". The second start port 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", the period in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not performed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that the second starting port 2004 Even if a game ball enters the ball, it is suppressed that the player is not in a disadvantageous state such as not being able to obtain a chance of a big hit lottery.

FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules and are random numbers used for determination. Only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S280)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which the lottery process for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed.

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 274).

FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 294, first steps S301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S302. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in each storage area. The random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) (step S306), this process ends.

FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table shown in FIG. 185 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 when the first special symbol normal process is being executed, the first (Ii) When the special symbol normal processing is being executed, the comparison is made with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S311).

In the hit determination table shown in FIG. 296 (A), when the gaming state has a low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state)) and time saving state (time saving state) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). It has a big hit judgment table at the time of low probability used in the case of low probability time saving state)) and a big hit judgment table at the time of high probability used when the gaming state is high probability time (high probability time saving state). .. Then, in the hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it is 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, and 3 when the set value is 2. In the case of 1/299, when the set value is 4, 1/289, when the set value is 5, 1/279, and when the set value is 6, the first special random number is won with a jackpot probability of 1/269. It matches the big hit judgment value indicating that it has been done, matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are lost in the above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is. Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit judgment table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the set value is 1, 1/319 and the set value are 2. 1/309 in some cases, 1/299 in case of set value 3, 1/289 in case of set value 4, 1/279 in case of set value 5, and 1/269 in case of set value 6. It matches with the big hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the big hit with the big hit probability of 144/319, and is one with the small hit judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won the small hit with the small hit probability of 144/319. However, the second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are lost. That is, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number has a higher probability of being determined as a small hit than the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number. When the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed rather than when the variation display of the second special symbol based on the starting prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed. Is becoming more advantageous to the player. Further, the hit determination table at the time of high probability is configured so that the jackpot probability for each set value is increased 10 times as compared with the hit determination table at the time of low probability.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special read in the second special symbol normal processing. As a result of comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a big hit (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the big hit is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is completed.

Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and the reach determination table in the time reduction state, and the non-time reduction table used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach is matched with the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reachable, and is consistent with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers are not reachable. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), the fluctuation is caused. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 297, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S321) and whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296 (B). The type of jackpot is determined according to the above, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. 1. Closed after opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter the first prize opening 2005 (easy), and a special symbol (first special symbol) is set after the jackpot game state ends. Until the variable display of the symbol, the second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability variation jackpot to control 2. After opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter the first prize opening 2005 (easy), and the special symbol (first special symbol) is controlled after the jackpot game state ends. , 2nd special symbol) 5R time saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the fluctuation display than usual until the fluctuation display is executed 77 times.
3. 3. After opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 that 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit game state in which the ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy), and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R big hit game state. If there is, it is controlled to the time saving state where the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is terminated if it is not a jackpot before the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the jackpot game state, 2R 2R jackpot that controls to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if it is controlled to the non-time saving state before the start of the jackpot game state,
One of the three types of jackpots is decided.

In addition, the mode when the fluctuation control of the second special symbol is stopped (the stop symbol of the second special symbol) is
In particular,
1. 1. Closed after opening the 2nd prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when it is detected by the above 2nd prize opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have won in the 2nd prize opening 2006. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 15R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2006 (easy), and a special symbol (first special) is used after the jackpot game state ends. Until the variable display of the symbol, the second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual, and the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. 15R probability variation jackpot to control 2. After opening the second prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when it is detected by the above second prize opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2006 (easy), and the special symbol (first special symbol) is controlled after the jackpot game state ends. , 2nd special symbol) until the variation display is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variation display is shortened than usual.
3. 3. After opening the second prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when it is detected by the above second prize opening sensor 2601 that 10 game balls have won in the second prize opening 2006, it is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern twice (2 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy), and is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If so, after the end of the big hit game state, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is controlled to the end time saving state if the big hit is not executed 77 times, and 2R. 2R jackpot that controls to the normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if it is controlled to the non-time saving state before the start of the jackpot game state,
One of the three types of jackpots is decided.

In the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot, and 100 judgment values are sorted in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and a 2R jackpot is assigned. In the case of, 92 determination values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% probability of a 15R big hit, a 50% probability of a 5R big hit, and a 46% probability of a 2R big hit. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 92 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variation jackpot, and 100 judgment values are sorted in the case of a 5R time saving jackpot, and 2R. Eight judgment values are distributed when a big hit occurs. That is, if a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 46% probability of a 15R probability variation big hit, a 50% probability of a 5R big hit, and a 4% probability of a 2R big hit. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a higher probability of being determined as a 15R probability variation jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002. It is in a state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when it is decided to be a 2R jackpot, it is decided to be a 2R jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, when it is decided to be a 5R jackpot, it is decided to be a 5R jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, and when it is decided to be a 15R jackpot, it is decided to be a jackpot symbol. The 15R jackpot symbol is decided as the symbol.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing if the small hit flag is set when the big hit flag is not set in step S131 (step S324). The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296 (C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of large hit is stopped. Aspect (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. 1. The opening / closing pattern of opening the second prize opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing the second prize opening 2006 is executed twice to control the game ball to a small hit game state in which the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 2006 (easy). First small hit 2. The opening / closing pattern of opening the second big winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is executed nine times to control the game ball into a small hit game state in which the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy). One of the two types of small hits, the second small hit, is determined.

In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are distributed when the first small hit is obtained. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 100% probability that the first small hit will be obtained and the second small hit will not be won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 180 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. ing. That is, when a lottery result for a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, the first small hit has a probability of 10% and the second small hit has a probability of 90%.

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of small hit is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the first small hit is determined, the first small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the second small hit is determined, the second small hit symbol is determined as the small hit symbol. ..

If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be an out-of-order symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs any of the above lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach loss, and loss) as the process of step S328. (The mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol may be instructed)) is set to the determination result notification command according to each of the lottery results so as to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328). ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

Peripheral control unit 1511 displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed, and left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle. The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit or a 2R big hit from the received determination result notification command as an mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is decided as a small hit symbol ("final decisive battle"), and when a 5R time saving big hit is specified, the 5R time saving big hit symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same among the symbols "0" to "9". If the combination is determined to be an even numbered symbol and the 15R probability variation jackpot is specified, the 15R probability variation jackpot symbol (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd symbol among the symbols "0" to "9". Combination) is decided. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the loss symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different intermediate decorative symbols; reach loss If it is decided to be a symbol) and an outlier is specified, it is decided to be an outlier symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols) and fluctuate. When the variation time specified from the pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time saving state until the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed up to 77 times after the big hit game state. The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of big hits after the transition control is performed. Specifically, if a predetermined number of big hits (for example, two times) occur after the big hit game state is controlled, the time saving state is not controlled after the predetermined number of big hit game states are completed. , It may be controlled to the normal state. Further, even when the number of times of big hits is less than a predetermined number of times, the non-time saving state may be controlled during the big hit gaming state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the big hit gaming state.

FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 298. If this is done (step S341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag Is set (step S343), and a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit according to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S346), and neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal. In the case of loss (loss without executing the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Then, the main control MPU includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

Further, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, it is determined as the process of step S351 whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the continuation number of the time reduction state is set is "0". To do. Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S353). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state (time saving control) is terminated is set (step S354).

If it is determined in the process of step S351 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S353 that the time reduction counter is not "0", that time point In step S355, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process ends.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of disconnection, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second in the time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), while The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a way that the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state is associated with the above special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). .. That is, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected in the time-saving state has an extremely short time required for the variation display control of the special symbol as compared with the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected in the non-time reduction state. The fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 299, first steps S371. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S282) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 300, first steps S381. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is used. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time saving control (control of the time saving state) is terminated and the non-time saving control is performed. (Control of normal state) will be started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S387), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot count counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S401) and the big winning opening opening process (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hit count counter becomes "0", and the big winning opening is opened. When the round is completed in the opening processing (step S402), the jackpot counter is subtracted by 1 to become "0", and the process proceeds to the large winning opening post-processing (step S403) to end the jackpot game. Perform control to make it.

Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R time reduction jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time reduction jackpot, 2R jackpot). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process process, the jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R time reduction jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time reduction jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set.

Further, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is a jackpot in the jackpot control process (step S235A) after opening the jackpot opening (step S403) when the jackpot game is terminated. Opening / closing control of the first prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or the first prize opening 2005 has 10 game balls won. Opening / closing control that repeats the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 two, five, or fifteen times (opening / closing control) and opening / closing control of the second winning opening 2006 (for example, the first winning opening 2005). After opening for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005 is detected by the second prize opening sensor 2601, the opening / closing pattern is closed twice, 5 times. It is reset when the opening / closing control (opening / closing control repeated 15 times) is completed (all rounds that can be performed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

If the big hit flag is not set (step S386) and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S391), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) is set according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit). As a result, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process process, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, first small hit start command, second small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) Two small hit start command) is set.

Further, when the small hit game is finished, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is the small hit middle process (step S411) of the small hit control process (step S236A) described later. ) To open / close control of the second big winning opening 2006 according to the type of small hit (for example, opening / closing control that repeats the opening / closing pattern of opening the second big winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it two or nine times). Is reset when you exit. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the function display unit 1400 The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 become feasible.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the waiting time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) until the next variation display of the special symbol is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process proceeds to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (Step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. 1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) shifts to the jackpot game state based on the mode when the variable display is stopped is the jackpot symbol. Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S401), which waits until it is performed by 1510 or until the next round is started.
2. Based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is a jackpot symbol, the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is controlled to be open, or the next round is started. After controlling the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 to be open and opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or after the first prize opening 2005 has 10 game balls. When it is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 that one prize has been won, or after the second prize opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or after the second prize opening 2006 has 10 game balls. Processing during opening of the large winning opening to close when the winning is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2601 (step S402)
3. 3. Post-processing after opening the large winning opening, which waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot game state ends when all rounds are completed (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. Further, in the above-mentioned processing during opening of the big winning opening (step S402), at the start of a round for controlling the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of a round that controls the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in a closed state, a big hit round end command is set according to the number of rounds. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

[Inner lens]
In the conventional pachinko machine 1, the mounting surface of the substrate on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is provided so as to face the player, and the light emitting decoration is performed. In addition, the mounting surface of the substrate on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent decorative body, and the LEDs and the like mounted on the substrate are made to emit light in various colors to develop the decorative body, or the decorative body. The light emission of the LED or the like is visually recognized via the above.

Further, the substrate of the conventional pachinko machine 1 is coated with a green resist, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged, etc. , Is printed in white or black silk in close proximity to electronic components such as LEDs. The information formed on these substrates is difficult for the player to see when the LED emits light, while it is visible to the player when the LED is turned off.

In recent years, the pachinko machine 1 has a unified design as a whole, and the images of the production display device 1600 are fused to express the world view of characters, animations, and the like. The design of the machine is a very important factor. However, in the conventional pachinko machine 1, when the LED is turned off, information unrelated to the game such as the number of connector pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged is written on the board. By being visually recognized, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 may be disrupted, the design may be deteriorated, and the game interest may be deteriorated.

In order to solve such problems, LEDs are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the board, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, etc. The information is printed with white or black silk to make it difficult for the player to see the information, or the surface of the board on which the LED is mounted (LED mounting surface) has a predetermined color (white in this example, but green or green). After applying a paint (resist, silk, etc.) of other colors such as black and purple, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged according to the unevenness and the state of light reflection. Measures have been taken such as making it difficult for the player to see the information by applying the same color paint twice except for the information part so that the information such as the outline can be recognized.

However, when silk-printing information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged on the back surface different from the LED mounting surface, when performing maintenance and inspection. LEDs and the like must be identified by alternately comparing the front and back surfaces of the substrate, which has the disadvantage of reducing workability and the fact that LEDs and information related to the LEDs are not provided on the same surface. It becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the LED and the information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, and the LED different from the LED corresponding to the silk-printed information. There is a drawback that mistakes such as erroneous identification occur. In addition, when information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outer line on which the electronic component is arranged can be visually recognized depending on the unevenness or the light reflection state, the portion showing the information. Since the (area) and other parts (areas) have the same color, it is difficult to distinguish them, and there is a drawback that workability during maintenance and inspection is reduced.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outer shape on which the electronic parts are arranged are suppressed while suppressing the deterioration of workability during maintenance and inspection. It is possible to prevent the player from seeing information unrelated to the game such as lines. The details will be described below. As information unrelated to the game written on the board, any one of the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged, etc. is the surface of the board (LED). The following inventions can be applied as long as they are described in (Mounting surface).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the inner lens is arranged between the decorative body covering the front of the LED and the substrate on which the LED is mounted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the front surface (surface) of the handle decorative substrate 184 provided on the handle unit 180 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent handle cover 185, and the handle cover 185 is covered. A transparent inner lens 185a is arranged between the dish and the handle decorative substrate 184, and as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 is provided in the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted therein. The front surface (surface) of the dish is covered with the dish upper left decorative body 271, and a transparent dish upper left inner lens 272 is arranged between the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 to prepare for the dish upper right decorative unit 275. The front surface (surface) of the dish upper right decorative board 278 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a transparent dish is placed between the dish upper right decorative body 276 and the dish upper right decorative board 278. The front surface (surface) of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate on which the upper right inner lens 277 is arranged and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is covered by the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate. A transparent lower left inner lens 282 of the dish is arranged between the body 281 and the lower left decorative board 283 of the dish, and the front surface of the lower right decorative board 288 of the dish provided on the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The surface) is covered with the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate, and a transparent lower right inner lens 287 of the plate is arranged between the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate and the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the upper surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, which is provided in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, is the center of the plate. Covered by the upper decorative body 312a, a transparent upper inner lens 313 on the center of the plate is provided between the upper decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, and the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 is provided. The upper surface (surface) of the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 provided and equipped with a plurality of LEDs is covered with the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b and the dish center lower decorative board 316 An inner lens 315 under the center of the dish is provided between them, and the upper surface (surface) of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is an outer peripheral button. It is covered with a cover 380, and a transparent outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 is provided between the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the front surface (surface) of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 provided on the door frame left side unit 400 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is a transparent door frame left side decorative body 404. A transparent left side inner lens 403 is arranged between the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, and is provided in the door frame right side unit 410 as shown in FIG. 70. The front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 413 in the side window on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with the transparent door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame right side decorative body 419 and the inside of the side window are covered. Door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decoration, in which a transparent right side inner lens 415 is arranged between the decorative part decorative board 413 and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the door frame top unit 450. The front surface (surface) of the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is covered with the transparent door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, and the door frame top left decoration. A transparent top center inner lens 458, a top left inner lens 459, and a top right inner lens 460 are arranged between the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the front surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 provided in the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is formed by the back lower middle decorative body 3310. A transparent inner lens (diffuse lens) 3321 is arranged between the back bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the back bottom middle first decorative substrate 3322, and as shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back front left The front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 provided in the decorative unit 3710 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered by the front cover 3711, and between the front cover 3711 and the back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322. A transparent flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3713 functioning as an inner lens is arranged, and as shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the back front right decorative body unit 3810. The front surface of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is covered by the front cover 3811, and a transparent flat plate-shaped back front right decorative body 3813 functioning as an inner lens is formed between the front cover 3811 and the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Have been placed.

The surface of this inner lens is three-dimensionally formed in an uneven shape so as to make the refractive index non-uniform or to diffuse the light from the LED irregularly, and the inner lens is provided behind the decorative body at a predetermined interval. (Provided away from the decoration). Then, when visually recognizing information unrelated to the game such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outer line on which the electronic parts are arranged, which are written on the mounting surface of the board, through the inner lens. Is to be visually recognized in a state in which these information are distorted by a surface formed in a three-dimensional shape in an uneven shape (a state in which the information is out of focus, a state in which the information is distorted to the extent that it cannot be recognized as characters or information). As a result, the player recognizes information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pin of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, written on the mounting surface of the board as information. Since this can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing the world view and suppress the deterioration of the design, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. It should be noted that the surface of the inner lens is not limited to three-dimensionally formed irregularly, and the refractive index can be made non-uniform by making the thickness of the inner lens non-uniform in place of or in addition to this, or the light from the LED. May be diffused irregularly. In this case as well, it is irrelevant to the game such as the number of connector pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged, which are visually recognized through the inner lens. Information will be visually recognized in a distorted state (out of focus).

The inner lens of this example is made of a colorless and transparent resin so as to transmit the light of the LED. As long as it is formed of a translucent material (resin or the like), it is not limited to a colorless and transparent material, and may be a colored transparent material that is colored to the extent that it can be seen through. Further, the surface of the inner lens of this example is three-dimensionally formed by forming a plurality of small surfaces having different angles like a diamond cut, and although the inner lens is formed of a colorless and transparent resin, the surface is refracted. Due to the non-uniformity of the rate, it looks cloudy in some places.

Further, the decorative bodies of this example (handle cover 185, dish upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish lower left decorative body 281, dish lower right decorative body 286, dish center upper decorative body 312a, dish center lower decorative body 312b , Outer button cover 380, door frame left side decoration 404, door frame right side decoration 419, door frame top decoration 453, back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, front cover 3711, front cover 3811) are formed of transparent members. Has a relatively smooth surface. In addition to the inner lens, the front surface and the back surface of the decorative body may also be three-dimensionally formed in an uneven shape. In this case, the decorative body and the inner lens may be combined to form the number of pins of the connector on the substrate and the orientation of the IC. , Information such as part numbers, pin numbers, and outlines on which electronic parts are arranged can be reliably suppressed from being visually recognized by the player. Further, in this case, the degree of unevenness on the surface of the decorative body arranged on the side closer to the player may be weaker than the degree of unevenness on the surface of the inner lens. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transparency of the decorative body placed closer to the player from being lowered, and the inner lens that looks cloudy due to the reduced transparency is visually recognized through the decorative body. It will be possible to realize a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since white is adopted as the resist of the substrate on which the LED is mounted, it seems that it is provided between the mounting surface of the substrate and the decorative body and becomes cloudy. The inner lens, which has an appearance, is familiar with the white resist and does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, the design of the pachinko machine 1 is not deteriorated.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, white is adopted as the resist on the surface of the substrate on which the LED is mounted, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic component are arranged on the LED mounting surface. Information such as the outline to be printed is printed with yellow silk. Here, in general, yellow and white have the closest reflectance and lightness compared to other colors, and the visual difference (contrast) is small, so the one printed with silk of a color other than white or yellow is used. In comparison, even when the board is directly visually recognized, it is difficult to identify information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged. In addition, white may be adopted as the resist only on the LED mounting surface (front surface), and various information may be printed with yellow silk, and the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) may be a color other than white (for example, green) as the resist. Or black), or various information may be printed with silk of a color other than yellow (for example, white or black).

On the other hand, when performing maintenance and inspection, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged should be written in a color different from the color of the resist on the board. In addition to being able to easily identify and understand the contents of this information, information such as the number of pins on the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is placed is supported. Since it is written close to the LED, it is possible to clarify the correspondence between the LED and the information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an IC, a resistor, a capacitor, a connector, etc. are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface). That is, only the LED is mounted on the surface of the substrate (LED mounting surface). As a result, the LED is mounted so that the emitted light is directed toward the player, so that the surface side of the substrate, which is easily visible to the player, has an IC that is easily visible to the player due to its color, shape, size, etc. By mounting the resistor, capacitor, connector, etc. on the back side of the board, which is difficult for the player to see, the existence of the IC, resistor, capacitor, connector, etc. can be made difficult to be noticed. Further, when a connector or the like formed in the same white color as the resist on the LED mounting surface is used, it may be mounted on the LED mounting surface.

Further, the degree of unevenness on the surface of the inner lens may be made different depending on the distance between the inner lens and the substrate. Specifically, when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is short (for example, less than 1 cm), the degree of three-dimensional formation of the inner lens is increased, and when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is long (for example, 1 cm or more). May weaken the degree of three-dimensional formation of the inner lens. As a result, optimum coverage is performed according to the distance from the board, and the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and electronic components are placed on the mounting surface of the board through the inner lens. It is possible to suppress the visibility of lines and the like, suppress the recognition of information unrelated to the game by the player as information, prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, and reduce the design. It is possible to deter and deter the decline in game entertainment. As a method of changing the degree of three-dimensional formation, the degree of three-dimensional formation is strengthened by deepening the unevenness of the substrate surface, the degree of three-dimensional formation is weakened by making the unevenness of the substrate surface shallow, or the degree of three-dimensional formation is weakened. The degree of unevenness can be strengthened by reducing the molding (surfaces having different angles), and the degree of unevenness can be weakened by increasing the modeling (surfaces having different angles) on the substrate surface.

Further, the inner lens may be any information that makes the information written on the substrate difficult to see, and not only the information written on the substrate that makes it difficult to see, but the information written on the substrate is written on the substrate. Some of the information may be visible to the extent that it can be recognized as information (to the extent that it can be recognized as lines or characters), or some information about all or part of the information written on the board. It is possible to recognize that the information is written, but it is difficult to recognize the written information as information (to the extent that lines and characters can be seen in an unclear state). It may be a thing, or the fact that some information is written about all or part of the information written on the board is also difficult to recognize to the extent that it is difficult to recognize (the line or character is completely invisible). It may be the one that is.

Further, in the above example, a resin molded member whose surface is three-dimensionally formed in an uneven shape is used as the inner lens, but instead of the resin molded member or in addition to the resin molded member, all the information written on the substrate or A translucent sheet may be used, which obscures a part or makes it difficult to recognize that some information is written about all or part of the information written on the substrate. For example, it is provided between an LED substrate 5070 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in the light emitting effect unit 5000 shown in FIG. 255 and a decorative body 5040 that covers the surface of the LED substrate 5070, and has a thin circular shape. A sheet similar to the diffusion sheet 5050, which is processed and molded from the transparent resin plate of the above, may be used, or a sheet for reducing transparency such as a frosted glass-like translucent sheet or a crystal-like translucent sheet. May be used. In this case, the space between the mounting surface of the substrate on which the LED is mounted and the decorative body can be narrowed as compared with the one using the three-dimensionally formed member, so that the degree of freedom in design is increased.

Further, in the above example, the decorative body and the inner lens are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative body itself may be used as the inner lens. This makes it possible to suppress deterioration of the design of the pachinko machine 1 at low cost.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a light emitting member such as an LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is provided except during a non-execution of a game production such as a period in which a customer is waiting and a demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600. Of these, a plurality of light emitting members (in this example, the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the back front left decorative body unit 3710, the back front left decorative substrate 3714) provided at positions that are always visible to the player. LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, back bottom right The ratio of the LED mounted on the lower back right decorative board 3253 of the effect unit 3250, the LED mounted on the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200, etc.) is set to the lighting state. It is set to be higher than the ratio of turning off the lights. As a result, the period of being lit can be made longer than the period of being turned off, and in the lit state, each substrate can be made difficult to see by the light emitted from the LED. Information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, which is described in 1) can be made difficult for the player to see. In addition, by making it difficult for the player to see information unrelated to the game, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing the world view and suppress the deterioration of the design, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. become.

[Occultation of the board mounted on the movable decorative body]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, behind the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back-back left decoration body 3521, and the back-back right decoration body 3621 that appear in front of the effect display device 1600. The player can also visually recognize information such as the number of connector pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic components are arranged, which are written on the board on which a plurality of LEDs are provided and mounted on the front surface. I'm trying to make it difficult. The details will be described below.

As described above, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back-rear left decoration body 3521, and the back-rear right decoration body 3621 are difficult for the player to see in the normal state (when not driven). It is housed in a position (standby position), and moves to a position (driving position) that can be seen by the player in front of the effect display device 1600 during the effect (during driving) so that the player can see it.

Therefore, in the normal state (when not driven), behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and behind the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440. A back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, a back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back rear left decorative body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and The number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the component number, the pin number, which are described on each of the back rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative body 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. It is difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the outline on which the electronic components are arranged.

On the other hand, at the time of executing the effect of displaying the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back-rear left decorative body 3521, and the back-rear right decorative body 3621 in front of the effect display device 1600 (during driving). The back rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are driven to be visible to the player from a standby position which is difficult for the player to see. By moving to the position, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 is provided behind the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and is provided on the front surface. Back-up rear decorative board 3452 on which multiple LEDs are mounted, back-back left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back-back left decorative body 3521 and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and back-back right decoration. The number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and electronic parts are arranged on each of the back and rear right decorative boards 3622, which are provided behind the body 3621 and have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Information such as the outline to be printed may be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 302 (A), the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back-back left decoration body 3521, and the back-back right decoration body 3621 are produced and displayed. When exposed to the front of the device 1600, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear-rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-rear left. The LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the decorative body 3521 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative substrate 3621 are light-emitting controlled to visually recognize each substrate. Make it difficult to be done.

That is, after the display effect is started by the effect display device 1600, the back-rear drive motor 3126 is driven to expose the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, or the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 is driven to rotate the back-up rear. The decorative body 3440 is exposed, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to expose the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to drive the back rear right decorative body 3621. When the back rear drive motor 3126, the back top rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 are driven, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is used. The back-up rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-up rear decorative substrate 3114, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back-back left decorative body 3521, and the back. The LEDs mounted on each of the back rear right decorative boards 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 are controlled to emit light, and the movable decorative bodies (back rear movable decorative body 3110, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left). The timing at which the movable decorative body has been moved from the drive position to the standby position after the movable effect and the light emitting effect by the decorative body 3521 and the back right decorative body 3621) are completed (back rear drive motor 3126, back upper rear rotary drive motor 3454). , Back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 (timing to stop driving), back rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decoration body 3110, back top rear rotation decoration 3440 The back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind, the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back-rear left decorative body 3521, and the back-rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back-rear right decorative body 3621, respectively. Turn off the LED mounted on the motor.

As a result, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back-rear left decoration body 3521, and the back-rear right decoration body 3621 are displayed in a state where the LEDs mounted on them are controlled to emit light. Since it is displayed in front of the device 1600, each board can be made difficult to see by the light emitted from these LEDs, and the number of connector pins, the direction of the IC, and the part number written on each board can be made difficult to see. , Pin numbers, outlines on which electronic components are arranged, etc. are difficult for the player to see, which prevents the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and suppresses deterioration of the design. It will be possible to prevent the decline in game entertainment. That is, in a situation where the player can easily see the board, the LED mounted on each board is controlled to emit light, which makes it difficult for the player to see the board.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged is written in the vicinity of the LED on each substrate. Then, in order to make the LED emit light in the vicinity of such information, the number of pins of the connector on the substrate, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, etc. are determined by the light emitted from the LED. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the area where the information is written. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a light source (LED) is arranged near information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged to emit light. It is possible to make this information difficult to see by making it.

The timing of controlling the light emission of the LED is not limited to the above, and as shown in FIG. 302 (B), at least the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, and the back-back left decoration body. When the 3521 and the back rear right decorative body 3621 have finished moving to the drive position in front of the effect display device 1600, that is, when the drive position is reached and the movement is stopped, the back rear movable decoration body 3110 is provided. The back-up rear decorative substrate 3114, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back-rear left decorative body 3521, and the back-rear right decorative body. The LED mounted on each of the back rear right decorative boards 3622 provided behind the 3621 is controlled to emit light, and when the movable effect is finished and the movement from the drive position to the standby position is started, the back rear movable decorative body The back-up rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the 3110, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, the back-back left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back-back left decorative body 3521, and The LEDs mounted on each of the back rear right decorative boards 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative body 3621 may be turned off.

That is, after the display effect is started by the effect display device 1600, the back-rear drive motor 3126 is driven to expose the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, or the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 is driven to rotate the back-up rear. The decorative body 3440 is exposed, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to expose the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to drive the back rear right decorative body 3621. When the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back-back left decoration body 3521, and the back-back right decoration body 3621 are exposed at the drive position, the back-rear rear The back-rear decoration provided behind the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 at the timing of stopping the driving of the drive motor 3126, the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-rear left-rotation drive motor 3525, and the back-rear right-rotation drive motor 3625. Behind the substrate 3114, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back-back left decorative body 3521, and the back-back right decorative body 3621. Timing to control the light emission of the LEDs mounted on each of the back and right decorative boards 3622 provided, finish the movable effect, and start moving from the drive position to the standby position (back rear drive motor 3126, back top rear rotation drive motor) The back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the back-up rear-rotating decorative body provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 according to 3454, the timing of starting the driving of the back-rear left-rotation drive motor 3525 and the back-rear right-rotation drive motor 3625) A back-up rear decorative board 3452 provided behind the 3440, a back-back left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back-back left decorative body 3521, and a back-back right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back-back right decorative body 3621. The LED mounted on each of them may be turned off.

As a result, when the effect display device 1600 is displayed in the front drive position and is most easily visible to the player (back rear drive motor 3126, back top rear rotation drive motor 3454, back rear left rotation drive motor 3525). And when the drive of the back-back right rotation drive motor 3625 is stopped), the back-up rear decoration substrate 3114 provided behind the back-back movable decoration body 3110, and the back-up rear decoration provided behind the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440. The LEDs mounted on the substrate 3452, the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative body 3621 are made to emit light. , Each substrate can be made difficult to see. When the LED is off, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-rear The back rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the left decorative body 3521 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative body 3621 are displayed at positions visible to the player in a state where they can be easily seen. However, since the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back-back left decoration body 3521, and the back-back right decoration body 3621 are moving, the player stares at each substrate. Since it is difficult to do so, even if each LED is turned off, information such as the number of connector pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged is written on each board. It is difficult for the player to see.

It should be noted that the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back provided behind the back-rear left decorative body 3521. The timing of emitting the LEDs mounted on the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative body 3622 is not limited to the above, and the back rear movable While moving the decorative body 3110, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 from the standby position to the driving position, for example, the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear rotating decoration Each LED may be made to emit light at the timing when the body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are actually visible to the player, or immediately before reaching the drive position. , Back-back movable decoration body 3110, back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, back-back left decoration body 3521, back-back right decoration body 3621, and the effect of making each LED emit light at the timing of starting movement, and back-back movable decoration body. 3110, back-up rear rotation decoration 3440, back-back left decoration 3521, and back-back right decoration 3621 reach the drive position and stop driving each motor. That is, one or two or more of a plurality of timings may be combined and executed.

Further, in this example, the state in which the LED is emitting light indicates a state in which the light emission is controlled by a predetermined light emission pattern, and is not limited to the state in which the LED is continuously lit, but at least the lit state and the extinguished state. It also includes a blinking state that is controlled once or more. In either case, the LED light emission can be made to dazzle the player, so that the board can be made difficult to see, and the number of connector pins, the direction of the IC, the part number, and the pin number written on each board can be made difficult to see. , Information such as the outline on which the electronic components are arranged becomes difficult for the player to see, and it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and to prevent the deterioration of the design. It is possible to prevent the decline in game entertainment due to the decline.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back provided behind the back-rear left decorative body 3521. When the LEDs mounted on the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative body 3621 are to emit light, the brightness is high (the maximum brightness that can be set in this example). The value (100%) may be more than half (85% or more in this example) of the settable brightness range (70 to 100% in this example), and the brightness is higher than that of the backlight of the effect display device 1600. It may be made to emit light. As a result, since the LEDs are made to emit light with high brightness at a position closer to the player than the effect display device 1600, it is possible to make the player feel the light from these LEDs dazzling and make it difficult to visually recognize each substrate. In addition, for players who are paying attention to the effect display performed by the effect display device 1600, a game accustomed to the brightness of the effect display device 1600 is used to irradiate a stronger light than the backlight of the effect display device 1600. It is more likely that a person will feel dazzling, and the effect of making each substrate difficult to see will increase.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-rear The back rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the left decorative body 3521 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative body 3621 each adopt white as a resist on the LED mounting surface (front surface). At the same time, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged is displayed on the LED mounting surface, and the reflectance and brightness are close to those of white, and there is a visual difference ( It is printed with yellow silk with low contrast). As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged even when the substrate is visually recognized, as compared with the case of printing with silk of a color other than white or yellow. It becomes difficult to identify information such as outlines. It should be noted that the present technical idea is that when the effect display device 1600 is exposed in front of the effect display device 1600 and is in the most visible state, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 and the back-up rear rotating decorative body are provided. The back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the 3440, the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back-rear left decorative body 3521, and the back-rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back-rear right decorative body 3621. The LEDs mounted on each of them emit light to make it difficult to see each substrate. In addition to this technology, white is used as the resist on the LED mounting surface (front surface), and yellow silk is used on the LED mounting surface. Although it is possible to enhance the effect by printing various information in the above, these technologies are not indispensable for solving the problems.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the game production performed by the production display device 1600, it is suggested that the fluctuation display during execution and the fluctuation display (holding display) to be performed in the future have a big hit expectation (possibility of becoming a big hit). It is designed to perform an expectation suggestion effect. In this expectation degree suggestion effect, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested by the type, color, pattern, etc. of the image such as a character displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying the same character, the expectation of a big hit suggested in the order of white <blue <yellow <green <red <gold is increased as the color of the character.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-rear left decorative body 3521. The number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, on the LED mounting surface of the back rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back rear left decorative board 3622 and the back rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative board 3622. As the color of the silk that prints information such as the outline on which the electronic components are arranged, yellow, which is used to suggest the above-mentioned jackpot expectation, is adopted. Therefore, it is irrelevant to the game printed on these boards when the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back-back left decoration body 3521, and the back-back right decoration body 3621 are visibly exposed. Although it prevents the player from clearly identifying the fact that the information is written, even if it is recognized that there is something yellow, the game is reminiscent of the suggestion of the jackpot expectation. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that irrelevant information is recorded.

In addition, among the colors used to suggest the jackpot expectation, yellow, which suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, is arranged on the LED mounting surface with the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic component. Since it is used as the silk color for printing information such as the outlines to be printed, it is possible to make the player who recalls the suggestion of the jackpot expectation think that the jackpot expectation is high, and suppress the decline in the game interest. it can. In addition, yellow, which is used as the color of silk, has a very high suggested jackpot expectation (70% jackpot expectation) and is similar to gold, so the back is provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. The rear decorative substrate 3114, the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621. A player who just glances at the back right decorative board 3622 provided at the rear may mistakenly think that it is gold, and it is very likely that he will recognize that there is something like gold and become a big hit. It is possible to improve the game interest of the player who recognizes that it is suggested to be high. Further, as shown in FIG. 149, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent portion (for example, a portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d) and an opaque portion (metal decorative portion 3111d), and is an opaque portion. Is formed with a golden metal decorative portion 3111d. Then, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is visually exposed, it is possible to make the player who glances at the metal decorative portion 3111d recognize that it is suggested that the jackpot expectation is very high. The metal decoration unit 3111d is not limited to the same color as gold, which has a high expectation of big hit, among the colors suggesting the expectation of big hit, but is similar to gold to the extent that it is recognized as the same at first glance, or similar to gold. It may be formed in the same color (for example, yellow), or the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back-up side provided behind the back-up rear-rotating decorative body 3440. Silk printed on the LED mounting surface of the rear decorative substrate 3452, the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back rear left decorative substrate 3521, and the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative substrate 3621. In addition to the above-mentioned yellow as the color of, among the colors suggesting the jackpot expectation, the same color as the gold with the high jackpot expectation, the color similar to the gold color at first glance, and the color similar to the gold color. Etc. may be used.

Further, as described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are produced from a standby position that is difficult for the player to see. It is designed to move to a drive position that can be seen by the player in front, and during this movement, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 and the rear of the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440. Gaze at the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided in the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the back-rear left decorative body 3521, and the back-rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back-rear right decorative body 3621. Because it is difficult, the player who just glanced at these boards should be informed of information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged. It is difficult to recognize, and it is easy to recall the suggestion of the jackpot expectation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the deterioration of the design.

Further, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back provided behind the back rear left decorative body 3521. A member similar to the inner lens described above may be provided in front of each of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative body 3621. As a result, even if these boards are visually recognized when the LED emits light, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing information unrelated to the game written on the board as information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to prevent the world view from collapsing and prevent the deterioration of the design, and it becomes possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, in the above example, the movable decorative body on which the substrate on which the LED is mounted (back-back movable decorative body 3110, back-up-back rotating decorative body 3440, back-back left decorative body 3521, and back-back right decorative body 3621) Was shown in the case of moving from a standby position that is difficult for the player to see to a drive position that is visible to the player, but by moving the movable decorative body, the decorative body on which the board on which the LED board is mounted is mounted. The present technical idea can be applied even if the state is changed from a state in which it is difficult for a person to see and a state in which it is visible to a player. For example, the back-up front decorative body 3210 is covered by the back-up front decorative body 3421, which is normally difficult for the player to see, and the back-up front decorative body 3421 is moved to the ascending position and the lowering position to move the back-back movable. The front of the decorative body 3110 is open from a state where it is difficult for the player to see, and the front of the decorative body 3110 is opened so that the player can see it (exposed state). Even when performing light emission effect or movable effect by the decorative body 3110, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, and the part number described on the back rear decorative board 3114 provided behind the back rear movable decorative body 3110. , Pin numbers, outlines on which electronic components are arranged, and the like can be made difficult for the player to see.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 303, when the effect display device 1600 starts the display effect and then drives the motor to move the back-up front decorative body 3421 from the ascending position to the descending position, the back-up front The LED mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is controlled to emit light according to the timing of driving the motor that moves the decoration 3421, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 emits light. After the end of the movable effect, the back-up front decorative body 3110 is aligned with the timing when the back-up front decoration body 3421 has been moved from the descending position to the ascending position (the timing when the motor for moving the back-up front decoration body 3421 is stopped). The LED mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the rear may be turned off.

As a result, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be seen by the player from a state in which it is difficult for the player to see the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in a state where the LED mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is controlled to emit light. It changes to a visible state (it is visibly displayed by the player in a state where the LED mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is controlled to emit light). Therefore, it is possible to make the back-rear decorative board 3114 difficult to see by the light emission of the LED mounted on the back-rear decorative board 3114, and the number of pins of the connector and the orientation of the IC described on the back-rear decorative board 3114. By making it difficult for the player to see information such as the part number, pin number, and outer line on which the electronic parts are arranged, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and prevent the deterioration of the design. It will be possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

The timing of controlling the light emission of the LED mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is not limited to the above, and the back-up front decoration body 3421 can be moved from the ascending position to the descending position, for example, the back-rear movable. It may be the timing when the decorative body 3110 is actually visible to the player, the timing immediately before the back upper front decorative body 3421 reaches the descending position, or the like, or the back upper front decorative body 3421 reaches the descending position. It may be timing. That is, during the movement of the back-up front decorative body 3421, the player is distracted by the movement of the back-up front decorative body 3421 and is unlikely to pay attention to the back-up front movable decoration body 3110. The LED mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 may be controlled to emit light at a timing when it is easily noticed.

Further, it is difficult for the player to see the front movable decorative body that can be moved to a predetermined standby position and the driving position, and the front movable decorative body that is provided behind the front movable decorative body in the standby position and is moved to the driving position. In the case of providing a rear movable decoration that changes from a state to a state that can be seen by the player and that can operate in a predetermined mode (rotation, vibration, etc.), the rear movable decoration is specified. By operating in this mode, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged can be obtained on the board provided on the back side of the movable decorative body on the rear side. It may be difficult for the player to see it.

For example, the back upper front decorative body 3421 is configured to be movable between the ascending position and the lowering position, and the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state where it is difficult for the player to see behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 in the ascending position. When the display effect is started by the effect display device 1600 and then the motor is driven to move the back upper front decorative body 3421 from the ascending position to the lowering position, the back upper front decorative body 3421 is provided. The back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 is driven to rotate the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 according to the timing of driving the motor, and after the light emission effect and the movable effect by the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 are completed, The back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 is stopped at the timing when the back-up front decoration body 3421 has been moved from the lower position to the ascending position (the timing when the motor for moving the back-up front decoration body 3421 is stopped). You may.

As a result, the back-up front-rotating decorative body 3410 changes from a state in which it is difficult for the player to see it to a state in which it can be seen by the player while the back-up front-rotating decorative body 3410 is operated. It becomes difficult to stare at the back-up front decorative board 3422 provided behind the front-rotating decorative body 3410, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic component described on the back-up front decorative board 3422 become difficult. By making it difficult for the player to see information such as the outline on which the connector is placed, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and prevent the deterioration of the design, and prevent the deterioration of the game interest. become able to.

In this example, the state in which the movable decorative body (in this example, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410) is operating indicates a state in which the movable decorative body is driven and controlled in a predetermined operation mode, and the movable decorative body is It is not limited to a state in which it is continuously moving without stopping, but also includes an intermittent operation state in which at least a moving state and a stopped state are controlled one or more times.

Further, the timing of operating the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 is not limited to the above, and the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 is being moved from the ascending position to the lowering position, for example, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410. It may be the timing when it is actually visible to the player, the timing immediately before the back upper front decorative body 3421 reaches the descending position, or the timing when the back upper front decorative body 3421 reaches the descending position. May be good. That is, since it is unlikely that the player will be distracted by the movement of the back-up front decorative body 3421 and pay attention to the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 while the back-up front decorative body 3421 is moving, the back-up front decorative body 3421 The back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 may be operated at the timing when the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 is easily noticed.

[Occultation assistance by surrounding light emitting means]

Next, an example of making it difficult for the player to see information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, which are written on the board on which the LED is mounted. A modified example will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined LED is turned off under a specific condition. Then, in this case, since the LED is turned off, the board on which the LED is mounted is visually recognized, so that the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electron are written on the board. Information such as the outline on which the parts are arranged may be visually recognized by the player. In this example, even when a predetermined LED is turned off under a specific condition, the information written on the substrate on which the LED is mounted is made difficult for the player to see. The details will be described below.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a specific reach effect is executed in the display effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 304, when the elevating arm 3357 is rotated by the back lower middle elevating drive motor 3352 to move the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 from the lower position to the ascending position, the back upper and rear rotation When moving the decorative body 3440 to the appearance position below the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 is moved to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the right of the back front left effect unit 3700. When moving, when moving the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3610 to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the left of the back-front right effect unit 3800, and when moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the back-rear drive motor 3126. When the lock member 3134 is released by moving the back front movable decorative body 3110 and the back front movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position, it is mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710. LEDs (LEDs arranged in the area A in FIG. 304) and LEDs mounted on the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 of the back-up effect unit 3400 (LEDs arranged in the area B in FIG. 304). The LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 (LED arranged in the area C in FIG. 304) and the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250. (LEDs arranged in the area D in FIG. 304) and LEDs mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200 (LEDs arranged in the area D in FIG. 304). ) And turn off.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the movable decorative body (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating) is in front of the effect display device 1600. When performing an effect of displaying the decorative body 3610 and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110), the LED provided around the effect display device 1600 is turned off to display the display in front of the effect display device 1600. It does not interfere with the visibility of the effect performed by the movable decorative body. When the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is not moved from the lower back position to the upper position, the LED mounted on the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 provided in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is turned off. It may be (LED arranged in region D in FIG. 304).

Further, when turning off the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (at least the door frame left side decorative board 402 and the door frame right side decorative board 418 in this example). , Door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, dish upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decorative board 278, dish center upper decorative board 314 also to control light emission. The light emission is controlled. That is, in a situation where the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off so that the substrate on which the LEDs are mounted can be easily seen, the right side of the door frame provided so as to surround the game area 5a of the game board 5. The LED mounted on the door frame right side decorative board 418 of the side unit 410, the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top of the door frame top unit 450. The LEDs mounted on the central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are controlled to emit light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 are located in front of the pachinko machine 1 (on the player side) of the game board 5. It is provided so as to protrude. That is, the LED provided on the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light at a position closer to the player than the game board 5.

Therefore, when the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off, they are provided in the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3. By controlling the light emission of the LED, it is possible to control the light emission of the periphery of the game board 5 at a position closer to the player than the game board 5, so that the light emission of the LED is made to feel dazzling, or the light emission of the LED is usually made to feel closer to the player. By performing the light emission control emphasized more than this, it is possible to prevent the player from staring at the pachinko machine 1 direction by directing the player's attention from the game board 5 to the door frame 3.

As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the board on which the LED is mounted around the effect display device 1600, and the number of connector pins, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the like are written on each board. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see information such as the outline on which the electronic components are arranged, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and to prevent the deterioration of the design. It will be possible to prevent the decline in game interest.

The light emitting mode when controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 includes, for example, a light emitting state in which the LED is continuously lit for a certain period of time, and a blinking state in which the LED is switched between a lighting state and an extinguishing state one or more times. What to do, higher than usual brightness (maximum value of brightness that can be set (100%) in this example, more than half of the brightness range that can be set (70 to 100% in this example) (85% or more in this example) It may be, or it may have a brightness higher than that of the backlight of the effect display device 1600), and it is lit (not only the one that keeps lighting for a certain period of time, but also the blinking state and the flash), etc. Can be mentioned. In either case, the player's attention is paid to the player by making the light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 feel dazzling, or by emphasizing the LED provided on the door frame 3 more than usual and controlling the light emission. The part that is darkened compared to other areas by preventing the player from staring at the pachinko machine 1 direction by pointing it toward the door frame 3 around the game board 5 or by making the difference between light and dark clear. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see, it is possible to make it difficult to see the substrate on which the LED provided on the game board 5 is mounted. As a result, the player can obtain information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged, which are written on the board on which the LED mounted on the game board 5 is mounted. Since it becomes difficult to be visually recognized and the world view of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being destroyed and the deterioration of the design can be suppressed, the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the deterioration of the design can be suppressed.

Further, under specific conditions, the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710, the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, and the back The LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the front right decorative body unit 3810, the LED mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250, and the back of the back lower left effect unit 3200. Even when the LED mounted on the lower left decorative board 3203 and the LED are turned off, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is lit. Therefore, due to the light from the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the light from the LED provided on the door frame 3, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the back upper front of the back upper effect unit 3400 The decorative board 3422, the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250, and the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left effect unit 3200. , And light can be radiated from the periphery of these substrates, which can cause light and darkness in the area where the substrate is arranged and the periphery of the substrate, so that the substrate portion is darker than the surroundings. It can be difficult to see.

Further, the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 on which the LED is mounted on the surface, the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, and the back front right of the back front right decorative unit 3810. A member similar to the inner lens described above is provided in front of each of the decorative substrate 3814, the back lower right decorative substrate 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250, and the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the back lower left effect unit 3200. You may do so. As a result, even if these boards are visually recognized when the mounted LEDs are turned off, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the information unrelated to the game written on the board as information. It is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and suppress the deterioration of the design, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 on which the LED is mounted on the surface, the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, and the back The back front right decorative board 3814 of the front right decorative unit 3810, the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250, and the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left effect unit 3200 are LEDs. White is used as the resist on the mounting surface (front surface), and information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is placed is reflected on this LED mounting surface as white. It is printed with yellow silk, which has a similar rate and brightness and little visual difference (contrast). As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged even when the substrate is visually recognized, as compared with the case of printing with silk of a color other than white or yellow. It becomes difficult to identify information such as outlines. In addition, the present technical idea is to make it difficult to visually recognize each board by controlling light emission in a predetermined manner around the board on which the LED is mounted when the LED is turned off. In addition to the technology, the LED Although it is possible to enhance the effect by adopting white as the resist on the mounting surface (front surface) and printing various information on the LED mounting surface with yellow silk, these technologies are used to solve the problems. It is not mandatory.

In addition, under specific conditions, movable decorative bodies (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, etc.) are placed in front of the effect display device 1600. And the case of executing the effect of displaying the back-rear movable decorative body 3110) has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714. LED, LED mounted on the back top front decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, back bottom right effect unit 3250 LED mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253, LED mounted on the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left production unit 3200, movable decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration) Turn off a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the body 3440, the back rear left rotating decoration body 3510, the back rear right rotating decoration body 3610, and the back rear movable decoration body 3110). On the other hand, when the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LED provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light (not turned off), for example, when the door frame 3 is detected to be opened, a door opening error occurs. Even in such cases, this technical idea can be applied. Further, even under specific conditions, among the light emitting members (lamps, LEDs, etc.) provided on the game board 5, those displaying important information related to the game, such as the function display unit 1400, should not be turned off. May be good.

[Occultation of the board mounted on the production operation unit]
Next, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic component described on the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided on the effect operation unit 300 and having the LED mounted on the surface are arranged. An example of making it difficult for a player to visually recognize information such as an outline to be performed will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the LED mounted on the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is turned off (not limited to turning off, the brightness may be lower than usual). .. Then, in this case, since the LED is off, the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is visually recognized, so that the number of connector pins, the IC orientation, the part number, and the pin number written on the effect operation ring decorative board 352 , Information such as the outline on which the electronic components are arranged may be visually recognized by the player. In this example, even when the LED mounted on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is turned off based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, or the LED is set to the standby lighting state in which the brightness is lower than usual. The information written on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is made difficult for the player to see. The details will be described below.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a player participation type effect is performed in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 are operated, the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 is performed. An LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided inside, and an LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. The central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are light-emitting and decorated.

Then, when the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is completed, the central button decoration provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 is completed. The LED mounted on the surface of the substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is performed, the effect operation unit 300 is controlled to emit light. The central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are light-emittingly decorated, thereby allowing the player to perform the effect operation. The rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the unit 300 are focused on to encourage these operations.

On the other hand, in the normal time when the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is not performed, the center provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. The LED mounted on the surface of the button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the player participation type effect is not performed, the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 are on the surface. When the effect operating unit 300 is operated during normal times when the mounted LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off, The LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 is controlled to emit light for a certain period of time, and the center of the effect operation button unit 360. The button cover 375, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are light-emittingly decorated.

As a result, the central button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 can be made difficult to see by the light emitted from the LED, and the number of connector pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, and the like are written on these substrates. Since it is difficult for the player to see information such as the pin number and the outline on which the electronic components are arranged, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and to prevent the deterioration of the design. Can be suppressed. In this way, during normal times when the player-participatory effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is not performed, the effect operation unit 301 is operated and the player produces the effect. In a situation where the operation unit 301 is focused on, the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 is controlled to emit light to produce the effect. The central button cover 375 of the operation button unit 360 and the outer peripheral decorative lens. By luminescent decoration of the 379, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the central button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 due to the light emitted from the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the LED. Become.

When the effect operation unit 301 is normally operated, the LED mounted on the surface of the center button decorative substrate 376 is controlled to emit light for a certain period of time, and the center button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 is emitted. Control to decorate, control to emit light from the LED mounted on the surface of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 for a certain period of time to decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and production operation provided below the effect operation ring 330. One or a combination of two or more of the control of controlling the light emission of the LED mounted on the surface of the ring decoration substrate 352 for a certain period of time and the control of emitting and decorating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 (all). May be). Further, if the effect operation unit 301 is operated again before a certain period of time elapses, these LEDs may be turned off when a certain period of time elapses from the operation. That is, these LEDs may be turned off when the non-operated period of the effect operation unit 301 reaches a certain period after the effect operation unit 301 is operated.

Further, the LED for controlling light emission may be different depending on the part of the effect operation unit 300 that is normally operated. For example, when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit 300 may be operated. The central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in 360 are controlled to emit light for a certain period of time. And the outer peripheral button cover 380 is light-emitting and decorated, and when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated, the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 is used for a certain period of time. The light emission may be controlled so that the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is light-emitting and decorated. As a result, it is possible to control the light emission of the LED provided at the portion of interest of the player, and it is possible to prevent the substrate on which the LED is mounted from being visually recognized.

Further, in the above example, it is mounted on the surfaces of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 at the normal time when the player participation type effect is not performed. The LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are shown to be turned off, but they are not limited to those that are turned off, and the player participation type effect is used. The mode of light emission during production when the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is urged, and the mode of light emission during standby (including not only the lighting state but also the lighting state) in which the brightness is lowered as compared with the lighting state during production. This technical idea can be applied as long as the light emission is controlled by switching.

Further, since the player participation type effect is not performed, the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the effect. The above-mentioned when the effect operation unit 300 is operated in the normal time when the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided below the operation ring 330 is controlled to emit light in the standby light emission mode. In addition to or in addition to the process of switching from the standby light emitting mode to the effect light emitting mode to control the light emission, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is driven and controlled to vibrate the pressing operation unit 303 for a certain period of time ( It may be raised and lowered), or the operation ring drive motor 342 may be driven and controlled to rotate or vibrate (rotate alternately left and right) over a certain period of time.

That is, the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 based on the operation of the effect operation unit 300 at the normal time when the player participation type effect is not performed. The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is operated so that the substrate 377 is moved (vibrates in this example) so as to be difficult to stare at, or overlaps with the front of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 to block the field of view. In the example, it may be rotated or vibrated). As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic component described on the mounting surface of the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 are arranged. Since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the information such as the outer line, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and suppress the deterioration of the design, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In this example, the effect operation ring is composed of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided inside, and the rotation operation unit 302 that constitutes the surface of the effect operation ring 330 and covers the front of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352. In 330, the rotation operation unit 302 is operated in front of the effect operation ring decorative board 352, but the decorative body provided separately from the effect operation ring 330 is displayed in front of the effect operation ring decorative board 352. By operating (vibration, reciprocating, etc.) so that at least a part of the operation ring decorative board 352 overlaps with each other, the visual recognition of the effect operation ring decorative board 352 may be blocked, or the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit 300 may be blocked. Without moving the central button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 provided in 360, only the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 that cover the surfaces of the central button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 are vibrated. This may make it difficult to see the central button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377.

Further, the center button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 is deviated from the normal (non-operated) reference position (origin) by the press detection sensor 381 based on the operation of the press operation unit 303. When this is detected, the central button cover 375 may be returned to the reference position (origin) (origin return operation), or the effect operation button unit 360 may be pulled by the elevating detection sensor 382. When it is detected that the effect operation button unit 360 is in a state deviated from the normal (non-movable) descending position, the operation of returning the effect operation button unit 360 to the reference position (origin) (origin return operation) is performed. It may be performed, or the elevating detection sensor 382 detects that the effect operation button unit 360 is in a halfway position that is neither a normal (non-movable) descending position nor a movable ascending position. In that case, the effect operation button unit 360 may be returned to the reference point (origin) (origin return operation).

In this case, since the central button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 move with the origin return operation, it becomes difficult to stare at the surfaces of these substrates. In addition to the case where the effect operation button unit 360 is operated, the above-mentioned movable decorative bodies (back rear movable decorative body 3110, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left decorative body 3521, back rear right decorative body 3621) are also used. Etc.) may be deviated from the standby position (origin), but the movable ornament may be returned to the standby position (origin) (origin return operation). Even in operation, it is possible to make it difficult to stare at the surfaces of these substrates by moving the substrates mounted on the movable decorative body.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned movable decorative bodies (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and back rear movable decorative body 3110) are somehow. Even when it is detected that the state is deviated from the standby position or the drive position due to the influence, the operation of returning to the standby position (origin return operation) may be performed. In this case as well, the movable decorative body (back) The surface of the substrate on which the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110) are moved and mounted. Can be made difficult to stare at. That is, in the movable decorative body arranged so as to be difficult to see from the player, such as the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3510, the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3610, and the back-back movable decorative body 3110, the standby In a state where the player may be able to see the surface of the board mounted on the board in a state of being displaced from the position, it is difficult to stare at the surface of the board by operating the movable decorative body to move the board. At the same time, the surface of the substrate may be moved from a visible state to a hard-to-see state by moving to a standby position.

In the above-mentioned player participation type production, the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 301 is effective for a predetermined period of the game production, and the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing of the production operation unit 301 is effective. When the operation unit 303 is operated, the display content of the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 is changed according to the operation. That is, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player pays attention to the effect operation unit 301. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the effect is performed before the start of the period (operation valid period) in which the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is valid in the player participation type effect. The LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the operation unit 300, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. The LED mounted on the surface is controlled to emit light in a light emitting mode at the time of production, and the central button cover 375 of the production operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330. The central button decorative substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are made difficult to see by luminescent decoration.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 305, the center button provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 is at the timing of starting the player participation type effect before the operation of the effect operation unit 301 becomes effective. The LED mounted on the surface of the decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are controlled to emit light. The central button cover 375 of the operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are light-emittingly decorated, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 are decorated. When the period during which the operation is valid (operation valid period) elapses, these LEDs are turned off. As a result, before the player recognizes that the player participation type production is started and pays attention to the production operation unit 301, the central button cover 375 of the production operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emittingly decorated, and the central button decorative substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are suppressed from being visually recognized on these substrates. It is possible to suppress the visual recognition of information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged.

In addition, the light emitting mode of the LED may be changed between before the start of the operation valid period and during the operation valid period. It may be possible to determine whether or not the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is effective by making the LED different or the brightness of the LED different. That is, the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 at the timing of starting the player participation type effect, and the effect operation ring. The LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided below the 330 is controlled to emit light in the first effect emission mode, and during the operation valid period, the first effect light emission mode is changed to the second effect. The light emission mode may be switched to control the light emission. Further, when the operation valid period has elapsed, the light emission mode is switched from the second effect light emission mode to the first effect light emission mode, and after the game effect, the light emission control is switched from the first effect light emission mode to the standby light emission mode. You may try to do it.

Further, when the player participation type effect is started, the effect display device 1600 is displayed to prompt the operation of the effect operation unit 301. In this example, the same image as that of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed, and the player is urged to press the effect operation unit 301 by displaying "Press the button!". It should be noted that the expectation degree suggestion effect suggesting the jackpot expectation may be executed by changing the aspect (color or pattern in this example) of the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600. .. As described above, in this example, the jackpot expectation that suggests in the order of white <blue <yellow <green <red <gold is set to be high, and the mode of the image of the effect operation unit 301 is one of these. The color may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the effect operation ring decoration provided below the effect operation ring 330. When the LED mounted on the surface of the substrate 352 is controlled to emit light in the second effect light emitting mode, it is the same as the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 (almost not limited to perfect match). Light emission may be controlled by color (including the same one). As a result, the effect operation unit 301 can be light-emitting and decorated in relation to the expectation suggestion effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the sense of presence is enhanced. If the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is light-emitting and decorated before the timing of displaying the image of the effect operation unit 301 on the effect display device 1600, the image of the effect display unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Until then, the effect operation unit 301 is light-emitting and decorated with a normal (lowest jackpot expectation color) emission color (white in this example), and the effect display device 1600 displays the image of the effect operation unit 301, or the timing. After a lapse of a predetermined period (several seconds or the like), the color may be changed to the same color as the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 to be luminescent and decorated.

[Lamp / LED brightness adjustment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED provided on the door frame 3 (at least the left side decorative substrate of the door frame in this example) is provided by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the plate upper left decorative board. The brightness of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of 273, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be adjustable), and the LEDs provided on the game board 5 (at least in this example). Door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, and a plurality of LEDs. Even if the brightness of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522, and the back-rear right decorative substrate 3622 mounted on the movable decorative body can be adjusted. Alternatively, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs as the back door of the effect display device 1600 may be adjustable. However, the LED provided in the display for displaying important information related to the game (for example, the function display unit 1400). It is desirable that the brightness of the provided LED) cannot be adjusted), and the brightness of the LED) can be adjusted in 5% increments over a range of 70% to 100%.

Specifically, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is improved, and the rotation operation unit 302 is operated. When the rotation operation is performed counterclockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is reduced.

Further, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, the effect display device 1600 displays a barometer corresponding to the current brightness for a certain period of time, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When operated, the scale of the barometer is increased until the brightness reaches 100%, and when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise, the scale of the barometer is decreased until the brightness reaches 70%. In this way, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, it is provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 by directing attention to the display content of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to suppress the visibility of the central button decorative substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 37, and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330, and the connectors marked on these substrates can be suppressed. Information such as the number of pins, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged is difficult for the player to see. It is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest and the decline in the game interest.

Further, as described above, since the player participation type effect is not performed, it is mounted on the surface of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. When the rotation operation unit 302 is operated during normal times when the LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off, the center button decoration board The LED mounted on the surface of the 376, the LED mounted on the surface of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. , Is controlled to emit light for a certain period of time to illuminate the central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. Then, when the non-operated period of the effect operation unit 301 reaches a certain period, the display of the barometer of the effect display device 1600 is extinguished and the LED of the effect operation unit 300 is turned off.

In this way, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, the LEDs provided in the effect operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light, so that the central button decorative substrate 376 on which these LEDs are mounted and the central button decorative substrate 376 are The surfaces of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be made difficult to see by the light emitted from the LED.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower side of the effect operation ring 330. The brightness of the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided in the above is not adjustable. That is, the brightness of the LED provided in the effect operation unit 300, which is provided at a position close to the player and is easily noticed, cannot be adjusted, and the light emission is controlled by a preset brightness. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 300 is light-emitting and decorated in the above-mentioned light emitting mode at the time of effect, it is always mounted on the surfaces of the center button decorative substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 with a certain brightness or higher. The LED can be made to emit light, and the LED illuminates the effect operation unit 301 in a situation where the player pays attention to the effect operation unit 300 (a situation in which the effect operation unit 301 is operated such as a player participation type effect or volume control). The light emitted can make the central button decorative substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 difficult to see, and the number of connector pins, the orientation of the IC, and the components marked on these substrates can be made difficult to see. Since information such as numbers, pin numbers, and outlines on which electronic components are arranged is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and prevent deterioration of the design. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, as described above, white is adopted as the resist on the mounting surface of the central button decorative substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the number of connector pins is formed on the mounting surface with yellow silk. Information such as the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged is printed. In this way, in this example, since this information is printed on the mounting surface of the board with yellow silk, which has little visual difference (contrast) with respect to white, not only when the LED is on, but also when the LED is off. Even so, it is difficult to identify this information.

The brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain period from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 until the peripheral control MPU is activated, before and after the special symbol which is displayed in a variable manner is stopped. It may be always feasible except for a certain period of time (such as one or both), or specific conditions such as a period of waiting for customers and performing a demonstration by the effect display device 1600. It may be feasible only when is satisfied. Further, the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 may be immediately reflected, or the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 depending on the situation (whether or not the fluctuation is displayed, etc.). The case where the result of the brightness adjustment is reflected may be changed between the case where

In this example, the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be executed even when the door frame 3 is open. Further, when the door frame 3 is open, the LED is mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative unit 3710, and the LED is mounted on the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400. LED, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, LED mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250, back lower left effect unit 3200 LEDs mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, movable decorative bodies (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110), are turned off (not lit), and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (this example). Then, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the plate upper left decorative board 273. The decorative substrate 278 on the upper right side of the plate and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be controlled to emit light. That is, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness while the door frame 3 is open, the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off. , The brightness cannot be determined by the light emitting state of these a plurality of LEDs.

On the other hand, in the state where the door frame 3 is not opened (the state where the door frame 3 is closed), the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative unit 3710, the back top effect unit 3400. LED mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250 LED, LED mounted on the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left production unit 3200, movable decorative body (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back back left rotating decoration Control is not performed to turn off a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the body 3510, the back-rear right-handed decorative body 3610, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110). Possible state). Therefore, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, the brightness can be determined by the light emitting state of the LED provided on the game board 5.

Further, as described above, the back front left decorative substrate 3714, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back front right decorative substrate 3814, the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, the back lower left decorative substrate 3203, the back upper decorative substrate 3114, and the back upper rear. For the decorative substrate 3452, the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, and the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, white is adopted as the resist on the mounting surface, and the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, and the components are made of yellow silk on the mounting surface. Information such as numbers, pin numbers, and outlines on which electronic components are placed is printed. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is opened and the LEDs mounted on these boards are in a non-lightable state, it is possible to make it difficult to identify these information.

[Light emission from the back of the pachinko machine]
Conventionally, since the back side of the pachinko machine or the like is only equipped with a control board or the like and is not a part to be recognized by the player, no special measures have been taken except for measures against fraud. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 of this example adopts an unprecedented novel configuration so that various work efficiencies on the back side and the like of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 306 to 311.

FIG. 306 is a side view schematically showing the light from the light emitting decoration in the standby position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, and FIG. 307 is the appearance position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. FIG. 308 is a side view schematically showing the light from the light emitting decoration body, FIG. 308 is a view showing a back rear decorative substrate provided with a plurality of holes, and FIG. 309 shows a light emitting region on the back side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 310 is a perspective view showing a light emitting region on the side surface side when the gaming board is viewed from the left front, and FIG. 311 is a perspective view showing a light emitting region on the side surface side when the gaming board is viewed from the left rear side. Is.

(About the light from the luminous ornament)
The game board 5 of this example is provided with an effect display device 1600 having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image, and is visually recognized from the front side around the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is provided with a plurality of luminous ornaments. Further, the back unit 3000 is provided with a back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box shape whose front is open and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, whereas the various units having the light emitting decoration are located inside the back box 3010 and in front of the effect display device 1600. It is attached.

As the light emitting decorations of this example, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, the back-up front decoration body 3421, the back-up rear decoration body 3451, the back-back movable decoration body 3110, and the like are provided. Regarding the LED mounted on the above, there are a case where the LED is emitted as a part of the effect when the symbol is variablely displayed, and a case where the LED is emitted as a decoration of the game board 5 when the symbol is not variablely displayed.

First, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described in detail above, when visually recognized from the front side of the game board 5, the back-up front decoration body 3421 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is provided on the upper side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the back-up front decoration is provided. At a position on the central front side of the body 3421, a back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 is attached. More specifically, the back-up front rotating ornament 3410 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and is composed of a non-transmissive portion and a translucent lens portion. In addition, the back upper front decorative body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 stacked in the center in the left-right direction, and the petals on the rear side are the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that seems to be rotated so as to be located between the two, and there is almost no non-transmissive part, and almost the entire part is a translucent lens part. The "translucent lens portion" is a portion having a lens-cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 306, a back-up front decorative substrate 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-top front decoration body 3421. The back-up front decorative substrate 3422 extends to the left and right over substantially the entire length of the back-up front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. Then, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 emits light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs is the lens of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-top front decoration body 3421. When the portion is reached, the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 can be light-emitting decorated.

In addition, top-view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 located in front of the back-top front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410. The lens portion of 3421 can be brightly luminescent and decorated.

In addition, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting components. A coating film made of white solder resist is capable of reflecting light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 with light, and the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421. Can be brightly luminescent and decorated. Further, in the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is the player through the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 with a coating film made of white solder resist, the lens portions of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-top front decoration body 3421 can also be passed through. From the player side, the lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 being visible.

Further, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back surface of the game machine) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 of this example. As a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative board 3422, top-view type LEDs are mounted, and the rear side of the back-up front decorative board 3422 (opposite to the player side, in other words, pachinko). It is possible to irradiate light toward the back side of the machine 1.

Further, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 has a coating film made of white solder resist on the surface portion excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting parts not only on the front surface but also on the rear surface. doing. As described above, the coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the light toward the rear of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422.

As shown in FIG. 306, when the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-up rear rotation decoration is behind the left side portion of the back-up front decoration substrate 3422 in the left-right direction. Since the body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are located, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is emitted from the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451. It will be irradiated toward. A part of such light is reflected on the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 (back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and back-up front decorative body 3421). Light leaks from the gap between the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and such leaked light (light leakage) can be visually recognized by the player. Become. In this way, not only the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 emit light, but also the light leaks out on the rear surface side of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that gives the player a sense of depth.

Further, in the state where the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up The post-decorative body 3451 is not located. Further, in the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper portion of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 in the vertical direction. From this, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 includes the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decoration body 3451, and the back-up rear movable decoration body 3110. Without being interrupted by the effect display device 1600, the light is directly directed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further, the transparency of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is transparent. The light emitting region L1 near the portion can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 307, in the state where the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the appearance positions, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is behind all the parts in the left-right direction. The rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are not located. Further, in the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper portion of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 in the vertical direction. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper portion of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 in the vertical direction. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decoration body 3451, the back-back movable decoration body 3110, and the effect display device. Irradiation is directed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 without being blocked by the 1600. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further, the transparency of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is transparent. The light emitting region L1 near the portion can be visually recognized brightly.

Next, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described in detail above, behind the back-up front decoration body 3421, a back-up rear decoration body 3451 of the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 is provided, and at a position on the front side of the back-up rear decoration body 3451. , The back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 is attached. More specifically, the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and is composed of a non-transmissive portion and a translucent lens portion. Further, in the back-up rear decoration body 3451, two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 are stacked back and forth, and the petals on the rear side are located between the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like it is rotated, and there is almost no non-transmissive part, and almost the entire part is a translucent lens part. The "translucent lens portion" is a portion having a lens-cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 306, a back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side is attached to the rear side of the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451. The back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs is applied to the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451. Upon reaching this point, the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decoration 3451 can be light-emitting decorated.

Further, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 can move from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In the state where the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, they are located behind the back-up front decorative body 3421 and are invisible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located behind the upper part of the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decoration 3451, whereas the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decoration 3451 are located behind. The effect display device 1600 is located behind the lower part of the above. Further, in the state where the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 are moved to the appearance position, they are located in front of the effect display device 1600 and are visible to the player.

Further, a top view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the decorative substrate 3452 after the back surface. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up and rear-decorating body 3451 located in the front, and the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up and rear-decorating body are decorated. The lens portion of 3451 can be brightly luminescent and decorated.

In addition, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back-up and rear decorative substrate 3452, excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting parts. A coating film made of white solder resist is capable of reflecting light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 with light, and the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451. Can be brightly luminescent and decorated. Further, in the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is a player through the lens portions of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 with a coating film made of white solder resist, the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can also be passed through the lens portions. From the player side, the lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the decorative substrate 3452 being visible after the back surface.

As shown in FIG. 306, when the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in front of the back-up front. The rotating decoration body 3410 and the back upper front decoration body 3421 are located. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is reflected by the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421, and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452. It will be irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3452 on the back passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further, the transparency of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is transparent. The light emitting region L1 near the portion can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 of this example (the rear surface facing the back surface of the game machine). As a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative board 3452, top-view type LEDs are mounted, and the rear side of the back-up rear decorative board 3452 (opposite to the player side, in other words, pachinko). It is possible to irradiate light toward the back side of the machine 1.

Further, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 has a coating film made of white solder resist on the surface portion excluding the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface and other mounting parts not only on the front surface but also on the rear surface. have. As described above, the coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the light toward the rear of the decorative substrate 3452 after the back surface.

As shown in FIG. 306, in the state where the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-up rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position or not. The rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper portion of the decorative substrate 3452 in the vertical direction. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative board 3452 is not blocked by the back-back movable decorative body 3110 and the effect display device 1600, and the back-up rear decorative board 3452. It will be directly irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located at the rear. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 307, in the state where the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the appearance position, they are located in front of the effect display device 1600, so that the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 Light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface is not emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553. Therefore, in the state where the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are controlled so as not to emit light. ..

Next, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described in detail above, a back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100 is provided behind the back-up rear decoration body 3451. More specifically, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 that extends in the left-right direction and has a decoration that forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by embossed (relief-shaped) unevenness. A translucent sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 provided behind the decorative body 3111 and having a decoration (pattern) forming the rest of the decorative portion 3150, and provided behind the decorative sheet 3112. A transparent flat plate-shaped light guide emitting plate 3113 and a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the light guide emitting plate 3113 and having a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface thereof are provided. There is. The back-rear decorative substrate 3114 causes the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the decoration body 3111 and the decoration body 3111 (rear back). The movable decorative body 3110) can be light-emitting decorated.

As shown in FIG. 307, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 makes it possible to move from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the back-up front decorative body 3421 and is invisible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located behind the upper part of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110, while the effect display device 1600 is located behind the lower part of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. .. Further, in the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (the face portion facing the front side facing the player), as a plurality of LEDs, a plurality of side view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top view type second LEDs 3114b Is implemented. The side-view type first LED 3114a can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, whereas the top-view type second LED 3114b can irradiate the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to irradiate light toward the side of 3114. Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiating plate 3113, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 direct light toward the light guide radiating plate 3113. By irradiating, the light guide emitting plate 3113 emits light toward the front, and the decorative body 3111 can be uniformly irradiated with light as a whole, and the decorative body 3111 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be irradiated. ) Can be easily visually recognized and decorated with light emission.

Further, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting parts. A coating film made of white solder resist is capable of reflecting light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, the decorative body 3111 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and the decorative body 3111 (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be brightly luminescent and decorated. Further, in the back rear decorative substrate 3114, there is a possibility that the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be visually recognized from the player side through the decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. is there. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 with a coating film made of white solder resist, the decorative body 3111 can be passed through the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from the player side. Can only be recognized as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 being visible.

As shown in FIG. 306, in the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421 and the back-up front rear decoration body 3210 are in front of the back-back movable decoration body 3110. Decorative body 3451 is located. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, the back-up front decoration body 3421, and the back-up back decoration body 3451. , The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 will be irradiated. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is diffused by the light guide radiation plate 3113 and emitted toward the front of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Irradiation is also performed from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the radiation plate 3113 toward the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is transmitted from the upper, lower, left and right ends of the light-guiding radiation plate 3113 via the light guide radiation plate 3114 ( The light is emitted toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the light guide emitting plate 3113). The back box 3010 uses a transparent member (transparent portion) in part, and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 emits light near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the pachinko machine 1 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. The region L2 and the light emitting region L3 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted from the upper, lower, left and right ends of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the upper end of such a light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted from the back is emitted toward the upper rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. In the state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the effect display device 1600 is not located above and behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is blocked by the effect display device 1600 from the upper end of the light guide radiation plate 3113 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. Instead, the light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further emits light in the vicinity of the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The area L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 306, in the state where the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in the appearance position, since it is located in front of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of back-rear movable decoration bodies 3110 mounted on the front surface of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110. The light from the LED is not emitted toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553.

In this example, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is guided. Although it is diffused in the light emitting plate 3113, the light guide emitting plate 3113 may not be provided. In such a case, the first side view type is such that the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is irradiated with light toward the side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the upper rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is preferable that the LED 3114a is provided. Also by this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is irradiated toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the pachinko machine 1 The light emitting region L2 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the box can be visually recognized brightly. Further, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back box 3010 The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly after passing through the transparent portion of the above.

Although the back box 3010 of this example is partially provided with a transparent portion, a penetrating portion may be provided in the back box 3010 instead of the transparent portion. Even in such a case, the light from the LED of the light emitting decoration can pass through the penetrating portion of the back box 3010. For example, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back passes through the through-light portion of the back box 3010, and further on the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, the back box 3010 of this example is provided with a translucent portion which is a transparent portion and a non-transmissive portion, but the non-transmissive portion is the back surface side (the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1). It is possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.) by providing white printing or white painting, or mirror surface printing or mirror surface processing on the side). I have to. As a result, the light directed to the non-transmissive portion can be efficiently reflected to the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, with respect to the above-mentioned light emitting decorative body, not only the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the various decorative substrates is emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Although it is illuminated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located in, it is mounted on the front surface of a decorative substrate (such as a decorative substrate of a light emitting decoration other than the above-mentioned light emitting decoration) that should be specialized for production. The light from the plurality of LEDs is configured so as not to be emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, for decorative substrates that should be specialized for production, the mounting surface is formed with a coating film made of green or black solder resist, or enclosed in a box to diffuse the light from the LEDs. The light from the LED is clearly visible by suppressing the light emission.

As another example, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 may be provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. 308. As shown in FIG. 308, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted toward the decorative body 3111 located in front of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452. A part of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 is reflected and directed toward the rear of the decorative body 3111. When the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes, the reflected light of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 passes through the plurality of holes and goes to the rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It becomes possible. A decorative body base 3115 is attached to the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 so as to cover the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, but it is provided in a plurality of holes provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Holes are provided at the corresponding positions. As a result, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111, and the light is transmitted through the plurality of holes provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the light can be efficiently irradiated to the rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. That is, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are irradiated, pass through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further, the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the above can be visually recognized brightly.

In the above, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, but the size of these holes is as small as possible, for example, it is mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is preferably formed smaller than the LED. For example, when the size of the holes provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is large, the light from the rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (for example, the light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is emitted from the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is easy to enter through the holes provided in the 3114, and even when the LED mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is turned off, it may look as if it is turned on. By reducing the size of the holes provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114, such adverse effects can be reduced.

Similarly, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, but the number of these holes is as small as possible, and is mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, for example. It is preferably formed less than the number of LEDs. For example, when the number of holes provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is increased, the light from the rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (for example, the light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is emitted from the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is easy to enter through the holes provided in the 3114, and even when the LED mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is turned off, it may look as if it is turned on. By reducing the number of holes provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114, such adverse effects can be reduced.

In the above, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Similarly, the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 also have a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Holes may be provided. Also by this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 is partially reflected by the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421, and the back-up Light can be efficiently irradiated to the rear of the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back surface through a plurality of holes provided in the front decorative substrate 3422. Further, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is partially reflected by the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 to decorate the back-up rear decoration. Light can be efficiently irradiated toward the rear of the decorative substrate 3452 after the back surface through the plurality of holes provided in the substrate 3452. That is, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 becomes reflected light, and the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 and the back-up rear decorative substrate. The light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the 3452, passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further passes through the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. It can be visually recognized brightly.

Next, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are not shown in FIGS. 306 and 307, but will be described below. As described in detail above, when visually recognized from the front side of the game board 5, the back front left decorative body 3713 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is provided on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the effect display is provided. On the right side of the display area of the device 1600, the back front right decorative body 3813 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 is provided. More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are decorated with patterns such as characters, items, logos, etc. in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and are non-transmissive parts and transparent. It is composed of a light lens part. The "translucent lens portion" is a portion having a lens-cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

On the rear side of the back front left decorative body 3713, a back front left decorative board 3714 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface is attached. Then, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713, and the back front left The lens portion of the decorative body 3713 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, in the back front left decorative substrate 3714, the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 may be visible from the player side through the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. There is. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 with a coating film made of white solder resist, the lens portion can be seen from the player side even through the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713. It can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 being visible.

Further, side view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The side view type LED reflects light on the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 and can irradiate the light toward the front (player side) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 located in the front with light, and it is possible to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713.

Further, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting parts. A coating film made of white solder resist is capable of reflecting light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 with light, and it is possible to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713.

In the above, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is provided with the side view type LED directed to the left so that the light is emitted toward the left side of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. That is, on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714, the left side of the back box 3010 on the side of the back box 3010 closer to the back back decorative board 3114 is located, and the direction of the side view type LED. Is provided facing the left side surface of the back box 3010. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 is emitted toward the left side surface of the back box 3010 located on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714. It becomes. The back box 3010 uses a transparent member (transparent portion) in part, and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 310, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is a light emitting region near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. L2 can be visually recognized brightly.

The back front right decorative body 3813 has the same configuration as the back front left decorative body 3713, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 is emitted from the back front right decorative board 3814. It is configured to irradiate toward the right side surface of the back box 3010 located on the right side side of the box. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 311, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is a transparent portion of the light emitting region L3 on the right side surface of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. The vicinity can be visually recognized brightly.

Next, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described in detail above, when visually recognized from the front side of the game board 5, the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 of the lower back middle production unit 3300 is provided in the lower center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. More specifically, in the lower back middle rotating ornament 3310, six number decorations formed in relief shape from "1" to "6" on the entire surface are 60 degrees in the clockwise direction around the center. It is arranged on the circumference at each angle, and is composed of a non-transmissive part and a translucent lens part. The "translucent lens portion" is a portion having a lens-cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more brilliant when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 306, on the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the lower lower middle first decorative board 3322 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is attached. Then, the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 and is back. The lens portion of the lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 can be light-emitting decorated.

As shown in FIG. 307, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 makes it possible to move from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the game panel 1100 forming the game area 5a and is visible to the player. At this time, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. Further, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, a top view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 located in the front with light, and it is possible to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310.

In addition, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting parts. There is. A coating film made of white solder resist is capable of reflecting light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 with light, and it is possible to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. Further, in the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, the front surface of the lower lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 can be visually recognized from the player side through the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. There is a possibility that it will be possible. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 with a coating film made of white solder resist, the player can see through the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back being visible.

Further, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back surface of the game machine) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back of this example. As a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, a top view type LED is mounted, and the rear side of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 (the side opposite to the player side). In other words, it is possible to irradiate the light toward the back side of the pachinko machine 1).

As shown in FIG. 306, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the back lower middle first decorative board 3322. ing. The back box 3010 uses a transparent member (transparent portion) in part, and the transparent portion allows light to pass through with high transmittance. However, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is located behind the back box 3010, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back is behind the main control board 1310. Although it is irradiated so as to brighten the vicinity of the light emitting region L4 near the transparent portion of the back box 3010 in the above, it is blocked by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 307, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 are controlled so as not to emit light.

From the above, as the light emitting decorative body that brightens the back surface side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the back upper rear decorative body are used in the upper part of the game board 5. 3451, back and rear movable decorative bodies 3110 are provided, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and three back front right decorative bodies are provided on the right side of the game board 5. A unit 3810 is provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 309, the light emitting ornament provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 310. , The light emitting ornament provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear and brightens the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). As shown in FIG. 311 The light emitting region L3 of is brightened.

(About the advantage of providing a light emitting area on the back side of the pachinko machine)
Generally, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility provided in a game hall. Specifically, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on one side of the island facility, or a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on both sides of the island facility. It is done. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 is blocked and darkened. By the way, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, control members such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, wiring for connecting the control members, a supply mechanism for the game ball B used for the game, and the like are arranged. , Maintenance may be required for a predetermined location on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on both sides of the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 on one side of the island facility is opened and the pachinko machine 1 on the other side is opened. Although it is possible to maintain the back surface, since the inside of the island facility is dark, the visibility of the parts to be maintained is poor, and it is difficult to visually operate the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the pachinko machine 1 can open and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 with one side as the axis, and for the pachinko machine 1 requiring maintenance, the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 It is possible to maintain the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 by opening. However, with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2, light from the outside (light of the hall) is emitted to the portion of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 that is far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy to reach and can be visually recognized brightly, it is difficult for external light (hole light) to reach the part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 that is close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. It cannot be seen brightly. That is, when the part to be maintained is a part close to the open shaft of the main body frame 4, the visibility of the part to be maintained is poor, and it is difficult to visually operate the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for decorative purposes by a plurality of light emitting decorative bodies provided on the game board 5, the back side and the side surface side are also other than decoration. It is configured to brighten for the purpose of. Specifically, the light from the LED mounted on the light emitting decoration body is directed not only to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but also to the back side and the side surface side, and the light is directed to the transparent part of the back box 3010. By configuring the pachinko machine 1 so as to pass through, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 and the light emitting region L2 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 are brightened. be able to. For example, the light irradiating the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 can pass through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553, and further brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the inside is blocked and darkened, but by brightening the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the island facility can be brightened. As a result, when the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the visibility of the portion to be maintained is improved, and the efficiency of the visual work on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In this example, the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 have both a role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and a role of brightening the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1. It is configured to do. For example, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1 by providing an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear side. However, if an LED dedicated to maintenance is provided, The number of parts will increase and the cost will increase. In this regard, it is possible to prevent an increase in cost by having a plurality of light emitting decorations that brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 also serve to brighten the back side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1. it can.

In this example, the light from the LEDs of the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 is configured to brighten the back surface side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1, but the pachinko machine 1 Since it is not desirable for the LED light source to be directly viewed during maintenance on the back surface side or the side surface side, the LED light source is used for the light from the LED that brightens the back surface side or the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1. It is configured so that it is indirect light that is not directly viewed. For example, the back-up front decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, and makes it possible to emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the back surface side (for example, when the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is visually recognized), the LED is provided with a cover so that the light source of the LED is not directly viewed. The light from the LED is configured to be indirect light. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that brightens the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 from hindering the work.

(About the characteristic composition of the luminous ornament in this example)
In the light emitting decorative body of this example, various measures have been taken so as not only to brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for decorative purposes but also to brighten the back surface side and the side surface side for purposes other than decoration. Although the details have been described above, the following configurations can be mentioned as specific configurations.

First, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and makes it possible to emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. In the state where the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-up front rotation decoration 3410, the back-up front decoration 3421, and the back-up rear decoration 3451 are located in front of the back-back movable decoration 3110. There is. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, the back-up front decoration body 3421, and the back-up back decoration body 3451. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are indirectly irradiated. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 emits and decorates the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and in addition to the role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the back box After passing through 3010, it can play a role of brightening the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 and brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of this example receives light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and is decorated by emitting light. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 have a larger area than the back upper rear movable decorative body 3110. From this, when the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper decorative substrate 3114 is reflected on the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410, the back-up front decoration body 3421, and the back-up back decoration body 3451. In addition, it will be spread over a wider area than the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. As a result, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be widened, and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

In the above, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative body 3421 and the rear surface of the back upper rear decorative body 3451. A coating film made of white solder resist is capable of reflecting light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper decorative substrate 3114 is reflected with high reflectance on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative body 3421 and the rear surface of the back-up rear decorative body 3451. Therefore, the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are efficiently irradiated. As a result, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

Next, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and makes it possible to emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, as described as another example, by providing the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, the reflected light of the light emitted toward the decoration body 3111 of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be generated. , It becomes possible to go to the rear of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 through a plurality of holes. That is, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper rear) the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 emits and decorates the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and in addition to the role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the back box It can play a role of brightening the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 and brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 by passing through the transparent portion of 3010.

Next, the back-up front decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, and makes it possible to emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. There is. Behind the back-up front decorative body 3421, there are a portion where the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the back-up rear movable decoration body 3110 are located in the evacuation position, and the back-up rear rotating decoration body. There are a portion where the 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and the back-back movable decorative body 3110 are not located. Of these, the portion where the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and the back-back movable decorative body 3110 are located at the retracted position is mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422. Light from the plurality of LEDs is reflected on the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up / rear decorative body 3451 and the back-up / rear movable decorative body 3110 located at the rear, and directed toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. Will be irradiated. On the other hand, for the portion where the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and the back-up rear movable decorative body 3110 are not located, the back box 3010 and the tank rail located behind the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 are located. It will be directly irradiated toward 553. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 passes through the back box 3010 and passes through the back box 3010 in addition to the role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1. It can play a role of brightening the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 in the rear and brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, as the light emitting decorative body, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, and the back upper movable decorative body 3110 are provided in the upper part of the game board 5. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided, and they are provided separately from each other. Has been done. Then, the light emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 is , The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear, the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is , The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear, the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and a plurality of regions on the back surface side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed. It makes it possible to make it brighter.

Further, the light emitting decoration includes an LED capable of emitting light toward the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 and an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear side (back surface side) of the pachinko machine 1. Is provided. As for the LED capable of emitting light toward the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, the light is reflected by the member located in front of the LED and directed toward the rear side (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. The back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the indirect light. On the other hand, with respect to the LED capable of emitting light toward the rear side (back surface side) of the pachinko machine 1, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the direct light. At this time, of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, an LED capable of emitting light toward the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 is used, and an area that can be brightened by the indirect light and the pachinko machine 1 An LED that can emit light toward the rear side (back surface side) of the slingshot may be used, and the region that can be brightened by the direct light thereof may be separated from the region.

In the above, as the area that can be brightened by the direct light from the LED, the portion of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 that can be operated by a worker such as a hall manager can be targeted. Is suitable. As will be described in detail later, examples of the parts where a worker such as a hall manager can perform the work include an operation part 640a and a detachable part of the back cover 640. The operation part 640a and the detachable part of the back cover 640 are provided at positions where they can receive the direct light from the LED, so that they can receive the direct light from the LED and make it visually recognized brighter than receiving the indirect light. it can. As a result, when working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4, but the back cover 640 By making the operation unit 640a and the attachment / detachment part brightly visible, the operator can easily confirm the object to be operated, the back cover 640 can be easily attached / detached to the main body frame 4, and the hall manager's inspection work. Can be facilitated.

In addition, when the direct light from the LED is irradiated to the part where the worker such as the hall manager can perform the work as described above, the substrate on which such the LED is mounted It is preferable that the mounting surface is a dark color (for example, green or black). When a dark-colored mounting surface is used, the light is not easily reflected by the dark-colored mounting surface, so that the direct light from the LED does not diffuse so much, and it is pinpoint to the part where the direct light from the LED is irradiated. It becomes possible to irradiate light. As a result, when, for example, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at positions where the direct light from the LED can be received, the direct light from the LED is pinpointed. Due to the difference in brightness from the peripheral portion, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 can be clearly seen.

(Regarding the adjustment of the amount of light in the light emitting area provided on the back side of the pachinko machine)
There are various hall environments in which the island equipment is provided. For example, it is conceivable that the inside of the island equipment is separately brightened regardless of the brightness of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration for brightening the back surface side, but there is a possibility that it is not necessary to brighten the back surface side. In addition, although the inside of the island facility is dark, if the number of pachinko machines 1 that brighten the back side as a game machine installed in the island facility is small, only the back side is brightened with normal brightness. Then, it may not be possible to brighten the inside of the island facility sufficiently. Therefore, an example in which the brightness of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted according to the hall environment will be described below.

The light emitting decoration of this example includes an LED capable of emitting light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 and an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, for these LEDs, the amount of light is gradually increased by performing a light amount adjusting operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to adjust. For example, it is possible to adjust the stage of the LED light amount from 1 (minimum light amount) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light amount), and the larger the stage, the larger the LED light amount. .. That is, the LED of the light emitting decoration body is configured so that the light is directed toward the rear side (back side) of the pachinko machine 1 to brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the amount of light of the LED can be adjusted. Therefore, the brightness of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed. For example, when the inside of the island facility is a bright hall environment, a worker such as a hall manager may darken the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by adjusting so that the amount of LED light is reduced. When the inside of the island facility is a dark hall environment, a worker such as a hall manager may brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by adjusting so that the amount of LED light increases. By making it possible to adjust the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the hall environment in this way, when the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the visibility of the part to be maintained becomes good. The efficiency of visual work on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In the above, the brightness of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by making the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decoration body adjustable, and the degree of freedom of the visual recognition mode with respect to the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. However, assuming that the amount of LED light is adjusted collectively for all the light emitting decorations provided on the front side of the game board 5, for example, when the amount of LED light of all the light emitting decorations is reduced, , The front side of the pachinko machine 1 becomes too dark, and the original effect of using the light emitting decoration (such as attracting customers) may be lost while the worker is working during the hall business. Further, even when the operator reduces the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decoration and neglects to return the amount of light of the LED after the work is completed, the original effect of using the light emitting decoration is lowered. There is a possibility that it will end up. In this regard, in this example, among the light emitting decorations for decorative purposes provided on the front side of the game board 5, the back top front rotation decoration body 3410, the back top front decoration body 3421, the back top rear decoration body 3451, and the back Since the rear movable decorative body 3110 and the like also have a role of brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the LED light intensity is adjusted by the light intensity adjustment operation. Of these, the front surface of the game board 5 is used. Among the light emitting decorations for decorative purposes provided on the side, the light emitting decoration having the first prize opening decoration substrate 2420 for emitting and decorating the first prize opening 2005 is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It does not have the role of brightening the light, and is considered to be a light emitting decoration that emphasizes the purpose of attracting customers and brightens it, and is not subject to the adjustment of the LED light intensity by the light intensity adjustment operation. That is, among the light emitting decorations for the purpose of decoration, at least the light emitting decorations having a role of brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 are targeted for adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjusting operation. As a result, even if the amount of LED light of the light emitting decoration is adjusted and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened, for example, the brightness of the light emitting decoration provided on the front side of the game board 5 for the purpose of attracting customers The purpose of attracting customers can be maintained well without darkening.

The light intensity adjustment operation of the LED of the light emitting decoration can be performed in either the standby state in which the symbol is not variablely displayed or the variable display in which the symbol is variablely displayed. Further, in this example, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 are used to enable the player to perform the light amount adjustment operation. On the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, an operation unit may be separately provided so that the hall manager can perform the light intensity adjusting operation. At this time, the adjustment target of the LED light amount by the light amount adjustment operation for the operation unit for the hall manager is the same as the adjustment target of the LED light amount by the light amount adjustment operation for the operation unit for the player. In addition, even if the light amount adjustment operation for the operation unit for the player is adjusted to the minimum light amount, the light amount cannot be reduced to zero and the LED cannot be completely turned off, but for the operation unit for the hall manager. Regarding the light amount adjustment operation, when the light amount is adjusted to the minimum amount, the light amount may be set to zero and the LED may be completely turned off.

(About the visibility of the wiring provided on the side of the pachinko machine)
Further, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back surface side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting the various substrates are provided. Since the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration that brightens the back surface side by using the light from the light emitting decoration provided on the game board 5, the wiring exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 Is easy to check the state from the outside, but it is difficult to check the state from the outside for the wiring that is not exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to easily check the state of the wiring that is not exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 from the outside will be described below.

In this example, as light emitting decorative bodies that brighten the back surface side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and on the right side of the game board 5. Three back front right decoration units 3810 are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 310, the light emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and is a transparent portion of the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). The light emitting area L2 in the vicinity is brightened, and as shown in FIG. 311, the light emitting ornament provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and the left side surface of the back box 3010 (pachinko machine 1). The light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion (on the left side surface of the) is brightened.

Further, on the back surface of the back box 3010, an effect drive board 1720 for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 is attached in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. Has been done. The effect drive board 1720 is electrically connected to the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like by a plurality of wirings, and these wirings are along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010. I tried to arrange it like this. In this regard, the light emitting ornament provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and provides a light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is irradiated so as to make it brighter, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the state of the wiring along the right side surface inside the back box 3010. Similarly, the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and displays the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is irradiated so as to make it brighter, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the state of the wiring along the left side surface inside the back box 3010. For example, if the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. do not operate normally, the wiring along the left side surface or right side surface inside the back box 3010 may be broken or disconnected from the connection terminal. However, by irradiating light so as to brighten the left side surface and the right side surface, the visibility of the wiring from the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, and the wiring condition can be confirmed. Efficiency can be improved.

Further, in a state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear on the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 is a portion far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. Light from the outside (light from the hall) can easily reach the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1 and can be visually recognized brightly, whereas the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1 which is a part close to the open axis of the main body frame 4 However, the light from the outside (the light of the hall) is difficult to reach, and it cannot be visually recognized brightly. For this reason, when the back surface side or the side surface side is not brightened as in the conventional game machine, the wiring is arranged near the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1 which is a part close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. It was especially difficult to check the condition of the wiring when it became necessary to do so. In this regard, in this example, the light is irradiated so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010, and the wiring that needs to be arranged near the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is , It was arranged along the right side surface inside the back box 3010. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is not possible to visually recognize the state of the wiring along the right side surface inside the back box 3010.

In this example, as the wiring along the side surface inside the back box 3010, the wiring for connecting the effect drive board 1720, the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like is mentioned, but other than that. In addition, for example, the wiring may be connected to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. For example, the main control board 1310 outputs information about the game to the outside (hall computer) via an external terminal board 558 connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring. It is said. At this time, if the wiring connecting the main control board 1310 and the external terminal board 558 is illegally performed, the information related to the game cannot be normally grasped from the outside (hall computer), and the pachinko machine 1 A situation arises in which fraud is likely to occur. That is, among the various wirings, the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 can be said to be of high importance in advancing the game. In this regard, by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with light so as to brighten the side surface, the visibility of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is improved, and such wiring is illegally performed. Can be prevented.

Further, with respect to the wiring along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010, a plurality of wirings are bundled by a hook portion integrally formed with the back box 3010 and a bundling wire. These hook portions and bundled wires are formed of a translucent member, and are provided at positions that can be visually recognized through the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010. As a result, light is irradiated so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010. At that time, the hook portion and the bundled wire itself can be brightened so that the state of the wiring can be visually recognized. Further, when irradiating light so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010. In addition, it does not hinder the progress of light and can prevent the brightness of such a light emitting region from decreasing.

Further, regarding the wiring along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010, a plurality of wirings are provided so that the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010 are not blocked by a plurality of wirings. Wiring is provided so as to be superimposed or bundled in the vertical direction on the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010. For example, if a plurality of wires are provided so as to be parallel to the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010, the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010 are blocked, and the left side of the back box 3010. It is difficult to maintain the brightness of the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion of the surface and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion of the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1), but the back box 3010 By providing a plurality of wirings so as not to block the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(About the change in the visual mode of the light emitting area when the state changes)
In addition, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island equipment and the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island equipment Even if an abnormality occurs, it is difficult to notice the occurrence of the abnormality because the front side of the pachinko machine 1 in which the abnormality has occurred cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, an example in which the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be recognized even from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, as the light emitting decorative body, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, and the back upper movable decorative body 3110 are provided in the upper part of the game board 5. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. In addition, with regard to these light emitting decorations, if some abnormality occurs such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibrations and the game cannot be played, the light emitting decoration is used until the abnormality is resolved. The LED provided on the body is controlled to blink. Then, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting region that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration, a light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). ), A light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) were provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decoration was controlled to blink. At that time, it was decided that these light emitting areas would blink. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island equipment, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island equipment can be compared. When an abnormality occurs, the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 blinks, so that the occurrence of the abnormality can be recognized through the inside of the island facility. Become. That is, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, it is possible to detect an abnormality with respect to another pachinko machine 1 in the same island equipment at an early stage through the inside of the island equipment, and by extension, It is possible to prevent fraudulent activity against the other pachinko machine 1.

Further, with respect to the LED of the light emitting decoration body, the light amount can be adjusted stepwise by performing a light amount adjusting operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. It is possible. For example, it is possible to adjust the stage of the LED light amount from 1 (minimum light amount) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light amount), and the larger the stage, the larger the LED light amount. .. As described above in detail, the brightness of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by making the amount of light of the LED adjustable for the LED of the light emitting decoration body. However, if the LED of the light emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to blink and control with an adjusted amount of light when some abnormality occurs such as detecting fraud due to a magnet or vibration, the LED is configured to blink. When the adjusted amount of light was dimmed, the occurrence of an abnormality might not be noticed from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. Further, even when the operator reduces the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decoration and neglects to return the amount of light of the LED after the work is completed, the amount of light of the LED is small and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is used. Then, I sometimes did not notice the occurrence of the abnormality. In this regard, in this example, during the period when some abnormality occurs such as detecting fraud due to a magnet or vibration and the game cannot be performed, the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 The adjustment is disabled, and the LED is controlled to blink at a predetermined amount of light (for example, step 5 which is the upper limit of the amount of light that can be adjusted in the normal state). As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area does not become too dark when the light emitting region that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration blinks. That is, even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the occurrence of the abnormality is not noticed, the abnormality can be reliably detected, and by extension, the other pachinko machine 1 is cheated. Can be prevented.

Similarly, with respect to the light emitting decoration, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, the LED provided in the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink until the main body frame 4 is closed. I have to. Then, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting region that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration, a light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). ), A light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) were provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decoration was controlled to blink. At that time, it was decided that these light emitting areas would blink. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island facility and the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is open for maintenance, the main body of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility Even if the fraudster opens the frame 4 illegally, it is difficult to notice the illegally opened act because the front side of the illegally opened pachinko machine 1 cannot be seen. However, in this example, when the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is illegally opened by a fraudster, it can be brightened by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1. By blinking the light emitting area, it becomes possible to recognize an illegally opened act through the inside of the island facility. That is, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, the act of illegally opening the pachinko machine 1 to another pachinko machine 1 in the same island facility is discovered at an early stage through the inside of the island facility. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the other pachinko machine 1.

Regarding the light emitting decorative body, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, a certain period of time elapses not only until the main body frame 4 is closed but also after the main body frame 4 is closed. Until this is done, the blinking control of the LED provided on the light emitting decoration may be continued. As a result, when the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is illegally opened by a fraudster, even if the opening is short, the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 The blinking of the light emitting area, which can be brightened by the body, will continue for a certain period of time, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation where an illegally opened act is overlooked through the inside of the island facility.

Further, regarding the light emitting decoration, when the state shifts to the standby state in which the symbol change is not performed, the amount of light of the LED provided in the light emitting decoration is increased until the symbol change is started and the standby state ends. I am trying to control the decrease. Then, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting region that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration, a light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). ), A light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) are provided to reduce the amount of light of the LED provided on the light emitting decoration. It was decided that these light emitting regions would become dark when controlled. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island facility and the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is open for maintenance, the front surface of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility. Since the side cannot see it, it is difficult to grasp whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in the game. However, in this example, when the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility shifts to the standby state, the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 is darkened. , It becomes possible to grasp whether or not the game is being played through the inside of the island facility. That is, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, it is possible to grasp whether or not another pachinko machine 1 in the same island facility is playing through the inside of the island facility. , It is possible to determine whether it is necessary to strengthen monitoring so that fraud is not performed during the standby state.

(Regarding the change in the visual mode of the light emitting area during operation of the light emitting decoration)
Further, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be seen, so that the movable pachinko machine 1 is provided on the front side. It is difficult to see if the body works properly. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally even from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, as a light emitting decorative body that brightens the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper A rear decorative body 3451 and a back rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided, and the light emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. doing. Of these, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decoration body 3451, and the back-up rear movable decoration body 3110 can move from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. .. Then, in a state where the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, the back-up rear decoration 3451, and the back-back movable decoration 3110 are moved to the appearance positions, the light from the LEDs of these light emitting decorations is transparent to the tank rail 553. It was prevented from reaching the light emitting region L1 near the site. In particular, the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back-up rear decoration body 3451 is prevented from reaching the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. On the other hand, with respect to the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, and the back upper movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position. As a result, the light is not blocked because it is not located behind the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, and it reaches the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. That is, when the light emitting decoration that can be operated is operated among the plurality of light emitting decorations, the brightness in the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 changes and is visually recognized from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The visual mode of the light emitting region L1 can be changed. As a result, even from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the light emitting decorative body is operating by changing the visual mode of the light emitting region L1.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initial operation of the light emitting decoration that can be operated is performed among the plurality of light emitting decorations. Specifically, the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440, the back-up and rear-rear decorative body 3451, and the back-up and rear-movable decorative body 3110 move from the retracted position to the appearance position, and then move from the appearance position to the retracted position. Repeatedly, an operation is performed to confirm that these luminescent ornaments can move to the appearance position. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operate the power switch of the power supply board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the operation of the power switch Occasionally, it was not possible to directly visually confirm whether or not the initial operation of the light emitting decoration was normally performed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and it was particularly difficult to confirm the operation. In this regard, in this example, the brightness of the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is changed according to the operation of the light emitting ornament, and the light emitting region L1 is changed even from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. By visually recognizing the change in the visual mode of the light emitting decoration, it is possible to confirm that the initial operation of the light emitting decoration is normally performed. As a result, although the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized when the power switch is operated, the visual mode of the light emitting region L1 changes from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 when the initial operation of the light emitting decoration is performed. It is only necessary to confirm whether or not the light emitting decoration is used, and the efficiency of the visual work for the initial operation of the light emitting decoration can be improved.

It should be noted that, among the plurality of light emitting decorations, the brightness in the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is changed when the light emitting decoration that can be operated is operated. It is preferable to configure the light emitting decoration so that the change in brightness becomes large depending on whether the light emitting decoration is in the retracted position or in the appearing position. For example, an LED that irradiates light toward the light emitting region L1 is mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, but the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. When the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and the back-up movable decoration body 3110 move to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back-up front decorative board 3422 may be turned off, or the back side may be turned off. The LED itself may not be mounted on the rear surface of the upper front decorative substrate 3422. In such a configuration, when the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 located behind the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and the back-up rear movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position, the back-up The light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 does not reach the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, and the brightness of the light emitting region L1 can be dimmed. As a result, the change in brightness in the light emitting region L1 becomes large depending on whether the light emitting decoration is in the retracted position or the appearance position, and whether the light emitting decoration is operating from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. You can easily figure out whether or not.

(About the light from the back side of the production display device)
Further, the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration in which the back side is brightened by using the light from the light emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5, but the pachinko machine 1 has an effect display on the back side. Regarding the area behind the device 1600, the light from the LED of the light emitting decoration is blocked by the effect display device 1600, and it is possible that the part to be brightened on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be brightened only by using the light emitting decoration. There is sex. For example, in the area behind the effect display device 1600, if the part where the hall manager needs to work is dark, it becomes difficult to work on that part. Therefore, an example in which a predetermined portion can be brightened even in the region behind the effect display device 1600 on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

First, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 312. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an opening provided on the back surface side of the effect display device. As shown in FIG. 312, the effect display device 1600 is provided so as to close a box-shaped box body 1611 (metal frame) having openings in the front and rear and an opening on the front side of the box body 1611 to display a predetermined image. A transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 1613 provided behind the liquid crystal panel 1612 and capable of irradiating light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612, and provided below the light guide plate 1613. A light emitting substrate 1615 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the light guide plate 1613 are mounted, and a light emitting substrate 1615 is provided behind the light guide plate 1613 so as to close an opening on the rear side of the box body 1611. It is provided with a metal back panel 1614 (metal back cover) capable of blocking light from the light plate 1613 to the rear. Further, although not shown, the effect display device 1600 includes a panel drive substrate for driving the liquid crystal panel 1612.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted side by side on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 can irradiate light toward the light guide plate 1613 located above the light emitting substrate 1615. Further, the light guide plate 1613 can receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 and can emit light on the front side of the light guide plate 1613, and is located in front of the light guide plate 1613. It is possible to irradiate light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, the light emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components. A coating film made of white solder resist is capable of reflecting light with high reflectance. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, on the light emitting substrate 1615, a connector 1615a for electrically connecting to the effect drive substrate 1720 is mounted on the upper surface thereof. The connector 1615a is an opaque member. The connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 is connected to the light emitting board 1615 by connecting to the connector on the wiring side where the terminal surface faces the rear and the wiring from the effect driving board 1720 is bundled. It can be electrically connected to the drive board 1720. As a result, the effect drive board 1720 can control whether or not the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 are lit, and adjust the brightness.

The light guide plate 1613 is configured to receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 so that the front side of the light guide plate 1613 strongly emits light, but only on the front side of the light guide plate 1613. However, the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 are also configured to emit weak light. As described above, the light emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components. The light emission is enhanced not only on the front side of the light plate 1613 but also on the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613.

The back panel 1614 is configured to block light rearward from the light guide plate 1613 that receives light from a plurality of LEDs and emits light, but the back panel 1614 receives light from the light guide plate 1613. A plurality of openings that can be passed through are intentionally provided at predetermined positions. As a result, the light from the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives the light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted from the plurality of openings toward the rear (rear of the effect display device 1600). It is possible.

Specifically, visually recognizing from the rear of the effect display device 1600, the openings A of the back panel 1614 are provided at the lower left of the back panel 1614, and two openings B are provided slightly closer to the center on the right side of the back panel 1614. The opening C is provided on the right side along the right end of the back panel 1614, and the opening D is provided on the upper side along the upper end of the back panel 1614.

First, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615. Further, the opening A is one size larger than the connector 1615a. As a result, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 can be visually recognized from the opening A. Then, since the light from the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives the light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted from the opening A, the light emitting region L5 around the connector 1615a is brightened. It can be visually recognized. As a result, the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 needs to be connected to the connector 1615a on the wiring side where the wiring from the effect drive board 1720 is bundled, but the light emitting region L5 around the connector 1615a By making the display bright, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the connector on the wiring side is normally connected, and it is possible to facilitate the inspection work of the hall manager.

By the way, although the light emitting board 1615 is provided with a plurality of LEDs, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 can be visually recognized from the opening A, whereas all of the plurality of LEDs can be visually recognized. It is configured to be impossible. That is, among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting board 1615, even the LED closest to the opening A is not provided at a position where it can be visually recognized from the opening A. For example, when light from some of the plurality of LEDs is directly irradiated through the opening A, when the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 is operated. The direct light from the LED enters the operator's eyes, making it difficult to perform the work. On the other hand, since the light from the plurality of LEDs is only indirectly emitted through the opening A, it becomes difficult to work on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615. Can be prevented. Similarly, the openings B to D of the back panel 1614 are configured so that none of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 can be seen from the openings B to D.

Two openings B of the back panel 1614 are provided side by side at a position slightly closer to the center than the opening C on the right side of the back panel 1614 when viewed from the rear of the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front. However, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the rear side of the game board 5 is attached. A back cover 640 is provided so as to cover the above. The back cover 640 is visible from the rear of the pachinko machine 1 and can be opened and closed with the left side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as an axis. On the right side of the back cover 640, two operation units 640a are provided vertically separated so that the operator can operate them, while the main body frame 4 corresponds to each of the two operation units 640a. Two attachment / detachment portions are provided at the positions where the two operation portions 640a can be attached / detached. By attaching / detaching the operation portion 640a to the attachment / detachment portion, the back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame 4. Can be opened and closed. The back cover 640 (operating portion 640a) and the detachable portion are both transparent or translucent members.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at positions corresponding to the rear of the opening B of the back panel 1614 (rear of the effect display device 1600). ing. That is, since the light from the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives the light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted from the opening B, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 Is provided at a position where it can receive such light. As a result, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 can receive the light from the opening B and make the light emitting region L6 in the vicinity of the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 brightly visible. When working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4, but the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 And by making the light emitting area L6 near the detachable part brightly visible, the operator can easily confirm the object to be operated, and the back cover 640 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 4, and the hall manager. The inspection work can be facilitated.

Further, the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 located on the right side of the outer frame 2 as axes, visually recognizable from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. That is, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are provided at positions close to the open shaft of the main body frame 4. A plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side on the game island, and the inside of the game island is darkened in a closed space. Then, in a state where the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, light from the outside (light of the hall) reaches the portion of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy and brightly visible, it is difficult for external light (hole light) to reach the part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 that is close to the open axis of the main body frame 4, and it is brightly visible. Can not do it. In this regard, the operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are located on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 near the opening axis of the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2. Even if it is, it is difficult for the light from the outside (the light of the hall) to reach, but by receiving the light from the opening B, the operation portion 640a of the back cover 640 and the light emitting region L6 near the detachable portion can be visually recognized brightly. Can be done.

The opening C of the back panel 1614 is provided on the right side portion along the right end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from the rear of the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is behind the opening C. A payout unit 560 is provided at the position. The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, the lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the board unit to the 620 side is provided, but behind the opening C, the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit of the payout units 560 are provided. 600 is located. Of the payout units 560, at least the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are transparent members.

Since the opening C is irradiated with light from the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives light from a plurality of LEDs and emits light, the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout units 560, The light emitting region L7 near the payout device 580 and the upper full tank path unit 600 can be visually recognized brightly. As a result, in the payout unit 560, the ball may be clogged when the game ball B is guided downward from the tank rail 553. However, by making the light emitting region L7 in the vicinity of the payout unit 560 brightly visible, the game is played. It is possible to easily check whether or not a ball clogging has occurred in the passage for guiding the ball B, and when a ball clogging occurs, the ball clogging can be easily removed, and an inspection by the hall manager can be performed. The work can be facilitated.

The opening D of the back panel 1614 is provided on the upper side so as to be visible from the rear of the effect display device 1600 and along the upper end of the back panel 1614. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is above and behind the opening C. A tank rail 553 is provided at such a position. The tank rail 553 uses a transparent member, and can allow light to pass through with high transmittance. Since the light from the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that emits light by receiving the light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening D, the light emitting region near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is emitted. L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

As described in detail above, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5 is abnormal when some kind of abnormality occurs, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibration, and the game cannot be played. The LED provided in the light emitting decoration body is controlled to blink until the problem is solved. That is, of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting region that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). ), A light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) of the back box 3010 are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decoration body is controlled to blink. As a result, these light emitting areas are supposed to blink.

In addition, if some abnormality occurs, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibration, and the game cannot be played, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the outer frame 3 will be affected. It may be necessary to open the main body frame 4 and perform maintenance on the members provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, in order to perform maintenance on various boards arranged inside the back cover 640, it is necessary to operate the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4. In some cases, a ball clogging may occur in the payout unit 560, and it may be necessary to remove the ball clogging. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LED provided on the light emitting board 1615 of the effect display device 1600 is configured to blink and be controlled in the same manner as the LED provided on the light emitting decoration body. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the work object. In this regard, in this example, even if some abnormality occurs in the effect display device 1600, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibrations, and the game cannot be played, the effect display device 1600 The LED provided on the light emitting board 1615 is not controlled to blink, but is constantly lit in the same manner as in the normal state. That is, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting region capable of receiving light from the opening of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 and brightening the light, the periphery of the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. The light emitting region L5, the operating portion 640a of the back cover 640, the light emitting region L6 near the detachable portion, the light emitting region L7 near the payout unit 560, and the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 are provided. By constantly controlling the lighting of the LEDs provided on the light emitting board 1615 of the device 1660 at the time of appearance as in the normal state, the visibility of these light emitting regions is not changed. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to blink, but the parts that require high maintenance are controlled to be constantly lit as in normal times. By providing the light emitting region, the visibility does not change, and the efficiency of maintenance work at the time of abnormality on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

(About the visibility of the gap between the control boards provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1)
Further, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back surface side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting the various substrates are provided. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration in which the back surface side is brightened by using the light emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5 and the light from the opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600. If all the areas on the back side of the machine 1 are brightened, it will be easier for the hall manager to perform maintenance work in the island facility, but on the other hand, for various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it easier for fraudsters to cheat. Therefore, an example in which it is difficult for a fraudster to cheat on various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 while being configured to brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below. ..

As shown in FIG. 309, as the light emitting decorative body for brightening the back surface side and the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the back upper rear A decorative body 3451 and a back-rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided, and on the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right. A decorative unit 3810 is provided. Then, the light emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 is , The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear, the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear, and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened.

Further, as a characteristic configuration for brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, an opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600 can be mentioned. Specifically, an opening A is provided on the lower left side of the back panel 1614, an opening B is provided slightly closer to the center on the right side of the back panel 1614, and an opening C is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614. An opening D is provided on the upper side of the back panel 1614. Then, the light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting region L5 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615, and the light from the opening B operates the back cover 640. The light emitting region L6 near the portion 640a and the detachable portion is brightened, the light from the opening C brightens the light emitting region L7 near the payout unit 560, and the light from the opening D is near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. The light emitting region L1 is brightened. The light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting region L6 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615, but the main control is behind the opening A. Since the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300 is located, the light from the opening A is blocked by the main control board 1310, and it is difficult to visually recognize the light emitting region L6 from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700. Pilot lamps are provided on the production drive board 1720 at positions that can be visually recognized from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The pilot lamp is a member for notifying whether or not each substrate is operating normally by the light emitting mode of the LED. Then, the light from the pilot lamp of the peripheral control board 1510 brightens the light emitting region L8 near the pilot lamp, and the light from the pilot lamp of the effect drive board 1720 brightens the light emitting region L9 near the pilot lamp. However, the light from the pilot lamp of the main control board 1310 brightens the light emitting region L10 in the vicinity of the pilot lamp. That is, these configurations can also be mentioned as configurations for brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

The light emitting region described above is the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the drive board unit 1700 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is provided around the control board group including the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720. That is, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, except for the control board group attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the light emitting region is configured to be bright. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the inside thereof is blocked and darkened, but by brightening the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the island facility can be brightened.

On the other hand, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700. The light emitting region is not provided in the region where the control board group including the production drive board 1720 is provided. That is, on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the gap between the control boards constituting the control board group (the gap between the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel. The gap between the relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720) is configured to be dark. The panel relay board 1710 is a board that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and is connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring and is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring. Then, such wiring is arranged in the gap between the control boards constituting the control board group. Of these, since the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, if the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is fraudulent, the fraudster will benefit. There is a problem that an unreasonable situation occurs. In this respect, while brightening the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, darkening the gap between the control boards constituting the control board group makes it difficult to visually recognize the wiring arranged in the gap, which is the main reason. It is possible to prevent the wiring and the like connected to the control board 1310 from being illegally performed.

(Visibility for the composition of metal powder countermeasures)
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553a formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Can be avoided with reference to FIGS. 309 and 313. FIG. 313 is an enlarged schematic view showing a part of the cross section cut along the line CC of FIG. 99 (a), and shows an outline of the configuration of measures against metal powder.

In the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 into the tank rail 553, the metal powder is peeled off from the game ball B and falls due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adheres to the main guide portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is obstructed, so that the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B to the payout device 580, and the payout of the game ball B is stopped.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 309, in this example, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Has been done. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B naturally falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa, so that the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. As a result, the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a, and a cotton rod is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by a staff member such as a clerk in the game hall, which is caused by wear of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a. By performing the work of removing the metal powder, the metal powder can be removed from the main induction portion 553a.

By the way, metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged below the tank rail 553. Then, an electrical trouble occurs, which causes a malfunction in the peripheral control unit 1500 or a malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with an IC such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described later is provided with an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs becomes smaller, the pin spacing of the various connectors 1615a and the special connector 1615a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 becomes narrower, and the number of connectors 1615a on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, so that the various connectors 1615a Since the distance between the connectors 1615a and the special connector 1615a is also narrowed, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

First, as shown in FIG. 313, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, the deviation toward the rear (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). It is arranged so that it is offset by the distance dimension of.

As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 on which the tank rail 551 is arranged is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that bends downward in accordance with the direction). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 313, the first eaves portion 551da extending to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the lower end portion of the top plate portion is substantially on the same surface as the rear surface of the tank rail 553. .. Further, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled on the main body frame 4, the upper end portion of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da.

As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553a can be received and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. There is. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553a by the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. By suppressing the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen toward the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553a and entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the game is played. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the sphere B adhering to the peripheral control substrate 1510.

Although details have been described above, as shown in FIG. 309, in this example, as a light emitting decorative body that brightens the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back upper front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back upper front decoration The body 3421, the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440, the back-up rear decoration 3451, and the back-back movable decoration 3110 are provided, and the light emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is brightened. That is, since the light from the LEDs of these light emitting decorations is emitted toward the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is generated by the tank rail 553. When the tank rail 553, which is a transparent member, is visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when it is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the above, the metal powder emerges like a black dot, and the visibility to the metal powder is good. It has become a thing. As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not metal powder is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and the work of removing the metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the main guide portion 553a is also efficient. It can be carried out.

Further, the light emitting region L1 also includes the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below the main guidance portion 553a. The first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 630 are transparent members. That is, since the light from the LED of the light emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is emitted toward the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a in the light emitting region L1, the cutout portion 553aa is formed. When the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the main guide portion 553a adheres to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below, a transparent member is formed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. When the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is visually recognized, the metal powder emerges like a black dot, and the visibility to the metal powder is good. As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not metal powder is attached to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, and also for the work of removing the metal powder from the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. , Can be done efficiently.

Regarding the above, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the closed pachinko machine 1 By opening the main frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island equipment, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B in the closed pachinko machine 1 is generated by the tank rail 553. It can be easily confirmed whether or not it is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the above and the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. The light from the LEDs of the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451, and the back-back movable decoration body 3110 of the pachinko machine 1 is a tank. Although the light is emitted toward the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the rail 553, it is not desirable that the LED light source is directly viewed during the maintenance of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, so the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 The light from the LED is configured so that the light source of the LED is indirect light that is not directly viewed.

Further, when removing the metal powder from the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a after confirming the adhesion of the metal powder, the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 Light emitting ornaments (back-up front rotating decoration 3410 and back-up front decoration 3421, back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 and back-up rear decoration 3451, back-back movable) that brighten the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the It is also possible that the light from the decorative body 3110) interferes with the work of removing it. Therefore, after confirming the adhesion of metal powder by opening the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 from which the metal powder is to be removed is opened, the rear of the pachinko machine 1 is opened. Light emitting decorative body (back top front rotating decoration body 3410 and back top front decoration body 3421, back top rear rotating decoration body 3440 and back top rear decoration body 3451) that brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. , The LED of the movable decorative body 3110) may be turned off so as not to brighten the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, not only the light emitting decorative body that brightens the light emitting region L1 but also the LED light that may interfere with the work of removing the metal powder may be turned off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that brightens the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 from hindering the work of removing the metal powder.

However, depending on the hall environment, it may be preferable that the hall itself is dark and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright when maintaining the pachinko machine 1 such as removing metal powder. Therefore, in a state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, a light emitting decorative body (back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and back-up front rotating decorative body 3410) that optionally brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. A light emission start switch may be provided so that the LEDs of the back-up front decorative body 3421, the back-up rear rotating decoration body 3440, and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, and the back-up movable decoration body 3110) can be started to emit light. Such a light emitting start switch is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the main body frame 4 is open. As a result, the hall manager can freely operate whether or not to start the light emission of the LED that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 in the state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, and adjusts to the hall environment. be able to.

Further, the tank rail 553 is molded of a transparent material (polycarbonate resin or the like), and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if ball clogging (ball gall) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553, so that the game board 5 can be visually recognized. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, and belt can be confirmed with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the above-mentioned phase can be confirmed. It can produce the same effect as the effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back cover 640 is in contact with the first eaves portion 551da so as to cover at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. Since it extends downward from the top plate, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa and adhered to the first ridge portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a When the metal powder falls from the first ridge portion 551da of 551a, this metal powder is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The metal powder of the game ball B that falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the peripheral control unit 1500, and eventually the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a covers the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the entry into the body 1501 and suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 640 of the payout base 551 are the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notches 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves or cover that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa, the main part is passed through the notch portion 553aa not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to by the first eaves portion 551da, and the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553a. The metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553aa is the peripheral control unit. It is possible to suppress the entry into the cover body 1501 of the 1500 and to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control substrate 1510.

In the above example, in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eaves 551da, but the upper end of the back cover 640 and the first eaves. The portion 551da may be arranged apart from the portion 551da. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553a in cooperation with the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da enters the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The arrangement form of the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da does not matter as long as it suppresses entry.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 (rear side) is displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in this embodiment, about 2 minutes of the diameter of the game ball B). Due to the arrangement (that is, the structure is such that the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly under the notch 553aa), the game ball B from the tank rail 553 is arranged. It is effective as a countermeasure against metal powder that can prevent electrical troubles caused by metal powder.

Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, whereas the upper side and the left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later). Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, the metal powder of the game ball B temporarily adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). However, it is possible to make it difficult to invade the inside of the cover body 1501.

Of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, one or a combination of ventilation holes A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. .. Even with this configuration, foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. It is possible to prevent intrusion. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling on the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls and invades the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, and the foreign matter falls on various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability that trouble will occur is high.

When the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the heat dissipation function is supplemented by increasing the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on the other surfaces or expanding the area of the ventilation holes 1501. You may. As a result, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles such as thermal runaway.

Further, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 is in a substantially horizontal state. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553a and adheres to the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the metal powder can be fastened to the upper surface of the cover body 1501. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside of the cover body 1501. A part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be tilted as long as the metal powder of the game ball B is not dropped toward the ventilation hole 1501az formed in the cover body 1501.

Further, the first eaves member 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 may be attached to the top plate portion 551a as a separate member (another structural component).

Further, when the upper portion or the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is covered by the first eaves portion 551da and / and the back cover 640 of the top plate portion 551a, or to the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. When the plurality of cutout portions 553aa and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a are provided. When it is unlikely that the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is one of the upper surfaces of the cover body 1501 in the state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1. Ventilation holes 1501az may be provided in a portion (for example, a corner portion of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is closed, but a ventilation hole 1501az is formed in a part of the portion).

Further, the present technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. As compared with the conventional pachinko machine, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the notch portion 553a is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a corner of the cover body 1501 and most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 are closed, but a ventilation hole 1501az is provided for a part of the cover body 1501. Those provided with ventilation holes 1501az in (formed, etc.) also fall under this technical idea.

Further, a plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Further, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes, which will be described later, provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 along the lower side thereof, and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switch. The volume control holes are formed, and the two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501. The volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. Further, in a state where the liquid crystal output board described later is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is a shield plate in which a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 are accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The gaps formed in the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501) are taken in through a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the 1540. A volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a gap formed in the volume control hole formed in the cover body 1501, two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board, and two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. It will be taken in through the hole and the gap formed in.

Incidentally, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500, heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is affected by the flow of air and heads toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. Various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that are attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 due to electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the sucked metal powder. Etc. will cause a defect (failure).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), a game ball is formed by forming a first eaves portion 551da along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500. It can be configured to have a function as an eave to prevent heavy powder called metal powder of B from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notched portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. However, one notch, a hole, or a groove may be formed in the ball passage through which the game ball B rolls, as in the case of the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guidance unit 570 having one guidance passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, the metal powder of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a is introduced from the guidance passage 570a. Notches, holes, or grooves that can be removed to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 of the induction unit 570. A payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guidance unit 570. The payout device 580 has a board and the like on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted, and the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630. , The payout control board 633, the interface board 635, and the like, and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when a notch, a hole, or a groove is formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, the hole, or the groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder of B from adhering to various substrates arranged below the induction unit 570. Therefore, a canopy-shaped member can be formed so as to project rearward along the upper side of the rear lid 582 of the payout device 580, and a notch formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 can be formed. , The position of the hole or groove and the position of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the payout device 580 is mounted can be configured by shifting, and both can be adopted and configured. You can also. Further, eaves-shaped members are formed so as to project rearward along the upper sides of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like. The positions of the notches, holes, or grooves formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 and the positions of the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured. It can be configured by shifting it, or it can be configured by adopting both.

[Dot matrix display]
Next, a substrate on which an LED used as a display unit having an important function is mounted will be described. The display unit having an important function in this example is information related to the interests of the player (for example, special lottery result, type of big hit or small hit, specific big hit (probability variable big hit, 15R big hit, etc.), high probability. Indicates whether or not state control is being executed, whether or not time saving control is being executed, etc.). In addition to the above, an LED that displays information related to the interests of players and game stores and a display unit that has a board that mounts an LED that displays important information related to the progress of the game have important functions. It may be a display unit to have.

As shown in FIG. 314, in this example, a dot matrix display 7000 is provided as a display unit having an important function in place of the back-up effect unit 3400. Further, as shown in FIG. 315 (A), the dot matrix display 7000 includes a case 7100 formed of a colored opaque (white in this example) resin or the like having no translucency, and a substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100. A plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the board 7200, a connector 7002 mounted on the back surface (rear surface: non-LED mounting surface) of the board 7200, and the front side of the case 7100. The film 7300 and the like. The plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the surface of the substrate 7200 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is directly mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200. .. The colored opaque resin may be a resin such as black, gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, or yellow, in addition to white.

Further, the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 are each divided into separate systems, and the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually and independently controlled to emit light. As a result, various characters, symbols, figures, and the like can be displayed by causing a predetermined LED 7001 out of a plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 to emit light. In addition, a light emitting decorative body (back bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310, back top rear rotating decoration body 3440, back back left rotating decoration body 3510, back) that is provided with a substrate on which an LED is mounted and controls light emission in relation to the above fluctuation effect. A predetermined number (rear right rotating decoration body 3610, back rear movable decoration body 3110, back upper front rotating decoration body 3410, back upper front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) Light emission is controlled for each group consisting of two or more LEDs, and by causing a plurality of LEDs included in this group to emit light, a specific area of the light emitting decoration (the entire light emitting decoration may be used). , It may be a part) is designed to emit surface light. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, each of a plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled to emit light based on the lottery results of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and predetermined characters are specified. And symbols, figures, etc. are displayed.

Further, a translucent film 7300, which is partially translucent (in this example, a cloudy frosted glass), is attached to the surface of the dot matrix display 7000 (the surface of the surface cover portion 7110 described later). The lighting state of the LED 7001 is visually recognized via the film 7300. Instead of attaching the film 7300 to the front side of the dot matrix display 7000, the film can be attached to the surface of another decorative member or printed on the surface of another decorative member, and the dots behind the decorative member can be printed. A matrix display 7000 may be arranged so that the lighting state of the LED 7001 can be visually recognized via another decorative member. Further, although the film 7300 may not be provided on the front side of the dot matrix display 7000, the light emitted from the LED 7001 is made visible through the film 7300 so that the light source LED 7001 is not directly visible. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzling, and since the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually surface-emitting by the film 7300, the light source can be made inconspicuous when the plurality of LEDs 7001 emit light.

As described above, in this example, the LED mounted on the substrate on which the LED provided on the light emitting resist and controlling the light emission in relation to the variation effect to surface-emit a specific area of the light emitting resist is used. A white resist solution with the highest reflectance is applied to increase the efficiency with which light is reflected on the front surface of the substrate (LED mounting surface) to improve brightness, and a white coating film (solid white resist, white) is applied. A resist layer) is formed (white resist treatment is performed). On the other hand, a black resist solution having the lowest reflectance is applied to the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 is provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 of this example and causes a plurality of LEDs 7001 to individually surface-emit, and is black. A coating film (solid black resist, black resist layer) is formed (black resist treatment is performed). As a result, although the efficiency with which the light emitted by the dot matrix display 7000 is reflected on the front surface (LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 is reduced, the light is emitted directly from the LED 7001 toward the front (LED irradiation direction, front direction of the substrate 7200). Interference between the light and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and irradiating forward is suppressed so that the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 can be clearly seen. As described above, in this example, in order to increase the reflectance of the substrate on which the LEDs are mounted, a white resist process is usually performed to increase the brightness, but a plurality of LEDs are individually independently controlled to emit light. The substrate on which a plurality of LEDs having important functions are mounted, in this example, the substrate 7200 on which the LED 7001 of the dot matrix display 7000 is mounted, has a coating film having a color different from that of other substrates on which the LEDs are mounted. It is formed so that the role of the LED mounted on the substrate can be determined by the color of the coating film (resist) formed on the substrate. That is, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the substrate mounts an LED having an important function.

As described above, in this example, the substrate for which the brightness of the light emitting decoration is desired to be improved, such as the substrate provided for the light emitting decoration which controls the light emission of a plurality of LEDs for each group in relation to the fluctuation effect, is white. About a substrate 7200 in which the light emission of each of a plurality of mounted LEDs 7001 is clearly visible, such as a substrate 7200 provided in a dot matrix display 7000 that is resisted and controls the emission of a plurality of LEDs individually. Is black resisted, so the substrate provided on the light emitting decoration can increase the reflectance of the light emitted by the mounted LED and suppress the decrease in the brightness of the light emitting decoration when the LED emits light. It is possible to improve the effect of the variable effect executed by the display device 1600. Further, regarding the dot matrix display 7000, the reflection of light is suppressed when the plurality of LEDs 7001 emit light, and the light emitted directly from the LED 7001 toward the front interferes with the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted toward the front. In addition to being able to suppress it, the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be clearly visually recognized by comparing with the LED mounting surface on which the black coating film is formed. In addition, a substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, which is individually controlled to emit light and displays important information related to the progress of the game (for example, a special lottery result), and a predetermined number of LED units (a group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs). The light emission is controlled at every) and does not display important information related to the progress of the game (it may be displayed rarely), and the substrate provided on the light emitting decoration has a different purpose (a use showing a special lottery result). , LEDs mounted on the defective board by different colors of the LED mounting surface of the board for the purpose of enlivening the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 (for improving the effect of the effect, etc.) It becomes easy to determine whether or not the light emitting means such as, etc. displays important information, and the LED control unit (whether it is controlled for each predetermined number of LEDs or independently), and the game When a problem occurs in the light emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game, it becomes possible to quickly respond to the problem, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

In the above example, as the substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000, a black resist liquid is applied to form a black coating film, but the case of the dot matrix display 7000 is shown. As long as the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 provided in the 7100 can be clearly visually recognized, the light emission is not limited to the black resist solution, and for example, a dark color such as purple, dark blue, or dark green. Even if a resist solution is applied to form a dark-colored coating (a solid dark-colored (purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.) resist, a dark-colored (purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.) resist layer) Good. However, a substrate on which a black resist solution is applied to form a black coating film has a lower reflectance than a substrate on which a dark color resist solution other than black is applied to form a dark color coating film. The light and substrate that the LED 7001 irradiates directly forward from the substrate on which the black resist solution is applied to form the black coating film than the substrate on which the dark color resist solution is applied to form the dark color coating film. Interference with the light reflected from the 7200 and irradiating forward can be suppressed, and the light emission of each LED 7001 can be clearly seen. Further, at least the dark color coating film may be formed on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 of the substrate 7200 is mounted, and the dark color on the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 is not mounted on the substrate 7200. A coating film different from the coating film (for example, a bright color coating film coated with a bright color resist solution such as white) may be formed. Further, the color of the resist treatment may be the same on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the substrate, or the resist processing color may be different between the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the substrate. Further, the coating film formed on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is not limited to the one coated with the resist solution (solid coating), and the insulating paint is silk-printed on the substrate 7200 (the coating film of the resist solution). It may be formed by silk printing (solid coating) on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 (which may be directly silk-printed on the surface of the substrate 7200 without forming a coating film of the resist solution). Good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 315 (B), the case 7100 is composed of a front surface cover portion 7110 on the front surface side of the substrate 7200 and a back surface cover portion 7120 on the back surface side of the substrate 7200, and the front surface cover portion 7110 and the back surface cover portion 7120. The substrate 7200 is sandwiched between the two and is housed inside the case 7100. Further, the surface cover portion 7110 covering the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 (front surface of the substrate 7200) has a predetermined thickness (about 5 mm in this example) and has a cylinder corresponding to each of the LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200. A through portion 7110a is formed, and the substrate 7200 is brought into close contact with the surface cover portion 7110 so that only one LED (one LED element) is arranged in the through portion 7110a, and the substrate 7200 is placed in this state. It is designed to be fixed (attached) to the surface cover portion 7110. As a result, the front surface (LED mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 is partitioned so that the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 are arranged in separate through portions 7110a, and the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 is emitted. Since leakage to the rear surface side of the other penetrating portion 7110a or the substrate 7200 is suppressed and the interference of the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be suppressed, the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 is individually emitted from the penetrating portion 7110a. The light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be easily identified individually. For example, even when the first LED and the second LED of the plurality of LEDs 7001 are made to emit different colors, it is possible to suppress the mixture of these colors and to make the emission colors of the plurality of LEDs 7001 emitted. Since the information can be individually identified, it is possible to prevent the information displayed on the dot matrix display 7000 from being transmitted to the player differently from the original information.

Further, on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, in addition to the plurality of LEDs 7001, LEDs such as an LED part number and an area indicating a position where the LEDs are arranged are located in the vicinity of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001. (Furthermore, the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED (mounting direction), and the model of the LED may be included), but the notation part that shows the attributes is white (limited to white), which is more noticeable than black. Instead, it is a light-colored (for example, yellow) paint with high reflectance, which is silk-printed on a solid black resist. Then, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is partitioned so that the silk-printed notation portion is also included in the penetrating portion 7110a. Specifically, one LED is arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a, and a notation portion which is silk-printed in the vicinity of the one LED to indicate the part number of this LED or the like is arranged ( All of the notation parts may be arranged so as to fit in the penetrating portion 7110a, or a part of the notation part may be arranged so as to fit in the penetrating part 7110a). As a result, the reflectance of the area inside the penetrating portion 7110a (the area where one LED 7001 is arranged) on the substrate 7200 by the notation portion which is silk-printed with the white paint having the highest reflectance and is arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a. It is possible to further suppress a decrease in brightness in the penetrating portion 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light, so that the light emitted by one LED 7001 can be clearly visually recognized. Further, as described above, since the black resist having the lowest reflectance is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, the low reflectance state can be maintained in the outer region of the penetrating portion 7110a. Even if the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a leaks to the outside of the penetrating portion 7110a, it is possible to prevent the light from diffusing. In this case, reduce the ratio of the notation portion to the outer region of the penetration portion 7110a in the substrate 7200 as much as possible (most of the notation portions are contained in the penetration portion 7110a and a part of the notation portion slightly protrudes outside the penetration portion 7110a. The effect of preventing the diffusion of light can be further enhanced by arranging the light in the above.

The notation portion may not be silk-printed on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100. In this case, the effect of suppressing the decrease in brightness in the penetrating portion 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light is weakened. However, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED 7001 arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a from diffusing out of the penetrating portion 7110a. In this case, the notation portion may be silk-printed on the LED non-mounting surface (back surface) on which the plurality of LEDs 7001 of the substrate 7200 is not mounted, whereby the light from the LEDs 7001 arranged in the penetration portion 7110a is outside the penetration portion 7110a. In addition to being able to prevent the LED from diffusing into the LED, it becomes easy to grasp the LED attributes such as the LED part number and the area indicating the position where the LED is arranged.

Further, of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 housed in the case 7100, the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a) is white (not limited to white, but a bright color having high reflectance (for example). The reflectance may be improved by setting (yellow) or). For example, as shown in FIG. 315 (C), a black resist solution is applied to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 to form a resist layer 7200A, and a region (penetration) corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a in the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200. The portion (the region inside the portion 7110a) may be solidly coated (silk printed) with a white paint on the resist layer 7200A to form the silk printing layer 7200B, or as shown in FIG. 315 (D). A white resist solution is applied to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 to form a resist layer 7200A, except for the portion of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the region inside the penetrating portion 7110a). The silk printing layer 7200B may be formed by solid coating (silk printing) with a black paint on the resist layer 7200A.

That is, in FIG. 315 (C), a black resist layer 7200A is formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white silk printing layer is formed in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. 7200B is formed. Further, in FIG. 315 (D), a black silk printing layer 7200B is formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a white resist layer is formed in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a. 7200A is formed. In this way, a black coating film (black resist layer 7200A, black silk printing layer 7200B) is formed around the region of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a, and corresponds to the penetrating portion 7110a. By forming a white coating film (white silk printing layer 7200B, white resist layer 7200A) in the region, a region (one LED 7001) corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is arranged. Since the reflectance of the penetrating portion 7110a (inner region) can be increased, it is possible to further suppress the decrease in the brightness inside the penetrating portion 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light so that the light emitted by one LED 7001 can be clearly seen. Since it is possible to maintain a low reflectance around the region of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a, the light from the LED 7001 temporarily arranged in the penetrating portion 7110a is outside the penetrating portion 7110a. Even if it leaks to the light, it is possible to prevent this light from diffusing. Further, in this case, the above-mentioned notation portion may not be silk-printed, or the notation portion may be silk-printed on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) on which the LED 7001 of the substrate 7200 is not mounted, or LED mounting. On the black resist layer 7200A or the black silk-printed layer 7200B formed around the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the surface, the notation portion is formed by using a bright color paint having high reflectance such as white or yellow. Silk printing may be performed, or a bright color having a high reflectance such as yellow may be printed on the white resist layer 7200A or the white silk printing layer 7200B formed in the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the LED mounting surface. The notation part may be silk-printed using the above paint.

Further, under the above-mentioned specific conditions, at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 have higher brightness than usual (normal brightness: brightness reflecting the result of brightness adjustment by the player). Higher than usual: Brighter than the brightness that reflects the result of brightness adjustment by the player, maximum brightness in the brightness range that the player can adjust the brightness, brightness higher than the brightness range that the player can adjust the brightness ( Even when the light emission is controlled to any of the high brightness) that the player cannot set by adjusting the brightness, the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 7001 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled while maintaining the normal brightness. Since it is possible to individually identify the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001, it is possible to recognize important information displayed by the dot matrix display 7000. Further, under the specific conditions described above, the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710, the LED mounted on the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, and the back Front right decorative body unit 3810 back front right decorative board 3814 LED mounted on back bottom right production unit 3250 back bottom right decoration board 3253 LED, back bottom left production unit 3200 back bottom left Since some of the light emitting means (LEDs) among the plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) provided on the game board 5 such as the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 3203 are turned off, the brightness inside the glass frame 161 is reduced. It is easy to determine the light emitting state (displayed information) of a plurality of LEDs provided in the dot matrix display 7000. It should be noted that at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light with a higher brightness than usual, and the decorative body provided on the game board 5 (movable decorative body (backward middle rotating decorative body 3310). , Back-up rear rotation decoration 3440, back-back left-rotation decoration 3510, back-back right-rotation decoration 3610, back-back movable decoration 3110), back-front left decoration unit 3710, back-up effect unit 3400, back-front Light emitting means provided on a decorative body (excluding the function display unit 1400 that displays important information) that does not display important information such as the right decorative body unit 3810, the lower back right effect unit 3250, and the lower back left effect unit 3200. (LED) may be turned off, and the light emission control of the LED as the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 may be performed while maintaining the normal brightness (LED). For example, when it is desired to pay attention to the display contents of the effect display device 1600 (when a super reach or an error state occurs, etc.), in this case, the brightness inside the glass frame 161 can be further reduced, so that the dot matrix display can be performed. It becomes easy to discriminate the light emitting state (displayed information) of a plurality of LEDs provided in the device 7000.

Further, since all the light can be radiated from the front of the penetrating portion 7110a without leaking the light from the LED 7001 provided in the penetrating portion 7110a to the outside of the penetrating portion 7110a, the brightness in the penetrating portion 7110a is lowered. Can be suppressed. The substrate 7200 may be firmly attached to the surface cover portion 7110 (difficult to remove, an irreversible mounting state that cannot be removed unless at least a part of the surface cover portion 7110 or the substrate 7200 is destroyed by welding, etc.). As a result, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 can be protected by the surface cover portion 7110, so that it is possible to prevent the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 from having a problem due to mischief or the like.

Further, an opening for exposing the connector 7002 mounted on the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the substrate 7200 is formed in a part of the back surface cover portion 7120 covering the back surface (rear surface) on which the connector 7002 of the substrate 7200 is mounted. Has been done. In addition, in order to fix the substrate 7200 to the surface cover portion 7110 in a state of being in close contact with the surface cover portion 7110 so that only one LED is arranged in the penetration portion 7110a as described above, the substrate 7200 is moved to the rear surface side. The light leakage of the LED 7001 is suppressed so that the light of the LED 7001 does not leak from the opening that exposes the connector 7002 formed in the back cover portion 7120.

As described above, in this example, the light emitting decoration body provided with the LED that controls the light emission in relation to the fluctuation effect is formed of a translucent resin, and is surface-emitting by the light emitted from the LED. .. On the other hand, the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 may be a colored opaque white having no translucency (as long as it is opaque without translucency, it may be other than white, for example, black, dark blue, dark green, etc. The light of the LED 7001 can be visually recognized only from the penetrating portion 7110a, and the light of the LED 7001 cannot be visually recognized from other parts of the case 7100. .. Further, the front surface cover portion 7110 and the back surface cover portion 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered (welded) in a state of being in close contact with each other without a gap, and light leakage from the joint portion between the front surface cover portion 7110 and the back surface cover portion 7120 leaks. It is suppressed. In this way, the case 7100 accommodating the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, which is individually controlled to emit light and displays important information related to the progress of the game (for example, the result of a special lottery), is a resin having no translucency. A light emitting decoration body that accommodates a substrate on which LEDs are mounted, which are formed by means of a predetermined number of LEDs (for each group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs) and do not display important information related to the progress of the game. Since it is formed of a transmissive resin or the like, whether or not a light emitting means such as a defective LED displays important information and whether or not the LED control unit (whether or not it is controlled for each predetermined number of LEDs) Whether it is controlled independently) can be easily determined from the appearance, and if a problem occurs in the light emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game, it becomes possible to quickly respond to the game. It is possible to prevent the decline in interest.

Further, the front cover portion 7110 and the back cover portion 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered by welding or the like so that the substrate 7200 cannot be taken out from the case 7100 unless at least a part of the case 7100 is destroyed. It has become. Further, as described above, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and the sealing mechanism obtained by destroying one of the plurality of sealing mechanisms to open the main control board box 1320 and then destroying the sealing mechanism. The main control board box 1320 can be closed using one different sealing mechanism. On the other hand, the case 7100 of this example does not have such a sealing mechanism, and if a part of the case 7100 is destroyed and the case 7100 is taken out, the case 7100 cannot be returned to its original state. There is. In this way, since the substrate 7200 is enclosed and protected in the case 7100 in which the substrate 7200 cannot be taken out (exposed) unless at least a part of the substrate is destroyed, the LED 7001 having an important function is physically destroyed. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, a light emitting decorative body (rotating under the back) accommodating a substrate on which LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a predetermined number of LED units (for each group consisting of a predetermined number of LEDs) and do not display important information related to the progress of the game are mounted. Decorative body 3310, back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, back-back left-rotation decoration body 3510, back-back right-rotation decoration body 3610, back-back movable decoration body 3110, back-up front rotation decoration body 3410, back-up front rotation decoration body 3421, The back front left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) are formed to be removable (reversible) by screwing or the like, so that the substrate can be taken out without destroying the light emitting decorative body. There is. As a result, the electronic components (LEDs, etc.) mounted on the board 7200 housed in the case 7100 containing the board on which the LED displaying important information is mounted are hard to be physically destroyed, and important information is provided. The light emitting decoration that houses the board on which the LED that does not display important information is mounted can be replaced immediately if a defect occurs in an electronic component (LED, etc.). ..

Further, in the dot matrix display 7000 of this example, the LED 7001 provided in the case 7100 has a predetermined constant brightness, and operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303). However, the brightness cannot be adjusted. As a result, the brightness of the LED 7001 having an important function can be kept constant, and important information such as information related to the interests of the player can be reliably transmitted. Regarding the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information even under the above-mentioned specific conditions, the LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 and the door frame right). Side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457 LEDs, plate upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decorative board 278, dish center top The LED provided on the decorative substrate 314 may also be included), and the light emission may be controlled without turning off the light.

Specifically, a specific reach effect is executed by the display effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and as shown in FIG. 301, the elevating arm 3357 is rotated by the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 to rotate the lower back. When moving the intermediate decoration unit 3320 from the descending position to the ascending position, when moving the back-up rear rotating decoration 3440 to the appearance position below the back-up front decoration 3421, the back-back left-rotating decoration 3510 is backed. When moving to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the right of the front left effect unit 3700, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is moved to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the left of the back front right effect unit 3800. When moving to the appearance position, or when moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the back rear drive motor 3126 to release the lock by the lock member 3134 and to drop the back rear movable decoration body 3110 from the retracted position to the appearance position. , LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 (LED arranged in the area A in FIG. 301) and mounted on the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400. (LED arranged in the area B in FIG. 301) and the LED mounted on the back front right decorative substrate 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 (located in the area C in FIG. 301). LED), the LED mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250 (LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 301), and the back lower left decorative board of the back lower left effect unit 3200. The LED mounted on the 3203 (LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 301) and the LED are turned off, but the dot matrix display 7000 may be continuously controlled to emit light without being turned off. .. As a result, important information such as information related to the interests of the player can be displayed even under specific conditions, and no disadvantage is given to the player or the like.

In this example, not only when a specific reach effect is executed, an error state such as detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch occurs, and the back side LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the left decorative unit 3710, LED mounted on the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back top effect unit 3400, back front right decoration of the back front right decorative unit 3810 LED mounted on the board 3814, LED mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right effect unit 3250, LED mounted on the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left effect unit 3200, movable LEDs provided on the decorative bodies (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and back rear movable decorative body 3110). Even when at least a part of the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 is turned off, at least a part of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 is turned off. LED and the LED 7001 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 are controlled to emit light without turning off the lights. As a result, when an error state occurs, for example, at least a part of the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and at least a part of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 is normally turned off. Notifies that an error state has occurred (for example, the door frame 3 is open) by controlling the light emission in a mode different from that at the time of an error (for example, blinking and emitting light at a higher brightness than in a normal time). Or, the effect display device 1600 displays a display notifying that an error state has occurred (for example, "abnormality has occurred!"), Or outputs a voice indicating that an error state has occurred (for example, "the door is open"). , "Please pull out the ball.", Etc.), while the fluctuation effect is being executed by controlling the light emission without turning off the LED 7001 provided on the dot matrix display 7000. It is possible to suppress the interruption of the game, and by continuing the update display (variable display) of the dot matrix display 7000, it is possible to prevent anxiety and distrust that the special lottery result is not displayed. it can.

Depending on the type of error state (degree of urgency), whether or not the dot matrix display 7000 is turned off may be different. For example, an error having a small effect on the game (minor error: main body frame 4) may be used. When the opening of the door frame 3 is detected with respect to the above, when the vibration sensor (not shown) continuously detects the vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), the action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is performed. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the plate 202 is full in the game ball B), the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 Is input (an error in which it is unlikely that a goto action is being performed, such as when it is detected that the game ball B does not exist in the guidance passage 570a), the dot matrix display 7000 is provided. By controlling the light emission without turning off the LED 7001, the progress of the game is not interrupted, but an error that has a serious effect on the game (serious error: when a radio wave irradiation goto is detected, when a magnet goto is detected, the second When the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2401 is input when the start port 2004 is not open, the first big prize opening sensor 2402 or the second big prize is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. For errors that are likely to be performed when a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2601 is input), the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled to be turned off, and the fluctuation effect is being executed. Even if there is, the variation effect may be interrupted or terminated. As a result, the control state of the dot matrix display 7000 can be changed according to the degree of the error, which is disadvantageous to the player and the game store. You can avoid giving it.

In addition, when an error occurs, a display notifying that the effect display device 1600 is in an error state and an LED provided on the door frame 3 are displayed in an error mode according to the type of the error state. One of the notification by controlling the light emission and the notification that an error state has occurred by the voice output may be executed, or any combination of the two may be executed. Or you may try to do everything. For example, when a minor error that has little effect on the game occurs, a display notifying that an error state has occurred in the effect display device 1600 and an LED provided on the door frame 3 emit light in the mode at the time of the error. Execution of any one or any combination of two, a notification by control and a notification that an error state has occurred by voice output, causes a serious error that has a significant effect on the game. If this is the case, a display notifying that an error state has occurred in the effect display device 1600, a notification by controlling the light emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 in the mode at the time of an error, and an error by voice output You may want to do everything with the notification that the condition is occurring.

Further, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects (contents different from the originally displayed contents are displayed, etc.) as compared with the case where the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. , It is possible not to give a disadvantage to a player or the like. Further, as described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the peripheral control unit steady processing about every 33.3 ms, whereas the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the main control side timer interrupt process every 4 ms. The display contents of the dot matrix display 7000 are updated in a shorter cycle than when the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Even if a problem occurs and the content different from the content originally displayed on the dot matrix display 7000 is displayed, the display content is immediately updated (after 4 ms) to the original display content. It can be changed and does not cause any disadvantage to players. That is, the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information (high importance) outputs a control signal in a shorter cycle than the light emitting decoration that does not display important information (less important) and emits light (light emitting means). In order to update the light emitting mode of the LED), even if a problem occurs in the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 (light emitting mode of the LED 7001) that displays important information, the display content can be immediately changed to the normal display content. This light can prevent the player from being disadvantaged by displaying different contents. Further, when the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. A communication error may occur and a problem may occur in the information indicated by the dot matrix display 7000 (light emission state of the LED 7001). However, in this example, since the main control board 1310 directly controls the dot matrix display 7000, the peripheral area Compared with the case where the peripheral control MPU of the control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000, the information indicated by the dot matrix display 7000 (light emitting state of the LED 7001) is less likely to cause a problem, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, the film 7300 is attached to the surface cover portion 7110 of the case 7100 as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 315 (A), the film 7300 is composed of a translucent sheet, and the area around the region corresponding to the penetration portion 7110a of the case 7100 is opaque black printing (not limited to black but the penetration portion). A color (dark color, etc.) that makes it easier to visually recognize the light emitting state in the region corresponding to 7110a) is used to prevent light from being transmitted. On the other hand, the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is in a semi-transparent state having translucency without being printed in black, and is surface-emitting by the light emitted from the LED 7001. As a result, when the LED 7001 is made to emit light and the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a emits surface light, the periphery of the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a looks dark like a shadow, and corresponds to the penetrating portion 7110a. By comparing the area with the periphery of the area corresponding to the penetrating portion, it becomes easier to visually recognize the surface emission of the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a (the light emitting state of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200), and the dot matrix display 7000 can be used for various purposes. By being able to clearly display various characters, symbols, figures, etc., it is possible to reliably convey important information such as information related to the interests of the player. Further, by providing a region that does not transmit light between each of the regions that emit light from the surface corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a, it is possible to suppress interference of light radiated from the plurality of penetrating portions 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light, and a plurality of regions. Even when light of different colors is emitted from each of the penetrating portions 7110a, it is possible to suppress the mixing of the emitted lights of various colors so that the individual colors can be clearly seen, and the light is emitted from the LED 7001. Since it is possible to identify each region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a that is surface-emitting by light as a separate light emitting region, various characters, symbols, figures, and the like can be clearly displayed. By forming at least the surface cover portion 7110 itself of the case 7100 with a dark resin such as black without providing the film 7300, the light radiated from the penetrating portion 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light can be easily recognized. Also in this case, various characters, symbols, figures, etc. can be clearly displayed on the dot matrix display 7000, so that important information such as information related to the interests of the player can be reliably displayed. I can tell.

[Example of production using a dot matrix display]
Next, an example of effect using the dot matrix display 7000 described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 314, the dot matrix display 7000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Then, important information related to the progress of the game is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 316, when the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect based on the start prize for the first start port 2002 and the start prize for the second start port 2004, the dot matrix display is displayed. Even in 7000, the display contents are updated and displayed (variable display). Then, when a predetermined period (variation time) has elapsed since the update display of the display content was started on the dot matrix display 7000, a predetermined mode is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 317 (A) and 317 (B), information related to winning such as "big hit" and "loss" is displayed when the fluctuation time elapses. As described above, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is different from the light emitting decoration body or the like in which the substrate on which the LED is mounted is provided and the light emission is controlled in relation to the fluctuation effect, and the special lottery result (first special lottery result, The second special lottery result) can be discriminated (at least, it suffices if different contents are displayed depending on whether the hit is a big hit or not). That is, it is possible to determine the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration or the like in which the substrate on which the LED is mounted is provided and the light emission is controlled in relation to the fluctuation effect. On the other hand, it is difficult to determine the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emitting mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000. It is possible. In addition, when some condition is satisfied (for example, when executing a big hit confirmation effect that notifies that the big hit is confirmed before deriving the special lottery result), a board for mounting the LED is provided. The light emission control may be made so that the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) can be discriminated from the light emission mode of the light emitting decoration or the like that controls light emission in relation to the variation effect. However, the dot matrix display 7000 can always determine the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emitting mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 regardless of specific conditions. Even if there is a problem with the light emitting mode of the light emitting decoration that controls light emission in relation to the fluctuation effect by providing a substrate on which the LED is mounted, a special lottery result (No. 1) is obtained from the light emitting mode of the dot matrix display 7000. (1) Special lottery result, 2nd special lottery result) can be discriminated, so that no disadvantage is given to the player or the like.

In addition, the dot matrix display 7000 displays the jackpot type (15R jackpot, 5R jackpot, 2R jackpot) during the jackpot game state. It should be noted that this may be displayed when the time is shortened, or it may be displayed when the time is high.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a game aiming at entering the game ball into the second starting port 2004 in a time saving time (low probability time saving state (also referred to as time saving state), high probability time saving state (also referred to as probability change state)). (So-called "right-handed") is being performed. Further, as described above, the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened in the time saving state, and the starting prize (first) is higher than in the normal time (low probability non-time saving state (also referred to as normal state), high probability non-time saving state). Since it becomes easier to win a game ball in the starting port 2002 and a game ball in the second starting port 2004), it is in an advantageous state for the player. However, this advantageous state cannot be enjoyed if the player does not play a game (so-called "right-handed") aiming at entering the game ball into the second starting port 2004 in a short time. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 317 (C), when the time is shortened, the player plays a game (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at entering the game ball into the second starting port 2004. "Right-handed →" is displayed as a notification display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not enjoying the advantageous state in spite of the time saving, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

As described above, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example displays important information related to the game, unlike the light emitting decoration body or the like in which the substrate on which the LED is mounted is provided and the light emission is controlled in relation to the fluctuation effect. It has become like. Further, as described above, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 and on which the LED 7001 is mounted is subjected to a resist treatment having a color different from that of the substrate provided on the light emitting decoration or the like on which the LED is mounted. Therefore, when the LED mounting surface of the LED is visually recognized, it can be easily determined whether or not the board is mounted with an LED for displaying important information related to the game by the color of the LED mounting surface.

In this example, the dot matrix display 7000 is configured to be provided inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, but it may be provided outside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the inner region of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 is increased, and a structure or a movable object can be provided to enhance the decorativeness and the effect of the effect.

By the way, as described above, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the payout base unit 550 that receives the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall and the game ball B received by the payout base unit 550 are paid to the player side. It is equipped with a payout unit 560 for issuing. Further, the payout unit 560 is based on an instruction from the payout control board 633 of the ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The door frame is a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full tank path unit 600. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the vehicle to the 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side (see FIG. 4).

Further, the game balls B supplied to the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 are easily charged by moving to the downstream side while rubbing against each other, and when electrostatic discharge occurs from the game balls B, they are in the vicinity. There is a possibility that a problem may occur in the light emitting means (LED or the like) arranged. As described above, in this example, the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information related to the game is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 and displayed every 4 ms. Since the content (lighting state of LED7001) is updated, even if a problem occurs in the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 due to an electrostatic discharge from the game ball B or the like, the correct content can be immediately updated and displayed. It is designed not to give any disadvantage to people.

As described above, the region near the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, etc., but in this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 By updating the display contents of the dot matrix display 7000 in a short period of time (4 ms), a front view of the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 shown in FIG. It is possible to arrange the dot matrix display 7000 even in the upper left area or the lower left area in the front view. That is, even if the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is arranged in a region susceptible to noise, it can display without giving a disadvantage to the player.

According to the above embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means (light emitting decorative body (light emitting decoration body (back bottom middle rotating decoration body 3310, back top rear rotating decoration body, back top rear rotation decoration body)) which is mounted on a circuit board for electric parts and whose light emission is controlled according to a special lottery result 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back right rotating decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotating decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right Decorative body 3813, etc.), LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the LED provided on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and the LED provided on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included), dots. A first light emitting means (dot matrix display) including a matrix display 7000, a function display unit 1400, an effect display device 1600, etc., and the plurality of light emitting means are divided into different systems for each light emitting means and individually controlled to emit light. 7000, function display unit 1400) and a second light emitting means (light emitting decoration (light emitting decoration (under-back middle rotating decoration 3310, back-up)) that is divided into separate systems for each of a predetermined number of light-emitting means and is controlled to emit light in a predetermined number of units. Rotating decoration 3440, back-back left-rotating decoration 3510, back-back right-rotating decoration 3610, back-back movable decoration 3110, back-up front rotating decoration 3410, back-up front decoration 3421, back-front left decoration 3713, The LED provided on the back front right decorative body 3813, etc., and the LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top center decorative board 455). , The LED provided on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and the LED provided on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. In order to make the color of the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted and the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted different from each other. The control unit of the light emitting means mounted on the substrate can be determined by looking at the color of the mounting surface of the light emitting means, and for example, the light emitting means which plays an important role such that the light emitting means is individually controlled and hinders the progress of the game. Circuit board to be mounted (board 7200 provided in dot matrix display 7000, function display board provided in function display unit 1400) and other Circuit board (light emitting decorative body (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back rear movable decoration body 3110, back upper front rotating A substrate provided on the decorative body 3410, a back upper front decorative body 3421, a back front left decorative body 3713, a back front right decorative body 3813, etc., and a board on which an LED provided on the door frame 3 is mounted (at least a door in this example). Frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, plate upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decoration The substrate 278 and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be included. By making the colors of the mounting surface different from)), it becomes easy to determine whether or not the light emitting means in which the problem has occurred is an important light emitting means, and if the progress of the game is hindered, a quick response is made. Because it becomes possible to do so, it is possible to prevent a decline in the game interest.

Further, the first light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode in which the special lottery result can be discriminated, the second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode in which the special lottery result is difficult to discriminate, and the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted. Since the mounting surface of is a special color (black) different from the color (white) of the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted, the light emitting means in which the defect occurs plays an important role. It becomes easy to determine whether or not it is.

A first substrate case (a case 7100 accommodating a substrate 7200 of a dot matrix display 7000, a box body accommodating a functional display board of a functional display unit) and a second light emitting body accommodating a circuit board on which a first light emitting means is mounted. A second substrate case for accommodating the circuit board on which the means is mounted (the upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the effect operation unit 300, and the left side unit 400 of the door frame. Door frame left side decoration 404, door frame right side unit 410 door frame right side decoration 419, door frame top unit 450 door frame top decoration 453, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421 , Back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310, back top front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front The first substrate case is a case 7100 for accommodating a first main body portion (a substrate 7200 of a dot matrix display 7000) formed of a material having no translucency, and a function display unit. (Box body accommodating the function display board) and the first display unit (penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100, insertion hole for LED of the box body accommodating the function display board) capable of determining the light emitting state of the first light emitting means. The second substrate case has a second main body portion formed of a translucent material (the upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, and the center of the dish of the effect operation unit 300). Decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404 of door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side decorative body 419 of door frame right side unit 410, door frame top decorative body 453 of door frame top unit 450, back top front Rotating decoration 3410, back upper front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration 3813, back lower left rotating decoration 3201, back lower right rotating decoration 3251, back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, Since it has a back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, a back-up front decorative body 3421, etc.), it is determined whether or not the light emitting means plays an important role as a control unit of the light emitting means depending on the presence or absence of translucency of the substrate case. Becomes easier.

The first board case is in a state where the circuit board can be detached by destroying a part of the first board case, and the second board case is a circuit board without destroying a part of the second board case. Since the circuit board cannot be detached unless a part of the first substrate case is destroyed, it is possible to prevent the light emitting means which plays an important role from being physically destroyed. On the other hand, the less important light emitting means can be easily physically replaced.

A first light emitting means that can express a predetermined light emitting mode by controlling light emission in a predetermined number of units (light emitting decorative body (light emitting decoration (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back)) LEDs provided on the right-handed decorative body 3610, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-up front decorative body 3421, the back-front left decorative body 3713, the back-front right decorative body 3813, etc. LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top The LED provided on the right decorative substrate 457, the LED provided on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included)) and the first light emitting means. The first circuit board to be mounted (light emitting decorative body (light emitting decorative body 3310, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back rear movable decorative body 3110) , Back top front rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.), and a board on which LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are mounted ( In this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the plate upper left decorative board 457. 273, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be included.)) And a second light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000) that can individually control light emission and represent a predetermined light emitting mode. , Function display unit 1400) and a second circuit board (board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, function display board provided on the function display unit 1400) on which the second light emitting means is mounted. A white coating film is formed on the mounting surface on which the first light emitting means of the circuit board is mounted, and a dark color coating film is formed on the mounting surface on which the second light emitting means of the second circuit board is mounted. The reflectance of the circuit board is increased, and a decrease in brightness at the time of light emission of the first light emitting means can be suppressed. Further, since a dark color coating film is formed on the second circuit board on which the second light emission means for individually controlling light emission is mounted, reflection is suppressed and individual light emission is clarified by comparison with the mounting surface of the dark color coating film. It can be visually recognized.

Each light emitting means is divided into a tubular shape by an suppressing member (penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100, an insertion hole for LED of a box body accommodating a function display board) for suppressing interference of light emitting colors by each of the plurality of light emitting means of the second light emitting means. Since the light emitting color is provided, the diffusion and interference of the light emitting color are suppressed, and the light emitting colors of the plurality of light emitting means can be easily identified individually.

A substrate case for accommodating the second circuit board (a case 7100 for accommodating the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, a box for accommodating the functional display substrate of the functional display unit) is further provided, and the substrate case is made of a plurality of light emitting means. A display unit that can determine the light emitting state (penetration portion 7110a of the case 7100, an LED insertion hole of a box body that houses a functional display board) and a dark color display auxiliary unit (case 7100) formed around the display unit. Since it has a film 7300 in which the periphery of the region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is opaque and black, and a black function display sticker in which the periphery of the transparent portion is black), the light emitting means in the display portion is compared with the display auxiliary portion. It becomes easy to determine the light emitting state of.

A game board 5 on which a game is performed, a frame body (door frame 3) having a game window portion (door window 101a) arranged in front of the game board 5 and making the game board 5 visible, and the frame. Multiple frame-side light emitting means provided on the body (door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board The LED provided on the 457, the LED on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, the decorative board 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the LED provided on the decorative board 314 on the center of the plate may also be included), and the game window provided on the game board. Multiple board-side light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400, light emitting decoration (lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotating decoration 3440, back rear left rotating decoration 3510) visible through the unit , Back back right rotating decoration body 3610, back back movable decoration body 3110, back top front rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.) When a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of frame-side light emitting means emit light with higher brightness than usual, while at least a specific board-side light emitting means among the plurality of board-side light emitting means is emitted. The means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) emits light while maintaining normal brightness, and the specific panel-side light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LED elements) and the light emitting elements. A light emitting board (board 7200, function display board) to be mounted and a partition member (penetrating portion 7110a of the case 7100, a box LED for accommodating the function display board) for partitioning each of a plurality of light emitting elements mounted on the light emitting board. Since each light emitting means is divided into a tubular shape by the insertion hole), it is possible to suppress the interference of the light emitted by the plurality of light emitting elements and make it easier to visually recognize the light emission of each of the plurality of light emitting elements. Even in a situation where the side light emitting means emits light with high brightness, it is easy to determine the light emitting state by a specific panel side light emitting means.

When a specific condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of board-side light emitting means (light emitting decoration (under the back)) excluding the specific board-side light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) among a plurality of board-side light emitting means. Medium rotation decoration 3310, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back back left rotation decoration 3510, back back right rotation decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration Since any or all of the LEDs provided on the 3421, the back front left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) are turned off, the brightness inside the game window can be reduced, which is specific. It becomes easy to determine the light emitting state of the panel side light emitting means.

A dark color with low reflectance around the area of the light emitting substrate that is partitioned by the partitioning means and where the light emitting element is arranged (around the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a of the substrate 7200, around the area corresponding to the function display substrate) Since the coating film is formed, it is possible to suppress the diffusion of light even when the light emitted from the light emitting element leaks to the outside of the region partitioned by the partition member, and in comparison with the dark color coating film. Makes it more clearly visible.

A first light emitting means that receives a predetermined control signal and emits light in a light emitting mode based on the received control signal (light emitting decoration (light emitting decoration (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper back rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotation)). Decorative body 3510, back-back right-rotating decoration body 3610, back-back movable decoration body 3110, back-top front-rotating decoration body 3410, back-top front decoration body 3421, back-front left decoration body 3713, back-front right decoration body 3813, etc.) LEDs provided on the door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457. The LED provided on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273, the plate upper right decorative substrate 278, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 may also be included), and information having a higher importance than the first light emitting means is displayed. A second light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) is provided, and the control signal is output at different cycles between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, so that when a problem occurs. In addition, it is possible to suppress that both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means emit light in a light emitting mode different from the original light emitting mode.

A first light emission control means that outputs a control signal to the first light emission means (a portion that controls light emission of the light emitting decoration by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510) and a second light emission control that outputs a control signal to the second light emission means. The second light emitting means is further provided with means (a portion for controlling the light emission of the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display unit 1400 by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310), and the second light emitting means is controlled in a shorter cycle than the first light emitting control means. Since the signal is output, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the information represented by the second light emitting means.

The first light emitting control means controls the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner in which it is difficult to determine the special lottery result, and the second light emitting control means controls the light emission of the second light emitting means in a mode in which the special lottery result can be discriminated. By controlling the light emission in a manner in which the result of the lottery process can be discriminated, the second light emitting means, which is highly important to the first light emitting means, outputs a control signal in a shorter cycle than the first light emitting means to control the light emission. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect in the information represented by the second light emitting means and giving a disadvantage to the player.

A game control means (main control MPU of the main control board 1310) including a first light emission control means and controlling the progress of the game, and a second light emission control means are included, and the effect is controlled based on a command from the game control means. A defect of the first light emitting means is provided because the effect control means (peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510) is further provided, the first light emitting means is controlled by the game control means, and the second light emitting means is controlled by the effect control means. Can be reliably suppressed.

A game control means (main control MPU of the main control board 1310) that controls the progress of the game, and a plurality of light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, which can emit light in connection with the game effect executed with the progress of the game). Function display unit 1400, light emitting decoration (back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, back top rear rotation decoration 3440, back back left rotation decoration 3510, back back right rotation decoration 3610, back back movable decoration 3110, back top LEDs provided on the front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back front left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418. , Door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457 LEDs, and plate upper left decorative board 273, dish upper right decorative board 278, dish center upper decorative board 314. (It may also include an LED provided), and a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on different substrates according to the application (directing application, gaming state or notification of special display result). A first board (board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000, function display board provided on the function display unit 1400) on which the light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) used for the first application is mounted. ) And the light emitting means used for the second use different from the first use (light emitting decoration (light emitting decoration (back bottom middle rotating decoration 3310, back top rear rotating decoration 3440, back back left rotating decoration 3510, back back)). LEDs provided on the right-handed decorative body 3610, the back-back movable decorative body 3110, the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-up front decorative body 3421, the back front left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc. Door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457 LEDs, and plate upper left decorative board A second substrate (light emitting decorative body (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, upper back) on which 273, the decorative substrate 278 on the upper right of the plate, and the LED provided on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are also included) is mounted. Rear Rotating Decorative 3440, Back Rear Left Rotating Decorative 3510, Back Rear Right Rotating Decorative 3610, Back Rear Movable Decorative 3110, Back Upper Front Rotating Decorative 3410, Back Upper Front Decorative 3421, Back Front Left Decorative 3713 , Back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), board on which the LED provided on the door frame 3 is mounted (less in this example) Door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, plate upper left decorative board 273, plate The decorative substrate 278 on the upper right side and the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate may also be included. )) And, since the color of the mounting surface is different, the reflectance of the light emitting means can be increased or decreased depending on the application. For example, by making the substrate whose reflectance is to be increased light and the substrate whose light diffusion is to be suppressed dark, it is possible to suppress the transmission of erroneous information to the player, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

The light emitting means mounted on the first substrate is used to enhance the effect of effect, and the light emitting means mounted on the second substrate is used to display information related to the lottery result, and is predetermined. By forming a dark-colored coating film on the surface of the second decorative substrate for displaying the information of the above, it is possible to suppress the interference of light and prevent the notification of erroneous information.

A white coating film is formed on the surface of the first substrate, a dark color coating film is formed on the surface of the second substrate, and a light emitting means used for enhancing the effect of effect is provided on the first substrate. Since the reflectance of the light emitting means can be increased by forming the white coating film on the surface, the brightness of the light emitting means mounted on the first substrate at the time of light emission can be increased, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. On the other hand, by forming a dark coating film on the surface of the second substrate for displaying information related to the lottery result, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from each of the light emitting means from diffusing and interfering with the light emitting means. Each light emitting state becomes clear, and it is possible to prevent misunderstanding and transmission of information related to the lottery result.

The first substrate includes a game board 5 in which a game area 5a on which the game ball rolls is formed on the front surface, and rail members (outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002) that partition the front surface of the game board 5. , The second substrate is arranged in the outer region of the rail member and forms a white coating on the surface of the first decorative substrate, so that the inner region of the rail member attracts the attention of the player. It is possible to enhance the effect of effect by increasing the reflectance of light in.

[Details of main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 320 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and payout of the game ball B, a setting change board 1311 that can set the game performance, and a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. It is provided with a non-conductive resin main control board box 1320 that is attached to the board holder 1200.

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from behind, the rectangular main control board 1310 long in the left-right direction is on the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Of the area surrounded by the upper side, the right side, and the lower side, the area is formed and arranged so as to occupy about four-fifths of the area from the left side to the right side, and the remaining one-fifth area. Therefore, the square setting change board 1311 is arranged in the area of the corner where the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 rotates coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward centering on the left side when viewed from the front, the hinge portion 310 on the main body frame and the hinge portion 320 below the main body frame are arranged. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction is the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, whereas the shaft support side of the main body frame 4 ( The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

Further, as described above, the back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 so as to open and close covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. It is a thing. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640. Further, as described above, the back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 around the axis extending vertically, and the left side in the front view is paid out. Since it is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600, the right side of the front view becomes the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640. The left side of the front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the shaft support side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is open. The setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In this embodiment, green color is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are green resist except for various land patterns. However, the resist of the setting change board 1311 is white, which is different from the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting board 1311 are white. It is solidly painted with resist except for various land patterns.

Here, it will be described that a color different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311. Both the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are boards housed in the main control board box 1320. The manager of the game hall, the clerk of the game hall, and other staff members say that the main control board 1310 is a board that controls the progress of the game (controls the content of the game and the payout of the game ball B) and is of high importance in crime prevention. Awareness of is very high. Therefore, it is not necessary to distinguish the fact that this board is the main control board 1310 from other boards and call attention to it. On the other hand, since the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 that can set the game performance, although it is housed in the main control board box 1320, it is important for crime prevention. Awareness of the fact that it is a high substrate is extremely low. Therefore, it is necessary to call attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311 to distinguish it from other boards.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, green color, which is generally used as the resist of the substrate, is adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310, and white color different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control substrate 1310 is adopted as the resist of the setting change substrate 1311. Adopted. As a result, among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 becomes more prominent than the main control board 1310, and the setting change board 1311 is also highly important for crime prevention in addition to the main control board 1310. It can contribute to raising awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

In the above-described embodiment, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be distinguished from each other. If possible, it may be yellow, red, blue, transparent, or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but instead of the resist of the setting change board 1311, the setting change board 1311 is used. It may be printed as silk printing in white so as to cover almost the entire front surface (mounting surface) and / or the back surface (solder surface), or as silk printing in any of black, blue, yellow, and red. You may print it.

Next, the main control board box 1320 for accommodating the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a non-conductive resin cover body and a non-conductive resin base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from the polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not they have been tampered with). Or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. The cover body is formed with a plurality of heat-dissipating ventilation holes capable of releasing the air in the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting port sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting port sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first large winning opening sensor 2402, and a second large winning opening. It is connected to a sensor 2601, an out port sensor 3053, a first sub out port sensor 2403, a second sub out port sensor 3054, a magnetic sensor 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the set value of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the set value. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between boards) (a harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310). It may be electrically connected via (electrical wiring). The force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a is absorbed (softened) by the harness (electrical wiring), and the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 It can be difficult to convey to). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The connector connection, which is a connection between boards, includes a connection using a normal connector not provided with a floating mechanism and a connection using a special connector provided with a floating mechanism. A normal connector without a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the plug into the socket and pushing it in. When the socket is fitted with the plug, The structure is such that there is no amount of movement in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed in (for example, in the vertical direction). On the other hand, a special connector equipped with a floating mechanism is composed of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket into the plug and pushing it in, and the socket fits with the plug. When fitting, it is possible to absorb the error (fitting axis deviation) that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the socket is inserted and pushed in (for example, in the vertical direction). It has a structure. In the present embodiment, as the connector connection which is the connection between the boards, a normal connector not provided with a floating mechanism is adopted, but a special connector provided with a floating mechanism may be adopted.

The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with a distance dimension of one side having about one-fifth of the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side thereof is the main control board 1310. It is arranged on the same straight line as the upper side, and its lower side is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction along the left side of the setting change board 1311, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is the main control board 1310. It is located on the right side of the setting change board 1311 at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder that is rotated by inserting a setting key at a center point where the center lines in the vertical and horizontal directions of the square setting changing board 1311 intersect is arranged. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) above the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 and closer to the connector MSCN is arranged. A setting display 1310 g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dots) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310. A base monitor 1310h is arranged which is lower than the center and has six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center to the right side.

In the present embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion port having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). Position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the metal setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot and the metal setting key can be pulled out from the insertion slot. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port in the outer frame 2. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the members of other pachinko machines (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) arranged in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall and the setting key do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension of the setting key switch 1311a in the depth direction is adopted so as not to damage it.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on, and the setting key ON signal is the setting change board 1311. Is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is set so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction and turning it off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[Procedure for changing the setting of the set value, procedure for confirming and displaying the set value]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, and the setting display 1310 g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, first, a case of changing the setting value of the setting value will be briefly described, and a case of confirming and displaying the current setting value will be briefly described. In addition to changing the set value, the setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current set value, etc., so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can own it. Allowed and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting of the set value, the main body frame is relative to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). 4 is released, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON. As a result, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated. That is, the person who actually changes the setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state where the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the outer frame 2 is used. The work of opening the main body frame 4 is performed, and then the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch.

The person who changes the setting of the set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then sets the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Perform the work of opening, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by. Subsequently, while operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set among the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the RAM clear switch is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Will be done. Each time a person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch, the main control MPU1310a increases by 1 from the current set value based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch. When the maximum value of the set value 6 is reached, the value returns to the initial value of 1, the value is increased by 1, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 1310 g.

When determining the set value, the person who changes the setting of the set value sets the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a) which is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is turned on. Set to turn off Turn the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position of the key cylinder) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in the specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and hides the set value from the state of displaying the set value on the setting display 1310 g. Switch to the state and switch from the state where the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned on to the state where it is turned off.

A person who changes the setting of the set value pulls out the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and sets the set value. Complete the work of changing the settings of.

When confirming and displaying the currently set value, the outer frame 2 is used when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on. As a result, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined set value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is not operated. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is turned off) and then outside. The work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the frame 2 is performed, and then the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation, and then the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off), and then the outer frame 2 is displayed. Then, the main body frame 4 is opened, and then the metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the ON operation. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a is set among the current set values (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on) stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM. The value) is displayed on the setting display 1310 g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned off is maintained, and even if a person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch, this pressing operation is supported. Therefore, the set value is not changed at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310 g is not changed either.

When the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the initial position is the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The OFF operation is performed by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from the state of displaying the set value to the state of not displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value is the work of extracting the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. To complete the confirmation display of the currently set value.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is the outer frame when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn on. It is necessary that the setting key is turned on and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated, whereas the predetermined set value display permission condition is pachinko as described above. When the power of the machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311ab of the cylinder 1311ab, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned ON, so that the setting key is turned ON and the RAM clear switch is pressed. It is necessary that the part is not operated. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the preset setting value display permission condition are when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs). At the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is directed clockwise. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by turning it 60 degrees and turning it on, and the predetermined setting value change permission condition is "when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or a power failure (power outage). The requirement is that the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is restored when the power is restored after a momentary power failure (a momentary power failure occurs). The condition is that "the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure occurs)". The difference is that.

Here, briefly explaining the set value, the "set value" is a probability for determining whether or not it is a big hit by lottery, a probability for determining whether or not it is a small hit by lottery, and usually from the time of probability change. It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when shifting to time, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (that is, to be acquired by the player). The probability (degree of advantage) that can increase the number of game balls that can be played is preset. In the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value 6 are prepared in advance as the set values, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 The probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is of various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won is defined, a jackpot symbol. The jackpot symbol determination table that defines the ratio of the judgment value of the decision, the small hit judgment table that defines the percentage of the small hit judgment value that indicates that the small hit was won, and the percentage of the judgment value of the determination of the small hit symbol are specified. It is used to select the small hit symbol determination table to be performed, the normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition decision from the probability change to the normal time, etc.), or to use various distribution rates associated with the set value. Various tables (for example, a distribution table in which the distribution time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are assigned at a predetermined ratio. It should be noted that the various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. Some have different values based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table that corresponds to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to. Further, as the above-mentioned setting values, six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 are set, but the setting values may be smaller than this and may be in the larger range. It may be a thing. For example, it may be four setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 4, or eight setting values (integers) in the range of setting values 1 to 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set value, but also checks the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a at the time of power recovery to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an error, and if the main control side power off processing is not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an error (or trust) in the contents stored in the RAM built in itself. An error message is displayed to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E as an error display on the setting display 1310g.

[About the production using contact / non-contact with the steering wheel]
In the present embodiment, as an effect using the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, an effect corresponding to the contact with the handle 182 and a non-contact with the handle 182 are performed for a predetermined time. The production is performed according to the passage of time. The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting on the player is detected and the steering wheel 182 or the like of the player is detected. It detects contact with.

First, the signal path at the time of detection of the handle touch sensor 192 will be described with reference to FIG. 321. FIG. 321 is a diagram for explaining a signal path at the time of detection of the handle touch sensor 192.

The detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the relay board 106 after the handle. Then, when the launch control unit 633b inputs the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the launch control unit 633b outputs the detection signal toward the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU performs the launch permission signal setting process (step S113) described above, and sets the logic of the launch permission signal for notifying the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. It makes it possible. In this process, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input, it is possible to set the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal, while the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input. When not, it is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted as the logic of the launch permission signal. That is, it is possible to output a launch permission signal toward the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 when the handle 182 is in contact with the handle 182, while the launch control unit of the payout control board 633 is not in contact with the handle 182. It does not output a launch permission signal toward 633b. Then, when the launch control unit 633b rotates the handle 182 during the period during which the launch permission signal is received (the period during which the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player), the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects it. Is received, the drive of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182, and the game ball B can be driven. On the other hand, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the period during which the launch permission signal is not received (the handle touch sensor 192). Since it is a period during which the contact of the player is not detected), the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

However, the main control MPU enables the setting value to be set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal when it is determined that the setting value change permission or the setting value confirmation display is not performed. When it is determined that the value change permission or the confirmation display of the set value is being performed, the launch permission logic is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) as the logic of the launch permission signal. That is, during the permission to change the set value or the confirmation display of the set value, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. .. Therefore, even if the handle 182 is rotated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a while the setting value change is permitted or the set value is confirmed and displayed, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball is not driven. It is not possible to hit B.

In the above, while the setting value change permission is being permitted or the setting value confirmation display is being performed, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, whereas the setting value change permission or After the confirmation display of the set value is completed, it is possible to output the launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, but before the end of the setting value change permission and the confirmation display of the set value. When the handle 182 is continuously in contact with the handle 182 from the time to the end, the launch permission signal is not output even after the setting value change permission and the setting value confirmation display are completed. In such a case, after the setting value change permission and the setting value confirmation display are completed, the firing permission signal can be output by temporarily releasing the hand from the handle 182 and touching it again, and the handle 182 can be operated. The game ball B can be rotated and driven into the game area 5a.

Further, as described in detail above, the main control MPU determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the fraud has not been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG. When this is done, it is possible to set the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal, while when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, it is determined that fraud is detected. Occasionally, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in which the launch permission logic is inverted. That is, when the fraudulent activity is detected, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Therefore, at the time of detecting fraudulent activity, even if the handle 182 is rotated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, the launch solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. ing.

When the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 and outputs the launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU conveys that the launch permission signal is being output. The launch permission command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU grasps that it is the time of contact with the handle 182 during the period of receiving the command at the time of launch permission, and at the time of non-contact with the handle 182 during the period of not receiving the command at the time of launch permission. It can be grasped that. However, during the permission to change the set value or the confirmation display of the set value, the launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Since the command at the time of permission to launch is not output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU is grasped as the non-contact with the handle 182. Similarly, when a fraudulent activity is detected, a launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched, and the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is not output. In the peripheral control MPU, it is grasped that it is the time when the steering wheel 182 is not in contact with the steering wheel 182 because the command when the firing is permitted is not output.

During the period in which the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is continuously input, the output of the command at the time of permission to fire may be continued from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU, but the handle touch sensor 192 When the detection signal from is switched from non-input to input, the command for permission to fire is output, and when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is switched from input to non-input, the command for stop firing is output. May be good. In such a case, the peripheral control MPU can grasp that it is the time of contact with the handle 182 during the period from receiving the command at the time of launch permission to receiving the command at the time of firing stop.

Next, in the peripheral control MPU, depending on whether or not a command for permitting firing is input, it is grasped whether or not the steering wheel 182 is in contact with the steering wheel 182. The non-contact of the above is performed according to the elapse of a predetermined time. The execution control of such an effect will be described with reference to FIG. 322. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing an example of the command-related processing at the time of launch permission executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing.

As shown in FIG. 322, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not a command at the time of launch permission has been received (step S1701). Then, in the process of step S1701, when it is determined that the command at the time of launch permission has not been received, the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time to the handle 182 is regarded as the non-contact time to the handle 182. Count (add) (step S1702). This non-contact time counter increases as the state of not receiving the command at the time of launch permission continues, that is, as the non-contact with the handle 182 continues, and the state of not receiving the command at the time of launch permission It is possible to increase the non-contact time counter until the predetermined time continues, that is, until the predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182.

Following the process in step S1702, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the setting value change permission has been granted (step S1703). When the setting value change permission is started, the change permission start command is output from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU, and when the setting value change permission is completed, the change permission is output from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. By outputting the end command, it is possible to grasp whether or not the peripheral control MPU is in the state of permitting the change of the set value.

Then, in the process of step S1703, when it is determined that the change permission of the set value is not performed, whether or not the state in which the command at the time of launch permission has not been received continues for a predetermined time, that is, to the handle 182. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time of (step S1704). At this time, if it is determined that the state in which the command at the time of launch permission has not been received continues for a predetermined time, that is, the predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time to the handle 182, the non-contact to the handle 182 has elapsed for the predetermined time. As a corresponding effect, a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) in which the pachinko machine 1 is introduced is started and executed (step S1705). As the demonstration effect, for example, the effect of A → B → C is repeated by using voice, display, and lamp emission.

The demonstration effect starts when the non-contact with the handle 182 has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but the timing at which the predetermined time has elapsed is during the variable display of the symbol or the symbol. If it is within a predetermined period from the end of the variable display, the demo effect is not started, and the demo effect is started after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the variable display of the symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the demonstration effect from being started during the temporary separation from the handle 182, such as during the variable display of the symbol or within a predetermined period from the end of the variable display of the symbol.

Further, in the process of step S1703, when it is determined that the setting value change permission has been granted, a change permission effect for notifying that the setting value change permission has been granted is performed. Start and execute (step S1706). When the change is permitted, the voice that repeats "setting is being changed", the message "setting is being changed!" Is displayed, and the lamp is emitted in the corresponding color while the setting value is being changed.

Then, in the process of step S1703, even when it is determined that the setting value change permission has been granted, whether or not the state in which the command at the time of launch permission has not been received continues for a predetermined time, that is, to the handle 182. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time of (step S1707). At this time, if it is determined that the state in which the command for permission to fire has not been received continues for a predetermined time, that is, the predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time to the handle 182, the demonstration effect and the effect for change permission are performed in parallel. However, by giving priority to the effect when change permission is given to appearing outside the demo effect, the effect when change permission is allowed to be recognized from the outside is continued, and the demo effect is A demonstration effect standby timer that measures a predetermined standby time in order to delay the appearance timing to the outside is started (step S1708). In addition, "the effect when change permission is given priority over the demo effect" means that the demo effect execution program itself is the execution program of the change permission effect in a manner that the demo effect is not recognized from the outside. It can be illustrated that it is started internally in parallel, and more specifically, a layer of the demo effect image by the execution program of the demo effect and a layer of the effect image when the change is permitted by the execution program of the effect when change is permitted. Although all of the above are created, by setting the layer of the effect image when change permission is set as the front layer rather than the layer of the demo effect image, only the effect image when change permission is permitted as the image displayed on the effect display device 1600. It can be exemplified that it is visually recognized.

In this way, when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed as the non-contact time to the handle 182 in the state where the change permission of the set value is given, the effect at the time of change permission is prioritized over the demo effect, and the demo Although the effect is not executed, the demo effect can be executed because the effect when the change is permitted ends after the state in which the change permission of the set value is granted ends. At this time, after the end of the state in which the setting value change permission is executed, when the demo effect is executed, it is assumed that the demo effect has progressed by the time of the demo effect standby timer, and the demo effect is executed from the middle of the demo effect. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the process of step S1701, when it is determined that the command at the time of launch permission has been received, it is counted as the time of contact with the handle 182 with respect to the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time with the handle 182. (Addition) is not performed (step S1709). That is, as long as there is contact with the handle 182, the demonstration effect is not executed. In addition, when switching from the state where the command at the time of launch permission is not received to the state where the command at the time of launch permission is received, the non-contact time counter which was counted in the state where the command at the time of launch permission is not received is reset. There is.

Following the process of step S1709, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the symbol variation display is not performed (step S1710). At the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the variation start command is output from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU, and at the end of the variation display of the special symbol, the variation end command is output from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. By outputting the above, it is possible to grasp whether or not the peripheral control MPU is in the state of performing the variable display of the symbol.

Then, in the process of step S1710, when it is determined that the symbol variation display is not performed, when switching from the state in which the launch permission command is not received to the state in which the launch permission command is received. It is determined whether or not (step S1711). At this time, if it is determined that it is time to switch to the state of receiving the command at the time of launch permission, the game is started by switching to the state of contacting the handle 182 as an effect according to the contact with the handle 182. A steering wheel touch effect for notifying that the state has changed to a moist state is started and executed (step S1712). The steering wheel touch effect is a 1 to 2 second effect, with a voice saying "Game can be started", a message display saying "Game start!", And a lamp with a color corresponding to when switching to the state of being in contact with the steering wheel 182. It is supposed to emit light.

Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the state where the change permission of the set value is given will be described with reference to FIG. 323. FIG. 323 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 while changing the setting of the set value. In the state where the setting of the set value is changed, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is different from that in the state where the setting of the set value is not changed.

As shown in FIG. 323, when changing the setting of the set value, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in the power-on state, and then the pachinko machine 1 is in the power-on state. In some cases, it is necessary to shut off the power supply of the pachinko machine 1. When the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off) and the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the outer frame is closed. Work to open the main body frame 4 with respect to 2 (timing t1), then insert a metal setting key into the insertion port 1311ab of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning it 60 degrees and turning it on (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a while operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), it becomes possible to change the setting of the set value (change permission state). .. In such a change permission state, the set value (set value 1 to 6) can be changed each time the RAM clear switch that operates as a function of the setting switching button is pressed, and then the setting key switch 1311a The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the original position from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that was turned on. t4). That is, the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4 is a state in which the setting of the set value can be changed (change permission state), and after the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the set value is set. It becomes impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, by extracting the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player can play the game. Is ready to be performed.

In the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the launch permission logic is reversed as the logic of the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the game ball B is allowed to be launched. It is possible to set the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) and output a launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 regardless of whether or not it is in contact with the handle 182. Absent. That is, in the change permission state, even if the handle 182 is contacted and the handle 182 is rotated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a, the launch solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B is driven. Is in an impossible state (unable to fire). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, after shifting from the change permission state to the non-changeable state, the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input at the time of contact with the handle 182, and the launch permission signal is input. It is set to the launch permission logic as the logic of, and the launch permission signal is output to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. That is, in the unchangeable state, the handle 182 can be contacted and the handle 182 can be rotated to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a (launchable state).

Further, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the game ball B enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005, and the gate portion 2003. At that time, the detection of the game ball B by the detection sensor corresponding to each is treated as invalid. As a result, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for some reason during the work of changing the setting of the set value, the game progress due to it can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, after shifting from the change permission state to the non-changeable state, various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the large winning port 2005 When the game ball B enters the gate portion 2003, the detection of the game ball B by the corresponding detection sensors is treated as effective.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol (first special symbol) in the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 is set. , The second special symbol) is in a state where it is impossible to display the fluctuation (non-variable state). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, after shifting from the change permission state to the non-changeable state, it is possible to perform variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. It is in a state (variable state).

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, strictly speaking, when the control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, it is counted against the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time to the handle 182. Start (addition). Then, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control MPU sends a launch permission signal toward the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is contacted. Since there is no output and no command for permission to fire is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU grasps it as a non-contact with the handle 182. It is counted (added) to the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time to the handle 182. However, in the change permission state, even if a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182, the execution of the demo effect is delayed until the change permission state ends. That is, the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, is a state of waiting for the execution of the demo effect (demo effect standby state).

Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the state shifts from the change permission state to the non-changeable state, but in the change permission state, when a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time to the handle 182. Does not execute the production content of the demo production for the time that the execution of the demo production is delayed after the transition to the immutable state, but executes it from the middle of the demo production. On the other hand, when a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time with the handle 182 after the transition to the immutable state, the demonstration effect is executed from that time. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the demo effect can be executed (the demo effect can be executed) after the change permission state is changed to the non-changeable state.

Further, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the main control MPU sends a launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is contacted. Since there is no output and no command at the time of permission to fire is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU grasps it as a non-contact to the handle 182. There is. That is, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, even if there is a switch to the state in which the handle 182 is in contact, the handle touch effect cannot be executed (the handle touch effect cannot be executed). ).

Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, after shifting from the change permission state to the non-changeable state, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 when the handle 182 is contacted in the main control MPU. It is possible to output a launch permission signal toward the peripheral control board 1510 and output a launch permission time command toward the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, after shifting from the change permission state to the non-changeable state, switching to the state of contacting the handle 182 in the state where the symbol variation display is not performed. When there is, it is in a state where the handle touch effect can be executed (handle touch effect can be executed).

As described above, the demonstration effect is started when the state in which the command at the time of launch permission is not received continues for a predetermined time, that is, when the predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182. When the demonstration effect is started when the state in which the ball has not entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the change display of the symbol is not performed continues for a predetermined time as in the conventional case, the operation of the handle 182 is performed. Even if it is inside (even if there is contact with the handle 182), if the state of not entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 continues, the demonstration production will start and the player will be annoyed. There was a drawback that it made me sick. In this regard, in this example, the demonstration effect is started when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time with the handle 182, but as long as the handle 182 is in contact, the game is to be started. Since it is considered that there is a will and the demonstration production is not started, it is possible to prevent the player from being frustrated.

Further, during the permission to change the set value, the main control MPU does not output a launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched, and the periphery is not output. Since the command at the time of permission to fire is not output to the peripheral control MPU of the control board 1510, it is grasped in the peripheral control MPU as the time when the steering wheel 182 is not contacted. That is, during the permission to change the set value, the peripheral control MPU grasps that the contact time with the handle 182 is the non-contact time with the handle 182, and indicates the non-contact time with the handle 182. It is counting (adding) to the non-contact time counter. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time with the handle 182, including the time when the setting value change permission is performed, the demonstration effect is started. As a result, the setting value change permission is given when the power is turned on, and even if the hall manager changes the setting value setting near the start of business in the hall, the demonstration production will start by the time of business start. be able to. For example, if the time when the setting value is permitted to be changed is not included in the non-contact time with the handle 182, the start of the demo production will be delayed by that time, but such a situation. Can be prevented.

In addition, when a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182 while the setting value change is permitted, the demo effect and the change permission effect are executed in parallel, but the change permission is performed rather than the demo effect. It is possible to give priority to the production and make it appear to the outside, and after the end of the state where the setting value change permission is given (after the end of the production when the change permission is given), the demo production can be made to appear to the outside. .. That is, even if a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182 while the setting value change permission is being granted, the demonstration effect is performed until the state in which the setting value change permission is granted ends. Is trying to delay the appearance timing to the outside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the hall manager from being hindered by the demo effect because the demo effect is not executed while the setting value change is permitted.

In addition, if a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182 while the setting value change permission is being granted, the demonstration effect is executed until the state in which the setting value change permission is granted ends. Although it is delayed, when the demo production is executed, it is assumed that the demo production has progressed by the amount of time that the execution of the demo production is delayed, and the demo production is executed from the middle of the demo production. As the demo effect, for example, the effect of A → B → C is set to be repeated, but the time until the end of the state in which the setting value change permission is given is the time until the middle of the demo effect B. If has passed, it will be executed from the middle of the demo effect B after the end of the state in which the setting value change permission is given. Further, in the hall, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side on the game island, and before the start of business, the power is simultaneously turned on to the plurality of pachinko machines 1 provided on the game island. To. In this regard, it is assumed that the setting value change permission is given to one pachinko machine 1 when the power is turned on, and even if the setting value setting change is made, the setting value change permission is given. After the end of, the demo production can be executed in the same progress as the progress of the demo production being executed by the other pachinko machine 1. As a result, the progress of the demonstration production for multiple pachinko machines 1 does not change after the opening of the hall, so the setting change work of the hall manager is performed before the opening of the business just by visually recognizing the demonstration production. It is not possible to grasp whether or not it is, and it is possible to maintain fair provision of games.

In addition, as a demonstration effect, the pachinko machine 1 is introduced by using voice, display, and lamp light emission. Then, when a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182 during the permission to change the set value, it is based on the demonstration effect until the state in which the permission to change the set value is granted ends. I try not to do all of the sound, display, and lamp emission. On the other hand, if a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182 while the setting value change permission is being granted, the demonstration effect is performed until the state in which the setting value change permission is granted ends. It may be possible not to perform only a part of the based voice, display, and lamp emission. For example, if only the sound, display, or lamp emission based on the demo effect is not displayed until the state in which the setting value change permission is granted ends, the display based on the demo effect will be displayed. , It will be executed after the end of the state where the setting value change permission is given. Even with this, since a part of the demo effect is not started while the setting value change is permitted, it is possible to suppress the hall manager's setting change work from being hindered by the demo effect.

In this example, even during the confirmation display of the set value, the payout control board 633 may or may not be in contact with the handle 182 in the main control MPU, as in the case of permitting the change of the set value. It does not output a launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b, and does not output a launch permission command to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. That is, even during the confirmation display of the set value, the peripheral control MPU grasps that the contact with the handle 182 is the non-contact with the handle 182, as in the case of the permission to change the set value. , The non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time to the handle 182 is counted (added). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time with the handle 182, including the time when the confirmation display of the set value is being performed, the demonstration effect is executed. In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time with the handle 182 during the confirmation display of the set value, the effect at the time of permission to change is prioritized over the demo effect, and the confirmation display of the set value is performed. It is possible to perform a demo production after the end of. That is, even if a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182 during the confirmation display of the set value, the demonstration effect is performed until the state in which the confirmation display of the set value is performed ends. I try to delay the execution. As a result, the demo effect is not executed even during the confirmation display of the set value, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager's setting confirmation work from being hindered by the demo effect.

As described above, in the state where the change display of the symbol is not performed, when switching from the state where the command at the time of launch permission is not received to the state where the command at the time of launch permission is received, that is, the handle 182 is touched. When there is a switch to the state, the handle touch effect is executed. That is, in the state where the variable display of the symbol is performed, the handle touch effect is not executed even if the state is switched to the state where the handle 182 is in contact with the handle 182. As a result, the handle touch effect is not executed during the variable display of the symbol, and it is possible to prevent the handle touch effect from hindering the visual recognition of the variable display of the symbol.

Further, during the permission to change the set value, the main control MPU does not output a launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched, and the periphery is not output. Since the command at the time of permission to fire is not output to the peripheral control MPU of the control board 1510, it is grasped in the peripheral control MPU as the time when the steering wheel 182 is not contacted. For this reason, it is impossible to display the variation of the symbol while the change of the set value is permitted, but even if there is a switch to the state of being in contact with the handle 182, the handle touch effect can be executed. Absent. As a result, the steering wheel touch effect is not executed while the setting value change is permitted, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager's setting change work from being hindered by the handle touch effect.

In addition, as the steering wheel touch effect, the voice "The game can be started", the message "Game start!" Is displayed, and the lamp is emitted in the corresponding color when switching to the state of being in contact with the steering wheel 182. Then, when the setting value is changed and the handle 182 is switched to the state of being in contact with the handle 182, the sound, the display, and the lamp light emission based on the handle touch effect are not performed. On the other hand, if there is a switch to the state where the steering wheel 182 is in contact with the setting value change permission, only a part of the voice, display, and lamp emission based on the steering wheel touch effect is not performed. May be good. For example, only the display of the voice, the display, and the lamp light emission based on the steering wheel touch effect may be not performed, and the other voice and the lamp light emission may be performed. As a result, since a part of the handle touch effect is not executed while the setting value change is permitted, it is possible to prevent the hall manager's setting change work from being hindered by the handle touch effect.

Further, during the permission to change the set value, the main control MPU does not output a launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and launches to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to output a launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 after the permission to change the set value and the confirmation display of the set value are completed, while the command at the time of permission is not output. It is possible to output a command at the time of launch permission to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, if the handle 182 is continuously in contact with the handle 182 from before the end of the setting value change permission to after the end, the firing permission signal is output even after the end of the setting value change permission. There is no command, and no command is output when firing is permitted. From this, even if there is continuous contact with the steering wheel 182 after the end of permission to change the set value, the peripheral control MPU grasps it as a non-contact with the handle 182. There is no need to perform a handle touch effect. In such a case, after the setting value change permission and the setting value confirmation display are completed, the launch permission signal and the launch permission command can be output by temporarily releasing the handle 182 and touching again. It can be done, and the handle touch effect can be executed.

In this example, even during the confirmation display of the set value, the payout control board 633 may or may not be in contact with the handle 182 in the main control MPU, as in the case of permitting the change of the set value. It does not output a launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b, and does not output a launch permission command to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. That is, even during the confirmation display of the set value, it is impossible to display the variation of the symbol, but as in the case of permitting the change of the set value, the peripheral control MPU switches to the state of being in contact with the handle 182. Even if there is, it is grasped as a non-contact with the handle 182, and the handle touch effect is not executed. As a result, the steering wheel touch effect is not executed even during the confirmation display of the set value, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager's confirmation display work from being hindered by the handle touch effect.

[About a modified example of the start timing of counting the non-contact time with the steering wheel]
In the above, while the change of the set value is permitted, the peripheral control MPU counts against the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time with the handle 182 regardless of whether or not the contact with the handle 182 is performed. (Addition). Then, when a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time with the handle 182 including the time when the setting value change permission is performed, it is possible to start the demonstration effect. On the other hand, during the permission to change the set value, the peripheral control MPU counts against the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time with the handle 182 regardless of whether or not it is in contact with the handle 182. (Addition) may be prevented, and counting (addition) to the non-contact time counter may be started at the end of permission to change the set value. That is, the demonstration effect may be started when a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182 without including the time when the setting value change permission is performed. An example of such a modification will be described with reference to FIG. 324. FIG. 324 is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 while changing the setting of the set value.

First, in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the non-contact time indicating the non-contact time with the handle 182 is indicated in the peripheral control MPU regardless of whether or not the contact with the handle 182 is performed. It is prohibited to count (add) to the counter. That is, in the change permission state during the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the demo effect cannot be started (demo effect standby state).

Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the state shifts from the change permission state to the non-changeable state. At such a timing, the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time to the handle 182 is Counting (addition) has started. Then, when a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time with the handle 182 after the transition to the immutable state, the demonstration production is started from that point. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, after the transition from the change permission state to the non-changeable state, at least until a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time with the handle 182, the demonstration effect It is in the state of waiting for execution (demo production waiting state).

Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, if there is no contact with the handle 182 after the transition from the change permission state to the non-changeable state until a predetermined time elapses, the handle 182 is contacted. A predetermined time elapses as a non-contact time, and a demonstration effect is executed. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the state shifts from the change permitted state to the non-changeable state, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point, the demo effect can be executed (demo). It is in a state where the production can be executed).

In this way, during the permission to change the set value, counting (addition) to the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time to the handle 182 is prohibited, and from the end of the permission to change the set value. , The non-contact time counter is counted (added). That is, from the end of the permission to change the set value, the demo effect is not executed until the predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182, and after the predetermined time elapses, the demo effect is produced. It is possible to execute. As a result, it is possible to prevent the hall manager from being hindered by the demo effect because the demo effect is not executed while the setting value change is permitted.

Further, as the demonstration effect, for example, the effect of A → B → C is set to be repeated, but a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time to the handle 182 starting from the end of the permission to change the set value. Since the demo effect is executed later, when the demo effect is executed, it is possible to execute the demo effect A, which is the first effect. As a result, after the permission to change the set value is completed, it can be executed from the beginning of the demo effect, and the player who wants to see from the beginning of the demo effect can be satisfied.

Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at the timing t4, the change permission state is changed to the non-changeable state. At such a timing, the effect member mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 (for example, , The effect operation unit 301, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back-up rear decoration body 3451, etc.) have started the initial operation. Each of such effect members can operate between the initial position and the operation position, and in the initial operation of the effect member, the effect member moves from the initial position (evacuation position) to the operation position (appearance position). ), And accurate alignment so that the effect member stands by at the initial position will be performed. Then, after the initial operation of the effect member is completed, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member. For example, as a fluctuation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a fluctuation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, the symbol is transmitted. The effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation.

Further, in the present modification, the initial operation of the effect member is completed before the predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time with the handle 182 after the transition to the immutable state. That is, the predetermined time from the transition to the immutable state to the start of the demo effect is set to be longer than the time from the start to the completion of the initial operation of the effect member after the transition to the immutable state. doing. In such a case, it is possible to start the demonstration effect after completing the initial operation of the effect member after the transition to the immutable state. As a result, the initial operation of the effect member may need to be visually confirmed when a problem occurs in the operation of the effect member, but by not starting the demo effect during the initial operation of the effect member. , It is possible to prevent the demonstration effect from hindering the visual work for the initial operation of the effect member. Further, when the effect member is operated as a demo effect, the effect member cannot be operated as a demo effect unless the initial operation of the effect member is completed before the start of the demo effect. However, by completing the initial operation of the effect member before starting the demo effect, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation.

In this modified example, the initial operation of the effect member is started at the time of transition to the immutable state, but before the transition to the immutable state (that is, during the change permission state), the effect member The initial operation may be started. In such a case, even if the initial operation of the effect member is started before the transition to the immutable state, the initial operation of the effect member is not completed at the time of transition to the immutable state. There is a possibility that the initial operation of the effect member will be completed after the transition to the immutable state. However, by setting a predetermined time until the demo effect is started after the transition to the immutable state, the demo effect is not started during the initial operation of the effect member that continues after the transition to the immutable state. It is possible to prevent the demonstration effect from hindering the visual work for the initial operation of the effect member.

Further, in the initial operation of the effect member, it is confirmed whether the effect member operates normally from the initial position (evacuation position) to the operation position (appearance position), and an accurate position so that the effect member stands by at the initial position. Matching etc. are performed, but only if there is no abnormality in the initial operation of the production member, the production is performed before the predetermined time elapses until the demonstration production is started after the transition to the immutable state. The initial operation of the member may be completed. That is, when some abnormality occurs in the initial operation of the effect member, it is repeated to check whether the effect member operates normally from the initial position to the operation position, or to repeat accurate alignment. In such a case, the time required for the initial operation of the effect member becomes long, and the demonstration effect may be started during the initial operation of the extended effect member. Even in such a case, if there is no abnormality in the initial operation of the effect member, the demo effect is not started during the initial operation of the effect member, and the demo effect hinders the visual work for the initial operation of the effect member. Can be prevented.

In this modification, it is prohibited to count (add) to the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time to the handle 182 even during the confirmation display of the set value, as in the case of permitting the change of the set value. From the end of the confirmation display of the set value, it is counted (added) to the non-contact time counter. That is, from the end of the confirmation display of the set value, the demo production is not started until the predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182, and after the predetermined time elapses, the demo production is performed. It is possible to start. As a result, the demo effect is not started even during the confirmation display of the set value, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager's confirmation display work from being hindered by the demo effect.

[About the count limit of the base monitor]
Next, the base monitor 1310h will be described with reference to FIG. 320. The game area 5a, which is partitioned on the game board 5, is provided with a plurality of entry ports into which the game ball B can enter. Of the plurality of entry openings, the winning openings for which the prize balls are paid out by entering the ball are the plurality of winning openings that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be accepted (here, four). The general winning opening 2001 and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and the game ball B is the gate portion. By accepting the game ball B into the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through 2003. The first big winning opening 2005, which allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a second special winning opening 2006 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

Further, among the plurality of entry ports, the out port for collecting the game ball B that has not entered the winning opening is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a, and the game ball B is discharged from the game area 5a. It includes an out port 2010, a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 that are provided in the middle of the game area 5a in the vertical direction and discharge the game ball B from the game area 5a.

In addition, among the game balls launched into the game area 5a, the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006. B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first large winning opening sensor 2402, and the second major winning opening sensor 2601, and is detected by the out opening 2010 and the first sub-out opening. The game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012 in 2011 are detected by the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out-port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out-port sensor 3054, and these detection signals are mainly transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. It is input to the control MPU.

The main control MPU is the number of balls (number of balls) of the game ball B that has entered the entry port (winning opening, out opening) provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, that is, within the game area 5a. The number of balls of the game ball B discharged from the player is counted. Further, the main control MPU counts the number of balls (payout number) of the game ball B to be paid out from the payout device 580 by entering the winning opening. Then, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, stores the calculation result in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. As a formula for calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, (number of payouts ÷ number of balls entered) × 100 can be mentioned. For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is too high, it is possible that only the winning openings, which are the targets for paying out the prize balls by entering the balls, are entering the ball. By monitoring the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h, it is possible to grasp whether or not the ball has been entered into the winning opening due to fraudulent activity.

In this example, the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B that has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is determined only in the case of the low probability non-time saving state among the plurality of gaming states. The number of balls (payout number) of the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 is counted and reflected in the display on the base monitor 1310h. In the low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) and the high-probability time-saving state (probability change state), the number of balls of the game ball B to be paid out from the payout device 580 also increases because the ball enters the second starting port 2004 frequently. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls tends to increase. In other words, whether or not the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered increases depends on the period of low probability time saving state (time saving state) and high probability time saving state (probability change state). By excluding the period, if there is no cheating, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered can be kept within a certain range.

Further, in this example, the base monitor 1310h displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, but the number of balls of the game ball B (number of balls entered) entered into the entry opening (winning opening, out opening). ) And the number of game balls B to be paid out from the payout device 580 (the number of payouts), respectively.

In this example, whether or not to count the number of game balls B that have entered the entry port (winning opening, out opening) is different depending on whether or not the handle 182 is in contact with the handle 182. There is. Execution control for such a base monitor 1310h will be described with reference to FIG. 325. FIG. 325 is. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ball count processing executed by the timer interrupt processing of a main control side.

As shown in FIG. 325, the main control MPU first determines whether or not there has been a ball in the entry port (winning opening, out opening) (step S1801). Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port), a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 was stopped. It is determined whether or not the ball is entered later (step S1802). In the process of step S1802, when it is determined that the ball does not enter after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is stopped, the ball is not entered from the handle touch sensor 192. The ball is entered in a state where the detection signal is input or in a state where the predetermined time has not elapsed since the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is stopped. In such a case, the ball is entered. Counting is performed against a counting counter indicating the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the ball opening (winning opening, out opening) (step S1803). In other words, when entering the ball while it is in contact with the handle 182, or when entering the ball within a predetermined time after releasing the hand from the handle 182, the ball is entered into the entry opening (winning opening, out opening). It is possible to count against a counting counter that indicates the number of balls of the game ball B.

In the process of step S1802, if it is determined that the ball has entered after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is stopped, a symbol (special symbol) is used. It is determined whether or not the ball has entered in the variable display of (step S1804). Then, when it is determined that the ball is not entered during the variable display of the symbol (special symbol), the ball is entered within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) is stopped. Whether or not it is determined (step S1805). In the process of step S1804, when it is determined that the ball has entered the ball during the variation display of the symbol (special symbol), or in the process of step S1805, within a predetermined time after the variation display of the symbol (special symbol) is stopped. If it is determined that the ball has entered, the ball is counted against a counting counter indicating the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (step S1803).

In the process of step S1805, if it is determined that the ball has not been entered within a predetermined time after the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) is stopped, the game ball that has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) It does not count against the counting counter indicating the number of balls (step S1806). That is, among the incoming balls after a predetermined time has elapsed since the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 was stopped, the incoming ball after a predetermined time has passed since the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) was stopped. Does not count against the counting counter indicating the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening). When such a situation occurs, that is, when a situation occurs in which the ball is not counted against the counting counter even though there is a ball in the ball entry port (winning port, out port), the effect display device 1600 or the like is used. It is used to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality (step S1807). In addition, if there is a situation in which the ball is not counted against the counting counter even though there is a ball in the ball entry port (winning port, out port), the ball is already counted before such a situation occurs. I try to keep the information that I have.

As described above, for entering a ball in contact with the handle 182 and entering a ball within a predetermined time after releasing the handle 182, the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is used. It is a target to be counted against a counting counter indicating the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered. This is because it takes a certain amount of time from when the game ball B is launched to when it comes into contact with the handle 182 and enters the entry port (winning opening, out opening), so take your hand off the handle 182. There is a high possibility that the ball will be entered in a regular game if the ball is entered within a predetermined time. From this, it is possible to maintain the accuracy of the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h even if the ball enters the ball within a predetermined time after the handle 182 is released, even if the ball is counted by the counting counter. ..

On the other hand, for a ball entering after a predetermined time has passed after releasing the hand from the handle 182, as a general rule, a counting counter indicating the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is used. On the other hand, it is not counted. It takes a certain amount of time from when the game ball B is launched to when it comes into contact with the handle 182 and enters the entrance (winning opening, out opening), but it exceeds such time. Regarding entry, it is unlikely that the entry is in a regular game. For example, if a large number of game balls B are illegally inserted into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 by using a magnet or the like among the entry ports (winning opening, out opening), a payout device is used. Since the number of game balls B paid out from the 580 increases, the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entered balls increases as the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h, and the illegal act can be grasped. However, if the number of balls of all the game balls B that have entered the entry port (winning opening, out opening) is counted, many game balls B are inserted into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004. If a large number of game balls B are illegally inserted into the out opening by releasing the handle 182 and opening the door frame 3 after the ball is made, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is large. It becomes low from the excessive state, and it becomes difficult to grasp the illegal act from the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h. In this regard, in this example, for a ball entering after a predetermined time has passed since the hand was released from the handle 182, a count indicating the number of balls of the game ball B that entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening). Since the counter is not counted, the accuracy of the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h can be maintained, and a trace of an illegal act can be left.

In addition, among the incoming balls after a predetermined time has passed since the hand was released from the handle 182, the fluctuation display of the symbol (special symbol) is being displayed, or the fluctuation display of the symbol (special symbol) is stopped within the predetermined time. The ball entry is targeted to be counted against a counting counter that indicates the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port). In such a situation, when paying attention to the variable display of the symbol (special symbol), it is highly likely that the user simply releases the handle 182 and waits, and the handle 182 is released and illegal. This is because it is unlikely that the player is trying to enter the ball into the entrance (winning opening, out opening).

According to the above, after a predetermined time has passed since the hand was released from the handle 182, among the entry ports (winning opening, out opening), the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 were illegally used by using a magnet or the like. When a large number of game balls B are continuously entered into the ball, the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is shown for the first entry. It is not the target to be counted against the counting counter. However, for the second and subsequent balls that are continuous from the first ball, the fluctuation display of the symbol (special symbol) is performed based on the entry of the first ball, so the target to be counted by the counting counter. Will be. In this respect, for example, when there is an incoming ball that is not to be counted by the counting counter, the subsequent consecutive incoming balls may not be counted by the counting counter. According to this, after a predetermined time has passed since the hand was released from the handle 182, the ball was entered into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which was illegally entered. Since it is not a target for counting with respect to the counting counter indicating the number of balls of the game ball B that has entered the mouth and the out mouth), the accuracy of the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h can be maintained.

In this example, for the ball entering after a predetermined time has passed since the hand was released from the handle 182, in principle, the number of balls of the game ball B entered into the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is used. Although it is not targeted for counting with respect to the counting counter shown, only a part of the entry openings (winning openings, out openings) (only winning openings, only out openings, only part of winning openings, only part of out openings) , Any of) may be targeted and not counted against the counting counter. For example, when only the out opening is targeted among the entry openings (winning opening, out opening), the ball is illegally entered into the out opening by releasing the handle 182 and opening the door frame 3. The number of balls of the game ball B can be excluded, and the accuracy of the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h can be maintained.

Further, in this example, for the ball entering after a predetermined time has passed since the hand was released from the handle 182, as a general rule, the number of balls of the game ball B entered into the entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is used. Although it is not targeted for counting with respect to the counting counter shown, a predetermined time has elapsed since the handle 182 was released, apart from the number of balls of the game ball B that entered the ball entry port (winning opening, out opening). The number of incoming balls may be counted, and the counting result may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h or another display device. In such a case, after a predetermined time has elapsed after releasing the hand from the handle 182, the game ball B that has abnormally entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) has been abnormally entered. Even so, detailed information can be grasped.

[Regarding execution restrictions for setting suggestion effects]
In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed. In this embodiment, the ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 (excluding one general winning opening 2001 provided in the right area of the game area 5a) provided in the left area of the game area 5a. At that time, as an audio output from the speaker, a ball entry sound is output to inform that the ball has entered the first start port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001, but the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the general winning port 2001. A setting suggestion sound that suggests a set value is output as a setting suggestion effect instead of a simple ball entry sound. Execution control of such an incoming ball sound and a setting suggestion sound will be described with reference to FIG. 326. FIG. 326 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion effect related processing executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing.

As shown in FIG. 326, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not the ball has entered the entrance of the ball to be executed for the setting suggestion effect. Specifically, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a ball in the first starting opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 (step S1901). When the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the general winning port 2001, the command at the time of entering the ball is output from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU, so that the peripheral control MPU has the first starting port 2002 or It is possible to grasp that there was a ball in the general winning opening 2001.

In the process of step S1901, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first starting port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001, the execution pattern of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step S1902). In this embodiment, as the execution pattern of the setting suggestion effect, some restrictions are added to the normal execution pattern in which no restriction is applied to the execution of the setting suggestion effect and the normal execution pattern in which the execution of the setting suggestion effect is executed. It has a limited execution pattern A and a restricted execution pattern B in which a larger restriction is applied to the execution of the setting suggestion effect than the restricted execution pattern A, and the player selects one of these execution patterns. By performing various setting / output processing related to setting suggestion according to the selected execution pattern, the estimation level of the set value in the game progress process can be changed according to the player's needs. The details of the restrictions on the execution of the setting suggestion effect will be described later.

Here, the setting suggestion effect of this embodiment will be described. The setting suggestion effect of this embodiment uses the ball entry sound output when a ball is entered at the first starting port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 in a normal game state, and this ball entry is used. By outputting the sound in a special mode different from the usual one, the set value is suggested to the player. Specifically, when there is a ball entering the first starting port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001, which is the entry target for executing the setting suggestion effect, the peripheral control MPU sets a predetermined random value X for the suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect. The random value Y is acquired, and the execution determination (execution lottery) of whether or not to output the setting suggestion sound consisting of sound data different from the normal incoming sound is performed based on the acquired random number X for suggestion effect. , A normal input sound or setting suggestion sound is output based on the result of the execution judgment. In the execution determination of the setting suggestion sound, the random value X for suggestion effect is used to determine whether or not the setting suggestion sound can be output with a probability of 1/500, which is lower than the probability of becoming a big hit. When determining the output of the setting suggestion sound, one of the setting suggestion sound A suggesting the low setting value, the setting suggestion sound B suggesting the high setting value, and the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6 is selected. , Determined according to the currently set value and the suggestion effect random value Y. Here, when the currently set set value is set values 1 to 3, the probability that the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value is higher than the setting suggestion sound B (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound) With reference to the low setting effect distribution table determined by (B = 7: 3 ratio), the effect determination is made according to the value of the suggestion effect random value Y. When the set values are 4 to 5, the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value has a higher probability than the setting suggestion sound A (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B = 3: 7). The effect determination is performed according to the value of the suggestion effect random value Y with reference to the high setting effect distribution table 1 to be determined. Further, when the setting value is 6, the setting suggestion sounds A to C including the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6 which is not determined when the setting values are 1 to 5 are set with a predetermined probability (setting). Suggestion sound A: Setting suggestion sound B: Setting suggestion sound C = 1: 5: 4) Refer to the high setting effect distribution table 2 to determine the effect according to the value of the suggestion effect random value Y. Is done. That is, since the setting suggestion sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, the low setting or the high setting cannot be determined by one output, but the setting When the suggestion sound C is output, it is confirmed that the currently set value is the set value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestion sound is output, it is possible to have an expectation according to the suggestion of the setting value that can be grasped from the setting suggestion sound.

In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state (normal state), the first starting port 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 (provided in the right area of the game area 5a) provided in the left area of the game area 5a are provided. A game aimed at entering a ball (excluding one general winning opening 2001) is being performed. Then, it is possible to output a ball entry sound and a setting suggestion sound when a ball is entered in the first start opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 only in the normal gaming state (normal state) among the plurality of gaming states. I have to. However, it may be possible to output a ball entry sound or a setting suggestion sound even during a hit game state or a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), which is another gaming state, and in such a case. May change the entry port of the execution target of the setting suggestion effect for each game state. For example, during the hit game state, a game aiming at entering the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 provided in the right side area of the game area 5a is performed, so that the setting suggestion effect is produced. The entry slot to be executed may be the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006, and in the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), it is provided in the right area of the game area 5a. Since the game aiming at entering the second starting port 2004 is performed, the entry port to be executed of the setting suggestion effect may be the second starting port 2004.

Further, in the present embodiment, as one of the setting suggestion effects, the effect display device 1600 sends a suggestion effect execution notification to inform that it is the output timing of the setting suggestion sounds when at least the setting suggestion sounds A to C are output. It is supposed to be displayed in. Unlike the setting suggestion sound, this suggestion effect execution notification does not suggest the setting value itself, but mainly informs the player that the setting value is suggested by the setting suggestion sound. In this embodiment, the setting is set. At the output timing of the suggestion sounds A to C, for example, a character image of "suggested" is displayed. Further, since this suggestion effect execution notification is positioned as an announcement to the player who missed the setting suggestion sound, any of the setting suggestion sounds A to C is displayed so that the setting suggestion sound is displayed even after the output is completed. It is set to display for a period longer than the output period. Further, in this suggestion effect execution notification, in order to make the player recognize the event that triggered the output notification of the setting suggestion sound, a predetermined image representing the event that triggered the output notification of the setting suggestion sound (a pending image described later) It is displayed in the vicinity of the bonus prize ball get image).

Further, the currently set value is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU, but at the timing when the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a fluctuation pattern command, the current setting value is present. The set value is also stored in the peripheral control MPU by being transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command, and the setting suggestion sounds A to C are determined based on the stored information.

In addition, as the type of normal ball entry sound when the setting suggestion sound is not output, the sound data in which the sound "pon" is output from the speaker in response to the ball entry into the first starting port 2002 and the general prize. Sound data in which a voice "poco" is output from the speaker corresponding to the entry into the mouth 2001 is provided separately. On the other hand, common sound data is used for the setting suggestion sound output corresponding to the entry into the first starting port 2002 and the setting suggestion sound output corresponding to the general winning opening 2001. As the setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value, sound data in which the sound "Bee" is output from the speaker is used, and as the setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value, "Bee" is called from the speaker. The sound data from which the sound is output is used, and as the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6, the sound data from which the sound "BBB" is output from the speaker is used. In this way, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is suggested by outputting the setting suggestion sound differently for each suggestion of the set value. It should be noted that the setting suggestion sound output corresponding to the entry into the first starting port 2002 and the setting suggestion sound output corresponding to the general winning opening 2001 are not common sound data but separate sound data. You may.

In the process of step S1902, after determining the execution pattern of the setting suggestion effect currently set by the player, first, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a normal execution pattern (step S1903). .. Then, in the case of the normal execution pattern, since the above-mentioned setting suggestion sound can be output, the execution determination (execution lottery) of whether or not to output the above-mentioned setting suggestion sound is performed (step S1904). ), The production distribution of the normal input sound or the setting suggestion sounds A to C is set and output according to the result of the execution determination (step S1905).

If it is determined in the process of step S1903 that the execution pattern is not the normal execution pattern, it is determined whether or not the execution pattern is the restriction execution pattern A relating to the limitation of the output of the setting suggestion sound (step S1906). If it is determined that the pattern is not the restricted execution pattern A, the restricted execution pattern B does not perform any setting suggestion effect. Therefore, all the setting suggestion effects including the output of the setting suggestion sound described above should not be performed. (Step S1908). That is, when the restriction execution pattern B is selected, although the suggestion effect random value X and the suggestion effect random value Y are acquired, the execution determination of whether or not to output the setting suggestion sound using them is determined. (Execution lottery) and directing distribution are not performed at all, and normal entry sounds are selectively executed.

Further, in the process of step S1906, when it is determined that the restriction execution pattern A is used, only the above-mentioned setting suggestion sound is not output as the setting suggestion effect as a limitation of some setting suggestion effects. (Step S1907). That is, even when the restriction execution pattern A is selected, although the suggestion effect random value X and the suggestion effect random value Y are acquired, the execution determination of whether or not to output the setting suggestion sound using them is determined. (Execution lottery) and directing distribution are not performed at all, and normal entry sounds are selectively executed. However, when the restricted execution pattern A is selected, unlike the case where the restricted execution pattern B is selected, the display of the suggestion effect execution notification indicating that it was the output timing of the setting suggestion sound is displayed. As with the normal execution pattern, it is performed without restrictions.

In this embodiment, the player operates the effect operation unit 301 to perform the above-mentioned execution pattern of the setting suggestion effect regardless of whether the symbol change is displayed or the symbol change is stopped. It makes it possible to select. That is, when the restricted execution patterns A and B are selected by the player operating the effect operation unit 301 and the execution of all or part of the setting suggestion effect is restricted, the selection is immediately reflected in the game. It is designed to let you. It should be noted that it is difficult to say that it is preferable for the player to know the set value immediately after the game hall is opened (for example, the first start winning prize, etc.) in view of the operation of the game machine and other game machines. Therefore, in this embodiment, the restriction execution pattern B is the default value at the time of power-on so that no setting suggestion effect is performed during a specific period (for example, 1 hour) after the power of the game machine is turned on. Is selected as. Further, during this specific period, even if the player operates the effect operation unit 301, it is impossible for the player to select the execution pattern of the setting suggestion effect. It should be noted that, after a specific period has passed since the power of the game machine was turned on, the player can make a selection, and even if the player has not made a selection, the restriction execution pattern B is made by the passage of the specific period. Is canceled and the pattern is switched to the normal execution pattern in which all setting suggestion effects are performed. As a result, it is possible to exert an effect of improving the interest of the player, such as when the player sits on the game machine after a while after the game hall is opened and the set value is found by the first starting prize or the like.

Next, selection of an execution pattern of the setting suggestion effect and a specific example of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 327 and 328. FIG. 327 is a specific production example when the normal execution pattern is selected (when the setting suggestion is not restricted at all), and FIG. 328 is when the restricted execution patterns A and B are selected (when the setting suggestion is not restricted). This is a concrete production example (when limiting part or all).

First, whether or not to limit the setting suggestion in the effect display device 1600 when the player performs a predetermined operation on the effect operation unit 301 during the change display of the symbol or the stop of the change of the symbol. It is possible to display a selection screen for selection (FIG. 327 (A)). Then, on the selection screen, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the effect operation unit 301 and selects "no restriction", when the ball is subsequently entered into the first start opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001. In addition, it is possible to execute all the setting suggestion effects including the setting suggestion sound without limiting the execution of the setting suggestion effect (FIG. 327 (B, B')).

Then, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is not restricted, the ball is entered into the first start port 2002 or the general winning port 2001, and at the timing when it is decided to output the setting suggestion sound, as an audio output from the speaker , The setting suggestion sound A suggesting the low setting value, the setting suggestion sound B suggesting the high setting value, and the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6 are output.

Further, the effect display device 1600 displays a hold display based on the fact that the ball has entered the first start port 2002, and at the upper part of the hold display, a suggestion effect telling that it was the output timing of the setting suggestion sound. As an execution notification, a "suggested" message is displayed. As a result, the player can be made to grasp the set value depending on the output of the setting suggestion sound, and depending on the display of the suggestion effect execution notification, the set value is set by the setting suggestion sound caused by entering the ball into the first starting port 2002. It is possible to make the player understand only what is suggested. Regarding the hold display, the display position moves each time the hold is exhausted, and the hold display is deleted when the variable display of the symbol is finished when the hold is exhausted, and it is displayed at the top of the hold display. The "suggested" message display is moved along with the movement of the hold display, and is deleted at the same time as the hold display is deleted. Further, in this embodiment, a privilege grant display (display of bonus prize ball get!) Indicates that a small amount of prize balls are given to the player based on entering the general prize opening 2001 in the normal game state. ) Is displayed, and when the setting suggestion sound is output based on entering the general winning opening 2001, it is indicated that the setting suggestion sound is output at the upper part of the privilege grant hold display. As a suggestion effect execution notification to convey, a message display of "suggestion" is displayed. As a result, the player can be made to grasp the set value depending on the output of the setting suggestion sound as in the case of entering the first starting port 2002, and the general winning opening 2001 depending on the display of the suggestion effect execution notification. It is possible to make the player understand only that the set value is suggested by the setting suggestion sound caused by entering the ball. In addition, about the privilege grant display, it is deleted after a predetermined period (3 seconds in this embodiment) from the start of the display, and about the message display of "suggestion" displayed at the top of the privilege grant display. Is supposed to be deleted at the same time as the privilege grant display is deleted.

On the other hand, on the selection screen, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the effect operation unit 301 and selects "restrict", the player is made to select a more specific restriction content as the next step. The selection screen is displayed (FIGS. 328 (B, D)). Then, on the selection screen for allowing the player to select the specific restriction content, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the effect operation unit 301 and selects "restriction A", the first start port is thereafter. When the ball enters 2002 or the general winning opening 2001, the execution of some setting suggestion effects is restricted, and it is possible to output the entry sound that does not suggest the set value without outputting the setting suggestion sound (). FIG. 328 (C, C')).

Then, when "Restriction A" is selected, it is determined as the audio output from the speaker at the timing when it is decided to enter the first starting port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 and output the setting suggestion sound. The input sound that does not suggest the set value is output as in the case where it is decided not to output the setting suggestion sound without outputting the setting suggestion sound. At this time, as in the case of outputting the setting suggestion sound to the effect display device 1600, as a suggestion effect execution notification indicating that it was the output timing of the setting suggestion sound at the upper part of the hold display and the privilege grant display, " The message "Suggested" is displayed. In this way, when "Limit A" is selected, the setting suggestion sound is not output, so that the player cannot grasp the set value, but the setting suggestion sound may be displayed depending on the display of the suggestion effect execution notification. Only the suggestion of the set value can be grasped by the player.

Further, on the selection screen for allowing the player to select the specific restriction content, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the effect operation unit 301 and selects "restriction B", the first start port is thereafter. When the ball enters 2002 or the general winning opening 2001, the execution of any setting suggestion effect is restricted, and the input sound that does not suggest the set value can be output without outputting the setting suggestion sound (Fig.). 328 (E, E')).

Then, when "Restriction B" is selected, it is determined as the audio output from the speaker at the timing when it is decided to enter the first starting port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 and output the setting suggestion sound. As in the case of deciding not to output the setting suggestion sound without outputting the setting suggestion sound, the ball entry sound that does not suggest the set value is output, and the suggestion effect execution notification is not executed. ing. In this way, when "Restriction B" is selected, not only the setting suggestion sound but also the suggestion effect execution notification is not executed, the player is not made to grasp the set value, and the set value is suggested. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the sound is correct.

As described above, in this example, the player operates the effect operation unit 301 in advance, so that the player can select whether or not to limit the execution of the setting suggestion effect. As a result, for the player who wants to grasp the set value by the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is selected not to be restricted, and for the player who does not want to grasp the set value by the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is restricted. It is possible to meet the needs of the player even though the configuration suggests the set value.

Further, in this example, as a restriction mode of the setting suggestion effect, a restriction execution pattern A with a partial restriction of the setting suggestion effect is provided, and a setting suggestion sound that may be directly linked to the estimation of the set value is not output. The suggestion effect execution notification for notifying that the setting suggestion effect has been performed is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as in the case where the output of the setting suggestion sound is not restricted. As a result, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who wants to recognize only the suggestion effect execution notification that informs that some setting suggestion effect has been performed.

Further, regarding the selection of whether or not to restrict the execution of the setting suggestion effect, the player performs a predetermined operation on the effect operation unit 301 regardless of whether the symbol variation is displayed or the symbol variation is stopped. By doing so, it is possible to reflect it promptly. As a result, it is possible to switch whether or not to limit the execution of the setting suggestion effect at the player's desired timing, and it is possible to meet the needs of the player.

In this example, as the suggestion effect execution notification, the message display of "suggestion" displayed at the top of the hold display and the privilege grant display is deleted along with the deletion of the hold display and the privilege grant display. However, the message display may be deleted before the hold display or the privilege grant display is deleted. For example, the message display may be deleted at the time when the variable display of the symbol related to the hold display is started. In this example, the hold display is displayed even during the variable display of the symbol related to the hold display. For example, if a message display is attached to the hold display, the symbol related to the hold display is displayed. There is a possibility that some kind of expectation may be given to the variable display. In this regard, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by deleting the message display at the time when the variable display of the symbol related to the hold display is started.

Further, in this example, as a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value, a setting suggestion sound suggesting the set value is output when the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001. However, such a setting suggestion effect is not limited to the setting suggestion sound as long as it suggests a set value, and may be executed by using any of voice, display, and lamp emission. Further, the suggestion effect execution notification may be executed by using any of voice, display, and lamp light emission as long as it conveys that it is the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect. Even in such a case, the same effect as described above can be obtained by letting the player select whether or not to limit the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in this example, it is possible to limit the output of the setting suggestion sound by selecting whether or not to limit the execution of the setting suggestion effect, but the player performs a predetermined operation on the effect operation unit 301. By performing, it is possible to adjust the volume of the game sound output from the speaker, and when the volume of the game sound is adjusted to zero, the output of the setting suggestion sound is limited (not output). May be good. However, when the volume of the game sound is adjusted to zero, the output of the ball entry sound that does not suggest a set value is also limited (not output) when the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the general winning port 2001. ..

In addition, when the reach effect after the reach formation executes the reach effect with high expectation during the variable display of the symbol (decorative pattern), the first start port 2002 is performed during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation. When the ball enters the general winning opening 2001, the output of the entry sound that does not suggest the set value is limited (not output), but the output of the setting suggestion sound is not limited. In this way, during the execution of the reach production with high expectation, even if the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001, the ball entering sound that does not suggest the set value is not output. The sound does not interfere with the attention to the highly anticipated reach production. On the other hand, during the execution of the reach effect with high expectation, the setting suggestion sound can be output when the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the general winning port 2001, but the setting suggestion effect is executed in advance. By selecting to limit, the setting suggestion sound is not output, and it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion sound from obstructing the attention to the highly expected reach effect.

Further, in this example, as a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value, a setting suggestion sound suggesting the set value is output when the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001. However, such a setting suggestion effect may be executed not only at the time of entering the first starting port 2002 or the general winning port 2001, but also at a predetermined timing of the effect. For example, during the variable display of a symbol (decorative symbol), when the reach effect after the reach formation executes the reach effect with high expectation, the reach effect at the time of loss is executed to stop and display the lost symbol as the stop symbol. In the case, the stop effect is executed during the temporary stop period at the end of the reach effect at the time of loss, but it may be possible to output the setting suggestion sound as a part of such stop effect. .. In the temporary stop period, after the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the stop display is confirmed from the state in which the stop symbol of the decorative symbol sways and fluctuates (the state in which the decorative symbol sways in small steps up and down or left and right). It is a period until (about 1 to 2 seconds). In addition, when the stop effect is executed, it is confirmed that the decorative symbol will not be stopped and displayed again from the state where the lost symbol is shaken and fluctuated, and the decorative symbol will be stopped and displayed again. No expectation is given as to whether or not to start.

Specifically, in the stop production, character A appears when it is decided to output the setting suggestion sound, and character B appears when it is decided not to output the setting suggestion sound. Has been done. That is, the character A is a character that appears when the setting value is suggested by the setting suggestion sound, the character B is a character that appears when the setting value is not suggested, and the character A is the setting suggestion sound. It corresponds to the suggestion effect execution notification that tells that it was the output timing of. Then, when the character A appears, a setting suggestion sound is output, but as a setting suggestion sound suggesting a low setting value, a voice "Leave it to me" is output from the speaker, and a setting suggestion sound suggesting a high setting value is output. The voice "chance" is output from the speaker, and the voice "congratulations" is output from the speaker as the setting suggestion sound suggesting the setting value 6. Even in such a configuration, the same effect as described above can be obtained by allowing the player to select whether or not to limit the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine is exemplified as the game machine, but it can also be applied to other game machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (a plurality of drums using a game medal) ( It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a rotating drum or reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. 329. FIG. 329 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 329, the slot machine 6000 is configured to include a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box body) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, the front door (front frame) 6002 can be turned into the main body by inserting the key into the keyhole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turning it clockwise. It can be opened from the part (box body) 6004.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to form the main body (box body) 6004. It is used for opening / closing and locking with the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to a metal columnar cylinder body (not shown) extending forward and backward, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. It includes a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates with the rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear, and the rear end is mounted on the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is located at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end to the front. It has a pair of notched notches. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004, the metal transmission cylinder of the metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted in the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder to be rotated. When the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed to the main body (box) 6004 and the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other, the metal is made of metal. The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit also functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to impart rigidity, and the main body part (not shown) via a door frame metal ground wire. It is electrically connected to the grounding board provided inside the box body) 6004. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This ground board (not shown) can temporarily collect electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground (earth) to the island equipment of the game hall, and the island of the game hall is grounded via the island equipment ground wire (not shown). It is electrically connected to the ground of the equipment.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is arranged on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. There is. This release switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal due to the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. The opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 independently of the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not located near the metal locking device, and is located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An release switch is arranged on the portion (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise invades the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative portions. Some of these various decorative parts are not decorated at all, while others are decorated on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is a precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and since it has conductivity, electromagnetic noise may enter. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit constituting the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. Some are electrically connected). As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, so that it is possible to prevent the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the substrate ground. In addition, among various decorative parts, electromagnetic noise that has penetrated into those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is connected. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, and is transmitted from the ground board to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

An electrostatic elimination pad may be provided as a static eliminator at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box body) 6004. An electrostatic eliminator pad may be provided as a static eliminator on a portion on the open side opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The electrostatic elimination pad can remove noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

Further, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and is provided with various decorative parts. Some of the various decorative parts are not subjected to decorative plating at all, and the front and back sides are provided. Some of the decorative parts are decoratively plated on the entire surface, and among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). The grounding board provided inside the main body (box body) 6004 was electrically connected to the grounding of the island equipment in the game hall via the island equipment grounding wire. Instead of electrically connecting to the ground board, electrically connect to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box body) 6004, and connect the metal door frame reinforcement unit and the power supply board. May be electrically connected. AC 24V is supplied to the power supply board from the island facility in the game hall. This alternating current 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects from an excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly flows current, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) invades, the resistance value instantly drops and current flows, and when the excessive voltage disappears. , It has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and is removed from the slot machine 6000. ..

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010, 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004.

The main control board box 1320 also houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a capable of changing the set value is mounted. That is, since the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, the setting key switch is used. The 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and may be attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, or the main body. It may be attached and fixed to the housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box body) 6004. Further, on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in addition to the setting key switch 1311a, a setting switching button for selecting and switching a set value, and a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) alone. The setting display 1310g composed of the above-mentioned setting change permission lamp 1310z and the like may be mounted.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window, an effect device (not shown), and the like are displayed. It can be seen through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

On these variable rotating bodies, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a game machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols continuously change from the top to the bottom from the above-mentioned display window. It is designed to look like.

The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and a peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, etc., based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

In the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the fusion game machine, the medal insertion port 6008 becomes the ball insertion port 6008', and the main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of game balls as a game medium into the ball insertion port 6008' to operate the start lever 6014. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of the game ball as a game medium to the saucer 6026.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 3000 Back unit 3100 Back rear production unit 3110 Back rear movable decorative body 3111 Decorative body (decorative member, decorative plate body)
3111a First decorative protrusion 3111d Metal decorative part 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 Light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a Main body 3113b Flange (peripheral wall)
3113c 1st LED housing 3113d 2nd LED housing 3113e Reflecting 3114 Back rear decorative substrate (decorative substrate)
3114a First LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Substrate body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decorative body base 3115a Cover plate part 3115b Flange part EL Creeping distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions and controls a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the lottery is a win.
A first light emitting means capable of expressing a predetermined decoration by light emission by a plurality of light emitting bodies capable of emitting light in a group unit, and
The first circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted and
A second light emitting means capable of expressing the result of the lottery by light emission by a plurality of light emitting bodies capable of emitting light individually, and
A second circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted is provided.
A white coating film is formed on the surface mounting surface of the first circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted.
A dark coating film made of green or black is formed on the surface mounting surface of the second circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted.
Further, a partition portion for partitioning the surface mounting surface of the second circuit board is provided so as to correspond to the light emitting region of each of the plurality of light emitting bodies constituting the second light emitting means.
A white specific region portion different from the dark color coating film is partially formed on the surface mounting surface of the second circuit board, and at least a part of the specific region portion is partitioned by the partition portion. Located in the area
A game machine characterized by that.